f

'^"/^

,.u

John Swett

wii

.?'

,^.a;

-^Jry^^^lMy.

%^\^. ^ \U9W
'o-nn

j^i^W/

2^

Digitized by tine Internet Archive

in

2008

with funding from

IVIicrosoft

Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgermaOOwhitrich

WHITNEY'S MODERN LANGUAGE BOOKS.

FRENCH. A FRENCH GRAMMAR. With Exercises
Sentences from French Authors.

and Illustrative i2mo, 442 pp. PRACTICAL FRENCH. Taken from the Author's larger Grammar, and Supplemented by Conversations and Idiomatic Phrases. i2mo, 304 pp.
i6mo, 177 pp.

BRIEF FRENCH GRAMMAR.

GERMAN.

A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN GRAMMAR,

BRIEF

izmo, 303 pp.

GERMAN GRAMMAR. GERMAN READER. i2mo, 523

i6mo, 143 pp.

pp.

GERMAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. 8vo, 900 pages. GERMAN TEXTS Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. Annotated by W. D. WhitLessing's Minna von Barnhelm.
ney, Prof in Yal
College.

Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. of Charleston, S. C.

i6mo, 138 pp. Annotated by Prof. A. Sachtleben, i6mo, 199 pp.

'

Annotate by Wiw. Cook. i6mo, 229 pp. Tauris, Annotated "by Prof Franklin Goethe's Iphigenie a Carter, Williams College. i6mo, 113 pp'.

Goethe's Faust.

Schiller's Maria StuarAnnotated by E. S. Joynes, Prof, in University of South Carolina. i6mo, 222 pp. Lessing's Nathan der Weise. Annotated by H. C. G. Brandt, Prof, in Hamilton College. i6mo, 158 pp.

WHITNEY-KLEMM GERMAN
By William D. Whitney and
L. R.

SERIES.
Klemm.

GERMAN BY PRACTICE. i2mo, 305 ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER.

pp.

i2mo, 237 pp.

HENRY HOLT &

CO., Publishers.

NEW

YORK.

COMPENDIOUS

QEEMAE^
WILLIAM
in

GEAMMAK
BT

D.

WHITNEY
and Instructor
in Yale College

Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology

Modern Languages

SIXTH EDITION, THOKOUGHLY REVISED

AND

WITH NEW EXERCISES

NEW YOKE HENKY HOLT AND COMPANY

F.

W. Christern

Boston: Oabl Schoenhof

COPTBIGHT,

1888,

BY

HENRY HOLT &

CO.

EDUCATION DEPt;

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

(somewhat abbreviated.)

THE author of a new German grammar, in a

community where so many are already in use, and with so much approval, may well feel called upon to explain and defend his undertaking esj)ecially, when his work is comparatively wanting in those practical exercises, for writing and speaking, which make the principal part of the other grammars now most in use. That system of instruction in modern languages of which the Ollendorff grammars are popularly regarded as the type has its unquestionable advantages where learning to speak is the main object directly aimed at, and where the smallness of the classes, and the time spent with the in-

structor, render it possible for the latter to give each pupil

amount of personal attention and drilling which is needed in order to make the system yield its best results. But in our schools and colleges this is for the most part impracticable. Their circumstances and methods of instruction render translation and construction the means by which the most useful knowledge and the best discipline can be gained. To the very great majority of those who learn German, ability to speak is an object inferior in importance to ability to understand accurately and readily and the attainment the language as written or printed of the former is properly to be made posterior to that of One who has mastered the principles of the latter. grammar, and acquired by reading a fair vocabulary and a feeling for the right use of it, will learn to speak and to write rapidly and well when circumstances require of
that
;

him that

ability.

54 584
!

IV

PBETACE.

Moreover, there is a large and increasing class of students whose philological training has to be won chiefly or altogether in the study of the modern languages, instead of the classical and who must win it by methods somewhat akin with those so long and so successfully followed in For the class referred to, German offers classical study.

peculiar advantages, quite superior to those presented by any other modern language. In words, forms, and constructions,
it is

enough unlike English

to call forth

and

exercise all the pupil's powers of discrimination, to sharpen

word and phrase, and to same ^ime, the fundamental relation of German to the most central and intimate part of English makes the study instinct with practical bearings on our own tongue, and equivalent to a historical and comparative study of English itself and, both on the esthetic and on the practical side, there is no other modern literature so rich in attraction and so liberal
his attention to the niceties of

train his j^hilological insight

while, at the

reward to us as the German. appeared to me that, in these aspects of the study, hardly sufficient assistance was furnished the teacher and learner by the grammars hitherto accessible. Three subjects especially have called for more careful exposition the the derivation of German words from one another and the correspondences beconstruction of sentences tween German and English. I have also desired to see in some respects a more acceptable arrangement of the ordinary subject-matter of a grammar one having in view the history of words and forms, although not obtruding
of
It has
: ; ;

the details of that history unnecessarily upon pupils un-

prepared for their study. At the same time, I have endeavored to make a really compendious and simple grammar, according to the promise^ of the title-page, a grammar which might answer the needs even of young scholars, although containing some things which they would not fairly understand and appreciate

PEEFAOE.

until later. That I shall have satisfied others' ideal of a compendious grammar, by including all they may deem essential and omitting the unessential, I do not venture to hope but only trust that I may have come pretty near to meeting the wants of many.
;

careful distinction of the contents of the

book by

variety of type, according to their degree of immediate importance, has been attempted throughout. Especially,

I have meant to put in the largest type (sm. pica) just about so much as the scholar ought to learn carefully and thoroughly in his first course of grammar-lessons, preparatory to reading. This a class should acquire, according to the age and capacity and previous training of its

and members, in from twelve to twenty-five lessons should then at once be put into reading, while the grammar is taken up again, and such part of what was before omitted is learned as the judgment of the intelligent
;

teacher shall direct. After enough reading has been done to give some familiarity with forms and constructions, I would have the writing of exercises begun and I feel confident that a better result in reading and writing together will be won
;

by any other method. I have myself been accustomed to prepare exercises for my classes, for turning into German, from whatever text the class were reading; taking a sentence or paragraph, and putting its phrases into a different shape from that presented in the text, so that the student shall have his main vocabulary before him on the page, instead of having to hunt for proper expressions in the dictionary, with knowledge inThis method I would recommend sufficient for the task.
thus, in a given time, than
to others.

Some of the subjects treated in the grammar (especially word-derivation, and the relation of English and German)
need support from the lexicon. Considering the general deficiency of information on these subjects in the access-


VI
ible dictionaries, I

PREFACE.

am endeavoring to give the beginner he can make his analyses and comparisons for himself, in the Vocabulary to a German Eeader, which is published as a companion-book to the present one. From its pages have been drawn a large part of the examples
help
till

given in the Grammar. Of course, I have consulted, and more or less used, a good many grammars while engaged in the preparation of this one, deriving more or less of valuable information or suggestion from each and all of them. But I do not feel that I need to make special acknowledgments save to one the work of Heyse (in its two editions, the Schul- Grammatik and the AusflZhrliches Lehrhuch). To it my obligations have been more constant and various than I can well point out in detail ; hence this general confession of indebtedness. Those familiar with Heyse will have no difficulty in tracing its influence in many parts (for examjDle, in the classification of verbs of the Old conjugation, which I have taken almost without modification from that authority); while they will also find that I have nowhere followed it
slavishly.

everywhere been my intention so to set forth the language as to favor the recognition of language as a growth, as something which has been gradually converted into what it is, from a very different condition, by those who have used it a recognition which is the first need, if one would really understand language, and which must lead the way to those deepen studies into the history of languages and of language, constituting so important a branch of modern science. The study of German is so rapidly increasing in prevalence that there is pressing need of raising it to a somewhat higher plane. I trust it will be found that this
It has

facts

of the

volume contributes sirable an end.

its part,

though a small one,

Aug. 1869.

to so de-

W. D. W

Yale College,

New Ha\en,

PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION.

TN the revision of this work no fundamental changes have
been made in its plan or structure. Even the paragraphing has been kept unchanged throughout, so as not to interfere with the pertinence of the references exten-*-

sively

made

to

it

in text-books heretofore published.

But

many

additions and improvements have been introduced partly the result of the author's own experience in the use
of the work, partly

due to the suggestions of other users

among whom

are to be specially mentioned, with thanks.

Prof. A. S. Wheeler of the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale College, and Prof. O. Seidensticker of Philadelphia. The so-called New Orthography of German words has also been described, and everywhere introduced, in brackets, beside the old spelling it has not yet been so widely adopted in German literature that its acceptance in place of the old seemed advisable. And, especially, an entire new set of Exercises has been prepared, including illustrations of the intricacies of German usage by extracts from the best German authors as to their use, see the Note
:

below.

To obviate objections made from some quarters to the use of the smaller type of the first edition, something of the former elaborate classification of the matter of the volume by three sizes of the type, etc., has been abandoned, and only two sizes, of superior legibility, are now employed. Grateful for the favor with which the work has been received during nearly twenty years, the author hopes that in its somewhat changed form it will continue to merit the approval of teachers and students.
Yale College,
I

New

Haven,

May

1888.

am

indebted to friends, especially to Mr. Herrmann

Cal., for

Knapp, of San Jose,

year's impression.

sundry corrections in

this

January, 1893.
vii

NOTE ON THE EXERCISES.

The exercises (pp. 285 395) are intended to be used in connection with the first study of the grammar but it has seemed best to put them together, instead of scattering thetu through the body of the text. They are divided into two series. The first series consists of simple exercises for translating from German into English and vice-versa. These follow in the main the arrangement of the grammar, though in some places this order is abandoned as, by introducing a lesson on prepositions quite early in the series, and by taking up the subject of sentence-construction before going on to the subjunctive and infinitive, the use of which necessitates more involved sentences than the pupil is prepared for. Each exercise is accompanied by a vocabulary of the words used for the first time in it, the object being to familiarize the pupil gradually with a good number of the most- used German words, and thus to give him a vocabulary which he will find useful in There are also general vocabularies all reading or speaking. at the end, including all the words used in both series of
;

exercises.

The second series of exercises consists of sentences selected from the writings of well-known German authors, illustrative
of the usages of the language, including also those more special idiomatic points not taken up in the first series. Accompanying these are short English themes for translation into German, in which are used as far as possible the same words or the same constructions which are to be found in the illustrative sentences. With the help of the English vocabulary, the pupil will be able without too much difficulty to render these into German, In making use of these exercises each teacher will of course be guided by his own judgment and the necessities and capabilities of his class. If the exercises are too long, they can be divided. If too short, or not full enough, it will be easy, still using the same words or constructions, to add an indefinite number of sentences to each exercise. If the object is to get the class to the point of reading German as soon as possible, it will be best merely to read through the German exercises of the first series, leaving the English ones to be taken up and written after some reading has been done. In the same way, the reading through of the illustrative sentences, and the

PREFACE.

ix

writing of the English themes accompanying them, will serve as a review of the grammar or a valuable auxiliary to reading. After studying carefully the illustrative sentences, the student will meet with little in any German reading which can cause him grammatical dilSculty and the working through of the English themes should be sufficient preparation for rendering into German, or writing in German, in a freer and more general way. All the exercises are annotated with references to the grammar in cases of special difficulty. The illustrative sentences are classified by the paragraph of the grammar which they illustrate, the number of the paragraph being given in brackets. Each sentence is followed by the name of its author in parenthesis. For those authors most frequently met with are used the following abbreviations:

grei.

Freitag.

^lop.

Klopstock.
Lessing.
Richter.
Riickert.
Schiller.

Goethe.
A.

M*
SRutf.

sr.r.

Grimm,

a^.9?. Jean Paul

^.r.

a@r.
>ei.

Herman Grimm. Jakob Grimm,

Heine.

m
piet @pr.

Spielhagen.

^e^.

Heyse.

$umb.

Humboldt.

Spruch (proverb). Uhland.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
^^The
Alphabet, 1-4.
references are to paragraphs.

Use

of capitals, 4.
5.

New

Orthography,

Pronunciation, 6-55. Vowels, 7-22 consonants, 23-53

;

foreign words, 54 ; ac-

cent, 55.

Parts of Speech, 56.

Declension, 57-62. Rules for gender of nouns, 61.
Articles, 63-67. Use of articles, 66.

Nouns, 68-113. General rules of declension, 68-73; First or strong declension, 74-90; first class, 75-80; second class, 81-86; third class, 87-90; Second or weak declension, 91-95; irregular declension, 96-100; nouns of foreign origin, 101; proper names, 102-108; modifying adjuncts of the noun, 109-112 equivalents of the noun, 113.
;

Adjectives,

114-148.

declined, 114-118; first and second declensions, 119-128; mixed declension, 124.2; adjective used as substantive, 129 as adverb, 130 participles as adjectives, 131 ;
; ;

When

comparison of adjectives, 133-142 comparison withadverbp 141 modifying adjuncts of the adjective, 143-148.
;

; ; ;

CONTENrS.

XI

Pbonouns, 14.9-195. Personal pronouns, 151-156; possessive pronominal adjectives, 157-162 demonstratives, 163-166 determinatives, 167-171 interrogatives, 172-176 relatives, 177-183 indefinite pronouns and indefinite numerals, 184-195.
;

NuMERAi^, 196-208. multipUcatives, ordinals, 203 Cardinals, 197-202 202-206 derivatives from ordinals, 207-208.
;

etc.,

Uses of the Forms of Declension, 209-230. Numbers, 210-211; cases:nominative, 212-214; genitive, 215-220 dative, 221-225 accusative, 226-230.
;

Conjugation, 231.

Verbs, 232-319.

compound forms, 238-240

;

simple forms of the verb, 235-237 ; use of l)abzn or jetn as auxiliary New or weak conjugations, 245-246 of tense, 241-244 conjugation, 247-250 modal auxiliaries, 251-260 Old or passive verbs, 274r-282 strong conjugation, 261-273 impersonal verbs, 291-295 comreflexive verbs, 283-290 pound verbs, 296 separable, 297-301 inseparable, 302-307 separable or inseparable, 308-311 other compound verbs, 312-313 verbal adjuncts, 314-319.
Classification,

233

Uses of the Forms of Conjugation, 320-359. Person and number, 320-322 mode and tense: indicative, 323-328; subjunctive, 329-333; conditional, 334-336; imperative, 337-338 infinitive, 339-348 participles, 349-359.
;

Indeclinables, 360.

Adverbs, 361-370.
Classification,

362
;

origin,

363-367

comparison, 368

special uses, 369

place, 370.

Prepositions, 371-381.

Cases governed by them, 372-376.

Conjunctions, 382-386.
Classification, 383.

Interjections, 387-392.

XU

CONTENTS.

WOKD-FORMATION, DERIVATION, 393-417. Introductory explanations, 393-402 derivation of verbs, 403-406 of nouns, 407-412 of adjectives, 413-416 of the
; ;

other parts of speech, 417.

WOED-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION, 418-425. Introductory explanations, 418-419 composition of verbs, 420; of nouns, 421-422 of adjectives, 423-424; of particles,
;

425.

Construction of Sentences, 426-446. Introductory explanations, 426-429 regular order of the sentence, 430: inverted order, ^^ l interrogative and optative sentences, 432 conditional clauses, 433^ transposed order, 434 dependent clauses, 435-439 substantive dependent clause, 436 adjective dependent clause, 437 adverbial dependent clause, 438 summary of the rules of arrangement, 440-444 concluding remarks, 445-446.
;
;

Belation of German to English, 447-461. Introductory explanations, 447-452 the law of progression of mutes, 453-457 correspondences, 458-60.
;
;

Brief History of the German Language, 462-469. Three periods of history of High-German, 463 Old HighGerman period, 464 Middle High-German period, 465 New High-German period, 467 ; what the present German is, 468 remarks, 469.
;
;

German Written Character,

pp. 275.

List of Irregular Verbs, pp. 278-284.

Exercises, First Series, pp. 285-334.

"

Second Series, pp. 335-395.

German-English Vocabulary, pp. 397-444.

English-German Vocabulary, pp. 445-461.
Index, pp. 463-472.

GERMAN GRAMMAR.
ALPHABET.
1. The German language is usually printed in an alphabet having the same origin as our own, and the same extent ; but in the form of its characters nearly resembling what we call "Old English," or "Black-

letter."
This is one of the derivative forms of the old Latin alphabet, a product of the perverse ingenuity of monkish scribes in the Middle Ages. It was in general use throughout Europe at the time of the invention of printing, but was abandoned by one nation after another
for the simpler,

and more legible character which we call Germans know as "Latin" (lateinisch). For scientific hterature, the latter is in more common use among the Germans themselves, and many of the best German scholars are in favor of
neater,

"Roman," and which

the

the entire relinquishment of the other.

2.

The

letters of the ordinary

German

alphabet, with

their

"Koman"
Roman
equiv'ts.

equivalents,
German
names.
a,

and the names by which

German
letters.

the

Germans
a

call

them, are as follows

Boman
equiv'ts.

German
letters.

German
names.

%
S,
e,.

(ah)
{bay)

,9
>,^ 5, i

33,6
c

b
c

ba
tsa

h
i J

U
ka
el

ga

e{ee)

,b
e f

d
e
f

da
a
ef

3,i
,
?,
!
I

yot

k
1

^,

'

cc.

ALPHABET.

.
*

[4-

* *

'

kSfeiroali

itoriiah**
equiv'ts.

letters.

'German names.

German
letters.

Roman
equiv'ts

German
names.

m,m

%n 0,0 %P
0,q
di,x

m
n
P q
r s

em
en

X,t
n, u

ta

U
V

(oo)

,
pa

2B,tt)
(koo)

w
X

fou (found) va
ix

ku
er
es

X,

3?

?)-9

y
z

ipsilon
tset

,f,
1.

3'i

for the

There is a special written alphabet, as well as a printed, German. The forms of its letters, and specimens of written texts, will be given at the end of this work. The beginner had better not concern himself with it, as he can make practical use of it to advantage only when he has already gained
considerable famiharity with the language.
written or printed in the " Latin " charis represented by its Latin equivalent, with the single exception that for the compound ^, sz, is usually
,

2.

When German

is

acter,

each German letter

and preferably substituted

ss (or fs

see 49).

3. Certain points concerning this alphabet require special notice on the part of the learner
1.

Of the two forms of small

s,

at the end of a
thus, Ia
If
;

word the
;

other, or long

the second, or short , is used |, in other situations

but

lejen, fo.

f~

a word ending in is followed by another in composition, thus, loycje^en, In^'^er, bc^al6, it is still written with short Short is also used before an baSfelbe, ^onnerStaG, Sicbe^Iirief. ending of derivation beginning with a consonant thus, 33itf)um
:
:

[^^ihim], 2Bei!)cit, BDel)aft, ^a5d]t\\, Utoeleui, loybar; further, in

foreign words before other consonants than

or

|)

thus, 5[Rafe

33o!et or 35Dquet, ^icour, ^igcipUn, ^atriotigmug.

2. Some of the letters are modified in form by combination with one another: thus, c^, ch; cf, ck; , sz; ^, tz.

3. Some letters resemble one another so much as to be easily confounded by the beginner
:

and 35, v; g, c, and , e; (S, g, and @, s; ^, fc, 9?, n, and ^, r; %, d, ), o, and Q, q;- also, b, h, b, d, and ]^, h; and f, s; !, k, and t, t; r, r, and r, oc. f,/,
Thus,
33, h,

4.

The German uses

capital initial letters

4]
1.

NEW ORTHOGRAPHY.'
As the English,

'3'
',
'

,',3

'

at the beginning 6i senli^nces; 'of

^'''^

and of direct quotations. ^ For all nouns, common as well as proper, and for words used as nouns. Words used as nouns are especially adjectives (129) and ^
lines in poetry,
2.

infinitives (340).

As no

fixed line divides their ordinary

is conflicting.

from

their substantive use, there are doubtful cases in each class,

with regard to which usage

But nouns and noun-forms used as other parts of speech adverbs, prepositions, prefixes, etc. do not take capitals thus,

ftatt,

fang, f(uG, lelb tt)un.

3.

For pronouns

of the third person,

when used

in

address, with the value of those of the second person

(153).

That is, especially, ie, with its oblique cases, and its corresponding possessive 3^r; but not its reflexive, ]t(f). 4. Pronouns of the second person properly take capitals only when intended to come under the eye of the person addressed (as in letters, etc.) but they are sometimes written with capitals
;

;<

also in other cases.

Kespecting the indefinite pronouns ^e'^^^^^^^^^ every one, one, Dliemanb no one, etc., and the pronominal adjectives used substantively, such as afle everything, matK^er many a one, einige some, usage is very various. Some write ein with a capital when it is emphatic, or means one.
5.

Semonb any

6.

For

adjectives derived from

;

places, usually
englijd)

names of persons or but not for adjectives of nationality, as

/^

English, fran^ofifd) French,

7. Adjectives of title, or those used in respectful and complimentary address, also usually take capital initials thus, @ure
:

^oniglic^e C>ol&eit

your royal highness, ic, SBoWfleborener ^txx

or ber ^ro^e.

you, excellent

sir, griebrid) ber .3tt)eite

NEW

ORTHOG-RAPHY.

1. 5. German scholars have, for some time past, been attempting to improve the spelling of the language in the direction of simplicity and consistency, especially as regards the use of double vowels, of double consonants, of 1^ as the sign of a long vowel, etc. Some of these changes have recently been officially authorized, and are gradually coming into more or less

A.

4:\

PrvONUNClATION.

[6-

general use, while others are liable to be met with in the works
of certain authors.
2. In this grammar the old and stiU prevailingly used orthography will be employed; but the authorized changes will be given under the head of Pronunciation after the various letters, and the new spelUng of each word wiQ be added after it in brackets wherever it occurs.

PRONUNCIATION.
6. The precise mode of production of German articulated sounds, taken singly or in combination, as well as the general tone and style of utterance, can only be acquired through means The following rules, of oral instruction, and by long practice. however, will help the learner, with or without a teacher, to approximate to the true pronunciation of German words. The subject is a comparatively easy one to deal with, because

^
i-

1.

There are no

silent letters, either vowels or con-

sonants.
Excepting sometimes ^
2.
(28).

a rule, the same letter receives the same sound under all circumstances.
Exceptions,
3.
5, c, b, g,
f,
t)

As

see those letters, below.

like

The German, however,

many

other languages,
or with

writes certain simple sounds, vowel or consonant, with

combinations of two and of digraphs and trigraphs.

VOWELS.

three letters,

7. Each simple vowel sound is either long or short, varying in quantity, or time of utterance, without at the same time varying, like our English vowels, to anynotable extent, in quality, or nature of sound.

The

distinction of long

and short vowels must

;

extent be learned by experience found of service

to a great but the following rules will be

4-

1.
2.

A vowel doubled, or followed by ^, is long. A vowel is short before a double consonant,

usually before a group of two consonants
-

and

"^"^aorfiL

unless

10]
tlie latter

VOWELS.
of the pair or group belongs to an
suffix.

appended

ending or
8.

%,

tt.

^t

has always the sound of our open or

,<;

Italian a, in far, father.

It is long in %a\, ^aax, 33a^n, naft, 5^amen. It is short in 33afl, 5Rann, ^atte, ^anh, fcf)arf, !ann, Balb.

Particularly avoid the flattening of this vowel, or its reduction to a

1.

sound at all resembling that of our "short a" in hat, can, in spelling between aa and a; of those more usually having aa the New Orthography prescribes a in

Some words vary

gjia^
fd^ar),

measure, c^af sheep, (^ar troop (and =]d)ar in $flug* tar starling, SBage scales, 2Bare w;are, Bar in cash
cas/i).

(Sarf(^aft

(S is pronounced nearly as our e in they, or 9. @, e. our "long a" in/a^e, only without the distinct vanishingsound of ee into which our a passes at its close. Short " in met, men. e is nearly our " short e

It is long in eer, meftr, 'Sttij, It is short in benn, fc^nell, nett, err, 2Belt.

In long syllables and by some authorities also in short ones is distinguished a closer and an opener utterance of the e, the latter inclining very slightly toward our " short a " (in hat, can). The difference is analogous to that between the French e and e. Thus, e is said to be close in me'^r, Ute!^, jeber (first syllable), and open in (the first syllables of) Seben, geben, beten. No rules are to be given respecting the occurrence of this distinction nor is it much to be insisted on. Unlike the other vowels, e is notably slighted and obscured in sound when unaccented. Especially before a liquid (n, I, r), in a syllable following the accent, it acquires nearly the tone of our " short It " (in but), and becomes very inconspicuous. Guard against giving to final e the sound of English e; it should have a very open utterance, and in parts of Germany even becomes like our "short u" (in but, puff).
;

-f-

1.

The New Orthography

writes erbe herd, instead of eerbe.

10. 3f t. 3 has the sound of our i inpiqice, machine, or of our " long e," or double ee. When short, it is more like our " short i " (in pin), yet somewhat less removed than that is from our " long e."


6
PRONUNCIATION.
It is long in t^n, t^r, Sgel, bir, Wint. It is short in biflig, bitten, ^jinter, ift, ^rift.

; :

[10^

3 is never written double, and it is followed by ^ only in the personal pronouns i^n, t^m, i^r, i^rer, i^nen, and the possessives To indicate its long sound an e is generally i^r and i^rig. added, making the digraph, or compound vowel, ie (18).
11. C, 0. D has always the tone of our "longo/' except the distinct vanishing-sound of u (po) with which the latter ends.
It is long in 5!Jloor, 33ol^ne, ^otp (Bebot, ^ober. It is short in ']oU, (SJott, often, molh, ^opf. this is

Never give to o the quahty of our "short o" in Iwt, on, etc.; no proper o-sound, but pretty nearly the German short a. The New Orthography writes So lot (and lofen and 1.
12.

Sofung).

VL

U, tl. Vi long is our u in ruhf or oo in hoot short is nearly our u in pvM, or oo in book, but less
u.

removed from long

It is long in UI)r, nun, gut, ru^en. It is short in q^ruft, tunbe, !RuII.

is

never doubled.

especially careful not to give to u, under any circumstances, the pronunciation of English u in union, mute, cure ; to

Be

do so

is

to put a

y before

it.

^ is found only in foreign words (except, 13. ^, ^. according to the usage of some, in the digraphs al), et) see below, 19.3), and is ordinarily pronounced as an t in the same situation. Examples ^rup, %\\)\, \X)X\]^, 9J^t)rte. Some require that in words from the Greek, of more learned and less popular use, it should have the sound of ii (17):

MODIFIED V0WEI.S.
14.
1.

The modified vowels

e

are, historically,

prod-

ucts of the mixture of an

or t-sound with a, o, u, or of the phonetic assimilation of the latter to the former in a succeeding syllable. They were written %q, Dc, Uc,
ae, oe, ue,

and are

still

often so written

when

the vowel

17]

MODIFIED VOWELS.
;

modified is a capital but when small letters were used, the e came to be first written above the other

vowel thus, a, Of it and then, for convenience, was reduced in common use to a couple of dots as d, b, it.

and hence, a noun containing in 2. They are never doubled the singular a double vowel, if requiring modification in the plural, loses one vowel thus, (gaal forms die, %a^ forms S]er.
; :

15.

say, of
it is

%, S. S has the sound of an open c that is to an e very slightly approaching our *' short a"; everywhere hardly distinguishable from an e in

the same situation.

It is long in |?(dger, prdgen, Sfer, Spacer, ^[fldftre. It is short in dnbe, Spfel, ftdttc, ^drfer, fdflen.
in their spelhng between d and e. the New Orthography prefers d in ebdrbe gesture; and in those oftenest written with d it prefers For the intere in uBerfd)tt)cnQUd) exuberant, and tnelfd) Welsh. change of du and eu see below, 21.3.
1.

A number

of

words vary
e

Of those often spelt with

produced by a combination which e (e in they) is uttered, and of that position of the lips in which o is uttered but it is not easily given by a conscious effort so to dispose the organs. It is nearest in tone to our u in hurt, but is notably different from this, verging considerably toward the e of they. It is closely akin with the French e^^-sounds.
16.

O,

5.

is really

of that position of the tongue in

It is long in Ofen, mo^^en, fc^on, ftoren, 6l. It is short in fonnte, bffnen, C)o(Ic, potter, Orter.

To form o, therefore, endeavor to between the vowels of hurt and hate.

C,

hit

an intermediate sound

The German poets frequently make o rime with the simple and in parts of Germany the two are hardly distinguished. But their real difference, as properly pronounced, is quite marked, and should never be neglected.
17. U is produced by a combination of that tl, tt. position of the tongue in which i (^ in piqiie, pin) is uttered, and of that position of the lips in which u {u in


8
rule^ pull) is uttered.

PEONUNCIATION.
It is tlie
it,

[17-

French

same sound with, the round the lips to the U-position, and then, without moving them, fix the
u.

To
i

utter

first

tongue to say

(ee)

or

vice versa.

It is long in libel, 8d)ulcr, miibe, tntju, tix% iibcr. It is short in ^IM, Tlixikx, Uppigfeit, fiiEcn, iittc, biinn.

The sounds of o and ii are, among the German vowels, much the hardest to acquire, and cannot be mastered without assiduous practice under a teacher.

DIPHTHONGS AND VOCAL DIGRAPHS.

For t, D, 11, see Modified Vowels, above (14-17). 3c, as already noticed (10), is an t made long by the addition of an e, instead of by doubling, or the addition
18.

of

^.
te

Historically,

often represents an original combination of

separate vowels.

Examples bie, lief, liegen, grieben, 3fliemen. At the end of a few words (mostly coming from the Latin, and always accented on the preceding syllable), the e of ie has its own proper sound, and the i is pronounced like y before it, or else forms an independent syllable: thus, Sinien, (^lorie, also ^nie (plural of ^nie, and better spelt gamilie, Sragobte
:

^niee).
1.

II. 4)

The New Orthography writes te instead hke marfd^ieren, ftubieren, ^antieren.

of

in verbs (404,

1. ?li. %i is a combination of letters represent19. ing a true diphthongal sound, which is composed of the two elements a (a in far) and i {{ in pique). It is pronounced nearly as the English aye (meaning * yes '), or like the "long *" oi aisle, ish, but with the first con-

sound made very slightly opener and more conspicuous, a little dwelt on. It occurs in very
stituent of that

few words.
Examples: ain,
2.

SSaife,

5!}^ai.

represents the same sound, and is of very much more frequent occurrence, being the ordinary German equivalent of our "long *."
@i.
(Si

24]

DIPHTHONGS.
:

Examples ^ein, 33eil, @imer, fei, (Si, itelfeit. 3. ^^ and et) were formerly written in certain words instead of ai and ei they are now gone nearly out of use, only a few
:

authors retaining them.

Examples

Tlat), fetjn,

fel),

^oliset).

combines the two sounds of a (in far) 20. ?(lt. and u (in rule), and is pronounced almost precisely like the English ou, ow, in house, down, but with the first element, the a-sound, a shade more distinct.
5(u

Examples: au,
21.
1.

faufen, luge,

au, braun, Waul.

like the English oi, having the first ele-

tt.

^u

is

most nearly

oy, in hoil, loy, differing chiefly in

ment
final

briefer

and

less conspicuous.

Theoretically, its

element is the ii-sound. Examples i^eutc, ncu, uter, greunbe,

:

euer.

2.

9(u,

ttU.

Su
ait,

is

the

sponding to

as d to
eu.

a.

modified diphthong correIt is pronounced in the

same manner as

Examples: SuQier, Oaute, Braunen, ^rciume. 3. There are a number of words which vary in their spelling between eu and du. Of those oftenest spelt with du the New Orthography prefers eu in bleueu maul, beud)ten seem, (SJreuel
horror, greulid) horrible, leugnen deny, f(f)neu5en snuff.

22.

Hi.

Ui

33

is

found only in

:^ui,

pfut,

and

is

pro-

nounced

like we.

CONSONANTS.
23.

S,

b.

followed in the same syllable (r, I), or when doubled.

has the same sound as in English, when by a vowel or a semivowel

^bbe.

Examples

33iber, 33uBe, 1)dbtn, ober, 33Iet, breci^en,

In other situations i.e., when final, or followed by a consonant in general it loses its sonant character, and is converted into the corresponding surd, p. Examples: tab, (je^oBt, ob, f^ub, C)cibbura'.
24.

6,

e.-^(, in

words properly German,

is

found

10

PEONUNCIATION.
(^,

[24-

only in the combinations

43, 44, 48.

d, fd), for

which see below,

In words borrowed from other languages and not Germanized in spelling, it is, as in English, hard before
a, 0, u,

it is

in the former case, I, n, r, but soft before c, i, pronounced as k, in the latter, as ts (German ^: 42).
t)
:
:

Ocean. regard to which usage is still unsettled, either ! or c being written for the hard sound, and either 3 or c for the soft sound thus, farcer or ^arjer, (Concert or ^onjert.
^ato,
(^^arcer, (Concert,

Examples
1.

Sicero, CUaubiu^,
in

There are many foreign words

25.* 2), b. ^, like h, has its own proper sonant sound, that of English d, before a vowel, or any consonant that may intervene between it and a vowel in the same syllable also when doubled. Examples ^amm, bid, ^orf, bu, ^bel, brei, ^voaU, ^robbel.
;
:

At the end of a word, or of a syllable before another consonant, it is changed to the corresponding surd, t. Examples 2kh, ^iahi, milb, ^Ibenb, lanblid).
:

bt is the equivalent of a double t, the b not being separately pronounced thus, gefanbt, berebt, Idbt, and in a few words the spelling wavers between bt and t. f anbte The New Orthography writes tot dead, instead of the usual also Qcfcl)eit clever, instead of tobt (hence also toten, etc.)
1.
:

The combination
;

gefdjeibt.

26.

|5,

English.
27.

@,

g.

5 ^^s always the same sound as in @, the other sonant mutes, and
like
h
b,

English g in go, give, get) when doubled, or when followed in the same syllable by a vowel or a liquid ((, it, r). It is never softened before e or t as it also is not in any English word of

has

its

proper hard sound

(as

Germanic
Examples

origin.
:

(S5an, Qcgen, (^ier, gut, grog,

^la, (^nabe, ^ogge.

t,

In the same situations in which h and b become p and it does not, however, g is also changed to a surd assume the* value of !, but rather that of cI) (43).
;


34]

CONSONANTS.

11

Examples: %aQ, aoQ, 3w9/ ^ogt, ^J^afib, ru^ig, laglic^. There is much difference of usage among Germans, and of
opinion
g.

among German

orthoepists, as to the pronunciation of

it

the hard sound when initial. soften it to d) e. g., in ^^Qsn, Siege. Others do not allow it anywhere the precise c^-sound, especially not after the hard vowels (a, 0, u), but pronounce it nearly as f, or as something between a g and f, or between a f and (f) and so on.
All,

indeed, agree to give

But

in other situations,

some always

In many words taken from the French, g has its French sound, like that of the English s in vision, or z in azure: thus, (^enie, ^age, Sngenieur, Orange, genieren.
28. , 1^. has the sound of English h when it begins a word (or either of the suffixes {)eit, I)aft). Elsewhere it is silent, serving either to lengthen the preceding vowel, or to make a hiatus between two vowels. For tf), which is pronounced as simple t, see below (37.2). For (^ and jd), see below (43, 48). Examples: I)in, fter, ^at, of, ^ni, ^ol^er, l!inbI)cit,J)al)l^aft,frDft, raf(^, ^u^, rul)en, %^r\, (^I)re, cl)cr, i()m, O^r, tl)un, ^t!)er.

29.

Sf

^s

always pronounced like our y conSo^ann,

bejaften.

sonant.

Examples:
30.

3a!^r, jung, ieber,

has always the sound of English h Instead of double f is written c! (which, however, if separated in syllabication, becomes t4). Examples faun, fennen, f^eib, reibe, ^nie, ^nabe, ^lode, bruf=

B,

f,

fen (but brurfcn).

These letters have the same 31. 8, I ; SK, tit. sounds as their English correspondents.
32.
lish n.
91,
II.

Like the

latter, it

has usually the same "Sound as Enghas before f the value of ng

below
(45).

thus, finfen,

^ant
ng, see

For the digraph

33.
$JJ,
Ji.

the digraph
34.
l,

pi),

pronounced as in English. see below (46.2).

is

For

r|.

O, as in English,

is

always followed by


12
XI,

PEONUNCIATION.

[34-

and qu is pronounced as hv, but with the pure labial utterance of the -y-sound, as explained below (under
ttj,

39).
:

Examples
35.
91,

Oual,
t.

quer, Ouirl, quoH.

has a decidedly more distinct and

forcible utterance than in English, being

more or

less

rolled or trilled,

and hence formed a

r.

little

further forit

ward in the mouth than our must be clearly heard.

Examples
36.
:

In every situation,

9ianb, reben,

flitter, Sfloftr,

runb, ^cr, crr, ^Irbetter,

gii^rer, t)ermer!en,

marmorner, eriernbarer.

. , after a manner analogous with b, f, proper surd or hissing sound only its has g, when doubled, final, or standing before a consonant; before a vowel (not before a semivowel nor when preceded by a surd consonant, as t, cf), or a liquid, I, m, n, r) it approaches a sonant, or buzzing sound, that of our z, and in the usage of some localities, or of some classes, it is a full s; according, however, to the better supported pronunciation, it is a compromise between s and 2, a kind of sz. Before t and p at the beginning

@,

b,

and

of a word,

usually and regularly pronounced it is as sh (rather less broadly and conspicuously than our common sh); but the pronunciation as written has also

good usage (especially in Northern Germany) in

favor.

its

Double

>

(f^,

ff)

is

always surd or hissing; for

see 49. Examples:

(S5Ia, ^(x\i, S3of)eit, tt)tj]en,

fteif,

Sootfe, emftG, alfo, o:^n,

eele, 33efcn, (S^efang,

trang, pur, fpringen.

37. %, t. %, in words properly German, has always the ordinary sound of English t Examples: %o.\t\, Saube, %zii, treten, Xritt, ^inte.

In the terminations of certain words from the Latin or French, t is pronounced as ^ (i. e., as English
1.
ts)

before

ia, te, io

thus, martialifd^, patient, Station.

39]
2.

CONSONANTS.
Xf) is

13
t,

pronounced always as simple

its

I)

having,

in real

German words, no
:

historical ground,

but only a

phonetic value, as indicating the long quantity of the neighboring vowel thus, ^f)a(, Zi)at, Zi)on, t^un, Xt)ure,
X^rcine.
of tft at the beginning of cases in which the following vowel is otherwise animal, %d\ part (with Urteil, shown to be long: thus, dear, tor, etc.), %an dew, t)erteibiGen defend; kmx ^eer SSorteil, thus, also in %^vixm tower, and in the suffix =tum (for ^f^uin)
3.

The New Orthography omits the

all

"f)

a word in

%m

9tei^tum wealth. But the f) is retained in xi)ee tea. It writes radical t instead of t^ everywhere at the end of a word (or of a thus, glut flood, 9Jlut spirit, syllable before a suffix or ending) 5^ot need, ^at council, rot red, mert dear, Sddtjel riddh, ^tem
:

breath,

5!Jliete

hire,

^ute rod
Ij

instead of giut^,
of t^ in all cases.

etc.

Some
For
38,

writers omit the

^,

see below
B,

hardly found except at the beginning of a word, and there has the sound of English /. In the case or two where it occurs in the interior of words before a vowel, it is pronounced as our v; as also, in words taken from foreign languages which give it the latter sound.
H.
'^ is

(61).

Examples:

35atcr,

ml,

SSerfaH,

t)or,

t)oIIig,

SSolf,

freDeIn,

S!Iat)e, 55acan3, SSenebig,

t)ioIett,

^ult)er.

39. in the

SB, Ul. 3S, when not preceded by a consonant same syllable, is commonly and correctly pronounced precisely as the English v, or between the edges of the upper teeth and lower lip. Another mode of its utterance, which is also supported by good authority, excludes the action of the teeth, and produces the sound between the edges of the lips alone. As thus made, it is still distinctly a v (not a w), though one of a different quality from our v : the difference,

however,

is not conspicuous to an unpractised ear. All authorities agree in requiring this purely labial pro-

nunciation after a consonant (which consonant

is

nearly


14
PBONUNCIATION.
:

[34-

always a sibilant, fc^ or j) and the same belongs, as above noticed (34), to the u of the combination qu.
Examples:
40.
2Belle, 2Baf)n,

2But^, mliQn, {corner,

aiDei,

%mtU

number

3 is found in only an exceedingly small X, J. of words originally German. It has the sound

of English

x
^.
3.

(ks),

whether as

initial or elsewhere.
3Ei)roGra|)l)tc.

Examples:
41. 42.

Igt, C)ee, %tii, ^mopljon, 3Eenien,

^,
2,

^ in German a vowel only 3 always pronounced as

is
is
[3

(13).

ts,

except in

the combination

(see below, 49)

its

two constituents

should be sharply and distinctly uttered. Instead of double J is written t^ (51). Examples ^inn, SoH, ju, gerjiel^en, gagen, ^eijen, ^rinj, ol3,
:

^ers, $Iafe,

stDei.

CONSONANTAL DIGEAPHS AND TETGKAPHS.

The compound d) has two sounds: deeper or more guttural, nearly our throatclearing or hawking sound, and is heard after a, 0, u, an the other, after any other vowel or a consonant, is more palatal, made over the middle of the tongue, and approaches the sA-sound, or is nearly as we should pronounce Jiy in hyen.
43.
g]|, dj.

one

is

(^^, in all situations, is a rough breathing, an h, rasped out with conspicuous force through as nearly as possible the same position of the organs in which the preceding vowel was uttered. According, then, as the vowel is one produced in the throat

namely, a, 0, U or one which comes forth between the flat of the tongue and the palate namely, c, i, t), d, b, ix or as it is a diphthong whose final constituent is of each class respectively -namely, an on the one hand a\, ei, Ciu, cu on the other the following d) has a different pronunciation, guttural or palatal.

As above noticed
ha.s

has the softer or palatal sound. not followed by a vowel etc. (27), the sound which d) would have in the same situa(If)

after a consonant

c\

tion.

46]

CONSONANTS.
:

15
an^, Tla6)tx, %^t\xm,
ni(^t, ftd^er, 33ud)er,

Examples

guttural

c^

35a(^, ho6), 33u(^,

palatal c^:

^ec^,

rc(i)t,

i(^,

a^kn,
(f)er,

Sdc^er, Soccer,

rei(^, euc^, feud)!, bduc^te, burc^, i)old^,

man*

2Bea, ric^tig, 9)^dgbe, beugte, Suglein, Stt'erg.

fault particularly to be avoided in practising the d) -sound the closure of the organs, forming a mute consonant, a kind of k or g. If such a mispronunciation is once acquired, it cannot be unlearned without great trouble. Much better utter a mere breathing, an h, at first, depending upon further practice to enable one by degrees to roughen it to the desired point of
is

The

distinctness.
2. (^ before , when the > belongs to the stem of the word, and not to an added suffix or inflectional ending, loses its peculiar sound, and is uttered as Jc (i.e.,

d)g as x).

Examples:
3.

2Ba(^, Od}fe, 5u(^, 33ud)fe, ei(^fel,

d)

tt)cc^feln.

In words taken from the Greek,

e
:

or palatal d)-sound before

or

i,

has usually the softer as (S;i)irurg, $cted)ien but else;

where it is pronounced as f thus, (XI)aractcr, (^I)or, S^lor, (Sftrift. In words from the French, it has the French c/i-sound, or that
of

German

fd)

(our sh): thus, 9ied)erc^e, d)armant,

(Sl)auf]ee.

Sf, as already explained 44. ^t, i, written equivalent of a double 4.

(30),

is

the

lent of English ng, standing related to

the guttural nasal, the equiva! and c^ as it to t and b, and iii to p and h. Its g is not separately uttered, as g, before either a vowel or a consonant thus, finger like singer not like finger; Ijimgrig like hangrope, not
45.
91g,
tt(|.

9^CJ

is

like hungry.

Examples
46.
1.

jung, fingen, (Bang, ^dngc, Idngcr, bringlid^.

J)f.

lent of

is often etymologically the equivapound, ^]al'){ pale), but it is uttered regularly as a combination of p and f.

^f,

^f

our p

(^fiuib

2.

origin,

^J, ^^, ^f) is found only in words of foreign and has the sound of f, as in English.
:

Examples

^fcffer, ^jerb,to|)f, rupfcn

^f)a]e, $ftDpl)or, ^rap^it.

16

PRONTTNCIATION.

[47-

This combination has been abeady 47. Ctt, (\n. explained (34, 39).
@c^ is the equivalent of our sk 48. ^Sf, f^. Examples: d^iff, f(?^on, ](^eu, %]^^, 5if(^, r^nur, <B^mn,
(^lo^, d^merg, fc^reiben, !inbif(^.

49.

@}, ^.

@J

is

pronounced as a double

(ff,

36),

losing its distinctive character in the combination. J Double ff is not written at the end of a word, nor before

the

a consonant (t), nor after a long vowel or diphthong, ^ being in such situations substituted for it. Examples: lap la^t (from lajfen), c^oB (but d^bffe), genic^en, trau^ and trdu^e, ^a^, ^'d^li^, t)a^te (but f)afjett). As was remarked above (2.2), when German is written or printed in the Roman character, should be represented by ss (according to the rules of the New Orthography, rather by the obsolete and barbarous combination fs). 1. The New Orthography writes the suffix =ni^ (408-9) with a
single g
:

thus, (^Ieid)tu, ginfterntS.

Xi^, i^.

60.

Xf),

as noticed above (37), is equivalent

to

simply.
X}, ^.
is

61.
5,

^^

is

the written equivalent of a double

^.

and

pronounced in the same manner as a single

:

Examples

pafe, pd^e,

ft^en, Tlix^t,

iefet,

pIbfeUd).

GENEEAL SUPPLEMENTAKY EULES.

52.
1.

Other combinations of

letters

than those

treated of above, whether of vowels or of consonants, are pronounced as the single letters of which they are

made
2.

up.

Doubled consonants, however, are not pronounced double, but in the same manner as single ones.
Double consonants, in general, have no etymological ground, but are an orthographical device for indicating the short quantity of the preceding vowel.

But doubled consonants, or double vowels, or any of the 53. foregoing combinations of vowels or consonants, if produced by

55]

FOEEIGN WOBDS.
initial letters of

17
the parts

the coming together of the final and

making up a word

either by composition or by the addition of

Thus,
not as @eier; geirrt (ge4rrt) ^anbbruc! (^onb=bruc!) " (Sbba; " (Sgge; iiJegging (weg.ging)
auffaUt (auMallt)
'*

prefixes or of suffixes of derivation beginning with a consonant

are pronounced as in those parts taken separately.

beerbet (be=erbet)

not as ^eere;
33eute;

beurtt)eilt (bentrt^eitt)"

SHittag (9)nt4ag)

"

'Mittt;
(Sbbe;

5lbbUb <m=-bUb)
t)ieUeicf)t (t)iel4ei(f)t)

"
"

3tffe;

Selle;
fperren;
H)ad)fen;

benuoc^ (ben^norf))
ba^felbe (bag4etbe)

" " " ^ougrfjen (C5au=(f)en) ^utsuder(^u^u(fer) " " Slbart (5tb=Qrt)
tierreift (uer-reift)

tuatfifam (tt)Qd)4am)

ungar (uu-gar)
oii5in8 (^auS^^jing)

^af^en;
^ilje;

" " " "

" "

enne;
beffen;

Ungar;
au^er;
gegeffen;
f)anbe(n

megeffen

(tt)eg=e[fen)

?tbenb;

^anbeifen (anb=eifen)

Foreign Wards. 1. Many words taken into German from 54. other languages (especially French) are made more or less like German words in spelling and in pronunciation. But many others retain their foreign peculiarities. The most common and important of these have been noticed above, under the different consonants; less frequent are the following: c^n, pronounced like ny, as in gftampagne, Sorgnette; II, like hj, as in 33iEarb, SBillet; gu, as hard g, as in ^uitarre; qu, as k, as in33ouquet; n with preceding vowel as a nasal vowel, as in Baffin, 9lefrain, So also among vowels a\, as a, as in ^Iffaire an and 33aIIon. eau, as o, as in (Epaulette, pateau eu, as o, as in ^bieu, Sn^^nieur DU, as u, as in feoufin, ^DUr; oi, hke English wa in was, as in
:

SJlemoiren, toilette,
2.

In pronouncing the classical languages, Latin and Greek,

of utterance of their But, in reading Latin,
to),

the

Germans follow, in general, the rules own letters, both vowels and consonants.
t)

g is always hard, and v has the sound of EngUsh v (German not of German (English/).

ACCENT.
55. Tlie accentuation of German words is so generally accordant in its principles witli that of English words,

that

it

occasions
left to

and can be

little difficulty, even to the beginner, be learned by practice, without detailed

exposition and illustration. ing rules

The following

are its lead-


18
ACCENT.
[551. The accent ordinarily rests, in words uncompounded, on the radical or chiefly significant syllable never on terminations of declension or conjugation, almost never on suffixes of derivation, and never on the inseparable prefixes of verbs (302), either in the forms

of conjugation or in derivative words.

Exceptions are

the sufBx

el

(408); the
;

or

ie

of verbs ending

in the infinitive in tren or ieren (404)

and a few wholly anomalous

words, as leben'big (from

le'ben, le'benb).

In compound words, except compound particles, 2. the accent rests, as in English, upon the first member. The separable prefixes of verbs are treated as forming compounds, and receive the accent, in the verbal forms

and in most verbal derivatives. many compounds Exceptions are

:

with all, as aflma^'tig almighty, aflein alone, allererft first of all; compound words of direction, like iiboft south-east; and a number of others, as
Sa^rl^un'bert century, leibei'gen vassal, tDiflforn'men welcome.
3.

Compound
:

particles usually accent the final

obgleicf)

mem-

ber
ing

thus, ba^in thither,

previously.
:

although, ^u\oVc\t accord-

to, jut) or

Exceptions are

many adverbs which

;

are properly cases of

:

compound nouns or adjectives and some others compare 425. 4 The negative prefix m\ has the accent commonly, but not always (compare 416.46). The same is the case with er^ and ur. 5. Words from foreign languages regularly retain the accent belonging to them in those languages yet with not a few, and irregular, exceptions. As the greater part of them are French,

or Latin with the unaccented syllables at the end dropped off, they more usually accent the final syllable. Some change their accent in the plural: thus, 2)o!'tor, o!to'ren, (S;:^ar after, S^a=
ralte're.

PARTS OF SPEECH.
56.

The

parts of speech are the same in

German

as

in English.

69]

DECLENSION.
classified

19

They are
their
1.

according to the fact and the

inflection.

mode

of

grammatical variation, or

Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are declined.

these are here included articles, numerals, and par-

Among
ticiples,

which are sometimes reckoned as separate parts of

speech.
2.
3.

Verbs are conjugated.

Adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions are uninInterjections are a class by themselves, not entermembers into the construction of the sentence.

flected.

ing as

DECLENSION.
57,

Declension

is

and pronouns for number,

68.

the variation of nouns, adjectives, case, and gender.

There are two numbers, singular and plural, of value and use are in general the same as in the which English.
For special rules concerning the use man, see 211.
69,
of the

numbers

in Ger-

There are four cases in German, as in the oldest

known form of English (Anglo-Saxon). 1. The nominative, answering to the English nominative.

to

The nominative case belongs to the subject of a sentence, a word in apposition with it, or a predicate noun qualifying
it

it;

is

alse

used in address

(as the

Latin vocative).

See

212-14.
2.

The

genitive,

answering nearly to the English posof.

sessive, or objective with

It is therefore

most often dependent upon a noim, but is also used as the object of certain adjectives, verbs, and prepositions; and it stands not infrequently without a governing word, in an
adverbial sense.

See 215-20.

20
3.

DECLENSION.

[5&^

The

dative,

corresponding to the Latin and Greek

dative, or to the English objective with to or for.

The dative stands as indirect object of many verbs, transitive or intransitive, and also follows certain adjectives and prepositions. In rare cases, it is the equivalent of an ablative. See 221-5.

4 The accusative,
;

nearly the same with our objective.

This is especially the case of the direct object of a transitive certain prepositions are followed by it it is used to verb express measure (including duration of time and extent of space), also the time when anything is or is done and it occasionally stands absolutely, as if governed by having understood. See 226-30.
;
;

A noun in
213.2).

apposition with a

relations is in general put in the

noun standing in any same case with it

of these (but see

60.

There are three genders, masculine, feminine,

and

neuter.

Each noun is of one or the other of these genders, yet not wholly according to the natural sex of the object indicated by it. The names of most objects having conspicuous sex are, indeed, mascuUne or feminine, according as those objects are male or female but there are not infrequent exceptions and the names of objects destitute of sex have a grammatical gender, as masculine, feminine, or neuter, according to rules of which the
;
;

original ground is in great part impossible to discover, and which do not admit of succinct statement.

In the main, therefore, the gender of German 61. words must be learned outright; but the following practical rules will be found of value
:

1.

Exceptions

to the

natural gender of creatures having sex.

a. All diminutives formed by the suffixes c^en and lein (410.1) are neuter: thus, ba 3[Rdb(^en the girl, ba grdulein the young

lady.
h. Besides the special names which designate the male and female of a few species, there is a neuter name for the young, or for the species, or for both thus, ber ber the hoar, bie au
:

the sow, ba Serfel the pig, \)a^ d^tucin the Iwg.

61]

GENDEE.
of one

21
gender only, and gener-

But most names of animals are

ally either masculine or feminine: thus, ber afe the hare, bie S^ad^tigaE the nightingale; but ba (Srocobil the crocodile.
c.

Of anomalous exceptions, only

'Cia

SScib

woman, requires

special notice.

Attribution of gender to classes of inanimate objects. Names of the seasons, months, and days of the week, of the points of compass, and of stones, are mascuhne thus, ber
2.

a.

SSinter vnnter,

ber

Wax May,

ber 2}ZDnta9

Monday,

ber 5lorb

ncyrth, ber ^tefel fiint

b.

Most names

of plants, fruits,
:

and flowers

(usually ending

in

thus, bie gtc()te the pine, bie ^flaume the e), are feminine plum, bie 9lcl!e the pink. c. Most names of countries and places, of metals, the names of the letters, and other parts of speech used as nouns, are

neuter:
iron, ba

thus, ba Stalien Itahj,

ba 33erUn Berlin,
^jes

ha^i

ifen

the letter x, ba

^a unb ^ein tM

and

no.

3. Geyider as determined bij derivation or termination (for further details, see 408-11). a. Masculine are the greater number of derivatives formed from roots without suffix, by change of vowel; also (though

with very numerous exceptions) of words in

all

el,

en,

and

er

and

derivatives formed

by

ing

and

ling.

rain,

nail, ber 9legen the ber ginger the finger, ber S^edel the covei\ ber 33Dl^rer the gimlet, ber Sinbling the foundling.

Thus, ber |)ru(^ the speech, ber 5]agel the

b. Feminine are most derivatives in e and t, and all those formed by the secondary suffixes ei, I)ett, !ett, fdjaft, nng, and in

(or inn).

Thus,
flattej^j,

bie

)3ra(^e speech,

bie

^a^i

might,

bie

(!)mei^elel

bie 2Bci!)cit

wisdcm,

bie @itel!eit vanity, bie Stcnnbfd)aft

friendship, bie

Orbnung

order, bie greunbin the female friend.

c. Neuter are all diminutives formed with d)en and Icin (as already noticed), most nouns formed by the suffixes jel, fal, ni^ [ni^], and tl}um [turn], most collectives and abstracts formed by the prefix ge, and all infinitives used as nouns. Thus, ba 9J^dnn(^en tJie mannikin, ba ^nablein the little boy,

bag

ha^ c()icffal fate, ha^^ ha^ I?i3nigtf)um [.^onigtum] the kingdmn, ha^ ^efieber plumage, ba diejprdd) talk, 'i)a^ ^tel^en the act of
[9ldtfel]

mtm

the riddle,

mi^m^

[(Slei(!)ntg]

the likeness,

standing,

Gender of compound nouns.

22

GENDER.
regularly

[61of

Compound nouns
their final

and usually take the gender

member.
bie (bie

f(^eu

Exceptions are abhorrence

[9Jlut]

^ntmort answer (ba SBort word), ber ^b*

(Sc^eu fear),

several

DJlut^

spirit,

as, bie

(^rofemut!)

compounds of ber [(^ro^mut] magnanimity,

etc.,
5.

anftmutl^ [Sanftmut] gentleness, and 2)emut5 [^emut] humility, names of cities (which are neuter), and a few others (421).

Gender of nouns of foreign origin. Excepting a few words which, having become thoroughly Germanized, have had their original gender altered by assimilation to analogous German words, or otherwise anomalously nouns from other languages are masculine, feminine, or neuter, as in the tongues whence they come thus, ber %\kl the title (Lat. titulus, m.), bie ^rone the crown (Lat corona, t), ba but ber ^l^dnomen the plienomenon (Gr. phainomenon, n.) ^brper the body (Lat. corpus, n.), ha^ genfter the window (Lat. fenestra, 1), bie DIummer the number (Lat. numerus, m.).

Thus, 6. Some nouns are used as of more than one gender. some of those in rti^ [nt] are either feminine or neuter see
:

408, in. 6. %\)dl [%n\] is generally mascuhne, but sometimes neuter, especially when used in the sense of share; its compounds also vary in gender. Other examples are ber (or ba)
:

^dfig cage, Ort place, g^or chorus; bie (or ber) 33utter butter,

emmel
[Sterat]

roll; ba (or ber) glo^ ornament; and so on.

raft,

2}lunbel ward,

gieratT^

number of nouns are of more than one gender according 7. to differences of meaning being either of kindred derivation, or of only accidental coincidence of form. The commonest of
:

these are as follows

ber S3aitb, volume

ber 33unb, covenant ber (Srbe, heir

bie gtur,

tcc^

ba^ iBanb, hand, rihbon S3unb, bundle

@rbe, inheritance
ber (or bie) %tuv, floor

\>Ci^

meadow

ber @e^ott, contents

bo (or ber)

(S>tl\a\t,

wages

ber ^aft, hold ber eibc, heathen

ber ^ut, hat

bie aft, confinement bie eibe, heath bie

ut, guard

ber ^uube, customer

ber @c!^ilb, shield
ber @ee, lake ber (Sproffe, descendant

bie ^iinbe, information

ba^ @d^ilb, si^/n bie @ee, sea, ocean bie @proffe, rownd (of ladder)
ba tift, /oMrwIaiion
ba8 Se^r,
loeir

ber @tift, pegr

bie SSel^r, defense

64]
bcr Surfct,
ber

ARTICLES.

23

hump
guide

bie SBurf cl, 6os5 bie liefer, pine-free bie better, ladder
bie SJlangel,

ber liefer, ja?^

Inciter,

bcr 3JJangeI, Zacfc

bie 3Jlar!, marfc, marc?i

mangle

ba

3)Jar!,

marrow

ber 3Raft,

masf {of a ship)

,

bie 9}Jaft,/o(Mer

ber 9J?effer, measurer ber 2;i)or, /ooZ ber (or bie) 2Beif)e,

ba SJJeffer, fcni/e baS 2;^or, gra<e

bie SBei^e, consecration

fci^e (6irc?)

Adjectives and most pronouns are inflected in 62, the singular in all the three genders, in order to agree in gender with the nouns which they qualify or to

which they
of

relate.

No

such word makes a distinction

gender in the plural.

ARTICLES.
63.
definite

For the sake and indefinite

of

convenience, the declension of the

articles is first given.

The definite article is the same with the demonstrative pronoun, in its adjective use (164.1) the indefinite is the same with the numeral ein one (198). Our own articles are of like origin.
;

Definite Article.
Singular.
Plural.
neut.

masc.

fern.

m.

f.

n.

Nom.
Dat.
Ace.

bcr

bie

ha^
be

bie

the

Gen. be
bent

ber

ber

of the
to the

ber
bie

bem
has.

ben
bie

\>m

the

Indeftnite Articles.
Singular.

N.
G.

ciu

eine

ein

a
of a to a a
article is b

eine

einer

eine

D.

einem
einen
(base,
:

einer
eine

einem
ein

A
64.
1.

The stem
eitt

theme) of the definite

is

only

of the indefinite,

the rest

declensional ending.

2. Notice that the declension of ein differs from that of ber in that the former has no ending in the nom, masculine and thQ nom. and ace, neuter.

; :

24

AETIOLES.

[65-

65. The ace. neuter ba, and the dat. masc. and neuter bem are frequently appended to prepositions in the form of simple and m, being written as one word with the preposition and, in such contracted forms, a preposition ending in n (an, in, The dat. feminine ber is in like t)on) loses its n before m.

manner cut down to r, but only after ju, forming jur. The commonest cases of this contraction and combination
are am, im, t)om, jum, beim (for an bem, in bem, Don bem, gu bem, Much bel bem), and an, auf, tn, fur, t)or (for an ha^, etc.). less frequent are aufm, t)orm, bur(f), and, with dissyllabic prepositions, uber, iiberm, and the like.
Earely, the ace. masculine ben and so on.
is

similarly treated, forming

iibern, l^intern,

thus,

The contractions are almost always used in adverbial phrases am ^nbe in fine, im (^angen on the whole, etc.
:

Some writers mark the omission of part of the article in these contracted forms by an apostrophe thus, auf , iibef m, ^intef n,
etc.

Very
Sieb

rarely, the
:

same
thus,

contraction

is

made

after other

words
emige

than prepositions

when

au^aefungen iff will the everlasting old song he sung out ?

enbli(^

mann

alte,

USE OF THE ARTICLES.

66, In general, the articles are used in German nearly as in English. But there are also not a few differences, the more important of which are stated

below.
1. The definite article regularly stands in German before a noun used in its most comprehensive or universal sense, as

indicating the whole substance, class, or kind of which it is the appellation: as, ha ^olb ift gelb gold is yellow; bte 33Iatter
b
e r

2.

^flangen jinb griin leaves of plants are green. By a Uke usage, it stands before abstract nouns

as, \ja

Seben ift fura, ^laube ma^t

bie ^unft
felig

ift

lang

life is short,

art is long;

ber

faith

makes happy; xn

35erberben lorfen to

entice to destruction.
3. It is often used where we use a possessive pronominal adjective (161), when the connection sufficiently points out the possessor, or when the latter is indicated by a noim or pronoun in the dative, dependent on the verb of the sentence : as, ber SSater

66]
fdiiittcltc

AETICLES.

25
ba crGteiff^

ben ^opf

the father shook his head;

t^m

i e

4.

eelc then it takes hold upon his soid. It is prefixed to words of certain classes which in English
:

are used without it as, a. To the names of seasons, months, and days of the week as, im WiXiitx in winter ; in bem (or im) OJlai in May; am 5rei=
ia(^
h.

on Friday.

and mountains, and to feminine names ber ^riebric^^flrage in Frederick street; ber35efut) Vesuvius; in ber (Bdjm'u in Switzerland. c. Often to proper names, especially when preceded by adjec-

To names

of streets
as, in

of countries:

tives or titles
33erlin

as, b

beautiful Berlin;
:

franfen (^eorg to sick George; b a fc^one or, when the name of an author is

used for his works as, i(?^ (efe b e n (^iEer lam reading Schiller; or, in a famiUar or contemptuous w^ay as, rufe ben ^oftann or, to indicate more plainly the case of the noun as, call John ber (fatten ber DJZaria Maria's shadx)w; ben ^Irginofth be ^nbronifuS the jealousy of Andronicus (compare 104). 5. There are numerous phrases, in German as in English, in which the article is omitted, although called for by general anaThese often correspond in the two languages as, gu logies. 33ette to bed, bei ^ijc^ at table, ^Infer merfen to cast amhor, SSinb nnb 3Bctter wind and iveather, 9J^ei[ter rii^rt fic^ unb (^efelle master
:

in other cases, the German retains omitted in Enghsh: as, in bie ^ule to school, i m C^immel unb auf ber @rbe in heaven and on earth, a m ^benb at evening; or, less often, the article, retained in English, is omitted in the German: as, Dor ^lugen before the eyes, Qen Often toward the East; and the article is often omitted in proverbial phrases: thus, ^Rorgenfhmb' l^at olb im 3JJunb the morning-hour has gold in its mouth. 6. The article is usually omitted in technical phraseology before words referring to persons or things as already mentioned or to be mentioned, as befagt, Qcbad)t, genannt the afare^

and mail

bestir themselves;
is

the article which

said, folgcnb
etc.;

the following, erfter and letter former and latter, also before certain nouns, as 3n^aber holder, UeberbrinGei

bearer, etc.

the

In place of our indefinite article with a distributive sense, article as, jo Die! ho.^ ^f unb so of an evening; breimal bie Also, in certain cases, the definite 2Bo(^e three times a week. article in combination with a preposition stands where the indefinite would be expected: as, (taat um (^taat foUte gur
7.

German employs the definite much A pound; be ^benb

26

NOUNS.

[66to

^rot)iti5 tocrben state after state

was

he turned into a prov-

ince.
8. The indefinite article is often omitted before a predicate noun, and before a noun in apposition after al as, signifying occupation, office, rank, or the like thus, er tvax ,^aufmann, tt)tE aber ie^t olbat tDerben he was a merchant, but noiv icants to become a soldier, [^ fann e al 5Jlann nid)! bulben / cannot, as A man, endure it.
:

The above are only the leading points that require notice in comparing the German and English use of the articles. The

German

allows, especially in poetry, considerable irregularity

in their

and freedom
eral analogies

found introduced

and, much more often, omittedwhere gen-

employment, and they are not rarely

would favor a contrary treatment.

In regard to their position the definite article 67. precedes all other qualifying words (except all all) and the indefinite suffers before it only jo or fold) sicch,
tDeld)

what, and
bie beibcn

tva> fitr

ivhat sort of.

bo|)|)clte ^rei dx)uble Tflann) such a man,

Thus,
ein

l^naben both the boys, ber

fol(i)cr

the price, folc^ cin DJ^ann (or ein

ml^

elb what a hero: but eine fialbe tunbe half an hour, ein fo armer 5Jlann so poor a man, cine gans fd)5ne ^u^fic^t quite a fine
view.

NOUNS.
In order to decline a German noun, we need to it forms its genitive singular and its nominative plural and upon these two cases depends the
68.

know how

classification of
1.

German

declensions.
inflection of their final

Compound nouns have the

member

excepting ^Soflmad^t commission, O^nma^t /ain^, which are of the 2nd declension, while 9J^a(i)t might is of the 1st declension, 2nd
class.

all neuters,

of masculine nouns, and form their genitive singular by adding ^ or These constitute the first or e to the nominative. STRONG DECLENSION which is then divided into classes according to the mode of formation of the nominative
69.
1.
;

The great majority

plural.

::

71]
a.

GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION.

27

class takes no additional ending for the but sometimes modifies the vowel of the theme thus, (Spaten spade, (Spaten spades ; but 3Sater father,

The first

plural,

^akx/atJiers.
h. The second doss adds the ending e, usually also modifying the vowel: thus, Sa^r year, Sat)re years;

gufe/oof, %\\\i^feet.

modifies the vowel (when this

cr, and always capable of modification) thus, 9}^annma7i, Wiimnamen; %mh grave, ^xah^x graves. d. By modification of the vowel is meant the substitution of the modified vowels (i, b, \i (14), and an (21.2), for the simpler The change of a, 0, U, and ail, in themes containing the latter. Vowel in English man and men, foot and feet, mouse and mice^ and their like, is originally the same process.
c.

The

third class

adds the ending

is

2. Some feminines form their plural after the first and second of these methods, and are therefore reckoned as belonging to the first and second classes of the first declension, although they do not now take > in the

genitive singular.

The rest of the masculine nouns add n or en to 70. the theme to form the genitive singular, and take the same ending also in the nominative plural. Most feminines form their plural in the same way, and are therefore classified with them, making up the second or weak
DECLENSION.

The feminines have to be classified by the form of their plurals only, because, as is pointed out below, all feminine nouns are now invariable in the singular.
71.

The two

the rest of the declension general rules

1.

cases above mentioned being known, is found by the following

Singular,

a.

Feminines are invariable in the sin95.

first

gular.

For exceptions, see below,

h.

In the masculines and neuters of the

or the

strong declension, the accusative singular

is like

28

NOUNS.

[71-

nominative. Nouns which add only in the genitive have the dative also like the nominative those which add e in the genitive regularly take e in the dative, but may also omit it it being proper to form the dative of any noun of the first declension like the nominative.
;

c.

Masculines of the second or weak declension have

oblique cases like the genitive.
a.

all their
2.

Plural,

The nominative,

genitive,

and accu-

sative are always alike in the plural.

The dative plural ends always in n it is formed h. by adding n to the nominative plural, provided that
:

case end in any other letter than n (namely, in e, I, or r, the only other finals that occur there) if it end in n, all the cases of the plural are alike.
;

c.

plural different

But nouns making foreign plurals from the other cases.

1.

(101. 4, 5)

have no dative

72.
is

The general scheme of noun-declension,

'.

then,

as follows
1st (strong) Dect.ension

2nd (weak) DeX]T,F,NS

f.

Singular :

K
G. D.
A.

m.

n.

m.
en, =n =en, =n
=en, ^n

f.

=e, =
-c,

Plural:
let 01.

2nd
=e *c

01.

3rd CI.

N. G. D.
A.

=er

=en,

:=n

=er

cn.

*tt

*n
vowel
sometimet
modified.

*cn
't
vowel

=crn
*cr
vowel always
modified.

-en, ^n
^ett, =n vowel
never
modified.

=fiilr

The following general rules, applying to all declension-2. that of noims, adjectives, and pronouns are worthy of notice;

a.

The The

ace. singular of the fem.

and neuter

is like

the nom-

inative.
h.

dat. plural (except of personal

pronouns) ends in

n.

76]

GENEKAL RULES OF DECLENSION.

29

It will be seen, on comparing the declension of nouns 73. with that of the definite article (63), that the former is less full, distinguishing fewer cases by appropriate terminations. Besides their plural ending which, moreover, is wanting in a considerable class of words nouns have distinct forms only for the genitive singular and the dative plural, with traces of a dative singular and even these in by no means all words.

a.

The names

strong

and weak declension were introduced by Grimm,

and, though destitute of any resonable ground of application, have become too generally and firmly established to be gotten rid of. A
suitable designation would be "vowel-declension" and " n-declension, " since the first mode of declension properly belongs to themes originally ending in a vowel (though the plural-ending ei* comes from themes in g) the second, to those ending in n other consonantendings with their peculiarities of declension have disappeared. The whole German declensional system has undergone such extensive corhistorically
; :

ruption, mutilation,

and

transfer, that the old historical classifications

are pretty thoroughly effaced,

any account

of them,

and to attempt to restore them, or make would only confuse the learner.

FIKST OR STRONG DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

explained, the first or strong declension contains all the neuter nouns in the language, all masculines which form their genitive singular by adding
74.

As already

and such feminines as form their nominative plural either without an added ending, or else by appending c to the stem.
g or e to the nominative,
FIRST CLASS.

75.

The

characteristic of the first class is that it

:

adds no ending to form the plural its nominatives are except that in a few words the alike in both numbers vowel of the singular is modified for the plural.

76.
1.

To

this class belong

Masculine and neuter nouns having the endings e(, er, en (including infinitives used as nouns, 340), and one or two in ent
2.

A few neuter nouns

;

having the prefix

e

ge

and ending

in

also one masculine in

(^df e cheese)

3.

All neuter diminutives formed with the suffixes

(^en, lein,

and

)el


30
NOUNS.

[76er

4 Two
No nouns
t^un

feminines ending in

(SKutter mother

and

Slodjter daughter).

of this class are monosyllabic (except the infinitives

ier, eer,

The endings el, er do not include iel, eel, but imply the simple vowel e as that of the termination.
and
fein).

Nouns of the first class add only (not e^^) to 77. form the genitive singular, and never take e in the
dative.

Their only variation for case, therefore,

of in the gen. sing, (of masc.
dat. plural.

is

and

neut. nouns),

by the assumption and of n in the

About twenty masculines, and both feminines, 78. modify in the plural the vowel of the principal syllable.
1.

The masculines modifying the vowel

ofen, Jiarbor
apple

in the plural are

Stcfer, cultivated field

9^agc(,

naU

5lpfel,

S3oben,

^oor

^ammel, ram jammer, hammer

anbel, business ?aben, shop
9J?aiigeI,

Ofen, stove
(Sattel, saddle

S3ogen, l)ow
5Bruber, brother

d)aben, harm @d)nabe(, beak

d^iDoger, brother-in-law
SBater, father

^aben, thread avten, garden

want

SJiantet, cloak

raben, ditch
SBogen, ^aben,

^ahd, navel

SSogel, bird

and ^amniel sometimes have the unmodified vowel

:

79.
I.

Examples
i<pade,

With vowel unchanged

m.

in the plural

paten

(^emalbe picture, n.
Singular.

^dfe cheese, m.

N. G. D.
A.

ber paten

ha>

emcilbe

ber ^afe

be patent bem paten ben paten

be emcitbeS

be

Sl'afeg

bem emiilbe
ha^ emcilbe
Plural.

bem ^dfe
ben ^afe

N. G.

bie

ber

D.

paten paten ben paten bie paten

bie

^emalbe

bie ^afe

ber emcilbe

ber

f afe

ben (^emntben
bie

ben ^afen
bie ^^dfe

(^emdlbe

d2]
II.

FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION.

31

With vowel modified

m.

in the pkiral

33rubcr brother,

^lofter convent, n.

Gutter mother,

f.

Singular.

N. G. D.
A.

ber 33ruber

hc[>

mo]itx
S^lofter

bie 9[Rntter

be ^ruberg

be ^lofterg

ber 99intter
ber aJ^utter
bie

bem ^ruber
ben 33riiber

bem

mutkx

Flural

N.

bie ^riiber

bie ^'Ibfter

bie ^miitter

a
D.
A.

ber 33ruber

ber Softer

ber

^O^iitter

ben 53rubern
bie 33riiber

ben Ibftern
bie

ben

SJiiittern

mofter

bie ai^iitter

1. A few nouns are of this class in the singular and of 80. the second declension in the plural a few others have lost an original ending n or en in the nom. (or nom. and ace.) singular for all these, see Irregular Declension (968).
;

Among the infinitive-nouns belonging to this class are 2. a few of irregular ending namely, %\jun doing and 8ein being, with their compounds, some of which are in common use as nounse. g., ^afein existence, 2BDl)lfein welfare; and others thus, 2[Banbeln lualklng, SSanbern which end in eln and crn wandering.
:
:

[Exercise

1.

Nouns of First Declension, 1st

second class.

Class.]

81.

The

characteristic of the second class is that

;

it

forms the plural by adding e to the singular at the same time, the vowel of the principal syllable is usually modified in the plural but to this there are many ex;

ceptions.
82.
1.

To this class belong The greater number of masculine nouns

2.
3.

Many

neuters
thirty monosyllabic feminines

More than

(with

compounds, and including the compounds of funft, not in use as an independent word), with the feminines
their

32

NOtJNS.

[82-

formed by the
ber) and
]ai

suffixes

m^

[n\]

(about a dozen in

num-

(two or three).
to this class are
9?ac^t, night

The feminines belonging

Stngft, anxiety
Slpt,

axe

anb, hand ^aut, skin

^(uft,
cleft

^a\)t,

seam
[9f?ot],

SBanf, bench

9?ot^

need

SBraut, bride
SBrunft, fervor
S3ruft, breast
l^auft,

^raft, strength
^uf|,

^u%

nut

cow

au, sow
@(f)nur,

^unft, arf

sHng
swelling

/s<

2au8, Zouse
i^uft,

cf)tx)ulft,

^lnd)t, flight

air

tobt,

city
loaZZ

^ruc^t,

/rM
sroose

?uft, pZeoswre
9}?a(^t,

SBonb,

ang,

might

SBurft, sausage
3u(f)t, training

@ruft, uawZ< @un\t, favor

9?ot^ [9^ot] hardly

9}?agb, 9J?au8,

maid mowse

3unft,

gfwiZd

forms a plural except in the

dative, 9^bt^en, in

certain phrases.

c^tDuIft

makes

also @d)tt)utften.

Masculines and neuters form their genitive by adding either or e^; the dative is like the nominative, or adds e. 1. The ending eg is more often taken by monosyllables, by polysyllables but many words may assume either, according
83.

singular

to the choice of the writer or speaker, depending partly on euphony, and partly on the style he is employing e belonging to a more serious or elaborate style, and being more collo-

of more than one syllable with unaccented final hardly admit e in the ending. On the other hand, nouns having a final sibilant require an e to make the genitive ending perceptible. Thus, %aQ^ or %aQt, ^bnxQ^ rather than ^onigeS, almost always c^metterltngg, and always glomes,
quial.

Nouns
e

containing

Sud^fe,
2.

Sa^eg.

of e in the dative is nearly parallel with the use of e or in the genitive but it may be left oft from every noun without exception. It is regularly omitted from a noun immediately following a preposition thus, mit 9ie(^t with right, tjor 3orn for anger; exceptions are gu or nad^
;

The use or omission

aufe Iwme.

Of the masculines, the great majority take the 84. modified vowel in the plural, there being only about fifty exceptions of the neuters, only two, gtofe raft and &)QX choir, require the modification, and two others,
;


85]

FIEST OR STRONG DECLENSION.

33

S5oot hoat and 9^ol)r reed, may take it or not; of the feminines, all except those ending in ni^ [ni^] and ]a(

modify the vowel.

1.

The masculines not modifying the vowel

%Qi\,

in the plural

are:
ed

aum,
^alm,
^uf,

palate
stalk

%QiX, eagle

all, sound
^|^unf(^,

5tmbofe, anvil

punch
tosseZ

%xm, arm
S3ou, building
S3efu(^, visit

^aud), breath
/lOO/
(^ofif

Ouaft,

c^uft, wretch
<Bdin^, shoe

^unb,
^ad}^,

SSorn, fountain
S)ad^g, badger

kxaljxi [^xan]f crane

@taar Ltar],
(Stoff,

starling

dagger wick S)om, fMhedral

2)oId^,

salmon Saut, sound

sw#

2)od^t,

ZaQ, day

S)orn, thorn

Sump, ragamuffin SJiorb, murder

Ort, pZace
^arf, parfc

2^^roit, throne

2)rud, print
orft, forest

Xobf death Zxnpp, troop

Xn\^, flourish
35erfu(^, trial

rab, degree
province

^fab, paf/i
^Jpfau,

peacock

aVL, ^alm, and 2;^ron also make plurals of the second or weak declension, ^fau is also declined throughout by the second declension.

85.
I.

Examples

With vowel modified

in the plural
ra/if,

ol&n son, m.

8lo

n.

anb

/iamZ,

f,

Singular,

N.

ber (So^tt

bte

anb'

G.
I),

beg oI)ne

be glo^eg

ber
ber

bem

(Soljue

bem gto^e
ba g(o6
Plural.

anb anb

A.

ben ofjit

bie $onb,'

N. G. D.
A.

bte

o^c
(Si)f)ne

bie Siofee

bie

ber

ber glofje

ber

anbe ^anbe dnbe

htn <Bo[)ntn
bie (Sof)ue

ben glofjeu
bie Slbjje

ben ^ditbeii
bie

34
n.

NOUNS.

[85.

With vowel unchanged

m.

in the plural

9Jlonat month,

Sal)r year, n.

rfparni^ [=ni] saving,

f.

Singular.

N.
G.

ber SQZonat

\>a^

3af)r

bie

Grfparni^ [-nig]

be

Tlomi^
93Zonat

beg Sa^reS

ber (Srfparnig [:=ni] ber dTfparni^ [=ni]

bie C^rfparni^ [=ni]

D.
A.

bem
ben

bem ^a^xt
ha 3a^r

Monat

Plural

N.

bie SQ^onate

bie

3a^re

bie (Srfparniffe

G.

ber SJ^ouate

ber 3a()re

ber (Srfparniffe

D.
A.
86.

ben 5Dlonaten
bie 93Zonate

ben Qa^ren
bie

ben (Srfparniffen
bie

^a^xt

rfpamiffe

Most nouns

of foreign origin belong to this class.

For

some
other

irregularities in their declension, as well as in that of

members

of the class, see below, 97 etc.

[Exercise

2.

Nouns of First Declension, 2nd

THIRD CLASS.

Class.]

l^}^\

I i'

8|j).

The

characteristic of tliis<jlass is the assumption

er

otthe ending

to form the nominative plural, along

(if it

with modification of the vowel of the theme

of modification). 88.

admits

The

class is

composed

chiefly of neuter nouns,

with a few masculines, but no feminines.

Besides the nouns formed by the suffix t^um [turn] (which are, with two or three exceptions, neuter, and which modify the

vowel of the
not far from

suffix,
fifty

not that of the radical syllable), there are

also, three or four

neuters,
;

16nging to the class

and about a dozen masculines, bewords of foreign origin.

90]
1.

FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION.

35

The neuters are

eiuanbt, garment
@(ieb,
Zinfc

5tag, carcass

?ieb, songf
$?ocf),

Stmt,

office

/ioZe

S3ab, bath

2Ralt,
2at)lt,

mark
meaZ

33anb, ribbon
^i(b, picture

matt,
33rctt,

leaf

board

@rab, gfrnt-e @ra, gfrass @ut, property ^aiipt, Aead

9J?au(, moi*</i
9?eft,

"es<

iBud),
'3) ad),

book
roof

9?ab,

whed

^emb,
monument
^olj,

s/iirf

2)enfma(t,
S)ingt,

wood

9?iub,

mMe
6iM
si^fn

^/trngf

^orut, horn
3oc^t, yoke

@cf)eitt, @cf)ilbt,

S)orf, village
(Si,
egf^r

@(^Io, castle
c^raevt, sioord
tiftt, foundation
%\)Ci[,

^ad^, departmerd

^alb, caZ/

^inb, child
^leib, dress

valley

^orn, srmm emad^t, chamber ^raut, /ier6 emiit^ [emiit], disposition ?amm, Zam6
@efcf){ed)t, seic
!i?anbt,

elb, money

%\\6)% cloth SSotf, people

SSamniS, waistcoat
SBeib,

Zarw^

woman

@e[td)t, face

^id,tt,

%M

SSortt, loord

@e[penft,
2.

gr/iosi

The mascuUnes
^ofett)i(^tt,

are:
3JJann,

scamp

man

35ormunb, guardian
SSalb, /ores^

@eift, spirit

Drtt, place
9lanb, rim
traiifet, bouquet

@ott,

(?o(2

2Burm, loorm
also plurals in

?eib, &o(Zy

The nouns marked with t in the ahove hsts make SBurm and @trauJ3 with modification of the vowel.
89.

e,

Eespecting the form of tlie genitive singular ending, whether g or e^, and respecting the dative, whether like the nominative or adding e, the same rules apply as in the second class (83).

/^
N. G. D.
A.
\)a>

Examples:
2Beib

OJ^.o.jr'
n.

f^^M^
^ann
man, m.

C)au
hotcse^ n.

woman,
SScib

Strt^um t=tum] error, m.

ber

Singular.

au

^v^t^um

^ann
aJJanneg

be aufe

SSeibeg
SSeiOe

be 3rrt^um
bent

bem aufc bag aug

Srrt^um

3[Ranne

SSeib

ben ^i^i^t^um

Tlann


36
NOUNS.
Plural

(90-

N.

bte

aufer

SSeiber SSeiOer

bie 3rrt!)umer

Wdnmx
Tl'dnncv
SJ^cinncru
SO^cinncr

G. D.
A.

ber aufer

ber Srrt^iimer

ben |)aufern
bie

SSeibern
SSeiber

h^n Qrrt^iimern
bie 3rrtl)iimer

dufer
3.

[Exercise

Nouns of First Declension, 3rd

Class.]

-^Cx^

SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

To the second or weak declension belong only yl. masculine and feminine nouns. They form all the cases of the plural by adding n or en to the stem, and masculines add the same in the oblique cases of the singular.
1. Nearly all the feminine nouns in the language 92. are of this declension namely
:

syllable, whether primwords, as eite side; or primary derivatives, as ^ab^ gift; words formed with prefixes, as (SJefal^r danger, or with suffixes, as ^ugenb virtue, 'iBa\)X^ni truth, ^ixx\t\n princess ; or words derived from other languages, as 9}linute minute, 5}lelobie melody,
a.

All feminines of

more than one

itive

Station nation, Unit)eriitGt university.

Exceptions those having the suffixes ni^ [m^] or jal (see

:

82.3).

h.

About

sixty monosyllables
^oft, fare

namely
ci^rift, writing

5lrt,

2(u,

manner meadow

^a%
?ift,

burden
trick

(f)utb, fault

Sba^n^ track
SBrut, brood
SBu&it,

Wait, mark

d)ur, shearing ee, sea

bay
passage

mik,
''^a(i)t,

milt

pur,

trace

iBurg, casile
%a\)vt,

9^uU, nought

@tatt, place
I1

agreement
duty

tint, forehead

glur, field
glutf) [%{nt], fiood

WW,
^0%

post

treu, liUer ud)t, malady

Xi)at, deed

^orm, form
grarfit, freight

Ouol, torment
ma\t, rest

Z\)nv, door
2^racl)t,

^rau,

woman

@aat, seed

cosiume

grift, period

@au, sow
'Bdjaax [<B6)ax'],
@rf)ar, share (of a
@(i)i(^t, layer
,

%x\\i, pasture

@ei{3, goat

company

@ic^t, gout
@ift, gift

\\i)X, watch plough) aSc^r, defense SSelt, world

^ut, heed
3ad^t, yacht

d|Iacf)t, battle
@rf)Iucf)t,

3al){,

number

ravine

3eit, time

3agb, hunt

d^nur, daughter -in-law


94j
2.

SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION.

Masculines of the second declension are

37

Words of more than one syllable in e, as 53ote messenger^ ^aiit spouse, ^nabt boy including those that have the prefix QC, as ^cf d!)rte companion, efeEe fellow, and some nouns of naa.

tionality, as

^xm^t

Prussian, ^xan^o']t Frenclmian

also

a few

in er
h.

and or, as 33aicr Bavarian, Ungar Hungarian, About twenty monosyllabic root-words namely
:

%^\\, forefather
33ar, hear
33urfd), student
^(.lixi\t,

^elb, hero

^err, gentleman ^\xi, shepherd

Tlt\i\d),

0(^, ox %x\\\i, prince

(f)ent, cuphearet

Christian

man

^d)dp, icether
@pal^, sparrow

^int, finch
^ixx^t,

9Ro^r, moor
SRaxx, fool
9^ert),

prince

(Btxau%

ostrich

@raf, count

nerve

2^^or, fool.

The nominatives
c.

S3urjd)e, Dd)\t,

and

<(^enfe are also in use.

Many

foreign words, as tubent student, Tlonaxd) monarch,

S3 arbor

barbaman.

Nouns ending in e, cl, er, and ax unaccented, add only n to the stem others add en.
;

^3^
1.

Before this ending, the n of the sufBx in

is

doubled

thus,

giirftin, giirftinnen.
2.

^nx

gentleman, in

modern usage,

ordinarily adds n in the

singular,

forms
'

en in the plural, being the only masculine differ in the two numbers.

and

whose

g? No noun of this declension modifies its vowel in the plural. n '-'' Examples :-94.
I.

Feminines:
eitc.
side.

J^^-^^

'

%W,
deed.

SSa^r^ieit,

5^attDn,

truth.

nation.

Singular.

N. G.
r>.

bie (Scite

^^at
Xijat
Zi)at

SSnfjrljeit

Nation
Station D^ation

ber Seite ber (Seite

bie eite

SSaljr^eit
SSaljrIjeit

A.

SSaljr^eit

Station

Plural

N.
Gr. r>.

bie

eiten

^atcn
^f)aten
3:l)atcn

SSarjrljeiten

9?ationcu 9?atiDneu
9^ationen
^f^atiptieu

ber <Seiten

SSaljr^eiten
SSaI)rI)eiten

ben (Seitcn
bie <^eiten

A.

^f>ateu

SlSa^r^eiten

38 n.
Masculines

NOUNS.

[94^

^naBe
boy.

55ater

5Henf(^

tubent
student.

Bavarian.
Singular.

man.

N.
G-.D.A.

ber

^mh^
Slnabeu

q3ater

^enfc^
SJienjc^ett

^aiern
Plural.

tubent tubcutcu

N.G.D.A.

^mUn

SBaiern

93^enfc^en

tubenten

1. Formerly, many feminine nouns of this declension, 95. like the masculines, took the declensional ending in the genitive

and dative singular

in certain phrases
:

and

this

ending

is still

commonly retained

auf @rben on earth, t)on eiten on the part of. Occasionally, also, it appears in a gen. feminine preceding the governing noun, as um feiner eelcn eil for the welfare of his soul; and yet more rarely, by poetic license, in other situations e. g., auf ber (^affen on the street, ha^ 2id)t ber onnen
e. g.,
:

the light of the sun.

2.

Occasionally,

when two nouns

is

are used together, the

ending en of the second declension

^id^ter (accus.) he7^o

omitted

thus, elb unb

to

and poet,
4.

5Jlenf (^ 3U SJlenfcf)

man

man.

[Exercise

Nouns of Second Declension.]

IRREGULA.E DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

96. origin,

Irregularities

in the declension of

and

of proper

names,

will

nouns of foreign be considered below, under

those
97.

titles

respectively (see 101-8).

Declension.

Mixed

A number of masculine and neuter nouns are regularly 1. and usually declined in the singular according to the first declension, and in the plural according to the second. Such
are: masculines
S3auev, peasant
9^ad)bor, neighbor
tarf)et,

goad

eoatter, godfather
l^orbeer, laurel

^antoffel, slipper

tral)!, ray
llntert!)Qn, subject
S>ettcr, cousin

2Haft,

mast

<B6)mn], pain @ee, lake

(^toat, state

Mvi^l^\,

musck

3ievat^ [-xai], ormnmni.


IIIREGUIAR DECLENSION.
Neuters
Sliige, eye

89

nbe, end

O^r, ear
2Be^, pain.

S3ett,

bed

^cmb,

shirt

and

Several of these words have other forms. Thus, (S^eDatter, ^^antoffcl and SSettcr make a plural also according to the
declension 1st class
;

first

^auer,

9la(i)bar,

and

Untertftan

make
first

a singular also of the second declension.

2.

Further, certain nouns of foreign origin are of the

declension in the singular, and the second in the plural, as 3n=

feet insect,

gen. sing. 3nfecte

pi.

gnfecten

: especially those

ending in unaccented or (which, however, throw the accent forward, upon the or, in the plural), as ^oc'tor, gen. sing. Dc1or,
pi.

^octo'ren.

3.

Examples
state,

@taat m.

9?a(^bar
neighbor,

2)octor
doctor,

5luge
eye, n.

m.

m.

Singular.

N. G. D.
A.

ber <Bia(\i

9^acf)bar

be taateg
bent (Staate

9^acpar
9Zac!)bar

doctor octor
2)Dctor

ha^ ^nge
beg 5Iuge
bent 5lnge

ben taat

9kd}0ar
Plural

doctor

bag 5tuge

^. etc. bie

taateti

9^ac()barn

SDoctoren

^ngen

98.
1.

Declension with defective stem.

A few masculines^

otherwise declined according to the 1st

p,s

class of the first declension,

stems

in en,

sometimes or usu-

ally drop the n or en in the nominative singular.

Thus

%tU

or

=jen),

rock

aufe (or

.en),

heap

griebe (or =ben), peace

gunte (or 4m), spark ebanfe (or .!en), thought @(aube (or -Mn), belief
2.

^ame (or =men), name Qme (or .men), seed

SBiUe (or 4eu), will

@c^abe (or

=ben),

(ci

inplur.)

harm

pain has sometimes the genitive in en; and ba ^erg heart has a corresponding declension, but with the accusative like the ncxninative. Like the above,
ber (^mers

40
3
.

NOUNS.

[98-

Examples :^
^amtn
name, m.

^vkhtn peace, m.
Singular.

^crj

^ear<, n.

N.

ber DZame (or :=men)

griebe (or =ben)

ha^ er"
beg ^ergeng

a
D.
A.

be 9^amen

grieben

bem D^amen
ben Seamen

grieben
grieben
Plural.

bem ^erjen
ha^ ^erj

N., etc.
99.
1.

Seamen

grieben

^erjen

Bedundant Declension.

considerable number of nouns are declined, either in the singular or the plural, or in both, after more than one form. The most important of these have been already pointed out above under the different declensions and classes others are sometimes met with in dialectic, and even in literary, use.
;

2.

A smaller number have two

:

well established forms of the

plural, belonging to different significations of the

word they
;

are as follows
bag iBoitb
bie 53on!

^anber, ribbons
SSdnfe, benches

53anbe, bonds ^on!en, banks

iBauer, builders

ber S3auer
ber S3ogen

S3auern, peasants
iBogen, sheet of paper
S)inge, things

33ogen, bows (for shooting)

2)inger, creatures

ha^ 2)ing
ber

guB

m^^rfeet
@efid)te, apparitions

^U^e, feet

(a

measure)

bag efid^t ha^ ^orn

ber ^aben

efic^ter, /aces

orne, kinds of horn

Saben, shutters

:2a ben,

Corner, horns (of animals) shops

bag $?anb bag Sid^t

ber

Sanbe, regions
iidjtt, candles

^iinbtv, countries
$?i(^ter, lights

ber

Wann monh
Ort

9JJanner,
SJJonbe,

men moons

Ttanmn, vassals
SJJonben, months

ber
bie

Dxte, regions

@au

@aue, sows
d^itbe, shields

Orter, places (towns) auen, wild pigs

@d)i(ber, signs
cloth

ber @(^itb

bag Znd} bag Sort

Xu^e, kinds of
SSorte, words

Xn6)ev, pieces of cloth Sorter, vocables

100.
1.

Defective Declension.

In German, as in English, there are classes of nouns

es-

pecially abstracts, as ^emutl^ [^emut] humilityj

and names

of

; :

101]

IRKEGXILAR DECLENSION,

41

substances, as ^olb gold (unless, as is sometimes the case, they have taken on also a concrete or individualized sense, as %'iiot=
Ijtikn follies, ^apiere
tion,

papers)

which, in virtue of

their significa-

have no

plural.

Some abstract nouns, when they take such a modified sense as to admit of plural use, substitute other, derivative or compound, forms
2.
:

as,

%oh

death, ^obegfaKe deatJis (literally, cases of

death), 35eftre6en exertion, 33eftreBun0en exertions, efforts.

A much smaller number have no singular

Compounds of 9J^ann man when taken collectively

as, (^Ikxn parents,

DJiafern measles, Striimmer ruins, Seute people.

3.

plural,
leute

substitute leute for mann in the thus, ^aufmann merchant, ^auf=

merchants; but 53iebermanner worthy men, "^renmdnner of honor, as individuals only, not forming a class.

wen

NOUNS OF FOREIGN ORIGIN.

^01.

1.

Nouns derived from

foreign languages are

variously treated, according to the completeness of their

naturalization.
2.

tion

The great mass of them are assimilated in inflecto German models, and belong to the regular de-

clensions and classes, as already stated.

3.

A class

of

nouns
:

in

um from

the Latin form a plural in en

thus, 3nbit)ibuum, 3nbit)tbuen; tubium, tubien; and a few in thus, l^apital, llapitalien j goffil, goffilien. One qI and il add ien

German noun,
4.

^Icinob jewel,

makes a

similar plural, ^leinobien.

as in English, form their plurals after the manner of the languages from which they come but are hardly capable of any other variation, except an as sign of the genitive sing;

A few,

ular: thus, 9Jluftcu, 9J?ufici; 5:eTnpu, Slempora

5.

factum, Sacta.

the French and English, or other modern languages, form the plural, as well as the genitive singular, in
thus, feibene

Some from

op^a

silken sofas, bie Sorb the lords.

Sometimes, rather than add a genitive sign to a word which in the original took none such, an author prefers to leave it, like a proper name, uninflected thus, be ^aQUax of the jaguar, be ^lima of the climate. Before this foreign and irregular , some authorities set an apostrophe, both in the genitive and the plural, especially after a vowel. The same is true in proper names.
:

42

NOUNS.

[102-

PROPER NAMES.

Proper names are inflected like common nouns, /102. unless they are names of persons, of places (towns and tha like), or neuter names
;

of countries.

Names of countries and places admit only the genitive \ 103. ending (not e) if, as terminating in a sibilant, they cannot take that ending, they are not declined at all thus, bie SSiiften
:

^erling the inhabitants of Berlin, but bie ^inmo^ner t)on ^art^ t1ie inhabitants of Paris
bie SiniDoftner
(or, bie SintDol^ner ber

5lfrt!a the deserts

of Africa,

6tabt $ari).

more

were formerly more generally and than at present now, the article is customarily used to indicate the case, and the name itself remains unof persons
fully declined
;

Names ( 104?

varied after it in the singular. But the genitive takes an ending

if

word
i

as, be grofeen griebrid)^ S^ftaten

followed by the governing Frederwk the Great's deeds.

105. ) When used without the article, such nouns add in the genitiv^ thus, (5cf)iner, 5riebrid}. But masculine names end:

ing in a sibilant, and feminines in

e, have en in the genitive thus, 9}^a5en, opftienS. i p^ '^ The dative and accusative, of both genders, were formerly

made

to

end

in n or en,

preferably, omitted,

which ending is now more often, and and the name left unvaried in those cases.
in are

^y But
itive:

classical

names ending

unchanged

in the gen-

thus, ^Itreu' 6oI)n Atrem' son, ^emotl^ene' Sfleben Demosthenes' speeches. And German nouns ending in a sibilant are

sometimes treated in the same way e. g. 3^blt^^ (^ebii^te Zedlitz' poems. The use of the apostrophe in such cases is common, but not universal.
:

106.

J The
have

article,

plurals of masculine names, with or without the of feme (rarely en), with n added in the dative
;

inines, n or en.

Those

in o (from Latin

themes

in on)

add

ne:

thus, gato, Satone.

107. 3^11^^ ^^d 6^riflu are still usually dechned as Latin neuns gen. ^efu, Sf)nfti dat. 3efu, (Skifto ace. 3ef urn, (S:^riftum. Other classical names were formerly treated in the same manner, and cases thus formed are occasionally met with, even in
;

:'

recent works.
108.
1. it

A proper name following a title that has

the article

before

left

unvaried

if

without the

article, it

takes the

110]
genitive sign,
ber

ADJUNCTS OP THE NOUN.

and the
title

43
unvaried:
thus,

(except err)

is

o^n

Haljer griebric^S the son of

Emperor

Frederick, errn

rid)

d^mibtg ^an^ Mr. Smith's house, but ^reusgufi be ^aijers grieb= tJw crusade of Emperor Frederick.

2. An appended title is declined, whether the preceding name be declined or not; thus, ^Ue^anbcra bc (^ro^cn (^e(d)i(^te Alexander the GreaVs history, bie 51'^aten be .^i)niQ Sriebri(5^ be 3tt)eiten the deeds of King Frederick the Second.
3. Of two or more proper names belonging to the same person, only the last is liable to variation under the preceding rules: thus, errn 3o^ann d^mibt^ ^au^ Mr. John Smith's house; but, if the last be a family name preceded by t)On, it takes the genitive ending only before the governing noun: thus, gricbrid) Don d^lEerS 2Ber!e, but bie 2Ber!e r^riebrid) bon d)iner the works of Frederick von Schiller.

[Exercise

5.,

Nouns of Mixed Declension,

etc.]

MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE N3UN.

109. A noun may enter as an element into the structure of the sentence not only by itself, but is modified and limited by adjuncts of various kinds.
110.

(including under this

jectives
a.

The most usual adjunct of a noun is an adjective term the pronominal and numeral adand the articles) namely
1.
:

An

attributive adjective,
it,

directly qualifying the noun,

preceding

as, ctn Quter

and agreeing with it in gender, number, and case DJJann a good man, ber fc^onen Srau of the beautiful
^Hnbern
to these

woman,
115).

biejen artigen

well-hehaved children (see

An appositive adjective, less directly qualifying the noun, h. immediately following it, and in German not varied to agree with it (treated, rather, as if the predicate of an adjective clause) thus, ein Sel^nftuI)! reid) gefc^nifet unb tDunberlic^ an arm:

is] richly carved and quaint (see 116.2). But an adjective may follow a noun, as if appositive, and yet be declined, being treated as if having a noun understood after

chair [which

it:

thus, bie geinbe, bie mac^tigen, jiegcn the enemies, the mighty,

prevail,

menn
to

I venture

id) Dergang'ner Stage, think of past days,

gliidlid)er,

311

benfen tuage

happy

ones,

when Such cases are

poetic and rare.

44

NOUNS.

[110>

c. An adjective clause, containing a verb and its subject, and introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction as, ber 3f{tng, ben fie mir (^a'i) the ring which she gave to me, bie iitte, tt)D ber alte S3ergmann tt)ol^nt the cottage where the old miner lives (see 437). 2. Sometimes an adverb, by an elliptical construction (as representing the predicate of an adjective clause), stands as adjunct to a noun as, ber Tlann Ijkx the man here, ber S)immel bort oBen heaven above: that is, the man who is here, etc.
:
:

111.
1.

A noun is

very often limited by another noun.

it,

By
it.

a noun dependent on

and placed

either before or

after

Usually in the genitive case, and expressing a great a. variety of relations (216). Very rarely, in the dative case (225.1). b.
2.

By an

in case (but not necessarily in

appositive noun, following it, and agreeing with it gender or number) as, er l^at ben
:

^atfer griebric^, feinen ^txxn, t)errat5en [t)erraten] he has betrayed the Emperor Frederick, his master, ben fie, meine (^eliebte, mir
Q^Oih

which

she,

my

beloved, gave me.

is

The appositive noun by the conjunction al

3.

sometimes connected with

gieftt,

its

subject

as: thus,

al^

le^te SJlenf (^ !&inau the last

The ether parts

course,

may

marches used as substantives take the place of the Umiting noun.

of speech
:

man

^ii^ter, ber out as last poet.

lefete

ber

(113), of

112. A noun is limited by a prepositional phrase that is, by a noun whose relation to it is defined by a preposition as, ber (^litffel 3U amletS 33etraQen the key to Hamlefs behavior.
:

This construction is especially frequent with verbal derivatives

retaining something of the verbal force:
Sreifteit

thus, ^rgiejung gur

freedom, bie ^offnung auf eine ^inigung tnit bem ^aifer the Iwping for an understanding with the emperor. In other cases, the prepositional phrase is virtually the predito

education

man

cate (3186) of an adjective clause: as, ber SJiann im Often the [wlio was or lived] in the East.

EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN.

Other parts of speech are habitually or occasionally used as substantives, and may be substituted for the noun in a part or all of its constructions. These are The substantive pronouns and numerals as, t(^ I, birf) a.
113.
1.
:

thee, fie she, her, they,

them,

mx who,

fe(f)g

ber 9)^dnner six of the

men.

45

116]
b.

EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN.

Infinitives of verbs (which are properly verbal nouns): see

etc.

339
c.

Adjectives (including pronominal and numeral adjectives

participles) are often

and
2.

Any word
:

or phrase, viewed in
it

resentative of
stantive

what

converted into nouns (see 129). itself, as concrete repsignifies, may be used as a neuter sub-

thus, fein eigen 3c^ his

own

"I", ol^ne SOSenn ober ^ber

without "if" or "hut", jebeg Siir unb SBlber every pro

3.

and

con,

substantive clause, containing a verb and its subject, and introduced generally by ba that, oB whether, or a compound relative word, takes the place of a noun in some constructions
(see 436).

For a fuller definition of the relations and constructions in which the various equivalents of the noun may be used, see the several parts of speech concerned.

ADJECTIVES.

-iS

The

Adjective,

in

German,

is

declined only

wli6n used attributively or substantively.

/il6/^4'
case,

The

attributive adjective always precedes

qualifies
;

rhe noun Vhich

it

it is

varied for

number and
and agrees

and

(in the singular only) for gender,

in all these particulars with its noun.

But the noun to which the adjective relates is often omitted: the latter, in such case, has the same form as if followed by the
noun:
houses,
[rote]

as, er T^at tDei^e Ociufer,

give

unb

mx

l^aben Braune

lie

has white

and we have brown, geben ie mir

unb
f

stDcierIci %n6:),

rot^e^

d)

tt)

ar5

me

two kinds of

cloth,

red and black.

2,-^ov the adjective used as a substantive, see below, 129.

\

116)

The

adjective remains uninflected

when used

predicatively, appositively, or adverbially.

1. A predicate adjective (316) is one which is by means of a verb made to belong to and qualify a noun (or pronoun, etc.). Its uses may be classified as a. simple predicate, after verbs that signify being, becoming, continuing, seeming, and the

like

as, fein

^an^ Wax
his liouse

l^dfjlid)

an
old,

growing

and

looks

unb m\^, w'xxh aha je^t alt, unb fiel)t was handsome and white, but is now ugly b. adverbial predicate, dividjd)on

46
ing
its

ADJECTIVES.
:

[116-

C)au
SBiifte

[te^^t

qualifying force between the noun and the verb as, ba feft^^/te Iwuse stands firm, tobt [tot] unb ftarr liegt bie c. l^ingeftredft the steppe lies stretched out dead and stiff;

objective or factitive predicate, expressing a condition effected in or ascribed to an object by the action of a transitive
verb
ftot]
:

as, ba mad)t mid^ traurig that makes me sad, ]\^ fialh tobt lac^en to laugh one's self half to death, er Baut ha^ au ftoc^

he builds the house high, ic^ mli meine 5lugen off en bel^alten I will keep my eyes open, bie lang^ ic^ t)erGeffen geglaubt which I had long believed forgotten whence, of course, also as simple predicate in the corresponding passive expression: as, ha^ 't)au toirb IjO^ Qebaut the house is built high.

2.

glDei

^inber,
fii^

The appositive adjective follows the noun as, tt)ir tt)aren flein unb fro!) we were two childj-en small aiid merry,
:

2Borte
3.
4.

mie DJionblid^t words sweet as moonlight.

130.

For the adjective used as adverb, see below,

The uses
of the adjective in apposition, as predicate,

and as adverb, pass into one another by insensible gradations, and the same word often admits of more than one understanding. The appositive adjective is distinguished from the attributive rather formally than logically, and sometimes, in poetry, an adjective really attributive in meaning is treated as appositive as, bei etnem SSirt^e [Sirte] tvunberntilb with a host wondrous kind; einen 53Iicf sum ^imtnel ^q6) a look to Heaven high. The attributive adjective was formerly permitted after the noun as well as before, and was declined in that position as was also the adjective
:

used predicatively.

^/ll7, A few adjectives are always used predicatively, and are therefore never declined others are used only attributively, and are therefore always declined.
;

a.

Of the

first class,

ready, fetnb

hostile,

some of the most common are Bereit funb known, c^mahx aware, eingeben! mindful,
class belong

tfteil^aft [teilftaft]
b.

participating, nii^ useful.

To the second

formal relations

viz.,

many adjectives expressing, certain pronominal adjectives, as jener

yon, jeber every, meinig mine, felbig self-same; some adjectives of number, time, and place, as gtt)ett second, '^eutig of to-day, bortig there situated, tdglirf) daily, Ci\\\'CiX[<^X\&^ in the first place; and, in general, adjectives of material in en, ern, for which prepositional

phrases are usually substituted in predicate construction.

120]

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

47

DECLENSION OP THE ADJECTIVE.

118..^

Each

adjective, in its attributive use, is subject

to

two
is

or

we

modes of declension, according as it is not preceded by certain limiting words. These shall call the fiest and second, or stkong and weak,
different
1.

declensions (see 132).

(ll9./

sion are the

The endings of the fiest or steong declensame with those of the definite article, al(63).

ready given

Excepting that the nom. and ace. sing, neuter have e instead of a, and the nom. and ace. plural and fem. singular have c instead of ie that is, the final and characteristic letter is the same, but differently preceded.
:

2.

The second or weak declension has only two

e

endings,

and

cu

belongs to the nominative singular

of all genders,

cusative of

and hence also (see 72.2a), to the acthe feminine and neuter; en is found in all

the other cases.

Thus

Adjective Endings of Declension.

First (strong) Declension.

Singular.

Second (weak) Declension.

Singular.
m.
^e
f.

m.

f.
=:e

n.

Plural. m. t. n.
=e

Plural.
n.

m.f. n.
==eu

N. G. D.
A.
3.

^er
:=e

^c ^c^
:=em
==e

-e

:=e

:=er

^er
==en

-en
=:en

=en

^cn

^en ^en

=^em

-er
=e

^en
^e

-en
=e

=en
It will

-e

-en

^tn

be noticed that the first declension has more than distinct endings as the second, and that it therefore makes a correspondingly superior, though a far from conapl^e, distinction of genders and cases.
twice as

many

120. \l. The endings as given are appended throughout to the stem of the adjective, or to the adjective in its simple predicative form.
(

Qute, oute, fiutem, gutenj in

Thus, from gut good are formed, in the first declension, the second, gutc, guten.

Quter,

48
2.

ADJECTIVES.

[120e

fore taking the en^ding (or,

of every ending).

But adjectives ending in e what

trdge lazy

reject this
is

in

every case bec

the

same

thing, reject the

Thus, from
3.

come

trdQer, trage, trageg, tragem, Iragen.

Adjectives ending in the unaccented terminational syllables el, en, er, also usually reject the e either of those syllables or of the declensional ending.

Thus, from ebel noble come ebler, eble, eble, and generally eblem and eblen, less often ebelm, ebein ; from l^eiler cheerful come usually l^eitrer, l^eitre, 5^itre, and :^eilerm and l)ettern, or l^eitrem

from eben even come ebner, ebne, ebne, ebtiem, forms of these words, however as ebener, l^eite* are also in good use, especially in a rer, and, less often, ebele^ more stately or solemn style.

and

^eitren;

ebnen.

The

full

4.

DC^ high loses

its c

when

declined:

thus, ^ol^er,

fto^e,

6Qi>|, etc.

/ 121. \ 1. The adjective takes the more distinctive endings of the first declension, unless preceded by a pronominal limiting word (i. e. an article, pronoun, or pronominal adjective: see 123) which itself has those
endings.
Thus, as we say ber 5Jlann the man, so also guter Wann good ber Qute 3JJann the good man; as bie grauen the women, so gute Srauen, and gute fc^one grauen, but bie guten fd^onen Srauen the good handsome wanien; as bem ^inbe to the child, so fiutem ^tnbe, and gutem, frf)onem, artigem ^inbe, but bem guten, jc^onen, artigen ^inbe to the good, handsome, well-behaved child.

man, but

2. Or, in other words, a pronominal limiting word before the adjective, if it have itself the more dis-

and gender of the qualified noun, takes that ending away from the adjective, reducing the latter from the first to the second declension the distinctive ending is not repeated upon both words.
tinctive adjective ending characteristic of the case
:

Note that certain cases the ace. sing, masculine, the nom. and ace. sing, feminine, and the dat. plural have the same ending in the one declension as in the other, and are therefore not altered, whatever the situation in which the adjective is

placed.

122]

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

49

^^
e).

Apparently by an irregular extension of this tendency to avoid the unnecessary repetition of a distinctive ending, a gen. sing. mascuUne or neuter ending in takes before it usually the second form of the adjective (in en), instead of the first (in
Thus,
fallen SSafferS

of coU water, frozen Tlni^t^

[mum]

with

joyous
etc.,

spirit,

(jro^en %\)n\^ [Xeil] in great part,

and so

on, are

much more common than

!alte 2Baffer, ]xo^t% 2Jlutl)eg [2)Zute]

although the latter are not incorrect.

C 12^.
1.

Examples :

Complete decj^nsion of an adjective, gut good, in both

^lEST

forms.

Declension.
Plural.

Singular,

m.

f.

m. f n.
.

N. G. D.
A.

guter

gute

gute guter
guteit

gute^

guter guter
gute

gutem
guten

gute

Second Declension.
Singular.
Plural.

m. f.

n.

N. G. D.
A.
2.

ber gute

bie gute

ha^ gute
be guten

bie guten

be guten

ber guten

ber guten

bem guten
htn guten

ber guten
bie gute

bem guten
ha^ gute

ben guten
bie guten

Declension of noun and accompanying adjective: rotifer 2Bein red wine, gro^e 3reube great joy, fd^lei^teg ^elb had money.
[roter]

First Declension.
Singular,

Second Declension.

m.

N. G. D.
A.

rotter [roter] 3Sein

ber rot^e [rote] SSein

rot^eS [roteg] or rot{)en Seined

be rotI)en [roten] 2Beine

rot^em [rotem] SSeine

rotfjen [roten] StSein

bem

rotfien [roten]

^eine

ben rottjen [roten] SSein


50
ADJECTIVES.
Bingidar,
.

[12a-

N. G.

groge S^eubc groBer greube

grower greube

bte groge Sreitbc

ber groBen greube ber gro^en greube

bie

D. A.
N.

gro^e greube

gro^e greube

f^tec^teg

^etb

ha^

fd^Ied^te

etb
elbe elb

a
D.
A.

fc^Ie^teg or

4eu elbe

be fc^Iec^teu @etbe0
bent fd^lecl^ten

fc^Iec^tem (S^elbe
fc^lec^teg

elb
Flural

bag

fc^tec^te

m.

f.

n.
2C.

m.

f.

n.
2C.

N. G. D.
A.

rot^e [rote] SSeine

bte rotten [roten] SSetne

grower greuben
f(^led)ten

2C.

ber gro^eu greuben

:c.

2C.

elbern
2C.

ben fc^Iedjten (^elbern

bie

2C.

gro^e greuben

gro^en greuben

jc.

tive,

123. The words which, when placed before an adjectake away its distinctive ending, or reduce it from
first

the
1.

to the second declension, are

articles, ber

The two

and

ein,

with

fetn (195.2),

the negative

of the latter.
2.

The possessive
etc.).

adjectives, mein, bein, fein, unfer, euer,

il^r

(157
3.

adjectives ber, bie

4.

The demonstrative, interrogative, and relative pronominal and Jen (163), and ml<i) (174). The indefinite pronolomal adjectives and numeral adjectives
mand), anber, etntg,
etli(^,

ieb, iegli(5^, foli^,

afl, t)iel, trenig,

me^r,

me^irer (170, 189-194).

But )o\^
5.

not affect a following adjective

after ein is treated as a simple adjective, and does thus, ein fold^er guter 5!Jlann.
:

few proper adjectives: namely,

t)erjc?^tebene

pi.

sundry

(nearly equivalent with einige and me^rere), and folgenb, eriDd^nt, obig, and their like, used idiomatically without the article (66.6) to indicate things which have been specified or are to be specified.

124.

1.

Since,

namely,

ein, fein,

however, a part of these words and the possessive adjectives lack the

125]

DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.

51

distinctive ending in three of their forms, the nominative

singular masculine and the nominative and accusative singular neuter, the adjective following those cases
retains the ending.
Thus, as we say guter DJlann, Qute^ ^inb, so also em Quter ^ann, ^inb (as opposed to bcr Quk Tlann, ba gute ^inb), because there is nothing about the ein which should render the full ending upon the adjective unnecessary.
ein Qute

2. In this way arises what is sometimes reckoned as a " third " or " mixed " declension, composed of three forms taken from the first declension, and the rest from the second. For example, mein guter 7ny good is declined

Singular,

Plural.
n.

m.

f.

m. f.

n.

N. G. D.
A.

mein guter meine guten

meinem guten
meinen guten

meinc gute meiner guten meiner guten meine gute

mein gute^
melne guten

meinem guten
mein gute

meine guten meiner guten meinen guten meine guten

neither propriety nor advantage in treating this as a separate declension. For each gender and case, there are two forms of the adjective, and only two, and the learner should be taught to distinguish between them, and to note, in every case,

There

is

the reason of their respective use which reason the " mixed " declension as elsewhere.

is

the

same

in

3. In like manner, when mand), n)el(^, and fold) are used without an ending of declension (see 170, 174, 191), the succeeding adjective takes the full ending of the first declension. Thus, mcM) reic^er inimel what a rich sky, but me((^er reicl)e C)immel; mand) Bunte 33lumen, but manege bunten 33Iumen many

variegated flowers.
4. The same is true after all, Dtel, mentg, and me'^r, when they are undeclined thus, t)iel gute Dbft much good fruit, me^r off ene SOBogen mxyre open carriages.
:

/^125.

when

The adjective follows the first declension not only has no other limiting word, or only another adjective, before it, but also when preceded by an indeclinable word, such as ettt)a, genug, allerlei, and the numerals. 2. After the personal pronouns (which do not take the endings of adjective declension), the adjective ought, by analogy, to be of the first declension and this is not absolutely forbidden but
1.

it

52
in

'

ADJECTITES.

[125-

common usage the adjective takes the distinctive endings only in the nominative singular (with the accusative neuter), and follows in the other cases the second declension. That is to say, the adjective after a personal pronoun is declined as after ein, or by the "mixed" declension (124.2). Thus, id) armer Xl^ox I poor fool, bu IkU^ lluib thou dear child; but tDir armen 5:i&oren we poor fools, i^r fii^en Sieber ye sweet songs.

1. The ending e of the nom. and ace. neuter in the first 126. declension is sometimes dropped this omission is especially frequent in poetry.
:

Thus, fd)5n ^tikx firie weather, ^ al\ 6) (Btlh false money, ein geft a different festival, ber 35ol!er ^eilig 9te^t the sacred law of nations.

anber

2. In old style German, and in poetry, the ending is sometimes dropped in other cases also thus, licb SJJutter dear mother, Ueb ^nabe dear boy. 3. Adjectives used as collective nouns are uninflected in such combinations as mit ^ro^ unb ^lein with great and small, bei ^Ht unb Sung among old and young.
:

Certain adjectives are in all constructions indeclinable those ending in lei (415.11) and those in er from nouns of places (415.5) b. lauter mere, mtfjx more, mniQU less; c. certain foreign names of color (properly nouns) as, rofa rose, lila lilac.
4.

thus,^ a.

127. After a part of the pronominal adjectives mentioned above, 123.4, it is allowable, and even usual, to use the ending of the first declension instead of the second in the nom. and ace.
plural.

Thus, einige Qto^e ^aften sundry big boxes, mandjt QlndU^t ^blkx many fortunate races, me^rere lange (Stra^en several long
streets.
1. When two or more adjectives precede and qualify same noun, unless the first be one of those mentioned in 123, all regularly and usually take the same ending. 2. Rarely, however, when the following adjective stands in a

128.

the

closer relation to the substantive, as forming with

it

a kind of

compound idea, to which the preceding adjective is then added as a more adventitious determinative, the second is allowed to
be of the second declension, though the
only in the genitive and dative cases. Thus, l^ofte f(^atttge 33dume high shady
first is of

the

first

but

trees,

inn with

light

joyous mind, guter

alter foftbarer

mit frobem leti^tem SBein good old

120]
costly

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
wine ;hut
tion

53

red

f(^onem tollmen [rolen] Sluc^c of handsome of fresh Dutch herrings, mit etgnem inneren DrganiSmu^ ivlth peculiar internal organization.
cloth, frif(^erI}o(Idnbtf(^en .t)dnnGe
3.

what is more properly an adjective qualifying treated in German as an adverb limiting a following adjective before the noun, and so (130) is left undeclined thus, bie SBoIfen, bie forrnlo^ graucn 2od)ter ber 2uft the clouds, the gray shapeless daughters of the air, bie unGlucfjelig h'aurige 53eGcgnim(i the unhappy sad meeting, ber uralt fromtnen itte of the ancient
Occasionally,
is

the noun

pious custom.

is

So also, of two adjectives connected by unb and, the former occasionally left without an ending thus, ein unglaublid) reid^ unb Ueblid)er 9J^unb an incredibly rich and lovely mouth.
4.
:

[Exercise [Exercise

6.

Adjectives of First Declension.]

Adjectives of Second Declension.]

7.

The Adjective used as Substantive.

In German, as in other languages, adjectives are used as substantives, either with or without an article or other determining word.
rerj often

so used, the adjective is written with a any other substantive ; but it retains its proper declension as an adjective, taking the endings of the first or of the second declension according to the
2)

When

capital letter, like

rules already given.

An adjective used as a substantive in the masculine or 3. feminine gender usually denotes a person; in the neuter (singular only), a concrete abstract a thing which, or that in general which, possesses the quality designated by the ad-

jective.

Thus, ber utc rdumt ben $Iafe bem 33cjcn the good (man) gives vUwe to the ivicked, ba^ l^ie unb ia ein liidlid^er QetDefen that here and there has been one happy person, eineSc^one a beaidy, mcine
eliebte

your right hand,\vo ha trenae unb 5DliIbe paarten where the hard has united with the tender, where what is strong and ivhat is gentle Imve combined, burc^ 0einere gum ro^ern mic^ geiDO^nen accustom me by the less to the greater.
3^re
9flc(i)te

my beloved,
S^i'ten,

mit

bem

mo

tarfeg

fid)

4. Some adjectives are so constantly used in this way as to have quite acquired the character of substantives, From these

64

ADJECTIVES.

[129-

are to be distinguished certain neuters derived from adjectives without a suffix, and declined as nouns of the first declension
as,

@ut property,
After
etlt)a

9te(^t right,

^ot^

[9iot] red,

^eutfd)

German

(language).
5.

something,

tr)a

what, something, ni(^t nothing,

an adjective is treated neither as attributive nor as appositive, but as an adjective used as substantive, in apposition it is therefore of the first declension, and (regularly and usually) written with a capital initial. Thus, e mu^ no(^ ettr)a @ro^ere,no(f)etn)a Q^xxVx^txt^ fommen there must he coming something more that is greater and more splendid, tt)a id) raufameg erlitt wlutt that was dread:

ful

I endured, 5lnbercm of

ift

nid)t ^i
else.

it

is

nothing new,

t)on ettr)a

something

6. There is no strict and definite limit between the adjective belonging to a noun understood and the adjective used as a noun, and many cases admit of interpretation as either the one or the other.

The Adjective used as Adverb,

ly adjective, in

tive or iininflected

German, may be used in form as an adverb.

a whole hx)me, but

its

predica-

Thus,

ein ganseg ^avi

a wholly beautiful a quite heautifuUy

Ia(^te

house,

and

ein

ein g a n a fc^oncg ^a\i flans fd}on gebaute |)au

er |(^reibt o u t he writes well, er he laughed ijet much more foolishly. See further 363; and, for the adjective with adverbial form,

built house,

no^

t)tel

bummer

128.3.

[Exercise
131.

8.

Adjectives as Substantives and Adverbs.]

Participles as Adjectives.

Participles,

being verbal ad-

jectives, are treated in nearly all respects as adjectives

as

regards their various use, their mode of declension, and their comparison. See further 349 etc.
132. The double declension of the adjective is in some respects analogous with the two-fold mode of declension of nouns, and is often, The second like the latter, called "strong" and "weak" declension. or "weak" declension of adjectives, like that of nouns, is made upon the model of a theme ending in n. But the other shares in the pecubeing originally formed, it is liarities of the old pronominal inflection assumed, by the composition of a declined pronoun (long since lost in separate use) with the adjective theme. The principle on which the
;

136]

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIYES.

55

two is now based - namely, the economical avoidance of unnecessary explicitness is of comparatively recent introduction. The first declension was formerly used when the logical emphasis rested on the attribute the second, when it rested on the
distinction in the use of the

person or thing to which the attribute related

qualified

the "strong" adjective

an

indefinite or abstract object

the **weak," one definite or

individualized.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
Although the subject of comparison, or formation of adjectives of the comparative and superlative degrees, comes more properly under the head of derivation or
133.

derivative

word-formation,
treated here.

it will

be, for the

sake of practical convenience,

134.

ject to variation

The German adjective, like the English, is subby termination in order to express

degree of quality indicated ; a comparative and a superlative degree are thus formed from the simple adjective, which, with reference to them, is called positive.
135.
1.

superlative are the

eft. 2.

The endings forming the comparative and same as in English namely, er and

But
Adjectives ending in
in
el,

add only

for the comparative;

and those

en, er
e

usually (before the endings of declension,

er.

always) reject the

3.

of those terminations before

sibilant letter
(3,

Except after a

, ^, jd)),

and a

b or

usu-

ally (especially

when preceded by another consonant: and

e

excepting the nb of the present participle), the

lative

of the super-

ending
ft.

eft

is

regularly omitted,
e,

and the ending reduced

e

to simple

After a vowel, except

the

may be

either omit-

ted or retained.

Monosyllabic adjectives whose vowel is a, 0, or 136. U (not an) more usually modify those vowels in the comparative and superlative but there are many (about fifty, including several which may follow either method) that leave the vowel unchanged.
:

56
These adjectives are
baitgt, anxious
hax\d),

ADJECTIVES.

[136-

taljl,

bald

fcinft, gentle

harsh

!arg, miserly
!Iart, clear

fatt,

sated
relaxed

hlant, shining

tc^taff,

6Ia^t, pale
blo^, bare
bratt,

tnapp, close

\d)lani, slender
ff^^offf

la^m, lame

rough

brave

Bunt, ^ay bumpf, dull

\alil,

weary ^^^*' ^^^

la%,

ftarr, stiff
^**'^^'

^^^^

morfc^, roeri

ftraff, fense

fallow
*

mdt, naked
na^t,
ioe<

ftumm, c?um6
ftumpf, obtuse
toK, mad!
r)oU,full

falb,
\a\\(i),

false

p\att,Jki,t

\iad), flat

^Jtump, blunt
y:ci\^,

fro^,

happy frommt,piows
gtattt,
\)0^l,
j^olb,

q^^ck

UJa^r, /rue
tt)unb,
gflfjmt,

roi), rowgf/i

smoo<^

i^ni>/

^^wnd

wounded tame

hollow

fac^t, sq/i(

gartt, tender

gracious

Adjectives marked with a f in the list sometimes modify the vowel in comparison, but the unmodified form is in better usage.

The formation of comparatives and superlatives by the er and eft is not, as in English, hmited to monosyllabic adjectives. But superlatives of harsh combination are avoided nor are adjectives compared which (see 11 7^) are used only predicatively, and are incapable of declension. Of course, as in English, some adjectives are by their sig137.

endings

nification

excluded from comparison:

e.

g.,

gang entire, tobt

dead, trben earthen.

138.

Examples
Positwe.
beautiful
hot

Comparative.
f(^oner

Superlative.
ftf)onft

\^m,
Ifieife,

^ei^er trager
freier
alter

l^ei^eft

Irdge, la^y
fret,

trdgeft
freift, freieft

free
old

alt,

alteft

fromm, pix)us
furg, short

frfimmer
fiirger

frommft
fiirgeft

froi joyous bunfel, dark

tnagcr, thin
offen,

fro!)er

fro^ieft

bunfler

bunfelft

magrer, magerer
offner, offener

magerft
offenft

open

bemorfen, abandoned
Bebeutenb, significant

bertDorfener

bertDorfenft

Bebeutenber

Bebeutenbft

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
139.

67

Irregular and Defective Comparison.

A few adjectives are irregular in the comparative, or in 1. the superlative, or in both namely
:

Gut,
t)lel,

good

Befler

beft

mwih 1^0^, Ugh

nal^,

mel^r
l^ol^er

meifl

pd^ft
nd(i)]t

nigh

na!)er
grbfeer

gro^, great
2.

9ro|t (rarely gro^cft)

A few are
little

defective, lacking

a positive
minbeft
mittelft

tninber
mittler

mid
especially,
[in, in]

a class derived from prepositions or adverbs

inner
innerft

[au, out]
[ober, oben, above]
[unter, unten,
[t)or,

au^er
oBer
unter
t)orbcr
l^inler

du^erft
oBerft

hehw]

unterft

in /ronq
^inten, behind]

Dorberft
l^interft

[l^inter,
3.

Two
Me,

lack (as adjectives) both positive and comparative

[e^er,

ere]

sooner]

ti\\,

first

Me

le^t, lajst

From these two superlatives are irregularly formed new comparatives, erfler /ormer and letter latter. So also, from the comparative me^r more, the double comparative me'^rer (used almost only in the plural me^rere several) is made.
140.
1.

Declension of Comparatives and Superlatives.

In general, comparatives and superlatives are

subject to the

same rules

of

declension

as

their

positives, the simple adjectives.

That is to say, they are uninflected when used in apposition, as predicate, or as adverb (with exceptions noted just below), and declined when used attributively or Substantively and they have the same double declension as simple adjectives,
;

determined by the same circumstances. presents no irregularities, but

The comparative

2. a. The superlative does not often occur without an article or other limiting word before it, and is therefore more usually of the second declension. It occurs of the first declension especially in the vocative, after a limiting genitive, and in phrases which omit the article

58
thus,
ItcBfter

ADJECTIVES.

[140-

^runbe on

the sea's

35rubcr dearest brother, auf beg 9Jleere tiefunterftem very lowest bottom, in. Joc^fter (Jile in extreme

(higfwst) haste, meiner 2Bunf(i^e tuarmfter, innigfler the warmest, heartfelt of wishes.

most

my

"What is of much more importance, the superlative is not, b. Uke the positive and comparative, used predicatively in its uninflected form but for this is substituted an adverbial expression, formed with the preposition an and the definite article bem (dat.
;

sing, neuter), contracted into

Thus,
finb bie
S

er

ift

mir

am

1 1 e

ft e

am. n he

is

dearest to me,

ommer

Sage ju fur 3; im C>erbfte, no(^ fiirger; aber am fur = e ft c n tm SBinter in summer the days are too short ; in autumn
* '

yet shorter ; but shortest in winter.

This expression means literally at the dearest,' at the shortand so on, but is employed as general predicate in many cases where we could not substitute such a phrase for it. Its sphere of use borders close upon that of the superlative with preceding article, agreeing with a noun understood and it is often inaccurately used in place of the latter e. g., er ift am flei^igften unter alien d^iilern he is most diligent of all the scholars, for er ift ber flei^igfte 2c. lie is the most diligent, etc. Thus, we ought to say, biefer turm mar geftern am fteftigften this storm was most violent yesterday, but ber fleftrige turm mar ber l^eftigfte the storm of yesterday was the most violent (e. g., of the year).
est,'
;
:

that

Only aUerliebft is used directly as predicate was charming.

ha^ mar aHerliebft

For the superlative as adverb are also generally substic. tuted adverbial phrases formed with am, auf, and gum (see
363.2).
[

141.
1.

Comparison with Adverbs.

Adjectives not admitting of comparison in the usual manner, by er and eft (137), may be compared, as in English, with help of the adverbs mz^x more and am meiften most. Thus, er ift mir meftr feinb, alg i^ iftm lie is nmre unfriendly to

me
to

than me.

to

him,

er

mar mir am

meiften

niife

lie

was most

useful

2. When, of two qualities belonging to the same object, one is declared to be in excess of the other, the comparison is usually and more properly made with mel^r. Thus, er mar mel^r ta|)fer al flug he was more bold than prudent but, ma'^rer, al tlug unb fromm more true than prudent and

dutiful (Goethe).

145]
142.

COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES.
Additional Bemarks.

59

1. The superlative has, as in other languages, a twofold meaning and use: one implying direct comparison and eminence

above others (superlative

lative absolute).

relative) the other, general eminence, or possession of the designated quality in a high degree (super;

Thus,

f(^onfte

33Iumen

ifnost

beautiful (exceedingly beautiful)

flowers, bie fi^onften 33Iumen the most beautiful flowers (of all those had in view).

This distinction appears especially in adverbial superlatives see 363.2c.

2.

direct

Less often, the comparative comparison implied: thus,

I)ol}ere

is

cine Idngere

used absolutely, without Sfiebe a lengthy

speech,
3.

(5d)ulen high schools.

is

To a

superlative

often prefixed aHer, in order further to

ber aUerfd^bnfte the rnost beautiful

intensify its

meaning: thus,

of

all.

^Iler is the gen. pi. of all all, and so is used in its hteral sense, only combined with the adjective, and often in connections where its introduction as an independent adjunct of the adjective would

be impossible.
[Exercise
9.

Comparative and Superlative of Adjectives.]

MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE ADJECTIVE.

143.

The

adjective, in all its uses as adjective

and as substan-

tive (for its adverbial use, see

under Adverbs,
of

363), is hable to

be hmited by modifying adjuncts of various kinds.

144.
as,
]"e^r

1.

The customary adjunct

l^erglii^

an adjective

is

an adverb

gut very good,

fro^ heartily glad.

2.

An

adjective

may

taining a verb
(see 438.36).

and

its subject,

be limited by an adverbial clause, conand introduced by a conjunction

er ift fo gut, ba \^ iftn nur licBen !ann he is so good, that not but love him, frdnfer al man glaulite sicker than was supposed. An adverbial clause can hardly qualify an adjective, except as

Thus,

lean

specification of degree,

145.

An

adjective is often limited

it.

where a comparison is made. by a noun (or pronoun)

:

dependent on
1.

By a noun

in the genitive case

from

all obligation, x^x^x

^tnk gemi^

thus, lebtg aHer ^f(i(^t free sure of its prey: see 817.

; : :

60
2.

PRONOUNS.

[14:5-

By a noun
By

in the dative case

thus, t'^m ctQCn peculiar to

Mm,
3.

glei(^ einer Seid^e like

a corpse: see 223. a noun in the accusative case, but only very rarely, and
:

in predicative construction

thus,

id^

bin e miibe

I am

tired of

it

see 229.
4.

By an
to

easy

infinitive, with procure : see 344.

its

sign gu to: thus,

leic^t

gu t)erf(^affen

146.
is,

An

adjective

is

limited

by a

by a noun whose

relation to

it is

thus, t)om (^aumc rein free

from

that defined by a preposition scum, anQcnel^m t)on (55eftalt

:

prepositional phrase

agreeable in figure.

147.

1.

cedes

it

except the adverb genug erumgh.

:

An

adverbial adjunct to an adjective always pre-

2. An adjective used attributively must be preceded by all its modifying adjuncts thus, aller t)on bem beut]d)en 9f{ei(^c abl^dngi= gen, ober bagu gel^briQen SBolferftdmme of all tJw rax^es dependent on

the
3.

German

empire, or belonging

to

it.

Adjectives used in the predicate or in apposition may take the limiting noun, with or without a preposition, either before but the adjective more usually follows and or after them necessarily, if the limiting word be a pronoun without a prep: ;

osition.

148. Participles, as verbal adjectives, share in constructions of the adjective ; see 349 etc.

most

of the

PRONOUNS.
149. In German, as in English, substantive pronouns and pronominal adjectives (or adjective pronouns) are for the most part not distinguished from one another (as they are distinguished in French) by different forms, but the same word is used, according to circumstances, with either value. It will be convenient, therefore, to treat both classes together, explaining under each word its own proper use or uses.

L15CL The principal

1.

classes of

pronouns are

2.

3.

4.

The personal; The possessive The demonstrative The interrogative

(including the determinative)

152]
5.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

61

The The

relative (all of

which are also either de-

monstrative or interrogative)
6.

indefinite,

The determinative,

indefinite,

with the indefinite numerals. and numeral pronouns are

in

part of ambiguous character, being intermediate classes through which the pronouns shade off into ordinary adjectives and numerals.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
161.

The personal pronouns

Singular,

are

First Peeson.

r
1

N. G. D.
A-

^
mtr
ntid^^

meiner, mein

^^
to

'

Plural.
t^ir

we

of me

me me

unfer of us un^ K-^vW to us

un0

us

Second Person.

N. G. D. A.

bu
beiner, bein bir

thou

xf)X

ye

of thee
to thee

euer
euc^

of you
to you you

bic^-

thee

tu6)

Third Person, Singular,

\
N.
X^.

masc.

fern.

neut.

er
feiner, fetn

he

fie

she

e
feiner, fein

it

of him

t^rer
if)r

D. A.

if)m
i()n

him him
to

of her to her
her

of it
to
it

it)m

fie

Plural m. f. n.

N. G. D.
A.
also a

fie

they

i^rer

i^nen
fie

of them to them them

/
phrases
;

Si(^, the special reflexive of the third person (see 155.3), is member of this class, a personal pronoun.

152.

1.

5[Rein, bein, jein

still

are older forms of the gen. singular,

now

antiquated, but

met with

in certain

i()r,

for

62
t^rer,
^,

PEONOXTNS.
unfer,

[152-

does not occur unferer, for not unknown, but rare.

and

curcr, for euer,

are

Examples are

il)r

Snftnimente
fein

f^ottet

me, n)a bebarf man

2.

what do they require of him?

mein ye instruments mock ntd)t au^

SSerac^tutiQ euer rmt out

of contempt of you.

These genitives in composition with l^alBen, tDegen, and and unfer and euer, in like tDiHen add a wholly anomalous et manner, add a t: thus, meinetl^arben, beinettt)eQen, urn feinettDillen,
;

unferttDegen, euert!&alben, etc.

3. Genitives of the personal pronouns are everywhere of rare occurrence, and only as objects of verbs (219) and adjectives

(217).

For the genitive Umiting a noun

is

substituted a posses-

sive adjective (158.2).

il53v
1.

Use of the Personal Pronouns in address.

in English, the

In German, as

pronoun

of the

second pers.

singular, bu thou, is intercourse of Ufe.

of poetry

no longer used

in address, in the ordinary

and and further, in that of familiarity the familiarity of intimacy, between equals, as between husband and wife, near
It is retained (as in English) in the language of worship
:

relations,

or particular friends,

also
-

among

children;

the

toward inferior age and otation, as on the part of any one toward young children, or on the part of teachers or employers toward youthful pupils or .A^^vesitsf; and even, sometimes, the familiarity of insult or comtempt.
familiarity

2.

The pronoun

of the second pers. plural

il)r

ye

etc.

was

at one time generally current in

Germany

for the singular (like

our you), and is still met with in poetry or narrative: but modern use authorizes it only in addressing more than one of

such persons as may, singly, be addressed with bu. 3. The singular pronouns of the third person er he, fie she, etc. were also once used in customary address, but soon sank to the condition of address by an acknowledged "superior to an Inferior as by a monarch to a subject, a master to a servant, and the like with which value they are still retained, but are * going out of vogue.

Employed in this way, er and fie and and properly written with a capital.

their cases are usually

4 At
^[ie they

present, the pronoun of the third pers. plural

and

its

possessive,

xijx

their,

are alone

154]

PBONOUNS
in the

ADDRESS.

63

sense of you, your, in common life, person or more than one. When thus used, they are, for distinction, written with capital letters, @te, S^nen, Sljr, etc. (but the reflexive
allowed,
in addressing either one
fti^ is

not so written).
id)

Thus,
93Zuf)e

banfe

Sl^nen

QCficben l^aben

fiir S^re efalliflfeit, bag ie fi(^ bie thank you for your kindness, in that you

have given yourself the

trouble.

The verb with (gie is always in the plural, whether one person or more be intended. But a following adjective is either
singular or plural, according to the sense
Ii(f)er
:

thus, ie ungliicf=

you unhappy man! but ie unglucfUd)en you unhappy ones! The use of @ie in address is quite modem, not having become
till

generally established
5.

about the middle of the

last century.

Some

authorities write all the pronouns of address with

;

but this is not to be apcapital, even ^u, ^i(^, (Ju(f), etc. proved, except in such documents as letters, where the words are to reach the person addressed through the eye.

\154}
1.

Peculiarities in the use of

Pronouns of

the third person.

As a general rule, the pronoun

of the third person,

in the singular, takes the

it

gender of the noun to which

er

relates.

Thus, when speaking of a hat (ber Qvi\), we use a pen (bie Seber), fie; of bread {)ia^ 33rob), e.
are neuter,

and

i'^n

of

Excepted from this rule are such words as SBeib woman, which thou^ designating female persons also diminutives (neuter) of personal appellations, such as 5!Jidbrf)en girl, f^rdulein young lady, ^ndblein little hoy : a pronoun referring to one of these often follows the natural gender, instead of the
;

grammatical.
2.

I^inb child is represented by e it, as with us. But these pronouns are seldom used in the genitive or dative for things without life. For the genitive is substituted
;

the genitive of a demonstrative, ber or berfelBe for the dative, the dative of the same or, if governed by a preposition, a combination of that preposition with the adverb 'tio, (or bar)
:

there.

thereafter,

.Thus, bamit therewith, bat)on thereof, barin therein, barnad^ and so on, are used instead of mit i^m or i!^r with it, etc. ^ar is put instead of ba before a vowel or n.

64

PBONOUNS.

[154r-

also in other cases

Similar substitutions of the demonstratives are often made where we employ the personal pronoims

see below, 171.

3. The neuter accusative c is, in like manner, almost never allowed after a preposition, but is replaced by ba before the preposition thus, bafiir, barum, for fiir e for it, urn e about it.
:

4.

The neuter
It
is,
:

has certain special uses.

it
it

a.

as in EngUsh, the indefinite and impersonal subject

thus, e regnet
f el^en

of a verb
e freut
b.

rains, e
rejoices

tft

fein 33ruber it is his brother,

to see you.
:

m\^, ie gu

me

In this use, it often answers to our there before a verb as, ^ern barin there was a kernel in it, e mirb Sf^iemanb tommcn there will no one come.
e ttjar ein

ical device for shifting

serves the purpose of a mere grammatthe true subject to a position after the verb, and is itself untranslatable as, e fperren bie 9flie|en ben ctnfamen SBeg the giants bar the lonely way, e fur(i)te bie (^btter ^a 5Jlenf(5^en0ef(!^Ie(5^t let the human race fear the gods.
c.

Yet more

often,

it

d. In all these uses, the verb agrees in number with the following noun, the logical subject or the predicate thus, e tDaren bie alIerfd)onften it was ("or, they were) the very finest ones.
:

also as predicate, e. (J also stands as indefinite object representing another word or phrase already used, and of which the repetition is avoided (to be rendered, then, by so, thus, \^ felber bin e ni(i)t me^r be so, do so, or the like) I myself am so [what I was] no longer, al i(^ e no(^ fonnte when I was still able to do so.
;
:

/.

pression,
(i.

Instead of it is I, and the hke, the German reverses the exand says \^ bin e I am it, ie njoren e you were it

e., it

was

you), etc.
:

the (^, in all situations, is liable to be abbreviated to ^ apostrophe should in such case always be written, but is someg.

times omitted.
166.) Beflexive use of the Personal Pronouns.

XTa. reflexive pronoun is one which represents the same person or thing as the subject of a sentence, but in the relation of object namely, as object, direct or indirect, of the verb in the sentence or (less properly) in a prepositional adjunct to that

verb.


155]
It is usually to
self

PEBSONAL PEONOUNS.

66

be rendered by a personal pronoun with the added: thus, id) tr)af(^e m\^ I wash myself, \^ f(^mei(^Ic ttitr I flatter myself \^ fc^one tnetner (or nttc^) I spare myself i^ fto^e fie t)on mir I thrust them from myself (or, from me).

word

plural, the reflexive

and second persons, singular and pronoun is the same with the personal in every case, the latter being used in a reflexive sense, without any adjunct corresponding to our self (but compare 5, below).
\2^

In the

first

The same
as, er fd)ont

is the case with the genitive of the third person feiner he spares himselfhut

ir3.)ln the third person, there is a special reflexive

prbnoun,

ftc^,

which must always be used instead

of the

dative or accusative of a personal pronoun, after either

verb or preposition, when the subject of the sentence It has the value of both accusative and is referred to.
dative, of either

number, and of any gender.

he, she,

Thus,

er, fie, e tDcifd^t fi(^, fd)mei(^elt jic^

or

it

washes or
fiir fid)

flatters himself, herself,

or

itself, fie n)afd)en fic^,

ift

fc^meic^eln \i^ they

wash
4.

themselves, or flatter themselves, ba

an unb

gut

thut is good in

and by

itself.

in English), the reflexive

In German, as in French (there is no corresponding usage pronoun in the plural is not seldom employed in what is called a "reciprocal" sense, answering to our one another.
Thus,
geben
tt)ir

seen one another,

ft c^

we ought never to have euc^ %ie hate each other, fie (ie) ba 3eid)en they (you) give one another the signal.
1;)aikn

un
\\)i

nte fe^en foUen

"^affet

Instead of the reciprocal reflexive (or, rarely and redundantly, along with it), the word einanber one another is often employed.

show
5.

Only the connection and the requirement of the sense can in any case whether the pronoun has its directly or its
elbft (or felBer) self

reciprocally reflexive value.

may be added
;

to

any

reflexive pro-

noun, for greater emphasis

reciprocal sense.

or, in

the plural, to exclude the

It may also be added for emphasis to any pronoun, or noun, answering to our myself, thyself, itself, etc.

; :

66
156.

PEONOUNS.

'

[156is

The

dative of a personal pronoun

ben
c.

sometimes

intro:

duced into a clause

Ia|

expletively, for liveliness of expression

as,

mtr ^min

%lkn

let

the old

man

in here {for me):

compare 222.

III.

[Exercise

10.

Personal Pronouns.]

POSSESSIYE PKONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

157.

The personal pronouns

are always substantive

their corresponding adjectives

are the
unjer,
euer,
xtjX,

possessives

namely
mem,

my

bein, thy
fein, his, its

our your
your)

their

t^r,

her

(3i)r,

{ein.

The possessives of the masc. and neut. singular are the same, The possessive of the fern, singular and that of the plural
;

of all genders also agree in

is

form and, as the latter (see 153.4:) used in the sense of a second person, \tjx has three meanings, her, tlieir, and your (the last of which is distinguished to the eye by the capital initial).

1. It will be noticed that the possessives correspond 158. closely in form with the genitives of the personal pronouns,

being, in fact, the

2.

same words

in

a different condition.

The

ofQce, also, of the possessive, agrees with that of the

genitive of a noun.

The genitive of the pronoun is very seldom used to limit a noun, but for it is substituted a possessive in the form of an adjective, qualifying the noun (216.3).

Thus, bie ^Irme be 9Jlanne the man's arms; but feine ^rme his arms, not bie ^rme feiner the arms of him. Karely, such cases occur as 33el^errfrf)un() eurer felbft control of yourself (a verbal noun imitating the construction of the verb).

(^^i As regards their declension, possessives are

treated in the same
1.

manner

as other adjectives.

They are used

33e(i)er tft

predicatively in their simple or thematic

form.

Thus, ber

bein the goblet is thine, bie

^raut

jei

mein he

the bride mine.


169]
2.

POSSESSIVES.

67

When
(63).

dinary
cin

office),

used attributively (their regular and orthey are declined, not like ber tlm, but like Thus, mcin my is declined
Singular,
Plural.
n.

VI
N.
Gr.

t.

m.

f.

n.

mein meineg

meine
meiner
tneiner

mein meine

meine
meiner

D.
A.

meinem
tneinen

meinem
mein

meinen
meine

meine

and

unfer our

unfere
unferer

N. G. D.
A.

unfer
unfereg

nnfer
nnferel

unfere

unferer

imferem
unferen

nnferer
nnfere

unferem
unfer

unferen
unfere

Unfer and eucr follow the same rules as other adjectives (120.3) respecting the contraction of their endings thus, we may have unfere or unfre, unfere^, unfer^, or unfre, and so on.
:

3. The possessive is also often used substantively, or with the value of a pronoun (not qualifying a noun expressed, but representing one understood) in that case, it is declined in full like an adjective of the first or strong declension: thus, nominatives meiner, meine, meine, meine.
;

For example, ba
thy goblet;
brain, like
4.
it

ift

nid)t bein ^ed)er; c

e.,

ift

mein er

that is not

is

my

mineji. own.

my

goblet); fein Q'xxn, Vok meineS his

In the same substantive use, the possessive may be preceded by the definite article and it is then declined hke any other adjective in like circumstances, or by the second or
;

weak

adjective declension (119.2)

ber, bc

thus,

nom.

ber, bie,

ba meine,

gen. bc^,

meinen, etc.
fein 9lid)tcrfhil)l
ift

seat is not

loft mir bag ^^ers, baji heart free, that I may touch yours.
;

For example, mine

nid)t

id)

ber meine his judgmentb a eure riiftre set my

Again, for the simple possessive, in its absolute or prodefinite article, is substituted a derivative These are never used except in ig: thus, mcinig, unfrifi, etc. with the article, and therefore always follow the second adjective declension. The nominatives of the whole series are
5.

nominal use after the

68
Singular,

PBONOTJNS.

[159
Plural.

m. bcr meinige
ber beinige
ber feinige

f.

m.
bag meinige
bag beinige ha^ feinige bag i^rigc

f.

n.

bic

meinige

bie meinigen,

mine

bie beinige bie feinige

bie beinigen, thine bie feinigen, his, its bie i^rigen, hers bie unfrigen, ours bie eurigen,

ber i^rige

bie i^rige bie unfrige

bie eurige
bie il^rige

ber unfrige
ber eurige ber i'^rige

ha^ unfrige
bag eurige bag
il^rige

yours

bie il)rigen, theirs

[ber Sl^rige

bie 3t)rige

bag 3^rigc

bie S^rigen, yours]

Neither the derivatives in tg, nor the simple possessives preceded by the article, are ever used attributively, quaUfyiQg a

noun expressed.
used predicatively, assert o^vIlerslup pure and simple thus, ut ift mein the hat belongs to me, and to no one else. Tlnntx, ber meine, and ber meinige are nearly equivalent expressions, adding to the idea of property that of particularizing or identifying the thing owned
SJJein etc.,
:

ber

thus, er

ift

meiner

etc.

it

is the

one that belongs to me.

;

S)er meinige etc.

are

most common in

colloquial use

ber

meine

etc.

are preferred in

higher styles.

160.

The absolute possessives preceded by the

: :

article (ber

meine, ber meinige, etc.) are sometimes used substantively (like other adjectives see 129) the neuter singular denoting 'what

belongs to one' (his property, his duty, or the hke) the plural * those who belong to one' (as his family, his friends).
;

Thus, unfere $f(id)t ift, auf ba Unfrige gu feften, unb fiir bie Hnfrigen gu forgen our duty is to attend to our business and take care of our dependents, er ermunterte bie einen he encouraged his men, gemorbet t)on ben einen auf bem emen murdered by his own people on his own ground.
161. The German, like the French, avoids the use of the possessives in many situations where we employ them either putting in their stead the definite article only, where the possessor
:

is sufficiently

pointed out by the connection or, along with the even without it), using the dative of the corresponding personal pronoun, where it can be construed as indirect object of the verb in the sentence (see 222. III. b).
;

article (or

mir

er fc^iittelte ben ^opf he shook his head, ber grofl bringt burd) afle ^noc^en the frost penetrates through all my bones, ben al he fell upon her neck, e !am mir in er pel i^r

Thus,

um

(Sinn

it

came

into

my mind.

164]

DEMONSTKATIVES.

69

162. cro and ^ftto are old-style expressions, used in ceremonious address, before titles, etc. thus, ^^^ro 3}laieftdt your majesty, ^ero 33efe^le your commands. Before titles, jeine and feiner are often abbreviated to e. and r. and for cucr, cure, is written ^tt).
:

DEMONSTEATIYES.
163.

The proper demonstratives

and
jcn yon, that.
;

are bcr

this,

that,

bie^3 this, that,

that of adjectives

Their original value is but they are now with equal free-

dom used adjectively, qualifying a noun expressed, and absolutely, or as pronouns, standing for a noun understood.
same word with our the, that, and they; bieS is our yon, and may by this correspondence be conveniently distinguished from jeb (jeber) every (see 190), with which it is apt to be confounded by learners.
3)er is historically the
this, these, those ;

our

jen is

is declined like the article \)tx (63) being, in fact, the same word, and distinguished from it only by greater distinctness, of

164.

1.

^er when used adjectively

:

meaning and

of utterance.
ift

Thus, ber Drt

other.

iibel regiert

that place is

ill

governed, ber einc

6ot bie, bie anberen anbere,

aben one has

these gifts, others

have

liar

^cr when used absolutely, or as pronoun, has pecuforms in a part of its cases namely, the genitives singular and plural and the dative plural where it adds cii to the adjective forms, at the same time doub2.

ling their final

m.

>

thus,
n.

Singular.
t.

Plural. m. f. n.
bie

N. ber G. beffen, (be^) D. bem

A.

bie

ha>

beren, (ber)

beffen, (be^)

beren, (berer)

ber
bie

bent

benen
bie

ben

ha^

The genitives singular be^, ber, be^ are also allowed, but very rarely used, except the neuter in certain compounds, as be^^
we^en, beS^db (also written be^megen^ be^l^alb).

70

PRONOUNS.

[164-

In the genitive plural, berer is used instead of beren when a limiting addition, usually a relative clause, follows thus, berer,
:

bie

mi^

lieben of those

who hve me,

berer t)Dn $ari of

them of

Paris (^people from Paris).

^te^ and jen are declined as adjectives of the first declension, or like the definite article (only with c^ instead of a^ in the nom and ace. neuter) ; and without any difference, whether they are used as adjectives or
165.

as pronouns.
m.

Thus,
Singular.
f n.

Plural. m. f. n.
biefe

N.
G.

biefer

biefe

biefe, (bieS)

biefeg

biefer biefer
biefe

biefe^

biefer

D.
A.

biefem
biefen
ace.

-biefem
biefe^, (bie)

biefen
biefe

The nom. and

(or bie^),

neuter biefeS is often abbreviated to bie especially when the word is used as a pronoun.

166.
1.

Use of the Demonstratives.

and
is

that.

liefer is a general demonstrative, answering to both this If, however, the idea of remoteness in place or time

by the antithesis of this and that, or any other way, that must be represented by jener. Often, biefer and jener are to be rendered the latter (biefer, the one last mentioned, the nearer) and the f<yrmer (iener, the one mentioned earlier, the remoter). ^ie and ba are also sometimes contrasted as this and that. 2. ^er has a great range of meaning, from the faint indefiniteness of the article to the determinateness of biefer depending mainly on the emphasis with which it is uttered. Special uses worthy of note are as follows a. er is the demonstrative employed in such phrases as unfere $ferbe unb bie ber Sremben our horses and those of the strangers, ber mil ben ^ellen ^ugen he (the one) with the sharp
at all emphasized, either
in

eyes.

Karely, berienige (168)

is

used in the same sense.

h. It takes the place of the pronoun of the third person used emphatically thus, b i e mu^ rec^t bumm f ein she (this person) must he right stupid, ber fiittrc ^rdl)'u mciy he (that one) be food
:

for CTQW^,

169]
3.

DEMONSTBATIVES.

fl
and
(rarely)

The neuters

singular, bQ, bie (or bie|, biefe^),

are used, like e (154.4), as indefinite subjects of verbs and, if a plural predicate noun follows the verb, the latter agrees with the noun: thus, ba ift mcin 3Sater that is my father, ba finb bie Sftcisunflen those are the charms, bie ift ber ^ampf ber
iene,

sometimes used
tliose

combat of horses and fishes. q is a half-humorous, half-contemptuous way of persons, singular or plural: e. g. \)a^ fc^lenbert tt)ie bie d^neden
^^ferbe

unb

f^if(i)e

this is the

in

people

loiter like snails.

of the adverbs ba and ^ier with prepositions are very frequently used instead of cases of the demonstratives with governing prepositions thus, ):)ami therewith, barin^/iemn,
4.
:

Compounds

for mit bem, in

in biefem.

bem

ftiermit herewith, pterin herein, for

mit biefem,

5. For the demonstratives as substitutes for the personal pronoun, see below, 171.

DETEEMINATIYES.
167. Certain pronominal words, connected with the demonstratives in derivation or meaning, or in both, are ordinarily

called determinatives.
1. This is made up of the definite article ber, a derivative from |en yon, that (like meinig from mein, The latter part never occurs without the former, etc., 159.5). and they are written together as a single word, although each is separately declined, the one as the article the other as an adjective of the second declension. Thus,

168.

^erienige.

and

ienig,

Singular.

m.

f.

n.

Plural. m. f. n.

N.
G. D. A.

berjenige

bicienige

bngjeuige

bieienigen

begienigen

berienigen

be^jenigen

berienigen

bemjenigen
benienigen

berjenigen
bteienige

bemieuigen
ba^ienige

benienigen
bieienigen

2. ^erienige is used both as adjective and as pronoun, more often the latter. Its specific ofiice is that of antecedent to a following relative in this ofQce it is interchangeable with the demonstrative ber, as the latter 's more prosaic and colloquial
;

substitute

gufrieben he (that

thus, berienige, or berjenige 5J?ann, mclc^er man) who is wise is contented.

tt)eife ift, ift

ticle

^erfelbe. 1. This word is composed of the definite arand the adjective fclb. Both its parts are declined, after the manner of berjenige (168.1).

169.

72
2.

PRONOUNS.
^erfelBc is

[169literally

both adjective and pronoun, and means

it

the same.

But

also interchanges with the demonstratives as

substitute for the pronoun of the third person (see 171).

3. For berjelbe are sometimes used berfclbige and felbiger, which, however, are antiquated expressions, ^er namlic()e is its equivalent in the full sense of the same.
felbft (155.5) are indeclinable forms of the same always following, appositively, the noun or pronoun which they qualify, often at a distance from it. Selbft is also used adverbially, meaning even, and as substantive in the phrase t)on felbft of its own accord.

elber adjective

and

jelb,

elb is also, rarely, declined after biefer as after bet. The genitive of berfelbe is written either be^felben or befjelben: the former is theoretically preferable (3.1), the latter more usual
(likewise baSfelbe, neuter).

170. dIc^. 1. oI(?^ is the English such, and is used, both as adjective and as pronoun, in nearly the same manner. It is declined like biefer (165) or, when preceded by ein, as any other adjective would be in the same situation (124).
;

2. Such a is either fo^ ein, or ein foI(f)er, the adjective being undeclined when placed before the article. For as, when used after such with the value of a relative pronoun, the German uses the relative: thus, foI(i)en, bie i^n fannten to such as knew him.

171.

The Demxmstratives and Determinatives as

Substitutes.

The pronouns of these classes are often used where the third personal pronoim or its possessive

we put

1. For the emphatic pronoun of the third person (166.26), and the antecedent of a relative clause (168.2), as already explained. 2. Where the demonstrative meaning helps avoid an ambiguity: as, er ging mit meinem ^Setter unb beffen o{)n, or bem ol^ne b e f e I b e n he went with my cousin and his (the latter' s) son; or an awkward- repetition as, er fjai eine c^mefter: fennen ie btejclbe (for fennen ie fie)? he has a sister ; do you know
:

her?
3. In the obUque cases, where things and not persons are intended as, [^ bin beffen benotI)iGt [benotigt] I am in need of it In like manner, with prepo(fetner would mean of him, rather). sitions, instead of the adverbial compounds with ba (154.2,3) as, id) "i^aU einen (Garten, unb Qtijt oft in bemfelben (or barin) fi)a3ieren I have a garden, and often go to walk in it.
:

; :

174]
4.

INTEBKOGATIYES.

73
made,
in

The

substitution, especially of berfelbe, is often

popular use, in cases where no reason can be assigned, and where the personal pronoun would be preferable.
[Exercise
11.

Possessive and Demonstrative Pronouns.]

INTEEEOGATIVES.
172.
it)ctd)er

The

interrogatives are
3Ser and

U)er
lt)a

who,

tt)a^

what,

and

what, tvhich.

are pronouns only;

n)eld)er is

primarily adjective, but also frequently used

as pronoun.
SBer and tva^ are peculiar in having no plural conveying no idea of gender, but being distinguished precisely as our who and what, the one denoting persons, the other things. They are declined as follows

173.

1.

also, in

N. G. D.
A.
2.

tDer

who
whose

tva
meffen, (tDe)

what
of what

meffen, (tre^)

tuem
tt)en

whom whom
to

tra

what

SSefe

genitive of

as genitive of mx is antiquated and out of use, and as tt)a is hardly met with except in compounds like
;

TDett)egen, tDcS^alb (or

no dative

me^tregen, mefe^alB). 2Ba has regularly for both its dative and accusative as governed by

prepositions are substituted compounds of those prepositions with the adverb tt)0 or iDor where: thus, tDomit wherewith, with
what, tDorin wherein, in what,
bamit, ftiermit, etc.
:

trofiir

wherefore, for what (hke

see 154.2, 166.4).

3. Popular colloquial usage sometimes puts tt)a, both as accusative and as dative, after prepositions thus, tnit toa^ with what, |iir tDa for what, and instances of such use are occasionally met with in hterature.
:

4.

crr

2Be is, quite rarely, used adjectively fei of what disposition the master is.
1.

as,

tt)

^ 8inne bcr

174.

SSeld^ is

declined like btc (165), or as an

adjective of the first declension.

As an

adjective, quali-

fying a

noun expressed,
it is

it

means

either what or which;

used absolutely,

our which.

74

PRONOUNS.

[174r-

2. Before etn or an adjective, especially when used in an exclamatory way, tt)el(^ generally loses its declensional endings, and appears in its undeclined form.

tt)el(^e 33u(^ what (or which) hook, ml^t t)Dn biefen which of these books: votl^ tiefe 6ummen, trelc^ ein l^eller ^on what deep mmimiur, what a clear tone ! tDeld) f (^Ie(i)te Sitten what bad manners

Thus,

^iic^ern

175. 2Ba with the preposition fiir fm- after it (sometimes separated from it by intervening words), is used in the sense of what sort of, what kind of. It is then invariable, and the words to which it is prefixed have the same construction as if they stood by themselves.

Thus, n)a Iiaft bu fiir einen 5tf(^ Gefangen what sort of a fish have you caught ? t)on tt)a fiir 3^ii9^TT, unb mit n)a fiir eitiem 2Ber!geuQe, mac^en ie ba of what kind of stuffs, and with what sort of an instrument, do you make that ?

176.

1.

All the interrogatives are used also as rel-

atives (see 177).

2Ba stands often for ettt)a something; tt)er, in the sense of one, is quite rare tt)el(f), as pronoun only, is famiUarly, but not elegantly, used to signify some.
2.
;

some

Thus, nD(^ raa^ mertft [mert] still worth something, \^ mo(^te Xva^ I would fain profit somewhat, meinte mer aii ber ^efell= fdjaft remarked some one in the company, ^aBen <Bk ^flaumen ? geben Sie mtr tDclc^e have you plums? give me some.
^jrofitiren
3.

2Ba
it)te

is

used not rarely for um

(^efid)t

n)a,

or tDorum

why?

thus,

tt)a Birgft

bu bein

why

hidest tJwu thy face?

for

how: thus,

\va^ mein arme Q^x^ gittert

and sometimes how my poor heart

trembles!

RELATIVES. 177.

The demonstrative pronoun

(not

adjective

164.1) ber, and the interrogatives Wqx, Wa^S, IDQ^ fiir, and treldjer (both adjective and pronoun), are used also as relatives they are declined, as such, in the same manner as when having their more original and proper
;

value.
178.

er and

tt)eld)er

ing an antecedent,

are the ordinary simple relatives followIn the nominative and accusative, they are

179]

RELATIVES.

75

spealier or writer.

used interchangeably, according to the arbitrary choice of In the dative (except after prepositions) the

cases of ber are rather preferred to those of tt)el(^er; and, in the genitive (as pronouns), only befjen and beren are ever met with.

and ma^, Voa fiir, and tDeId)cr used adjectively when meaning which), like who and what in English, are properly compomid relatives, or antecedent and
179.
1.

2Ber

(also absolutely,

relative combined.

Thus, met

Bel 9lad)t t)orBeifu5r,.

ever) went by at night

fommt au(^ nic^t come out of him,

'jatj bie Slammen he who (whosaw the flames, tt)a im DJ^enfc^en nic^t tft, aua i^m what (wliatever) is not in a man does not

id)

tt)ifl

Deraeffen, tDcr id^ Bin,

unb \va
iiix

id) litt

I will
tt)

forget
fie

who I am and what I have

liel^

suffered, mit

iranbelt,

bie SBei^e

with her walks he on

forget what
?

whom

she has bestowed

consecration,
5errf(^te

man

fnd)te gn t)ergeffen,
to
f

one sought
mei^,
is

n)eld)e ^otl) [5^ot] uBeraH distress was everywhere prevail-

ing,

rt)er

m a

iir eine Sift

ba^tnter ftedt

who knows what

sort

of a trick

hidden in that

2. But the demonstrative is repeated, for distinctness, after the compound relative, much more often in German than in English

Thus,

tt)er nid)t t^ormart^ ge'^t,

ber fommt
to

guriide

does not advance, he (that one) falls back,

a bu nie

who (whoever) Derlierft, ha^

to bewail,

mu^t bu
ivliat

Beiceinen

what you never

lose,

that

you have

tt)a id) fiir errUd)feit Gefd)ant,

ba

ftel)t

nid)t in ber SBorte

^ad)t

kind of magniftcerice

I saw,

that is not in the

power of words

to tell
3. As occasional irregular variations of the mode of relative expression may be noticed the use of the personal pronoun instead of ber as antecedent after mer, of ber instead of mer as preceding relative, of tDer instead of U)eld)er after ber, etc.

4.

translated

The examples show that mer and tt)a are sometimes to be by whoever and whatever. To give them more

distinctly this indefinite sense, they

mediately, or,

more

often, after

may be followed (either imone or more interposed words)

by

auc^ even, nur only, or immer ever, especially the first: thus, iDaS er and) tftue whatever he may do. ^lud) is often added with the same sense to relative adverbs thus, mo er and) fei wherever he may be, \mt fie fid) and) baQegcn ftreBcn however they
:

may

remt.

76
5.

PRONOUNS.

[179-

After a neuter pronoun, personal, demonstrative, or inettt)a,

definite (as c, ba, alle^,

md)t, manrf)e, Did, tDcnig), also

an adjective (especially a superlative) taken in a general sense and not referring to some definite object, the compound
after
relative tDa is used, instead of the simple relative ba or
tt)el(^e.

h)a er jelbft erja^Ite about that which he was himself relating, qKc^ U) a t)on bir mir fom all that came to me from thee, ni(^t tt)a meine 5!JieinunQ ftorte nothing that sliould shake my opinion, ba erfte tuaS fie i)orten the first thing which
iiber ba,

Thus,

they heard.

That
cedent

is

is

to say, for an adjective clause qualifying the antesubstituted a substantive clause in apposition with it

(436.3c.).
6. Like ba (166.3), tt)a is sometimes used collectively of persons in the singular or plural thus, \x\i\) iibt jt(f) tt)a ein 9}^eifter tDerben tuiU whoever would he a master begins to practice
:

early.

For the dative or accusative case of a relative (either ^ 180. simple or compound) governed by a preposition is usually substituted, when things and not persons are referred to, the compound of the preposition with an adverb (as in the case of the demonstratives and interrogatives see 166.4, 173.2). But the compounds of ha (bat)on, barau^, etc.) are only rarely used relatively, those of tt)o (n)Dt)on, tDorau, etc.) being preferred.
:

181. A verb agreeing with a relative is put in the third person even when the antecedent of the relative was a pronoun of the first or second person (or a vocative), unless that pronoun be repeated after the relative.

Thus,
bling

um

mid), bcr

id)

refuge with tlwe, U\i bu

e,

rettet su bir about me, who am taking ber fo gittert is it tlwu who art trem-

thus?hut um

mi(!),

bcr

td^ mi(f) rette

bift

bu

e,

ber bu

fo

3itterft

; gliirffeliger ^lepnber, ber bu

^ialknm^,i\dt)Z]i fortunate

Alexander, that didst never see Italy

1. In antiquated or archaic style, o is used as indeclin182. f able relative, representing the nominative and accusative cases

of ber
2.

and

votl^tx

thus, ber DJlanu,

is

o e

agte the

man who said it.

:

In a

like

manner, ba
im

appended to a

relative to express

indefiniteness, itself being wholly untranslatable

atl^tnet fatmet]

thus, trer ba
light.

rofiQcn Sid)t

whoever Weathes in the rosy

188]

INDEFINITES.

77

The relative, often omitted in English, must always be 183. xpressed in German: thus, bic greunbe, b ie id) IteBe the friends

love.

[Exercise

12.

Interrogative and Eelative Pronouns.]

INDEriNITE PKONOUNS AND INDEFINITE NUMERALS.

184. A class of words needs some attention under the above head, in connection with the pronouns, as being more or less related with the latter, and differing from ordinary nouns and adjectives, in derivation or in office, or both. 185.
30^ an

one.^an

(originally the

same word with

a verb,

3!Jlann

man)

is

employed as wholly
on,

indefinite subject to

like the

our one, they, people, we, taken indefinitely. Thus, cme says, they say, it is said. If any other case than a nominative is required, einer (195) is used instead.

French

man

f acit

186. Semanb some one, 5^iemattb no one.These are compounds of DJlann man with the adverbs je ever and nic never. They ought, therefore, to be declinable only as substantives of the first declension and it is proper always so to treat them, adding in the genitive, and leaving the other cases like the nominative. But (especially where the phrase would otherwise be ambiguous or indistinct) they are allowed to take the endings em or en in the dative, and en in the accusative.
;

one, except in

3^iemanb no one must be used instead of nt(^t an interrogative sentence.

Semanb not any

This word is made up of Jeber 187. Sei^si^ntann every one. every (190) and 5}^ann man, but is used without distinction of gender. Its first part is undeclined, and it is varied only by adding to form the genitive.

These words are in188. (Jttt)a something, nid)t nothing. folvariable in form, and always have a substantive value. lowing limiting adjective is treated as a substantive in apposi-

tion with

them

(129.5)
:

a noun after etlDaS thus, often used adverbially.

and the same construction is usual with Both are etir)a elb some money.
ettDa^,

For

n)a in the

sense of

see 176.2.

usually and regularly used instead of nlc^t etn)a not anything, except when the sentence is interrogative as well as negative.
5^i(^t is

78

PRONOUNS.

[189-

189. Sinig, etli(^ some. These are used chiefly in the plural, and declined like hk (165). They are employed both adjectively and substantively. @tU)eI(^ is a word, now antiquated, having the same meaning

for this,

tt)el(f)er

is

often used colloquially (176.2), as

tt)a

for

is in

190. 3^^/ icfiUt^, iebmeb each, every.Only the first of these familiar use. All are declined like bte or, the first two as
;

adjectives of the
ein,

"mixed" declension (124.2) when preceded by the only limiting word which can stand before them. They

are used either adjectively or substantively. The original themes are {eber and jebtDcber, and their er has not until modern times been treated as ending of declension only. For Sebermann, see above, 187.
191. Tlan^ many. In the singular, mancf) means many a; in the plural, many. It is usually declined like bie (165), but,

before an adjective, may be left uninflected thus, mand) bunte ^Inmtn many variegated flowers, mand) giilben ett)anb 77iany a golden garment. It is also used substantively.
:

1. After another limiting word, tuenig little. are declined as any other adjectives would be in the same situation except in ein tt)enit3 a little. If they precede the noun which they qualify (or another adjective qualifying it), they are sometimes declined and sometimes left unvaried and the former more when the meaning is distributive, the latter

192.

SSiel

much,

t)lel

and

toenifi

more when
but
Dieler

collective

thus,

t)iel

2Bein a great quantity of wine,

SBein wine of many kinds; t)iel Iei(^t bej^mingte ^dfte anumber of light-winged guests, but j^iele anbere 2^^ier[2^ier=]ge= but this distincflalten m^any other animal shapes (individual)

tion is

by no means
:

closely observed.

substantively as well as adjectively, genitive as, uiele ber gufecjanger many of the pedestrians.
2.

Both words are used and may govern a partitive

more and tueniger less, comparatives of bid and tDenig, are generally invariable. But nie^r has a plural, me^re, or (irreg3CReI)r

ularly,

but

much more commonly)

all.

mel)rere,

meaning

several,

many.
1. When it directly precedes the noun it qualideclined (like bie, 165) but before a pronominal word (adjectively or substantively used) it may remain unvaried (with a tendency toward the same distinction of collective and distributive meaning that appears in Diel see 192.1).

193.

%U

fies,

aU

is fully

197]

INDEFINITES.
allcr 2[Betteifer all

79

works,

2eal;aUt beine ftoften 2Ber!e all thy lofty %aq,t be gefteg all the days of the festival, t)on all bent flange by all the splendor, bei all biefen 35erl)dltnif)en in view

Thus,

afle bte

of all these circumstances. 2. In certain phrases, a He is used instead of aH undeclined thus, Bei alle bent in spite of all that. 3. The neuter singular alle (hke the corresponding case of other pronominal words) is employed in an indefinite way of persons, meaning every one: thus, aEe nal^ert ftc^ einanber all draw near to one another.
4.

The

plural of aH is

sometimes used distributively

as, aEe

2So(f)en

every week.

194.

in its uses

^nber other is a pronominal word, but not distinguished from an ordinary adjective.

For
195.
ein

nD(^ ein in place of anber, see 198.3c; for anber as ordinal,

203.1a.
(Sin one, an, a, fein
is

one

not one, none, no. 1. The numeral also used as indefinite pronoun (see 198.2), and as

article (63).
2. ^ein is the negative of ein, and is everywhere dechned as the latter would be in the same situation. Like D^iemanb (186) and nid)t (188), it often requires to be taken apart in translating into ein and nic^t not; e. g. fo fein ^efi^t ja^ id} in meinem

Seben such a face

I never saw

in

my

life.

NUMERALS.
196. Although the numerals do not form in the proper sense a separate part of speech, their peculiarities of form and use are Buch that they require to be treated as a class by themselves.
1. The fundamental words denoting number, 197. the CA.RDINAL numerals, are as follows 21. ein nnb gtrangifi 1. ein 11. elf
2.

gmei

12. amoif

22. atuei

nnb siDangiG

3. brei

13. breigel^n
14. Dierse'^n

30. breifjig
40. Diergifi
50. fiintsig

4. t)ier
5. fiinf

15. fiinfjelin
16. fed)3el)n

6. ]ed)
7. jieben

60.

]cdm

17. fiebijel)n 18. ad)t3eftn

19. neun3el)n

70. fiebaig

8. 9.
LO.

a^t neun
seftn

80. ad)t3ig 90. nenngig

20. gtnanaiQ

100. l)unbert

1000. taujcnb

1,000,000. DJaUion

80
2.

NUMERALS.

[197is cilf.

An

older form of
15,

elf

11,

now

nearly out of use,

For

fiinfseftn

and

funfge^n and ge^n 17 and fieBenaifi 70, instead of the contracted fieBje^n and fieBgig, are not infrequent, ed^ae^tt 16 and fediaig 60 are abbreviated, for ease of pronunciation, from |e(^3eftn and ferfjSgtg,

funfatg 50, the less regularly derived forms funf^ig are also in good and approved use. 6ieben=

which
3.

may

likewise be employed.

The odd numbers, between twenty and a hundred, are formed always by prefixing the name of the unit to that of the ten, with unb and interposed thus, brel unb gti^ansig three and twenty (not gtuanatg^brel twenty-three). With the higher numbers, the odd numbers follow, as in English thus, l^unbert unb fieben 107 tauf enb unb bret unb biergig 1043 and the unb and may be dropped, especially when more than two numbers are put to:

as, ein taufenb ad)t ^unbert neun unb fe(f)gig, or a(f)tael^n neun unb fe(i)stg, 1869. 4. The higher numbers, l^unbert, taufenb, mtHion, are multiplied by prefixed numbers, as in English thus, fe(^ ^unbert 600 The German says eine 9}liflion brei unb ac^tgig taufenb 83,000. a million, as we do but simply l^unbert a hundred, taufenb a thousand: ein ^unbert, ein taufenb, mean one hundred, one
:

gether

l&unbert

thousand.
198.
1.

^in

is

the only cardinal

number that

is fully inflected.

used adjectively, or qualifying a noun expressed, it is (unless preceded by another qualifying word see 3) declined when numeral in the same manner as when indefinite article (63). Thus, ein SJiann one man or a man, ein ^inb one child or a
:

child.
2.

When

noun understood,

used absolutely, or pronominally, standing for a it is declined like bte (165), or an adjective

of the first declension (but eine is usually contracted to etn in the nom. and ace. neuter). Thus, um ein (^\\th, unb bann urn nocf) ein Idnger longer by one joint, and then by one more, einer t)on end) one of you, einer ber auf ein ^benteuer auSge^^t one who goes out upon an adventure, t)on \\6) gu iagen, n)a etnem lieb
ift

to

drive

away from

one's self

what

is

dear
3.

to

one!

When preceded by

inite article), it is declined as

another limiting word (usually the defany adjective would be after the

same word.
with

Thus, ber eine ]pxad^ the one spoke, mtt biefer ein en Strung this one error, auf f etnem ein en ^eine on his one leg.

200]
a.

CARDINALS.

81

er
;

etnc

is

often
it

simply
b.

occasionally

employed where we should say one forms a plural, bie einen the ones, some.
ein, is
\\t

In numeration, the pronominal neuter,

cin, gmct, brei one, two, three; einmal ein

ein once

used thus, one is one.

:

c. 5^o(^ ein one mare is employed instead of ein anber another, where simple addition, not difference, is signified thus, ntmm
:

no^

ein (55olbflii(i take

;

another gold piece

(i.

e.

in addition to the
(i.

one you have) but ntmm of the one you have).

d.

ein anbereg take

another

e.

in place

In the compound numbers, ein unb StDanjig 21, etc., ein is also, usually, in ein unb berfelbe, ein paax, ein mmq, thus, mit ein tt)enifi SBafjer with a little water, mil ein l^alb, etc ein paax (^ritten with a few steps, ein ^x'xtkl Don ein Qalb a third from a half.
invariable
: :

e. In order to distinguish to the eye ein used as pronoun or 'numeral from the same word as article, some write it with a others, with the letters spaced, e i n (the ordinary capital, in German equivalent of our italics) ; others, with an accent upon the e, ein others leave the difference of value to be pointed out by the connection.
,

/.

The neuter
:

ein is

sometimes used

in

an

indefinite

way

of

thus, unfer ein one of tis, nun f ag^ mir ein, man foil !ein SBunber glauben riow let any one tell me we are not to believe in miracles

persons

199. 3^^^ 2 and brei 3 are generally unvaried, but have gen. and dat. plural forms gmeier, gweien breier, breienwhich may be used whei-e the case would not otherwise be indicated.
;

a. For gn)ei, the old masculine gtt)een (twain) and feminine 3tt)o are antiquated, but still occasionally met with thus, ttJaren mit mir 3n)een C^enoffen were with me two comrades, gmo djmdben fangen um bie SBette two swallows were singing in emulation.
:

b.

33eibe

both is often

used where we say two: thus, meine

beiben SBriiber

my

two brothers.

200. 1. From the other units and tens, only a dative in en is occasionally formed, when the words are used substantively
or,

yet

more

rarely,

relic of

a former

uses, as aUt SSiere syllable ; or in colloquial

all the units, a nom. and ace. in e (a declension) namely, in certain special all fours ; or in poetry, to make an additional

from

fuller

and low

style.

: ;

82

NUMEEALS.

[200-

2. unbert 100, and taufenb 1000, are frequently construed and declined as (neuter) collective substantives. SJliOion (fern.) is regularly and usually so treated. 3. As names of the figures designating them, the numerals are treated as feminine nouns [Qdijl f. number being understood), and take the plural ending en, and sometimes e in the singular

etn

forms

bie

^in, bie infen.

201. 1. The cardinal numerals are used in general with equal freedom as substantives and as adjectives thus, ein ^inb a
:

one of the children, t)ier ober fiinf folrfier 9Jldb(?^en four or five of su^h girls, tuir brei greunbe we three friends, unf er brei three of us, etc.
child, ein ber ^'inber
2. For the use of a singular instead measure after numerals, see 211.2.

of a plural

noun

of

From the cardinals come, by derivation or composition, the other classes of numerals, the most important of which are explained below.
202.
all

203.

Ordinals,

1.

The

ordinals are a series of ad-

jective derivatives,
:

formed from the cardinals by the suffixes t and ft from the numbers 2-19, by adding t from the higher numbers by adding ft.
Thus,
a.
3tt)eit

second, neunt ninth,

fec^gel^nt

sixteenth, gtDanstQft

twentieth, l^unbertft hundredth, taufenbft thousandth.

But the ordinal of

a(i^t,

ein is tx\t first; brei

and
h.

ad^t (instead of ad)tt);

gtDeit

anhtx other
in

forms irregularly britt, is sometunes used

instead of

second.

Compound numbers add, as only to their last member: thus,

l^unbert

ber gtDei

unb

erfte

lOls^,

im

ac^^tge^n

EngUsh, the ordinal ending unb stDangigfte 22d, ber ^unbert fieben unb aditgigften

Saftre in the ISSlth year.

2.

ally

The ordinals are not used predicatively or adverbiand consequently do not appear (except in compoin their simple undeclined form.
all

sition)

They

are

declined in

respects like other adjectives.

13.

[Exercise
204.

Cardinal and Ordinal Numerals.]

Multiplicatives.

These are formed by compounding

fad)

the cardinals with the words

or

fdltig

thus, einfa(| or ein*

: :

208]
fdltia

NUMEKAL DERIVATIVES.

8S

ten-fold.

simple, gmeifac^ or gtDeifdlttQ double, gel^nfad) or geftnfdltig They are adjectives, and are treated in all respects

like other adjectives.

Variatives. These add eriet to the cardinals: thus, of one sort, breierlei of three sorts, tiielerlei of many sorts. They are used as adjectives (see 415.11), but are incapable of declension.

205.

einerlei

206. Iteratives. These are adverbs, formed by compounding the numeral with mai (literally mark; hence repetition, time): thus, einmal once, gel^nmal ten times, tnand^mal many
times, often.
a. The word mat is often written apart from the numeral, sometimes with a capital, as an independent word.
h. As the examples have shown, derivative words of these three classes are formed also from the indefinite numerals.

207.

Derivatives

from

the Ordinals.

1. IXmidiiatives are formed by adding ^alB half to the ordinal as ending in te (or t), and denote a quantity half a unit less than the corresponding cardinal. Thus, t)ierte^alb or t)iertl)alb four less a half or three and a half. They are construed as invari-

able adjectives.

The implied meaning is, ['the first, second, and third complete; but] the fourth, [only] half* Instead of gtDeiteftalb 1|, anbertt)al6, irregularly fortned from anber other, in the sense of second (203.1a), is in use.
2.

Fractionals are originally

compounds
t

of the ordinals with

%\)Z\\ [^eil]

part, but are abbreviated

tel,

latter into

before which the final

by the contraction of the of the ordinal is dropped

mxizi quarter, ixom=

thus,
gigftel

brittel (britt=tcl, britt Xfteil [^eil]) third,

twentieth part.
gmeitel

Instead of

second part

is

used only

I)alb,

^a\\k

half.

3. Ordinal Adverbs add the ending en to the ordinal thus, n\izx[^ firstly, gipanjiflften^ in the twentieth place.

theme

208.

Other derivative numeral words

it

belongs rather to

the dictionary than to the

grammar

to explain.

84

USi;S

OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.

[209-

USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.

The following rules apply only to nouns and to words (pronouns, numerals, adjectives, infinitives see 113) used as nouns since the declension of all adjectives and words used adjectively (articles, pronominal adjectives, and participles) is determined by that of the nouns to which they belong, and with which they are made to agree in number, case, and gender.
209.
:

NUMBERS.

same

210. in

The value and use of the numbers German as in English.

are, in general, the

1. This does not exclude minor differences in regard to 211. particular words, which the one language may, in general or in certain connections, use as singular and the other as plural for example, Sange (sing.) tongs (pi.), Slattern (pi.) small-pox (sing.),

bem ^rm one or more

auf

(sing.)
:

in the amis, see 153.4), etc.

(gie (ht.

they

pi.),

you (meaning

2. Masculine and neuter nouns used to express measurement, of extent, quantity, weight, or number, generally stand in the singular instead of the plural after numerals (whether cardinal or indefinite); also, the fem. ^Dlarf marks. Thus, fie ^aben fieben bi a6:jt 3u^ Sdnge they have seven or

5 a ^ 33ier ten casks of beer, n)ict)iel ^funb Su^er how many pounds of sugar? ein ^ulf^^cer t)on ge^n taufenb 3Jlann an auodliary army of 10,000 7nen, gmanaig ^D^f
eight feet of length, gebn
Sflinber

But
tt)eit

brei

twenty head of cattle, brei Soil breit three inches broad. e i I e n (f.) 11 e n (f.) %Vi^ three yards of cloth, fiinf
also taufenb d) r i 1 1 e (m.) lang Kespecting the form of the noun expressing

Jive miles distant

and

1000 paces kmg. the thing measured, see below, 216.5a.

3.

is also

In the familiar expressions for the time of day, U^r hour unvaried after a numeral thus, neun U^r nine o'clock.
:

CASES.
Nominative.
212.
poses,

The proper
God
disposes. also,

office of
:

the nominative

is

to stand as the

subject of the sentence

as, ber 3}lenf (^ benft, ^ott lenft

man pro-

Of course,

a noun in apposition with a subject nom;

inative is put in the nominative

noun always agrees

in case with the

since (111.2) an appositive noun it explains.

215]
213.
1.

GENITIVE.

85

jcin to he, and a few others, of kindred as tuerben become, bleibcn continue, l^ci^en he also, with the passive of verbs that called, fd^einen appear govern a second accusative as objective predicate (227.36), a noun may be used in the nominative as predicate: (i. e. as, through the verb, describing and qualifying the subject: com-

meaning

such

With the verb

pare

116.1).
tft

Thus, mein 33ruber

r
e

"^

r biefe
fetn

this hoy's teacher, ber bleiBt

in

91

art

^naben ray brother is Seben lang he (lit. that

etn(^eigl^al ge*

one) remains a fool his whole

fd^olten
a.

life long, er tDtrb

he

is

called reproachfully

a miser.
is

With

icerben,

however, the noun

often put in the dative,

after the preposition gu: as, ba tt)erben SBeiber then women heccnne hyenas (turn to hyenas).
2.

gu C)t)dnen

is sometimes used in apposition and preda word (usually a pronoun) in an oblique case. Thus, la^ mic^ bein greunb (more usually beinen Steunb) fein let me be thy friend, id) fel)e jte ein (or einen) 9taub ber glam^ men tuerben I see them become a prey to the flames, er nennt mii^ fein (or feinen) greunb lie calls me his friend, al i(^ mid) einen grembling in biefem l^reife \at} (Schiller) as I saw mijself a stranger in this circle; but@ie fet)en mic^ ein Uanb ber Snellen (Lessing) you see me a prey to the waves; so also after tt)ie and al thus, ber

The nominative

ication relating to

3flu!)m biefeg ^JJlanne al berebter 3ftebner (or al eineg berebten 9teb:=

ner) mar meit oerbreitet this man's fame as an eloquent speaker was spread widely abroad, always jein 9lubm al 3flebner his fame

as orator, einem 9Jlanne mie 6ie fann e nid)t an ^elb

sing)

fel)len

(Les-

man

like

you cannot want for money.

is

214.

The nominative

used in address

(as

a " vocative
blefer

").

Thus, l^olber griebe, fii^e intrac^t, meilet iiber Peace! sweet Concord! linger aver this city.
Genitive.

tabt lovely

215. The genitive in German, as in the other related languages, is primarily and especially the adjective or adnominal case, denoting by a form of the noun a variety of relations such as might be expressed by a derivative adjective. As was remarked above (under 158.2), it is in part traceably of adjective origin. But its later uses arise also in part from its being merged with other primitive cases particularly the ablative, the case representing the /ram relation, of origin or removal

86

USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION.

[215-

and assuming their office. To trace all these uses to their origin would require vastly too much of detailed historical discussion, and will not be attempted here.
216.
1.

Tlie Genitive

with Nouns.

is

The German genitive is especially the case of a noun that added to another noun in order to limit or define its meaning.

2. It is used, accordingly, in all the senses in which we use the possessive case of a noun, or a pronominal possessive (my, your, his, etc.) also, in most of the senses belonging to a noun connected with another noun by the preposition of: thus,
;

a. As genitive of possession or appurtenance: ha^ ^an^ meine 35ater the house of my father, be 9Jlanne ^op\ the man's head. As genitive of origin or cause in be (3(^rerfen ^aijn in 6.
:

madness of terror, ber ^rtcb impulse of magnanimity.

the

ber (^ro^mut^ [(^ro^mut]

the

As complement of relation (designating that toward which c. the relation expressed by the governing noun is sustained) 't)tx SSater beS otineg the father of the son, be 3Sater ol^n the fatJwr's son, ^onig biefeg 9fteid) king of this realm.
:

governing noun

a whole of which the a part), in all its varieties bet c^rerfUi^fte ber (^reden the most terrible of terrors, ein ber fleinften ^inber one of the smallest children, iebeS biejer 33eburfni[fe each of these needs, allgut)iel be pa^e quite too much of the joke. As genitive of material, constitution, or equivalence ein e. SS)a(^ fc^attenber ^ud^en a roof of shady beeches, ber Sraeige Iau=
d.

As

partitive genitive (expressing

is

BigeS

fitter the leafy trellis-work of the branches,

eine

f(^reienber

^naBen a number of shouting

gold.
:

boys, be oIbe

^nga^I trbme

streams of
f.

As

genitive of characteristic

grower

^ugenb a
tiirftfc^er

ftamm
g.

ein Tlann ^o^en 9iange unb of high raiik and great virtue, ein .f)irten= ^bfunft a slwpherd-race of Turkish descent.

man

subjective genitive (implying an action of which the thing designated by the genitive is the subject) be SturmeS aufen the roaring of the storm, ber 9Jlagnete ciffen unb Sieben the hating and loving (attraction and repulsion) of magnets.
:

As

As objective genitive (implying an action of which the h. thing designated by the genitive is the object) bein SBunfcf) be ^uten thy desire of good, SSerbefferer ber SBelt unb be efe^e Improver of the WojM and of the Law.
:

216]

GENETIVE.

87

The
other
3.

flnitively various that neither the

relation of the genitive to its governing noun is so inabove classification nor any

is exhaustive or peremptory. In these relations, the genitive of a personal pronoun is rarely admitted but for it is usually substituted a possessive pronominal adjective, qualifying the noun to be limited (158.2). Exceptions certain cases of partitives, of genitives followed by a qualifying word, and a few others as, unf er einer ofie of us, \f)xtx Beibcn (Jinbriicfe the impressions of them both, il^rer 5}lcifter
;

tt)erben to get the better

4.

of them.

For the

genitive, in all these uses,

t)on o/,

may be

substituted a

dative with the preposition

as in English.

The substitution is made, especially, when the expression a. would otherwise be ambiguous or unclear, from the want of a distinct ending to the genitive, or of a limiting word showing
its

character:

thus, bie ^IntDO'^ner t)Dn ^ari the inhabitaiits of

but bie (&'u\= moaner 55erUn the inhabitants of Berlin, 33ater biefer |ecl)g ^inber father of these six children; or, to avoid a succession of several genitives: as, ber oftn t)on bent Dftetme ^aijer @manuel the son of tlie uncle of Emperor Emanuel. And the construction with t)on is the regular and usual one instead of the genitive of material
Paris, 35ater t)on jed) ^inbern father of six children;

and
5.

of characteristic.

a. After nouns signifying measure, of extent, quantity, weight, or number, the noun designating the substance measured, if not preceded by an adjective, is usually put neither in the genitive (partitive genitive), nor in the dative with tion of, but is treated as indeclinable.

Thus, ein (^Ia SBein a glass of wine (i. e., wine, to the extent b. of one glass), gmei ^funb %^zt two pounds of tea, brei Hen Xnd) three yards of cloth, einige 33u(^ papier a few quires of paper,
gro^e 33Idtter 9iauf(i)gDlb great sheets of gold-tinsel ;hut, cin ^Ia biefe SSeing or t)on btefcm 2Betne a glass of this wine, jtrci ^^^funb guten %l)tt^ two pounds of good tea.
c.

Exceptions are occasionally met with:

33e(^er 2Betng the best goblet

thus, ben beften of wine, 300 Centner @oIbe 300 cwt.

of gold.
d.

By

abbreviation, the

name

of the
:

month

is left

unvaried

after a

numeral designating the day ninth of May.

6.

thus, ben neunten 9Jlai the

The

genitive, in

fore or after the

any of its senses, may be placed either benoun which it limits (aj^ is shown by the exam-

88
pies given).
ited

USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.

[216limto a

But its position before the noun, especially if by any other word than an article, belongs rather
;

higher or poetic style in plain colloquial prose, the genitive ordinarily follows the noun that governs it. An objective genitive most rarely precedes and never, if another genitive be dependent on the same noun thus, be ^onigg 2BaT^l eine Tl\=
;
:

nifterg the king's choice

of a minister.

As in English, the noun preceded by a dependent genitive takes no article thus, meine greunbe^ ^n^ my friend's heart, but ba er3 meine^ greunbeg the heart of my friend.
:

217.

The Genitive with

Adjectives.

thirty adjectives (with their corresponding negatives) are followed by a genitive, denoting that in respect of which the

About

action or quality they express

is

exerted.

Thus, be 6ingeti miibe weary of singing, tt)iirbtger be 9ling more worthy of the ring, etne ultonS untoiirbig unworthy of a Sultan, jii^er rinnerung \)oUfull of sweet memories.
a. These adjectives are mostly such as are followed by of in English, although some admit a different construction. Among the commonest of them (besides those already instanced) are

BetDU^t conscious, fd^ig capable, getBi^ sure, fc^ulbtg guilty, fatt sated, uBerbriiffig tired, )3oUfull. Some of them also are construed

with prepositions, and a few (229) even govern an accusative, when used with the verbs jein and tDerben.
218.

The Genitive with Prepositions.

genitive.

About twenty prepositions govern the

Thus, tDcgen feiner iinbe on account of his sin, tt)dftrcnb meincr toUen SaQh during my mad chase, ungea(^tet biefer rfldrung notwitJistanding this explanation,
ftatt

buf tiger drten instead of fra-

grant gardens.
a. The prepositions governing the genitive are mostly of recent derivation from nouns and adjectives. For a list of them, see below, under Prepositions (373).

219.
1.

The Genitive as Object of Verbs.

A genitive immediately
upon
its

ally the office of

dependent upon a verb has genera remoter object, further qualifying the action
nearer personal object.

of the verb
2.

A number

of transitive verbs

govern a genitive in addition

to their direct object, the accusative.

219]
a.

GENITIVE.

89

ing,

These are verbs of removing, depriving, accusing, convictadmonishing, assuring, and the hke, and one or two others
er flagt
ft at

(miirDigcn esteem worthij, Dertroften console).

Thus,
of

theft, er

un

great fear, cr

ben Wiener be i)ieBftal^l an he accuses the servant einer gro^en gurc^t entlebigt he has rid us of a berauBt ben Ungliidliiiien ber '^offnung he robs the

wretched
3.

man

of hope.

A number of reflexive verbs admit a genitive in addition to

their reflexive object.

These verbs are of too various meaning to admit of classifiSome of them may be rendered in English either by a construction resembling the German, or as simple transitive verbs taking a genitive as direct object thus, freue bi(^ b einer Sugenb rejoice thyself of (enjmj) thy youth, er entfinnt \i^ jebeg
a.

cation.

Iid)er

2Borte he bethinks himself of (recollects) every word, fic^ 9efdftr= SBaffcn bebienen to serve one's self with (employ) dangerous

weapons;
ftab'
ic^

others,

m^

ber tnbten befltfjen

only in the latter method: thus, mit @ifer zealously have I pursued my
fi(^

studies,

bemer fteiltgen Seii^en, o 2Baftrfteit, ftat ber 33etrug Truth ! has deceit usurped. gema^t thy holy signs,
4.

an=

A few impersonal verbs take

a genitive of the object, with

an accusative

of the subject, of the feeling they represent.

a. They are erBarmen pitij, geliiften long, jammern grieve, reuen or gereuen rue: thus, mid) erbarmt feine @lenb I pity his misery.
5.

A number of verbs may take a genitive

only (corresponding

to a direct object in English).

The commonest of these are ac^ten regard, Bebiirfen neea, brau(^en use, benfen think of, entbeftren do without, ermangeln lack, eriDdftnen mention, gebenfen remember, genie^en enjoy, gefdjmeigen keep silence about, ftarren await, ftiiten guard, Iad)en laugh at,
pflegen nurse, )d)Dnen spare, fpotten mock, uerfeftlen miss, t)ergefjen forget, \QOi^xx[t\)mtxi perceive, voaxiiXi wait for.

Thus, er a^)kiz ntd)t ber marmen onne he heeded not the warm sun, e Bebarf ber ^nnaftme nicftt it needs not the assumption, anbrer greoel nidjt gu gebenfen not to mention other atrocities, la^ mid) ber neuen greifteit genie^en let me enjoy the new freedom, jebeg
,\^eiben i^ergeffenb

forgetting every trial,

\{)x

fpottet

mein ye mock

me, mo
6.

id)

beiner xoaxit

where I wait for

thee,

Many of
:

of the genitive

preposition

the verbs in these various classes may take instead an accusative, or else a noun governed by a for example, all the impersonals, and all but two

&0

USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION.

[219-'

(ermanG^In and gejd)tt)etgen) of the last class. The construction with the genitive is an older one, which has for some time been going gradually out of use, and is now mainly antiquated or poetic thus, biefc grei^eit, b i e i(i) {e^t genie^e this liberty which I now enjoy, benen, auf bie bie emigc gi^eil^eit tDartet to those for
:

whom

eternal

freedom

is

waiting,

er

f reut

\\^

ii

f ein

liidf

he rejoices at his good fortune.

220.
1.

Other uses of the Genitive.

genitive of a

The

noun

is

often used in an adverbial sense,

especially (with or without a limiting adjective) to denote time also (with adjective) not infrequently manner, more rarely place.

%aQt^ im Senge one day in spring, be 2Binter jinb bem (^nee in the winter we are, as it were, buried up in the snow, bie 2BoI!en, bie 5!Jlor9en unb ^^benb iiBer tl)n l^in f egelten the clouds which sailed along over him of a mornThus,
tt)ie

eine

tDtr

t)ergraben in

ing and evening,

er fdiliirft langen -!palfe he sips with outstretched neck, prft bu' flingen mdd^ttgen 9lufe dx)st thou hear it ring with

mighty sound
all

? \^ ermal^nte iftn afle rnfte I admonished him in seriousness, ja^te f4)Iei(^^ x^ meiner SBege I softly steal off on

my way. a. A large number

of adverbs are,

by

origin, genitives of

nouns or adjectives, or of a noun and a limiting word which have grown together by familiar use see 363-5.
:

genitive is sometimes used with a verb (especially jein the sense of a predicative adjective, or as predicate genitive thus, fie tt)aren munter unb Quter ^inge they were
2.

and

tuerben) in
:

merry and of good cheer, bie toaxtn oft ni(^t jo gro^, ober gleid^en ^Iter mit tl)m they were often not so big, or of equal age with him,
alle raerben auf einmal eine tnne all become suddenly of one mind, \^ bin SSiEen^ I am of a mind.

a.

The

genitive in this construction

is allied

with the genitive

of characteristic (216.2/).

a construction formerly not rare, but now little used, a used with verbs thus, er tranf be 33a(i)e he drank of the brook, fie brac^tc be flaren ^errlid^en 2Beine she brought of the clear excellent wine.
3.

By

partitive genitive is

4.

sive genitive
n)a
flerben to die

Yet more unusual are cases of the occurrence of a possesand of a genitive of origin with verbs thus, tl^ue betne %mk tft dx) what belongs to (is of) thy office, |)unger
:

of hunger.

222]
5.

DATITE WITH VERBS.

91
to signify

A genitive is sometimes used with an interjection,

is

the thing which

the occasion of the exclamation

thus, ad) be

Ungliitf^ alas for the

mishap

(see 392).

Dative.

221. 1. The dative is originally and properly the case of the indirect personal object, designating the person or persons with reference to whom, or as aSectmg whom, anything is or is done a relation which is

ordinarily (though not always) expressed in English

to

by the preposition

or /or.

In

this sense, the dative in

less often of

German

is

usually the adjunct of

a verb,
2.

much

an

adjective, very rarely of a noun.

The
;

dative has also inherited the offices of primitive cases,

now

lost

especially of the instrumental, expressing the with or by relation,

locative, expressing the in relation.

and the
arily

In these senses,

it is

ordin-

governed by prepositions.

222.

The Dative with Verbs.

dative, in

The
a.

German,

is

most often the indirect personal ob:

ject of a verb.
It is thus

latter usually limits

doubly contrasted in office with the genitive the a noun and, as indirect object, it is prevail;
:

ingly not personal

thus, [^

i)er|id)ere

iftn

einer

him of a

matter, but

i(^ t)erfid)ere

i^m

eine

ac^e

ac^e / assure assure (vouch

for) a matter

to him; \i) Beraube i^n feine (^elbeg Iroh him of his money, but {^ raube \tim fein (^elb I steal from him his money. h. The connection of the dative with the action of the verb is of every degree of closeness, from constituting its essential or necessary complement to indicating a mere incidental interest

in its action:

thus, er bot mir bie

it

anb he
on

offered

me

his hand,

i^

legte e^
1.

i^m auf ben %\\d^ Ilaid

the table for him.

I.

A large number
Such are

of transitive verbs take, along with the

accusative, a dative as
their action.

more or

less necessary

complement

of

a. Many simple verbs, especially such as denote a bringing near or removing, a giving or taking, imparting, commanding, permitting or refusing, and the like. Thus, er brac^te ben 9ting ber Allien he brought the ring to the old woman, id) fdjrelbe meinem SSater einen 33rief I write my father a letter, man eriaubt afle einem greunbe one permits a friend any-

thing,
h.

Many

verbs compounded with inseparable or separable

er, t)er,

prefixes, especially ent,

and

auf, a^, bet, nadi, dor, $u.

92

USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.

[22^

Thus, er Dermarfit ben 9fling bem liebften feiner bl^ne he makes over the ring to the dearest of his sons, er mollte 'xi)m bie ^rone auf= fefeen he wished to set the crown on his head, fie mu^te i^m bie
Sungfrau gufagen she had
to

promise him

the girl.

c. A few verbs that require a reflexive object in the dative, forming a class of improper reflexives (290) thus, i(^ l^abt mir 33eif qE Derbient I have earned myself applause.
:

d. A few verbs compounded with adjectives, or verb-phrases akin with such e. g., tra^rf agen prophesy, funb ma^tn make known.
:

2. In the passive of these verbs, where the object-accusative becomes a subject-nominative, the dative remains as sole object thus, ber Sling murbe ber ^Iten gebracS^t the ring was brought to the old woman, e^ tt)irb mir !unb gema^t it is made known to me.

As the examples have shown, the English also often uses objective without a preposition (when placed next the verb) in a dative sense. In other cases, it expresses the dative
3.

its

relation by prepositions, especially to. But, where the verb implies removal, the dative frequently answers to our objective

with from. Thus, nimm meiner Dlebe ieben tad^el take from my words all sting, e ftaftl mir ba SeBcn it stole my life from me, e betnem 5}litleib gu entgie'^en to withdraw it from thy compassion, er foU mir ni(^t lebenbig geften he shall not get away from me alive.
a.

The same

is

true of the dative after intransitive verbs

see

below.
4.

Either the direct or indirect object

may

often be omitted,

and the verb used with the other alone: thus, einem ein 33u(j^ borlefen to read a book aloud to some one, ein 53u(^ Dorlefen to read a book aloud, einem t)orIefen to read aloud to some one; also,
simply
II.
t)DrIefen to
1.

read aloud,

lecture.

Many
;

verbs take a dative as their sole 'object.

These, as not admitting an accusative, are reckoned as intransitive but many of them correspond to verbs which in English are looked upon as transitive (227.1, b).
a. A number of simple verbs, together with a few that have the inseparable prefixes be, ge, er ; also, the contraries of several of them, formed with the prefix mi^. The commonest of these are antmorten answer, banfen thank,

bienen serve, bro^ien threaten,

f(uc!)en

curse, folgen follow, l^elfen

222]

DATIVE WITH VEKBS.

93

help, f(^aben harm, fd)meid)eln flatter, tro^en defy, trauen trust, h)el)ren control, Begegnen meei, gefaEen please, ge^orc^^en obey,
criDtebern

answer.
feib il^r tl^nen nic^t

Thus,

begegnet did

you not meet them

folgt

hnxd) ben ^etfter bem tral^l follows the beam of light through the ether, nok' t^nen gefciHt as it pleases them, e mir nic^t mi^fiele

mnn

did not displease me, iann e bir nic^t f(^aben can it not harm thee ? :^elft mir help me ! ben 9taumen unb Seiten gu tro^en to defy space and time.
if
it

compounded with the inseparable and with the prepositions ab, an, auf, au, bet, ein, deriving their power to take entgegen, nad^, nnter, t)or, miber, su the dative object from the modification of meaning given by the
b.

A large number of verbs

prefix ent,

prefix.

Thus,

bie (^tt)erter entfliegen ber (^eibe the

t)iele

swords leap from

ftimmten biefer ^nftd)t bei many acceded to this view, fommt einer \i)m entgegen if one comes to meet him, urn d5n= Ud)en reigniffen uorsubengen in order to avoid such occurrences, ml^tt ben ^efe(i)ten gnfa^ who was looking on at the contests.
the scabbard,

The meaning added by the

c.

prefix

is,

as the examples show, to

be very variously rendered in English.

A number
;

of verbs

compounded with nouns, adverbs, and

phrases akin with such.
miiffe that his

adjectives

also, of verbal

Thus, ba^ fein (SJefang feinem 0eibe gleic^fommen song mu^t correspond with his attire, er elite feinem
he hastened
er

SSater jn ^\ii\t

to the

help of his father, e

\%t\\'\ it

ma^t

biefer

^ame

tl)nt mir leib it pains me, ben of he is paying court to this lady, e

tDarb

i^m gu XtjiW

was granted him

(fell to his

share).

d. SSerben become is sometimes used alone with a (possessive) dative in the sense of gu ^l^eil [%t\\\ merben thus, bagn n)arb bem 5[Renf d^en ber 35erftanb for that end was understanding given to man (became his). Quite rarely, such a possessive dative follows f ein as, e ift il^m it is his (belongs to him).
:

e. A few impersonal verbs, or verbs used impersonally, take a dative designating the subject of the feeling or condition they

express
giddy.
/.

Some

thus, e grant mir horrified, il^m fd)n)inbelt he turns of these take also the accusative.

lam

Also

fein, tuerbcn,

and

gel^en

juncts, are frequently thus

(292.4:)
:

or ergeften, with adverbial adused impersonally with the dative

fo mol^l

thus, if)m

tt)ar

bange he was in anxiety, mir mirb


) :

94

USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.

\o\t \\i

[222-

so pleasant a feeling is ccmiing over me,

mir benn

Iww

is it

then with
that).

me ? bcm

ift

o the

case is thus

(it is

thus with regard to

Of the intransitive verbs governing the dative, a part that denote an action proceeding from a person may form an impersonal passive governing the same
2.

especially those

l^art beocQnet I have been harshly dealt with (met), e tpurbe i^m gel^olfen he was helped.

case (see 279.2). Thus, e waxh mir

III. In a looser and less strictly dependent construction as denoting the person (or thing) in behalf of whom, or as affecting whom, anything is or is done, the dative ( " dative of interest " is used so freely, and with so many verbs, that to attempt giving rules for its occurrence would be useless. Only one or two

points call for special notice.

a. A dative grammatically dependent on the verb is often used instead of a possessive genitive quaUfying a noun in the sentence: thus, bem '3)iener urn ben Qa\ faEenb falling upon the servant's neck, leget ben 3D^toEner ber 9Jiaib in ben d^oo^ lay

Miollner in the maid's lap.

b.

This

is especially

common

thus, e Bli^t au htn his eyes (see 161).

^ugen i^m

fii^n

with the personal pronouns a daring look beams from

c. The personal pronoun is sometimes thus used in a manner that seems to us expletive thus, jiel^ mir oh fie fommen see (for me) whether they are coming (compare 156).
:

IV. For the dative dependent upon a verb, in all its varieties (but not with all verbs especially not with those which take the dative after the manner of a direct object, Il.la), is some:

times substituted a case governed by a preposition (as gu to, fiir for, Hon from). This substitution is notably more frequent with a noun than with a personal pronoun a dative of the latter is often used where one of the former would make a harsh or forced construction.
;

223.
1.

The Dative with Adjectives.

of the dative with adjectives is analogous

The construction

to its construction with verbs.

Some adjectives call for the case as their essential or natural defining complement others admitit in a looser relation, after the manner of a " dative of interest " (above, 222.III.).
;

2U]

DATIVE.

9^

2. Adjectives taking the dative as their more essential complement are especially those that signify nearness or remoteness,

likeness or unlikeness, suitableness, property, inclination, ad-

vantage or disadvantage, and the

like.

in English the preposition to before

Usually, they require a noun Umiting them.

Thus, mt nai) fii^r i^ m\^ bir how near I feel myself to thee! bem ^Idferbau fremb strangers to agriculture, 2BoI!en qU'i^ gittigen clouds like wings, einen il^m eigenen SBertft a value peculiar to it, eine eele, bie ber %\)0i\ nit^t getDac^fen ift a soul that is not equal to the deed, ein mir unDer^offteg (^lixd a happiness unhopedfor by me.

admit a compleanalogy with the uses of the verbs from which they come, and according to their own character as active, passive, or neuter participles.
3.

Participles of verbs governing the dative

in the

ment

same

case, in

4. Verbal derivatives in Bar and It(^, signifying possibility, take a dative of the person whom the possibility concerns: thus, mir begreiflid) comprehensible to me, bem 9!Jlenfcf)en unbetro^nbar uninhabitable by man.
5. Almost any adjective qualified by gu too or getiug dently, enough admits an adjunct in the dative thus, ba
:

suffi,-

0eib

mir gu lang, i^m aber nid)t lang genug the garment me, but not long enough far him.
ift

is too

long for

adjectives admit a dative adjunct more readily, or when used with a verb, either predicatively or forming a more or less closely compounded verbal phrase thus, ba ift
6.

Many

only,

mir

fc^tt)er

bem naben grows hard for the boy. For such phrases, with transitive, intransitive, and impersonal
rec^t that suits
to

me

(seems

me

right),

ba

tt)trb

that

verbs, see above, 222.1.1(^, II.lc,/.

7. For the dative with an adjective, also, is often used a case governed by a preposition (especially Don /rom, fiir/or).

224.
1.

TJie

Dative with Prepositions.

dative.
(374).

About twenty prepositions govern the

list

For the
2.

of them, see

under Prepositions

Nine prepositions govern the dative when the relation expressed is that of situation or locality but the accusative, when motion or tendency toward anything is implied. These are an, auf, I)inter, in, neben, iiber, unter, Dor, 3tt)if(f)ett
;

(see 376).


96
225.
1.

USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION.

The Dative in other constructions.

[225-

of the dative as a virtual possessive genitive, grammatically dependent on a verb, but logically, or according to its real meaning, qualifying a noun, has been explained above (222.III.a,&). Karely, the dative js found having the same value with a noun alone as, bem 9liefen giir Sufi /or the gianfs pleasure (for a pleasure to the giant), er gab, iftm gu (S^ren, mandie gefte he gave many festivals in his honor. Yet more rarely, it occurs with a noun in other relations usually expressed by a genitive, or with the aid of a preposition as, ein 9Jiufter ^iiroern unb 33auern a model for citizens and peasants, emipeit einem neuen 33unbe assurance of a new covenant.
:

The use

follows a noun in exclamatory the imperative of jein to he were understood) thus, bem 33uben unb bem ^nt^t bie ^(^t outlawry to the villain and flunkey! greube bem 6terbli(!)en joy to the mortal! Some words habitually employed as exclamations are also followed by a dative signifying the person toward whom the feeling expressed by the exclamation is directed: such are tt)0^l, eil, SIBe^, and the like (see 392).
2.

The dative sometimes

if

phrases (as

ACCUSATIVE.
226.

The

relations of the accusative are

more simple than those

of

the other oblique cases. Its proper office is to stand as direct object of a verbal action ; and also, in the relation, most nearly akin with the former, of the goal of motion ; but this it has in German only in part.

The German uses

227.
1.

it

also as the case absolute,

The Accusative with Verbs.

is

The accusative

especially the case belonging to the

:

direct object of a transitive verb

clnen S)ut

as, ic^

fe^^e

ben 9JJann;

er trdgt

I see

the

man;

he wears a hat.

a. And a transitive verb, on the other hand, is one that takes a direct object in the accusative. The classification of verbs as transitive and intransitive is in part formal rather than logical (i. e. a matter of usage, and not of essential meaning), and h. Some verbs which in English are regarded as transitive take in German the genitive (219.5) or the dative (222. II.l), and

therefore belong to the class of intransitives. Again, some verbs which to us are intransitive are in German, uniformly or occasionally, transitive: as, i^r Ijobt mid) fpre(^en iDoHen desired to speak to me.

you have


227]
2.

ACCUSATIVE.

97

The accusative

is

also

sometimes used as the object of a

verb properly intransitive.

a. Some verbs may be followed by an accusative of meaning akin with their own, or signifying a substantive idea which they themselves virtually involve ( " cognate accusative " ). Thus, tt)ir fterben ^ier ben 2:ob ber greien we die here the death of the free, betet einen frommen pruc^ way a piom phrase, fie ](^ldft

ben le^ten d^Iaf she sleeps the last sleep.

h. By a pregnant construction, an intransitive may be followed by an accusative of that which is effected or made to appear by the action it designates: thus, tont bie ^lode (^rab^efang the bell tolls a funeral hymn, wa^ grinfeft bu mir Ijzx what grinnest thou at me (what does thy grinning signify) ? or by an accusative and an adjective or other equivalent expression as objective predicate, signifying the condition into which that which is designated by the accusative is brought by the action described by the verb thus, \i^ ^alb tobt [tot] lai^en to laugh one's self half dead, \^ tranm^ al ^inb m\^ ^uxMt I dream myself back into childhood (as child), bu tt)irft bie SBdd^ter an bem djlafe fc^reien tliou wilt scream the guards out of sleep.
:

c.

Some impersonal
:

verbs, denoting a personal condition or

an accusative signifying the person affected thus, e liiftet feinen, euer 9Jlann 3U tuerben no one desires See 294. to become your husband, mid) T^ungert Jam hungry. With these are included also biinfen, bdu(^ten [beuc^ten] seem (the only verbs in which a like construction still appears in
state of feeling, take

English)
(292.2).

thus,

mi^ hmitmethii^ks, mid)

bduc^te [beud)te] methought

These (and some of the others instead of an accusative object (222.II.le).

d.

also)

admit a dative

For the accusative

below
(229).

after Jein or merben with certain adjec-

tives, see
3.

A few transitive verbs govern two

taught
thus,

accusatives namely
:

Se^ren teach takes an accusative of the thing taught together with an accusative (or sometimes a dative) of the person
a.

to

whom

it is

id^ lebre iftn

(or i^m) bie Tln\it

I teach

him music. ragen ask and bitten beg also sometimes add to their personal object a pronominal accusative of the thing desired: thus, \^ bitte bid) nur bie I beg of thee only this.

way

C)ei^en and nennen call, name, fd)impfen and fd^elten call by of reproach, and tauf en christen, which add to their personal object a second accusative as objective predicate, denoting the
b.

^8

USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION.

title

[227-

name or
I

given: thus, t(^ toill alk eine (Sd)ictunQ nennen whole a wm^k of destiny, er fc^impfte feinen ^egner einen DIarren he reviled his adversary as a fool.
will call the
c.

A noun

in the accusative as objective predicate

fo

now and

then appears with other verbs as,

glaube jeber feinen ^ting ben

ed^ten then let each believe his own ring the genuine one ; but tliis construction is generally avoided by the use of a different ex-

pression
choose,

as,

man ma^i or
\6)

nja^It tftn
l^alte

gum
fiir

^onifl tliey

make, or

him king (for

friend,

king), \^
iftn

him

my

fenne

meinen greunb I deem him a al einen ^l^renmonn I

i^n

kmm

man

of honor.

228.
1.

The Accusative with Prepositions.

Qegen or gen,

Eight prepositions always govern the accusative.

bi, bur(i),
fiir,

They are
(see 375).
2.

ol&ne, fonber, urn, n)iber

Nine prepositions are followed by the accusative when they

;

indicate motion or tendency toward

otherwise,

by the
t)Dr,

dative.
gtt)if(f)en

They are
(see 376).

an, auf, Winter, in, neBen, iiber, unter,

229.

The Accusative with Adjectives.

A few adjectives, when

(especially the latter),

may

used predicatively with fein or h)erben take an object in the accusative.

They are
iiberbriiffig,

anfii^tig,

gufrieben:

I cannot now
content with

bemu^t, gema^r, gemol^nt, Io, miibe, fatt, thus, bie eifter njerb' id) nun nid)t log get rid of the spirits, id) \mf eg gufrieben I should be

it,

menu

mx

nic^t fein (Jingreifen

gema^r

tt)iirben if

we

did not feel

in part

its

taking hold.

This anomalous construction is of quite modern origin, and owing to a misapprehension of the old genitive eg as an accusative. It is easier with a pronoun than with a noun as object, and in the case of gufrieben contented is limited to a pronoun. The governing force belongs to the combination of adjective and verb (compare 223.6).
230.

The Accusative in absolute construction.

1. The accusative is used absolutely (that is, as adverbial adjunct of a verb or adjective, but not properly governed by them) to express measure whether of duration of time, of extent of space, of weight, of value, or of number.

230]

ACCUSATIVE.
er I)or(^te eincn

99

Thus,

id) Diele 3at)re nirf)t ocbad)t

^lugenbUc! he listened for a moment, an bie of which I have not thought for many

years, man I)atte fie nur mn'm 2.age border Gcfeften they had been seen only a few days before, stDangig 3a^^^ ^^^ twenty years since,
al
fie

eine oute ti-cc!e fortgcoanaen tuaren

cine !)albe Stiinbc )oox
tief

when

they

a good piece,
it

bcm

(Bdjlo^ half

had gone on a league outside

luieflt

the castle, ad^t 9J2orGen

eight furlongs deep, c^

ein

^funb

weiglis

a pound, ba

foflet ivozi %\)a\tx that costs

two

dollars, ein

C)eer 300,000

Wann

ftar!

an army 300,000 men

strong.

a. To an accusative expressing duration of time is often added the adverb lanG long as, er lag fieben 3a^re lanfi he lay
:

for seven ijears, ben flangcn %a(^ lang the whole day long; less often other adverbs: as, bag Qange 3al)r burc^ tlie whole year
through, biefe
h.

'^txi iiber all this

time.

By a similar construction, an adverb of direction or motion very frequently added to an accusative of space, in such way as almost to have the value of a preposition governing it thus, bie ^reppen l^erunter down the stairs, ben 58erg l^inan up the mountain, ben SBcg am 33ad) l^tnauf up the path by the brook, ben Oangen (S^orfo I)in unb n)ieber through the whole Corso and back.
is
:

2. The accusative is also used to express the time of occurrence ("time when"). Thus, ba ficfd)at) iebe ^al^x that happened every year, ben ^benb beim %aniz that evening at the dunce, er fie^t bie SKelt faum einen geiertag he sees the world only on a holiday.

This use of the accusative borders on that of the adverbial but the accusative has the more definite meaning, and cannot be used witliout a defining adjunct thus, ^lbenb, be ^benb of an eveniiig, in the evening (now and then, or habitually) but bicfen ^benb this evening, le^ten ^benb last evening, and so on.
a.

genitive (220.1)

3. a. A noun in the accusative is sometimes used absolutely, with an adjunct (prepositional or adjective), to express an accompanying or characterizing circumstance as if governed by with or having understood. Thus, bie D^lilttcr crfc^icnen, ben dugUng im ^rme the mothers appeared, (with) their infants in their arms, anbere fliet)en, iDtlbc ^Ingft im funfelnben ^ugc others fly, wild terror in their flashing

eyes.
h.

This
:

is

especially usual with a participle as adjunct of the

noun

thus,

mnli ung,

bie ^-acfcl

unuicmanbt beckons

to us,

with


100
torch inverted,
ftill

CONJUGATION.

[230-

man

aeiDoftnt e,

ben ^op^ Qegen ben ^orfo Gend)let;

gu fte^en it is trained to stand still, (having) the head directed toward the Corso, jelbft ^ranfe nic)t auSgenommen even sick persons

not excepted.
c.

Allied with this is the so-called imperative use of the

,

participle (see 359.3).

CONJUG-ATION.
231. Conjugation is variation for mode, tense, number,

and person. Only verbs are conjugated

jugation
is

hence, the subject of concoincident with that of verbal inflection.

:

VERBS.
The essential characteristic of a verb is that it predi232. cates or asserts something of a subject: that is to say, it

some action, or state, or quality, to some being or thing expressed by a noun or pronoun. This predication or ascription is not always direct and positive compare 427. it may be contingent, inquiring, or optative
ascribes
:

233.

Verbs are variously

classified.

and intransitive, accord1. ing to the nature of the relation they sustain to a noun representing the object of their action a verb that admits an object in the accusative is called transitive otherwise, intransitive. Thus, transitive verbs, ii^ lobe \^\\ I praise him, er jdjIdQtmid) he strikes me; intransitive, ic^ \\t^t, er fdflt I stand, he falls, er fd^onet feitie Setnbeg he spares his enemy, tcE) banfe 3^nen I thank

They are divided

into transitive

you.
a.

That the distinction of

it is

transitive

and

intransitive is in part formal

;

rather than essential, has been pointed out above (227. la, 6)

practically,

however,
2. a.

one of importance.
classes are distinguished

Under these

Reflexive verbs, which take an object designating the same person or thing with their subject.
h.

and

Impersonal verbs, used only in the third person singular, either with an indefinite subject or without an expressed

subject.

: :

236]

SIMPLE FOEMS

OF,

THE VEEB.

101

3. Transitive verbs, again, fornl by'"tl]LeTielp bf'ah auxiliaiy verb a passive voice, denoting the suffering of an action, and talcing as its subject what was the object of the transitive verb which latter, by contrast with the other, is said to be of the

ACTIVE VOICE.
4. Nearly all verbs, moreover, admit of being compounded with certain prefixes, of a prepositional character with reference to such composition, therefore, they are distinguished as SIMPLE and COMPOUND.
;

234.
of

whatever class they

The general rules of conjugation apply alike to all verbs, may be. They will be first stated and

illustrated in their application to simple personal verbs in the

active voice.

SIMPLE FORMS OF THE VERB.

235. The German verb has the as the English, namely
1.

same simple forms

Two
past

tenses,

the present, and the preterit, or indef-

inite

a. The value and use of these tenses nearly correspond in the two languages. But the present is sometimes employed in place of our perfect, or our future and the limits of the preterit and the perfect are also not precisely the same in both see 324 etc.
;

2.

These tenses are formed each in two modes, the

indicative and the subjunctive.

the German a. The subjunctive is nearly extinct in English subjunctive is employed sometimes for our potential and conditional others of its uses have no correspondent in English see 329 etc.
:

b.

The rendering

of the subjunctive tenses in the paradigms,

by may and might is only conventional, and for the sake of uniformity; such rendering gives but one of their
therefore,

various meanings.
3.

Each tense

is

declined in two numhers, with three

persons in each number, as in English.

4. Of an imperative mode there are two persons, the second singular and the second plural.
5.

An

infinitive, or verbal

noun

(339).

102
6.

VEEBS.

[235-

Two

present and active

passive.

PAETiciPLES, or verbal adjectives (349): one the other past, and prevailingly ;

a. The infinitive and participles are not proper verbal forms, since they contain no idea of predication. They present the verbal idea in the condition of noun and of adjective respectively; but, as regards their adjuncts, they share in the construction of their corresponding

verbal forms

see

348 and 357.

236.
1.

Examples

Iteben love (root, IteB).

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

Present
pers.
1

singular.

SINGULAR.
\(i)

\6) lieBe

Hove
thou lovest

liebe
Itebeft

/ may
he
PLURAL.

love

bu

liebft

bu

thou mayest love

3 er (iebt

he loves

er Hebe

may

love

PLURAL.
1

W'w lieben we love ye love x^x Hebt

fie

tvxv lieben
xi)X

liebet

lieben

they love

fie

lieben

may love may love they may love

ive

ye

Preterit,

SINGULAR.
1
id liebte

SINGULAR.
id^ liebte,

I loved
thou lovedst

=bete

I might

love

bu

liebteft

bu

liebteft, :=beteft

thou mightest love

3 er liebte

he loved

er liebte, -bete

he might love

PLURAL.
1

PLURAL.
loved

U)ir Itebteu

we

2 i^r liebtet

ye loved
they loved

Wix liebten, =beten we might love ye might love xijx liebtet, ==betet
fie liebten, ==beten

fie

liebten

they might love

Imperative,
singular.
2 liebe, liebe

PLURAL.
liebt, liebt xl)x

bu

love thou

love ye

Infinitive.
lieben
to love

Participles.
Present.
liebenb
Past.
geliebt

loving

loved

236]

SIMPLE FOEMS OF THE VEEB.

103

Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of verbs of the New or weak conjugation, corresponding with what are wont to be called " regular verbs " in English. The special rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given below see 246 etc.

The forms liebeft and liebct may be used also in the present and the imperative, as well as UeBete etc. in the preterit indicative, and geliebet in the past participle see below, 237.3.C.
2.

indicative

2.

geben give (root, geb).

Indicative.
Present,

SUBJUNCTIVK
SINGULAR.
.

SINGULAR.
1
tdf)

gebe

I give
thou givest

id^

gebe
gebeft

/ may
he
PLURAL.

give

bit giebft, giOft

bu

thou mayest give

3 er glebt, gibt

he gives

er gebe

may give

PLURAL.
1
tt)ir

geben
gebt

we give
ye give
they give

tt)tr

geben
gebet

we may give
ye
they

\i)x

\S)x

fie

geben

fie

geben

may give may give

Preterit,

SINGULAR.
1

SINGULAR.
i(^

\6)

gab

/ gave
thou gavest

gabe

/ might

give

bn gabft er gab 3
2

bn gab eft
er gcibe

thou mightest give

he gave

he might give
PLURAL.

PLURAL.
1

n)ir

gaben

we gave
ye gave
they gave

iDir

gdben
gaben

we might

give

i^r gabt
fie

ibr gcibet
fie

ye might give
they might give

gaben

Imperative.
SINGULAR.
2 gieb, gib

PLURAL.
Q^thi,

bn

give thou
Infinitive.

gebt \^x

give ye

geben

to

give

Participles.
Present.

Past
gegeben
given

gebenb

giving

104

YEEBS.

[236-

Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, corresponding with what are wont to be called "irregular verbs" in English. The special rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given below: see 261 etc.
2.

occasionally

The forms geBet, met with

QaBeft, Qobtt (for gebt, fiabft, Qobt)

are

the double forms

237.
1.

giebft,

also gaBft, Qobi (for gabeft, Qabel). gibft, etc., see 268.16.

For

General Rules respecting the Simple Forms of the Verb.

Of the forms thus

given,

three are called the

PKiNcrPAL PARTS, because,

others can be inferred

itive,

when they are known, all the from them these are the infin:

the 1st pers. sing. preterit, and the

Itebte, geliebt;

-pBist

participle:

thus, lieBen,
or.

geben, ^ab, gegeben.

in

en.

The infinitive always ends in n, and almost always The rejection of this n or en gives us the eoot

(3935) of the verb.

roots of

Not ending in en are only fein he, iljnn do, and infinitives from more than one syllable ending in I or r, as tt)anbeln walk,

tDonbern wander.

K There are, as the examples show, two ways of forming the preterit and past participle the preterit adding ete or te to the root, or else adding nothing, but changing the radical vowel ; the participle taking the ending et or t, or else en or n. According to these differences, verbs are divided into two conjugations (see
:

below, 246).
2.

The endings

of tense inflection are

e,

first pers. singular,

second pers. "

third pers.
"

eft, ft, e,
et, t, e,

first pers. plural, en,

n
n

second pers. "

third pers.
"

et, t

en,

The rules for their use are as follows a. The first persons sing. pres. indicative and subjunctive are the same, and formed by adding e to the simple root.
Exceptions are only bin am,
of the
f

ei

may

he,

modal auxiharies

(see 251.3),

and

toiffen

and the pres. indicative Imow (260).

237]
h.

SIMPLE FORMS OP THE VERB.

105

junctive,

Old

(and third) pers. singular of the preterit subof the preterit indicative except in verbs of the or strong conjugation (269.1.1), also end in e.

The

first

and

3. a.
ct

The
th, s

(our

third pers. sing. pres. indicative has the ending t or in loveth, laves) : in all the other tenses, the third

person is like the first. Exceptions without the ending t are only the modal auxiliaries (see 251.3), and a few other verbs (268.5).
:

h. The ending of all second persons singular (except in the imperative) is ft or eft (our sHn Invest); of all first and third persons plural (excepting only finb are), en or n of all second persons plural (with the single exception fetb are) et or t.
;

retention or rejection of the vowel e of the endings eft, e before the te forming the preterit of one conjugation) depends partly on euphony, partly on arbitrary choice. The e must always be used when the final letter of the root is
c.

The

et

(also of

such that the consonant of the ending would not otherwise be distinctly heardthus, we may say liebeft or liebft, but only or \kM, but only bittet begs, lief eft readest, tangeft dancest; liebt also, when a harsh or unpronounceable combination rebet talks of consonants would otherwise occurthus, only at^meft [atmeft],

atfimet [atmet] hreathest,

breathes; fe^neft, fegnet blessest, blesses.

In other cases, the writer or speaker is allowed to choose between the fuller and the briefer form the latter being more familiar or colloquial, the former more used in stately and solemn styles. But the e is more often retained in the sub;

junctive,

and

especially

when the
it.

distinction of subjunctive

and
is

indicative

depends upon

The

of the ending en of the first

and third persons plural

er

rarely dropped except after unaccented

or

el,

in the indicative.

Special rules affecting some of the forms of the Old or strong conjugation will be given below (268-9).
d.

The

final

imaccented

words

in the language) is not imfrequently cut

of all verbal forms (as of all other off, especially in

poetry,

and

in colloquial style.
;

be used, to show the omission

An apostrophe should always but this is sometimes neglected.

4 The inflection of tlie tenses is always regular, except in the second and third persons singular of the pres. indicative, which often show a difference of vowel or of consonant, or both, from the other persons of the

106
tense.

VERBS.

[237-

The same

irregularities

appear in part also in

e

the imperative singular (see 268, 270).

5.

The imperative singular ends

;

in

in nearly all

verbs

(for

exceptions, see 270.2) the plural is the same with the second pers. pi. indie, present. Both numbers admit of use, as in English, either

For the
see 243.1.

filling

with or without a subject pronoun. up of the imperative with subjunctive forms,

6. The form of the present participle found by adding b to the infinitive. Only t!)un cto and fein be form t^uenb, (eienb. 7.

may always be

The past

participle has usually the prefix

j^e.

For

exceptions, see 243.3.

also

Notice that the third pers. plural of all verbal forms is used in the sense of a second person, singular or plural (see 153.4), its subject fie being then written with a capital thus,
8.
:

<5ie liebcn

you

love,

8ie gab en you gave.

(Exercise 14.

Simple Forms of the Verb.)

COMPOUND FOKMS OF THE VEKB.

As in the case of the English verb, again, the German conjugation is filled up with a large number of compound forms, made by the aid of
238.

scheme

of

auxiliary verbs.

239.

Conjugation of the Auxiliaries of Tense.

auxiliaries used in the formation of the tenses
become.
:
^

The

of ordinary conjugation are three

fein he, tDerben

namely, Ijabcn have, The simple forms of these verbs

:

are as follows
1.

aben

principal parts
I ham
tlwu
ic^

t)aben, l^atte, gcljabt.

Indicative.
Present.

Subjunctive.
SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.
1 ic^

^abe
^aft

^abe

I may
he

have have

bu

ha4

bit Ijabeft

thou mayest have

3 er ^ai

he has

cr

\jciiK

may

239]

AUXILIARIES OF TENSE.
Present.

107

PLURAL

PLURAL.
tt)ir

we have
2
\[)x

Ijaben

we may have
ye
they

])aht
'

y[e

have
fie

" ' 3 fie ^aben

they have

^aben

may have may have

iPreterit.

SINGULAR.
1

SINGULAR.
x6) f)aii^

id^ '^atte""

rhad bu ^atteft \Xj'^u hadst

^

/ might

have

bu
er

^atteft
l^citte

thou mightest have

3 er f)aitt^)^

he had

he might have
PLURAL.

PLURAL.
I

tvxx 'fatten s

we had
ye had
they

irtr fatten
\f)X f)dttet

ive

might have

i^r ^attet
fie

ye might have
they might have

fatten

had

fie Ijdtten

Imperative.
SINGT
f;abe

PLURAL.

have thou
Infinitive.
l^aben
to

^abt

have ye

have

Participles.
Present.
l^abenb

Past
ge'^abt

having

had

2. (Sein he:

principal parts

fetn, Voax, cjeUjefcn.

Indicative.
Present.

Subjunctive.

singular.
1

SINGULAR.
td fet

\6)

bin
bift
ift

I am
thou art he is

I may

be

bu

bu

feieft

3 er

er fei

thou mayest be he may be

PLURAL.

PLURAL.
1

\mx finb
if)r

we are
ye are
they are

tvxx feien

we may
ye

be

2 3

feib

i^r fcict
fie

fie

finb

foicu

maybe they may be

108

VEBBS.
Preterit,

[239-

SINGULAR.
idf)

SINGULAR.
id^ tDcire

tvax
tuarft

I was
thou wast

/ mty/i^
/le

be

bu

bu

hjareft

//iow mightest be

er toax

he was

er tt)dre

mi^Ti^ be

PLURAIi.
tt)ir

PLURAL.
iDtr iDaren
ii?e

tt)aren

we were
ye were
they were

might be

\i)x

tvaxtt

i^r tuaret
fie tDciren

ye might be
they might be

fie

tuaren

Imperative.
SINGULAR.
2 fei be thou
Infinitive.
fein
to be

PLURAL.
feib

be ye

Participles.
Present.
fetenb
3.

being

gettjefen

been

SSerben becorm:
getDorben.
Indicative.

principal
Present.

parts tuerben, tvaxh or

ttjurbe,

Subjunctive.
SINGULAR.
id^ lt)erbe

SINGULAR.
1

i6) ttjerbe

/ become
^/iow

/ may become
//loit

bu

tDirft
tt)irb

becomest

bu

trerbeft

mayest

etc.

3 er

Ae becomes
PLURAL.

cr U)erbe

Ae

may

become

PLURAL.

tDir tDerben
i()r

if^

become
become

iDir
\l)X

tuerben
iDerbet

tDerbet

ye become
^/iey

ye

fie

tDerben

fie

trerbeu

may become may become they may become

i^e

Preterit.

SINGULAR.
1

SINGULAR.
id^ tt)iirbe

id^ UJarb,

I became
thou becamest

I might

become
etc.

iDurbe
2

bu marbft,
iDurbeft

bu

iDiirbeft

thou mightest

3 er tDarb,

he became

er tDiirbe

he might become

tpurbe

239J
PLUBAL.
1

AUXnJARIES OP TENSE.
PLURAL.

109

Wiv tDurben
i^r tDurbet
fie

loe

became

ttjir

iDiirben

loe

might become

ye became
they became

i^r tDiirbet
fie

ye might become
they might become

murben

tDiirben

Imperative,
singular.
2 njerbe

plural.
tuerbet

become thou

become ye

Infinitive.

IDerben

to

become

Participles.
Present.
Past.

trerbenb

becoming

getnorben

become

4.

Irregularities in the Conjugation of these Verbs.

a. aben is analogous in its conjugation with lieben, above, but the frequency of its use has led to abbreviation of a few Thus, {)aft and f^at are for older l^abft and l^abt, of its forms. and ^atte for l^abte. The modification of the vowel in l^dtte, pret. subj., is against the prevailing analogy of verbs of its class

(see 250.2).
b.

ein

is of

the
is

same conjugation with

far greater than that of

gebcn, above.

Its

any other verb in the language, comes mainly from its being made up of forms derived from three independent roots bin and bift are from the same root as our be, being, been (original form bhu; Lat. /m, Greek phuo) ; the rest of the present from the same root as our pres. indicative am etc. (original form as; Lat. sum, etc., Greek eimi); while the preterit wax and past participle, Qett)efen, are from the root of our was, were (original form vas, dwell, abide.
irregularity,
:

which

Some authors
distinguish
it

still

retain

eij

for

ei

(see 19.3) in fein, in order to

from the possessive

fein (157).

c. SBerben is a nearly regular verb of the same conjugation with fleben. For its persons mirft and mxh, see below, 268.5. In the double form of its pret. ind. singular, it preserves a solitary relic' of a condition once belonging to many verbs in the language, whose preterits had a different vowel in the singular and plural. SBarb is the original form, and n)urbe is a quite- modern and anomalous fabrication, made after the analogy of the plural

wurben^

no
240. Formation of the
1.

VEEBS.

[240Tenses.

Compound

or fetn, with tlie past participle of any verb, are formed a perfect and a pluperfect tense, indicative and subjunctive, and a perfect infinitive. a. The Perfect tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed by adding the past participle to tlie present tense of l^aBen or of
fein
:

From ^akn

bin

thus, trf) l)abe oeliebt I have loved, or I maij have laved, id) gefommen I have (dm) come, id) fei gefomtnen I may have

come.
h. The Pluperfect adds the participle to the preterit of the auxiUary thus, [^ ^atte gelieBt J had hved, \^ ^^citte gelieBt I might have loved, id) tDar gefommcn I had (was) come, i^ waxt gefommen I might have come.
:

But the modal auxiliaries (251) and a few other verbs c. (namely laffcti, I)ci^en, I)elfen, l^oren, fe^^en, le'^ren and lerncnthe last two not uniformly), when construed with another verb in the infinitive, form their perfect and pluperfect tenses by adding
the infinitive instead of the participle to the auxiliary (see 261.4).
d.

The Perfect Infinitive

:

prefixes the participle to the simge^-

ple or present infinitive

thus, gelieBt ^ahtn to have loved,

fommen fein to have come. e. "What verbs take 'tjdbm and what take fein as their auxiUary, will be explained below (see 241). Por omission of the auxiliary,
see 439.3a.
2.

From

of the verb, are

tense,

with the infinitives, present and past, formed a future and a future perfect indicative and subjunctive, and a conditional and
ti:)erben,

conditional perfect.
a. The Future tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed by prefixing to the present infinitive the present tense, indicative and subjimctive, of tDcrben: thus, i^ merbe lieben or fommen I

shall love or come.

h.

The Future Perfect

thus,
fein
i(^

prefixes the
gelicbt

fect infinitive:
id)

merbe gefommen
c.

^aben I shall have come.

tt)crbe

same tenses to the perI shall have loved,

The Conditional and Conditional Perfect are formed by prefixing to the present and perfect infinitive the preterit subjunctive of iBerben thus, \i^ n)iirbe lieben or fommen I should love or come; i(^ miirbe geltebt l^aben I should have loved, \6) miirbe
:

gefommen

fein IsJiould

have come.

241]

COMPOUND TENSES.

Ill

3. The uses of these tenses so nearly agree with those of the corresponding English phrases with which they are translated that they need no explanation here for details, see 323 etc. 4. The German is the only one of the Germanic languages which, in its modern extension of the conjugational system by composition, has
:

chosen iDerben as
geben, hterally

its

auxiliary for forming the future tenses.

3d) tnerbe

the idea of
a.

lam becoming io give, receives a future meaning through e. I am going to give. I am coming into a condition of giving,
i.

In the tenses formed with

l)al)en,

the participle

is

originally one

qualifying the object of the verb in the manner of an objective predicate, or expressing the condition in which Ihae (possess, hold) the
object.

This, as being the constructive result of a previous action, is

accepted as a description of that action, and ic^ ^abe bie ^ilrme auggeftved t, for example, from meaning I have my arms stretched out, comes to signify

J have
h.

stretched out

my

arms.

the other hand, in the tenses formed with feiu, the participle is originally one qualifying the subject in the manner of a direct predicate,

On

English, has

and defining a state or condition in which the subject exists. This, in become (by a process quite analogous with that just above described) also a passive, or an expression for the enduring of the action which produced that condition. But the German uses (see below, 275) another auxiliary to form its passives, and, in its combination of fein
with the participle, it only adds to the assertion of condition the less violent implication that the action leading to the condition is a past

one ic^ bin gefomnien lam here, being come is a thing of the past; or, I have come.
:

i.

e.,

my

action of coming

c.

In

strictness, then, t)aben

itive verbs,

should form the past tenses only of transand when they take an object; and fein, only of intransitives

which express a condition of their subject. But, as have in English has extended its use until it has become the auxiliary of all verbs without exception, so, in German, l}aben has come to be used with transitive verbs even when tLey do not take an object, and with such intransitives as are in meaning most akin with these until the rules for the employment of the two have become as stated in the next paragraph.
;

241.
1.

Use of Ijahcn or

fcin

as Auxiliary of Tense,

Yerbs which take

Ijiibcn

as auxiliary are

a.

All transitive verbs (including the reflexives and

the modal auxiliaries).

b.

Almost

all intransitives

which take an object in the

genitive (219.5) or the dative (222.II.la).

_jCA^argcfnumber

of other intransitiv^.s, especially

activity,

such as denote a simple

a lasting condition, or


112
VERBS.
of

[241-

mode

motion (including

all

the proper impersonal

verbs).
2. Verbs wliicli take fetn for auxiliary, as exceptions under the above classes, are Especially, many intransitives which signify a a. change of condition, or a movement of transition, from a point of departure or toward a point of arrival.

These intransitives are partly such as do not take an object fommen come, f aHen/aW, finfen sink, trac^fen grow, fterben die, berften hurst, erftarren stiffen, erlofd^en become extinguished, einf(^Iafen fall asleep, guriirftreten retreat;^a.vt\j such as may take a dative object in virtue of the meaning given them by a prefix: as, entlaufen run away from, tt)iberfaftren happen to,
as, tt)erben become,

cntQCQenQe'^en go to meet, auffaHen strike the attention of.

b.

A few others,

without reference to their meaning

namely,

an objective dative, begefitten meet, folgen follow, tceiij^en give way, gelingen and gliiden turn out successalso jein fully (with their opposites, mi^IinQen and mi^glurfen)
of verbs that take
:

be,

Heiben remain,
3.

gc'^en go.

A small number of verbs may take either auxiliary.

Some
that are used with different meanings
:

a.
l&at

as, ber

edeb
auf*

aufaeftanben the cover has stood open, mein 33ruber ficftanben my brother has got up.

ift

b. About twenty verbs of motion, which take ^aben when the act of motion or its kind are had^'in view (as in answer to the questions liow, how long, when, where ?), but f ein when reference is had to a starting-point or an end of motion (as in answer to the questions whence, whither, Jww far?): thus, ber ^nabe ^at fiefpruttQcn the boy has jumped, but er ift t)Dm 33aume gcfprungen he has jumped from the tree; fie l^aben t)iel gereift they have travelled muxih, but er ift na^ nglanb gereift he has gone to

England.
c.

te^en stand, liegen

lie,

fifeen

sit

(especially the

first),

are

sometimes conjugated with

all

fetn,

but properly take ^aben under

circumstances.
Oth^er verbal Auxiliaries.

242.

Besides the three heretofore spoken of, there are a number of verbs, generally or often used with other verbs, to impress upon them modifications of meaning more or less analogous

243]

AUXILIARIES.

113

with those expressed by the forms of conjugation of guages. Such are

1.

some

lan-

The MODAL

AUXILIARIES, of

wMch there

are six

fonnen can,

moQm may,
will.

hixx^m he permitted, mn\\^n must, ]oUtr\ shall, tDoIIen

They have, however, a much more independent value and use in German than in English, and are not to be treated as bearing any part in the ordinary verbal conjugation. Their peculiarities of inflection and construction will be explained
below (251
2.

etc.).

The CAUSATIVE
:

uses) is often

employed

auxiliaey, laffen, which (as one among many in a causal sense with the infinitive of

another verb
3.

macf)en lafjen to

as, einen ^od mad)cn to make a coat, einen D^orf have a coat made (cause to make it) : see 343.1.5.

Enghsh,

^"^un do (267-5), which we employ freely as auxihary in Some of the German is not used as such in German.
;

dialects, indeed, make an auxiliary of it and it is now and then found having that value even in the literary language thus, unb tl^ u' nid)t me^r in SSorten framen and do no longer peddle out
:

words.
243.

tive, Infinitive,
1.

Other points in general conjugation, affecting the Imperaand Past Participle.

third pers. singular,

The

and the

first

and third

pers.

very commonly used in an imperative sense (see 331), and may be regarded as filling up the defective declension of that mood. Thus, for the two verbs
plural, of the present subjunctive are
first given,

Imperative.
Singular,
1

Plural.

licben U)ir
liebet, liebt xijt

let

u^ love

2 lieBc, liebe bu love

love
let

3 liebc cr
1

let

him

love

lieBen
Qebett

fie

them love
us give

tt)ir

let
iftr

2 Qxtb, gib bu 3 gebe er

give
let

gebt, Qebet

give
let

him give

geben

fie

them give

Of these forms, the third plural is in especially frequent use as substitute for the second person of either number (153.4)
thus, gcben ie mir ba 33u(^ give

un

he shall give, Ia un geben, laffen 6ie un geben let us give-^-avQ more or less employed, but need no special remark.
er foil (jeben

Other imperative phrases

fleben, la^t

as,

me

the hook.

; :

114

VERBS.

[243-

2. The infinitive, as in English (though not so commonly), takes this is always placed often the preposition gu to as its sign next before the simple infinitive form thus, gu QeBen, gegeben gu
; :

For details respecting the use of p, see 341 etc. 3. The past participle of nearly all verbs has the
Exceptions are
a.

prefix ge.

Verbs that begin with an unaccented syllable, especially Those ending in the infinitive in iren or ieren (being verbs derived from the French or Latin, or others formed after their
1.

model)
ftubiren

as marfd^iren [mar((^ieren] march, part,

[ftubieren]

rtiarfc^irt [=fd)icrt]

2. Those compounded with an inseparable, and therefore unaccented, prefix

study, part, flubirt [=biert].

as, t)ergeben forgive, part. jjerQeben.

prop^^eaeien

3.

few others, such as

prophesy, Irompeten trumpet.

b. SSerben, when used as passive auxiliary, forms U) orb en instead of getoorben (see 276.1aj. c. The syllable ge was not originally an element of verbal inflection, It was but is one of the class of inseparable prefixes (see 307.5). formerly used or omitted as special prefix to the participle without any traceable rule, and has only in modem times become fixed as its nearly invariable accompaniment. Hence, in archaic style and in poetry, it is still now and then irregularly dropped.

\^^^Synopsls of the complete conjugation o/^aBen and

jein.

The synopsis of iDerben will be given later, in connection with that of the passive voice of the verb (277).
Indicative.
Present,
s. I tjobt

I have
I had

etc,

/am etc,
Bin

Peeteeit,
s. I ^latte

etc.

I was etc.
tDor
etc.

Pebfect,
s. I l^aBe

I have had

I have been etc.

Bin gettjefen

ge^abt
etc.

Plupeefect, I had had

s.
I

I had

been etc.

^atk Qti)aU
etc.

\oax getoefen

FuTUEE, I shaU have

s. I U)erbe

I shall
n)erbe fein
etc.

he etc.

%aBen

FuTUEE Peefect, I sholl have had

s. I

I shall

have been
fein

etc.

merbe ge^aBt l^aBen

merbe gemejen

245]

AUXILIARIES.
SUBJTJNPTIVE.

115

Pbesent,
s. I

I may have
I might

etc.
fei

Immj he etc.
I might
tt)dre

ftaBe

Peetekit,
s. I \aiit

have

etc.

he etc.

Peefect,
s. I l^aBc

I may

have had

etc.

I may
etc.

hxive heen etc.

%t))aU

jei fletDcjcn

PiiUPEEFECT,

I might have had

etc.

I might / shall
tuerbe fein
etc.

have heen

etc.

s. I fjcitte ge!)abt

iDare Qewefen
he etc.

FuTUEE, J s^aZ/ Aaue

s.
I

merbe ftaBen

FuTUEE Peefect, I shall have had

s.
I

I shall have

heen etc.

tDerbe gel^abt

^aben

merbe flemefen jein

Conditional.
Conditional,
s. I

I should

have

etc.

I should he
tt)urbe fein
etc.

etc.

miirbe ^^aben

Cond'l Peefect, I should have had

s. I tDiirbe

I should

have heen etc,

ge^abt ijaUn

miirbe getuejeu fein

Impeeative.
have
s.
etc.
fei
*

6e etc.

:f)abe

Infinitives.
to he

Peesent,

to

have

l^aben

fein

Peefect,

to

have had

to

have heen

gel^abt l^aben

getDefen fein

Participles.
Peesent, having
l^abenb
Past, had
gel^abt
heing

feienb
heen
fleniefen

[Exercise

15.

Simple and Compound Forms of the Auxiliaries.]

CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS.
245. Yerbs are inflected in two modes, called respectively the

Old

or Strong, and the

New

or

Weak

conju-

gations.

116
246.
1.

VEEBS.

[246-

tlieir preterit

of the Old or Strong conjugation form by a change of the vowel of the root, without any added ending, and their past participle by the

Verbs

ending en thus,
:

geben, (\ab, gec^eben

fingen, fang, gefnngen.

2.

Verbs

of the

New

or

Weak

preterit
ticiple

by adding te or ete by the ending et or

to the root,

conjugation form their and their parliebte,

t: thus, (ieben,

geltebt;

reben, rebete, gerebet.

The Old and New Conjugations correspond to what have been and *'Eegular " verbs. The former, as the name implies, is the more primitive method of inflection its preterit was originally a reduplicated tense, like the Greek and Latin
3.

generally called in English the "Irregular"

perfects (as dedoka,

tetigi) ; and, in the oldest Germanic languages, many verbs have retained the reduplication (as I)ai^atb held, from l^atban hold: By phonetic corruption and abbreviajaiflep slept, from ftepatt sleep). tion, however, this reduplication led to an alteration of the radical vowel, and then was itself dropped, in the great majority of verbs ; producing phenomena of conjugation so various that there was left no prevailing and guiding analogy by which to inflect the new derivative verbs, that were brought in as needed, to supplement the old resources of expression. Hence the need of a new method of conjugation ; which was obtained by adding the preterit of the verb do (did) to the theme

of conjugation.

The

preterit-ending te of the New conjugation is the reUc

of this auxiliary (as, in English,

I loved

stands for an original

I love-did).

of the language ; the New, all those of later origin. Only, as the latter have become the larger class, and their mode of conjugation the prevailing one, some of the old verbs (although to by no means such an extent as in English) have been changed, in part or altogether, to conform to it.

The Old conjugation

therefore includes the

more primitive verbs

See below, 272. ^ The wholly fanciful names "Strong" and "Weak," now generally adopted, are the invention of Jacob Grimm (compare 73, 132).

We shall take up first the New conjugation,

in its forms,

as being simpler

and

easiest to learn.

NEW OE WEAK

CONJUGATION.

The characteristics of the 247. jugation are that its preterit ends in
in
t.

New
te,

or

Weak

con-

and

its participle

NEW OB WEAK CONJUGATION.

248,

117

Examples

reben tolh, manbern wander.

Principal Parts.

reben, rebete, gerebet

wonbern, wanberte, Qewanbert

Indicative.

Peesent,
s. I

IMk etc.

I wander
tt)anberft

etc.

rebe

tt)onbere, tt)anbre

2 rebeft

3 rebet

ttjanbert

P.I reben 2 rebet

tt)anbern
tt)anbert

3 reben
Peetekit,
s. I

wanbern

I talked

etc.

I wandered QUi.
tDanberte
tt)anberteft

rebete

2 rebeteft 3 rebete

n)anberte
tt)anberten

P.I rebeten 2 rebetet

3 rebeten

n)anbertet
tt)anberten
etc.

Perfect, I have talked

s. I

I have wandered
bin getranbert
bift
ift

etc.

^aht Qerebet
i)ai

2 5aft Qerebet

gemanbert

3
p.

Qerebet

geiDanbert

I ftaben Qerebet 2 ^abt Qerebet

ftnb gen)anbert
feib getDanbert

3 ^aben Qerebet
Plijpeefect,
s.
I

finb gett)anbert
talked etc.

I had

IhM wandered etc.

tt)ar

5atte gerebet
l^atteft

QetDanbert
gett)anbert

gerebet

XocLX\i

3
p.

ftatte

gerebet

xoax getDanbert
tt)aren getronbert

I fatten gerebet 2 ^attet gerebet

Xoaxi getoanbert

3 fatten gerebet

U)aren gen)anbert

FuTUEB, I shall
s. I

talk etc.

IsMl wander etc.

tt)erbe
tt)irft

merbe reben
tnlrft

n)anbern

reben reben

ttjanbern

tuirb

iDirb

tuanbern

118
P. I

VERBS.
toerbctt rcbctt

[248^
tDerben tDanbern

2 tt)erbet reben

merbet manbern
tDerben raanbern

3 merben reben
FuTTJEB Peefect,
s.
I

I shttll
l^aben

have talked

etc.

/ sTiall
mx\t

have wandered

etc.

merbc gerebet tjobm

h)trft fierebet

toerbe getoanbert fein

gett)anbert fein

3 tDirb gerebet \)ahm

P.
I

mxh

gemanbert

fein

n)erben oerebet

^aUn

njerben getranbert fein

2 merbet gerebet ftaben

mxhzt

geraanbert fein

3 toerben Qerebet l^aBen

n)erben gemanbert fein

Subjunctive.
Peesent,
s. I

I may

talk etc.

I may wander

etc.

rebc

tt)anbere, njanbre
tt)anbereft, n)anbreft

2 rebeft

3 rebe

wanbere, iuanbre
tt)anberen, tranbren
tt)Qnberet, nianbret

P.I rebcn
2 rebet

3 reben

toanberen,

manbren

Pbeteeit,
s. I

I might

talk etc.

I might wander etc.

n)anbertc
tt)anberteft

rebete

2 rebeteft

3 rebete
p.
I

tt)anberte

rebeten

tDanberten;
toanbertet
tt)anberten

2 rebetet

3 rebeten

Peefect,
s.
I

Im^y

have talked

etc.
fei

I may have wandered etc.

gemanbert
geraanbert
feiefl fei

^aU

gerebet

2 l^abefl Qerebet

3 ftabe Qerebet
p.
I

gemanbert
gemanbert
getuanbert

fiaben gerebet

feien
feiet

^aM

oerebet

3 Ibaben gerebet

feien genianbert

Plupeefect,
s. I

I might

have talked

etc.

I might
n)are
tt)dreft

have wandered

etc.

ptte gerebet
^citte

gemanbert
gett)anbert

2 ptteft gerebet

3
p.
I

gerebet

njdre

gemanbert
getuanbert

!)dtten gerebet

n)dren gen)anbert
iDciret

i\aM

gerebet

3 Mtten gerebet

tt)dren

gemanbert

248]
FuTUEE, Ishcdl
s. I

NEW OB WEAK
talk etc.

CONJUGATION.

119

I shall wander etc,

tt)erbe

iDcrbe reben 2 merbeft reben

toanbern

werbeft n^anbern
IDerbe tcanbern

3 tDerbe reben
p.
I

n)erben reben

toerben

manbcm

2 tt)erbet reben

tt)erbet tt)anbern

3 ttjerben reben

irerben nianbern
etc.

FuTUEE Perfect, I shall hxjLve talked

s. I

I shall have wandered

tDerbe

etc.

tt)erbe

gerebet

^aben

gemanbert

fein

2 merbeft gerebet ^dbtn 3

p.
I

n)erbeft Gett)anbert jein

tt)erbe

mxht

Qerebet

^dbm

getoanbert fein
fein

merben Qerebet ^aben

'iiobtn

werben gemanbert merbcn getDanbert

Conditional.

2 trerbet flerebet ftaben

toerbet gett)anbert fein

fein

3 toerben gerebet

Conditional,
s.
I

I should talk

etc.

I should wander etc.

n)iirbe

iriirbe

reben

n)anbern

tt)iirbeft

reben

Wiirbeft njanbern

3 tDiirbe reben
p.
I

Wiirbe njanbern
h)iirben n)anbern
tDiirbet

miirben reben

2 miirbet reben

manbern

3 tt)iirben reben

tDiirben tt)anbern
etc.

CoND. Peef., I should have talked

s.
I

I should have wandered etc.

tt)iirbe

n)iirbe gerebet l^aben

gettjanbert fein

2 miirbefl gerebet l^aben

tDitrbeft gett)anbcrt fein

tt)iirbe

3
p.
I

tt)iirbe

gerebet ^aben
gerebet ftaben

gett)anbert fein

tt)iirben

tt)iirben

geiDanbert fein

2 iDiirbet gerebet baben

njiirbet gett)anbert fein

3 miirben gerebet l^aben

miirben gewanbert fein

Imperative.
talk etc.
s.

loandfer etc.

2 rebe, rebe

bn

n)anbere, toanbere

bu

3 rebe er, er rebe

p.
I

tDanbere
tt)anbern

er, er tt)anbrc
tt)ir

reben

tt)ir

2 rebet, rebet

I'^r

ttJanbert, tt)anbert

if)r

3 reben

fie

wanbern

jle

120

YEEBS.
Infinitive.

248-

Present,

to talk

to

vender

reben, gu rebcn

toonbern, gu manbern
.

Pbefect,

to

have talked

to

have wandered

gerebet l^aben, gcrebet 3u l^obcn

Qetuanbcrt jetn, Qcmanbcrt gu jetn

Pabticiples.
Pbesent, talking

wandmng
tDanbernb
wandered ^^ gewanbert

rcbenb
Past, talked
gerebet

Bemarks.

The conjugation
c

of retention of

of reben exemplifies the necessity of the endings et, ete after a consonant with
SGSanbern is one
!^aben

which t would be confounded in pronunciation. of the verbs which (241.36) take sometimes
times
|ein

and some-

as auxiliary. It exemplifies the loss of e of the ending en, and other peculiarities of the combination of endings with verbal roots in el and er.
Irregularities of the

New

Conjugation.

in nn or nb, change the radical vowel e to a in the preterit indicative (not the ^^bjunctive also) and in t^e past participle. Thus

249.

A few verbs,

all of

which have roots ending

InfinUive.

Preterit.
indicative.

Participle.

subjunctive.

brennen fennen nennen

rennen
fenben
tt)enben
a.

hum
krww name run
send turn

brannte
fannte

brennte
fennte

gebrannt gefannt

nannte
rannte
fanbte
tDanbte

nenntc
renntc
fenbete

genannt
gerannt ^
gefanbt

wenbete

gemanbt

last two, fenben and n)enben, may also form the pret. indicative and the participle regularly: thus, jenbete, gefenbet;

The

ttjenbete,

gemenbet.
1.

verbs, Brtngen hring and benfen think, are still and agree closely in their forms with the corr responding EngUsh verbs. Thus
250.

Two

more

irregular,

Infinitive.

Preterit.
indicative.

Participle.

subjunctive.

brlngen
benfen

hring
think

bra(f)te
ba(i)te

brdc^te

gebrad)t
gebacC)!

Va^ii


251]
2.

MODAL AUXILIARIES.
The
;

121
in full

irregularities of ^aBen

have been given

above

bringen, benfen, and fjobtn, with some of the modal auxiliaries, are the only verbs of the New or weak conjugation
(239.4:a)

like the

which modify in the preterit suhj. the vowel of the indicative, verbs of the Old or strong conjugation (269.11).
[Exercise 16.

Yerbs of the
Auxiliaries.

New or Weak Conjugation.]

V
251.
1.

Modal

These are

(as already-noticed)
be allowed
miiffen

biirfen

must

jjonnen can
tnoQen
2.

jollen shall

may

tDolIen will

defective

While the corresponding verbs in English are both and irregular, these have in German a com:

plete conjugation (only lacking, except in tuoUen, the

imperative), but with the following irregularities

a.

For the singular of the present indicative are

Old conjugation.

substituted forms which properly belong to a preterit

of the
These are, in fact, relics of an ancient preterit used in the sense of a, present thus, fann can is literally I have learned how, foE shallis I have owed, mag may is I have gained the power ^ and the rest of their conjuga-

tion

is

of

more modern

origin.

h.

Those which have a modified vowel in the

infinitive

reject the modification in the preterit indicative and the

past participle.
c.

to the rules of the

All the rest of their inflection is regular, according New conjugation (except that ntogen
its c\iod)

changes
3.

before

in the preterit

and participle).

Thus, the simple forms are

!ann
fannft

Indicative Peesent.
S.I barf

mag
tnagft

mufe

foil

tt)ill

2 borfft 3 barf
P.
I

mu^t

fonft

miflft
tt)ill

!ann
fonnen
fonnt

mag
mogen mogt mogen

mu|
miiffen

foH
follen

biirfen
biirft

moEen
tDOEt

mii^t
miiffen

foEt

3 biirfen

fonnen

foHen

moHen


122
Indicative Peeteeit.
S.I burfte
etc.

YERBS.

[261-

fonnte
etc.

mo(5^te
etc.

mu^te
etc.

foEte
etc.

n)oflte

etc

Subjunctive Peesbnt.
S.I biirfe
etc.

fonne
etc.

moge
etc.
,

miiffe
etc.

fone
etc.

ttJoKe
etc.

Subjunctive Peeteeit.
S.I biirfte
etc.

fonnte
etc.

mo(?^tc
etc.

miifete
etc.

foUtC
etc.

tDoUte
etc.

Impeeative.

S.2
P.

moUe
tt)om

Paeticiples.

Pres. biirfenb

fonnenb
gefonnt

mbgenb
gemo(i)t

miiffenb

foHenb
QefoEt

mollenb
QetDoEt

Past geburft
Infinitive.
biirfen

gemu^t

fonnen

mogen

miiffen

foHen

njoflen

4. The compound tenses are formed in the same manner as those of other verbs with one important exception, namely

itive),

connection with another verb (infinthe infinitive is substituted for the participle in the perfect and pluperfect tenses.
a.
er l^at e nt(f)t g e ! o n n t , but er ftat e nic^t tl)un f o n n e n has not been able to do it; toa^^abi\i)X g e tt) o U t what have you wished?, but \^t !)abt m6) fprei^en tDolIen you have wanted to speak to me; xm ftaben n)arten miif f en ^^6 have been compelled to

When used in

Thus,

lie

wait.
5.

The compound tenses

(first

are, then, as follows

Peefect
s. I

person the same in both modes).

l^abe geburft, gefonnt, 2C.

or

l^abe biirfen, fonnen, :c.

Indicative Plupeefect.
s. I

5atte geburft, gefonnt,

:c.
:c.

or 5atte

biirfen,

fonnen,

Subjunctive Plupeefect.
s. I 5citte

geburft, gefonnt,
biirfen,

2C.
it.

or

:f)dtte

fonnen,

253]

MODAL AUXnJAEIES.
(first

123

FunmB
s. I

person the same in both modes),

fonnen,
:c.

tt)erbe biirfcn,

FuTUBE Pebfect
s. I

(first

person the same in both modes).

:c.

tDcrbc Qeburft 5aBen, gefonnt l^aben,

CoNDinONAIj.
s. I

toiirbe biirfen,

fonnen,

2C.

CONDinONAIi PEEFECT.
s. I

mxht

geburft ^dbtn, Qefonnt f^aUn,

:c.

Inflnitive Peefect.

Qcburft ^aben, gefonnt ijobm, k.

6. a. The absence of a complete conjugation of the corresponding auxiliaries in English makes it necessary for us often to render the German verb by a paraphrase: substituting, for example, he able for caii (fbnnen) ; be compelled, have to, for must (miijfen) ; he willing, wish, desire, for will (tDoIIen), and so on compare below, 253-9.
6.

The same absence has

led to the use of certain idiomatic

and not

strictly logical constructions in English, in

which the

auxiliary of past time, have, is combined with the principal verb in the participle, instead of with the modal auxiliary while the
;

Germa^, more correctly, combines it with the latter. Thus, he would not have done it is not, in German, er tDoHte e nid)t Qd^an ]&aben, unless it signifies he was not willing to have done it; if, as usual, it means he ivould not have been willing to do it, it is er ^attc Thus also, he might have come (that is, he e ntd)t tl)un mo Hen. would have been able to come) is er ftdtte fommen fonnen, not er The logical sense of the sentence may be fonnte gefommen fetn. tested, and the proper German expression found, by putting the
corresponding verbal phrase in place of the simple auxiliary ui the EngUsh.

USES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.

252. Although the exposition of the meanmg of these auxiliaries belongs rather to the dictionary than to the grammar, yet such is the frequency of their use, and the intimacy of their relation to the verbs with which they are combined, that it is desirable to give here some account of their chief uses.
253. ^iirfen. 1. This represents two separate verbs of the older language, the one meaning need, require^ the other dare,

124

VEEBS.

[253^

venture, trust one^s self. The former sense is nearly lost, appearing only occasionally with ttur and faum, and in a few other

phrases thus, er barf nur befe^len he needs only to command. The other has been in modern use modified into be authorized, permitted, and, even where it approaches nearest to dare, means properly rather /eeZ authorized, allow one's self. Thus, Dliemanb barf |)Iunbern no one is permitted to plunder, barf ic| Bitten may I ask? einem ^aifer barf bie 9Jitlbe nte fe:^Ien an emperor may never
:

lack clemency, er burfte i^n tn ^ngefiiit ^retfen he was allmued praise him to his face.
2.

to

The

preterit subjunctive

biirfte signifies,

by a

quite special

use,

a probable contingency:

as, ba

biirfte

todt^x ]tin that is

likely to be true.

254.
is to

able,

^bnnen. The original meaning of fonnen, as of our can, know how ; but both have alike acquired the sense of be and signify ability or possibility in the most general way,

whether natural, conceded, or logical. Thus, icf) !ann lefen, I can read, meinetmegen !antt er ge^en he can (may) go, for all me, iene ^age !i)nnen mieber fommen tlwse days may return (their return is possible), er !ann f(^on gefommen fein he may possibly
have already arrived.
This verb meant originally to have power, but 9Jlogen. use in that sense is now antiquated and quite rare thus, tDenn feiner fie ergriinben mag though none is able to fathom them. At present, it has two leading significations
265.
:

its

1. That of power or capability as the result of concession on the part of the speaker and that, either a real permission as or as a logical concession or er mag t^n Beftalten he may keep it allowance, as \)a^ mag mo^t 3U '^ixitu fommen that may happen at
;

times.

thus, maS fie bir ni(f)t offen* 2. That of choice, liking, desire Baren mag what she does not choose to reveal to thee, ba m o d^ t e This meaning er gar nt(^t ^bren Jie did not like to hear that at all. thus, e m b (^ tc is most frequent with the preterit subjunctive !ein unb fo Idnger leBen no dog would care to live longer thus, d) t^ mit bir fterBen I too would like to die with thee. au(i) t(f) m
: :

a.

WoQtn has other uses

which

(akin with the above, but of less

it

lence with the subjunctive tenses

approaches very near to equivathus, in expressing a wish, mi3ge nie ber ^ag erf(i)etnen may the day never appear, mo^k bie gauge SBelt un f)oren would that the whole world might hear us;
definite character), in
:

251]

MODAL

AUXILIARIES.
:

125

also, in clauses expressing design

ou^Gleiten

mogen

that they

pronoun

as, tx)a er

or purpose as, bamit fie nii^t not slip; or after an indefinite au(^ t^un mag (or ll^iie) whatever he may do.

may

256. 9Jlufjen. This, like ntogen, has wandered far from its primitive meaning, which was find room or opportunity, and now designates a general and indefinite necessity (as fbnnen a
logical.

correspondingly indefinite possibiUty), either physical, moral, or It is rendered by our he compelled to, he ohliged to, have Thus, alle 5[Rcnfd)en miifjcn fterben to, cannot hut, and the like.
all

men must

die, luir miifjen trcu jctu

it

in biefer SBcife (icjc[)e^en fein

toir

we must be faithful, e mu^ this way, must have taken place

mu^ten umtDenben we had to turn hack, :^eute mu^ bie ^(otfe IDerben to-day the hell has to came into existence, man mu^te olau=
ben 07ie could not hut suppose, i(f) mn^te not help laughing at the people.
iiber bie

Seute lad^en

I could

a. As mu^t in English is present only, such phrases as those above given should always be used in translating the other

tenses of miifjen.
257.

(SoKen.

Its

proper sense
:

is

originally that of duty or

ohligation,

and

in the past tenses, especially the preterit, it is

used in that sense thus, e foHle fo, unb ni^t anber ought to he thus, and not otherwise, er l^dtte fommen foKen he ought to have come. But to this meaning has now become added, in prevailing use, the distinct implication of a personal authority, other than that of the subject, as creating or enforcing the obligation
often
still

fein it

thus
1.

intimates a
follft (^ott

Proceeding from the speaker in which case the auxiliary command, a promise, a threat, or the like as, bn
;
:

lieBen thou shalt love God, meine io(^ter foGen bic^ n)ar=
thee,

ten

my

daughters shall wait on

geflen xtju gie'^en it is

^onig

fofle

man brol^t, biefer ober iener threatened that this or that king
;

shall take the field against him.

in

Recognized by the speaker, but not proceeding from him which case foUen is to be rendered by to he to, to he intended as, menn man gule^t or destined to, or other like expressions
2.
:

Jjalten fofi, mill

man

lieber ftier bleiben if

one

is finally to stop,
is to

one

will rather stay here,

ma ]oU

Qt]d:)ti}tn

what

happen? man
which road what can I

smeif elte metc^en 2Bea man einf (^lagcn f oHe they douhted they were to take, ma mog \(i) T^ier moftl l^oren foKen

126

VERBS.

[257tuerben he

be meant to hear here? bariiBer foUtc er bitter enttauf(i)t was destined to be bitterly undeceived upon that point.

3. A special form of this use of follen is its employment to report something that rests on the authority of others, is asserted by them thus, 35erBred)en, bie er Begangen l^aben foE cjimes which he is claimed to have committed, t)iele follen an biefem %aQt umgefommen fein many are said to have lost their lives on
:

tJiat

day.

In conditional and hypothetical clauses, joKte is sometimes used like our should, nearly coinciding in meaning with the proper conditional tenses thus, follf er auc^ ftriiudjeln iiBerall even
4.
:

should he everijwhere stumble ; so, elliptically, in interrogation

foEte ba tDaJr fein \is
it

possible that] that should be true?

This signifies will, intent, choice, on the part 258. StBoHen. of the subject of the verb thus, \d) h'x&i gleic^fall^ Begleiten
:

mU

I will accompany
one wants
to

thee likewise, feiner

WxH ben

win

the goblet, n)a er 3terUrf)e

to

53e(^er geiDinnen no aup^ren mti whatid)

ever he intends
(Sd^d^en Belaben
a.

I would
it

bring forward that is pretty, load him with treasures.

tooUk i^n mit

Occasionally

indicates a claim or assertion (compare the

:

correlative use of follen above, 257-3) thus, er mil bid) gefe^en ]j)aBen he claims to have seen you (will have it that he has done so).

Not infrequently b. impending action, and and the like; thus, er

implies the exhibition of intent, or to be rendered by be on the point of tr)iE Q^l)tn he is on the pohit of going, t'm SBaner, tDeld^er fterBen tDoIIte a peasant who was about to die, 33raten \mU t)erbrennen the roast is on the brink of burning.
it

is

259.

The Modal Auxiliaries witJwut accompanying

infinitive

Verb.

All these auxiliaries are

by an
1.

sometimes met with unaccompanied dependent upon them. Thus

:

When

an

infinitive is directly
:

suggested by the context,

and
er
i(^

moEe

thus, baB jeber fo toE jein biirfe al one may be as wild as he will (be), id) t^ue, tt)a !ann I do what I can (do).
that every

to be supplied in idea

2. Very often, an adverb of direction with the auxiliary takes the place of an omitted verb of motion thus, tt)ir miifjen oud) baran we mujst also [set] about it, fie ffinnen nid)t t)Dn ber 6teEe they cannot [stir] from the place, n)ol)in f oEen bie whither are they to [go], ber immer bat)on wolik who all the time wanted [to get]
:


262]

MODAL

AUXILIARIES.

127

away, er barf nt(i)t toeit genug l^inau he may rwt venture [to go] far enough out. Other ellipses, of verbs familiarly used with these, or 3. thus, naturally suggested by the context, are not infrequent tua^ foH id) what am I to [do] ? U)a foE biefe Utebe what is this talk
:

intended

to

[signify]

bie fal((^en Sftinge

merben ba

ntd)t

fonnen

the false 7nngs will not be able [to accomplish]

that, tiic^t S5er=

goIbuHQ
4.

tDtll

man

mel^r
is

one will no longer [have]

gilding.

thus often left with an apparent direct object, really dependent on the omitted verb. In other cases the object may represent the omitted verb as, ^atte id) nuc^ geauxiliary

The

ionnk had I enjotjed myself when I was still able to do so or be otherwise more really dependent on the auxiliary. SBolIen is most often used thus as a proper transitive thus, Tii(^t er mU euren Untergang not he wishes your ruin, also, mogen in the sense tt)a ott getDoflt what God has willed of like: as, i^ mag i()n nic^t I do not like him and fbnnen in the sense of know (a language): as, fonnen ie 2)cut](^ do you know
freut,

al id) e nod)

German ?
260. SBiffen know, knmu how, has a conjugation nearly akin with that of the modal auxiliaries namely
:

lYes. InMc.
Pres. Subj.
Pret. Indie.

meiB, tuei^t, \m\^, miffcn, tDi^t, iDtffen.

miffe, etc.

wn^k,

etc.

Pret Subj.

toix^k, etc.

Past Partic.

gett)n^t.

[Exercise 17.

Modal

Auxiliaries.]

OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION.

261. The characteristics of the Old or strong conjugation are the change of radical vowel in the preterit, and often in the past participle also ; and the
:

ending of the past participle in en. With these are combined other peculiarities
less consequence,

of inflection, of

For the reason

of

which will be found stated in detail below. the name *'01d" conjugation, see above, 246.3.

Change of Badical Vowel.

The changes of radical vowel in verbs of 262. the Old or strong conjugation are, in general, as follows
:

128

VERBS.

[262-

1. The vowel of the infinitive and that of the present tense (indicative and subjunctive) are always the same.

But the vowel of the present is sometimes altered in the second and third persons singular indicative see below, 268.
:

2. The vowel of the preterit is always different from that of the infinitive and present.
3. The vowel of the past participle is sometimes the same with that of the infinitive and present, sometimes the same with that of the preterit, and sometimes

different

from

either.

263. According to the varieties of this change, the verbs are divided into three principal classes, each with several subdivisions.

Class I. Verbs whose each a different vowel.

Class
II.

infinitive, preterit,

and

participle

have
is

Verbs

in

which the vowel of the participle

the

same with that

same with that
a.

of the present.
is

Class III. Verbs in which the vowel of the participle of the preterit.
This
is

the

merely a classification of conyenience, founded upon the language. The latter have undergone too great and too various alteration to allow of our adopting, with practical advantage, a more thorough classification, founded on the character of the original radical vowel, and the nature of the changes it has suffered,
facts of the

modem

264.
ticiple
I.
1.

First Class.

Verbs whose

infinitive, preterit,

and par*
form

have each a

different vowel.
t

Verbs having the vowels

specified.

a u in the three

Example

jingen

fang Qefunaen
o.

(sing, sang, sung).

To

this subdivision belong 16 verbs, all of

n!,

them having roots

tin

ending in ng,
2.

or nb.
i

Vowels

a
o.
:

6 verbs

root ending in

or

mm.

Example ; fpinnenjpann gefponnen

3.

(spin, span, spun).

Vowels

22 verbs.

Example

bre(^en

brac^

gcbrD(f)en

(break, brake,

One

broken). verb, Qcbarcn, has irregularly d for

in the infinitive.

266]
4.

OLD OK STRONG CONJUGATION.

Vowels i or te a Examples fi^en
:

129

3 verbs. a^ Hepen lag gelegen

e.
f

Gefeffen (sit, sat, sat).

(lie, lay, lain).

These are properly verbs belonging to the first division of the next class, II. 1, but have their vowel irregularly varied in the
infinitive.

265.
finitive
II. 1.

Second Class.

Verbs having the same vowel in the

10 verbs.
\ai}

in-

and

participle.

Vowels c Example

a fe^en
e.

gefe^en

(see,

saw, seen).

Three verbs properly belonging to

their vowel to
t

this division

or

te

in the infinitive,

have changed and thus become a fourth

division of the first class (see above).

2.

Vowels a

u
:

a.

10 verbs.

Example
3.

jc^Iaflcnf(^Iug Qef (^laQcn (slay, slew, slain),

Vowels a Examples

fallen

16 verbs. ge^angen Sangen

te

or

a.

fiel

gef alien (fall, fell, fallen).

l^ing

(hang, hung,

hung).
4.

Vowels an, Examples

:

u,

an, or 4 verbs. gelaufen (leap) run, gerufen cry. rufen gefto^en fto^en
or o
te

u,

o.

laufen

lief

rief

ftie

thrust.

266. preterit

Third Class. Verbs having the same vowel and participle.

in the

m.

1.

Vowels

ei
:

i.

Example
2.

bet^en

bi^

22 verbs.
geBifjen (bite, bit, bitten).

Vowels ei 16 verbs. te te. Example treiben trieB getrieBen (drive, drove, driven). These two divisions differ only in the length of the vowel of the preterit and participle. One verb, I)et^en, has the participle
:

gel&ei^en (below, 267).

3.

4.

24 verbs (only 3 with geflogen flew, fkmn). log gelogen (speak falsely). Vowels au 4 verbs. Example augen fog ogen suck.
Vowels te or ii o Examples fliegen
:

o.

u).

flog

(fly,

liigen

lie

o.

gef

130
5.

VEBBS.
Vowels,
t, e,
:

[266o.

Examples

fUmmen
tt)eben

o 20 verbs. flomm geflommen climb. toob geiDoben (weave,wove,woven). lodgen mog geiDOfien weigh.
d, b,

or a

f(S^tr)bren

](^tt)or Qefi^tDoren (swear, swore,

gej(i)oEen

sworn).
jc^allen

f(^oE
;

sound.

from other modes

finitive

All the verbs in this division are stragglers, irregularly altered of conjugation. Of those having e in the inof the other forms, only-

(Uke tueben) there are eleven one, two, or three each.

6.

Vowels

u
:

u.

Example

^inben f

2 verbs.
f

(^unb

gefdjunben flay.

These, also, are stragglers, from

267.

I.l.

Verbs with irregular change of vowel.

gefommen (come, came, come): 1. fommen !am an exception under 1.3, the original vowel of the infinitive being e.
2. 1)i\^t\i

l)ie^

ge^et^en he called:

an exception under
3. geften

III.2,

as noted above.

ging gegangen go
II.3,

an exception under
4. fte^en

the original infinitive being gangan.

ftanb geftanben stand: in Old High-German, belonging to 2 (ftantan ftuont gef^an (do, did, done).
II. 6. tl^un
tftat

ftantan).

FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF THE SIMPLE VERBAL FORMS.

268.

Present Tense,
first

The

person singular and

all

the plural persons

of the present indicative, together with the

whole of

the present subjunctive, are, without exception, regularly formed (see 237), and need no remark. But the second and third persons singular of the indicative are
subject to various irregularities.
-

2-"*^

as radical vowel in the first person change short e becoming i, and it to ie or t in the second and third long e becoming te (that is, long i: see 18) thus, ^elfe, l)tlfft, l)i(ft;

Verbs having

fte^Ie,

ftieWft,

ftiel)lt;

effen,

iffeft,

i^t;

feften,

fietift,

jiebt.

But^


OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION.
d.

131

verbs leave the e unchanged namely, ge^en, [tel^en, besides a few meBen, pfleaen, betDegen, melfen, genefen which here, as in others of their forms, follow the New or
:

A few

l^eben,

weak
h.

conjugation.

or three verbs that have long e in the first person to i in the second and third: namely, ne^men, nimmft, nimmt; treten, trittft, tritt. @eben makes either cicbfl, gicBt, or

Two

shorten

it

gibft, gibt.

it (to d)

r2r)Verbs having a as radical vowel in the first person modify in the second and third thus, trage, trcigft, trdgt laffe,
:

Id^eft, Idfet.
a.

But
unchanged
in
f(f)affen

The

a remains

and

fd)aflcn,

and

in

other verbs which substitute in part the forms of the

New

or

weak
3.

conjugation.

Saufen, f aufen, and fto^en also modify the vowel in the same persons fommen does so sometimes, but not according to the best usage Iof(i)en forms Ii](i)eft, \\\^t
;
;

and about a dozen other verbs of its class (III.3) have a second and third person in eu as flicge, flcugft, fleugt; which are now antiquated, and only met with liige, leugft, leugt in archaic and poetic style. One or two that have roots ending in )) change this letter to after eu.
4.

gliegen

cC)

e of the endings eft and et is stronger in these persons with altered vowel than anywhere else in conjugation. The e of eft is rarely retained except after a sibilant as in eriifrfjcft, Id^eft, given above. The e of et is always hence, after these omitted, even when preceded by t, i^, b letters, the t, being no longer audible, is also dropped in writing. The verbs which thus lose the ending of the third pers. sing,

5.

The tendency

to reject the

pres.

indicative are fed)ten,

[rdt]

fid)t;

berften, birft;
;

flerf)ten,

flid)t;

gelten, gilt; fc^eltcn, fd)ilt; it)crben, toirb

rdtt)
;

l^ilten, I)dlt;

ratten [raten],
Idbt.

braten, brdt

bieten, beul.

Only laben forms

^265>.
I.
1.

Preterit Tense.

The

preterit indicative is

of radical vowel alone, wdthout

and therefore ends in the final ever that may be. But
a.

formed by the change an added termination, letter of the root, whatwith a double con-

few roots, ending

in the infinitive

sonant,

and lengthening

their vowel in the preterit, reduce the

132

VEEBS.
:

[269f d)reden, f (i)ra!

;

double consonant to a single one namely,

traf;
Bitten, Bat;

treffen,

Barfen, But;

fd^affen, f(^uf

faEen,

ftel;

fommen,

!am.
h. A few others (fifteen), on the contrary, shortening their vowel in the preterit, double the following consonant and three namely, kiben, Utt f (^ttei= of them, ending in b, change it to tt
;

ben,

(^nitt

fieben,

ott.
;

111,4)

All of these save three (triefen and fieben, 111.3 and faufen, are of division IILl e. g., teiten, ritt, Qeritten {ride, rode,
:

ridden).
c.

More
Qel^en,

isolated cases are

aing
;

gie'&en,

gOQ

fta^en, l^ieB

ji^en, fa^.

For

fteften,

ftanb

tt)un, t:^at,

see 267.

2. The second person singular strongly inclines to the abbreviated form of the ending, [t instead of eft, and in ordinary use rejects the e except after a sibilant or in order to avoid a very harsh combination of consonants. 3. Traces of an ending e in the first and third persons are, very rarely, met with especially f a^e, for f a^ saw ; also Bielte.
:

Tor
4.

tDurbe,

from

n)erben, see 239.4c.

A few verbs
is in

have a double form

in the preterit, of

which

more common use, the other archaic or provincial. But fc^tt)or and f(^n)ur are of nearly equal authority of the others, those most often met with are :^uB, for ;^oB (!)eBen, 111.5), and ftunb, for ftanb (ftelf)en).
one
:

This double form

(as in like cases in

English

e. g.

hegan or 'begun)

is

due

to the fact that in the ancient language

many

verbs had different

vowels in the singular and plural of the preterit indicative, both of which, in the later usage, appear in either number of a few verbs. The vowel of the subjunctive preterit agreed with that of the indicative plural, not the singular whence the double forms of the subjunctive, noted below.
:

n.

{1^

The

preterit subjunctive is regularly

latter

formed

from tne indicative by adding e and modifying the vowel, if the

modification: thus, jang,
fiel, fiele;

(in the first person),

be capable of
fdjlug, fdjliige;

ftingc;

\a\), fdt)e;

flog, floge;

fd}tt)or

or

fdj^itr,

f(^ti:)ore

or

fc^tDiire;

t^at, tl)ate.

But
:

a. Some verbs have a double form of the subjunctive, of which one differs in vowel from the indicative thus, all in division 1.2 have a second in d e. g., fpann, fpdnne or fpbnnewhich


271]
is

OLD OE STEONG CONJUGATION.

133
(especially
golte, \Daxh,

as

common

as that in

a,

or

more so
ii :

and others
Qdlte

in 1.3)

have second forms

in 5 or

e. g., gait,

or

tt)arbe or rvixxht ; the latter being the preferred one, probably as better distinguished from the present gelte, tDerBc, etc. All that have two indicative forms have the two corresponding sub-

junctives
270.
1.

thus, ftcinbe

and pnbe, pBe and pbe.

Imperative.
e,

The imperative singular regularly ends in

in the infinitive
;
:

the plural in

et

or as

t,

adding those endings respectively to the root of the verb

thus, fingen,
fittGC
;

shown

f(f)Iagen, ](!)IaGe

fommen, fomme ; Qcften, ge^e. But 2. Verbs which in the second pers. sing, of the pres. indicative change e to i or ie (268.1) take the latter also in the imperative singular (not in the plural) at the same time rejecting the e of
rufcn, rufe

the ending.

Thus,
a.

l^elfen, l^ilf

fte^len, ftiel)l; effen, i^; fe^en,

fie"^.

So, also, verbs that

have an archaic second person

:

in eu

have a corresponding archaic imperative thus, fliegen, But verbs that (Jrlojc|en (268.3) forms erUf(^. fliege or fleug. modify a, an, o to d, du, o (268.2,3) retain in the imperative the unchanged vowel and the ending: thus, tragen, Irage; laufeti,
(268.4)

laufc
6.

fto^en, fto^e.
(tuirft)

Exceptions are: mxhtn

jie!)e
e

has

iDerbe; feT^en

(fte!)ft)

has

either
3.

or

fie:^.

The
in

of the singular ending is

in the other verbs of this

and

some

dropped much more freely than in those of the New conjugation, as fomm, la^ is almost never used.

271.
1.

Past Participle.

The ending
e

of the participle is en.

of the ending is ordinarily retained in all cases, but may be occasionally dropped, especially after a vowel or )): thus,

The

participle is used as an subject to the same abbreviation as other adjectives ending in en (120.3) thus, t)crgangner ^age of past days, t)erf (!)tt)unbncr ^rac^t of vanished splendor.
gefet)en

or

geje^^n.

When, however, the

it is
:

adjective

and

declined,

2.

A number

final radical
a.

of participles share in the irregular changes of consonant exhibited by the preterit namely
:

All those that shorten in the preterit the

vowel of the
lilt,

infinj

itive (269.1.15):

thus, reiten,

ritt,

gerittenj

leiben,

gelitten

faufen,

foff, gefoffen.

134

YEKBS.

[271-

6. Of those that lengthen the vowel (269.1.1a), only one, namely Bitten, hat, Qebeten ;but treffen, traf, Qetroffen f aflen, fiel,
;

QcfaHen, etc.
c.

Also,

gteften

(gog),

gegocen; ji^en

(fa^), oefeffen;
(t^at), gctftan.

ge^en (ginQ),

Qegangen;
3.

fte^^en (ftanb),

geftanben; iftun
:

(Jffen

eat
gc

has the prefix twice

again prefixed).

thus, Qegeffen (geffen

from

Qe=effen,

and

272.

large number of the "irregular" verbs in English into "regular" has been active, though to a much less degree, in German also. Besides those

Mixed Conjugation. The same tendency which has converted a

verbs which have entirely changed their mode of infiection, and therefore no longer require to be made any account of under the Old or strong conjugation, there are others which form a part of their inflection by the one method and a part by the other, or which have equivalent forms of either conjugation. Thus,
1. Some have a double series of forms through the whole or nearly the whole conjugation the forms of the Old conjugation being then either poetic and unusual (as in xa^m),.or else belonging to the verb in certain special meanings (as in tDtegen) or in its transitive use (as in bleirf)en).
:

especially 2. Some have certain forms of either conjugation the second and third pers. ind. present and second sing, imperative, with differences of use as above stated most often with intransitive meaning for the Old forms such are jc^rerfeit/
;
:

Dcrberben, fieben, lofd)en, fd^mclgen, fdjtrenen,

3.

and

others.

retained only a participle of the Old conjuThe gation; and even that in special uses or connections. participle is in general the form that has maintained itself most
persistently.

Some have

These

irregularities, as well as those

which are explained

in

more

detail above, are exhibited in a table of irregulak verbs,

given on pp. 278-284

^^73))
tion.

Examples of Verbs of
S3inbcn
(1.1).

the

Old or Strong Conjuga-

^ommen
Principal Parts.

(267.1).

Mrtbcn, banb, geBunben,

fpmmen, !am, gefommen,

'

273]

OLD OR STEONG CONJUGATION.

Indicativk
*^

135

Peesent,
s.
I

I bind etc.

I come etc.
fomme
tommft

buibe

2 binbeft

3 binbet
p.
I

fommt

binben

2 binbet

3 btnben
Pbeteutt,
s. I

fommen fommt fommen

eta.

I hound

I came

etc.

banb

fam^
famft

2 banbft 3 banb
p.
I

fam
famen
famt

banben

2 banbet

3 banben
Peefect, J/iave6oMndetc.
s. I

famen

I have
etc.

c(yme etc.

fiaU gebnnben
etc.

bin gefommen

Plupeefect, I had hound

s.
I

etc.

I had come
etc.

etc.

5atte

Qebunben
etc.

mar gefommen

Futuee, I shall bind

s.
I

etc.

I shall come
merbe fommen
etc.

etc.

tt)erbe

binben
etc.

FxjT. Peef.,
s. I

I shall have bound

ftaben

etc.

I shall
etc.

have come

etc.

mxht gebunben
etc.

merbe gefommen fein

Subjunctive.
Peesent, I may bind
s. I

etc.

I may come
fomme
fommeft

etc

binbe

2 binbeft

3 binbe
p.
I

fomme

binben

fommen
fommet

2 binbet

3 binben

fommen

136
Peeteeit,
s. I

YERBS.

[273-

I might bind etc.

I might come etc.

!dme
fdmeft

banbe

2 bdnbeft

3 bdnbe
p.
I

fame

bdnben

fdmen
fdmet

2 bdnbet 3 bdnben

fdmen
etc.
fei

Peefect, I may have b<mnd

s. I

I may have come etc.

gefommen
etc.

l^abe

gebunben
etc.

Plupeef., I might have hound

s. I l^dtte

etc.

I might have
tDdre
etc.

come

etc

Qebunben
etc.

gefommen

FuTiJEE,
s. I

I shall bind etc.]

etc.

I shall come
toerbe

etc.

tperbe btnben

fommen

etc.

FxjT. Peef.,
s. I

I shall have hound

etc.

I shall Imve come

etc.

etc.

tuerbe

Qebunben l^aben
etc

merbe gefommen fein

Conditional.
Conditional, 1 should bind
s. I
etc.

I should come
tt)urbe

etc.

tt)urbe

binben
etc.

fommen
etc.

CoND. Peef. I should have hound

s. I
ttjiirbe

etc.

I should have come

tDiirbe

e\

gebunben l^aben
etc.

gefommen
etc.

fein

Imperativk
bind
s. etc.

come

etc.

2 binbc

fomme, fomm

3 binbe er
p.
I

fomme

er

binben

tt)tr

2 btnbet

3 binben

fie

fommen ton fommt fommen fie


276]
PASSIVE. Inhnitive.
Present,
io

137

hind

to

come

binben
Peefect,
to

fommcn
io

have hound

have come
fein

flcbunbcn \jabtn

Qefommen
Pabticiples.

Pbesent, hinding

coming

Binbenb
Past, hound

fommcnb
come

oebunbcn
[Exercise
18.

gcfommcn

Yekbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation.]

PASSIVE VEKBS.

274. The passive voice is a derivative conjugation of a transitive verb, in which that person or thing which in the simple conjugation is the object of the transitive action becomes a subject of the suffering of that action thus, active, ber unb bi ben Snaben the dog bit the hoy ;
passive, ber Slnabe tDurbe Horn nnbe gebtffen the boy bitten by the dog.
a.

was

sitive

That a kind of passive is also formed from some intranverbs is pointed out below (279.2,3).

b. The passive is mainly a grammatical device for directing the principal attention to the recipient of the action, and the action as affecting him, and putting the actor in a subordinate

position.

275.

The German

passive,

like

the

English,

is

formed by the aid of an auxiliary verb but by a different one, namely the verb tDer ben become.
276.
is
1. To form the passive of any verb, its past participle combined with iDerben, throughout the whole conjugation of

the
a.

latter.

In this combination

participle of the auxihary, wherever it occurs, is abbreviated from getoorben to worbcn. h. The participle of the main verb is put after the proper verbal forms (simple tenses) of the auxiUary, but before its infinitives or participles.

The past

138
This
of
is in

VERBS.

[276-

any word

accordance with the general rule for the position limiting an infinitive or participle: see below,

348.2, 358.

mode

Hence, to produce any given person, tense, and of the passive of a verb, combine its past participle with the corresponding person, tense, and mode of
2.

tperben.

277.

Synopsis of the

Forms of

tuerben

and of a Pas-

sive Verb,
Indicative.
Peesent,
s. I

I become

etc.

I am loved
tt)crbe fleltebt

eto,

merbe

Peetebit,
s. I

I became etc.
iDurbe

I loas loved eto.

ttjarb, tDurbe gelicBt

tt)arb,

Peepect,
s. I

I have become etc.

I have been loved etc.

Bin geliebt iDorben
IJiad been loved
xoax gelieBt

Bin getDorben
etc.

Plupeefect, Ihad become

s. I

etc.

\oax Qeraorben
etc.

morben

FuTEE, IshaU become

s. I

I shall be loved etc.

tt)erbe geliebt
etc.

tDcrbe tuerben

merben
been loved etc.

Fur. Peef.,
s. I

I shall have become

fein

I shall have

tDcrbe

Qemorben

iDcrbe geliebt ttjorben fcin

Subjunctive.
Peesent,
s. I

Imay

become

etc.

I mxiy be loved etc.

tt)erbe geliebt

merbe

Peeteeit,
s. I

I migM become eiXi.

I might be loved etc.

njiirbe geliebt

wiirbe
etc.

Pbefect, Iwxiy have become

s. I

I may

have been loved

etc.

fei

gett)orben
etc.

fei geliebt tt)orben

Plupeefect, I might have become

s. I

I might

have been loved

etc.

mare gen)orben
etc.

tt)are geliebt ttiorben

FuTUEE, I shall become

s. I

I shall be loved etc.

tt)erbe geliebt ii^erben
etc.

merbe merben

FuT. Peef., IshaU have become

s. I

shall

have been loved

etc.

tperbe geiDorben fein

tt)erbc geliebt

toorben fein

279]

PASSIVE.
Conditional.

139

CoNDiTioNAii,
s. I

I should hecome

etc.

I should be loved etc.

miirbe Gdiebt iDerben
etc.

miirbe trerben

CoND. Peef., I should have hecome

s. I

I should have been

loved etc.

tDiirbe fletDorben jein

njiirbc geliebt toorben fein

Imperative.
become
s. etc.

be loved etc.

2 tDcrbe

toerbe gelieBt

Infinitives.

Peesent,

to

become

to be loved

tuerben

geUeBt tDerben
have become
to

Peefect,

to

have been loved

QctDorben fein

geliebt tDorben jein

Participles.
Peesent, becoming
trerbenb
Past, become
being loved
geliebt tDerbenb

been loved
Gcltebt toorben

getDorbcn

Bemark

geliebt tt)orben is

tenses, since the past participle of a transitive verb

used only in formiag the compound has by itself

a passive value.
278. The passive voice of a transitive verb has one peculiar form, a kind ot future passive participle, formed from the present active participle, by putting ju before it: thus, gu lieBenb. It implies a possibility or a necessity: thus, ein gu Iie6enbe ^inb a child to be loved i. e., which may or should he loved. It can only be used as an attributive adjective, and therefore hardly

deserves to be called a participle.

from an

a quite modern and anomalous derivative answering attributively to the infinitive with as, ba ^inb ift gu Ueben tJw 3U taken predicatively (343.in.l&)
a.

It is in reality
infinitive,

child is to he loved

i.

e.,

may or should

be loved.

279. 1. Transitive verbs, with hardly an exception, may form a passive voice, with a complete scheme of conjugation, as given

above.

aben have

is

not used in the passive.

140
2.

VERBS.

[279-

Many

intransitives (especially such as denote

action

by a person) may form an impersonal passive

that
e,

a mode of is, a
or with

passive third person singular, with indefinite subject omitted subject (291).

Thus,
a.

singing, urn ^ntttjort

there was laughing and an answer is requested. These passives do not represent any subject as suffering
e tDurbc geia(^t utib
tt)irb

gefunfien

Qcbeten

an an

action,
actor.

but simply represent the action, without reference to

3.

(227.2?>),

Those intransitives which, by a pregnant construction govern an accusative along with a factitive predicate,

are also convertible into passives in corresponding phrases: thus, fie tDerben aw^ bem <5(i)lafe gejc^rieen they are screamed out of sleep, er tDurbe frei Qcfpro^en he was acquitted (declared free).
1. Verbs which govern two accusatives (227.3), except take in the passive the second accusative, either as object (fragen, etc.), or as predicate nominative (nennen, etc.).

280.

le^retl,

govern a genitive
anQcflaflt the

Transitive verbs which, in addition to their direct object, (219.2) or a dative (222.1.1), retain the latter along with the passive thus, ber Wiener tDurbe be 2)ieBfta^I
2.
:

servant was accused of robbery, afle greunbc erIauBt everything is permitted to a friend.

tt)irb

einem

3. Of the intransitives that form an impersonal passive, such as govern a genitive or dative take the same case in the passive thus, e tDirb melner gefc^ont lam spared, i^m tt)urbe gejolfen
:

lie

was

helped.

The passive is veiy much less frequently used 281. German than in English, being replaced by other modes
speech.

in

of

Sometimes a full active expression, with subject and Most often, the intent of the pasobject, is employed instead. sive form of speech is attained by using an active verb with the
ein ^efe^, tDcltfie^

indefinite subject

man one, etc. (185.) thus, man fagt it is said, man erlie^ a laic which was passed. Not infre:

quently, a reflexive phrase is substituted, the return of the action upon the subject being accepted as signifying the latter's endurance of the action thus, e f ragt fi(f) it is questioned (asks itself), ber diliifjel fiat fic^ gefunben the key has been found.
:

282.

1.

By

its

use of tuerben become instead of

fctn he as auxiliary

forming the passive, the German is able clearly to distinguish between the actual endurance of an action, and existence in a state wtiieh is the

283]
result of

EEFLEXIVES.

141

jteppid^en be^cingt all

atte

such action. Thus, alle genfter tt)erben nadj unb na(^ mit windows are hy degrees hung with tapestry, and rt)ie ^enftei* mit Xeppic^en bepugt finb as all the windows are hung with
fie

tapestry; elugelaben wiirben

they were invited,

and eingetaben

fmbfieatt'

they are all invited the latter phrases, in either pair, signifying the con-

dition to
verb,
he,

which the act described by the former led. As we use the same in both senses, of copula and of passive auxiliary (accepting the simple statement of the resulting condition as sufficiently implying the suffering of the action), our expression is liable to ambiguity an ambiguity which we are sometimes forced into removing by the use of
the phrase he heing:
gereinigt)

thus distinguishing
cleaned (eg
ift

it

is being cleaned (eg n)irb

from

it

is

gereinigt).

And our

sense of the
it

distinction is so obscured that the English pupil finds

greatest difficulties to
fein,

one of his

know when

to translate to he before a participle

by

Only assiduous practice in noting the distinction as made in German will remove this difficulty. A practical rule which will answer in a great number of cases is this if, on turning the expression into an active form, the sam;e tense (pres. or pret.) is required, it was passive and requires iuevbeit ; if the tense has to be changed to a
luerben.
:

and when by

perfect (perf. or plup.), fein

is fie ttjurben

is

the proper word.

it

Thus
is

they were invited

getaben
finb
2.
fie

when when it means I had

eingelaben
it

means /

invited them,

invited them;

and fmb

but fie njaren ein= used in eingelaben

aWf because

means I have

invited them.

itself sometimes loosely accepts the statement of conwith the pres. or pret. of fein, in Meu of the full passive expression in perf. or pluperfect. Thus, ber ^ifc& Wax gefangen the fish had

The German

dition,

heen caught (for

wax gefangen morben),

fie

ift

ermorbet auf ber onbner

tra^e she has heen murdered, in London

street.

REFLEXIVE VERBS.
reflexive verb is one that represents the 283. action as exerted by the subject upon itself.
1. Such verbs are formally transitive, since they take an object in the accusative; they all, then, take l^aBen as their

auxiliary.
2. Logically, or according to their real meaning, they are rather to be regarded as intransitive, since they do not signify an action exerted by the subject upon any object outside of
f iirc^te mic^ (literally I frighten myself) I am idea as much intransitive as i(^ gittere I tremble. And, as noticed above (281), a reflexive verb is often used even in a passive sense, the idea of the endurance of the action on the part of the subject being more conspicuous to the mind than that of its exertion of the action.

itself

thus, \^

afraid

is in

142
284.
flexive

VERBS.

[284-

Such a verb, therefore, takes as its object a repronoun, of the same person and number with

its subject.

The reflexive pronouns of the first and second persons are same as the personal that of the third person is fi(^, in both numbers (155). 2. The reflexive pronoun is placed where any other pronoun
1.

the

would be placed as object

of the verb

namely, after the verb

In the simple tenses, but before the infinitives

and

participles.

285.

Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb.

td^ freuen to rejoice (rejoice or gladden one's self).

Principal Parts.

ic^ freuen, freute

Indicative.

fic^,

gefreut.

Subjunctive.
Peesent.
i(^

s. I

\^ bu
h)ir
i:^r

frcuc mi(^
freueft

freue mid^
freueft

hi^

bu

h\^

3 er freut \\^
p. I

er freue fid^
n)ir
i'^r

freuen un
freut eu(^

freuen un
freuet eud^

3
s. I

fie

freuen

fief)

fie

freuen

fid^

Peeteeit.

t^

freute

m\^
Peefect.

id^ freute
etc.

mid^

etc.

S. I

x6) 5a'6e

mtc^ fiefreut
gefreut

bu
er

^aft bt(^ gefreut

):jat fie!)

x^ l)aht mx^ gefreut bu ^abeft bid^ gefreut

er ):jahz fic^ gefreut
tt)ir

tt)ir

ftaben

un gefreut

l^aben

un

gefreut

iftr

!)abt eu(^ gefreut

i^r fjobtt eud^ gefreut

fie

fie

l^oben \x^ gefreut

IjaUn

fid)

gefreut

PliUPEEFECT.
s. I
\6) l^attc

mi(^ gefreut

x^
FUTUEE.

^dtte mid^ gefreut

etc.

etc.

s. I

x$)

merbc

m\^

freuen

id^ tt)erbe

mid^ freuen
freuen

bu

iDirft bi(^
tt)irb \\(i)

freuen

bu

tt)erbeft btd^

3 er

freuen

er ttjerbe fid^ freuen


286]
P. I njtr

EEFLEXIYES.
tuerben

143

un freuen
freuen
freuen

ton tDcrben un freuen

\t\x

2 i^r merbet

eu(f)
fid)

tuerbet eu(!) freuen

tt)erben fi^ freuen

fie

n)erben

fie

FUTUEE PeEFECT.
s. I

\6)

merbe mic^ gefreut ftaben

etc.
'

td^

tDerbc mid) gefreut

etc.

5aBen

Conditional.
CoNDinoNAii Peefect,
id) tDiirbe

CoNDinoNAii.
s.
I

ic^ n)iirbe mi(f)

etc.

freuen

mid) gefreut :^aben

etc.

Imperative.
SiNQTJIiAR.
1

PLUEAIi,

freuen

mx

un

2 freue bi^, freue

bu hx^

freut eud^, freut \^x tu(i)

3 freue er \x^
Infinitive.

freuen

fie fid)

Present.
fi^ freuen

Peefect.
fn^ gefreut 5aBcn

Participles.
Peesent.
fi(^

Past.
fic^

freuenb
1.

gefreut
is

Bemarks.

The

reflexive

pronoun

not given with the

participle in the principal parts, since, that participle being in

transitive verbs of a passive character, it can take no object except as used with an auxiliary in forming the compound
tenses.
2. The fid) given with the infinitives and participles is, of course, only representative of the whole body of reflexive pronouns, with all of which those forms, not being restricted to any one person or number, may be construed.

286.

Any

transitive verb in the language

used but none are properly regarded

except
1.
fi(^

refiexively, or take a reflexive

may be pronoun as object

as reflexive verbs

Those which are only used with a

\\6)

reflexive object:
vrjiherfefeen resist.

as,

f(^dmen be ashamed,

fe'^nen long,

fief)


144
VERBS.
[286-

2. Those which are usually or often used reflexively, and have a special meaning in that use, the object not maintaining its independence, but combining with the verb to form a single conception, the equivalent of an intransitive verb as, |i(^ l^iiten beware (i)uten guard), fid^ fteEen make believe, pretend (fteHen
:

plme),

fid^

uerlaffen rely (t)erlaffen quit).

287. 1. A reflexive verb is thus often related to the simple verb as a corresponding intransitive to a transitive thus,

freuen give pleasure to, \x^ ^xzutn feel pleasure, fiir^ten fear, \i^ But furd)tcn be afraid.
2. A few are intransitive, and of nearly the same meaning, both thus, irren and fi(^ irren be as simple verbs and as reflexives mistaken, nal^en and fid) na^en draw nigh, ganfen and \\^ janfen
:

quarrel.

much more often used tranwith a reflexive object than with one of another character thus, er arbeitet unb Iduft fid^ tobt [tot] he works and runs himself to death, bu follft bid^ einmal fait effen thou shalt eat thyself full fUt. satisfied) for once.
288.
1.

An

intransitive verb is

sitively (227.26)
:

2. An intransitive reflexive is sometimes used impersonally instead of an intransitive passive (279.2), especially with adverbs of manner, to express the action itself, without reference to a

subject
Irdumt
tree,

thus, e tangt

fic^

Vxtx gut it is
it

good dancing here,

it is

lebl&aft

fici^'

unter biefem
fi(^

^aum

is lively

dreaming under

this

ficl^t

gar artig in

hk

Rni!\6)tn t)\ntm

very pretty

looking into the carriages.

289. 1. A considerable number of reflexive verbs take an additional remoter object (not personal) in the genitive (219.3).
a. The construction of a reflexive verb with the genitive is notably easier than of the same verb used otherwise than reflexivelythus, id) erinnere m\^ meineS S5erge!^en I remember (remind myself of) my fault, but \^ erinnere \i)n an fein SSergel^en I remind him of his fault ^yet many of these also frequently make their construction by the aid of a preposition, and many others admit only a prepositional construction thus, \^ jjer*

laffe
2.

mi(^ auf

il^n

I rely on

him.

dative

Only two or three reflexives take a remoter object in the such are \\^ nafjtn approach, fid) toiberfefeen oppose, fic^
:

bequemen submit.

292j
290.

IMPERSONALS.

145

ject in the dative, in

are used with a reflexive oba manner quite analogous with the true reflexive verbs, and therefore form a class of improper reflex-

A small number of verbs

ives.
a.

Most
:

of these require in addition

cusative

thus,

\6)

ma^e mir

fein Utirec^t

claim, \^ bilbc miu ba nic^t ein I(3U) But ]i^ fd^meic^eln flatter one's self ^ir t)iel thou darest much.
is intransitive.

in the acan / make no unjust not imagine that, bu getraueft

a direct object

IMPERSONAL VERBS.
291.
ally, is
1. An impersonal verb, or a verb used impersonone by means of whicli the action implied in the represented as exerted, without reference to a

verb
2.

is

subject or actor.

singular,

Such a verb stands always in the third person and either without a subject, or, more usually,
e^
it.
it

with the indefinite subject

Thus,
knocks,
i.

e
e.

reflnet it

rains,

i.

e.

there is rain falling; e flopft

there is a knocking;

am ^angeg

buftet'^

unb

Ieu(i)tef

on

the

seems, I

Ganges are sweet odors and shining sights; mict) biiuft me e. it seems to me; \t)n ^ungerte him hungered, i. e. he was
(227.2c).

hungry
292.

verbs in German are absolutely and exverbs impersonally used may be impersonal clusively
:

No

classified as follows
1. Verbs describing the phenomena of nature, which are almost invariably impersonal in virtue of their meaning thus, e ftaQelt it hails, e ^ai aef c^neit it has snowed, es tt)irb bonnern unb Bli^en it will thunder and lighten.
:

2.

Certain verbs which by the idiom of the language are ordi-

narily used in

an impersonal form:

as, biinfen

and

bdud^ten

v^ove successful; and a number of verbs signifying personal conditions and feelings, as
[beui^ten] seem, geliiften desire, Qelingen

l^ungern hunger, biirflen thirst, frieren freeze, fd^minbeln be giddy,

Qrauen he horror-struck,
a.

etc.

an object designating the person affected by their action, or the subject of the feeling or condition they describe: some take an accusative, others a
All this class of impersonals take
dative, others either

an accusative or dative (222.n.le

227.2c)

146

VERBS.

[292-

thus, mid) oeliiftete md)t nac^ bem t^euren [teuren] So'^n I should not long for the costly prize, biirftet beinen Seinb, fo trdnfe iftn if thine enemy is thirsty, give him to drink, mir Qrauet t)or ber (Spotter 5fleibe I dread the envy of the gods, e biinft mir or mid) it seems
to

me.
3.

'

Almost any verb,

transitive or intransitive, is liable to oc-

cur in impersonal use

object.

if

transitive,

along with

its

ordinary

Thus, mie
crQe!)f^ eu(^

fteftfg
tt)olf)(

if

mit ben ^ottern Jiow fares it with the gods? it goes well with you, eg fetjlte an C)oIa there

was
stir

lack of wood, pibfeltd) regt eg fic^ im Utofire suddenly there is a in the reeds, eg treibt il^n ben ^reig gu eriDerben he is impelled
eg erf orbert eine
nic^t it

to

gain the prize,

^re^ung

it

requires a turning,

eg bebarf ber

^nna^me

needs not the assumption.

a. The very common use of eg giebt it gives (i. e. there are given or furnished), in the sense of there is or are, with following accusative, requires special notice thus, 'ta Qdb eg c^aufelflii^Ic
:

there

were rocking-chairs
are older,

there, eg giebt

t)iele,

bie alter finb, there

are

many who

"iid)^

eg meniger S()riften gdbe alg

6aracenen

that there

were fewer

Cliristians than Saracens.

4. Impersonal phrases formed with the verbs jein and merben along with adverbial of adjective adjuncts, describing personal conditions or states of feeling, and always accompanied by a dative designating the person to whom such conditions belong, are very frequent. Thus, mir ift gang anberg i\\ ^O^ufft [^ut] I feel quite otherwise (it is to me quite otherwise in mind), il^m Xoai jo bange he was so apprehensive, mie mir tt)ol^I ift how well I feel! mie ift mir benn Iww is it with me then ? nun tt)irb mir immer bdnger now I grow

more and more anxious, mie

suffer
! je

n)e^ tDirb

falter eg

ift,

befto l^ei^er tt)irb

I become,

[{^m. iff g,

alg ob'g

^n

mir how I am beginning to mir the colder it is, the Jwtter l^iniiberrief he feels as if he were

invited across.
5. Impersonal expressions are often made from intransitive verbs in a passive or reflexive form (see 279.2, 288.2). Thus, l)eute ^benb tt)irb getanat n)erben there will be dancing this

evening, eg

fifet fi(^

fd)Ie(^t l^ier it is

disagreeable sitting here.

293. The impersonal subject eg is (as is abundantly shown by the examples already given) very often omitted not, how-

ever, with the impersonals describing the

phenomena of nature

nor, generally, with verbs which are not of

common

use in im-

297]
;

IMPEBSONALS.

147

personal form but, as a rule, with verbs which are of common impersonal use, whenever the e would, by the rules for the arrangement of the sentence, come elsewhere than in its natural place next before the verb.
a. That is, especially in the cases mentioned in sections 2, 4, and 5 of the last paragraph, whenever the object of the impersonal verb, or an adjunct qualifying the verb, is placed before and the putting of the object first, with consequent omission it

of e, is the

more usual

construction.

Since the impersonal verb represents the simple action 294. without reference to an acting subject, such impersonals as take an object, direct or indirect, representing the person or thing affected by the action or condition, are virtually equivalent to passives or intransitives, having that person or thing as their subject and they often may or must be so rendered in English.

a.

Many
:

of the

and those with

otherwise

examples given above have been so rendered, or it)erben hardly admit of being treated thus, further, e erforbert eine ^re^ung a turning is
jein

required, e bebarf ber

295.

^nnabme

nic^t the

assumption

is

not needed.

A verb having the indefinite subject e it is not always be regarded as impersonal the ey sometimes represents indefinitely a subject which is contemplated by the mind, and admits of being definitely stated yet more often (154.4), e is a grammatical subject only, standing for a logical subject which is to be statetl later, whether a substantive clause, an infinitive
to
;

clause, or a simple substantive

finb it rejoices

thus, e freut un, ha^ (Sie ^ier

e freut ini, <Sie bu fe'^en it re-

us that you are here,

joices

Its to

see you, eg freut un biefe 9lad)rid}t this

20.

news

rejoices us.

[Exercise

Passive, Eeflexive, and Impersonal Yerbs.]

COMPOUND VERBS.
296. Verbs in German admit of composition with various other parts of speech with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. The importance and frequent use of certain classes of these compounds render it necessary that they be treated here, rather than later, under the general subject of the composition of words.

297.

of elements called prefixes.

Yerbs are compounded especially with a class These are all of kindred

[297-

148

VERBS.

words signifying place or direction but they bave become divided in modern use into two well-marked classes
derivation, being originally adverbs,
;

1. Prefixes whicb are also employed as independent parts of speech, adverbs or prepositions. These form a less intimate union with the verb, being separable from it in many of its forms ; they are therefore called SEPAEABLE PREFIXES, and a verb in combination with them

said to be separably compounded. Prefixes which, in their present form, occur only in combination with verbs, and never admit of separation from verbal forms (or verbal derivatives) ; they
is
2.

inseparable prefixes, and the verb with them is said to be inseparably compounded. But 3. A few independent prefixes sometimes form with verbs combinations after the manner of the inseparable prefixes, and therefore require to be treated as a class by themselves.
are called

verbs separably compounded.

298.

The

class of separable prefixes is divided into

two sub-

classes, simple
1.

and compound.

The simple separable

used as inseparable

also

see 308

prefixes (including those

etc.)

sometimes

are
oB over, on
-^

db off, down an on, at auf up, upon

^oxt forth,

away

with

geoen afgainst
in in.

iiber

over

- urn

an^ out,

from
there ' at

Bei hy, beside,

I)eim home ^er toward one

around ^unter under

^^^^^ ^^
tt)icber

^ Dor before
i
j

^^ ^^ bar

-'^^^ -^^^^

^^^ Winter behind

mit with nad) after
nteber

^9^^'^^ or

again

burc^ through
ein in, into

mq

away

gu to
guriid

empor up,

aloft

down
prefixes are

entamei in two, apart

2.

back gufommen together

The compound separable

Combinations of many of the above with one another, especially with the words of more general direction or place
a.

l)n, I)in,

ia or bar,

tjor:

as

:^eran, I}inan,

baran, t)oran.

299]

SEPAEABLE COMPOUNDS.

149

6. One or two combinations of the above with preceding inseparable prefixes namely, beiDor before, entgeflen against (this, however, is really derived from in^gegen).
:

c.

.%a^\m\6)Z\\

prefix),
d.

and

l^intan

between (gtrtfc^en by itself is not used as a behind (contracted from l^inten an).

Note

that, of those given in the list above, several are

compound adverbs (empor, entgtt)ei, guriicE, sufammen), although not made up of two different prefixes.
really

299.
Prefixes.

Conjugation of Verbs compounded tvith Separable

The conjugation of a compound verb is in general the same with that of the simple verb only one or two matters regarding the treatment of the prefix require
:

notice
1.

The

prefix stands before the verb in the infinitive

participles,

and both
forms.
a.

but after

it

in all the other simple

written with the verb as a of course, separated from it; and, if the verb be followed by other adjuncts as objects, adverbs, etc. the prefix usually and regularly stands last, at thus, from anfangen begin, \^ the end of the whole clause
is

In the former case, the prefix

single

word

in the latter case

it is,

\a\w a\[Ibegin,\^ fing

ren]
b.

bicfen DJlorgen

friil)

gu ftubircn

[ftubie^^

an

I began

early this

morning

to study.

if, by the rules for the verb is transposed, even in the simple forms, to written as one word with it

But

(434),

the arrangement of the sentence or removed to the end, it comes,

stand after

its prefix,

and

is

then

ftubiren

[ftubieren]

anfing

thus, al i(^ biefen 9!)Zorgen frii:^ gu as J began to study early this

morning.
2.

The ordinary

sign of the past participle,

(^c,

is

inserted between the

separable prefix and the root;

^^u,

also the sign of the infinitive,

case, as the

whenever used.
to
is

Thus, angefangen begun, an^ufangen example shows, the verb infinitive sign and prefix, as one word.
3.

begin: in the latter written along with its

The

prefix has the principal accent.

150
300.

VEEBS.

[300begin
(II.3), I)erQnnaf)en

Examples:

anfanj^en

draw

nigh.

Principal Parts.
anf angen, fing an, angef atigen
]^erannal^en, natjk Ijerati, ^erangcnaftt

Indicative.

Peesent,
s. I

I begin

etc.

I draw

nigh etc.

fange an

na^e Beran
nal^fl Ijeran

an 3 fangt an
2 fangll
p.
I

naftt l^eran

fangen an

na^en 5eran
naT^t T^eran

2 fangt an

3 fangen an
Pbeteeit,
s. I

naften l^eran
etc.

I began

I drew

nigh etc.

fing

an
etc.

na!)te fteran

Peefect, I have begun

s.
I

I have drawn
bin fterangenal^t

nigh etc.

]^aBe

angefangen
etc.

Plupeefect, I had begun

s. I
l^atte

I had drawn

nigh

etc.

angefangen

xoax fterangenaftt

FuTTJEE,
s. I

I shall

begin etc.

I shall draw
I shall

nigh etc.

werbe anfangen

tDerbe ^erannaften
etc.

Fur. Peef.,
s. I

I shall

have begun

have draicnnigh

etc.

n)erbe angefangen

^aben

tDerbe Ijerangena^t fein

Subjunctive.
Peesent, I may begin
s. I

etc.

I may draw nigh

nafte

etc.

fange an
etc., etc.

^eran

etc., etc.

Conditional.
CoNDiTioNAii,
s. I

I should

begin etc.

I should draw
ttiiirbe
etc., etc.

nigh

etc.

mxht

anfangen

^eranna^en

etc., etc.

Imperative.
begin etc.
s.

draw nigh

etc.

2 fange an, fange

bu an

nafte ^eran, na^e bu ^eran

3 fange er an
etc.

na^e
etc.

er l^eran

303]

INSEPARABLE COMPOUNDS.
Infinitive.

151

Peesent,

to begin

to

draw nigh

anfanaen, ansufangen
Peefect,
to

l&eranna:^en, l^eranguna^en
to

have begun

have drawn nigh

angefangen l^aben

^^rangenaT^t fein

Paeticiples.
Peesent, beginning

drawing nigh
l^erannal^enb

anfangenb
Past, begun

drawn nigh
l&crangena^t

angefangen
301. altered
1-

of the simple verb is often greatlycomposition with a prefix, as in anfangen begin, literally take hold on: in other cases, each member of the compomid retains its independent meaning nearly unchanged.

The meaning
its

by

2. When the combination is of the latter character, no absolute line is to be established dividing the employment of the prefix as prefix from its use as independent adverb and there are many instances in which the prefix (especially a compound
;

one) is treated in both ways indifferently, and either written with the verb or separated from it thus, tDO man mager ^tnein geftt unb fett fterau fomnit (or, l^ineinge^t, ^eraugfommt) where one goes in lean and comes out fat.
;

[Exercise

21.

Verbs Separably Compounded.]

VERBS INSEPARABLY COMPOUNDED.

302.

The inseparable
and
^er.

prefixes are

be,

ent

(or emp),

cr, Q^c, i)er,

a. These prefixes are, most of them, traceably descended from those of the other class their original form and present office will be explained below (307).
:

303. They remain in close combination with the verb to which they are attached, through its whole conjugation, forming with it, as their name denotes, an inseparable combination, of which the radical syllable, and not the prefix, receives the accent. Hoijcq

152
1.

VERBS.

[303-

sign of the infinitive, ^u, is put before the combination (and separated in writing from it), as if it

The

were a simple verb.

sign of the participle, ge, is omitted altogether. was pointed out above (243.3a), this is never Moreover, the ge is itself prefixed to an unaccented syllable. an inseparable prefix, and no verbal form is ever allowed to have two inseparable prefixes.
2.
a.

The

Since, as

304. Examples ney away.

beginnen hegin
Principal Parts.

(1.2), Derretfen

jour-

beginnen, begann, begonnen

toerreifen, t)erreifte, berreift

JjfDICATr^K

begtnnc

fterrelfe

begann );)a^t begonnen l^atte begonnen

tt)erbe
tt)erbe

berreifte

bin

t)erreift
t)erreift

war

beginnen

merbe Derreijen
ttjerbe derreift fein

begonnen l&aben

Subjunctive.
bcginne

terreife
t)erreifete
etc., etc.

beganne or begfinne
etc., etc.

Conditional.
tt)urbe

beginnen

n)urbe t)errelfen
etc., etc.

etc., etc.

Imperative.
begtnnc
Infinitives.
berrelfc

beginnen, gu beginnen

toerrelfen,

gn berrclfcn

begonnen ^aben

Derreift jein

Participles.

beglnnenb begonnen

toerrelfenb
tterreift

307]

INSEPAEABLE PEEFIXES.

153

305. A few inseparably compounded verbs are further compounded with a separable prefix. Such combine the peculiarities of both modes of conjugation, taking no ge in the participle, and interposing gu of the infinitive between the two

prefixes

thus,

anerfennen recognize, anjuerfennen, erfanntc an,

anerfannt.

however as anbetreffen, auferfte^en, auDorentftalten are never used except in such verbal forms, or in such arrangements of the sentence, as rea.

Some

of these,

erlcfen, einberleiBen,

quire the separable prefix to stand before the verb thus, al (^6rifhi auferftanb when Christ arose; but not gl^riftuS erftanb auf
:

Christ arose.

306. No verb separably compounded is ever further compounded with an inseparable prefix. a. The words sometimes given as examples of such composition are really derivatives from nouns thus, tieraBfd^eueit regard with horror is not from a verb a6fd)euen, but from the noun ^Ibj^eu horror ; beauftragen commission, in Uke manner, is from ^uftrag an errand, charge; benad^ri(^tigen inform from 9^a(^rid)t news, information, and so on.
:

307.
1.

Derivation and Uses of the Inseparable Prefixes,

prefixes are elements which have become greatly changed, both in form and in meaning, from their originals, and have acquired such importance in the system of word-formation as to call for special notice in the grammar.
in part a distinct and clearly definable compounds they form, they in part also modify in a very general and indefinite way the meaning of the verbs to which they are attached and their spheres of use variously approach, and even sometimes overlap, one another. Only
a.

The inseparable

While they have

force in the

their leading applications will be stated below.

h. These prefixes are also freely used in forming derivative verbs from other parts of speech (see 405.III) such derivatives are conjugated in the same manner as the inseparably com;

pounded
2.

verbs.

^e

is

the

force with the latter

prefix

same with our own prefix he, and of kindred it comes ultimately from the separable
;

and independent preposition bet hy. a. Prefixed to an intransitive, it adds the meaning of ux>on, about, or the like, converting the intransitive into a transitive

: :

154

VERBS.
firtfien

[307sing, Bcfinflcn sing

thus, flagcn moan, beflagcn bemoan, about, besing.

b. Prefixed to a transitive, it changes the direction of the verbal action, converting into a direct object what was only indirectly or remotely the object of the simple verb thus, malen paint a picture, bemalen paint over (as a wall), rauben steal (something from some one), berauben rob (some one of something).
:

c. Rarely, it only slightly modifies the meaning of a verb, usually in the way of a strengthening or extension of its action thus, berfen and bebeden cover ; brcingen and bebrdngen crowd,

oppress; l^arren
stand, subsist
d.

and

bel^arren wait, persist; fle^en

and

befteben

Some

of its

compounds are
self,

restricted to a reflexive use

fid)

thus, \\^ befinben^ncJ one's behave.

be;

bctragen bear one's self,

3. nt was earlier ant, in which form it appears in ^nttDort answer and ^ntli^ countenance; it is by origin an adverb meaning against, related to our and and the prefix of aiwwer (andswarian), etc. In combination with three verbs beginning with thus, empf angen, it has taken, by assimilation, the form tmp f,
:

empfe^len, empfinben.
a.

Its primitive

meaning appears

in

a few compounds, as
it

cnt-

fpre(f)en
b.

correspond, answer; empfangen receive.

Its leading idea is

now

that of out;

denotes removal,

separation, deprivation, sometimes even negation: thus, entgeben, entfommen, entflieben escape; entgieben take aicaij; entlaffen
let off,

release; entfagen renounce; entttjeiben desecrate.

:

sometimes indicates transition into a condition c. brennen take fire, entfteben come into being.
It

as, cnt*

4. r is the same word with the prefix ur forming nouns (411.4), and means by origin forth, out, being related to au out, and

probably ultimately identical with

a.

it.

It has

most nearly

its

primitive force in such verbs as

ergieben educate, bring up, erri^ten erect, erfd^retfen startle.

b. It often signifies a passing into a condition, a becoming, the beginning of an action as, erfd)einen (shine forth) appear, ertbnen sound forth, tx^ittnn fall a trembling.
:

c.

It strengthens the verbal idea, often

:

adding an implication

of

accomplishment or attainment
er]u(J)en

as, erf(i)o|)fen exhaust, ertrogen

endure, erleben experience,

request, erfinben invent.

307]
d.

INSEPARABLE PREFIXES.

155

Hence
it

(its

pounds),

signifies

prevailing office in the production of new coman acquisition by means of the action ex-

pressed by the simple verb: thus, erjafien obtain by hunting^ ertrofeen get by defiance, ertangen bring on by dancing.
5. (55e is believed to have had at first the sense of with, together, which sense appears, somewhat dimly, in a few of the compounds it forms as, tjcfrieren become solidified by cold, gerinnen
:

coagulate, gefaflen (fall in with) please, gefteften (stand by) confess. But this sense has become so generalized and effaced, and its

applications are so various and indistinct, that vain to attempt to classify them.
a.

it

would be

in

The adoption of

this prefix as regular characteristic of past

been already referred to (243.3c) as comparatively modern, and hardly admitting of explanation.
participles has
historically the same word as bor forward, forth, leading idea is that of forth, away : as in Derbrdttgen crowd out, toeriagen chase away, t)er!aufen bargain away, sell, t)er*
6.

a. 35er is

and

its

reifen

journey

off, t)erfpielen lose

at play.

b. Hence, as intimating removal through the action of the verb to which it is attached, it comes further to imply loss, as in uerbrauc^en wear out, uerberben detriment, destruction ruin; or a removal from what should be, the production of an untoward effect: as in ticrfii^ren lead astray, VitxxMznput out of place; or the commission of error as in t)erre(^nen misreckoyi, berfennen mistake; or a reversal of action as in berbieten forbid,
:

t)erad)teti

despise.

c. On the other hand, it signifies a complete working-out of the action of the verb as in berBluten bleed to death, DerBrenuen bum up; which may imply a cessation of the action, as in berBIii^en blossom out, fade, wither; or, more usually, a strengthening of the action, as in t)er]infen sink away, Dertilgen blot out, and this intensive force in toerfdjlie^en shut up, uerBinben unite; a few cases makes transitive, as t)erla(f)cn deride, berfc'^Ien miss,
:

fail of.
7.

dis,

and means,

3er represents an older bi, which is related to the Latin like the latter, apart, asunder.

a. Accordingly, it either intensifies the meaning of verbs which contain the idea of dissolution, of going to pieces or reducing to pieces, or it adds that idea: thus, gerbrecf)en break

asunder, aerjprengen bJm) to pieces,

$erf alien fall

apart, jerrinncn

become dissolved.


156

VERBS.
[308-

PREFIXES SEPARABLE OR INSEPARABLE.

few prefixes, belonging properly to the 308. separable class (being all of tliem in nse also as independent parts of speech), nevertheless sometimes form compounds after the manner of inseparables.
309.

These prefixes are

iiber

burd} through
t)tnter

over

unter under
tDiber
trteber
)

behind

um

about

against

a^ain

a. SBiber and tt)tcber are the same word, but differently spelt, to indicate a difference of meaning. All verbs compounded with

tuiber
ttjieber

are inseparable; are separable.

all

but one or two compounded with

310. In verbs separably compounded with these prefixes, both members of the compound have their own full meaning, hardly modified by the combination; the inseparable compounds often take an altered or figurative sense.

"^interge'^en

Thus, as separable compounds, burc^bringen crowd through, go behind, iikrfe^en set across, umcje^en go around, revolve, untermerfen throw under, tt)ieber!)oIen/e/c7i6acfc; but, as inseparable compounds, \)\xx6)^x\x[0,iX[ penetrate, permeate, I)inter=
a.

jugate, mieberftolen repeat.

geften deceive, u6er|e^en translate, umQeI)en evade, unteriDerfen ^6Yet the difference is not often so

marked as in these examples, and in a host of cases the two classes of compounds are distinguished by only a slight shade
of meaning,
if

at

all.

311. The compounds, of either class, are accented and conjugated according to the rules already given. That is to say
1. The separable compounds are accented on the prefix they put the prefix before the verbal form in the infinitive and participles, but after it in other cases; they take the signs of participle and infinitive between the prefix and the root.
;

Thus, from burcf)'bnngen crowd through come burd^'gubrinaen, bringe burc^, brang burd), bin burc^^'gebrungen, merbe burd)'bringen,
burd)'gebrungen.

313]
2.

COMPOUND VERBS.

'

157

syllable, reject the ge of the participle,

itive

The inseparable compounds are accented on the radical and put gu of the infin-

before the whole combination. Thus, from bur^brin'fien penetrate come gu burc^brtn'Gen, bur(f)=
^obe burdjbrun'gcn, tocrbe bur(i)brin'gen,
burc^^*

brin'ge, burrfibrang',

brun'gen.

OTHER COMPOUND YERBS.

312. Yerbs compounded with other adverbs than those already mentioned, or with nouns or adjectives, fall into two classes
1. True or close compounds, in which the first member has become an integral part of the combination, and the whole is

treated as a simple verb.

l^anbftabt; todjt]aQtn

Thus, l^anb'^aBen handle, manage, gu ftanb^aben, ^onblfiaBte, Qt^ prophesy, gu ma^rfagen, tDa^rfagte, gema^r*

fagt; liebfojen caress, gu Uebfofeti, licbfofte, geUebfoft.

2. Loose or false compounds, phrases, written together as one word, in which the first member is treated as any such word limiting the verb would be, and the combination is conjugated like a verb separably compounded. Thus, ftattfinben take place, ftattgufinben, f anb ftatt, ftattgefunben

ttJO^It^un benefit, tt)ot)lgutftun, t))at tDol^l, iroftlget^an

feftlj(^lagen

miscarry,

f eftlgufdjlagen,

f dfilug

fel^I,

fel^Igef d)Iagen

lo^fpreiien ab-

solve, Iogufpred)en, fprac^ lo, logefprD(^en.

a. If

a verb of the former class has not the accent on

its first

syllable, it loses (243.3a) the ge of the past participle:

fro^Iod'en, frol)locft.
b.

thus,

certain verbs
fact

same class are to be carefully distinguished which have the aspect of compounds, but are in derivatives from compound nouns such are frii^ftiiden to
the
:

From

(from gruftftiid breakfast), rat^|d)Iagen consult (from 9ftatftf(i)Iag [9tatfcf)lag] consultation).

breakfast

[ratj(i)Iagen]

313. W\^ and doH are treated in part as proper prefixes, and form both separable and inseparable compounds, which are accented and conjugated like those made with bur(^, etc.
(308-11).

very rarely treated as a separable, and only by the and ge in the infinitive and participle thus, m\^= and some gut)erftet)en, mi^gegangen, but not irf) t)erftel^e mig, etc. verbs take a prefixed ge in the participle: thus, gemi^brau(^t^

But mi^

is

insertion of ^u

158

VEEBS.

[313-

gemi^^tinbelt, etc. 35oII forms five or six inseparable compounds, as t)oIIbrin9en accomplish, uoflsie'^en execute, and a number of loose separables, as t^oUQXZ^tn pour full.

[Exercise

22.

Verbs Inseparably Compounded, Eia]

ADJUNCTS OF THE VEKB.

314. A verb, in a proper verbal form (that is to say, excluding the infinitives and participles see 339, 349), always stands as the bare predicate of a sentence and all that constitutes the complete predicate is brought in in the way of modifying adjuncts to the verb, variously limiting and qualifying its action.
:

a.

The proper verbal forms, those possessing the charits

acteristic of person, are often called its " finite "

better called
here.

forms they are personal forms, and this expression will be used
:

h. Even in the compound tenses of the verb itself, the rank of verb belongs in strictness only to the personal auxiliary, the other parts being adjuncts of the latter: thus, in id) l^abe i{)n Qe= !ran!t I have pained him, ^dbt is the bare predicate, and gefrdnft is an attribute of the object, as much as finbe and franf,

id) finbe i^n !ran! Ifind Jam sick; x^ merbe gefrcintt pained, \^ bin gegangen I am (have) gone are analogous, in like manner, with \^ merbe !ran! I become sick, [^ bin tt)eg I am away; and \^ tcerbe gefrdnft tt)orben fein I shall have been pained is made up by the addition of successive modifying adjuncts to merbe, each adjunct after the first being (see 348.2)

respectively, in

I am

regularly prefixed to the one which it further limits the phrase means literally I am entering (merbe) into a state of having (fein) That the auxiliaries have become (morben) pained (gefrdnft). more or less completely the inferior value of copulas, connecting the subject with the chiefly significant part of the predicate, does not alter their formal or grammatical character.
;

No personal form of a verb has the value of adjunct to c. another pers-^nal form there are as many separate sentences as there are separate verbs. All the other parts of speech (ex;

cepting the conjunctions see 382. a) may enter, by connection with the verb as its adjuncts, into the relation of parts of the predicate of a sentence.
:

is

Object of a Verb. Most verbs may take an object that 315. to say, may be followed by a noun (or its equivalent) in an

: ;

316]

VERBAL ADJUNCTS.

159

affecting which, the action

oblique case, designating the person or tiling upon which, or as which it describes is exerted by the

subject.

"transitive" verb takes its object in the accusative case is called a direct object: thus, er 1:jat ein en ut, unb trdgt il& n he has a hat, and wears it: see 227.
1.

and such
a.

few transitive verbs are followed by two accusatives

"intransitive" verbs take an indirect object in the
ic^

see 227.3.
2.

Many

genitive or dative case: thus,

frf)one

meine^ Setnbe I
219, 222.11.

spare
3.

my

enemy,

er folgt

mir

he'follows

me: see

verbs, besides their direct object, take a remoter object in the dative or genitive, indicating the person or thing affected less immediately by the action of the subject upon the
object, or further defining that action
:

Many

thus, [^ rauBe b

i e

50^anne ba ^elb I
tl^n f

ein

money from this man, i^ berauBc elbe I rob him of his money: see 219, 222.1.
steal the

316. Predicate called predicate,

Noun or
if it is

Adjective.

noun or adjective

is

brought by the verb into connection

with a noun or its equivalent (either the subject or the direct object of the verb), as limiting or qualifying that noun.
1. a. A predicate noun stands in the nominative, relating to and qualifying the subject of the verb, after jein be, tDerben become, bleiben continue, fc^etnen, biinfen, and bduc^ten [beuc^^ten] seem, and !)ei^en be called; also, with the passive of the verbs that take a noun in the accusative as objective predicate: see

213.

These are verbs of incomplete predication, requiring a complement. Especially fein be is the ordinary simple connective of a subject with its predicated quality, and is therefore
called the copula.
b. After a few verbs of calling, regarding, and the like predicate noun stands in the accusative, brought by the verb

into relation with its object: this is called an objective predicate: thus, er nannte m\^ feinen greunb he called me his friend: see
227.3&,c.
2.

a.

A predicate
noun
:

adjective

is

used after the same verbs as a

predicate

treu tt)erben he is

thus, er t[t unb Wxbi mir treu, unb tt)irb nte un=' and continues faithful to me, and will never be*

come

unfaithful.

160
&.

VEKBS.

[316-

ixjative forpe,

predication, or of full predoften used in a manner which it is convenient to distinguish as adverbial predicate (116.1b) thus, bie ^inber ftanben ft u m m the children stood silent, bie Stimme ftromte l^immlijc^ 1^ elle \)oxthe voice poured forth hearenly clear,
of

With verbs

more complete
is

an adjective

tDtrb^S

au^

d)

n gu %aq,t fommen will

it

also

come forth

beauti-

ful?
G.

Some

verbs are followed by an adjective as objective predft)unb

icate (116.1c), relating to

ringen bie
b r
r a
e i f

dnbe
biete

(i)

which I

and qualifying their object thus, jic they wring their hands sore, bie \^ gerne gladly offer threefold, fie ftellt fid) ii b c r ^
:

she feigns herself surprised, id) f iiftle meine ^raf te 1^ o 1^ e r I feel my powers higher, er ftdit \\)Xi It) a rm he Jiolds him warm. This predicative construction is much more common with
t f (^

adjectives than with nouns, which generally require al as,

for, gu
to,

fiir

or the like, before

them

compare

227. Sc.

317.

Adverb.

by more than
361 etc. Thus,
fie
tt)a(J^t

one, in the

The verbal idea is limited by an adverb, or most various manner, in respect to

and so
er

time, place, occasion, manner, end,

on.

See Adverbs,

x6) gel)e

je^t

/am goiiig now,

late this

too^nt file r he lives here,

fprec^en q

they speak well, bu

bift l^eute

morgen

fe^r fpcit er*

you woke very

morning.

Prepositional Phrase. A phrase composed of a prepoalong with the word (generally a noun, with or without adjuncts) which it governs, and the nature ol' whose relation to the verbal action it defines, is a very frequent adjunct to the verb, taking the place of object, predicate, or adverb.
318.
sition
a.

As

direct object in place of

:

can hardly stand

t(^

but

it

may

tDarte auf iftn, for id) tuarte

an accusative, such a phrase be used for a genitive object as, feiner limit for him; for a dative

objectas,

more
id)
f

er folgt mir, or er folgt auf mid) he follows me; yet freely for a remoter obje t along with a direct object as,

i^ freue

tnid) iiber bteje,

for

id)

freue mid) befjen

\d) f d^reibe iftm

I rejoice

at this,

c^retbe einen 33nef

an i^n, for

einen Srief

I write

letter to

him.

Examples of prepositional phrases with predicate value b. are e tDar t)on entfc^eibenbcr 2Bid}tifl!eit it was of decisive importance, bie ^ranten blieben in ber Witk the sick remained in the midst, fie ertpd^Iten tl)n gum l^aifer they chose him emperor, bte
tDXxh

gum ^uSbrud ber eele

this

becomes an expression of the

soul.


319]
c.

VERBAL ADJUNCTS.

161

Adverbial prepositional phrases are ber SSogel fpielt im the bird plays in the foliage, mt betQcn ben Samen in ber @rbe (i)oo& we hide tJie seed in th earth's bosom, er rief mit lauter Sttmme he cried with a Imtd voice.

SauBe

Order of the verbal adjuncts. 1. In the normal or regular arrangement of the sentence, the adjuncts of a personal verb are placed after it.
319.

all

a. For the inverted order of arrangement, in which one of the adjuncts is frequently placed before the verb it modifies, and for the transposed order, in which the personal verb is placpd after all its adjuncts, see the rules given for the order of the sentence, below, 431, 434.
2. When the verb is modified by two or more adjuncts, the general rule is, that one which is more closely combined in idea with the verb, and more essentially modifies its predicative meaning, is placed further from it than one of a more external and accessory character. Hence

a. The infinitive or participle, in a compound verbal form, stands at the end of the sentence thus, jie ft a 1 1 e iftre 3<iftne she had sunk her teeth sharply into f(ftarf in feine ginger Q e f e fe t
:

his fingers,

ie b
b.

it)r merbct eucft fo Hutig enter Tla^^i nicftt libern you will not presume so cruelly upon your power.

An

infinitive

auxil ary or other, stands in like

sentence:

dependent upon any verb, modal or causative manner at the end of the thus, [^ n)in t)or iftr mic^ niebernjerfen I wilt
her.

humble myself before

c.

separable prefix belonging to the verb takes the

babei re(ftt finfter nnb nnmiHig time right gloomy and out of humor.
fie
f

same
looked

place: thus,
at the
d.

aft

au she

same
of

manner
i(ft

part of speech compounded with a verb after the a separable prefix, or forming with it a verbal phrase analogous with such a compound, takes the same place thus,
:

Any

naftm ni(ftt meftr t)on ber ftinler mir liegenben bene maftr I no longer saw anything of the plain that lay behind me. e. Of two cases governed by the same verb, the second accusative (227.3) is placed after that which is the more immediate
object of the verb the genitive (219.2,3) follows the accusative the dative (222.1.1) usually precedes the accusative (except
;

when
/.

this is a pronoun or emphatic). Of more than one adverb qualifying the same verb, an adverb of time ordinarily precedes one of place, and both are


162

USES OF THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION.

:

[319-

placed before one of manner or degree thus, er arBeitet immer flei^ig he always works industrioiisUj, bu mol^nft ^ier fel)r beqiiem you live here very comfortably. Hence, also, the adverb of negation, ni(i)t, if it modifies the general assertion of the sentence, stands last but if its negative force applies to some particular adjunct of the verb, it is placed next before that adjunct.
;

The rules as above stated are subject to various modificaunder the influence of accent or emphasis, or of euphony. a. Any adjunct of the verb may be transferred to a position other than its proper one (usually later), for the purpose of
3.

tion

being
h.

made more

prominent.

Since a pronoun is, in general, a less significant and emphatic word than a noun, usage has established the rule that

A pronoun immediately
by a
first

preposition),

dependent on the verb whether as direct or indirect

(not

object,

governed comes

the verbal adjuncts. the pronouns, a personal pronoun comes before a demonstrative, the briefer personal pronouns, especially e it, before the longer, and the reflexives first of all.

among

Among

4 Prepositional phrases take, in general, the position belonging to the part of speech whose equivalent they are but they are more hable than single words to change place for euphonic reasons.
;

5. The natural connections of the different verbal adjuncts are regarded in the arrangement of the sentence those which affect one another, and exert a combined influence upon the verbal action, being put together.
;

6. The above are only the leading principles of the arrangement of words in a sentence. To follow out their application in detail, and illustrate their joint and mutual action, and the more

or less irregular and arbitrary modifications which they admit, cannot here be attempted.

USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUG-ATION.

PERSON AND NUMBER.
as
320. In general, the verb is of the its subject.
a.

same person and number

its

Being, of course, of the first or second person only when subject is a personal pronoun of those persons respectively,

since all other

words are

of the third person.

322]
321.
1.

PERSON AND NUMBER.

Special Rules respecting Person.

163

When

the

same verb has subjects

if
:

of

more than one person,

it is

of the first person (plural)

;

either of its subjects is of the

first

land

person otherwise, of the second thus, i^ unb bu f in b "^ter thou are here, bu unb er glaubt e beibe nid)t \^ou and he
it.

both disbelieve

2. After a relative (ber) referring to an antecedent of the first or second person, the verb is in the third, unless the personal pronoun is repeated after the relative (compare 181) thus, bu, ber bem 33a]ili^! ben DJ^orbblic! gab tlwu wlw gavest to the basilisk his deadly glance (but bu, ber bu Q(i^]i).
:

322.
1.

Special Bules respecting

its

Number.

is

A verb having for put in the plural.

subject

more than one singularnoun

either as the a. To this rule there are frequent exceptions several subjects are regarded as combined into a single idea or as, when preceding or following an enumeration of single subjects, the verb, by a familiar license of speech, is suffered to

agree with the one nearest it alone or as the verb is in fact understood with other than the one subject with which it agrees: thus, Winter mir lie fit nur Summer unb Ienb behind me lies only sorrow and misery, 5el unb Wtn tt)irb fortcieriffen rock and sea are hurried onward, e begleite burc^ ^eben unb terben un Sieb unb :^iebe unb SBein may song and love and wine accompany us through life and death, Siiiien, 93lorben, tel)len unb ^^ebredien tjat iiber^anb genommen hjing, murder, theft, and
;

adultery have become prevalent.

2.

A collective noun in
strictly

the singular takes a verb in the singular

much more
a.

than in English.

three, eine 5Jlencje

Exceptions are only such expressions as ein ^aar two or a number, ein '^ufeenb a dozen, which are frequently used with plural nouns (ordinarily construed appositionsee 216.5a), and have gained a plural value by ally with them association: thus, in tr)eld)em ein $aar SSbgel \)m unb mieber l^iipf en in which a couple of birds hop back and forth, im C>ofe jpielten ein $aar ber munteren ^inber in the yard were playing
:

two or three of the merry children, ein $aar ]inb au a couple are generally in front.
3.

getuoftnlic^ t)or=

toa, tt)eld^e, etc.,

After the impersonal and indefinite subjects e, bie, ba, the verb is put in the plural if a following

t64
predicate

trSES

OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

:

[322-

noun is plural thus, c f i n b unfer gtDei there are two of us, ba finb meine greunbe tJiose are my friends. ^o also occasionally in a case like bie grud^t biefe 33aumeg finb fleine 'Beeren the fruit of this tree is small berries.
4. Out of exaggerated respectfulness, the plural verb is sometimes (the usage is happily going out of vogue) construed with a singular title, or name and title as, b e H e b e n bcr ^err biefen etfel gu erproben may the gentleman he pleased to try this purse, 6etne 9]laieftdt ber ^omq l^aben gerubt his majesty the king has been gracwusly pleased to err doctor tDurben ha tak6)'\\ixt the d/yitor was put through his catechism there.
:

MODE AND TENSE.

Indicative.

323. The use of the indicative mode, in its various tenses, corresponds upon the whole pretty closely in German and in English. The principal points of difference will be stated below. 324.

Indicative Present.

1.

The German present

Hebe

answers to the three English forms of the present

love,

e.

g.

\^

I do

and I am

loving: the shades of

I love, difference among these

from the context, or are expressed or intimated' by adjuncts to the verb or by verbal phrases.
different values are either left to be inferred
2. In German, as in English and French, the present is often substituted for the preterit in lively narration thus, id) bielt
:

ftiHe,

unb

fal^

mic^ wa&j
cE e,

bem tanbe

ber (Sonne urn.

3nbem

ic^

nun

|o

b e \^ iz. I stopped, therefore, and looked While, now, lam thus lookabout me for the position of the suji.
e

mp

j e

ing upward,
3.

I see

etc.

In expressing a past action or state which is continued so as to be present also (or in signifying what has been and still is), the German, like the French, indicates the present part and leaves the past to be inferred, while the English does the contrary thus, j i n b <Ste f c^on lange bier have you been (are you) here already a hng time ? er f (^ I d f t feit fiinf S^bten nnter bem
:

(5(^nee he has been (is) sleeping

4.

for five years beneath the snow.

is

often than the English, The German used in the sense of a future thus, n)ie fan g^ \df an ? id^ breb' mt(b urn, fo x\V getban how shall I set about it? I will
present,
:

much more

turn myself about; that will fetch it; bie ^iiter, the property which he will one day inherit.

bie cr bereinft

erbt

326]

mDICATIVE TENSES.

165

This future use of the present is a direct inlieritance from a former condition of Germanic language (as represented to us by the oldest Germanic dialects), in which the present and future meanings were both habitually expressed by the present tense,
the later auxiliary futures, as I shall or will not having been yet brought into use.
325.

hve \^

toerbe lieBcn,

Indicative Preterit.

1.

The

own simple past

was
2.

tense, in its three

expressed, without distinction, by [^ lieBte. for the perfect (324.3), so the preterit is sometimes used for our pluperfect, to express what, at a given time, had been and was still: thus, ft) a ten ie f(^on lange ha
loving
all

preterit answers to our forms I loved, I did love, I

As the present

had you been (were you)

3.

there long already

distribution of the expression of past time between the preterit and perfect is not precisely the same in German as
in English.

The

As

we should use
the case: thus,
iiber

(326.2) the German perfect often stands where the preterit, so the contrary is also sometimes
i:^r

^brtet, ml6)

f$rerflt(f)e

eric^t be C>errn

3eru{alem e r g i n g you have heard what a terrible judgment of the Lord has corne upon Jerusalem.
326. Indicative Perfect. 1. The perfect answers in the main to our perfect, expressing completed action, or action in the past

thus, x^ !^a6e geliebt

with implied reference to the present, as no longer continuing I have loved, or Mve been loving.

2. But the perfect is not infrequently used where we employ the preterit the perfect is rather the tense by which something is simply asserted as true, while the preterit implies a connection with other past events in continuous narration, or a personal participation of the speaker, as spectator or joint
;

actor.

Thus, ott

ftat bieJlBelt erfc^affcn

ic^

God

created the world

(it

was

God

lohoetG.),

bin geftcrn in ber J!trd^e geiDcfen

ift

I was

at church

yesterday, un(er Sreunb

but

our friend died lately; unb tul^te am ficbentcn God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, ic^ tt)ar in ber ^irc^c, mo err 9L cine t)ortreff(i(^e ^rebigt I)idt I was at church, where Mr. JSf. preached an admirable sermon, unjer SSater flarb gcftern our father died yesterday (in our presence).
neiilt(^

geftorben

(S^ott erfd)uf

bie SSelt in fcc^ 5:agen,

distinction ai>pears also in English impossible to explain fully the difference in idiom betweeri the two languages without a great deal of
a.

Something of the same

it

usage, and

is

; :

166

USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

[326-

detailed illustration. Moreover, there are many cases in either tongue where both tenses might be employed with equal
propriety.
3.

For the present

in place of

our perfect, see 324.3

for the

perfect in place of the future, see 328.36.

327. Indicative Pluperfect. The pluperfect in German, as in English, expresses action already finished at a time in the past either defined or contemplated by the speaker thus, id) i}aik
:

Qellebt

I had

loved or been loving.

328. Indicative Future and Future Perfect. 1. These tenses ordinarily agree in use with their English correspondents: thus, i(^ tt)erbe lieben I shall hve or be loving, [^ merbe QcUcbt
l^aben
a.

I shall have loved or been loving. They express simple futurity, that which

is

going to be

and are carefully to be distinguished from the modal auxiliary forms composed of the infinitive with tuoHen and foUen (267-8), which more or less distinctly imply an assent or intent, and a
propriety or obligation.
2.

The futures are sometimes used

:

to indicate a claimed

probability, or to express a conjecture

thus, ba tDirb tco^I Sft^ 33ruber fein that is ijour brother, is it not? er tt)irb tud)t lange bort (^eblieben jetn I presume he did not stay there long.
3. a. In German, as in English, the perfect is often employed where the future perfect would be logically more correct, the implication of futurity being sufficiently made by the context

thus,
shall

icf)

raerbe

fommcn, fobalb

id)

ntcincn 33rief G^ft^n^ben babe

come as soon as I have written my

have written).

letter (not gefd)riebcn l^aben

tDerbe shall
b.

A present or perfect is occasionally substituted

of speech, to indicate the certainty of

for a future,

is to take place: thus, jene tjai cjelebt, ttienn \^ bte^33Iatt an meinen dnben Qcbc she has ceased to live, if I let this paper go out of my hands, ftel^', ober bu bift be Xohz^ stand, or thou art a dead man!
c.

by a figure

what

For the frequent use

of a present nst

ad

of a future tense,

see 324.4.

[ExEECisE 27.

Use of the Tenses of the

Subjunctive.

Indicative.]

329.

U^e in Enghsh,

The subjunctive mode, which has almost passed out of still continue^ in full currency in German,

331]

SUBJUNCTIVE.

167

having, if the two " conditional " tenses be included with it (as they are in fact subjunctive, both in form and character), more than a corresponding tense for every tense of the indicative. In some of its offices (the oj tative, potential, conditicnal) it answers to what is left of our own subjunctive, and to the compounded tenses (with the auxiliaries may, might, would, and
should)

by whicli we have in part supplied the place of the

classical

latter

in other offices (especially in indirect statement, 333) there is in

EngUsh hardly anything analogous, though the

present similar constructions in abundance.
330.

tongues

The subjunctive is the mode

in

of possibility, contingency,

subjectivity,

contradistinction to

the indicative as

the

mode
a.

of actuality, direct assertion, objectiveness.

of the

The subjunctive

Germanic languages

is

by origin an

optative,

expressing wish or desire, and there was another mode more properly known as subjunctive. In the Greek, both still subsist together but in German, as in Latin, the two have become one, which
or

mode
;

combines, with various modifications and restrictions, their several offices.

h. Not every statement of a hypothetical or contingent character requires the subjunctive: that character is often sufficiently intimated by the radical meaning of the verb used, or of the adverbs or conjunctions employed with it; the cases in

which this
c.

mood

is

availed of are those to be explained below.

of choice

freedom between a subjunctive and an indicative expression, depending on the degree of contingency or reality of the imphed conception, the difference being sometimes so slight as to be hardly definable and an indicative is occasionally used where analogy would lead us to expect a subjunctive, as if, by a figure
in the cases detailed, there is considerable
;

Even

of speech, to give a character of actuality to

what

is in itself

properly contingent. It is not possible to say, as in some other languages, that certain grammatical constructions, or certain particles, require or "govern" the subjunctive.
d. In the subjunctive, the distinctions of tense are of only subordinate value, and are even to some extent effaced. The tenses do not, therefore, require to be separately treated.

331.
1.

The Subjunctive as Optative.

is

The present subjunctive

sense, as expressing a wish, request^ or direction

frequently used in an optative on the part of

the speaker.

168
Thus,

USES OF THE FORMS CP CONJUGATION.

flcfeanet fei er
fi(5^,

[331

^onifi, e freue

tuer

ba

aUc S^xi blessed he he ever, lang leBe ber let him rejoice . . . . long live the king!

brdutlid^e Seinen legen mx bem Xftor an let us dress Thor in bridal vestments, gefte^^ i(f) e nur only let me confess it. a. This use is Umited to the first and third persons of both numbers for the second persons, the imperative is used in the first singular, mbge may is common as auxiliary and the same auxiliary may also be employed in the other persons.
.

who

b.

The

subject

is
it

put after the verb, except in the third pers.

singular,

where

may have

either position,

and more usually

stands before.
c.

to
in

The optative subjunctive is used, as already noticed (243.1), out the declension, of the imperative, and is practically, the third pers. plural, the most common imperative form,
fill

since the use of the second person in ordinary address is

no

longer approved
d.

(153.4:).

This subjunctive sometimes becomes, in appUcation, cona supposition or assumption thus, man begegne 3emanbcn im au; e fei eine ^efefljrf)aft beifammen let one meet anybody in the house ; let a company be assembled (i. e. supposing such to be the case); er tl^ue, tt)a er tDofle let him do what he please (i. e. tliough he do).
cessive, or expresses
:

e. Hence, with benn, it becomes, by an elliptical construction, equivalent to unless; thus, er fitftre benn gretia 3ur 33raut mir l^eim unless he bring me home Freya as bride (i. e. [if he would gain what he wishes] then let him bring, etc.), i^r mit^tet
ttiir

gur telle benn

t)erf))red^en

unless

you promise me on
also

the spot.

2.

The

preterit

and pluperfect tenses are

employed

in

kind of optative sense, but only by

elliptical construction, in

ab-

breviated conditional and indirect phrases where the wishes expressed are implied to be contrary to fact, or impossible of attainment.

Thus,

tt)are e

bod^ gefreut

power
that

to

my

bo(^ ^Benb if it were only evening! ^dtte x^ mx^ had I only enjoyed myself (while it was still in my dx) so)! ad), ha^ meine ^ugen ^l)rdnenqueEen wdrcn eyes were fountains of tears !

332.

The Subjunctive as Conditional and

conditional

Potential.

The
Into

and potential uses

of the subjunctive so pass

one another that they can hardly be treated separately.

We commence, for convenience, with the hypothetical period.

332]

CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE.

169

1. The hypothetical period consists of two parts or clauses, the one (the apodosis) expressing a conclusion or result which would follow, if the condition were true which is expressed by the other (the protasis) it being at the same time implied that the condition is not realized, and, generally, that the result is therefore also untrue. This, in its complete form, requires a past tense (preterit or pluperfect) of the subjunctive in each clause.

Thus,
bauert

regtcrte

3lled)t,

fo laget

prevailed, you
l^dtte,

would
ic^

lie

iftr t)Dr mir im 6tauBe if right in the xlust before rue, it)enn' Idiiger Qe=

mxt

im groft

erftarrt if it

had

lasted longer,

should have been stiffened with frost, gliidlic^er tt)drc an^:) i(^, tt)enn \6) \\a6) ^fien gegogen tDdre I too should be happier, if I had

marched
a.

to Asia.

if in

Either of the two clauses may stand first, and the idea of the clause of condition (protasis) may be expressed either by a conjunction (tuenn) or by the inverted arrangement (433) as the examples show.
b.

may be used

In the result or conclusion (apodosis), the conditional tenses instead of the proper subjunctive see below, 335.
:

c. The implication as to the result is liable to modification by various causes for example, by its being put into the form of
:

a questionas, tt)a tDdre au mir gemorben, l^dttet xt\x mid) iu(^t aufgenommen what would have become of me, if you had not received me ? or by an even involved in the condition as, unb tt)dren t)on (^olb fie, \6) gdbe fie bir even were they of gold, I would give them to thee.

d. If the condition be regarded as doubtful merely, and not contrary to reality, the verbs are put in the indicative mode thus, alw^ays when the tense is present or perfect as, tcenn er fommt, gel^e ic^ fort if he comes, I shall go away, wtnn er gefommen ift mill id) il)n fel^en if he be arrived, I wish to see him; and often when the tense is past: thus, menn er fi^on gefommen mar, mu er ung gefe'^en l^aben if he had already come, he cannot have failed

to see v^.

Rarely, a pret. indie, is used, for emphasis (compare 328.36), the clause of result, and even in that of condition thus, 'tn marft Derloren, l^'dik er ni^t fiir bic^ geft)rD(^en thou wast lost, had lie not spoken for thee, mar id) ... ber SBerrdtijer [33errdtcr], i(^
e.

in

ptte mir ben guten (Sd)etn gef|)art had have spared myself the fair show.

been the traitor^

might

170

USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

[332-

2. In the incomplete hypotJietical period, either the condition or the conclusion is unexpressed, but is more or less distinctly intimated or implied.

a. The conclusion is wanting altogether, and the condition has the value of a wish or prayer (see 331.2). In this case a bod)

or nut

but
tnit

more often introduced to help the optative expression, not indispensable thus, mdren mx nur ben 53er\i t)orI'.ei [Jiow happy 1 should be] if we were only past the hill! fonnf i(^
is is
:

if

I coidd

hut go along with you I

al as,

b.

The conclusion may be intimated by

tt)enn,

ditionality of the other clause expressed either

ob or

and the conby a conjunction, or (more commonly) by the inverted arrangement

(4336) of the clause after al

Thus, i^r etlet [a, al tDcnn i'^r ^^Imd I)dttet you are hurrying as [you would do] if you had wings, er tDiII bie 2SaI)rI}ett fo, al ob )ic 5D^unge tt)dre he demands truth in this way as [he would demand it]
if
it

were

cash, ber

^oben

flafft auf,
[it

aU

tt)dre er

fcfliittert

the soil cleaves open, as

would

do] if

Don rbfto^en er= it were shaken

by earthquakes.
of this construction calls always for a past a present is sometimes met with, as if the phrase were one of indirect statement (333) instead of conditional thus,
c.

The analogy

tense, but

ha voaxh e mir qI fbnne id) burd^ ben 3Boben fel^en, al fei er Qriine^ Ia then it seemed to me as if I could see through the ground as though it were green glass. Occasionally, it really represents an indirect phrase: thus, ic^ bad)te qI fei e ., for tc^ bad)te, eg for I it thought it -f thought as were, was, so and so. if ei f
.
.

d.

The conclusion

is

expressed by some other and virtually

thus, \^ oebac^te, bafern ic^ !ein ^Ibenteuer fdnbe, ben eimn)eg gu fudjen I intended, in case I should meet with no further adventure, to seek the way homeward.
e.

equivalent means:

On the

other hand, the conclusion

may

be fully expressed

and the condition intimated by some word or phrase which more or less distinctly implies it
Thus,
3tt)et(\e

mdre

id)

ein

aubrelten

that

I were a

Qro^er 33aum! bann fonnte t^ meinc big tree ! then [if I were so]
ic^

I might spread

out

my

branches, man(^e bdtf

oetban; a lie in
er ge=?

toer fc^eutnidjt bie .^often

Iwoidd have done much only, who does

not fear the cost? [if Iliad not feared the cost]^ fonft n)dr' |aKen otherwise [if thi^ were not so] he would have fallen.

332]
f

CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE.

171

3.fA yet less explicit implication of a condition makes of the past subjunctive a. -proper potential, expressing what in general, under the circumstances, might, could, or would be Thus, ha^ ginge no(^ tliat might answer yet, e ^tk fic!)^ fetner t)ertt)OGen no one would have presumed to do so, e^ fonnte mi(^ retten it might be able to rescue me, iiinun \l)x jeben tadjcl, ber t)ertt)unbcn fonnte take from it (222.1.3) everij sting that should be

able to
a.

wound.
potential subjunctive

The

indicative,

when

it is
[i^

assertion: thus,

is sometimes used in place of an desired to soften the positiveness of an bdc^te I should think, for I think, id) niod)te

should like (255.2), ic^ mdre faft Qegen ^^aumftdmme angerannt^ I came near r^unning against trunks of trees.
4. Analogous, on the other hand, with the clause expressing the condition in the hypothetical period, are occasional phrases

like e n3irb nadjgea'^mt,

imitated,

were

t)er)c^o))en

tt)are e nur mtt eintQen ,^utfd)en it is only with a few carriages, BefonbcrS, iDcnn er ]\^ ^aben lollte especially if he should chance to have ex^
it

hausted his ammunition.

5.

Akin with the potential and hypothetical uses of the sub-

junctive are the following

a.

more

special cases

The subjunctive present

indefinite relative
etc.): thus, tDie

is used in a clause involving an pronoun or conjunction {whoever, however, and) ber menidjlid)e manfe however human (will)
it be,

may

e jci in

waver, jo flein fie auc^ fei however small whatever way it may be.

auf melc^e ^rt

b. The subjunctive, present or past, is used after ba^, auf ha%, bamtt in order that, to express the end had in view, or sought to be attained: thus, loft mir ha^ ^zx^ '^ci^ ic^ "^ci^ cure riil^re relieve my heart, that I may move yours, er tuunfd}te gu regieren, nur bamit ber (S^ute ungel)tnbert gut fein moc^te he desired to rule only in order that the good might be able to be good without hindrance. The tense is governed by the requirements of the sense, generally according with that of the preceding verb. c.

In these, as in other constructions, the indicative

is

also

met

with, especially after bamtt: thus, U)a au(^ bie innlic^feit

ift whatever our sensuousness is impelled to do, bamit man bicje tabt einne!)men !ann that the city may be (wherewith it is able to be) captured, baj^ icber Quell Oerfiegt that every fountain may dry up (so that every fount sliall d^y up).

gu t^un gebrdngt


172
USES OP THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION.
[332-

subjunctive is used in a dependent substantive clause d. (generally after tia^ that) to denote something that is provided for or looked forward to, regarded as of probable, desirable, or suitable occurrence thus, er mu^te bleiben bi (or big ba^) bie glut^en [gluten] \\^ Derltefen he had to remain till the floods should
:

subside, e lag i^m baran, ba^ ber Sriebe ni(^t unterbroc^en

tt)erbe

he was anxious that the peace should not be broken, e

t)a^

gel^ort ftc^,

bag ^eburfnip [^ebiirfnig] befriebigt tDerbe

it is

proper

that the

want be satisfied. In some of its forms,

this construction passes over into that

of the subjunctive of indirect statement (see the next paragraph),

after verbs of wishing, anticipating,

and the

like.

[Exercise

28.

Subjunctive

as

Optative,

Conditional,

and

Potential.]

333.
1.

The Subjunctive of Indirect Statement.

By a construction which has only partial analogies in Engthe German subjunctive is often used to express a thought indirectly, as reported, recognized, or contemplated by some
lish,

one.

Thus, er antmortcte, er a^tt 5rtebri(6 unb miinjc^e ben grie= ben he answered that he esteemed Frederick and desired peace, \mx miff en !aum, mag ju tftun ]i\ we hardly know what is to be done, benft man er ge^e meg if one thinks he is going away, man fieftt glelcf), me^ inneg ber err f ei one sees at once of what mind
the master
is.

2. Such a subjunctive stands always in a (logically) dependent substantive clause. The use of this mode more fully subordinates the clause to the action of the verb in the other clause, upon which it depends, relieving the speaker from responsibility for it or concern with it.

3.

Verbs most often followed by the subjunctive of indirect

Verbs that signify imparting,
in

statement are especially

a.

every form, as statement,

report, assertion, confession, reminding,

b.

and the

like.

feeling, calling to

Verbs that signify apprehension, as perceiving, knowing, mind, imagining, concluding, and the Hke.

c. Verbs that signify contemplation with feelings of various kinds, as belief, doubt, dread, wonder, joy, sorrow, wish, hope.


333]

SUBJUNCTIVE OF mDIEECT STATEMENT.

173

Some of these verbs complicate the idea of indirectness with that of desire, doubt, or conditionality, as expressed by the subjunctive in its other uses.
d.

depends
fel^r

The verb upon which the clause of is sometimes unexpressed, being

bie ;^ateinec

indirect statement inferred from the

gu

connection: thus,
Begiinftigt
(it

murben

ftart derfolGt, tDcil jener fie

^aht
that)

was claimed

were severely persecuted, because he had favored them too much.

the Latins

noun of kindred meaning with the verbs above mentioned thus, au 33ef orgntB [^^ef orfltti^], ba6 er Unruften erregen tDcrbe out of apprehension that he would
e.

Or, the clause is dependent on a

:

stir

up disorders, unter bem SSormanb, cr {) a b e friifter befd)tr)oren aHe angugeigen under the pretext that he had earlier taken oath to denounce everything, bie ^ad)ri(^t, ha^ er fie in efdngni^ [(55e='

fcingniS] getDorfen

^abe

the

news

that he

had thrown them into

prison.
4. a. Eegularly and ordinarily, the verb in the indirect statement has the same tense as it would have if the statement were made directly, by the person and under the circumstances con-

templated. Thus, fie glaubten, ha^ e voaf^t f ei they believed that it was true (since they would have said ''we believe that it is true''); er ttnt==
tuortete, er
f

ei nic^t

gefommen,

(Sftriften feinblid)

angugreifen, fonbern

tt)erbe nur (SJetDalt mil (S^etDdt guriidheiben he answered, he

was
(''I

not

("I

am

not'')

come

to

attack Christians, but

would only

only") repel violence with violence; balb fragte man nidjt me'^r, mx mitgebe, fonbern n^er guriidbleibe soon it was no longer asked w1k> was going along (" who is going ? "), but who was staying (''who is staying?") behind; ic^ I)abe gen:)iinfd^t,er f olle fid) auf Sleifen begeben I have wished that he should betake himself to
shall

journeying.
b. Hence, the use of the present, perfect, and future subjunctive in indirect statement is much more frequent than that of the preterit and pluperfect and of the conditional. But
c.

The past tenses are used, when they would have been used

(either as indicative or as subjunctive) in the

statement

made

directly

thus,

cr uninfd)te,

bag

er

corresponding auf bem 33oben

tell

geblieben mdre he wished he

n)tffen, n)a

had remained

in the garret, mcr fann

ntd)t 3<^iTiiinb glaublid) fdube

who can

what some-

body might not think credible? be

rec^t gefd)dbe luenn
life

(Sjefiible^,

e bloji gefc^dbe

im Sebcn of the feeling that nothing in

baJ5 nid)t

would be done rightly

if

it

should be simply done.

174

tsEs

01*

a^HE

eorms o^ ooNJuaAHOi?.

[333*

is

Barely, on the other hand, a subjunctive of indirect statement forced out of the past tense which it should have into the

present, as the
construction.

more

usual: tense belonging to the indirect

d. Moreover, in a clause dependent on a verb of past tense, the subjunctive is quite often put in the past (as it always is in English), contrary to strict rule: thus, fieglaubteu e tDdrc (for fei) C>ci^nen^ef rfjrei they thought it was the crowing of cocks, jte frag-

ten o6
tliey

fie

re(^t

mii^te

(for

tutfje)

mx

i^r

Wann

tucirc (for

fei)

asked whether she really knew who her husband was, ging bei mir 3u Silat^ [9tat], oB ic^ fie medte (for merfe) t^k counsel with myself, whether I should wake her.
e.

which

This assimilation of the subjunctive in tense to the verb on it depends is, in general, much more common in the
careless

more

and

less dignified styles of writing,

and

in col-

loquial discourse, than in higher styles.

occasionally met with in every style, sometimes without special assignable cause, sometimes where a present subjunctive form would not
it is

But

be distinguishable from an indicative, or where a clause is dependent on another dependent clause, and needs to be
distinguished from the latter in construction: thus,
er Bot burc^

efanbte an, bie giirften moc^ten (for mogen, which would be in^ dicative as well) felbft entfc^eiben, tr)a er red)tmdig befd^e he offered through embassadors that the princes might themselves decide what he rightfully possessed.

may also be used in phrases similar to those mostly with an impUcation of actuality, as recogthus, roer toei^, lt)0 bir beln (^\Mt nized by the speaker also Blii^t who knows where thy fortune is blooming for thee (as it surely is blooming somewhere)? man mu^te glauben, ha^ er DoHig t)ergeffen toar one could not but believe that he was wholly forgotten, er t)ertt)etlte, bi er fi(^ iibergeugt IjatU, ha^ !eincr Don ben till he was persuaded that none of f einen j u r ii tf b It e b he delayed
5.

The

indicative

above

cited,

men was left behind. But the difference of implication is often very indistinct, and the choice between the two modes depends in part upon the
his

style used

too nice a use of the subjunctive in easy or col-

loquial discourse

would be thought

finical

and pedantic.

6. The elliptical use of the subjunctive of indirect statement with optative meaning, or to express a wish, has been referred that it to above (331.2): thus, o bafj fie emtg griinen bliebe


335]

OONDITIONAL.
to flourish !
[i.

175
mb(f)te,

might ever continue wish that .).

. .

e. id)

ba^

I should

7.

A past subjunctive tense is sometimes used interrogatively,

of questioning or disputing something supposed to have been asserted: thus, hn l^dtteft e Qefagt? bu l^aft mir ni(^t Qefafit [is it claimed tJiat] you have said so ? you have said yiothing to me, empfangen? that England had gaftfreunblid) ftdtte ^nglanb

by way

m^

received

me

Jiospltably

[Exercise 29.

Subjunctive of Indirect Statement.]

Conditional.

tenses are, in 334. preterits corresponding to the future as

conditional
tt)irb

The

form,

subjunctive
er

a present: thus,

about to love, er irerbe lieben he may he about to love, er tDiirbe Ueben he might oy would be about to love. Their proper significance, then, is that of contingent futurity, such a potentiality as may be signified by a tense past in form. In this they coincide (as appears from the rules and examples given above, 332) with the past subjunctive tenses, preterit and
Ueben he
is

pluperfect.
335. preterit
1.

In fact

The conditional corresponds in meaning with the and pluperfect subjunctive, being an admissible sub-

stitute for these tenses in

a.

some

of their uses.

Especially, in the conclusion (apodosis) of a complete

hypothetical period (332.1): thus, lebteft hn noc^, \^ tDiirbe bi(^ It e b e n t)on biefer Sett wert thou yet alive, I should love thee henceforth, !cine toiirbe lenfjam
in ber

oenuQ jein, menu tDU' blo^ fein^afein none would be manageable enough, if we were mei^ely aware of its presence in the hand. b. In a conclusion with condition only intimated (332.2e)

anb

ncn)a^r n)urben

thus, bie 35ogel tDiirben bann defter in meinen S^Jeigen bauen in that case (if this were so) the birds would build nests in

my

branches, prob' e lieber nic^t, benn bu njiirbej't gerfi^ellt ttjerben rather, do not try it; for (if thou didst try it) thou wouldst be

dashed in pieces.
c.

In a more strictly potential construction

5U me^ren ttiiirbe
]d)x
Getdt)rlid)

(332.3)

thus, \x^

fein to defend one's self seriously woidd be very dangerous, ba tDiirbe un gu tDeit that would lead us too far. ii 1^ r e n f
crnftUc^
2.

The use

of the conditional is

much

less frequent

than that

of the past subjunctive tenses in the constructions

above ex-

176
plained.

USES OF THE FOEMS OF CONJUGATION.

[335-

While the two are so nearly equivalent that the sub-

usually be put in place of the conditional, they are not absolutely identical in sense the conditional may sometimes be preferred where the idea of futurity is prominent (as in the first example above, under a) as also for formal reasons, where the subjunctive verb would not be plainly distinguished from an indicative (as in the first example under b).
junctive
;

may

336.

The

conditional is sometimes

employed

in

indirect

statement in place of the future subjunctive, in the same manner as a preterit subjunctive for a present (333.4:C?)that is to say, with the value of a past subjunctive to the future: thus, er tDu^te, ba biefe ^nerbietungen ben touggug nic^t aufl)alten U) ii r b e n (for tuerben, which would not be distinguishable from an indicative) he knew that these offers would not detain the
crusade.

Imperative.
337. The use of the imperative requires no explanation, being the same in German as in English.
a. With the proper imperative persons (the second persons singular and plural) the subject pronouns, bu and \t)x, may be either expressed or omitted if expressed, they follow the verb.
:

&.

For the use

of the present subjunctive as imperative in the

third persons singular

and plural and the first

plural, see 331.1c.

338. Besides the phrases mentioned at 243.1 as employed imperatively, the present, indicative, or the future indicative,

sometimes intimates a peremptory order, as if from one whose simple word is equivalent to a command the past participle has, elliptically (see 359.3), a similar force and the infinitive is used, dialectically or colloquially, with the same meaning (347.2).
; ;

Infinitive.

339.

The

infinitive is
its

uses grow out of

340.
1.

properly the verbal noun, and value as such.

all its

capable of use directly as a noun, other limiting words. Such a noun is always of the neuter gender (61.3c), and declined according to the first declension, first class (76) and, having the value of an abstract, it very seldom forms a plural. Thus, otteSldftern, Siiaen, ^Jiorben unb te^leti ftat iiber^anb Qenommen blasphemy, lying, murdering, and stealing have become
infinitive is

Any

either with or without

an

article or


343]
prevalent,

mPiNiTiVE.

177

ml^

ein %ppti\i

gum d)maufen what an appetite for

feasting

mit feinem Mfeli*^ ^oflidjen ru^en an he began again with his odiously polite greeting.
!

er fing tuieber

2. As the examples show, such a noun is more usually to be rendered by our verbal noun in ing (which we often call " participial infinitive," although in truth it is quite another word than the present participle); but also, not rarely, by other

verbal derivatives.
3. There are some nouns, originally infinitives, which are in such constant use as to have won an independent value as nouns such are SeBen Ufe, ntfe^en horror, ^^nbenfen memorial,
:

and so

on.

was
the

341. In German, as in English, the preposition gu to, which originally used only in its proper prepositional sense with

infinitive, governing the latter as it would govern any other noun under similar circumstances, has now become attached as

a kind of fixed accompaniment, or

great part of
its

sign, to the infinitive in

and therefore, in describing the different infinitive constructions, it becomes necessary to distinguish between the cases in which gu is employed and those in which
uses
;

it is

omitted.
T/ie Infinitive as subject

342.

of a verb.

gu, is often employed as the subject of a verb. Thus, mad^jen, groS unb alt merben, ba ifl ba eingig (^one to grow, to become big and old that is the only fine thing, xoo getaufc^t gu tDcrben ung '^eilfamer tt)ar where to be deceived was more ad-

The

infinitive, either

with or without

vantageous for lis, mitjolc^en tft nicf)t gut in ber^Jd^e tdmp^ixi fighting at close quarters with such men is not good, gefd^rlici) i]T ben Sen gu toerfen it is dangerous to wake the lion.
a.

The

infinitive as subject is in
gu.

the great majority of cases

accompanied by

b. More usually (as the examples show), the infinitive stands as logical subject, the verb taking in addition e it or ba that, or the like (especially the first), as impersonal or indefinite

grammatical subject (compare

343.
I.

295).

The

Infinitive as object, or

dependent on another verb.

The infinitive without gu is directly dependent on The various auxiliaries: as, merben, the auxiliary of the future and conditional tenses (240.2) I)al)en, the auxiliary of
1.
;


178
USES OP THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

343-

the perfect and pluperfect tenses, in the cases where the infinused instead of the past participle in forming those tenses (240.1c) the auxiliaries of mode (242.1) if)\in, when used as auxiliary in the sense of our do (242.3) laffen, as causative auxiUary (242.2) see below, 5.
itive is
; ;

2.
l}a\i

aBen

have, in certain phrases, with

(i. e.

gut reben that is easy to say

an adjective: thus, bu thou hast talking good, makest

ni(f)t

an easy
3.

thing of talking).

2!^un,

and a few other verbs, followed by

al

nothing

than, nothing but: thus, er t^at m6)i al fie anfrf)auen he did nothing hut look at her, e foftet m^\^ al bie emeinc fein fiir
[else]

aUc
4.

it

costs nothing but being the

common one for

all

thus, er ftatte ha^ utc learned to value what was good.

Semen learn:

toiirbiflen gelernt

he had

5. A number of verbs admit an infinitive in the manner of a second object, along with their ordinary object these are tjei^en call, bid, nennen call, lel^ren teach, !)elfen help, madden make, lajfen allow, cause, and a few that denote perception by the senses,
:

namely
Thus,

f eften

(and rarely f d)auen)

see, ^oren hear, \ixijkn feel,

and
him

finben find.
er l^et^t i^n tueber

Soften noc^

9Jlul)e

fparen he bids
l^eifet

spare neither expense nor labor, toag man what people call knowing, ba lel^rt un ob . . that teaches us to judge whether ^iiten we must help him tend his herd,
.
.

fo

erfennen

(nennt)

beurtfteilen
.

[beurteilen]

mx

miifjen il^m ftelfen

bie

greifteit

mad^t end)

[(J^njdrmen this freedom

iie^
tlie

makes you rave,

ber ott, ber if en tcac^fen

God who made iron grow,

er fiel^t fie erbletd^en

unb

finfen

Jin he sees her turn pale arid sink down, \^ finbe (5o|)I)a Itegen Ifind her lying on the sofa.

fie

auf

bem

a. With most of the verbs under this head, the object taken along with the infinitive has the logical value of a subject-accusative to the infinitive which is the nearest approach made in German to that construction, familiar in the classical tongues, especially in the Latin: thus, id) ]^ore \ia^ (^ra n)a(^fen I hear the grass grow signifies that the grass grows, and that I perceive it so doing. This construction, especially with fejen, l^oren, and laffen (and by far oftenest with the last), is followed out into a variety of other forms, some of them of a pecuhar and idiomatic character thus

b.

omitted,

The proper object of the governing verb is frequently and the infinitive then designates its action without

343]

INFINITIVE.
:

179

reference to any definite actor tlius, ic^ pre flopfen I hear [scymeone] knock (hear a knocking), la^t flingeln cause to ring (let the hell he rung), (ag iiberall fiir ba ^^reugfteer in ben ^trc^en beten cause to pray for the C7'usading army everywhere in the churches
(let it

he prayed for).
tlien, tlie infinitive itself talies

c. If,

tion is equivalent to one in

an object, the construcwhich that object is directly de;

pendent upon the governing verb, and is the subject-accusative of the infinitive taken as an infinitive passive and it is generally best so rendered thus, i^ :^i3re eu(^ ieben %aQ ^reifen I hear you to he praised evay day (hear [them] praise you), er lie^ bie
:

brei Ulinge fiir einen

place of one (caused to

mad)en he caused the three rings make them).

to he

made

in

d. That the construction has in fact, in the apprehension of those who use the language, been virtually converted into a passive one, and the real object of the infinitive transferred to the governing verb, is shown by the circumstance that that object, when designating the same person or thing with the subject of the verb, is expressed by the reflexive instead of the personal pronoun thus, er moflte fid) nid)t ^alten (affen he would not let himself he held (instead of would not allow [any 5ne] to hold him), \ia^ Id^t f i ^ '^oren that lets itself he heard (i. e. is worth hearing), al er fid) eltca^ t)DrIcfen Ue as he was having something read aloud, to himself, er la^t oft Don fid) Ijoren he lets himself he often heard from, (lets [ms*] often hear from him). Occasionally, the logical object of laffen is even added in the form of a thus, fie lie^en fid) b u r d) bie '^a&^t prepositional adjunct nid)t abl)alten they did not suffer themselves to he restrained hy the gwardsinstead of fie lie^en bie "^a^z fie nid)t abl^alten they did not suffer the guards to restrain them.
:

6.

Special

and more anomalous cases are

an

infinitive

in the sense of a present participle after bleiben remain: thus, fie biieben im Staffer fteden they remained sticking in the water;

and

Itegen he has

after ^aben with a direct object thus, er ftat SBeiii im teller an infinitive of purpose wine lying in his cellar
:

(below, III.l) without gu in a few phrases as, la^ fie betteln gebn let them go hegging ! er legt fic^ fd)Iafen he lays himself down to
:

sleep;

andfpajieren
I ride,

to he

out for pleasure or exercise (expatiate)

after a verb expressing the kind of

ge^e f])a3ieren
drive, or

motion as, ic^ walk out for pleasure.

:

reitc, faftre,

180
II.
1.

USES OF THE EOKMS OF CONJUGATION.

[343-

The

infinitive

with

311

is

often construed as a direct object

As the

sole object of a considerable

number

of verbs, es-

whose action points forward to something as to be attained or done for example, such as signify begin, unpecially of verbs
:

dertake, endeavor, venture, plan, hope, desire, promise, refrain and some others.
2.

Along with an indirect personal

object, with verbs signify-

ing

command,

permit, impute, forbid,

Thus,

er fieBot

mir

gii

fi^njeigen

he

and the like. commanded me

to

remain

silent, bie

no

2Bad)e eriaubt 31iemanben tjorsutreten the guard allows one to step forward.

III.

The

infinitive

with gu

is

construed in the manner of an

indirect object
1.

To express the purpose

3ftdt:^fel [3^dtfel]

bin md}t ha
bie D[Reere

gu

Ii3fen

or design of an action thus, t(J) lam not here to solve riddles,

:

311

Befreien, foflten aHe Scinber eroBert ttjerben to

free the

seas, all lands

were

to he

subdued.

a. This comes nearest to the original and proper purpose of an infinitive with ju to, in order to, for to. The same meaning is conveyed more explicitly by prefixing um (see below, 346.1).
h.

"feie infinitive

stands thus often after

fetn to

he

and
:

ftet)en

stand, with the logical value of

tuar fo
t)iele 311 fe'^cn

an

infinitive passive

thus, ba

there

was

so

much

there to he seen (so

much

for seeing, as object for

sight).

This construction in itself evidently admits of either an active or a passive interpretation, according as the thing mentioned is put forward as subject or object of the verbal action conveyed by the infinitive. German usage merely adopts the latter
alternative.
c. aBen, with a following infinitive and gu, also sometimes forms a phrase in which what is properly the object of ^abzn is regarded and treated as if dependent on the other verb thus,
:

5aBen ben (^^orfo gu Befc^reiben we have to describe the Corso (have Che Corso for describing, or as theme for description); the object may even be omitted, or an intransitive infinitive employed, leaving to !^aben simply the idea of necessity thus, er ^at ntd^t me^r gu fiirc^ten he no longer has [aught] to fear.
n)ir

2. In other relations such as are ordinarily expressed by a remoter object, or a prepositional phrase having the value of such an object, after verbs intransitive or transitive thus, al^
:

345]
er

INFINITIVE.

181

iam gu fterBen when he came to die (to dying), ha treiBf i!)n, ben ^rei gu ermerBen then he feels impelled to gain thepii-ze, man 9e= lt)oI)nt e ftill 5U fte'^en ^^ is trained to stand still, m^t barf x^ bir au Qleic^en mi(^ t)ermefien /ma?/ not presume to be like thee, tDirfreucn
un, ba gu

Wren

w;e rejoice at hearing that, er rul^t

iiic^t

bie

tabt

SU t)ersieren he ceases (rests) not to adorn the city, ba (^ebrdnge flinbert i^n gu flie^cn the crowd forbids (hinders) him to fly.

though

infinitive in this construction, often has the value of a dative, which its governing preposition gu to best fits it to fill, is also sometimes used in
it

As the examples show, the

the manner of a from relation).

genitive, or of

an "ablative" (expressing the

[Exercise
344.

30.

The

Infinitive as Subject and Object.]

The

Infinitive as adjunct to

an

Adjective.

1. always with its sign gu, is used as limiting adjunct especially to adjectives denoting possibility, ease or difficulty, obligation, desire, readiness, and the like to such, in general, as point forward, to something to be attained or done.

The

infinitive,

Thus,
lieren

bereit

ben

^fetl)er

gn burc^bringen

ready

to

penetrate the
gu
t)er*

ether, leic^t gu frf)affen easy to obtain, bange, feinen

(^mud

afraid of losing his adornment.

2. Many adjectives when qualified by gu too or genug, etc. enough, sufficiently, become capable of taking an infinitive as adjunct thus, mdrf)ttg genug, bie grogtcn ^l)iere [^tere] gu tobten
:

[tbten]

poiuerful enough

to kill

the largest animals, gu flein ben

3ftaum gu fiiden too small to fill the space.

But

after gu

and an

adjective, the infinitive

governed by um
with
al^

(346.1),

or an
is

than that

awkward and more frequent.

illogical construction

ha^

Compare the power to govern a dative given to an adjective by the same quahfying words (223.5) the cases are plainly analogous, the gu in such infinitive combinations having its
;

proper prepositional
345.

force.

The

Infinitive as adjunct to

a Noun.

The infinitive, always accompanied by gu, is often dependent upon a noun. The cases of such infinitives may be classified under three
heads

182

USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

[345-

1. The governing noun is one related in meaning to the verbs and adjectives already specified as admitting a dependent in-

finitive

misswn to plunder
to rise

thus, (Jrlaubni^ [@rlaubnt] ben 53aum gu |)Iunbern verthe tree, o^nc ^offnung aufgufte^en without hope
bie 33eaierbe,
fie

again (of rising),

gu

tt)ec!en

the desire to

awaken

her, ben 33orjd)Iag, feine fil^ne aBgufenben the

proposal

to

send off his sons.

2. The preposition gu has nearly its proper meaning as connecting the infinitive with the noun: thus, 3eit, fic^ gu ergo^en time to please one's self (for pleasing), Wntl) [DJ^ut], mi(^ in bie SBelt gu tnagen courage for venturing into the world, ber ^ugenblid

gu reben the
3.

moment for

talking.

a genitive, most often a genitive of equivalence (216.2e), or has the logical value of an added exinfinitive represents
(5(^lt)a(^^eit, jebem gu each one, ein efii^I be 58erbtenfte, biefe gauge ^'o^z au^gufiillen a feeling of the merit of filling out this whole height.
:

The

planation of the governing noun

Derfpred^en the

thus, bie
to

weakness of promising

These
other.

classes,

however, variously cross and pass into each

346.
1.

The

Infinitive governed by

a Preposition.

Only three prepositions namely, um in order, o^ne without, are allowed in German directly to govern ftatt or anftatt i'nstead the infinitive (preceded by its sign gu).

at the beginning of the infinitive clause, prethe words dependent on or limiting the infinitive, which stands last, always with gu next before it, and which is

They are placed

all

ceding

ordinarily to be rendered (except after um) by our infinitive in ing: thus, iebermann fommt, um gu |e!)en ober gefe^en gu merben every one comes in order to see or to he seen, o^ne euc^ ft^mer gu t)er!Iagen without accusing you sorely, anftatt aber bie I)ieburd)
ergeugte giinftige

timmung

gu benu^en instead, however, of im-

proving the favorable

2.

state of

mind

thus brought about.

quired, the infinitive clause

when a similar expression is rerepresented beforehand by a ba or bar in composition with the preposition, and then itself follows, as if in apposition with this ba.
With other
prepositions,
is

Thus, fie maren nabe b ar an, auf ibn gu treten tlwy luere near to treading on him (near to this viz. to tread on him), htVda1i)xit m\6)

b a

t)

r,

bie

Matter an ben ^ufen

fetbft

gu legen saved

me from

348]
laying the adder to

INFINITIVE.

183

my own
\\6)

brangen barauf,
to the right.

red^t gu

bosom (from thisviz. to lay etc.), fie wenben they insisted on turning

a. Such a phrase as they insisted on his turning to the rights where the subject of the action signified by the participial infinitive is different from that of the verb with which this is connected by the preposition, cannot be expressed in German by an

infinitive:

for the infinitive clause is substituted a complete

(436.3cZ),

substantive clause
thus,
fie

with a personal verb and

follte

its

subject

on

this

brangcn barauf, ^a^ er fi(^ re(i)tg tDenben that he should turn to the right.

they insisted

347.

The

Infinitive in Absolute Constructions.

1. In various elliptical constructions, chiefly analogous with such as are usual in English also, the infinitive stands without being dependent on any other word thus, tt)arum mid) mdtn why awaken me? a^\ auf ha^ mut^icje [mutige] 3fto mic^ gu fd)tt)ingen oh, to leap upon a spirited horse ! o (^one 33ilb, gu f el^en .oh f
:

beautiful picture! to see ...

to

mention other outrages

2.

anbercr 3ret)el nid)t gu gebenfen not and so on.

,

By a usage not

finitive is colloquially

authorized in good German style, an inused with an imperative meaning thus,

:

ha bleiBen stay there!

348.
Infinitive Clauses.

The infinitive used directly as a noun (340) has the con1. struction of an ordinary noun. But in its proper use as infinitive it shares in the construction of the verb of which it forms a part,
taking the same adjuncts whether predicate, object, adverb, or prepositional phrase as the personal forms of the verb thus

forming often extended and intricate infinitive clam^es, which have the logical value of full substantive clauses, and are exchangeable with such.
Thus, man
fd)eint,
ift

befi^aftigt,

ba fd)one ^flafter,

tt)o

e^ abgutt)et(5^en

mieber neu in tanb gu fe^en people are occupied with setting the nice pavement newly in order again, ivJierever it seems
to be giving

way, or man

ift

bamit bef^dftigt, ba^

man
;

in

tanb
2.

fefet.

As a
it.

rule,

in general,

whatever

the infinitive stands last in such a clause and, is dependent on ^a infinitive is placed

before


184
a.

USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION.

[348-

See the examples already given. When two or three income to stand together, each precedes the one it depends on, in the reverse of the EngUsh order thus, i^r ^abt mt(^ ermorben laffen tt)oEen you have wanted to cause to murder me (have me murdered). But an infinitive used as participle (240.1c) allows nothing to follow it, and an auxiliary infinitive must be placed before it: thus, \^i tuerbet m6) t}ab en ermorben Compare 439.2. laffen iDoIIen you will have wanted etc.
finitives
:

[Exercise 31.

Infinitive as Adjunct and with Preposition.]

Partidxiles.

349. The participles are properly verbal adjectives, their uses and constructions are those of adjectives.

and

all

350. The present participle has active force, representing in adjective form the exerting of an action, or the continuing of a state or condition, in the same way as this is represented by the present tense of the verb.

Thus, ber

reifenbe

^aler

the travelling painter

(i. e.

the painter

who travels),

eine lieBenbe 50^utter

a loving

motlier.

a. In rare cases, and by a license which is not approved, a present participle is used passively thus, eine melfenbe ^nt^ (eine ^u'^ tt)el(^e gemelft trtrb) a milking cow (a cow that is milked), bie Doriabenbe 3fieife (bie 9leife bie man l^or^at) the intended journey (the journey which one has before him), ber betreffenbe $un!t the point concerned.
:

351. 1. The past participle of a transitive verb has passive meaning, without any distinct implication of past time.

Thus, ba geliebte ^inb the beloved child, i. e. the child whom one has loved, or loves, or will love, according to the connection in which the term is used.
a. But such a participle, from a verb denoting a single act rather than a continuous action, may sometimes be used with a past meaning: thus, ba gefloftlene ^ferb the stolen horse, ber fletrunfene SBein the imbibed wine.

ing,

The past participle of an intransitive verb has active meanand is for the most part employed only in the formation of the compound tenses of the verb. But
2.

a.

The past

participle of

(241.2)

may be used

adjectively, with

a verb taking fein as its auxiliary a distinctly past meaning

354]

PAKTICIPLES.

185

thus, ber GefdHcnc 6(f)nee (ber (^(^nee,

H)el(^cr Qef alien tft) the fallen

snow.
3. Many words have the form of past participles, but the value of independent adjectives, either as having a meaning which would not belong to them as participles, or as being divorced from verbs both in form and meaning, or as derived from verbs which are no longer in use as verbs, or as seeming to imply verbs which have never been in use.

Thus, gclet)rt learned, befannt hiwwn, t)erbroffen listless itx^aBen lofty (erftoben raised), gebiefienp^^re, sterling (aebte^en thriven); )dzx\io\)\in furtive, t)erjd)ieben different; <^t\\xmi starry, beial^rt
aged.
a.

Such past

participles
:

have not rarely assumed the value

of present participles

thus, Derfd^mteQen silent, t)erbient deserving,

beforgt anxious, |)fli(^tt)ergeffen duty-forgetting.

352. The future passive participle, as has been already noticed (278), is formed only from transitive verbs, and is not used

otherwise than attributively.

Thus, bie 9tDlIe einer auf feme SBeife gu Beru!)t(^enben ^^xau the part of a woman wJio was in no way to be pacified, bte gleic^geittg angutretenben ^ilgerfa'^rten the pilgrimages to be entered upon at the same timehut bie grau ift auf feine 2Bei)e gu Beru^igen the

woman is in no way

to

be pacified (343.III.16).

353. The present participle is used freely as an attributive, and hence also, like other attributive adjectives, as a substantive but it is rarely employed as a predicate.
;

Thus, bie jpielenben Siiftc^en the sporting breezes, er tt)e(fte ben c^lummernben he awoke the sleeper (slumbering one), ha triis genbe 35ilb lebenber gutte the deceiving show of living f^dness, in
ber

anb

be (^reibenben ober 3Jlalenben in the

hand of the writer

or painter.
a. But there are a number of present participles which have assumed the value and character of adjectives, and admit of

predicative use

for example, reigenb charming, ^inrei^enb ravish-

ing, Bebeutenb important.

b. Such constructions as our he is loving, they were going, though not unknown in ancient German, are no longer in use.

354.

The past
:

participle (except of

an intransitive having

I)aben as auxiliary

see 351.2)

is

commonly employed both attrib-

186
utively
like

USES OF THE FOKMS OF CONJUGATION.

[354-

and predicatively, and may be used as a substantive, any other adjective.

Thus, bic berlorene ^txi the hst time, in mxQ tDieberftolter eftalt in ever repeated form, gcbt ben ^efangenen lebig set free tlw prisoner (imprisoned one).
355. Both participles admit of comparison, or form a comparative and superlative degree, only so far as they lay aside the special character of participles, and become adjectives.

S3ilb the

Thus, bebeutenbcrc nmmen more important sums, most majestic image.

t)a^ erl^abenfte

356. As adverbs they are used rather sparingly, except those which have assumed the value of adjectives.

Thus,
ben

auge3et(^net gelel^rt exceedingly learned,

i'^re

fiebenb

fieife

boiling hot, entgudenb oft ravishingly often,

35Iatter their

gefenft jc!)Iummerns

droopedly slumbering leaves.

Both participles are, especially in higher styles of com357. position, very commonly used appositively (110.1&), either alone,
or with limiting adjuncts such as are taken by the personal

forms of the verb.

Thus, ber TOe fa^ !opffcf)uttelnb nieber the old man looked dmvn, shaking his head; f(^lafenb ^atte jte mir fo gef alien she had so
pleased

me sleeping;
gifts,

l^errlid^e

ing splendid
biefe iefet
't)a^

they appear;

^aben befd)erenb erfd)etnen fie bestowbem 33ei]'ptele folgcnb, empfingen

egenben
t)orau3te!)enb,

ba ^reug following the example, these now took the cross;

t)atte,

eer

buri^ fruc^tbare

unb

reid)Ud^

mit SebenSmitteln Jjerforgt, bie ^rau erreid)t the army, moving on through fruitful regions and abundantly supplied with provmons,

had reached the Drave; \^ bin ctn Sreunb uon (SJefc^ic^ten, gut er= Sdlblt I cirii fond of stories, well told; x\o^ lefen uniflort bie ^lugen
bie ;3nf^rift nic^t

my

eyes,

dimmed with

inscription;

ic^ fntete

nieber, t)on

grief, do not yet read the SieV unb ^nbac^t gang burd)ftra^Iet

kneeled down, quite irradiated with love and devotion; t)om tein animated by the chisel, the feeling stone speaks; icf) berlie^ fie tDeinenb Ileft her weeping.
^O^ei^el befeelt, rebet ber fii^lenbe
a. Such a participle or participial phrase is used only in the sense of an adjective clause, and expresses ordinarily an accompanying circumstance, or describes a state or condition it may not be used, as in English, to signify a determining cause, or otherwise adverbially in such phrases as not finding him, I went away, walking uprightly, we walk surely^ having saluted
; :

360]

PABTICIPLES.

187

him, we retired, full adverbial clauses must be substituted for the participial phrases: thus, ha t^ x^n ni(!)t fanb; tuenn toir
aufric^tig tcanbeln
b.
j

nad^bem mt

iftn

begrii^t fatten.

Rarely, however, the participle approaches a causative force: thus, bte befur(i)tenb, tbhkk Ltotete] er ben ^Beauftragten fearing this, he slew the messenger. Compare also 431.d
358. The participial clause follows the same rule of arrangement as the infinitive clause (348.2) namely, the participle regularly and usually stands last, being preceded by all that limits it or is dependent on it.
:

a.

This rule

is

without exception, when the participle

:

is

used

attributively (compare 147.2); in the appositive clause, the participle not very rarely stands first thus, ber britte, mit ben
frofteften

mit feltener 0ufi6eit gefii^rtc ^reuggug the third criisade, begun with the gladdest hopes, conducted with rare prudence; in ben Sbeen ber franjofifi^en Um-

offnunoen

beaonnene,

tt)dlgung ern)ad)]en, rein

ge^alten t)on il)ren 35erbre(5^en, begabt mit

ber etftefldrfe

kept free from

359.

its

the ideas of the French revolution, crimes, gifted with the strength of mind
.
.

grown up in

Special Uses of Participles.

1.

The past
:

participle is

used in the sense of a present

one or two verbs of motion, to express the mode of motion thus, f o fam ^^dufig ein Oafe angefprnngen a hare often came jumping along, :^eulenb fommt ber turm gefloQen the howling storm comes flying.
participle, after

used

After a verb of calling, a past participle is occasionally in an infinitive sense thus, ba ftei^t auc^ fiir bie Su'^unft Qeforgt that I call (is called) caring for the future also.
2.
:

3. By an elliptical construction, a past participle has sometimes the value of an imperative thus, ins x^dh, in bie ^retl^ett QCjogen march forth (let tliere be marching) into the field, to freedom! ben UlajDpen gegdumt [have] the steed bridled! See 230. 3c.
:

[ExEBCisE

32.

Participles.]

INDECLINABLES.
tion, or

There are three classes of words not admitting inflecgrammatical variation of form indicating change of relation to other words, and which are therefore called indeclinables, or particles, These three are adverbs, prepositions, and

360.


188
cjoNJUNcnoNS.

INDECUNABLES.

[360extent,

the
fit-

They pass over into one another, to some same word having often more than one oflSce.

which fall properly into by itself a complete (abbreviated) expression, affirming or denying a thought as already expressed by another.

3a

yes

and min no are

particles

no one

of the classes mentioned, each being

ADVERBS.
361. Adverbs are words qualifying verbs and adjectives, as also other adverbs, and defining some mode or circumstance of

the 'action or quality signified by those parts of speech.

In certain exceptional cases, adverbs qualify prepositions

also
:

see 369.1.

362.

Adverbs may be
of

classified according to their

meaning as
1.

Adverbs

manner and quaUty:

:

as,

bUnbling^ blindly,
alf o thus.

trcult(^ faithfully, t)oflenb

2.

completely, anber^ otherwise,

Adverbs of measure and degree wholly, faum scarcely, gu too, fel)r very.
3.

as, beina^c almost, gdnglic^

Adverbs of place and motion:

as,

as,

I)ier

here, hoxt yonder,

fjn hither, ^in hence, em|)or up, red)t to the right,

4. Adverbs of time already, tnhW^ finally,
:

m^

away.

then, einft once, oft often, jd^on nie iiever, ^eute to-day.

bann

5. Adverbs of modality, or such as Umit not so much the thought itself as its relation to the speaker, or show the logical relation between one thought and another thus, affirmative, ; ^iixwaijX assuredly, aIIerbtnQ by all means negative, nii^t not, ; !eniett)efl by no meaiw potential, \)kM^t perhaps, tt)a^r}(i)emcausal, ba^er therefore, xoaxnm. for what reason. \\^ probably;
:

a.

This last
:

is

a transition class between adverbs and conjunc-

tions

see 385.

h. These leading divisions may be very variously subdivided, nor are their own limits precise or absolute. The relations expressed by adverbs are almost as indefinitely various as those expressed by adjectives, and are in like manner incapable of

distinct and exhaustive classification. Hence it is of equal or greater importance to note their various derivation, to which

we next

pass.

363]

ADVERBS.

189

363.
1.

Adverbs from Adjectives,

all adjectives

Almost

in

German admit

of use also

as adverbs, in their nninflected or thematic form (see

130).
a.

Exceptions are

the articles and pronominal and numeral

;

further, most participles having their erft) proper participial meaning (356); and a few others, as arm, gram, todtjx, from which derivative adverbs have been formed by means of endings (below, 3).

adjectives (except

h. In an earlier condition of the language, the adjective when used as adverb had an ending of inflection. A relic of this ending is the e of lange long (adj. lang long), and that of gerne, feme, ja(^te, flille, and a few others, which are now more commonly used without e.

2.

positive

Adjectives are thus used as adverbs both in the and the comparative degree ; but only rarely

in the superlative.
a.

Superlatives that are employed as adverbs in their simple

meift,

form are

Idngft,

iiingft,

tta(f)ft,

^o^ft/

ciu^erft,

innigft, frcunbli^ft, ^^erjlii^ft,

fliitigft,

gefafligft,

and a few

mogli^ft, others.

b. Instead of the simple adjective, is commonly used in the superlative an adverbial phrase, composed of the adjective with preceding definite article and governed by a preposition, an or

auf

more

rarely, in or ^u

(compare the similar treatment of the

superlative as predicate, 140.2b).

Thus, tt)a am meiften in bte ^lugen fiel what most struck the eye, ba ^t^rb, ha^:) fic^ geftern am fcf)Ie(^teften geftalten the horse that behaved worst yesterday; man mu^ fie auf befte ergte^en one must bring them up in the best possible manner, er bot burc^ ^e= fanbte auf I)ofIicf)fte an he offered most courteously through ambassadors; erren nic^t im minb'ften eitel gentlemen not in the least
vain; ha
the first).
c. Of the phrases formed with am and auf, respectively, the former are used when there is direct comparison made, and eminence of degree above others is signified (superlative relative) the latter, when general eminence of degree, without comparison, is intended (superlative absolute compare 142.1) im and gum are used with certain adjectives, in special phrases.
;
:

tra} er

sum

erften

%^xt)m then he smote Tlirym first (for

100
d.

mDECLINABLES.

[363-

Many superlatives form a

:

derivative adverb with the end-

ing en
3.

see below,

3c.

comparatively small number of adverbs are

formed from adjectives by means of derivative endings a. 2t(^ (our ly, originally the same word with like) forms a number of derivative adjectives from adjectives, nouns, and
participles

and of these a few (fifteen or twenty) nre used only with adverbial meaning examples are fretltc^, neultcf), fd^U)erIt(i),
;
:

fid)erli(^, Ireulicf), tDa^rlid^, foIfiUc^, l^offentIi(^.

h.

Six or eight adverbs are formed from adjectives (or nouns)

:

by the ending ItnG thus, BIinbltncj blindly, f (^rtttltnQg step by The of this suffix is originally a genitive ending. step.
c.

The
all

suffix en

forms adverbs from

:

many

superlatives,

and

from

thus, beften in the best manner, tx\kn firstly, geftntenS tenthly; also from iibrig, uBrigen moreover.

the ordinal adjectives

The

en of this suffix is

which a genitive

an ending of adjective declension, to has become farther attached, irregularly.

:

d. The simple genitive ending forms adverbs from a small number of adjectives and participles thus, Iinf o?i tJie left,
16crett

already, anberg otherwise, eilenb hastily, iDcrgebeng vainly, 3ufel)enb visibly; t)oIIenb completely is a corruption of boKenS.
e. A few other derivatives are too irregular and isolated to require notice here.

364.
1.

Adverbs from Nouns.

It(i)

Besides the few adverbs formed from nouns by the suffixes and ling? (above, 363.3a,&), there is also a small number formed by the simple genitive ending as, anf ang in the begin;

ning, flug in haste,

in part, nad)t in the night. With these are to be compared the adverbial genitives of nouns, either without or with a limiting word, noticed at 220.1.
tftetig

[teil]

2. A considerable number of adverbs of direction are formed from nouns and prepositions by the suffix n)drt (by origin, the genitive case of an adjective tt)drt turned, directed): thus, auf= tt)art upward, oftmdrta eastward, l^immelmartS heavenward.

365.
1.

Adverbs by combination.

jective,

Combinations of a noun and a limiting word (article, adpronominal adjective even adverb), which, from being adverbial phrases, have become fused together into one word.

367]

ADVEKBS.

191

a. Such are of every oblique case, most often genitives, least often datives, but not infrequently with irregular endings or inserted letters.

Examples are
no

grofetentl^eil

[gro^tenteilg] mostly, !elnett)eg in

wise, bergeftalt in such wise, aHent^alBen everywhere, aKeseit always, jebenfaflS in any event, einmal once, m\mal often, abtx^'

mal again.
h. Certain nouns are thus used with especial frequency, forming classes of compound adverbs such are ing, 5^^/ &(il^^/
:

9J^aI,

Wa% 6eite, %\)t\\

[2eil], 2BeQ, SBeile, 2eifc.

2. Combinations of a preposition with a following or preceding noun, or with a following adjective. These are also fused ad-

verbial phrases.

Examples are
tDeilen

untertDcg^

sometimes,
hill,

bergab dx)wn
verily,
3.

way, ab^anben out of reach, guin general, tnbeficu meanwhile; ftromauf np stream; guerft at first, \mvoa\)i
the
iiBer^au^jt

on

Combinations of adverbs with adverbs or prepositions^

;

more proper compounds. These are very numerous, and various

in kind
a.

one or two classes require to be especially noticed

Combinations with the words of general direction or motion, such as are also used as compound prefixes to verbs;
see 298.2.

Combinations of prepositions with the adverbs ba or bar, or tDor, and Ine or I)i:r, used commonly as equivalents for the cases of pronouns governed by those j repositions (see
h.
tt)0

154.2,3

166.4

173.2

180),

with a demonstrative, an interrog-

ative, or

a relative value.
Adverbs of obscure derivation. adverbs which appear like simple words are traceable

366.

Many

to combinations analogous with those explained above. Examples are jmar to be sure (^\ tcare in truth), nur only (ni n)are were it not), fonft else (\o ne \\i so it be not), );)t\xit to-day
rtiu tagu
(ntc me"^r

on

this day), nie

never

(m

ie

not ever), nimmer never

never more),

ni(^t

not fne-mil^t no aught).

367.

Original Adverbs.

Besides the classes already treated of, there remain a number of adverbs which, though in part demonstrably forms of inflection of pronominal

and other words, may be practically regarded

classes of these

as original.

The most important

are


192
1.

INDECLINABLES.

[367-

The simple adverbs

or

Bei, burc^, in

ein, oB, urn, t)or,

of place or directi n, ab, an, auf, aua, juj these are all of them com-

monly employed as prepositions, but retain their adverbial value especially as prefixes to verbs (298.1).
2.

Derivatives from pronominal roots

thus
bar, banti, benn,

a.

from the demonstrative root

(in

ber) ba,

bort, beflo, bo(i).

b.
c.

from the interrogative root (in tt)er) from an obsolete demonstrative root

tt)te,

hi

tPO, tDcnti, tt)ann.

]^ie,

^m,

l)er, I)tn,

l^inter.
3.

Farther derivatives from these classes, with adverbial or

prepositional
ober

and

tt)annen,
a.

meaning thus, from in, inne and tnnen from oB, and iiBen from bann, \oann, and l)in, bannen, and pitmen and so on.
:

oBen, iiber

In several cases, forms in er and en stand related to one another as corresponding preposition and adverb thus, iiBer
:

and

iiBen, Winter

and

l^inten,

au^er

and

au^en, unter

and

unten.

368.

Comparison of Adverbs.

Adverbs, as such, do not generally admit of comparison: comparative and superlative adverbs, so-called, are for the most part comparative and superlative adjectives used adverbially.
a.

Only

oft

often

forms
ere,

ofter

and

i3fteft;

and

e^e (itself

used

only as conjunction,

or in a few compounds, as e^ebem, with

efter

prepositional force) forms

b.

and om

e^eften.

only as adverbs have corresponding forms of comparison from other words, adjectives for example,
:

A few words now used

am

Qcrn willingly has lieBer,

c.

IteBften,

from HeB

dear.

Adverbs whose meaning calls for such treatment may, form a kind of degrees of comparison with meBr more and am meij'ten most, or other qualifying adverbs of similar meaning thus, mel^r red)t mxrre to the right, am meiften DoriDartg
rarely,
:

farthest forward.
369.
1.

Certain special uses of Adverbs. qualify prepositions

Some adverbs

or,

rather, preposiin ben

tional phrases of adverbial

meaning

thus,

mitten um ben i3eiB

blood,

midway about the body, baB er Beftdnbe Bi auf0 ^lut, B i ^ob bte t^e^be that he might maintain his quarrel even to
even unto dedth.

371]
2.

ADYERBS.

19S

Adverbs are not seldom governed by prepositions: see

below, 378.
3.

Adverbs are used

elliptically

with the value of adjectives

thus, biefer 50^ann l^ier this man here, (SJraber unb bie ^t)preffen or, in predicative relabran graves and the cypresses thereon

the evening was past, btc urn the years are not yet over, a(le foil anberg fein unb Qejc^marfDoII everything is to he otherwise, and tasty, \\i fein 5D^orber mel^r untertt)ege is there no longer a murderer on the way ? aller SCSetteif er tt)trb ijergeben^aZi emulation becomes futile, id) f a^ D^ebel todi u m !) e r I saw mist far
tions,

nun

tt)ar

ber

^benb t)orbet now

3al^re

finb no(^

nidjt

about.
4.

An adverb

is

often

added

after

a preposition and

its object,

to complete or to

make more

distinct the relation expressed

by

the preposition

see below, 379.

370.
1.

Place of Adverbs,

An

adverb precedes the adjective or adverb

wliicli

it qualifies.
a.

Except genUQ enough, which, as in English, follows the

it

word

Umits.

2. An adverb qualifying a personal verb is put after it in the regular arrangement of the sentence one qualifying an infinitive or participle is placed before it.
;

As to the place of the adverb in relation to other adjuncts of the verb, see 319 as to certain adverbial words which have exceptional freedom of position, see 385.4.
;

PREPOSITIONS.
A preposition is a word used to define the relation be371. tween some person or thing and an action, a quahty, or another person or thing with which it stands connected.
a. The distinctive characteristic of a preposition is that it governs an oblique ca^e of a noun (or of the equivalent of a noun) and by this it is separated from an adverb it is a kind of transitive adverb, requiring an object in order to the completion of the idea which it signifies. Many words are either adverbs or prepositions, according as they are used without or with such object.
;
:

194
b.

INDECLINABLES.

[371-

Many

of the

German

prepositions are of late formation

from nouns or adjectives, or from adverbial phrases containing such. Some examples of these will be noted below.
Prepositions are most conveniently classified according to the case they govern, as the genitive, the dative, the accusative, and the dative or accusative.
372.
a. A few govern either the dative or genitive, but their difference of use in this respect is not of consequence enough to found a class upon.

373. Prepositions governing the genitive are anftatt or ftatt instead of, f)aI6er or :^al6en for the sake o/ with the compounds of l^alb, namely au^erl)al6 without, outside, inner^alb within, oBcr= "ijoib above, unter^alb below txa^i in virtue of, Idngg along, laut

according

to,

trofe

in spite

of,

urn

trillen

on account

of,

unge-

a^ki

(or oI)nGea(^tet) notwitJistanding, unfern

mittelft

and unmeit

7iot

far

from, mxikk or

by means of, t)ermofie by dint of, xoa\)xtnh during, m^^m on account of, guf olfle in consequence of, and the compounds of jeit, biefjeit or bicffeit^ on this side of, and jenfeit or jenfeitS on the further side of, beyond (cf. also 152.2). Thus, ftatt ber golbnen Sieber instead of the golden songs, um biefer fremben S^ugen l^illen on account of these stranger witnesses,
or
t)ermittel[t

^enugt:^uung megen ber getobteten

[getoteten]

S^rifteu satisfaction

on account of
forest.

the slain Christians, jenfeit be gorfteS

beyond the

a. Of these prepositions, ldng, tro^, and gufolge also not infrequently govern the dative some others do so occasionally.
;

b.

al6en or '^alber always follows the

noun it governs um
;

takes the noun between its two parts ungeQ(f)tet, tnegen, and pfolge may either precede or follow (gufolge precedes a genitive, but follows a dative). c. These prepositions are of recent use as such, and all evidently derived from other parts of speech. alb is a noun
tDilIen
;

meaning
is still in

originally side; megen occasional use.

was formerly Don

tDcgen,

which

d. The adverbial genitives ^Ingefi(%t -in presence and ^e()uf in behalf, the adverbs tnmitten in the midst, aBfctt aside, and some of those formed with vo'dxt^, as (eittx)drt sideways, noxhmxi^ northwards, also entlang along, and a few others, antiquated or of rare occurrence, are sometimes used prepositionally with a

genitive.

375]

PEEPOSITIONS.

195

The prepositions governing the dative are, of more an374. cient and original words, au out, bet by, mit with, oh above, for,
t)on of,

guto; of recent and derivative or

compound words,

nad) after, to, feit siiwe, gleid) like, fammt and neb[t along with, ndif)ft next, binnen within, aujser outside, entgegen against, gegen* iiber opposite, gemdB wi accordance with, gutDiber contrary to.
a. For prepositions wliich more regularly and usually govern the genitive, but are sometimes construed with a dative, see above, 373a. Of those here mentioned, ob (which is now antiquated), when meaning 07i account of, is occasionally used with a genitive au^er governs a genitive in the single phrase au^er anbe out of the country.
;

h.

noun
to

dla^, oleirf), and gemd^ either precede or follow the governed thus, nad) ber (^taht to the city, ber ^ainx nad) according
:

nature; gemd^ ben Urgefc^id)ten according to the old stories, ber 3eit unb ben Umftdnben gemd^ in ax^cordance with the time and the circumstances; jie gte^t fid^ gleic^ einem 2}leerearme ^in it stretches
along, after the
glei(^

manner of she flew like a sylph,

;

an arm of

the sea,

jie

flog, etner ijlp^ibe

low the noun approved) divided, and takes the noun between its two parts thus, gmei tauten fi^en gegen einanber iiber two ladies sit opposite one another.
Occasionally, by a bold construction, a word which is c. properly adverb only is construed as if preposition thus, Doran ben filftnen Slet^en in front of the brave ranks: compare 373c?.
:

^ntgegen, gegeniiber, and gumiber folbut gegeniiber is sometimes (by a usage no longer

375. The prepositions governing the accusative only are bur(^ through, fiir/or, (]egGn or gen against, otjite tvithout,

um
^en

about,

tDiber

against; also fonber without,

big

unto, tiU.
a.

is

now

nearly out of use, except in certain phrases,

like gen

^immel toward heaven, gen SBeften toward the west. onber is hardly employed except in a phrase or two, as fonber glei(^en without equal. 53iy usually stands adverbially before a preposition (see 369.1), but also governs directly specifications of place and time thus, biy 'i}lntiod)ien as far as Antioch, trarte
:

nur
b.
c.

bi3

morgen only wait till tomorrow. Um is very often followed by ber after the noun

see 379a.

the case of an accusative governed by a preposition requires to be distinguished that of an absolute accusative of

From

196
place followed
the

mDECLlNABLES.

[375-

by an adverb of direction, as ben QBerg ^inauf up mountain (see 230.1&). This construction is interesting as illustrating an intermediate step in the process of conversion of adverbs into prepositions.
376. Nine prepositions govern sometimes the dative and sometimes the accusative the dative, when they indicate locality or situation merely, or answer the question "where?" the accusative, when they imply motion or tendency toward, or answer the question
**

whither ? "

They

are an on,
iiber

at,

auf upon,

I^inter

behind,

in in, into, neben beside,

above, across,

unter under,

Dor be/ore,

jiDifd^eit

between.

Thus, t(^ "ijoik an ben c^ranfen, unb retc^e ben C>^Int an einen ^nappen ^mnd I stop at the bari-ier, and hand hack my helmet to a squire; er tag auf ber ^.rbe, unb ^aik ha^ Oftr auf ben 3fta(en 9e= legt he lay on the ground, and had his ear laid on the turf; fie Briiten !)inter bem Dfen they brood behind the stove, er legte \i^ Vinkx eine 2abadbofc he laid himself behind a snuff-box; er ging tn ^an^, unb blieb lange in bemfelben he went into the house, and
staid a long time in it; bott liegt er neben einem Stein there beside a stone,
fie

it

lies

fe^ten

fic^

neben ben 33aum they seated themselves

iiber biefen

beside the tree; ber 3flad)en f(^Ue^t

abyss closes over the swimmer,

gefabren I once crossed over this ^riide, unter btefer 33ru(fe n)Dbnte eine 9latte tlie boat drove underneath a bridge, under this bridge lived a rat; im^^ugenblid iDaren
fie t)Dr

bem d^mimmer the trom bin x^ einmal stream; ber ^abn trieb unter eine
fid)

itber

bem

gelfen in a

moment

they were before the rock,

er trat

^onigtn he came before the queen; ha^ eftrirfe rubte 3tDif(^en ibren tinben the knitting-work lay between her Itands, fie f^blupften aroij^en feine Stueige they slipped in among its branches.
t)or bie

a.

The

difference of

meaning determining the use

of the

dative or accusative after these prepositions is not always an obvious one sometimes a peculiar liveliness is given to an expression by the employment of the accusative thus, er mad^te eine Deffnung in bie ^rbe he made a hole in (into) the ground, unb fii^te fie an ben 5}lunb and kissed her on the mouth (impressed a kiss), iiber ben 9lanb ber Xiefe gebogen arched over (thrown as arch across) the edge of the abyss; or, the accusative implies a
; :

verb of motion which

is

2[Birtbbaug [SBirt^bauS] ab he got

not expressed: thus, er fticg in ein dmn (and entered) into an inn,


378]

PEEPOSITIONS.

197

he saved himself (betook himself for ^bfte they stand up (rise to a standing posture) ; or, the action is a figurative one thus, an t^n benfen think of him (turn one's thoughts on him), er fa^ auf aH
cr rettctc fi(f) In bte 35urg safety) into the castle, fie
fteften in bie
:

bic $rad)t he looked upon all the beauty, fie freueten ]\^ iiber bie fd^onenSpfel they were delighted with the beautiful apples; or there are phrases, the imphcation of which seems arbitrarily

determined: thus, auf bie befte SBeife in the best taufenb Sa^re after a tliousand years.

manner,

iiber

b. It is only by its use of in and into (as also, in colloquial phrase, of on and onto), that the English makes a corresponding distinction and even this does not agree in all particulars with the German distinction of in with the dative and with the accusative. Hence the ground of the difference of case is the less easily appreciated by us, and needs to be carefully noted at every instance that occurs.
;

c.

each

The accusative and dative with these prepositions have its own proper value, the one as the case of directest ac-

other as representing the ancient locative (or case denoting the in relation).
tion, the

377. 1. Some prepositions govern a substantive clause, introduced usually by ba^, rarely by a compound relative (179) such are auf, au^er, bi, o^ne, ftatt or anftatt, urn, ungeacfitet, h)dl)= renb thus, auf ba^ e bir tuofti (^e^e in order that it may go well with thee, au^er mx feine ^Jlitfc^uIbiQen feien except who were his
:

accomplices.
a.

This

is

closely akin with the office of conjunction

tt)df)renb

and

bi,

ungeadjtet,

and

may be used

without ba6, as proper con-

junctions: thus, n)dt)renb ton ha blieben while

we

continued there

(compare
2.

439.6c).
oftne, and ftatt or anftatt may govern adjuncts, as equivalent of a complete clause

The prepositions um,

its

an infinitive and (compare 346.1).

378. An adverb not infrequently takes the place of a noun as object of a preposition. Thus
a. Many adverbs of time and place (toward above), auf immer for ever, fiir
:

as,
ie^t

na^

oben

upward
t)on fern

for now,

from
b.

afar, in

tt)te

fern /low far.

The adverbs b a or b ar, to o or tr ar, and T^ier or l^ie, as substitutes

These ^re compoundeci
wjtti

for the oblic[ue cases of pronouns.


198
INDECLINABLES.

[378-

the governing preposition, forming a kind of compound adverb

(see 365.3&).

added an adverb,

noun governed by a preposition is often more nearly, the relation expressed by the preposition. Thus as, um un a. The general adverbs of direction, \)m and l^er
379.
1.

After the

to emphasize, or to define

round about us or him, Winter xtjm l^er along after Mm, na^ eiuer 9tic^tun(^ fjin in a single directwn, iiber bag 9)leer l^in across the sea, Don alien eiten ^er/rom all sides. In these combinations, the distinctive meaning of the adverb, as denoting motion from and toward, is apt to be effaced. Um l^er is the commonest case, and a stereotyped expression for round about. b. The same adverbs, in combination with the preposition itself repeated thus, um mi(^ lucrum rowid about me, in ben Sorft l^inein into the forest, an^ bem SBalbe l^inaug out of the wood, an^ ber 33ruft ^erau forth from the breast, hm6) efal)ren l^inburd^
fier,
\\)X[ l^er
. .
:

um

through dangers.
c. Other adverbs of direction, simple or compound, often adding an essential complement to the meaning of the preposition: thus, t)on nun an from now on, t)on bort an forth from there, Don Sugtnb a\i\ from youth up, wad) hnWxik^n toward the

upon him, er I)i3rt bie Seinbe enemy (coming on) after him, l^inter 58dumen \\tx'oox forth from behind trees, gur hammer T^inein into the room, gum ^l^ore I)inau out of the gate. 2. It may sometimes be made a question whether the adverb
middle,
fie

flingen auf i^n gu they fell

l^inter fi(^

brein he hears the

of direction belongs to the prepositional phrase, or, rather, to the verb of the clause, as its ^prefix the two cases pass into one another,
:

380. To what members of the sentence a prepositional phrase forms an adjunct has been pointed out already namely
:

1. 2. 3. 4.

To a verb, with very various value see 318. To a noun see 112. To an adjective: see 146. Hence, also, to an adverb, when an adjective
:

is

used as

such.
381. 1. The rules for the position of a preposition, whether before or after the noun that it governs, have been given above, io Qoiinectioii with the rules for ^overnraeot,

383]
2.

CONJUNCTIONS.

199

its following governed noun intervene the various limiting words which are wont to stand before a noun as articles, adjective pronouns, adjectives and participles, with their adjuncts often to an extent discordant with English usage thus, an fleincn, t)ieredig 3ugcl&au= enen, steniUd) Qleid)en ^afaltftiiden of small, squarely hewn, tolerably equal pieces of basalt; fiir bent ^ranfen Qeletflete ^ni\t for help rendered to the sick man.

Between the preposition and

may

definite article into

Respecting the combination of the preposition with a following a single word, see 65.
[Exercise

33.

Adverbs and Prepositions.]

CONJUNCTIONS.
382. Conjunctions are words which connect the clauses or sentences composing a period or paragraph, and show their relation to one another.
a. We have hitherto had to do only with the elements which enter into the structure of individual clauses, and among which conjunctions play no part. "When, however, clauses themselves are to be put in connection with one another, conjunctions are required.

especially those meaning and and words as well as clauses, it is as such words represent clauses, and may be expanded into them thus, er unb ic^ tt)aren ha er Wax ba, unb tcf) ioar ha he was there and 1 was there, er ift mdcf)tiger al ic^ (bin) he is mightier than I (am).
h.

If certain conjunctions

or

appear

to connect

Conjunctions, as a class, are the words of latest developin the history of language, coming from other parts of speech, mainly through the medium of adverbial use. A word ceases to be an adverb and becomes a conjunction, when its qualifying influence extends over a whole clause instead of being limited to a particular word in it. Almost all conjunctions in German are also adverbs (or prepositions), and their uses as the one or the other part of speech shade off into one another,
c.

ment

383. Conjunctions are most conveniently classified according to the character of the relations they indicate, and their effect upon the arrangeinent of the clauses ihej introduce, as-

200
1.

INDECLINABLES.

[383-

ment
2.

General connectives, which do not alter the arrangeof the clause.

Adverbial conjunctions, causing the inversion of a

clause (that is to say, causing its subject to follow, in-

stead of preceding, the verb).

3. Subordinating conjunctions, which make the clause dependent, and give it the transposed order (removing the verb to the end).
4.

The

first

two

classes, in contradistinction

from the

third,

may be
384.

called co-ordinating conjunctions.

The general connectives

and or and
either.

are those signifying

and, but, for,

Namely unb and;dbtx, aEein, jonbern (and sometimes bodf)) hut;htnn for; tnimhn either and ober or, a. Of the words meaning but, fonbern is more strongly adversative than abet, being used only after a negative, and introducing some word which has a Uke construction with the one on
which the force of the negation
direct antithesis with it:
(^ott, bte falls,

and which
eigne

is

placed in
fonbern

thus,

tcetl nic^t

9}^a(!)t,

^onige errettet because not their own might, but God, saves kings; er geno nt(!)t lange fetne 9iu!)m, fonbern tnarb be= gn)ungen he did not long enjoy his fame, but he was subdud; mein IRetter xcax fein 3}Jann, fonbern ein 33a(i) my preserver was no man, but a brook ;~the combination ni(^t nur (or blo^) fonbern an^
.
. .

not only
%iit\n

but also

is

likewise
n)ir

fiinbigten, fonbern

an^

thus, nic^t blo^ jenc not they alone sinned, but also we.
:

common

means
For

hterally only,

and

is

often best so rendered, being

more
b.

restricted than aber to the introduction of a definite obbod^ as but, see below, 385.5c.

jection.

These connectives stand always at the head of the clause whose connection they indicate except aber, which has great freedom of position, and may be introduced at any later point without any notable difference of meaning, although often to be conveniently rendered by however.
:

385.

1.

The adverbial conjunctions

;

are originally

and strictly adverbs, qualifying the verb of the clause which they introduce and, like any other of the ad-


385]

201

CONJUNCTIONS.

juncts of the verb (431), when placed at the head of the clause, they give it the inverted order, putting the subject after the verb.
2. No distinct boundary separates the conjunctional use of they are conjunctions these words from their adverbial use when their effect is to determine the relations of clauses to one another, rather than to limit the action of a verb and these two offices pass insensibly into each other.
:

3.
a.

They may be simply

classified as

different phrases with

Copulative (related to the general connective and\ uniting no other implication than that of con:

tinuation, order, or division

thirdly,

as, aud) also, aufeerbem besides,

bann
.

then, ferner further, erften, 3tt)eitcn, britteny, firstly,

secondly,
.

and so

on,

f c^lie^Iid)

finally, meber

nod) 7ieither

nor,

M\^
now
h.

[tetl]

tftetlS

[k'M partly

partly,

Balb

Balb

.... now.

an opposition
nD(5^ yet,

Adversative (related to but), implying more or less distinctly of idea, a denial or restriction as, bod), ieboc^, ben*
:

though,

gleidjtDoI)!,

befjenunaeac^tet nevertheless; bagegcn,

l^ingegen

on

the contrary, tnbeffen however, t)ielme!)r rather, gnjar

to be sure, tDol^l indeed.

c. Causative (related to for), implying a groxmd, reason, or occasion as, hat}tx, begmegen, bel()a(6 therefore, alfo accordingly,
:

folglid), mitl^in

consequently.

d. Adverbs of place and time, particularly the latter, sometimes assume a conjunctional value as, nnterbcffen meanwhile,
:

t)OX^zt previously,

barauf thereupon.

4. Although these words in their conjunctional office tend toward the head of the clause, they do not always take that place nor are they always conjunctions rather than adverbs when they introduce the clause. Especially ndmli(^ namely, and
;

some

of the adversative

iebo(^, inbefjen, gwar, n)O^I,

and causative conjuncti ns as ho^, alfohave a freedom of position like

its

that of aber (3846).

5.

The clause sometimes maintains

normal order, instead

:

of being inverted, after conjunctions of this class

a.

especially

the emphasis of the clause, or of the antithesis in two correlative clauses, rests on the subject, so that the conjunction becomes a kind of adjunct of thtj subject thus, an^
:

When

202

INDECLINABLES.
it,

[385tcebcr

bein 55ruber ^at e Qetriinf^t thy brother also has wished er, nod) tc^ tDaren ba neither he nor I were there.

h. When the conjunction represents a clause which is not fully expressed, or is thrown in as it were parenthetically. Conjunctions most often so treated are gmar, iiberbiefe, folQli^, gubem, I)inge9en, and ordinals, as erften, gmeiten^. c. ^0(f) sometimes has its adversative force weakened to a mere "but, and leaves the order of the clause imchanged, like the other words that have that meaning (384).

386.

1.

The subordinating conjunctions

making
(435).
it

are such as

give to the clause which they introduce a dependent (subordinate, accessory) value,
enter, in the

relation of substantive, adjective, or adverb, into the

structure of

some other clause

is

clause assumes the transposed order

that

Such a dependent
is to say, its

personal verb

removed

to the

end

of the clause (see

434
2.

etc.).

The conjunctions that introduce a substantive dependent clause are ba^ that, ob whether, and those that have a compound relative value, namely iDte how, toann when, tDO where, and the compounds of too, whether with adverbs of direction, as iDo^in
whither, iDo'^er whence, or with prepositions, as representing cases of the compound relative pronoun tDer (180), as h)Dt)on

whereof, tDomit wherewith.

Thus,

id) iDeiB,

ba^

er I)ler Moax]

ob cr

nocf) Vxzx bleibt, tft

mir un=

befannt; fragen 8tc nur narf), tDo'^in er jid) begeben babe I know that he was here ; whether he still remains here is unknown to me

only inquire whither he has betaken himself.

3.

The conjunctions
tr)0,

that introduce an adjective dependent

clause are chiefly those

made up of prepositions with the adrepresenting cases of the simple relative pronouns ber and tt)eld)er (180), or of words of direction with the same adverbs. The simple conjunctions tt)o, tt)enn, XDann, ha, al, tt)ie, following specifications of place, time, or manner, also sometimes perform the same office. Thus, ha^ 33ett, toorauf er lag the bed on which he laij; tbr OueEen, babin bte tcelfe 33ruft fic^ brdngt ye fountains toward
verbs ba and

which
the

the

drooping breast presses ; ba Sanb,

tDO bie

ihonen

bliibn
fiibvt

the land

where the lemons blossom ; bte ^xi, way in which the war is carried on.

tDte

man

ben ^rieg


387]
4.

CONJUNCTIONS.

203

The conjunctions that introduce an adverbial dependent f very various derivation, character, and meaning, namely
clause are
>

a.
b.

Conjunctions indicating

'place

as,
tt)o

Time:
tDeil,

as, ha, al^, tt)enn, mie,

radljrenb while,

tt)o, ha where. when, tnbem, tnbeffen or

inbe^,

nac^bem after, feitbem since, bi

until,

t^t, bet)or 6e/ore.

c.

Manner:

as, toie as.

tr)eil,

d
that.
e.

Caitse; as,

biemeil because,

ha since, nun

noit? that,

ha^

Purpose:

as, bamit,

ha%

uuf ba^, urn bo in or(^er

i/iai.

Condition: as, menu i/, jo, tt)o, rt)ofern, bafern, fafl case, inbem while; and, with implication of objection, unGcad)tet, ob=
/.
glei(^, obiDo^I, ob)(5^on,

tt)enn

and),

tt)iett)o^l

ob gmar, ob auc^, tDeimQleid), although.

mennfc^on,

The compounds of ob and menn with filei(^, tt)O^I, and [(^on, meaning although, are often separated by intervening words.
g.
/i.

Degree: as,

tDte as, Je

according

as, al,

benn

^/i'an.

Besides these, there are numerous conjunctional phrases, of kindred value, composed of conjunctions and other particles as, aU ob as if, in tt)ie fern so far a% je na(i)bem according as, fo balb as soon as, fo lawQ so long as, etc.
i. (Bo, especially, with following adverb, forms (as in the last two examples) a great number of conjunctional phrases or compounds, after which the conjunction al as is sometimes ex-

pressed, but
ift,

more

often implied
ift

or

fo

lang e nur mogUc^

so long as

thus, )o lang al e nur mbQlid^ it is in any way possible

(compare 438.3d).
5. Few of these words are exclusively conjunctions many are adverbs also, or prepositions, or both some, as tudl^renb, some, as fafl, toni, are cases ungeac^tet, are participial forms of nouns many are combined phrases composed of a i reposition and a governed case as inbem, nai^bem, feitbem.
: ;

INTERJECTIONS.
387. The interjections have a character of their own, separate from the other parts of speech, in that they do not enter as elements into the structure of sentences or periods, but are

independent outbursts of feeling, or intimations of will, the uttered ec^uivalents of a tone, a grimace, or a gesture,


204
INBECLINABLES.

[388-

388. Nevertheless, they are not purely natural exclamations, but utterances akin with such, which are now assigned by usage
to the expression of certain states of
389.

mind or

will.

The

interjections

most commonly used are

1. Of those expressing feeUng o or ol&, used in a great variety of meanings ad), tr)el), expressing painful or disagreeable surprise or grief; p^m, fi, bal), expressmg disgust or contempt;
;

ei,

joyful surprise
;

ija,

a^,

wonder, pleasure, and the like

doubt, hesitation
;

l^eifa,

iud^^e, exultation

^em,

^)m,

:^u,

horror, shud-

dering.
2.

attention cate quick

3.

Of those intimating will or desire ))t, Ifieba, fjoUa, to call the same, or to command silence ljii]d), to indi|)ft, movement topp, to signify the closing of a bargain.
;
;

Here may be best classed, also, the various imitations of the and other natural sounds, directions and c^llwords for animals, and the more or less artificially composed and unintelligent words which are used as burdens of songs and
cries of animals

the like

as, ftopfafa, t)it)aGera,

tumtebum.

390. As, on the one hand, the interjections are employed with a degree of conventionality, like the other constituents of language, so, on the other hand, many words that are proper parts of speech are very commonly used in an exclamatory way, quite as if they were interjections. Such are :^ei( hail! gott= loh praise God! beit)al)r Godforhia! fort, tt)eg away! fie^ beJwld! brat) well done! etc.; and the whole series of oaths and adjurations.
a.

The ordinary equivalent

tnir

of our alas, leiber,

ift

is

tion of the phrase n)a

ful to

nod) leiber

what

is yet

an abbreviamore pain-

me (or something equivalent to this), and is capable of being introduced, parenthetically, at almost any point in the phrase even, when put first, sometimes causing inversion, like an adverb.

The exclamatory or interjectional mode of expression 391. prevails to no small extent in the practical use of language, when emotion or eagerness causes that usual set framework of the sentence, the verb and its subject, to be thrown aside, and
only the emphatic elements to be presented at
all.

Thus,
gfatlftridt

eud) gur

rbin erfldren!

ber t)errdt^ertfc^e

[t)errdterif(^e]

declare you

my

heiress!

the treacherous snare!

pie^M

393]
auf! 5tnou

INTERJECTIONS.

205

Sanb! flee! up! out into the wide country! I understand ijou : further! The grammatical forms most frequently thus used are the nominative of address (or "vocative " 214), and the imperative.

toeite

id)

derfteV bii^; tDciter!

of the interjections are also brought into a kind with the structure of the sentence, being followed by cases, or phrases, such as would suit a more complete expression of the feehng they intimate. Thus, 0, a^, pfui may stand before a genitive expressing the occasion of the exclamation as in o be Sftoren pfui ber 6c^anbe some may take a prepositional oh the fool ! fie on the shame phrase or a substantive clause after them as, ad^ ba^ bu ba

392.

Some

of connection

liegft

alas that thou

liest

there

coward!

and

object, signifying that

nouns used toward which the feeling

pfut iiber ben S^ifl^n fie on the interjectionally often admit a dative
is

directed;

thus, eil,

grueling, beinem (^ein hail to thy brilliancy, O Spring! mel& mir, '^a^ id) bir Jjertraut woe tome, that I have trusted thee!

[Exercise

34.

Conjunctions and Interjections.]

WORD-FORMATION, DERIVATION.
Introductory Explanations,
393. The etymological part of grammar, as thus far treated, deals with the character and uses of the parts of speech, and of
their grammatical or inflectional forms,

which are made from simple roots or from stems, chiefly by inflectional endings, but in part also by internal change.

Such grammatical forms (along with the indeclinable which are ultimately of the same character with them) constitute the most essential part of the grammatical apparatus
a.

particles,

of

a language,

its

instrumentality for the expression of relations

its

of ideas, the
etc.,

means by which

names of beings,

qualities, acts,

are placed in connection with one another, in order to express the thoughts of the speaker.

itself

Boot is the name given to an ultimate significant element, containing nothing that is recognizably formative. From roots, by the ordinary means of derivation, are made stems (or themes, or bases), from which come inflectional forms, and also other stems.
h.

206

DEETVATION.

[394-

394. Another and only less important part of the same grammatical apparatus is the array of means by which stems of declension and conjugation are formed from roots and from each other. These means are of the same character with those already described, consisting chiefly of suffixes, along with a few prefixes, and supplemented by methods of internal change.
395. There is no fundamental diversity between the strumentalities. The suffixes and prefixes of inflection

derivation are equally,

by

origin,

two inand of independent words, which

were first uttered in connection with other words, then combined with the latter, and finally made to lose their independence and converted into subordinate elements, designating the relations of other more substantial and significant
elements.
a.

The working-out

of

grammatical apparatus, by the reduc-

tion of words once independent to the condition of endings of inflection or derivation, has been a part of the history of inflective

languages, from their beginning

down

to

modern

times.

Of

many of the affixes formed in this way, as well as of some that are much more ancient, the origin can still be distinctly traced
but their history is to a great extent obscured by the effects of Compare what is said above linguistic change and corruption. of the derivation of the ending tc, forming the preterits of the

New conjugation (246.3), and of the suffixes lic^, irdrt^, etc.

h.

(363-4).

between the two classes of endings lies in their mode of application, and in the frequency and regularity

The

difference

of their use.

Certain suffixes of derivation are so regularly ap-

plied to whole classes of themes, and produce derivatives so analogous with forms of inflection, that they are conveniently and properly treated along with the subject of inflection. Such

are the endings er and eft of comparatives and superlatives (133 etc.), and those which form the infinitive and participles of
verbs.

German

languages commonly studied, the the one which most fully and clearly illustrates the processes of word-formation and the subject ought; therefore to receive the attention of every advanced German scholar.
396.
is
;

Among modem

397. But no known language (not even such exceptional ones as the Sanskrit) has preserved so much of its primitive structure that we can carry back the analysis of its vocabulary to the actual beginning. By the help, especially, of a careful


400]

PEINCIPLES.

207

and searching comparison of related languages, the processes of word-combination can be traced up until we discover of what sort are the ultimate elements of speech, although we are by no means certain of being able to point them out in their veryform and substance.
Principles,

398. The words of German, as of other related languages, are traceably derived, in good part, from roots.
399. The means of derivation, through the whole history of development, have been chiefly suffixes or derivational

endings
a.

with some aid from prefixes.

The almost exclusive use of suffixes rather than prefixes, as means both of inflection and of derivation, is a characteristic
feature of the family of languages to which the German (with our own) belongs. The few prefixes employed have retained

much more distinctly the character of independent words, forming proper compounds with those to which they are attached that character has been lost only by the inseparable prefixes The negative (307) and one or two others (see below, 411.11). un is the only German prefix of really ancient character and obscure derivation.
400. Besides this, there have come to be in German two other specific auxiliary methods of internal change, affecting the vowel of the root or primitive word. These are
1.

The modification
ii,

of vowel (14), or

a, 0,

au, respectively: thus, 9Jlann, 9JJanner

change of o, o, u, an into man, men; %n^,

alt,

Sii&e foot, feet; 9)^au,

elder, eldest;

Tlm)^ mouse, mice;

alter, dlteft old,

^orn, l^ornlein corn, kernel; {)anoe,l)dnQt I hang, he hangs; floQ, ftoQe I flew, I might fly; xotl) [rot], rotften [roten] red, redden. This modification is by the Germans called Umlaut change of sound.
a. This is a euphonic change, coming from the assimilation of a hard or guttural vowel to a soft or palatal one (e, i) closely following it although finally applied by analogy, in many single cases, where no such cause had been present. It is of comparatively recent introduction, although, as the examples show, shared in part by the English. It is quite unknown in one branch of Germanic speech, the Moeso-Gothic and, on the other hand, most highly developed in the Scandinavian tongues.

208

DEEIVATION.

[400-

b. In the present condition of the language, the cause of the modification is generally no longer to be seen, the assimilating

vowel having been

c.

lost.

Some

derivative

words having vowels which are

really the

effect of modification are

now, usually or always, written with

the simple vowels e (for d or o) or t (for u). Again, some words show a modified vowel as the mere result of an irregular variation of utterance, without etymological reason.
2.

The

variation or gradation of radical vowel

as in fingen,

fang,gefungen sing, sang, sung; merbe, n)irb,tt)arb, n)urben,gett)orbett, from merben become; Breeze, Bri(!)t, Brad), geBrod)en, 33rud), from This variation is by the Germans called Ablaut Bred^en break.

divergence of sound.
a.

This second

mode

of vowel change is also, like the other,

originally of euphonic character, one of the accidents attending

the phonetic development of language, under the combined influences of quantity, accent, combination, addition of suffixes, and the like. But it is much more ancient, being one of the characteristic peculiarities of all the Germanic languages and its specific causes and mode of evolution are in part obscure.
;

b. The sphere of action of the gradation of radical vowel is in the inflection of the older verbs of the language, and the forma-

tion of their earliest derivatives.

401. The modes of consonantal change which accompany the processes of word-formation are too various and irregular to be systematically set forth here. Some of them will be noticed belowj in connection with the derivatives whose formation especially calls

them

out.

402. To carry back the historical analysis of German words to the farthest point attained by the aid of the languages kindred with the German, would take the pupil into regions where he is a stranger, and would be unprofitable. Such study requires

a knowledge
of progress.

and belongs to a higher stage Only the processes of derivation whose results are traceable in the existing language will be set forth and those words will be treated as "primitive" which have no German etymons, or more original words whence they are derived, even though evidence from other languages may not only show them to be derivatives, but also exhibit the earlier forms from which they came.
of the older dialects,
;

404]

DERIVATIVE VERBS.

209

DERIVATION OP VERBS.
403.

Primitive Verbs.

Verbs to be regarded as primitive

are
1. The verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, nearly two Aundred in number (264-7), which constitute the most important body of primitive roots in the language.

a. Several verbs of this conjugation, however, are demonstrably derivative thus, {rf)reiben (111.2) write, from Latin scribo; |)reifen (ni.2) praise, from ^rei value (which comes from Lat. pretium), etc. Others are doubtless of the same character; since, down to that period in the history of the language at
:

which the mode of inflection of the New conjugation was introduced, all verbs, whether recent or older, were inflected according to the Old conjugation.
2.

Many

verbs of the

New

or

weak conjugation:

as, "^aBctt

Jiave, fagen say, reben talk,

Ueben

love, leben live.

a. A number of the verbs of the New conjugation formerly be?^nged to the Old, having changed their mode of inflection under the influence of the tendency to extend a prevailing analogy and reduce more irregular to more regular forms. Others, if originally derivative, have lost the evidence of it. To the root of some there is a corresponding noun, and it may admit of question which is the more original, verb or noun.
b.

All verbs

whose

root, or conjugation-stem, is of
:

one syllable are to be classed as derivative

the case of f^meic^eln

nore than even though, as in

the original from

flatter, flettern climb,

which they come

404.
I.

is

no longer to be traced.

Verbs derived

from

Verbs.

1. Umlaut) of the root vowel, a class of causative verbs are formed, taking as their direct object what was the subject of the simple verb: thus, ^aUzn fall, YdUtn cause to fall, fell ; ixinUn drink, trdnfen cause to drink, drench; fi^en sit, je^en set; Ueoen lie, legen lay; faugen suck,

By internal change of the root itself By change (generally, modification or

jdugen suckle; faftren go, fii^ren lead.

a.

As some
its

has

of the examples show, this class of derivatives representatives in English also, but they are much more in

numerous

German.

210

BEBIVATION.

[404-

5. By change of the final consonant, with or without accompanying change of vowel, a few verbs are made, with various modification of the meaning of the simple verb thus, T^angcn hang, "^enfen execute hy hanging; Biegen hend, biiden how; netgen incline, nirfen nod; tt)a(^en wake, watch, metfen awaken, arouse;
:

efjen eat,

d^en corrode,

etch.

n. By additions

to the root

1. The suffix el Ia(^en laugh, Id(^eln smile; lieben hve, Uebeln dally, flirt; franfen he sick, frdnfeln he

forms a few diminutives, as

sickly or ailing.
a. But most of the diminutive verbs in nouns and adjectives see below, 405.11.1.
:

eln

are derived from

2.

The

suffix er

forms a few

iterative, desiderative, or caus-

ative verbs, as Happen flap, flappern rattle; lad^en lau^h, Idcfjern make inclined to laugh; f olgen /oWoiw, folgern infer, conclude.

jectives

But most verbs in ern, as in eln, come from nouns and adand those which appear to come from verbs are rather to be regarded as formed in imitation of such, or after their
a.
;

analogy.
3.

The addition

of

in^bren hear,
snort.

]^or(^en

gives in a few cases intensive force as hearken; fd^narren rattle, fc^nari^en snore,
:

This is properly a French ending, representing 4. 3r or ter. the er or ir of the infinitive of French verbs and it forms German verbs from French or Latin roots thus, ftubiren [flu= bieren] study, max]^mn [marfd^ieren] march, fpagieren expatiate, go abroad for pleasure or exercise, regteren rule.
;
:

a.

these,

But a few verbs in iren [ieren] are formed, in imitation of from German nouns as buc^ftabiren [bn(^ftaBteren] spell,
:

(from 33ud)ftaBe
shadow).
b.

letter), fc^attiren [f(f)attteren]

shade (from (flatten

of the last century,

At a certain period, about the middle

the

German language was

well-nigh

swamped by

the introduc-

tion of a multitude of such foreign verbs in iren. The greater part of them have been cast out from dignified and literary use,

but they are

c.

still rife

in

low colloquial and humorous

styles.

The

and

ir ter of these verbs receives the accent they therefore admit no prefix ge in the participle: see

syllable

or

243.3a.

: :

405]

DERIVATIYE VEEBS.

211

in. By prefixes to the root

1.

By the inseparable prefixes Be,

(or
etc.

For the derivative

2.

ent or em^, cr, QC, t)cr, and gcr. compound) verbs formed by means of

these prefixes, see above, 302

By

separable prefixes.

Verbs formed by means of such prefixes have no real right to be regarded as derivative they are compounds, rather see
: :

296

etc.

Bemark. Derivative verbs in German coming from other verbs directly are quite rare and, of those usually regarded as so derived, some admit of explanation as denominatives, or as
;

coming from nouns and

405.

adjectives.
Adjectives.

Verbs derived

from Nouns and

Verbs from nouns and adjectives are commonly called denamThey constitute in German, as in the other related inatives.
languages, the great mass of derivative verbs. The relation of the verbal idea to the meaning of the primitive word is of the most varied character. Verbs from adjectives usually signify either, as intransitives, to be in or to pass into the condition denoted by the adjective, or else, as transitives, to reduce something to that condition. Verbs from nouns signify either to supply with that which the noun denotes, or to deprive of it, or to use or apply it, or to treat with it, or to be like it, and so on for examples, see below.
I.

modification of the vowel of the primitive word as, fu^en set foot, Jliid footing (f^uB foot); :^aufen Iwuse, dwell {^an^ house); graicn graze ((S5ra grass); altern grow old, age (^^Uter age); buttern make or turn to butter (53utter butter); prunfen make a show (^ruiif show); arbeiten work (%xb^\t labor): sometimes with modification of the vowel: as, p^ixQtn plough {''^^nc^ plough) ; bammern hammer {^ammtx hammer); ftiirgen fall or hurl headlong ((^turg fall).
1.
:

By the simple addition of the endings From nouns, more usually without

of conjugation

a.

bldttern
b.

Karely, a verb is formed from a noun in the plural as, turn over the leaves of, etc. (53Idtter leaves, from 53Iatt).
:

Nouns (and
e

adjectives) ending in the unaccented syllable

of that syllable in the derivative verb
fiffncn
:

en reject the

thus,

reanen rain (^legen rain),

2.

open

(offen open).

From

adjectives, usually with modification of the vowel

[roten]

thus, rotten

redden

(rot

[rotj

red),

[tdcfen

strengthen


212
(ftar! strong),

DERIVATION.
tbbten [toten] Mil (tobt [tot] dead),
cinbern alter (anber other),
:

[405Qeniiaen suffice

(Qcnug enough),
out)
;

rarely, without modification

alien

du^ern utter (au^er as, na^en draw nigh (naft

nigf/i),

grow

old

(alt oZ(Z).

a.

A number of
from

derivative verbs are

in the comparative degree:

formed from adjectives thus, nd()ern conie nearer (ndl^er

less).

nearer,

xiQi% mtnbern diminish (minber

n. By
1.

derivative endings, forming stems of conjugation

el forms from both nouns and adjectives (with modification of their vowel) verbs whicli have a diminutive, disparaging, or reproachful meaning: thus, fiinfteln treat in an artificial or affected manner (^unft art); altertl^iimeln [altertiimeln] he foolishly or affectedly fond of antiquity (^Itertl^um [^Itertum]

The ending

antiquity); fliigeln subtilize, he over-critical (flug knowing); from

meln affect piety, cant (\xomm pious).

a. Compare derivatives formed from verbs ending, 404.II.1.
2.

by the same

The endings

l^errfe^en

rule (.)err master)

bugen to thee

and eng form a few verbs f d) forms only and f eilf d)en chaffer (fell cheap) ; g forms and thou (bu thou), and one or two others eng forms
jc^, g,
:

faulengen play the sluggard

3.

(f

aul lazy), etc.

415.9)

ig is properly one forming adjectives (below, but it is sometimes attached both to adjectives and to nouns in order to the formation of a special theme of conjugation, by analogy with the numerous verbs derived from adjectives ending in ig thus, reinigen purify [xnn pure); enbigen end,
; :

The ending

terminate (@nbe end).

4 The

ending

ir

or

ier

forms a few verbs from German nouns

see 404.II.4a.

m.
1.

By

prefixes (either with or without derivative endings)

The inseparable prefixes (except ge) form a very large number of denominative verbs, generally without any accompanying derivative ending, but occasionally along with
such.

ogous to that which belongs to them thus

In these denominatives, the prefixes have a force analin composition (see 307)

a. 33e forms transitives, denoting especially a furnishing, making, or treating: thus, befeelen endow with a soul ((geele soul); begetftern inspirit (eifter spirits, from ^eift)j befreien /ree.

406]
liberate {]xd free);
f d^onigen

DERIVATIVE VERBS.
hm\6)ttn enrich {xd^tx richer,
;

213
f

rom

reicE))

Be*

beautify (fd^on beautiful) xi^t news).

b.

Benac^ric^ttflen

inform [ila^^

and the

@nt forms especially verbs signifying removal, deprivation, like: thus, tni^txmn withdraw (fern far); entblo^en strip (Uo^bare); zni1)anpkn behead {i0an)i)i head); entfrdften enervate (^raft power); ent^^eUtgen desecrate fteiliQ holy); enttDaffnen dis-

arm

(2Baffen weapon).

c. (^x forms transitives, intransitives, and reflexives, chiefly from adjectives, and signifying a passing into, or a reduction thus, er{)arten grow hard, to, the state signified by the adjective
:

er!)drten

make hard

(^art hard); ermatten tire (matt

weary);

er=

gdn^en complete (ganj entire); erniebrigen humble (niebrtg low); eriofen release (lo^ loose); ertoeitern extend (roeiter wider, from

but sometimes with more iDeit); erfldren explain (flat clear); thus, eroBern irregular meaning, from adjectives or nouns
:

conquer (ober superior) ; erinnem remind (inner interior); ben fathom, explore ((S^runb bottom).
d.

erQrun=

3Ser

has nearly the same value and

office

as

er,

but

is

more

prevailingly transitive in effect: thus, t)erdnbern alter (anber other); Dereiteln frustrate (eitcl vain); t)ergnuGen gratify (gcnug enough); uxlamtxw lengthen (Idnger longer, from lang); t)erglafen
vitrify,

glaze

((Sla

glass);

t)erfilbern

plate with silver (ilber

silver)
e.

tjeratten

become antiquated

(alt old).

3er forms a very few derivatives: as,

;

jerffeifd^en lacerate

(Sleif^ flesh)

gergliebern

dismember

((S^Iteber

limbs,

from Ueb).

A small number of denominatives are formed with the 2. such are abbad^en unroof {^a^ roof); auseparable prefixes ein!er!ern fernen remove the stone or kernel of (ern kernel);
:

imprison

(,^erfer

prison);

umarmen embrace (%xm arm);

an]-

muntern cheer
406.

up

(munter cheerful); auSmeiten widen {mxtwide).

Verbs derived from Particles.

few verbs are derived from other parts of speech by the

adjectives.
excite,

same means as from nouns and

Such are emporen
(gegen afifains^);

arouse {tmpox ahft) ; begegnen meei

ern)iebern an8ii;er

(mkhn

again) ;

t)erntd)ten, jer-

nid)ten annihilate (nic^t not);

t)erneinen

deny

(nein no);

bejaften

affirm Qa yes); dd)sen groan (ad) ah!); jaiK^jen exult (Jud^, iud)T^c hurrah!).

214

DERIVATION.

[407-

DERIVATION OF NOUNS.
407.
1.

Primitive Nouns.

Primitive nouns are in part monosyllabic words which contain no evident sign of their really derivative nature, and of which the original roots are no longer traceable in German.

Such are gjJann people, ^vi!^foot.

man, ^au

house,

^aum

tree,

^inb

child, 35ol!

2. In part they are words of more than one syllable, the evident products of composition or derivation, containing elements more or less closely analogous with those by which other recognizable derivatives are formed, but coming from roots of which they are the only remaining representatives.

Such are

DfJame

name, ^naBe

hoy, ^lufle eye, rbe earth, SSater

father, ^oii^ter daughter, Staffer water, ^ogel bird, ^Jabel needle, (Segel sail
a. Some of the words in both these classes are traceable by comparison of the kindred languages to earlier roots from which they are descended: thus, 5!J?ann is usually (though doubtfully) referred to a root man think (the same with meinen think, mean); ^inb comes from the root gan generate; gu^ is identical with Latin pes, Greek pous, coming from pad walk; 5^ame goes back to gna Ajtiou? ; ^o(!)ter to duh draw the breast,

milk,

and so

on. Verbs.
:

408.

Nouns derived from

I. By variation or gradation of vowel (^Blaut see 400.2) alone, without added ending. Thus, 33anb volume, 33unb bond, from Binben bind; i^ seat,

a^

sediment,

@a^

settler,

from

fi^en sit; 3u(i draft,

from

jie'^en

draw;

%x\ii step,

from

treten

tread; |)rud} speech, from jprec^cn

speak; prung spring, from fpnnoen spring.

a. All these words originally had endings of derivation, which have become lost by phonetic corruption. They are prevailingly

masculine.
b.

In words thus derived appear sometimes irregular alteraas the

in part show.

tions of the root, especially of its final consonant,

examples
c.

The
;

relation cf

meaning

of such derivatives to the idea of

action, state, or quality expressed

various

by the verbal root is very but they signify in general either the act or quaUty


408]
itself,

DERIVATIV.E NOUNS.

215

acts, or to

or the result of the action, or the person or thing that which the state or quality belongs.
earlier fuller forms,

II. By brief and obscure endings, relics of and no longer producing distinct classes

of derivatives with

definable modifications of the radical meaning.

Such endings

are
thus, 35urbe burden, from Bciren hear; (ft, ft), b: from jc^cren shear; ^d^xt passage, from fal^ren go; <Sd)rift document, from fd}reiben write; ^rac^t dress, from tragen ivear; 33runft heat, from Brennen burn; ^unft art, from fennen know; ^unft coming, from fommen come; 33ranb combustion, from
1. %t, be, t 8(^arte notch,

brennen burn.
2.

^inbe
a.

^, which forms a very large number of derivatives thus, tie, from binben bind; Sprac^e language, from f^re(i)en
:

speak;

(SJabe gift,

from geben give;

gllefle^!/,

from

ftiegenj^i/.

derivatives of this class also share in the gradation of radical vowel, and the irregular alterations of the final consonant of the root, which characterize the older words of the

The

language. They are of as various meaning as those of the preceding class. Their gender is prevailingly feminine exceptions being appellations of males (persons and animals), and a few that are of anomalous character.

III.

By

endings of more distinct form, and more uniform and

definable meaning.

The most important of these we will take up in alphabetical more convenient reference. This suffix is of foreign origin, being derived from the 1. (^i. Latin and French ia, ie. It was used originally only to form derivatives from nouns (see below, 410.2), but has come also to form from verbs ending in eln and em abstract nouns of action,
order, for the sake of

often with a disparaging or contemptuous implication: thus,

c^meic^elei flattery,

from

fd)metc^eln flatter;

2:dnbelet trifling,
plantittnl chatter

from
a.

tdnbeln trifle; ^lauberei chit-chat,

from

3auberei witchcraft, from ^anbtxn practise magic.

Words formed with

is

vipon this syllable, as

2.

ei are feminine, and take the accent required by the derivation of the suffix.

This suffix forms a considerable class of masculine an instrument, quite rarely an actor: thus, ebel lever, from i)c1)tn raise ; '^tdd cover, from
I.

derivatives, denoting generally

from

beden cover; 8(^ldoel mallet, from f(f)Iagen beat; f(f)lteen lock; gliigel wing, from ^mtnfly.''

6(^IiiffeI key,

216
a.

DEEIVATION.

[408-

But a great many nouns

lost or

in the

language ending in

el

are

from

unknown

roots,
;

and therefore have the value of

primitive words (407.2) some of these are feminine or neuter as are also some others, whose gender is determined by their
signification.

Besides forming the infinitives of all verbs (237.1a), 3. n. which, when used as ordinary nouns, are neuter (340), en is the suffix of derivation of a considerable class of masculine nouns, as 35iffen bit, from bei^en Ute; (^xdbm ditch, from Qxdbtn dig ;

d)aben harm, from

f(!)aben injure.
eti,

a. Of the numerous words of obscure etymology in are neuter, but none are feminine.

a few

4. r. This suffix forms numerous masculine nouns denoting an actor; thus, Steiter ri^der, from reiten ride; Tlakx painter, from malen paint; Xanjer dancer, from tanjen dance; 33d(!er baker, from baden bake. With these are closely akin a few names of instruments, as 33o^rer auger, from bol^ren bore; gel* ger pointer, from geigen point.

Of the older words ending in er, and requiring to be a. reckoned as primitives (407-2), many are feminine or neuter.
b.

Jr also forms classes of derivative

nouns from nouns

see 410.3.
5. Sing forms from verbs chiefly masculine nouns denoting the recipient of the verbal action thus, i^mhlim^ foundling, from ^nhm find; 2t^xlinQ pupil, from Itl^xm teach ; (BmQiinQ suckling, from f dug en suckle.
:

a.

For the derivatives

9^i [ni].

in ling

from nouns and

used
in

adjectives, see

409.II.4, 410.6.
6.

This suffix

is chiefly
;

German

to

form

much less often, like the corabstract nouns from verbs responding English ness, to produce similar derivatives from adjectives (see 409.11.5). Such abstracts come especially from
derivative verbs

and those compounded with inseparable

prefixes, as be, er, t)er ; sometimes seeming to be formed from the participle rather than the simple verbal root. Like all

abstract nouns, they

may admit

of use also as concretes, or

Examples are gcugni^ testimony, from geugen testify; inberni^ hindrance, from l^inbern hinder; S3egrdbni| burial, frombegraben bury; @retgnt occurrence, from ereignen occur; 33erl^dltni^ relation, from t)er6allen stand related;
pass wholly over into such.

408]

DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

217
(SJefattQ*

ni6 prison,

(^t^ianhm^ confession, from gefte^en (geftanben) confess; from gefangen imprisoned.

a. The greater number of nouns in nt^ [nt] are neuter, but a score or more of them are feminine, especially such as have retained more fully their abstract meaning. A few, as @rf|)arni^, (Jrfenntrti^, are feminine when used abstractly, but neuter as

concretes.

These are two different forms of the same which at first and more properly formed nouns from nouns, but whose existing derivatives are to be referred almost exclusively to verbal roots, and are akin in meaning with those in rii|. el is only used in concretes. Thus, (B^idfal fate, from f^ttfen send; ^xx']ai error, from trren wander; Ueberbleibfel remnant, from iiBerbleiben remain over; iRcit^fel [Sldtfel] riddle, from ratten [raten] guess.
7.

(Sal,

fel.

original sufBx,

a.

Derivatives in

|al

and

jel

in fal (^rangfal, 9J^uI)fal, iriibfal),

are neuter, excepting two or three which may also be used as

feminine
8.

and

bet topfel stopper.

Ung. This suffix is nearly equivalent in meaning and application with our ing forming verbal nouns (infinitives in ing), but is peculiar in that it is hardly used except with derivative

and

jective genitive

it forms admit an object (obnearly as regularly as the verbs from which they come. Many of the nouns in ung, hke other abstracts, pass over into concrete use and such as come from reflexive verbs have an intransitive force. Examples are giil^rung

transitive verbs.
:

The nouns

216.27i)

leading, conduct, 33elel)rung instruction, (Srfinbung invention, 35er= gebung forgiveness, 3Bcmer!ung remark, 33ebeutung meaning, ^e=

megung
instruct,
a.

mx)tion,

^eigimg affectionfrom
on.

fii^ren

lead,

bele^ren

and so

The

derivatives in ung are feminine without exception.

9. Besides the suffixes above detailed, there are a few of infrequent use such are anb (properly the old participal ending),
:

in eilanb Savior,

from

!)eilen

heal;

id)t,

in ^el)rtd}t sweepings,

sweep, etc. ; at^^ [at], in Sierat^ [3istat] ornament, enb, in ^ugenb virtue, from taugeu be of gieren decorate; and one or two others, of too little consequence to -be value worth noting, cftaft (410.7) and t{)um [turn] (410.8) also form from verbal roots two or three derivatives, as 2Bauber](^aft,
!e!)ren

from from

25^adi3tl)um

[2Ba^glum],

218
409.
1.

DERIVATION.

[409-

Nouns derived from

That the

Adjectives.

is'

number and of any gender, capable of use directly as a noun, still retaining its adjective declension, was pointed out above (at 129), and needs no further
1.

adjective, of either

notice.
2. A few nouns are derived from adjectives without a suffix, being identical with the adjective theme, but being declined as independent (neuter) substantives: such are SfJotl) [3tDt] red, riin green, 9ie(i)t right, (S)ut property, goods,

n. Nouns derived by the aid of suffixes. 1. ^. The suffix e forms feminine abstracts (convertible into concretes) from primitive adjectives, the vowel of which is
always modified
if

capable of

it.

Thus, roe greatness,

;

^iitc

goodness, Streue truth, ^ief e depth

from gro^

great, etc.

This suffix is ^he same with our head and hood (in 2. cit. Godhead, manhood, etc.), and forms feminine abstracts both from nouns (see below, 410.5) and from adjectives. Thus, grei* ):\t[i freedom, ^Blinb'^eit blindness, ^ibtxntjdi stupidity ; from frei
free etc.
3. ^eit is originally the same suffix with l^eit, taking the place of the latter after most primitive adjectives ending in el and er,

and

after all those

(Jitelfcit

Thus,

^xUiqUM from eitcl vain,

formed by the suffixes Imr, ig, 1x6) and jam. vanity, 33itter!eit Utterness, ^an!6ar!eit gratitude, cheapness, ofIi(i)!eit courtesy, ^arfamfcit economy;
etc.

To many

adjectives, the additional ad-

jective suffix tg (415.9) is added, with fcit after it, instead of, or along with, fcit alone: thus, from ficin small we have both
0einl^eit
);)a\i

and

^leintgfett;

steadfast, 6tanbl^afttgfeit;

from juJ3 sweet, ii^igfeit; from ftanb= from ixt\x[Q^ faithless, 2:reuIo{ig!eit.

4.

Sing forms a few masculine personal nouns from adjectives

thus, grcmbling stranger, Siingling youth; from fremb strange, iung young. For derivatives with ling from verbs and nouns,

see 408.111.5, 410.6.

5. 5^t^ [ni]

jectives

(see 408.III.6) forms only four nouns from adnamely, ginfltintB darkness, (Bc^eintnijj secrecy, SBilb*
(SleicC)nife

nt^ wilderness,
6.

likeness.

^aft

is chiefly

employed

in

forming nouns from noims

only a few adjectives admit it, as ^emetnf(f)aft community, (5Jcf angenjcf)af t imprisonment, igenfd^aft pecuKarif?/; from gemetn common, etc. For the derivation etc, of fc^aft see below, 410.7.
(see 410.7);

410]
7.

DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
%t[^
;

219
from

from

%f)t\l [%t\X]

part, forms fractional numerals

ordinals
8.

see 207.2.
[turn].,

^l^um

like fd)aft, is a suffix applied chiefly to

nouns;

see below 410.8.

A few adjectives
from

take

it,

as 9teid)t'5um wealth,

(^XQtni^nm property ;
9.

reic^ rich, eigen oivn.

Yet rarer

suffixes are uncj

(compare

408.III.8, 410.9) in

x^t\tnr\Q fortress,

from

bid thick; ut^ [ut] in ^(rmut^ poverty, Sugetib youth, from jung young.

feft

strong;

ic^t,

in idi(^t thicket,

from

from arm poor;

enb in

410.

Nouns derived from Nouns.

These are equivalent suffixes, forming from 1. (J^en, lein. nouns (always with modification of the vowel of the latter, if it be one admitting modification) neuter diminutives thus, ^m^ rfien little Iwuse, Wdnn^tn little man, mannikin, ^nciblein little hoy,
:

58u(^Iein

little

hook.

a. These suffixes correspond to the English diminutive endings kin and ling (in gosling, duckling, etc.). (S^l)en belongs more to the northern dialects of German, lein (often shortened in popular use to el or le) to the southern but in the literary language their respective use is mainly determined by considerations of euphony, and many words admit the addition of either.
;

h. The words formed by these suffixes often add to their meaning as diminutives, or substitute for it, an implication of intimacy or tenderness. Some of them have a well-established value as independent words such are grdulein young lady, Miss, Wdh^tn girl, Wdnn^tn and 2BeiB(^en 'male and female of an
:

animal
2.

species.

@t.

(408.III.1).

The foreign origin of the suffix et was explained above As added to nouns, it indicates especially the state,
;
:

also sometimes the place where an occupation is carried on thus, 3dgerei sportsmanship, from 3dger hunter; ^xndtxdprinting-estahUsliment, from Cruder printer. In a few words it has a collective force thus, 3leiterei cavalry, from 9teiter rider. condition, or occupation of a person
:

a.

As

it is itself

accented, this suffix

was added most

;

easily to

unaccented terminational syllables, as el and er and there are but few words as ^btet ahhacy, 35ocitei hailiwick in which it is appended to radical syllables. Being oftenest used after er, it has come to assume er in many c'&s s as a prefix to itself, forming a kind of compound suffix erci, which is freely used with

220
words accented on the
childishness,

DERIVATION.

[410-

final: thus, fladerei slavery^ ^inberci

etc.

S^elmerei roguery; from flat) slave,

6. Especially in its recent derivatives, ei is apt to convey a disparaging impUcation for example, 3urt[teret lawyer's doings, as compared with 3uri))rubeng jurisprudence.
:

3. @r. a. Besides the numerous derivatives which it forms from verbs (408.111.4), cr makes many names of a personal agent from nouns expressing the thing dealt with or acted upon as, (BariQn singer, from 6anQ song; deafer shepherd, from 6d)af sheep ; Partner gardener, from arten garden.
h. It is also added to names of countries and towns, to indicate a native or inhabitant of the same thus, d^tDeijer Switzer,
:

33erUner inhabitant of Berlin, geipgiger

jectives: see 415.5.

man from

Leipzig.

These nouns are then frequently employed as uninflected adc. For the same purpose, it is sometimes combined with Latin endings, forming compound suffixes, as aner and enjer : thus, ^merifaner America?!, ^tl^enien}er Athenian.

d. After nouns, as after verbs, it converted into net: thus, locEner ^arfner harper, from arfe harp.

is in

a few cases irregularly

hell-ringer,

from

^lodfe hell;

e. It forms a small number of mascuhnes answering to feminmes in e thus, 2Bitttt)er [2Bittt)er] widower, from SBittlDe [SGSittDe] widow; dauber cock-pigeon, from Xaxxhz dove.
:

4. 3n (sometimes spelt inn). This sufiBx forms feminine from masculine appellations: thus, ^irtin shepherdess, from irt shepherd; ^ijniflin queen, from ^onifi king; greunbin fcTiiale friend, ^bc^in female cook, fiotDin lioness, grangbfin French

woman,

33erlinertn

woman

of Berlin.

It is also

added

to titles
:

to signify the wife of the person to

whom

the

title

belongs

as,

$f arrerin pastor's

3n

wife, ^rofeff orin Mrs. Professor. usually requires modification of the radical vowel,

but

there are (as the examples show) numerous exceptions.

5. cit,

like

collectives,

our head and hood, forms abstracts, and a few from nouns as well as from adjectives (409.11.2):
%))ox1cint folly, 9)^enfd^=

thus,
l^eit

(Siott^eit Godhead, ^mhtitxt childhood, humanity, @etftli^!eit clergy.

6. StnQ forms a few masculine personal names from nouns, as from verbs (408.III.5) and adjectives (409.11.4) such are ^dl^r*
:

ling yearling, giiid^tling fugitive,

unftUng favorite.

221

411]
7.

DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
a.

^^aft is the same with our ship (in lordship, worship, and is derived from ]^a^tr\ shape, create; it signifies primarily the shape or make of anything, then its character, office, rank, and the like: thus, ^xtnnh\d)a^i friendship, ^efanntfc^aft
etc.),

acquaintance, 55ormimbf(^aft guardianship. are of the feminine gender.

b.

All its derivatives

It

forms also a number of collectives:

tenerf(^aft body of servants,

as, ^riefterj(^aft

priesthood,

(SJefeII](i)aft

company,

Sanbf(^aft landscape.
8. ^!^um [turn], our dom (in kingdom, wisdom, etc), is also a noun, of obscure derivation, but of meaning and application as a suffix nearly akin with those of fc^aft (above, 7). Its derivatives are neuter, with only two or three exceptions (namely 3rrtl)um, 9letc[)t^um, and, according to the usage of some, 33e* tDettl)um and 2[Bad)t^um), which are masculine. It forms nouns signifying character, rank, or authority, which then, in a few cases, come to mean that over which authority is exerted thus, 3f?tttertftum chivalry, ^apftt^^um papacy, g^rtflentftum Christendom, ^oniotl^um kingdom, giirftent^um principality.
:

words are x\^ in dnf erid^ from gal^ne banner, etc. UHQ in one or two collective words like SBalbuttQ woodland, from 2SaIb forest; atft [at] in eimat^ Iwme, from ^eim home. 5^tB [ni] (408.III.6) appears to form a derivative or two from nouns, as in 33unbnt& covenant, from 33unb tie; also jal (408.111.7), as in 9Jlu^fal distress, from 5Jlii^e toil.
9.

Suffixes forming a few isolated

gander, from
;

^an

goose; ga^nrid) ensign,

411.
I.

Nouns formed by means of prefixes.

very large number of nouns contain as their initial elements the verbal prefixes, both separable and inseparable For the most part, however, they are not formed as (297). nouns by means of those prefixes, but are derivatives, according to the methods explained above (408), from verbs compounded separably or inseparably. The only exceptions are, a
considerable class formed by Qt (below, II.l), and an occasional anomalous case like ^Inp'^e rising ground, from ^b1)t height.

n. The proper prefixes forming noims are very few in number, namely as follows
1.

e.

T^is

common

ative nouns, both

prefix forms a large number of derivfrom nouns and from verbs, having in general

a collective or frequentative character.

Thus

; :

222

DERIVATION.

[411-

a. Collectives from nouns, generally with modification of vowel, sometimes with other more irregular vowel changes such are ^eftrau(?^ shrubbery, from traud) shrub ; etr)ol! cloudmass, from 2BoIfe cloud; (^ebtrg or ebir(^e mountain-range, from

SBerg

mountain; (^z^zhn plumage, from ^ttm feather.

b. A few collective or associative personal appellatives, from nouns or verbs, in which (je has nearly its original meaning (307-5) of with; thus, ^efpiele playfellow, from ipielen play ^efd^rte companion, from \d\)xtn go; eliatter godfather, from SSater father; (Sef(f)n)i[ter brothers and sisters, from (5(f)tt)efter

sister.
c.

From

of the verbal action

verbs, nouns signifying either the means or the effect thus, (S^e^or sense of hearing, from l^oren
:

hear;
bitten
d.

weapon, from tt)el)rcn defend; ^ebet prayer, from ^fc; ^zmalht painting, from ma\zu paint.
(^txot1:\t

From

verbs, frequentative or intensive abstracts, or

:

nouns

significant of the verbal action

thus, (^ejprdd^ conversation,

from

fprec^^en

iprdnge pageantry,

speak; efpott mockery, from fpotten mock; (^e= from prangen make a show; (SJetofe din, from

tofen roar.

Eemarks.

e.

These are the leading uses of the prefix

it

ge

but

in not a few of the derivatives

forms,

its effect is

too indistinct

or various to be brought under any classification.

f. As the examples show, the words formed with ge exhibit the gradation as well as the modification of vowel, and are either without suffix, or take one of the simpler suffixes (408.11.), especially e. In many words, this e may be either added or omitted.

g. Excepting the class under b, above, which are masculine, the nouns formed with ge are nearly all neuter. Masculine are only about a dozen (ebrauc^, ^ebanfe, efafleti, e'^alt, (^enit^,

eru(^, (^efang, efc^marf, ^eftan!, etrinn, ^eminnft [@ett)inft]); feminine, the same number ((SJeberbe, ^ebiibr, ^eburt, (^ebulb,
(i^efaftr,

^emetnbe, ^eniige,

^ej(f)t(^te, CS5ef(^tt)ul]t, (S5eftalt,

emalt,

^etDdbr).
7i. Afew nouns, as ^IM luck, happiness, ^laube the prefix ge abbreviated to a simple g.

belief,

contain

2. Wi^. This prefix is the same with the English mis, and has a similar office. Its value is rather that of a compounded element than of a prefix. It takes always the principal accent, and does not affect the gender of the nouns to which it is

414]
prefixed.

DEEIVATIYE NOUNS.
Thus,
^Jli^Qriff

223
mwdeed,
^Jli^Qunft

mistake,

5)Ziffetl^at

disfavor, ^J^tpeT^agen discomfort.

as iu English, the negative prefix. It is used with in our language, always taking the accent, without affecting the gender it either signifies actual negation, or impUes something unnatural, repugnant, or inju3.

Un

is,

nouns more often than

Thus, Unre(^t wrong, Unbanf ingratititde, Ungliid misrious. fortune, Unfutn nonsense; Unmenfc^ unnatural monster, Ungeftalt misshapen form, Unt^at misdeed.
4.

Ur.

This

is,

as has been already pointed out

(307.4:),

the

same word

originally with the inseparable prefix

er,

mately identical with au out. In a few words it still ing akin with that of er thus, Urtfteil [Urteil] judgment (ert^eilen [erteilen] assign), Urlaub leave (txiavihiw permit), Urfunbe document, Urfprung origin, and so on. But in most of the derivatives which it forms it has an intensive force, with the distinct implication of originality or primitiveness thus, Urfa(f)e cause (original or fundamental thing), UriDelt primitive world, UrBilb archetype,
: :

and ultihas a mean-

Hrflrojiuater greatgrandfather.
a. Ur always takes the accent, and it leaves unchanged the gender of the word to which it is prefixed.

is identical in derivation and meaning with our prefix and denotes what is eminent or superior in its kind. In respect to accent and gender, it is like the three prefixes last
5.

^rg

arch,

treated

of.

Thus, raenQcl arc/t angel,

rgl^ersoG arch duke, ^rgbieb

arch-thief.

the same with the inseparable prefix ent appears in the present language only in 5lnttD0rt answer (from SSort word) and ^ntli^ countenance.
6.

%\\\, originally

(307.3),

412. From other parts of speech than those treated above, nouns are only with the greatest rarity formed directly, or otherwise than through the medium of derivative adjectives or verbs. Such words as D^iebenmfl lowland, from nieber (adverb) down, and ^nnung guild, from in in, are anomalies in the German system of word-derivation.

DEEIVATION OF ADJECTIVES.
413.

Primitive Adjectives.
primitive nouns
(407),

Primitive adjectives, Uke divided into two classes

may be

224
1.

DEKIVATION.

[414-

Simple monosyllabic adjectives, the evidences of whose

:

originally derivative character are effaced

thus, gut goodf lang

hng, arm poor,

l^art

hard,

Qxm

green.

2. Adjectives containing an evident element of derivation, and analogous with those derived from known primitives, but com-

ing from roots which are

ful, eben even, bunfel dark.

now

lost

thus, Irage lazy, tjdkx cheer-

a. Some of these, as of the "primitive" nouns (407.2a), admit of being traced to more primitive roots by the researches of comparative philology.

414.

Adjectives derived without Suffix or Prefix.

Adjectives coming from verbal roots by simple gradation of see the radical vowel (Ablaut), without a suffix (hke nouns examples are brac^ fallow, from 408.1.)> ^^^ very few in German Bred^en breakup; glatt smooth, from Qkiknslip; hid thick, from the root of gebeil^eti thrive; fledged, from fliegcn fly.
:

^M

415.

Adjectives derived by

Sivffix.

As the various endings forming adjectives are, almost without

will

exception, used in derivation from different parts of speech, it be more convenient to treat all the uses of each one to-

gether, taking the suffixes

1.

up

in their alphabetical order.

33ar.

This suffix
It

is

bdren bear, carry.

was

regarded as a derivative from the verb of infrequent use in ancient German,

and only as attached

a.

to nouns.

Examples

of its use with

nouns are

btenftbar serviceable

(servwe-bringing), \x\x^ihax fruitful (fruit-bearir\^), \\xx^i^ax terrible, Qangbar current, fid^tbar visible.
b. In modern usage, it forms a large class of derivatives from verbs (almost always transitive), having the meaning of our adjectives in able, or indi?ating capability to endure the action of the verb thus, e^ar eatable, gente^bar enjoyable, f^eilbar [tetlbarj divisible, unbett)o^)nbar uninhabitable, unfe^lbar incapable of
:

failing.
c.

evident,

Very rarely, it is added from offen open.

to

an adjective: thus,

offcnBar

The suffix en forms (from nouns) adjectives de2. @n, ern. noting material or kind: thus, golben golden, tooUtn woolen, trben earthen, eid|en oaken. To words ending in er, only n is added
thus, fupfern of copper, filbern of silver, lebern leathern.

Out of

415]

DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.

225

the frequency of this combination has grown in recent use the form erit, which was perhaps at first applied only to nouns forming a plural in er: thus, plgern wooden, from ,ol3 (pi. biger) wood but is now used indiscriminately, requiring modification

of the vowel of its primitive

CXfjon), ftd!)Iern

thus, Bleiern leaden, tpnern of clay

of

steel (tat)!).

These endings, forming respectively the past 3. @n, enb. participle of verbs of the Old conjugation, and the present participle of all verbs, are

proper adjective sufiixes, but need only be mentioned here, as their uses form a part of the subject of verbal conjugation, and have been already explained (see 349
etc.).

These are the endings by which are formed, from 4. %t, eft. simple adjectives, adjective themes of the comparative and superlative degree (see 133 etc.) also, ft forms ordinal numerals
:

from cardinals (see 203). The patronymic nouns formed by the suffix er from 5. (Jr. names of countries or towns (410.36) are very commonly used
also with the value of adjectives. When so used, they are not subject to declension, but are treated as if they were com-

pounded with the noun which they qualify. Thus, 33erliner 33Iau Berlin blue, \iCi^ tra^burfier ^Jliinfter tlie Strasburg catJiedral, ber
Seipstger 3}leffe of the Leipsiofair.

conjugation

forms the past participle of verbs of the New or weak see 246, 349 etc. This suffix is regarded as derived from ^aben have, 7. aft. or ^aften cling, indicating primarily the possession or adhesion of the quality designated by the words to which it is attached.
6.

(5t

a.

It

forms derivative adjectives especially from nouns

sig-

nifying quality: thus,tugenbl)att virtuous, funbl)aft sinful, (c^rerfl^aft frightful, ftanbl)aft steadfast; but also, not infrequently, from names of persons and things thus, mannl^aft manful, meifterl^af
:

masterly, letb^aft bodily.

b. It is added to only a few verbal roots resident, fc^ma^ftaft loquacious.
c.
:

as in

tt)of)nl^aft

Only three adjectives admit

it:

namely,

bo^l^aft malicious,

true. franfftaft six^khj, n)at)rf)aft

d.

To

'^aft

is

Ietb!)aftig, tt)af)rt)aftiG

the suffix
"^aftlgtext

!eit,

sometimes added the further ending tg, as in and this addition is always made before forming abstract nouns (409.11.3) thus, ^ugenb*
; :

virtuovsness.


226
DERIVATION.
[415-

8. 3^t forms adjectives only from concrete nouns, especially such as denote material: thus, fteintcf)t stony, bornitf)t thorny^ Its office is hardly distinguishable from that of i(| f aljid^t salty. (below, 9) and, in present use, its derivatives are almost superseded by those in ig, and are but seldom met with. Only t^ort(^t
;

foolish is in familiar use,

and is also peculiar in exhibiting the modification of vowel, and in being formed from a personal appellation
9.

(%):}0x fool).

etc.),

This suffix is the same with our y (in stony, holy, easy, and forms, from every part of speech, a very large number of German adjectives, which are constantly increasing by new derivatives. Thus
39a.

From

nouns, of every class

fc^ulbtfl

thus, md(i)tio mighty, giinftig

blutig

favorable,

guilty,

burftig thirsty,

bloody,

mdfferig

watery, hxdtbpfiQ thickheaded, langarmig longarmed.

h.

From

verbs

thus, fdumig dilatory, nac^giebig yielding, ge=

fallig obliging.
c. From adjectives, in a few cases only: thus, giitig kind, Doflig complete; and from the possessive and other pronominal adjectives, as meirtig mine, etc. (159.5), jelbig self-same (169.3), jenig

yon
d.

(168), einig only,

some

(189).

namely prepositions, adverbs, and adverbial conjunctions of various kinds thus, uorig former, from t)or before; iibrig remaining, from iiber over; jefeig present, from \t^t now; :^eutig of to-day, from ^eute to-day; bortig of that place, from bort there; abermalig repeated, from abermal^ again; be^faHftg relating to the case in hand, from be^faES in that case.
indeclinable words,
:

From

e.

The addition
fett

suffix

has been noticed above

; ;

of tg to other adjective endings before the (409.II.3) also to f)aft in form;

ing adjectives (above, Id) to adjectives and nouns in forming and to certain nouns in forming derivative verbs (405.11. 3) derivative adjectives (below, 15e,/).
/. 3g added to the suffix jal of certain nouns (408.III.7), along with modification of the vowel (written e instead of d), forms a combination having the aspect of a separate suffix, felig thus,
;

tniiftjeUg

painful,

from

^Jlii^fal distress

triibf dig

afflictive,

from

Sriibfal affliction.

And
:

the combination
to
gliitff dig

is in fact

treated as an

independent

suffix,
]

by being added
feinb hostile;

derivatives in
talk.

al

thus,

blissful,

feinbfdtg inimical,

from

words which do not form from ^liicf happiness rebfdig talkative, from reben

: :

415]
g.

DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.

22?

A number of
jelig

adjectives in

ig

are from lost roots, and so

have
thus,

in the present

language the value of primitive words:

luxuriant.

happy,

u|)))ig

10. 3jrf).

This

is

the

same with our English

suffix ishi

and

is

used in much the same way.

forms adjectives from noims of different classes thus, especially from proper names of persons, places, and peoples
a.

It

as,

lutftertfc^

Lutheran, preu^ifd^ Primsian,

baierijd)

Bavari^an,

jpanijc^

Spanish;ivom appellations of
:

places, persons,

and

animals

as, :^immli]c^ heavenly, \iah\\\6) townish, finbif c^ childish,

bicl)teri)(^

biebij^ thievish,

poetical, l^ixnhx]^)

doggish; and from a

few abstracts or verbal nouns:

as, aBergldubijcf) superstitious,

argtDO^nifd) suspicious, neibijc^ envious.

It often takes, in adjectives derived from the classical b. languages, the place of our endings ic, ical, al, ian, etc. as, ftiftorifd) historic or historical, !ritif(^ critical, logifi^ logical, inbiji^
:

Indian.
c.

In a few words,
Wd),

ijd)

compared with
jectives:

much

has a somewhat disparaging sense as as in the corresponding Eniilish ad-

thus,

finbifd) childish

and

ttnblid) childlike,

tDcibijc^

womanish and
d.

tt)eibUd)

feminine.

ifc^ with proper names of places and with attended with some irregularities of detail, in respect to the form of the theme to which the suffix is appended these cannot be dwelt upon here.

The use

of

foreign words

is

11. 2ei forms indeclinable adjectives from numerals and words related with numerals, which, before it, take the ending er: thus, einerlei of one sort, mam^txkx of many sorts, aflerlei ofaU
sorts.

sort,

The lei is by origin the genitive of a feminine noun, meaning and the preceding er is the proper ending of the adjective
it:

qualifying

hence the treatment of

its

derivatives as in-

declinable words.
12. Sid).

godly,

etc.),

deriv itives.
like

This suffix corresponds with our like, ly (in godlike, and, like these, forms a very large number of It is historically the same word with the adjective
gleid))
:

(German

compare

363.3a.

Sic^tis also

added
to

to adjectives,

perhaps as a mere variation

of

lilf).

a.

It is

added

nouns
:

of various classes (usually with

mod-

ification of their vowel)

thus, mannlid) manly, Ddterlic^ fatherly.


228
fiinftli^ artful,

BEEIVATION.

: ;

[415^
id^rlid) yearly,
qeift.-

^tx^M) hearty, qIMIx^ happy,

U(^ spiritual.

It forms from other adjectives (always with modified h. vowel) adjectives that have in general a diminutive meaning

thus,

rotftlic^

[xbiM}] reddish, jduerlii^

somewhat sour,

Idnglid;

But some of its derivatives are free from the diminutive implication and a considerable number (363.3a) are used only in an adverbial sense, the ending having the same value as the English ly in similar derivatives from adjectives. In a few wordsas fold), tueld), our such, whichit is greatly
longish.
;

corrupted.

and either in an c. It is appended to many verbal roots active sense (especially with intransitive verbs) thus, fc^dblirf)
;

harmful, hztiaxxlid) persistent, fterblic^ mortal, or, yet more often, in a passive sense:
believed, credible,
t)erdc^tlt(f)

erfreuUci^

agreeable
to be

as QlaubUd^

sible, unfdglid)

unspeakable.

contemptible, begreifli(| comprehenOf this class of passive derivatives,

:

many are

speakable.

e. g. there is no dglic^ f as thus used, is closely equivalent with bar (above, lb), and it is in part a matter of arbitrary custom, or determined only by euphony, which suffix shall be employed in other cases, derivatives are formed with both, with a more or

in use only with the prefix un

2\d},

less distinct difference of meaning.

13. am is our some (in wholesome, noisome, etc.), and is supposed to be ultimately the adjective same (now lost in German). It forms derivatives
a. From nouns, mostly of an abstract character \am fearful, gemaltfam violent, miiftfam laborious.
b.
:

thus, furd)t=

From

docile, lenffam

verbal roots manageable.

thus, aufmerffam attentive, folfifam

c. From a few adjectives mon, langfam slow.

thus, einfatn lonely, Qemeinfam com-

close,

14 %, besides one or two isolated adjectives, like bid)t thick, from the root of Qebeil)en thrive, forms the class of ordinal
15.

adjectives from numerals below twenty (203).

There are certain words forming classes of derivative

adjectives which have not yet (like Bar, ltd), jam, above) lost their independence of form and meaning sufficiently to be

reckoned as adjective-suffixes, although approaching very near

in value to such.

The most

noticeable of

them are

416]
a.

DEEIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.
2d
loose,

229

our

less,

forming numerous adjectives of depriva-

tion

thus, enblog endless, "^erslo^ heartless, treuIo faithless. These adjectives, like those ending in l^aft, always add ig before feit: thus, %x^nio\\Q,hii faithlessness.
:

b.

35oII fidl,

our

ful, in thankful, fearful, etc.

examples are

Ietbt)oII
c.
rei(i)

sorrowful, gebanfentioE thoughtful.

rich:

9teid)

examples are

Uebretd) gracious

{2khthve), Qt\\U

witty, full of esprit.

d.

%a^

compartment, division, forms multiplicatives with

indefinite (204)
:

numeral words, cardinal or

examples are ge^n-

fad) tenfold, Dielfac^ manifold.

But e. gait fold is used in the same manner with fac^. multiplicatives with fait simply are antiquated and unusual; they now regularly take the additional adjective ending ig
(above, 9), before which the vowel of fait (except in two or three words, as mannlfifalttj) is modified thus, geI)nfaItiQ ten-fold, t)iel:

fdltig
f.

manifold.
is,

^rtig

like

fdlticj,

by the adjective

suffix ig,

an extension of a noun, %xim,anner, kind, and forms a considerable class of

derivatives denoting sort or

manner

thus, nebelartig cloudlike,

frembartig of strange fashion.

Other similar formations are the foreign noun gorm form (Lat. forma) : thus, f ormig, from miitftig [miitig] from g}^ut^ [9Jlut] infelformig island-shaped; mood, disposition : as, fnebmutl)ig [friebmiitig] disposed to peace md^ig, from ^a^ measure: as, rec^^tmd^ig lawful; etc.

416.

Adjectives derived by Prefix.

The prefixes forming adjectives are, in general, the same with those forming nouns (411), namely ge, mife, un, ur, erg, together
with
1.

Be. 35e

forms a very few adjectives, as

Berett

ready, Bequem

convenient.
2. a. (S5e aids to form past participles (243.3) and sometimes from nouns which do not furnish any other of the parts of a
;

derivative verb:
geljfirnt

thus,

geftiefelt

booted (provided with boots),

geftirnt starred.

horned,

gefittet

mannered,

b. It also forms, either without suffix or with ig, a class of adjectives from verbs: thus, gene'^m acceptable (nel)men take),

geml^ certain (roiffen know), geldufig current (laufen run), ^etpdrtig expectant (tpavten wait).


230
c.
(S)c

DERIVATION.
is

[416-

prefixed to a few simple adjectives without noteof their meaning thus, f|ere(^t righteous, (^etreu faithful, geflretiQ severe. Ieid) like contains the same prefix abbreviated.

worthy change

The other
nouns: thus
3.

prefixes

have the same value

in adjectives as in

Wx^ forms such

adjectives as mt^Qiinftig grudging, m\^=

trautjd) distrustful.
4. Un forms negative adjectives, as un!lar unclear, unhappy,

ungliicfUd^

a. That some of the adjectives formed with un have no corresponding positives has been noticed above (415.12c).
h. According to some authorities, the words formed with un always have the principal accent on that prefix others except compounds of participles, as unbeloftnt unrewarded, and of verbal derivatives with the suffixes bar, Ii(^, fam, as unbenf'bar inconceivable, unenblid) unending, unbulb'fam intolerant.
:

5. Ur forms directly only a very small number of adjectives, from other adjectives, adding to the latter an intensive meanthus, urplo^licf) very ing, or an implication of primitiveness
:

sudden, uralt of primitive antiquity.

6. ^rj is prefixed, in a half -humorous way, to a few adjectives, with intensive force: thus, ergbumm excessively stupid, ergfaul very lazy.

Derivation of the other Parts of Speech.

417. Of the remaining parts of speech, the adverbs are the only ones which are to any extent formed in classes, by means analogous with those above explained and they have been already sufficiently treated (363 etc.) under Adverbs. The derivation of the rest, so far as it is capable of being shown, is a matter for the lexicon to deal with, under each separate word.
;

WORD-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION. 418. A compound word is one that is made up ot two

more) independent words, each of which maintains in tlie composition its separate form and meaning. It is ijaade one word hj constanej^ of combination in prac(or

419]
tical use,

COMPOUND WOEDS.

231

by the absence of inflection except in the last member, and by being placed under the dominion of a
single principal accent.
a.

is distinguished from junge grau young the adjective j;ung being made indeclinable and receiving a marked accent. By this means a unity of form is given to the word, to which a unity of idea is then further added by attribution of the meaning virgin, which naturally grows out of the other, but yet is not the same with it.

Thus, SuttQfrau

woman by

b. As will appear hereafter (422.26 etc.), other members of a compound than the final one sometimes take an ending of de-

and superfluously, and without liability compound. There are also a few words which are arbitrarily written together as if compounds, while both their parts are declined in full, and they are not in fact of a different character from many collocations of words which the language writes separately such are berfelBe and berienige (168, 169), ^ol^erpriefter high-priest, etc.
clension, but irregularly

to further variation in the inflection of the

(422.1a).
c. All derivation and inflection begin with composition. The compound becomes in practical use an integral representative of the idea signified by it, its origin is more and more lost sight of, and it becomes liable to such alterations of form as more or less disguise its derivation thus, 3ungfrau has been in popular use abbreviated to 3ungfer; and

final

3ungl)err (iunger ^err young sir), in like manner, to 3uufer. And member of the compound happens to be one that in practice

if

the

is

ad-

ded to a large number of words, forming a considerable class of composite words, it may be turned into an ending, of derivation or inflection. Thus, britter jl^eit [Xdi] became the compound 2)vittt^ett [2)rittei(] third part, and this was contracted into S)ritte( and, the same being done with the other ordinal numerals, tel became a "suffix," forming fractionals from ordinals (207.2). The conjugational ending ten, in iDir l^otten we had, represents in like manner an originally independent conjugational form, taiumis (yet older dadamasi) we did, which has gone through a like process of abbreviation. Composition therefore forms, in the grammatical treatment of a language, an appropriate transitional subject between inflection and derivation on the one side, and collocation or arrangement on the other.
;

than

Compounds are very much more numerous in German and the liberty of forming new ones, after the model of those already in use, is much more freely conceded than with us. In making practical acquaintance with the Ian419.
in English,

232

COMPOSITION.

[419-

guage, therefore, we are constantly meeting with them, of every class from those in which the final member has almost acquired the value of a suffix (see above, 415.15), or in which the fact of composition is otherwise disguised (as in ^utigfer and 3un!er or in f olci) and m\^, see above, 415.12), to the chance combinations which each speaker or writer forms as occasion arises, and which are not to be found explained in any dictionary, however complete.

a.

Compounds
aft fire

and complexity unknown

fief ellfc^

are often also formed in German of a length in English thus, 5euert)erji(i)erunQ=

:

insurance company,

5^Drbfeef(^ifffa^rt

North Sea

navigation, Suftrbftrenfd}tt)inbfu(^t bronchial consumption, 9{eid)= Dberpoftamt^geitunfigf d)reiber editor of the imperial general postoffice
journal.
in technical

Such, however, are for the most part met with only and official language.

especially if it be a long and 6. The parts of a compound cumbrous one, or Uable to an incorrect division are sometimes separated by hyphens: thus, Seuert)erft(^erunfi=gefeflf(f)aft, or

No rules are to be definitely laid respecting this division, it being mainly left to the taste and choice of individual writers. Usage is also much at variance as regards the employment of capital letters for the separated parts of a compound noun some writing, for example, geuer* The preferable method is to avoid as 58erft(^erung=efeUf(f)aft. much as possible the multiplication of capitals.
8euer=t)erfi(^erimQ=9efeIIf(^aft.

down

Where two or more compound words having the same member would follow one another, it is the usage in German often to omit that member except in the last word,
c.

final

noting the omission in the other cases by a hyphen appended to the former member thus, alle Dnn= unb Sefttage eine Sciftre^ on all the Sundays and holidays of a year, in biefer baum= imb queHenleeren @inobe in this treeless and waterless desert, t)on ber fonn= unb fefttagiflen pagierfafirt of the promenade usual on Sundays and holidays. A similar liberty is even taken with words of foreign origin thus, al Df= unb ^efenfit)tt)affe as offensive and defensive weapon ; but it is not to be approved or imitated.
: :

Composition of Verbs.
420. The importance of compound verbs in the general grammatical system of German has rendered necessary their treatment under the head of verbal conjugation (296-313).

421]

COMPOUND NOUNS.

233

Only a brief recapitulation of the

called for here.
1.

different classes, therefore, is

Verbs are compounded with the inseparable

be, ent

prefixes

or emp,

er, (;e, \)cv, ^er

being conjugated,

in general, in the

same manner as when simple, but

losing the prefix ge of the past participle; retaining, See 302-7. also, their proper accent.

Verbs are compounded with a considerable number prefixes, simple and compound which prefixes, however, stand before the verbal form, and
2.

of separable

are written with

and participles
also,

when

it as one word, only in the infinitive or in the personal forms of the verb the sentence has the transposed arrangement.
:

The
a.

prefix

always

has the

principal accent.

See

298-301.
few of the separable prefixes, however namely, burc^, and miber or mieberform with some verbs inseparable compounds. See 308-11.
l^inter, iiBer, urn, unter,

3. Verbs are compounded with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs ; either closely, forming compound stems which are conjugated like simple roots, or loosely, forming stems which are conjugated after the manner of verbs with separable prefixes. See 312-313.
a. There is no fixed line separating compounds of the latter character from verbal phrases, and some combinations are treated indifferently as the one or the other thus, ^an! fagen or banffaQen express gratitude, talt finben or ftattfinben take
:

place.

Composition of Nouns.

421. With few exceptions (422.6& etc.), compound nouns are made up of a noun with a preceding limiting word. The final noun determines the gender and mode
of declension of the

of the

compound the preceding member compound has the accent.

;


234
1.

::

COMPOSITION.
Exceptions as regards gender are

[421-

Names of towns, which are neuter (61.2c), even when they are compounds whose final member is masculine or feminine
a.

thus, ba SSittenberg (ber ^Berg), ba aJlagbeBurG

h.

(bte 33urg).

Many compounds
:

of ber

9Jlutl^

^wi] mood,

spirit,

for example, bic ^nmutft [^^iimutl grace, bte muti) [^ernut] humility, bie SSe^mul!^ [SSeftmut] sadness.

are feminine

which ^e=

These
jectives,
c.

are,

by

origin, feminine abstracts

from compound ad-

which have

lost their suffix of derivation.

:

few special words thus, bic ^nttDort aiiswer (ba SBort ber ^itttt)Ocf) Wednesday (literally mid-week, from bie 2Bo(i)e week), which has taken the gender of the other names of week-days (61.2a) bie D^eunauge lamper-eel (Uterally nine-eyes, from ba ^uge eye) ; and ^bfc^eu horror is masculine, and egen= tf)eil [(^egenteil] opposite is neuter, while 6d)eu fear and 2:l)eil [^eil] part are now respectively used in general as feminine and
word),
;

masculine.
422.
1.

The

varieties of

compoimd nouns are

noun and a preceding qualifying ad-

Nouns made up

of a

jective: thus, S3ot(monb /u?Z moon, ^\iz\\km precious stone, ^od)gett wedding (lit. high time), ^urgtDeiie pastime (Ut. short while).
a. A very few nouns are written as compounds of this class, although the adjective is declined as an independent word:

thus,

.^ol)erprtefter

high-priest, gangetoeile tedium, el^eimerratft

[(^i1:itmzxxai]privy -counsellor (alBo :^aiigtDetle,(S5e^etmrat]^ [e^eim*

rat],
2.

as proper compounds).

Nouns made up
53u(!)brurfer

of a

noun and a preceding

@e((i)td^tf(^rei6er

limiting

noun
(ht.

thus,

bookprinter,

historian

^onbfc^uJ) glove (lit. hand-shoe), 2BetngIa wine-glass, 33aumtt)Dne cotton (lit. tree-wool), Sagbleben life by hunting, (Jic^Baum oak-tree.
history -writer),
c^ufle'^rer

school-teacher,

a.

The

relation of the first

noun to the second is oftenest that

;

relations, often

but it may stand in various other such as could not be expressed by any simple or, the two words case, without the use of words of relation may be in apposition with one another.
of a genitive dependent

on it

b.

Often the

first

noun

is

put formally in the genitive case

thus, ^bmQf)o):}n king's son, 2ar\h^mann countryman, 3[Birtl)^au

CIBirtl^au]

inn

(Ut. host's

house).


422]

COMPOUND NOUNS.

235

c. And even, by irregular imitation of such forms, the first noun takes an or e which does not properly belong to it as an independent word: thus, (^eburtStag birthday, ;^ieBeBrief

hveletter.
d. The first noun sometimes takes a plural ending thus, S3Uber6u(^ picture-book (lit. pictures-book), SSorterbud) dictionary (lit. words-book), ^Iciber)d)ranf clothes-press, SSaifen^au orphan
:

asylum
e.

(lit.

orphans' house), ^ageBucE) journal

(lit.

days-book).

These endings of declension are introduced in part for their meaning, in part for euphonic reasons; and insertions of a similar kind are occasionally made quite arbitrarily as, ^](?^er=
:

mittmorf)

Ash- Wednesday,

)etbelbeere heath-berry.

3. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding verbal root having the value of a qualifying noun or adjective thus, (5ing=
:

singing-bird, ^-Brennglag burning-glass, djreibfeber writingpen, tubirsimmer [Stubtergimmer] study-room,^(il\vi^i covetoust)OGel

ness
4.

(lit.

desire of having).

Nouns made up
:

of a

noun and a preceding

particle,

with

thus, ^u^enfeite outside, 3nlanb inland, ^u= lani final sound (of a word), Wximm]^ fellow-creature, SSorfteil
[^Sorteil]
5.

qualifying force

advantage

(lit.

excelling part).

Nouns made up

of

an

infinitive

and words dependent upon

it:

thus, ha ^nx\\(i)']dn the being by one's self, ba Sujpdtfommen These are unusual cases, and not employed the coming too late.

in dignified style.
6.

Compounds

of

a different and peculiar character, which

designate an object by describing

to
it,

some

peculiarity belonging

and which may be called possessive or characterizing compounds. Such are

a.

preceding limiting word as, ^al^Ifopf baldperson or thing having a bald head), 33lauftruTnpf bluestocking (person wearing such), c^reiftal^ bawler (lit. screamneck), 33ierecf square (lit. four-comers).
:

A noun with
(a

head

b.

An

adjective with preceding qualifying word:

(Ut.

as,

ber

Dlimmerf att the greedy-gut evergreen.

never satiated), ha Smmergriiu the

c. A verb with a following object, or other limiting word or phrase: as, Xaugenic^tg good-for-nothing, torenfrieb kill-joy (lit. disturb-peace), (^tellbidiein rendezvous (lit, make thine ap-


236
pearance),
closing
d.

COMPOSITION.
(5))rtngtitfelb
(lit.

[422into the field), ^eT^raug

romp

(lit.

jump
:

dance

turn-out).
as, (SJarau^

One or two more anomalous cases

end

(lit.

all

over).

Composition of Adjectives.

423.

Compound

adjectives are always

made up

of

an

adjective with a preceding limiting or qualifying word.

Their treatment, as regards declension, use as adverbs, and the like, is the same with that of simple adjectives. The first member of the compound takes the accent.
424.
1.

The

varieties of

compound
of

adjectives are
of

Adjectives

made up

two adjectives,

which the former

either is co-ordinate with the latter as in taubftumm deaf and dumb, !aiferIic^=!ontglt(ij imperial-royal or, much more often,

limits

it

in the

manner

of

an adverb

as, l^ellblau bright-blue,

tobtfran! [totfranf] deadly sick.

2.

Adjectives

made up of an adjective (usually a participle) and

:

a preceding adverb
meinenb
looking.
3.

as,

tBO'^lebel right-noble,

worshipful,

tt)o'f)I=

well-meaning,

jogenannt so-called,

meitaugfe^enb far-

Adjectives

made up
as,
f

of

an adjective and a preceding

needing

limiting

noun

(^neetDei^ snow-white, troftbebiirfttG

consolation, ei!alt ice-cold.

a.

A very frequent form

and
its

of this
:

compound

is

made up

of

participle

dependent noun
|)fli(^tt)ergef(en

as, !^cilbrtngenb salutary

(lit,

health-bringing),

duty-forgetting,

gottergeben god-

devoted.

as in compounds with a noun the form of a genitive or a plural thus, leben^fatt tired of life, loBen^lDurbig praiseworthy, ^offnungt)Dll
b.

The noun in such compounds,

(422.26-e), often takes

hopeful,
(lit.

riefengro^ gigantic

(lit.

giant-great),

!inberlo

childless

children-less).

Adjectives made up of an adjective and a preceding verbal having the value of a dependent noun thus, merf tDiirbtg remarkable (lit. worthy of noticing).
4.

root,

This form of compound is rare and exceptional, the infinitive being generally used, instead of the simple verbal root,


425]
5.

COMPOUND ADJECTIVES.

237

pecially

Adjectives formed by appending a suffix of derivation, esig (415.9), to the combination of a noun with a preceding

word (which combination is not itself in use as a compound noun) thus, t)ierfuig four-footed, Qro^l)er3ig great-hearted,
limiting
:

Soc^naftQ supercilious

(lit.

high-nosed).

Compositimi of Particles.
425. 1. The modes of formation of compound particles have been already sufficiently explained and illustrated, under the head of the different kinds of particles (see especially 365). Such particles are, in part, cases of compound words, analogous with those just treated of in part, phrases composed of independent and fully inflected words, which have simply run together into one by frequent usage in part, they are combina; ;

tions of particles.
2.

a.

Compound

particles of the last class,

and those

of the

second which are made up of a governing preposition and its governed case, are accented on the final member: thus, Driver'
t)

previously,
Bcrgab'
h.

l^ertior'
hill.

forth, gubem' besides,

uberl)aupt' in general,

down

Such, on the other hand, as are originally cases of comof a noun and a preceding limiting word, are accented on the first member thus, l)tm'mcl= tt)drt heavenwards, t)ie('mal often, fet'neSmeQg in no wise, bcr'geftalt in such wise.

pound words, or phrases composed

A few are accented on either the first or second member either indifferently, or according to a difference of meaning thus, alfo' or arfo accordingly^ c\'\Da or d\v a' perchance ; ciii'mal,
c.
;

and

when

ein

l^ier'mit,

means distinctly one, rather than a; bar'um, tDar'iim, when the emphasis rests on the pronominal element

and so

on.

d. There are occasional irregular exceptions to these rules of accentuation, which may be left to the dictionary to point out.

238

'CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES.

[42&

CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.
Introductory Explanations.

426. 1. A SENTENCE is a combination of words having completeness in itself as the expression of a thought.
2. It is composed of a subject, designating that of which something is asserted (inquired, desired), and a PREDICATE, expressing that which is asserted (inquired,

desired) of the subject.

a. That a thought cannot be signified or communicated without the combination of a subject and a predicate is not claimed (compare 391) but only that this combination is its full and regular mode of expression, the norm to which all expressed thoughts may be reduced, or of which they are to be regarded as variations.
;

h. The further division of the predicate, as above defined, into predicate and copula (the latter being always a person of jcin he: compare 316.1a,

for example, of er Uebt he loves into er ift liebenb he is loving though of value in the logical analysis of expression, is unimportant in grammatical analysis, and has no bearing upon the construction of the All verbs except feiit he (and even that, in some of its uses) sentence. contain the copula combined with a more or less complete predication some require more than others a of some action, state, or quaUty complement, to fill out their idea and make a significant predication a few (316.1), so especially as to be called "verbs of incomplete predication;" a transitive verb is in itself less complete than an intransitive, and so on.

remark)

is

composed of subject and predicate compared with a word, or a phrase not containing those two elements. A noun by itself suggests an object of
c.

The completeness

of a sentence as

a relative one

namely,

thought a noun with qualifying adjuncts implies certain things as standing in certain relations to one another, an object as invested with quaUties so also a verb by itself, or with adjuncts, calls up an intelligent conception in the mind and either, in certain circumstances, has all the value of a complete expression, because the mind of the hearer or reader understands, or intelligently supplies, whatever is wanting. But we do not feel that anything is really said until a verb and its subject are combined, until something is predicated of something.
;
:

d.

A sentence may signify only a small part

mind
of the speaker,

of the thought which

;

is

in the

and which he

sets out to express

it

may

require to be set in connection with other sentences in order to perform

427]
its full office,

SENTENCES.

239

as much as a word witli other words to form a sentence. And, in the development of language, a means is found by which individual sentences are so combined as to form a higher unity by which, instead of being merely set side by side, they are twined together into a complex sentence or period. This means is the conversion of independent sentences into dependent clauses, having the formal as well as logical value of parts of a sentence (see below, 435 etc.). For the simple sentence still remains the norm and unit of complete expression the dependent clauses have value only as they enter into the structure of such
:

icate.

a sentence, in the quality of adjuncts either to its subject or to its predThey themselves, then, though containing a subject and a
predicate,

are incomplete, because they distinctly imply a relation to

else,

something

which requires to be

also expressed.

427.

Sentences are of three fundamental kinds, as-

sertive, interrogative,

and

optative (or imperative).

interrogative, Thus, assertive, bu Itel)ft mi(^ thou lav est me optative, Itebe bu mi(^ love thou me! Uebft bu mid) lovestthoume?

a. Of only the first of these can it be truly said that it involves the predication of something of a subject. The relations of the three to one another are best developed by reducing them to the common form of dependent clauses, expressing what is affirmed, inquired, or desired by some defined speaker. Thus, we say of another, er be'^auptet, bafj bu il)n Hebft he asserts that thou lovest him; er fraflt (mill tDtffen), oh bu i^n IteBeft he asks (wants to know) whether thou lovest him; er tjerlangt, ha^ bu il^n "When, now, we come to iiebeft he requires that thou love him. speak in our own persons, we change id) be^aupte, 'tia^ bu mid) Iiel)ft Imaintain that thou lovest meinto bu lieBft mid) tlwu lovest me, the assertion of the assertion being usually a quite unnecessary formality id) mid mijfen, oB bu mid) liebcft I wish to know whether thou lovest me becomes liebft bu mid) lovest thou me ? the wish to know being intimated by arrangement and tone and id) t)er= lauQe, ha% bu mic^ liebeft I require that thou love me is changed into lieBe bu mid) love thou me ! the desire or demand being expressed by arrangement, tone, and appropriate verbal form. That is to say, the usage of language has established modes of expression by which the speaker can signify his desire to know, or his request or command, directly, without putting it necessarily, as he may do optionally, into the form of an asser; ;

tion.
6. All these kinds of sentence alike consist of a subject and a predicate (save that the subject of the imperative sentence is

240

CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES.

[427-

often omitted as superfluous, when of the second person, or representing the individual to whom the request or command is directly addressed). And the assertive sentence is properlyassumed as the norm or standard, of which the other two may be treated and explained as variations. The formal construction and logical office of the three c. kinds of sentence do not always correspond. A variety of modes of expression (338) may be used as intimations of a command a question may be expressed (432.16) in the form of an assertive sentence and an assertion may be implied in the asking of a question. d. The direct assertive force of an assertive sentence may be variously and greatly modified, either by the mode and tense of the verb or by adjuncts, so that the statement is made uncertain or hypothetical to any degree yet without affecting the grammatical character of the sentence. A negative sentence is only one variety of the assertive, in which, of two opposite and mutually exclusive things, one is affirmed by the denial of the other.
;
;

The subject of a sentence is always a subword that is to say, either a noun, or one of the equivalents of a noun (113) along with such ad428.
1.

stantive

juncts (109 etc.) as may be attached to tion and qualification.

it

for its limita-

2. The bare predicate of a sentence is always a personal form of a verb, since this alone has predicative force (232, 314) it may be accompanied by the various modifying adjuncts (314 etc.) which it is capable of
;

taking.

429.
in

The arrangement

of the sentence, as thus con-

stituted, is subject to stricter

:

and more

intricate rules

German than in English which rules will now be

set

forth.
a. The differences in construction be'.ween the two languages are in good part of comparatively modern growth some of the peculiar rules which now domineer German sentences were only tendencies and preferences a few centuries ago. h. Hence, in archaic style, as well as in poetry, the rules are
;

much

less strictly

observed than

in

ordinary prose.

430]

EBGULAR ORDEE,
Begular or Normal order of the sentence.

241

ordinary and normal arrangement, tlie German sentence, like the English, requires the subject to be stated first, and to be followed by the pred430.
1.

In

its

icate.

This rule has reference to the simple assertive sentence such a sentence, as explained above (427.&), being taken as the standard from which the other forms are deduced. For the arrangement of the interrogative and optative sentences, see
a.
;

below, 432.
6. Taken in connection with the rules already given as to the order in which the adjuncts of a noun and verb are respectively arranged (110-12, 319), this rule determines the whole order of the normal sentence but it is desirable to call especial attention to the peculiarities which distinguish the German order.
;

one of the adjuncts of the predicate verb ever allowed to stand between it and the subject.
2.

No

is

Thus, for English he truly loves justice, and never willingly commits a wrong, the German must say er Uebt treulid) ha ^t^i unb beae!)t nie tDilUg ein Unred)t. a. Earely, a word or phrase is found inserted between the subject and the verb. Such a one, however, is never an adjunct of the predicate, but one of the conjunctions having exceptional freedom of position (385.4,5), or an asseverative particle, or a phrase of parenthetical force. The words oftenest met with
in this position are abcr, ndmltd), alfo, tnbeffen,
3.

and

jeboift.

Since the infinitive (348.2) and the participle (368) are regularly preceded by whatever limits them, and since (319.2) the word most closely combined in idea with the verb as sharing in its predicative quality is

put farthest from

ing a

it, it

results that in sentences contain-

compound tense, or a simple form of a separably compounded verb, the non-personal part of the verb
(prefix, participle, or infinitive) stands at the end of the sentence ; and the same place is taken by an infinitive

dependent on the verb of the sentence, or by a word, other than a prefix, separably compounded with it, or forming with it a verbal phrase.

242

CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.

[430-

Thus, ct Blttfte mit SBol^lgef alien auf ben em^orf^auenben ol^n ber ^rbe l^ernieber he looked down with complacency upon the upgazlng son of earth, bu 1^ aft gtoar ni(!)t !IuQ, aber bod)
natiirlic^

unb na^

tinblic^er SOSeife gei) ati b

It

thou hast acted, not

\tjx

wisely, indeed,
tt)

but yet naturally,

and in

childish fashion,

e r

e t

euc^ fo Blutig eurer ^lad)i ntd)t iib

e rl^ e

n you will not

presume
gift

so cruelly

^efd)en! au curer

upon your power, id) anb e m|) f an g en I

I)

tDtll mein Seben al ein

will receive

my

life

as a

from your hand, [^ naf)m ni(^t mel^r t)on ber genben Sbene n) a r I perceived nothing more of
lay behind me.

l^tnter

mtr lies' the plain that

a. Where there is more than one non-personal part of the verb in the sentence, the prefix stands before the participle, or the infinitive, or the participle and infinitive and the participle stands before the infinitive thus, [^ gebe e auf, i^ ^abt e auf*
; :

ic^ njerbe e aufgeben, \6) merbe e aufgegeben l&aben, c since each element is prefixed to aufgegeben tuorben fein that to which it is added as a limitation (314&).

gegeben,
tt)trb

b. In the greater nimiber of sentences, therefore, the two parts of the verb, the personal and non-personal, form as it were a frame within which are set all the verbal adjuncts, according to rules of arrangement (319) which are (except the one requiring the personal pronoun to come first) on the whole somewhat loosely observed, and liable to manifold variation. The three fixed points in the normal order of the sentence are the subject, the personal verb, and the non-personal part of the verb (if there be one present).

Inverted order of the sentence,

431. To arrange all sentences in tlie manner above described would result in an intolerable monotony. The German enjoys the same privilege as tlie English, and with even greater freedom, of putting at the head of the sentence any other member of it than the subject for the general purpose of attaining a euphonious variety or, more often, in order to lay an emphatic stress upon the member thus removed from its proper place. But, when any part of the predicate is thus put in the place of the subject, the latter is no longer allowed to stand

431]

INVEETED ORDER.
it

243
instead.

is called

before the verb, but is put next after the inversion of the sentence.

This

Thus, in normal order, ein Sanbmanu brac^te fcincn ^inbern an ber Slabt fiinf $firfid)e a countryman brought his children from the citij five peaches inverted, with no other change of mean-

ing than as regards emphasis,

f

fiinf gjfirfii^e Brac^te ein

Sanbmann

tabt or, again, au ber 6tabt brac^te ein Sanbmann feinen ^inbern fiinf ^firfid)e or, feinen ^inbern bra(i)te ein Sanbmann au ber tabt fiinf ^firfic^e.
einen ^inbern au^ ber
;
;

a. This arrangement is styled inverted, because, when the sentence consists of only three members, its effect is completely to invert their regular order thus, er liebt mid) he loves me : inverted, mi(^ liebt er er ift gut he is good : inverted, gut ift er. In all cases, too, the term is appropriate as denoting an inversion of the natural order of the two essential elements of the sentence, the personal verb and its subject.
: ;

h. The same inverted order, as occasioned by the same cause, is in English sentences also more or less usual, only not imperative, except in certain special phrases thus, we say always "hardly had he gone, when. .," but either "thus was it," or "thus it was ;" and "slowly and sadly we laid him down," but "few and short were the prayers we said." In such phrases as "said I," "replied he," " added they, " interjected in the midst of a quotation of some one's words, the inversion (made aUke in English, German, and French) is best explained as falling under the principle here stated, since the part of the words already quoted is logically the object of the verb in the interjected phrase.
:

c. The only words (other than the subject) which are allowed to stand at the head of the sentence without causing its inversion are the general connectives (384), meaning and, hut, for, and

eitJier

or or.

Even the co-ordinating

adverbial conjuncticms

(385) invert the sentence in their conjunctional use, as

when

proper adverbs.
d. As will appear below (438.3/), an adverbial clause, if placed at the head of the sentence of which it forms a part, has the same inverting force as a simple adverb. Even an adjective phrase belonging appositively to the subject, if placed at the head of the sentence, inverts it, being treated as if it were an adverbial adjunct of the predicate (as it

often logically is so)

5^i!o|)oli t)Drit6er

thus, etnfttDetlen Berubiflt, 309 tiun bag ^nx being for the time tranquillized (i. e. since it was
:

so),

the

army now marched

fproffen, tt)ud) bie toniolic^e

^lume

past Nikopolis; gart unb ebcl ent= l^eruor the royal flower, having


244
CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES.
forth, continued to

; :

[431(I
e.

tenderly and nobly sprung spmnglng fortli).

grow

after

e. It is not usual, nor in good style, to remove to the head of the sentence more than a single connected member of the pred-

icate which may, however, consist of any number of words thus, not feinen ^inbern au ber tabt hxa^)it em fianbmann fiint
:

$fir]ld)e

but

bort, !)inter biefen genftern,

dertrdumf \^ ben

erften

^raum
(S^ott

yonder, behind those windows,

I dreamed my first dream;

iefet (c^nell,

now

el)' bie ^ranbuttfi tt)ieberfel}rt, Befie!)It ber SiiuQling jic!) quickly, ere the surge returns, the youth commits himself

to

God.
f.

The members of the predicate most often placed at the head of the sentence for emphasis, with consequent inversion, are the object (direct, indirect, or remote), and the various adverbial adjuncts less often a predicate noun or adjective (316) least often one of the non-personal parts of the verb. No part of the predicate, however, is exempt from such treatment, and
;

even

The personal verb itself is sometimes placed first in the g. sentence by inversion, with the effect of emphasizing the predication that is to say, of strengthening or impressing the general force of the assertion made. In such an inversion, the verb is usually followed by boc^ though; much less often by \a surely : but neither of these particles is absolutely necessary. Thus, jinb boc^ ein tDunberlid) 35oI! bie 2Bet6er surely women are

surely

a strange race of beings! 'tiab' I never saw you in my

gleic^, tt)a eine

id) bi(^

boc^ mein'

^age m^i
fc^redt

gefelien
fie

life!

^a,

fo finb jie!

alleg

thing that

Jias

with them! everyany depth straightway terrifies them.

Xiefe
!^at
!

Yes, that is the

way

h. In general, the inversion of the sentence affects the arrangement only of the personal verb and its subject. If, however, the subject be a noun, and there be a personal pronoun in the sentence as object of the verb, the pronoun generally remains next the verb, and is put between it and the subject. Thus, ha t)erlie mid) ber OJiann (S5otte in tiefem taunen then the man of God left me in deep astonishment, banad) fd)IanG fid)

ber Sange urn fie bcibe in einen ^'rei after that, the tall fellow twined himself round about both of them. The same thing is customary in the interrogative and^ the optative sentence (432) thus, mt ))abtn eu(^ bie fd)onen Spfel gefc^medt how did the beautiful apples taste to you? i)ett)al)re bid) ber immel may Heaven preserve thee!
:

432]

INYEETED ORDER.
its

245
proper place
is

A similar transfer of the pronoun from usual also in transposed clauses see 439.1.
:

two co-ordinate clauses following one another, normal order, even though the word or phrase which caused the inversion of thus, barauf the one logically forms a part of the other also blieb er fi^en, unb id) Qing fort thereupon he remained sitting and I went away.
i.

When,

of

the

first is

inverted, the second usually retains its

432. Interrogative and Optative sentences.

1. In German, as in English, an interrogative sentence is ordinarily arranged in the inverted order, or

with the subject after the verb. In a direct question (one requiring "yes" or "no" as an answer), the verb
conies

rogative
cle),

of all in an indirect question, the interword (pronoun, pronominal adjective, or partior phrase involving such a word, comes first.
first
;

cease

aufprcn will the ijoimg creation mc^r does it not longer confine me ? voo \\i er where is he? voa^ fud)t K)r lohat seek ye ? tt)el(^e 58ud) ^at er Qelefen lohat hook has he read ? mit tt)effen @elb "ijat er e gefauft with whose money has lie bought it ?
bie junQe d)opfuncj
nti^t
?
I)dlt
fie mirf)

Thus, mirb

a.

When

the interrogative
tDcr l)ai
l^ier

word or phrase

is itself

the sub-

ject of the verb, the sentence necessarily retains its

normal
to

order: thus,
tDcfjen

^ud) Ue^t

mir ba Gctl)au who has done that whose hook lies here?

me ?

Often, however (also as in English), a sentence is made h. interrogative by the tone with which it is uttered, while it has the construction of an assertive sentence: thus, ii)x f^tueiot? bie
Dlinae IDtrlen nur guriid?
tjou

are silent? the rings only work

fein

backward? ba foH bie ^Intmort he the answer to my question ?

auf metne S^age?

that is to

Often or usually, an interrogative sentence so constructed has a somewhat different force, implying "is it possible
that
c.
.

!" or

"do you mean that

]d)6u

.?" or the like.

An exclamatory
:

sentence sometimes^ has the interrogative

ift

form

thus,

tt)ie
1

ber ^JZorgeu

tt)te

fdjetnt bie

waxm nnb

milb

how

heautifid the
t

morning

is!

Sonne fo how warmly and

gently the sun shines


246
CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES.
[432-

2. The optative or imperative sentence takes, as in English, the inverted arrangement: that is to say, in

the second persons, singular and plural, of the imperative, and in the various persons of the subjunctive used optatively or imperatively, the subject follows the verb, instead of preceding it.
unb lt)lr "^oren do thou speak, and we hear, jud^' eminn seek tJiou (lit. let him seek: 153.3) for honest gain ! moQC nic ber Stag erf ^einen ynay tlmt day never appear ! tt)dre e ^m nur nic^t jo bunfel would that it only were not so dark here! moc^f aud) bod) bie ganje 2BeIt un !)oren would tlmt
Thus, ]pnd)
h\i,

^r ben

reblidien

I had never
a.

even the whole world might hear us! o U)dr^ i(^ nie QeBoren been born ! Compare 243.1, 331.

that

But in the third person singular of the present subjunctive already pointed out 331.1&), the subject may also stand before the verb, and more frequently does so thus, Jeber fommc tt)lc er ift let each one come as he is,
(as
:

433.

Conditional dauses.

A
that

clause of a sentence is very often inverted in

to express the conditionality of a statement
is,

German

to

add the meaning

of

if.

Thus, :^atte er oerufen, fo fatten jie iftn gefunben luid he cried out (if he had cried out), they would have found him, !^ at on eu(^ ieber fetnen 9ling t)on fetnem 35ater if each of you has his ring from his father, er^ebet ein Sloift fid) if a quarrel arises, l^at ber ^egrabene fic^ fi^on erl^obcn if the buried one hath already arisen, Iicj3 er un ^ier ^uriid if he left us behind here.
t)

a.

This

mode

of signifying the conditionality of

a sentence

is

example shows) not unusual also in English, in the past subjunctive tenses had and were, in the conditional clause (protasis) of a complete hypothetical period (332.1) and it is not wholly unknown under other circumstances but in German the construction is a very common one, with all the different
(as the first
; :

tenses of verbs of every -class.

b.

The same construction

is

frequent in the conditional clause

al

(protasis) of

an incomplete hypothetical period, after an

representing the omitted conclusion (apodosis: see 332.26): thus, er Be^anbelte fie, al tuaren fie fetne Untertl)anen he treated them as

435]

TRANSrOSED ORDER.

247

[he would treat tlwm] if they wliere his own subjects; cr nidfte mit bem ^Dpfe, ttl tDoUe er fagen 6d|on red^t he nodded his head, as " if he meant to say " quite right c. E-arely, of two succeeding conditional clauses, only the first thus, voax e bann SBinter, unb ber rf)nee lag rings is inverted um^^er if then it was winter, and the snow lay about : compare 431i [ExEECiSE 23. Normal and Inverted Sentences.] _
:
:

Transposed order of the sentence.

434. The two modes of arrangement heretofore explained belong to independent or principal sentences or clauses (excepting only the inverted conditional clauses, treated in the last paragraph). The German construction, however, is most peculiar in that it has a special mode of arrangement for dependent (sometimes also called subordinate or accessory) clauses. In these, namely, while the other members of the sentence remain
in their normal order, the personal verb is

removed

from its proper place to the end of the clause. This removal is called transposit'on, and the resulting arrangement is styled the transposed.
Thus, in normal order, ber 2ag neigt
transposed, mir
that the
tt)ie

ji(^

gufetnem Snbe; but,

fefteii,

bafe ber

^ag

jld)

day

is

drawing

to its close;

gu feinem
bie

^nbe wnc^iwe see ^dmmcrung Ucrljiillt

but, bie

ein buftiger (^leier bie

H)en unb

^ftdler;

^dmme=

rung,

mUjt

trie

ein buftiger d)Icier bie C)i3^en

unb Sadler Der-

IjixUt the twilight which envelopes like a misty vail the heights and valleijs ; onne ftatte il)re 33a5n boHenbet; but, al bie

hk

onne
course.
a.

i^re S3al)n

boKenbet 1:jattt

when

the

sun had finished

its

arrangement" is abbrevifrom "arrangement with transposed verb," which would be more fully and truly
ated, for the salie of convenience,
descriptive.

The name

" transposed order or

435. Dependent clauses,

one which enters, with the value of a substantive, an adjective, or an adverb, into

1.

A dependent clause

is

the structure of some other clause*


248
2.

CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES.

[435^

Dependent clauses are

clauses,

of three kinds, according

to

tlie

parts of speech wliicli they represent

adjective
clauses,

namely,

substantive
clauses.

and

adverb

436.

1.

svhstantive dependent clause is

one

wliicli

has the value and construction of a noun.

Such a clause is introduced by ho!^ that, oB whether, relative pronouns and pronominal adcompound the jective trer, tra^, and Xod6)vc (179), or the compound
2.

relative

conjunctions
etc.

(386.2)

iDie,

toantt,

tDO

and

its

compounds,
3.

substantive clause stands in various constructions:

of a verb as, b a ^ cr bic ^cf anbten befreite, ift has released the ambassadors is, to-be sure, well;
:

thus
a.

As subject
lie

IXoax Qiit that

iDann

beftxmmtc,

jicf) jutrug, tDelc^e ^raft ben InBrud) ba i)un!cl bcr SSorgcit oe^iillt wheii this event happened, what power determined the inroad, is deeply hidden in the darkness of antiquity.

btefe

rfcf)cinung
tief

ift

in

i^r 9Jlann

thus, fie fragten, o b fie rcc^t toii^te, tt) c t they asked whether she really knew who her husband was; i(f) tt)ill fe^en, tDO e licgt I will see where it lies; ni(^t !ann iftm mieber erfc^cn, tt)a er terloren ))at nothing ean
b.
:

As

object of a verb
U)dre

make up
c.

to

him what he has

lost.

gntfdjulbigung,

In apposition with a noun or its equivalent thus, mit ber ba^ er gum ^riege Berebet tDorben fei with the excuse, that he had been persuaded into the war; be (^eful^Ic, b a^ ni(^t im SeBen rc(J)t gefc^dl^e, tDcnn c 6IoB gefdidbe of the feeling that nothing in life was d^ne properly if it was simply done; after e, as preceding indefinite subject (154.4) thus, gwcifeHjaft Hieb e je^t, tt) eleven 2[Beg man einf c^Iagcn. f oKe it remained dx)ubtful now, which road one was to take; after other neuter indefinites, pronominal and adjective (see 179.5): thus, allcm, ma ba explaining a preceding ba blul)t to everything that blossoms; that represents a demonstrative pronoun-case governed by a
:

preposition: thus, bie trug o^ne

ligea t)cvlangt

3tt)etfel (b a gu) bei, b a ^ nur bil* murbe this doubtless contributed to the i^esult that nothing um^easonable ivas demanded ; fiebai^tenur barauf, mie

437]
fic

ADJECTIVE CLAUSE.
she thought only of
d.
er

243

bie 9J^enfd^en in 35erberben locfen fonnte

how

she could entice

d.

men

to

destruction

see below,
thus,

As governed by a preposition

o^nc ha^

em ^Ia

not^ig ftatte without needing a glass; l)arret t^r, bt ha^ ber red)te 3i\nQ ben SJlunb eroffne are you waiting till [the time that] the righh

ring shall open

its

mouth ?

aufecr toer

f cine

9Jlitf cf)ulbtgen f eten

ex-

cept whoever were his accomplices. Only a few prepositions thus govern a substantive clause
directly, and s ^me of these (377.1), the ba^ being omitted, have assumed the character of conjunctions: thus, bt bie Slutl^en

[gluten]

fid)

Derliefen
is

such a clause
sition, it is

subside;in general, if under the government of a prepoanticipated by a a in combination with the preptill

the floods should

to be placed

t)

osition,

and

itself follows,

as

if

in apposition

with the ba

see

just above, c;

and compare

346.2a.

thus, bie Waren bie ^anpt=' e. As dependent on a noun: urjac^en, h a^ fie nirgcnbg greunbe fal)cn obcr oeiDannen these

were

the chief reasons [for the fact] that they

nowhere found or

made
f.

friends.

A substantive

clause not infrequently stands in dependence

upon a noun or a verb, by a pregnant construction, where a

simple substantive could not stand without a preposition, or even sometimes more than that, to explain its relation to the noun or verb thus, er erlag bem d)mcr3e, ha^ foli^ Ungliirf in
:

feinen

that

Sagen eintrdtc he broke down under his grief [at the such a misfortune should occur in his time; [^ banfe
id)

fact]
(^ott,

meine ofine miebergefunben ftabe I thank God that I have found my sons again; forgt, ha^ fie nid)t an meiner hammer fommt take care that she does not leave my room.

ha^

g. A conditional clause after al (compare 4336) is sometimes used with the value of a substantive clause thus, bie anmut^ige [anmutige] 3:dufd)unG, al fei e bie eigene feifteng, bie in alien
:

biefen ^n'^dngen mitfc^tt)eBt the pleasing illusion that

(lit.

as

if) it is

our own personality which fl/)ats in

[Exercise
24.

all these

appendages.

Transposed Order.

Substantive Clauses.]

437.

1.

An

adjective dependent clause is

its

one which
:

belongs to and qualifies a noun (or

2.

equivalent

113).

Such a clause

is

ber or ipeld^cr (or a prepositional

introduced by a relative pronoun, phrase containing such),

250
or

CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES.

[437-

namely, the compounds of and tDO with prepositions or with adverbs of direction, and the simple conjunctions Wo, tvtnn, tvann, ha, aU, iuie (compare 386.3).
ha
ein SSunf^, ben au(^ \d) in meinen Siinglinfl^iafiren l^atte which I also had in the years of my youth; bag etnaige 3JZd6rc^en, n)eld^e er geprt l^atte unb gu ergd^Ien \m)^k the only story which he Jiad heard and knew haw to tell; ben 9)lenf(^en,

bj a relative conjunction

Thus,

wwh

fiir

beffen
the

SSertfjeibigung

[S^erteibigung]

ifire

man

6tammDater fampften

haijxn

bte welfe 33rul"t fic^

in whose defense their ancestors fought ; ij^r Ouellen brdngt ye fountains toward which tJie

drooping breast presses; einen SSertrag, ID o n a ^ bie nec^en einen ^urc^gug eriaubten a treaty by which the Greeks oermitted a peaceable transit; ha^ 9anh, tt)o ber 58runnquelf beg ^laubcng entjprang the land where the fountain of faith first
frieblic^en

sprang up
a.

tn ber ^legenseit,

tt)

n n bag ^elta iiberfc^toemmt

ift

in

the rainy season,

when

the delta is inundated.

qualifying adjective may be converted by pronoun into an adjective clause thus, ber gute 9Jlann the good man into ber SJZann, ml^a gut ift the man wlio is good; and, on the other hand, the German often puts into the form of an attributive adjective (especially a participle), with modifying adjuncts, what we more naturally express in English by an adjective clause thus, er befiegte bie gu unt)orfi(^tig

Any simple

means

of a relative

unb

in

eingclnen ^btl^eilungen

[^^Ibteilungen]

borbringenben !Ror=

mannen he vanquished the Normans, who were pressing on too incautiously and in isolated divisions. The order of the parts of such a compound adjective is the same with that of an adjective clause thus, bie S^ormannen,
:

ml^^

gu unt)or]i(^tig unb in eingelnen ^bt^eilungen [^Ibteilungen]

borbrangen.
b. The German not infrequently uses an independent clause, introduced by a demonstrative pronoun, where our idiom requires an adjective clause, with a relative: thus, ba ift einer, ber !ann tncl^r alg \^ there is one he can do more than I (for ber The difference of armcl)r alg id) !ann tvho can do more than I). rangement shows 1 lainly enough what such a clause Uterally

means.
c. An adjective clause is often employed, as in English, not so much to describe or qualify a noun, as to add to the sentence, in a more intimate way than by a simple connective, something

438]
relating to

ADVEKBIAL CLAUSE.
a noun
ber
:

251

oegen t^n;

er unterlag,

thus, bie nationale Seibenfd)aft tt)affnete \\^ the national passwn nac^bem .,
. .

inwhich he succumbed, after stead of unb biefer unterlag er and to this he succumbed. Or, what has logically a different value, as of a ground or reason, is cast into the shape of a descriptive clause thus, be^l^alb BefdjloB ber ^aifer, bem baran lag, fc^neU su jetnem o'^ne gu fommen accordingly the emperor, who was desirous of getting quickly to his son,
itself

armed

against

him ;

to

resolved

^instead of ba
25.

e iftm

baran lag since he was desirous.

[Exercise

Transposed Order.

Adjective Clauses.]

438. 1. An adverbial dependent dause is one which performs the part of an adverb, by qualifying a verb, an adjective, or another adverb.
2. It is introduced by one of the subordinating conjunctions mentioned and classified above, under Conjunctions (386.4).
3.

a.

An

adverbial clause, in most cases, qualifies a verb.

tt)

Thus, as adverb of place,

o in ber 2Stlbntg alleS

(^tt)teg, t)er^

ha% eldute tuieber where in the wilderness all was silent, I heard the pealing again ;ot TIME, al nun bie 5}^orgenbdmme^ rung begann, bcru()rte (Sloaft ben Sc^Iummernben when now the morning twilight began, Eloah touched the slumberer ; t))' e giDOlf fc^lug, jaBen [ie \mt Dorljcr before it struck twelve, they sat as &e-

na^m

ic^

/ore; of MANNER, bu magft

allc fdjauen,

tx)ie

id)

bir gcfagt l^abe

thoumayest belwld everything as I have told it thee; e rajdjelt mit ben Sften, 'tia^ mcin ^aul tod tcirb it rustles with the branches in siwh wise that my liorse becomes frantic; of cause, id) Blieb urn fie, tueil fie freunblid) gcgen mid) xoax I hung about her, because

she

was

friendlij

towaixl

me;

of

purpose, ber

mu

mitgeften,

bam it xo'xx ben Self en megfd)affen he must go along, in order that ive may get the rock out of the way; of condition, menu hn mir
bienen millft, fo !omm mit if you would like to serve me, then come along; obglcid^ fie il)m na^e maren, tonnten fie i^n bod) m^i er= bliden although tJiey were near him, they yet could not espy him;

of DEGREE, j e l^eifeer e ift, proportion as it is hotter), so

h.

befto me!)r frier' id) the hotter it is (in

much

the colder

am I.

adverbial clause qualifying an adjective is usually one of degree or manner, introduced by mie or al, as or than, or by

An

252
fo

CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.

[438-

ba^: thus, foI(i)e 33ebinGimgen, tt)te er fie t)or3uf(^lagen getDagt ^at such conditions as he has dared to propose; ein tab, leic^t urn*
fa^t, jo

lightly
l^elle

ba feme ^Bemeciungen einigen ptelraum ^aben a staff grasped, so that its movements have some play; icf) "^abe fo

^lugen ba tc^ burc^ bte gange SBelt fe{)en !ann //lai^e so dear eyes that lean see through the whole world; ba ifl beffer, al \d)
t)on

i^m

ertoartet I)atte that is better

fo is

than

I had

expected of him.

Where a

present,

it

strictly qualifies the adjective as

an

adverb, and

is itself qualifi 'd

by the adverbial

clause.

An adverbial clause qualifying an adverb is for the most c. part either introduced by ba^ as correlative to fo, or it follows a demonstrative adverb of the same kind with that by which it thus, fie !^ob is itself introduced, and correlative to the latter
:

ha eine ^ctu fo ))o^ empor, ba er eg burc^aug ni(^t ftnbcn fonntc she lifted one leg so high up that he could not find it at all; cr fonnte f(^on b a, mo bie 33rurfe aufftorte, ben T^cEen %aQ erbliden he could already see the bright day at the point where the bridge ended; tiur barum, tucil eine eele t)or^anben ift only for the reason that a soul is present; er fpottete ber 3bee ii b e r a 11, it) o fie nx^t feineg (5inne mar he mocked at ideas in all cases in which they were not of his way of thijiking; \^ fann fie erft bann fteEen, m e n n bie riec^en anbere an^Uefern / can only furnish them at the time when the Greeks deliver up others. In the 1 itter class of cases, the preceding adverb is often superfluous, and the adverbial clause logically qualifies the
rer(

"^

d. Out of the frequent use of fo with a following adverb in the principal clause, and limited by a succeeding adverbial clause introduced by al for example, er ifl f o b a 1 b gefommen, al i^ iftn rief he came as soon as I called him has grown a very common construction in which the adverbial clause is itself introduced by fo and the adverb (often combined into one word), and the al is usually omitted (compare 386.4i) thus,

in ^frifa,

e i t

mir e fennen in Africa, so far as

we know

it;

fob alb ber DJlenfc^ fid) bem ^rucfe ber au^erften ^ot:^ plot] ent* munben \^CLi as soon as man has relieved himself of the pressure of extreme need; fo lang^ ein 51ug' noc^ meinen, ein ^zxiv.0^
brec^en fann, fo lange mallt auf @rben bte (S^ottin ^oefie so long as an eye can yet weep, a heart yet break so long walks upon

earth the goddess Poetry.

e. A similar construction is sometimes made with an adjective, predicative or attributive thus, aber f o g r o ^ e n D^tu^m bicfcr
:


438]

ADVEBBIAL CLAUSE.

253

6icg an^ ben ^itgcrn bxa^k hut, great as was the fame this victory brought to the pilgriins, or however great fame this victory
literally, .so great fame as it even brought. In both these classes of cases, the imphcation of the omitted al is clearly shown by the transposed arrangement of the clause and they are thus readily distinguished from the cases where job alb, fo lange, etc., have simply their literal meaning.

brought, etc.

an adverbial clause, or an inverted conditional clause be put at the head of the sentence, the principal clause takes the inverted arrangement, just as after a simple adverb (431)": thus, tt) ie er ha^ ^orte, ftanb er auf when he heard that, he arose; lue n n bie (^raSbcrfe in taub gerfallen ift, flafft ber erpr=
/.

If

(4336),

tete

33oben auf

when

the covering of grass has fallen into dust, the

jie

hardened earth cleaves open; e^e

fie

gur 5^atur guriidfeftrt,

!ommt

gur ^lanier before

to

it

returns

to nature, it
ic^

becomes mannerism;
furg as this

tuell mir bie febr miBbebaGte, banfte

i^m gang

was

very disagreeable
g.

me,

I thanked him

quite curtly.

After a prefixed adverbial clause, the principal clause is often introduced by a particle fo, ba, or the like; especially fo correlative to the conjunction of the former, and

very

rendering easier the inversion

thus,

tt)

bid) brauc^ett if that is the case, (then)

al

er

bie

^anh

guriitf^oG,

ba

ftob fid)

drew

his hand, (then) the clod rose.

tt)enit

o fann \^ f use of you; bie (^o(le when he withift,

n n ba

I can make

fo

stands in like manner

as correlative to the imphed

if of

an inverted conditional

clause: thus, faitn eud) ba tiiifeen, f o tuiH ic^ eud) gem bieneiyf*-..^^ tlmt can help you, (then) I will gladly serve you. /^ And the inversion of the principal clause comes so to depend
in particle is omitted, the clause not

appearance upon the correlative particle, that, when the very infrequently retains its normal order: thus, ^^dtte er ben grieben getDiinfc^t, e iDtire feinetn
9lei(^e t)ort^cil'^aft [t)ortctII)aft] getrefen (for todre e,

or

had he wished peace,

realm.

it

would have been advantageous

fo tt)dre e) to his

h. An independent clause is often employed in German where our usage requires a dependent adverbial clause. Thus, for example, usually in a clause after one containing fautti hardly

as,

faiittt tear ber 35ater tobt [bt], fo fomttit ein ieber

Sting hardly

was

tlie

father dead, when

("lit.

ttiit feiuem then) each one comes

with his ring.

An adverbial clause, like an adjective clause (437c), is i. sometimes made use of to add something to the sentence

254
thus,

CONSTKUCTION OF SENTENCES.
bo^
^liinberten diUQC an llbermutl)
;

[438-

[Ubermut] n)cl&alb aufprte uub ^Jlangel entftanb yet some, out of wantonness, committed pillage : on which account the supply ceased and want arose or to make an antithesis or for other purposes not wholly accordant with the office of a simple adverb,
bic 3iifiiftr

[Exercise
439.

26.

Transposed Order, Adverbial Clause.]

Additional rules respecting dependent clauses in general.

1. In the transposed, as in the inverted (431/0 order of the sentence, a personal pronoun as object of the verb not infrequently stands before the subject: thus, bafiir, ba^ tl^nen bie ^riftlic^en ^ird)en in ^alaftina etngerdumt tuerben ioKten on condition that the Christian churches in Palestine should be placed in their possession; eln Sanb, too ft (^ alleg in SiiCe borfinbet a land

where everything

is

^ob

Qcraubt

ti'dtk

found in abundance; ai iDenn fie i !^ than if death had snatched Iter from him.

ber

2. When a clause ends with two or n;ore infinitives, of which the last is used in place of a participle (240.1c), the transposed verb is put next before instead of after them thus, tt)etl id) nic^t 5ab e gc'^en fonnen because I have not been able to go; benn iftr mi^t, ba^ \i)X mid) l^aht ermorben laffen moHen for ijou knmu that you Imve wanted to have me murdered. Compare 348.2a. By imitation of this construction, the transposed verb is also sometimes placed before a participle and infinitive, or two
:

participles.

In a dependent clause, the transposed auxiliary (^aBen a perfect or pluperfect tense is very frequently omitted, and has to be inferred from the connection thus, frii!^cr al i^r fiebac^t (^attet) earlier than you had thought, ha^ T^ie unb ba ein ^(urflid)er gemefen (ift) that here and there has been one happy man, inbem er glt)ei ntd)t (!)at) briiden mogen as he had not wished to do injustice to two, n)a 5cuer SSut^ [SBut] tftm au(^ geraubt (ftaBe) whatever the fire's fury may have taken from him.
3.

a.

or

f ein)

of

b.

Much more
that
it

rarely, the transposed copula (a

:

form of

fein

be) is in
(ifl)

Uke manner omitted

is

thus, ba^ mir e iinmer uncrfldrt

miib' (fetb) if
S3efte

ever unaccountable to me, n)enn be f^ragenS t()r nic^t ye are not weanj of asking, bie 2Bege, auf n)eld)en ha^ gn '^aben (ift) the ways in widch the best is to be had.

a.

An

exclamation often
:

has the arrangement of a

dependent clause

thus, n)er mit cud) ttJanberte if one could but go


439]

DEl>Em)ENT CLATTSES.

2l55

with you! (lit. [how happy he] Jww he twists himself!

b.

who should

etc.)

xok er \\^

tt)inbet

question

may

hJD^l ^orcf)t [I wonder]

be asked in the same manner thus, oB whether she is perhaps listening?

:

fie

5. Whether a dependent clause framework of the one upon which

shall be placed within the

it depends, or outside that determined mainly by rhetorical or euphonic considerations but it is much more usually placed outside

framework,
thus, ha^

is

allererfte, tt)a ]ie in biefer 2BeIt Morten, al

ber ^ecfel

t)ott

ber c^ad^tel

genommen murbe,

in

bei*

jie

lagen, \oai ba 2Bort:

3innfolbaten!" the very first thing that they heard in this wo7'ld,

when the cover was taken from the box in which they lay, was the word " tin soldiers ! "not waS fie in biefer SSelt, ala ber i)e(fel t)on ber ^^a^kl, in ber fie lagen, Qenommen tDurbe, ftorten, which would
be excessively awkward.
But, as the example shows, clauses qualifying the subject of a sentence have to be brought in before the predicate unless, indeed, as is often done, the principal clause is inverted.

6. In general, no sentence in Germin takes the transposed arrangement, as a dependent clause, unless it be grammatically as well as logically dependent that is to say, unless it be introduced by a word (conjunction or relative pronoun) which gives it distinctly and formally a dependent character. Many a clause is logically dependent (especially as a substantive clause) without being so formally thus, id) bd(5^te, e tDdre urn befto QottUc^er (or,

ha^
the

e urn befto flottIid)er rodre)

(or, that it

should think

it

was

so

muck

more divine

was

etc.).

Exceptions are
a. A clause following another dependent clause, and implying the same subordinating word by which the former was intro-

thus, {)iegu !am, b a ^ bie ^TonxQt t)on Sictlien mil C>ofrdn!en fdm^fen marten, ber Dlorben gu fern lag, unb panien fic^ !aum ber nd^eren f^etnbe ertDe'^ren fonnte to this was added, that the kings of Sicily had to contend with court intrigues, [that] tJie north lay too
:

duced

far away, and [tJiat] Spain coidd hardly defend herself against nearer enemies.
b.

The

after fo followed

cases explained above (438.3c?,e), where al by an adverb or adjective.

is

omitted

c. A number of words (adverbs, prepositions, and so on) which were formerly construed with substantive clauses introduced by ba^ tJmt or, in part, are sometimes still so construed have

^5Q

CONSTEUCTION OP SENTENCES.

[439^

now won the character of conjunctions (compare 382c), and themselves introduce a dependent clause directly, the t^a^ being omitted thus, bi until (for 6i ba as far as the time that), ungeac^tet although (for ungeac^tet ha^ it being disregarded that), nun now (for nun ba^ now that), and others compare 377.1.
: :

here that an inverted conditional clause (433) is really an adverbial dependent clause, both logically and formally as much so as if it were introduced by mnn only its deif, and had the transposed order of arrangement pendence is shown in another and pecuhar manner.
d.

It

may be remarked

Summary

of the Bales of Arrangement.

of both teacher and learner, the 44.0. leading rules respecting the arrangement of clauses, those which it is most important to commit to memory and keep constantly ready for application, are presented below in summary. Eeferences to the fuller statements above are added.

For the convenience

441. 1. There are tliree modes of arranging the sentence in German

:

a.
b.
c.

The The The The

normal, or regvlar (430) inverted (431-3) ; transposed (434:-9).

first

2.

two belong to independent clauses, the

is

third to dependent (434).

3.

Their character

determined by the position of

:

the bare predicate, or the personal verb

a.

In the normal arrangement, the personal verb imIn the inverted arrangement,
;

mediately follows the subject

h.

it

precedes the subit is

ject
c.

In the transposed arrangement, the clause.

442.
1. 2.

at the

end of

The order

of the normal sentence

is

The subject; The bare predicate, or personal verb

;;

443]
3.

EULES OF AKRANGEMENT.

257

as objects, adverbs, predicate

4.

The various modifying adjuncts noun or

of the predicate,

adjective
(if
:

Finally, the non-personal part of the verb

be one) namely, prefix, participle, or infinitive and, if more than one be present, they follow one another in
their order as here mentioned.

there

Among the modifying adjuncts of the predicate, standing after the personal verb, or between it and the nonpersonal part of the verb
a.

A personal pronoun directly dependent on the verb

first

regularly comes

h. An accusative object precedes a genitive, and more usually follows a dative

c.

An

adverb of time ordinarily comes before one of

of manner noun or adjective, especially an obusually comes last.
;

place,
d.

and both before one

A predicate

jective predicate,

More

special rules

would be too

liable to exceptions to

be

worth giving.

Examples
1.

of

a normally arranged sentence

3.

2.

4.

cr fd^irft;

ha^ ^u(^ mir 'txx^ 33u^ Qcfi^tcft mcin Sreunb tDtrb mir 'ba^ 33uc^ balb nac^ aiife gunicfgefcfiirft ^aBcn that is, he aends; he sends the hook; he has sent me tlie hook; my friend will soon have sent the hook hack home to me.
er \&i\di
\)Cii

er

443. The order of the inverted sentence is the same with that of the normal sentence, except that the subject comes next after the personal verb, instead of next
before.

The
1.

inverted order

is

followed

any adjunct of the predicate verb is put in the place of the subject, at the head of the sentence (431ay);

When

; ; :

258
2.
first,

CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES.

[443-

Rarely, for impressiveness ; with the personal verb and usually with boc^ or [a surely, somewhere after

it

(431^);
3.

In interrogative sentences, or when a question asked (432.1);

is

4
a
5.

command

In optative or imperative sentences that or desire is expressed (432.2)

is,

when

Often in conditional sentences, or to give the mean-

ing of if (433).
Special rules,
a.

The general

connectives,

meaning

and, but, for, or or (384), are the only words which, save in rare and exceptional cases, are allowed to precede

the subject without inverting the sentence.

h.

ject is often

In an inverted sentence, a personal pronoun as obput before the subject (431A).

of inverted sentences

Examples

1 tnir ftat er

ha^ ^ud)
QejcE)i(!t

ba 35ud) flef(^irft mir Qefc^lrft ^at er mir ba 33uc^

l)at er

that is, he has sent me the bookwith varying emphasis, me, then on the hook, last on sent.
2. Ijat er

first

on

that
3.

is,

mir bocf) ba 33u(^ gefdiicft: surely he has sent me the hook.

er

'i)at

mir ha^ 33u(^

er

flefd^icft ?

tt)a

^ai er mir gef^idt

ttjem

^t

ha^ 33ud)

gej^icft ?

that is, has he sent me the hook? what has he sent has he sent the book ?
4. jd^ide er

me?

to

whom

mir ba 33u^
the book!

that

is,

let

him send m

5. fd^idt er

that
h.

is,

mir ba 35ud), jo Iftut er mo^l if he sends me the book, he does well.

that

5at mir mein greunb ha 33ud) gefdiidt? is, has my friend sent me the book ?

444]

RULES OF ARRANGEMENT.

259

The order of the transposed clause is the same 444. with that of the normal sentence, except that the personal verb is removed from its proper place to the very
end of the
clause.

The transposed order is followed in dependent dauses that is to say, in such as, being introduced by a subordinating word (relative pronoun or conjunction), are made to enter as members into the structure of some
other clause (435).
jective, or

Such a clause has the value either of a noun, an adan adverb, and is accordingly reckoned* as

a substantive, adjective, or adverbial dependent clause

(436-8).
1. substantive dependent clause (436) is either the subject or object of a verb, or in apposition with or dependent upon a noun, or governed by a preposition.

It is introduced

relative

by \io!^ that, ob whether, or a compound pronoun or particle (386.2).

of a substantive

Example
that
2.
is,

dependent clause (objective)

t(^ tt)eiJ3, baf3 er

I know

that he

mir ba 33u(^ gefc^idt ftat has sent me the hook.

An

adjective dependent clause (437)

belongs to and
relative

qualifies a noun.

It is introduced

by a

relative

pronoun or a

particle (386.3).

Example
'tiOi^

of

an adjective dependent clause

mir
gefdjicft

33u(^, n)e((^e er

%ai
to

that
3.

is,

the book

which he has sent

me.

An

adverbial dependent clause (438) qualifies usually

a verb, sometimes an adjective or an adverb.

It is introduced

by a subordinating conjunction

of

place, time, manner, cause, purpose, condition, or degree

(386.4).

260
Examples
of

CONSTRtJCTION OF SENTENCES.

[444r

an adverbial dependent clause

fc^ldte
Gcjd)icEt l^at

aU
that

er

mir ba 33u^

U)enn er mir ha^ ^gud)

is,

when he

sent

me

the hook; if he lias sent

me the

hook,

Sjoedal rules, a. In a transposed sentence, a personal pronoun as object is sometimes put before the subject, if the latter be a noun (439.1).
h. If the sentence ends with more than one infinitive, the transposed verb is put next before instead of after

theiji (439.2).

Examples
a.
h.

oB mir mctn Sreunb ha^

33ucE) gef(^ic!t
\)Cii

^at;

mW er mir ba 33u(^ nii^t

\6)\dtx[

tDoUen:
the hook; hecause he has

that is, whether my friend has sent not wanted to send me the hook.

me

Concluding Bemarks,
445. It must not be supposed that the rules of arrangement, as drawn out in the preceding pages, are always and everywhere strictly observed, even in prose. The demands of euphony, the suggestions of style, even sometimes the arbitrary and unexplainable choice of a writer, lead to their not infrequent violation. A few cases of such violation, of sufficiently prevalent occurrence to constitute exceptional classes, have been pointed out above but to show in detail the different degree of obligatory force belonging to the different rules, and how and under what circumstances their neglect is permitted, would re;

quire a treatise.
446. The construction of sentences has been taken up and treated here only on its grammatical side. To treat it on its rhetorical or stylistic side to explain how and to what extent clauses may be put together so as to form admissible or harmonious sentences and periods is not the duty of a grammar. There is, in theory, no limitation to the expansion of a simple sentence for both its subject and predicate may involve a variety of modifying adjuncts in the shape of words, phrases,


447]
;

RHETOKICAL CONSTRUCTION.

261

and clauses and each part of these clauses may take on further clauses as adjuncts and so on, ad infinitum. The usages of the language, gradually established under the influence of a regard for euphony and for convenient intelligibility, practiBut the bounds cally set bounds to this indeflnite expansion. are very differently drawn in different styles of composition, in every language, and the variety in German is notably greater than in most other languages. Between the style of simple narration and that excessive involution and intricacy in which many German writers love to indulge, there is an immense in-

It is because poetry is intolerant of involved periods that German poetry is, upon the whole, decidedly easier to the learner than German prose. No one, of course, can put together German periods which shall be tolerable much less, elegant after study of the rules of construction in a grammar familiarity with the language as spoken and written, the acquisition of what seems an instinctive feeling for the harmony of construction, but is in fact an educated habit, the product of much reading and hearing, can alone enable one to compose such sentences
terval.

as

Germans compose.

RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

1. A part, and the most essential part, of our 447. English language namely, that derived from the AngloSaxon ^is of near kindred with the German.

is

That other and very' important part of our language which more directly akin with the French and Latin was brought in and grafted upon the Anglo-Saxon in consequence of the conquest of England by the Normans, in the 11th century. The Normans were of Germanic (Scandinavian) race, though they had been settled in France long enough to have substituted the French language for their own. Thus our Germanic blood is purer from intermixture than our Germanic speech.
a.
2. This part akin with German includes, along with the most frequently used and familiar words in our vocabulary, nearly the whole of the grammatical apparatus of English that is to say, all its endings of inflection (393), most of its endings of derivation, its suffixes and prefixes (394-5), and the larger part of it^ indeclinable particles, or w^ords of relation,


262

[448-

EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

448. Kindred in language, as elsewhere, implies descent from a common ancestor the English and German are modern dialects of one original language.
:

a. That is to say, there was a time when the forefathers of the English-speakers and those of the German-speakers formed together a single community, of uniform speech. By its division,

under historical causes, into separate and independent comand by the consequently discordant changes which these communities have wrought each upon its own speech, the various dialects now spoken have gradually come to exhibit the differences which characterize them.
munities,

sinQj

Thus, the Englishman and the German both use the words sang (jing', fang) in the same sense, because each has received them with this sense by uninterrupted tradition going down from father to son just as language goes nowadays from ancestors who lived together and differed in their talk no more than we ourselves and our immediate neighbors. Thus, on the other hand, the one says slay, slew, and the other fd)laG^ ^words originally identical in pronunciafc^Iug (strike, struck) tion and meaning, though now different in both because these words have, in the course of their tradition, become differently altered in the on^ and the other line, in the same manner as words ar& altered nowadays.
6.

449. The English and German are joint members of a group or sub-fam ly of dialects called the Germanic (often also "Teutonic"); which, again, is a member of

a larger family, called the indo-european (also " IndoGermanic," or "Aryan").

450. The Indo-European family includes most of the languages of Europe and southwestern Asia. Its divisions are
1.

The Germanic

(4:51)

2. The Slavic (Eussian, Polish, Bohemian, Servian, Bulgarian, etc.) and Lithuanic;
3.

The

Celtic

(Welsh, Irish, Gaelic,

etc.)

;;

451]
4.

GEEMANIC BRANCH OF INDO-EUROPEAN FAMILY.

263

The

Italic (Latin, etc.

and, as

modern represen-

tatives of the Latin, the Italian, French, Spanish, etc.)

The Greek (ancient and modern) 6. The Persian (Zend, Modern Persian, etc.) Indian (ancient Sanskrit, Pali, Prakrit; 7. The modern Hindi, Bengali, Marathi, etc.).
5.

The resemblances and differences of these languages are same kind with those of the English and German, and due to the same causes. If, where we say six and the German fed^, the ancient Koman said sex, the ancient Greek hex, the Hindu sliash, and so on, it is all for the same reason for which both the Germans and we say sing and sang (above, 448&). Only, in this wider family, of races whose separation is much more ancient, the remaining correspondences are proportionally fewer and less conspicuous, the discordances more numerous and deeper.
a.

of the

6. Although relationships for the languages here named have been surmised, and are often claimed, on a yet wider scale (for example, with the Hebrew and the other "Semitic" languages), they have not been demonstrated.

451. The divisions of the great family are as follows

Germanic branch of

this

1. The Low- German, occupying the lowlands of northern Germany. To this division belong the English, as modern representative of the Anglo-Saxon, which was carried into England, and made to displace the Celtic, by the invading tribes from the northern shores of Germany, in the fifth

century the Dutch, or literary language of the Netherlands the ancient Saxon and Frisian, no longer cultivated and the various dialects now spoken among the people in northern
;
;

Germany, whose literary language German, or " German."

is

the cultivated High-

The 2. Germany.

ITigh

German, occupying central and southern

The only existing cultivated dialect of this division is the one which we know as "the German" language; its history will be given with a little more fulness farther on
(462
3.

etc.).

The Scandinavian, occupying the peninsulas of Denmark and Sweden and Norway, with the island of Iceland (colonized


264
BELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.
[45L

Its languages are the in the ninth century). ancient Icelandic or Old Norse, and the Norwegian, Swedish^ and Danish. These are all the divisions represented by existing languages. Besides them, however, is to be noticed
4. The Gothic, represented by parts of a Gothic version of the Bible made in the fourth century of our era in the dialect of the Goths of Moesia (generally called, therefore, the MoesoGothic), by their bishop Ulfilas. Of all the extant monuments of Germanic language, this is by two or three centuries the oldest, and therefore of the highest value in all inquiries into

from Norway

the history of the whole Germanic family of languages.

1. The more immediate connection of English with the Low-German languages ; but its relation to the German is very near^ as compared with that to the other European tongues, and the correspondences of word, grammatical form, and meaning, between the

452.

is

two are numerous and

2.

striking.

interest,

These correspondences besides their intrinsic and their value as historical evidences bearing upon the development of both languages, the relations of the races speaking them, and the growth of ideas and institutions among those races have also a practical value, as a help to the scholar to whose attention they are brought in retaining the meaning of the German words he is endeavoring to learn.

3. It is the proper duty of a German-English dictionary to point out in detail the English words which are to be regarded as identical, or of kindred elements, with German words (a duty sought to be fulfilled in the vocabulary to the author's German Reader). But no small part of the correspondences are readily to be discovered by the scholar himself, especially if his researches are guided at first by a judicious and enlightened

teacher.

4 The varieties of difference, both of form and meaning, which distinguish German words from their English correspondents, are

much

too great to allow of their being set forth here.

To

exhibit with fulness even the

more important among them,


454]

265

PROGEESSION OF MUTES.

and explain their reasons (so far as these admit of explanation), would be the work of a professed comparative grammar of the Germanic languages. There is, however, one set of differences which are so regular in their occurrence, and which are of such prime importance for one who undertakes to compare German words with EngUsh, that they may not be passed without
notice.
TJie

Law vf

Progression of Mutes.

In regard to their mutes, the Germanic languages show a very peculiar set of changes as compared with the other branches of the family ; and a part of the Germanic languages themselves show, as compared with the rest, another and similar, though less complete, These changes were first clearly esset of changes. tablished and illustrated by the great German grammarian, Jacob Grimm and their statement is generally or also the law of procalled, after him, Grimm's Law gression or rotation of mutes (in German, the aut*
453.
;

t)erj(^tebimg

pushing of sounds out of place),

original

454.

The

mute

letters of the

Indo-European

languages are nine in number, and of three classes lingual or ^-mutes, palatal or A:-mutes, and labial or

p-mutes

each class containing a surd mute

(t, k,

aspirate (th, kh,pJi

more originally dh,

surd.
aspirate.
t

p), an

gh, hh),

and a

sonant (dy

g, b).

Thus
sonant.

mutes palatal mutes labial mutes

lingual
a.

dh or

th

d
9
b

gh or kh hh or ph

they are written that

These aspirates are to be understood as uttered in the way is to say, with an h or aspiration audibly following the mute letter which begins them and not, for instance, as we are accustomed to pronounce our th and ph. These
:

last are not aspirated mutes,

but spirants, simple continuable sounds, which have grown out of the aspirates, but are phonetically of quite another character. Any aspirate in the Germanic languages which had become a spirant was no longer liable to the law of progression,

266

RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

[455-

455. It is found now that, as a general rule, in tlie great body of the Germanic languages (Gothic, Scandinavian, Low-German), each of these mutes has been

pushed forward one step in its own class, the surds having become aspirates, the aspirates sonants, and the
sonants surds; while, in the High-German languages (including the "German"), each has been pushed forward two steps, the surds having become sonants, the aspirates surds, and the sonants aspirates.
456.
original
1.

This rule would in strictness require an

lingual
labial

palatal

t,

th,

d
t

p,

ph, b
b,

k,

kJiy

English

thj d,

ph,
b,

kh, g,

German
but

g, k, p, ph to the regularity of this result there are

d,

t,

ih

g to have become k and kh;

many ex-

ceptions
a.

p and k, in whole classes of words, at their first change were converted into the spirants / and h, instead of the aspirated mutes ph and kh, and so remained unaltered by the second change.
Original
6.

The High-German

dialects in general

took the second step

of progression less completely and less strictly in the labial and palatal than in the lingual series. In the two former classes, some dialects, at a certain period, were more faithful to the

requirements of the rule than were others but, in the modern German, the authority of these other dialects has prevailed. Thus, for Bin he the older monuments give pirn [p for h) and so in a great number of other cases.
;

th,

In the lingual series, the German has converted the aspirate regularly required as the correspondent of English t, into a sibilant, f or 3.
c.

2.

lish

Hence, the actual correspondence between Engand German, so far as concerns the law of progres:

sion, is in general as follows

lingual

labial

palatal

to English

th,
b,

d,
t,

t
f,,^

/,

by

p
f,p

h, g,
Ij,

k
I

correspond

German

h,\ h,

g,


459]

CORRESPONDENCES OF LETTERS.

.267
strictly in

Even these correspondences, however, do not hold

all

cases

thus

a. A mute is often protected from alteration by combination with another letter: thus, d by n or I: as in ganb land, tt)anbern wander, olb gold;t by s, h (ch, gh),f: as in 6teln stone, aft

haste, ^Jlad)i night, ^xa\i craft.

h. Even the oldest English and German (the Anglo-Saxon and the old High-German) have their irregular exceptions to the rules of correspondence; and these exceptions have become much more numerous in later times, as each language, in the

course of
of its

its

history, has suffered

letters.

anomalous changes

in

some

words and

457. Below are given examples of the more important correspondences between German and English consonants those which result from the law of progression, and a few others.

458.
1.

Lingual
in

series.

German answers

regularly to English th: thus, ba

benfen think, hid thick, bod) though, ^ur[l thirst, brei three, S3ab hath, ^ruber brother, (Jrbe earth.
that,
a.

The most important exception

is

that of a b after n or

I,

as

noticed above (456.2a).

2.

% (or
^ag

t^^

see 37) in
tief

German answers
%dh

regularly to English d:

thus,

day,

deep,

death, i:^un do, Ilebte loved, ott^eit

godhead,
a.

felten

seldom, 2Bort word, unter under.

which (as noticed is a t after f, ^, \, above, 456.2a) usually corresponds to an English t.

Excepted especially
3.

The

lingual sibilants in
t:

German,
that,
to,

\\,

g,

often correspond
it,

to English
letter,
a.

ba^ gu^/oo, ix^dtwo, gu

h(x^,

thus,

l)eife

hot,

au out,

Befjer

'^txitide, '^al)\ tale, 3oIl

to??.

But the

sibilants are also in

numberless cases the represen:

tatives of original sibilants,

with but slight variations,

sing, jo so,
f(5^elten scold.

and are therefore found alike, or in German and English thus, fing
(5d)am shame, Sdjnee snow,

bte this,

(Stein stone,

459.
1.
J):

Labial
33, in

series.
initial,

a.

German, when

regularly answers to English

thus, $gab bath, ^ruber brother, ^lut blood, ^]ebovcn born.


268
6.

RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

In the middle of a word, or as
final, it is

[459-

usually represen-

ted in

thus, ab off, of, l)arb half, taub deaf, 2Bei6 wife, lieb lief;%aubt dove, fterben starve, jieben seven ^nabt knave, iiBer over, ^^khn fever.
2.

EngUsh by f orv:

^ in German answers, with very few exceptions, to English

^i^ pitch,
"^laQt plague, pie^spi^, jpringen
a.

p:

thus, \)a\\tn pass, spring.

3.

fall,
b.

5, like 5, agrees with English / when initial 5i]c^^7i, ^n^foot, fUegenyfi/, \vdfree.
it

thus, f aHett

Elsewhere in a word,
tief

usually corresponds to English p

reif ripe, frf)affen s/iape, l^elfen

deep, d)Iaf sleep, auf up, help, merfen i^arp, offen open.

thus,

4. ^f is a peculiar German combination, occurring with great frequency in words anciently derived from the Latin, as representing a Latin p : thus, ^flanjc plant (Lat. planta), $f orte

piper),

arrow (Lat. pilum), ^feffer pepper (Lat. ^funb pound (Lat. pondus). But it is also found in a good many words of Germanic origin thus, ^pfel appZe, ^f(i(^t
dx)or (Lat. porta), ^feil
:

i)Zigf7i<,

(S^nepfe snipe,

ppfen

/top, $fro|)f

prop.

460.

Palatal series.

As a general rule, the letters of this series ^namely, also n! and ng are the same in German and English

q,
:

f,

5/

thus,

ott god, \)tm\]tn forget, griin green, ^aQtn wagon ;Mi cold, bid f/iic/c, tntrfen work, flax clear, ^nabc knave;^aat hair, cr Tieari; jinfen ^nfc, fingen sing.
Exceptions, however, of a more irregular kind, are very numerous. Thus a. English ch is found not infrequently where the German has !: thus, ^inn chin, trerfe stretch.

by k, gh, ho^ though, leic^t light, ^ec^ pitch. c. An original g, which the German has retained, has very often undergone manifold corruption or loss in Enghsh thus, 2:ag day, liege, liigc lie, mag may, 2Beg way;Qnqtl hill, Siegel
b.

German ^
:

is

variously represented in English,

book,

tch, etc.

thus,

33u(f|

tile,

S5ogeI/oii;Z;folgcn/oZtow, 33alg bellows, <BoxQt sorrow, borgen

borrow;
d.

and so on.

, as has been pointed out, is in German very often a mere orthographical device for signifying the long quantity of the neighboring vowel. Of course, where it has this character, uothinsr corresponding with it in English i^ to be Jool^e^ for.


462]

mSTOEY OF GEKMAN.

269

461. Into the discussion of the general tendencies and the special causes which have led to the harmonies and dis-

crepancies of

German and English words, and have produced

:

and apparentlyanomalous cases of difference, we cannot here enter such subjects would be in place in a historical grammar of German, or a comparative grammar of the Germanic languages in general.
either classes of correspondences or single

BRIEF HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.

462.

of the dialects of the

The German language is, as has been seen, one High-German sub-division of the
of the

Germanic division or branch

family of languages.
a.

Indo-European
same way,

Every cultivated or

literary

language

is,

in the

by

origin one of a group of more or less discordant dialects one to which external circumstances have given prominence
rest.

above the
h.

Since unity of speech cannot be maintained over a wide extent of country, or through a numerous community, except by aid of the unifying influences of high civihzation and literature, it is only a matter of course that Germany, at the beginning of the historical era, was filled with a variety of dialects many of which are yet far from being extinct.

c. Germany was first brought to the knowledge of the rest of the world by the Eomans, whose attempts to conquer the country, as they had conquered Gaul (France), proved in vain, partly owing to the stubborn resistance of the German tribes, partly because of the remoteness of the country, and the decay of the aggressive force of the Roman empire. Later, nearly all the European provinces of the empire were overwhelmed, one after another, by roving hordes of Germans but these nowhere estabhshed themselves in sufficient numbers to maintain their own speech. Thus the dialects of the Goths, the Vandals, and other noted German races, became extinct, by the absorption of those races into the communities of other speech among whom
;

they settled.
d.

The introduction

of

Roman

Christianity, civilization,

and

letters into

Germany (beginning

in the fifth century), the estab-

lishment of the Prankish empire under Chlodowig over nearly

270
all

EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

[462its

the

German

tribes (about the

end of that century), and

renewal under Charlemagne, three centuries later (A. D. 742-814), produced in the country a state of things favorable to a unity of customs, institutions, and language. It remained then for circumstances to determine which of the many existing dialects should win such importance in the eyes of all the German peoples as to be accepted by them as their literary language.
yet
brilliant

more

463.

The

history of

tlie

Higli-German dialects

falls

into three periods:

1.

The Old High' German period

(5I(t^0(^beutf(^),

down

to the twelfth century

2. The Middle High- German period (3J?itte(I)od^beutf(i)), covering four centuries, from the beginning of the twelfth to the time of Luther
3. The New High-German period (S^eu^odjbeutfd^), from the Reformation down to our own days.

The Old High-German period commences 1. 464. with the eighth century; from which, however, only fragments have come down to us.
a. As the oldest of these is regarded the Hildbrandslied, a pre-Christian poem, in the alliterative verse which appears to have been the original form of poetic expression of the whole

Germanic race.
2.

The

literature of this period is chiefly Christian,

and consists of versions from the Latin, collections of words or glosses, paraphrases and comments of Scripture, and the like.
a. The most noteworthy productions of this class are Otfried's Krist (A. D. 868), a harmony of the four Gospels, in the first rhymed verse; a prose version of Tatian's harmony of the

Gospels, of about the same period; the works of the monk Notker (about A. D. 1000) and his school, especially his prose version and explanation of the Psalms Williram's (about A. D. 1075) prose paraphrase and explanation of Solomon's Song.
;


465]
6.

271

HISTOEY OF GERMAN.

Besides these, there are a few songs, forms of imprecation, like remnants of a more popular and native class of productions.

and other

3. The leading Old High-German dialect was the Frankish, as being the language of the ruling race and dynasty; but there was no prevailing literary dialect accepted through the whole country ; each writer used his own native idiom.
a.

Other dialects represented in this period are the Aleman-

nic

and Swabian, and the Bavarian and Austrian.

1.

465.

literary dialect

In the Middle High-German period, was the Swabian.

tlie

a. Because it was the court-language of the empire under the Swabian emperors, Conrad and Frederick Barbarossa and their

successors (A. D. 1138-1268).

h. The grand difference distinguishing the language of the Middle period from that of the Old, is the reduction of the former full and distinct vowels of the endings of words to the indifferent and monotonous e. Thus, gebe I give was in the

first period gihii, geben to give was geban, gijc^en to fishes was viscum, blinbe^ blind (neut. sing.) was hlindaz, blinben (gen. pi.) was blindono, and so on. In this respect the Middle and New High-German stand nearly upon the same level.

2.

The
may

literature is

abundant and various, and of a

very high order of merit.

It

be divided into

a. The works of the Mlnnesdnger (love-singers)^ of whom more than three hundred are more or less known. Some of the most eminent among them were Hartmann von Aue, Wolfram von Eschenbach, Heinrich von Ofterdingen, Walther von der Vogelweide, and Gottfried von Strassburg. They wrote songs of love and chivalry, epics (chiefly founded on French and Provengal subjects), didactic poems, fables almost everything excepting dramas.

b.

The popular legendary

the

epics,

half-mythical, half-historical

which

new workings-up of stories had long been current

among

German

races,

whole Germanic

race.

and even in part belonged to the Their authors are unknown. Chief

272

RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.

is

[465-

among them
magnificent

the
;

Lay

poem

of the Nibelungen (^^ibelungenlieb), a others are (SJubrun, and the lesser tales

which make up the

elbenbu(f)

(Book of Heroes).

These on their handicraft in a very regular and very uninteresting manner, in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries (and later), after the decay of the national literature which had flourished under the Swabian emperors. Their productions have mostly gone into
merited oblivion.
466. During the time of literary depression which occupied the last century or two of the Middle period, the foundations were laying for the New. The wearing-out of the feudal system the rise of the cities to importance and wealth the awakened sense for Art, both in architecture and in painting the establishment of universities the impulse given to classical learning through Europe in consequence of the capture of Constantinople by the Turks the invention of printing, which put literature within the reach of a vastly increased class all these circumBtances prepared the way for a national culture which should be as much wider and deeper-reaching than that of the preceding period, as this than that of the first. And whereas in the Old period literature had been the property chiefly of the church and the priests, with complete diversity of dialects and, in the Middle, the property of courts and the great, with acknowledged pre-eminence of the court-dialect so now it was to be shared in by the great body of the people, and to possess for its use something like a true national language.
;

c. The works of the 2}leifterfdn9er (master-singers). were poets by trade, organized into guilds, and carrying

467.

Tlie

New High-German

period begins with the

grand national movement of the Reformation, and especially with the writings of Luther. a. The dialect which Luther used was not a continuation of
the Swabian, which had long since sunk into insignificance, while each author had again begun to write in his own idiom nor was it the precise spoken language of any part of the country it was, as he himself states, the language of public affairs in Saxony, and used by the various courts throughout Germany. It had grown up in measure on paper, in learned and literary use, and united in itself some discordant dialectic
;
:
-

elements.


469)
6.

HISTORY OF GERMAN.
It

273

was the nationality of Germany that created the posa national language it was the excited and receptive state of the national mind at the time of the Reformation, the inherent force and vigor of style in the writings of Luther and his coadjutors, the immense and immediate circulation which they won among all classes of the people, and the adoption of his version of the Bible as a household bock through nearly the whole country, that gave to the particular form of speech used by him an impulse toward universality which nothing has since been able to check or interfere with. It has become more and more exclusively the language of education and learning, of
sibility of
;

the courts, the pulpit, the lecture-room, the school, the press and in the large towns and cities it has to some extent extirpated or deeply affected the old popular dialects, which are

now hardly met

population.

in purity except

among

the rude country

Thus
of Luther, not a little modified

468.

The language

in spelling, utterance, and construction,

and greatly

enriched by new formations and additions, is now the speech of the educated in all Germany (both High-

Germany and Low-Germany), and therefore entitled to be called the German language.
a. To illustrate the alteration which it has undergone during the three centuries and a half of its existence, is here added Luther's version of the Lord's Prayer, as given in his first edition of the German New Testament (1522) Vnstx l^ater stin tiem ?l^imel, IBtin IXamt ^tjo f^t^liQ; IBt^n 3ancD feomej egn
:

^ilU

gescfjefje auff JSvUtti toie gnit irem IB^s^ntl

Unstx

UQlicf)

SSrott Qtb unnslieuttj santrberflifi

uns

uttsere Sci[jullre, totetoMt

unsrrnn
sucJUTtfi;

Scfjullrifiern betBeben
IS^rafft,

; mnnti fure uns nitt Sonlrern triose uns bon Iretn Ufiel ; 3ienit tregti

mn

Vtx^

ist tras

Hegcj^j
b.

ttittr trie

unntr

trie

J^erUcfeest in IStoicfeest.

^mzn*

dialects not only still subsist in Germany the uneducated, but their influence more or less affects the Uterary speech, especially as regards its pronunciation so that the educated even, from different parts of the country, do not speak precisely alike.

The former

among

469.
its

literature,

To give any history of the language, its cultivation, and during this its modern period, will not be

274
:

HISTORY OF GERMAN.

[459-

writers

attempted here even to mention the names of the principal who have distinguished themselves by their contributions in

German

Such are
is to

their merits that to possess

be cut off knowledge and culture within our reach.

and science would require pages. no knowledge of German from one of the most important sources of
to literature

GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER.

275

GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER.

The German
Cap.
Bmall.

written letters are as follows

Cap.
Bmall.
equiv't.

equiv't.

Cap.

small,

eqniy't.

<^

a
h
c

^
/

^
/^P

/
^

^
^
^

J
/
#^

k
I

^
^/

/
It?

J'
tf-

^ m

M
V

m
n

^
<*

^
^

^^

W
X

f
9
h
i

/ / r / ^
/
The general
is

F
/
^

/ /
?r

P
?
r

/
/

r
/ Z'

y
z
sz

peculiarity reqmring especial notice in this charthe prevalence of angular instead of rounded strokes among the small letters. Owing to this, i is distinguished from c only by its dot also u from n only by the round stroke above the former (which stroke, however, is omitted as unnecessary when the u is modified). Further, e is distinguished from n only by the strokes being made much closer together. For the same reason, the a, g, o, q are not entirely closed at the top. The use of the forms of small s corresponds precisely with that of the two forms of the same letter in printed text the first is to be everywhere written for j, and the other for . For S2 is written a peculiar character (as shown in the table), instead of a combination of those for s and z. Special forms of combination of ss and si are also sometimes made.

acter

276
Examples

GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTEB.

^
'X^^^<p^.
1^5-

*^

7-

'^/^*.

^^^^ff^ t^f!t^

^^^^^^^ii^e^.

^'^
e^***

.^/^^^

t^^<f^t^-ff^/^-V^^

'V^^^^^^j

-CHi^-a^-^f^^i^^^i/

^^^
^^f^i^f^^f^

^*^*^

c^i5^^^^

^i^tX^H^y.

-tz-n^-v-^

^^^ii'^ff '^V^

^y/
^;

^^^^^^y**^^i/%

GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER.

277

/7J^

^^^

*1t>/ff^

Hf*'^^^

e>^>k^ ^^^^*j

/M

-6

et>^

<A^ ^^^ *^*

Jj^^*^

^* -^^^^^

^^^^

-A^ff^P^j

^^^^ ^x;-^^
^eine.

^S^^

ttJ.'^S^^

a*

Jd.^

^^W^^ M^/j^
#^i^#^

c-^*^

^^^^*
Jif^

^^i^ff^

^^St*-^^^

i^^^^^
/pp*

/iS*

AA^-a^ff^^^ ^^^iht2^ff-^f^^

<^^^^^*^y

^^^^
^T^^^i^^

.^,
t/iif

-^iX^^Jf^

t*^^
Ooet^e.

278

IIST OF IRBEGULAR VERBS.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR YERBS,

Including
all

the Verbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation.

Explanations. In the following table are given the principal parts of all the verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, together with the preterit subjunctive also the second and third singular indicative present and the second singular imperative, whenever these are otherwise formed than they would be in the New or weak conjugation. Forms given in full-faced type (thus, geBiff en) are those which are alone in use for those in ordinary type (thus, bdrfft, bddt) the more regular forms, or
;
;

those made after the manner of the New or weak conjugation, are also allowed forms enclosed in parenthesis are especially unusual, poetical, or dialectic where two forms are given, the one placed first (above the other) is the more usual or approved one a subjoined remark gives additional explanation, if any is needed. The forms of the modal auxiliaries, as well as of the other irregular verbs of the New conjugation, are included in the They are distinguished by being put in ordinary type List. throughout. No verb is given in the list as a compound. If it is used only in composition, hyphens are prefixed to all its forms, and an added note gives its compounds.
; ;

Infinitive.

pres't indie, sing.

pret. indie.

pret. subj.

Imper.

past part.

f&aaen hake
usually of
sl^ftten

Ue.% Udi

Inif

Bfttc

geftatfcn

New

conj., especially
=6iert
',

when
sftat

transitive.
sftftte

Mn\i,

=ttcr

sBoven
fieibiffen

only in gcbircn hear, bring forth (formerly gcBcren).

elfeett hiu

Mft
Mteft, ^itfit
fcirftcft,

blfTe
l&atfle

Serflcn hide
JBetftcn hurst
93ie<)en hend

ibatfi

h\t^
Blrfl

ge^orgett
gcfcorftcn

btrft

Barfl borft

Borftc

&&rftc

l>0d
(Bcutft, bcut)

f>Hc
f>Mc
^(int>e
ibftte

^tbo^m
(Bcut)

JBlcten offer
lttt)ett hind

iboi }>ata>

^ihf>Un

^chwti^m
geibeten

JBltten heg

hai
aia(fe)ft,
ftlftft

S^lafen hlow
JBlciften remain

dlied

Ibliefe

geblafen

UU1>
61t(^
;

U\tU
bltd)c

^tbiUhtn
gcblt(!^en

SBleidjen hleadh as intransitive, of either conj.

as transitive, of

New only.

LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS.

Infinitive.

279

pre't indie, sing.

pret. indie.

pret. subj.

SBtaten

roast

Britft, brat

brlct

Bricte

imper.

pait part.

^et>taten

fBteihcn break
SBvenncn burn
S3rtnctcn brin.g

btftcOe

branntc

brenntc
brac^tc

gcbrannt

'Mef)c
obsolete. except in gcbci^cn thrive.
iJcnfen think
ba(^tc
=birbjt,

bac^tc
'.iiivhe

sblrB
is
brlfc^

Meftctt
gcbac^t

s'bcthcn

=blrbt

=bar6

sbor^en

only in wcibcrBcn perish ; which as transitive, destroy,

usually of

New

conj.,

^ingcn

engage
thresh
brifc^cft, brifc^t

bang (bung)
brofd^ brafc^

(bungc)
brofc^c brif(^c

gcbungen
gcbrof(i)en

^ve^^cn
slujiefictt

(;breu^t)
tjerbrle|cn vex,

(;breu^)

sbYotfen

only in

^ringen

press

burfte

OeMrunoen
barftc

<Dilrfen be permitted

barf, barfft, barf

wanting
16

geburft

men eat
l^aJjwtt go

iffeft, Iftt

aft

fal)tft, fft^ti

ful)te
flelc

gefal)tcn

OefaUen

ecHmen
Cneng
$e(f)ten ^i?A< forms of
fi(^it)ft

Hcttge)
fd(f)te

fi^t

defo<f)ten

New

conj. occasionally occur,

only in

bcfet)Icn

^in^en

find
twine

fic^

command, cmpfe^Ien comm,end;

fe{)len/ai7 is

another word,
defunt>en

fan^
ft0<f)t

fanbe
n<**e
flic^t

^Ud\im
^ieihm

fll*(t)ft, flidjt

apply antiquated excopt in

flcftoditett

ftiffe fllft beflei^cn exerf one's self.

dcftiffen
Cflcug)

'^lieQcn fiy

(fleugft, fteitv30
(flcuc^ft,

noae

%lic^m flee %lU^tn flov

gragcn ask
f^rrcffett

fleu^t)

(fleu^)
(fleu^)
frug
frftgc

0efl0l)en

(flcu^eft,
frftgft,

fle4t)

geftoffen
gefragt

fragt

properly a verb of the

devour
/ree^e
fviffeft,

New conj.
ftlfet

only.
ftrafe

ftafee

fHft
flcfrouctt

f^tletm

ftrot

ftteit /ermen^ also spelt gi^ren etc., with ^,

j]feinfl^t>e
fllcftft,

gor

gore

aieftt

Qah
ging
gttlt
flittfle

QCQehen

fllbft,

eficn go

Q\bt
gaite golte
gt

ISeUm

be worth

flUtft, flUt

gegdlten

only in

Bcrgeffcn/or^re/.
^gcu^cfl,

ie6en
cginnen

geu^O

fidft

(geu^)

flegoffcn

tQdnn

sgdnne
soiinne

sQonnen

only in bcglnnen

begin.

280
Infinitive.

LIST OF IRKEGULAB VERBS.

pres't indie, sing.
pret. indie.

pret. mbj.
gti(i^e

impr.

put

part.

Qleidten resembU
usually of
(Bleiten glide

flli*

gegtt(^cn

New conj. when

transitive,
giitt

make

similar.
gcglittcn

glttte

limmen
tahcn
iggfeen

gleam

gtomm
gtttb
fltlff

glomme

gcglommctt

dig

degraben
geotiffen

tclfcn gripe
have

^atte

Httc

ge:^a6t

J^oltcn ho'd ftlttge lllno ^amcn hang sometimes confounded in its forms with ^ingcn hang

(trans.).

New

conj.

^<iuen

h,ew

^tc6

gc^aucn
I)dbe f)ube

j^eben raise

l|ob

0el^0ben

^eiften

call

I^Ufft, ftllft

Jjttlfe

^ilf
gcfiffen

l)a(fe

^eifen
Bennett

chide

liff

fiffe

know

fanntc

fcnntc

gefannt

ttomm

flommc
oppress.
flobc

gcftommen

forms of Old conj. very rare except from feeflcmmcn

SilUhtn

cleave

fIo6

^litnmen climb j^Ungen sound

rarely of

flomnt

flommc
IlSngc

gcfloBen

geftommen
getlungctt

Hang
especially

nangc

New conj.,

when
fniff

transitive.
fniffc

^neifen pinch

gcfniffen

^nei^en pinch
.^dttt tttCtt com,

fnlpp

fnippc

(fSmmjl, !6mmt)
fann, fanntl, fann
(frcuii^ft,

fatn
fonnte

f&me
fonnte

^ornien can

defommett wanting gefonnt

geforen

gcfntppctt

SttUMn
S^hxtn
gdffC tt

creep

freu^t)

1X0^
for

choose
I&bfi, labt

fore

S^a'btn load
let

luD

mbc
Hefte

Heft

gttttf ctt >i

Hef nti
liefelt,

Hefe
Wiit
Hel^e

Seil)en Zend
gefCtt read
ISiegett

Hed

delalm
0e(affen
gclattfen

fleHUm
geHe^en
gelefen

Heft

la
lag
tl0X

Iftfe

lU
lose.

delegen
sldre

sloven

only in wcrltcren

slang sinngen siftnge sHttden only found in gclingcn succeed, mi^IingenyatZ ; used in third person only,
j^dftfien extinguish
Ilf(^cft, lifc^t

lofc^

lofcf^c

lif^

gelofc^cn

the forms of
SiiA^tn
lie

New conj. preferably limited to transitive meaning.

(leugfl, Icugt)
mai^ffl, maf>It

log

Idge
mfl^tc

(Icug)

gelogen

SFIalflen grlnb

muM
ntleJ>

the forms of Old conj.

avieiben shun

now in use

gema^len
gemieten
(mtif)

only in the participle.

ntieJ>e

SRelfen milk

(mllfll, mllft)

molf

molfc

gemolfen

LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS.

Infinltire.

281
imper.
past part.

pres't indie, sing.

pret. indie.

pret. subj.

aReffen measure
ajtogen
ajJuffen

tnlffcft,

mlfet

maft
mo(^tc

mft^e
moiijte

mlfe

^etneffen

may
must

mag, magft, mag mu^, mu^, mu&

mu^tc
ttal^m

mu|tc

wanting gcmo^t wanting gemu^t

"^Iclintcn take

ttimmft,

nimmt

nftl)me
nenntc
=nafc

nlmm Qcnommin

^Wcnnen

nam^
recover, get weU.

nanntc

sna
only in genefcn
sntefeen obsolete, excjept in gcnie^en enjoy
q^fcifCtt whistle

(sncu^)

genannt

snefen
sn0ffen
flc^flffen
gcpflogcn

snofi
^fiff
Pfjog Bflaa

-.noffe

fiffe

qUHeflen cherish

Pflogc

forms of the

New conj.

are occasionally

met with.
quiU

QcptUUn
gequoUcn
gcro^ctt

SlucUcn

gus'i

qutflft, qutttt

usually of

New conj when

L

quoQ quoffe transitive, swell. soak.

(rD(i))

m&atm
maiden

avenge
advise
ratf)ft,

(rcitc)

forms of Old conj. very

rare, except the participle.

ttet^

New conj. forms mostly limited to the sense h^ld council. tUh tUhc fHeihcn rub
fHeifiCn tear

xm

rlet^c

gcrat^cn

aetUhcn
gerifTen

tm
tUie
renntc

mclten
9fienncn

ride

titt

Qetitten
gerannt (gerennt)
(reuc^)

run

(rcu(^fl, rcui^t)

rannte (renntc)

{RlccDctt smell

t0d|

td<!)e

0evod)en
geruttden

fHittQcn wring

tang

v&nQC

aiinnen run
atufen ca'l very rarely
SttUfen drink

tttttfl

ttttttt

tume v&nm
v^nne
ticfc
faife
foge

gevomten
oetttfett

Df

New conj.
f&um, fauft

tlcf
foff
fog

flefoffen
gcfogen
su<:kle.

^amm suck
forms of

New

conj. occasional:
conj.

sometimes confounded with fSugen

ft^uf
fd)iife

Sdftaffen create generally of

gcjciiaffen

New

when meaning

be bufsy, or procure.
fd^otte

<^^aUcn sound
8f(^el)en

fc^oE
.=T<ftoI>

geic^otten

only

sfdjlcljt in gef;^c^en happen:

sfdjftije

sfdie^en
gefcf^ieben

used

in third
^c^ieb

person alone,
jc^icbc

'Bdiei'^en part of New conj. <S(f)einen appear

when

transitive, disjoin.
frfjictt

fd)iene
|cf)dltc

f(^ilt

cl)elten scold

fdialt
f(S^lerft,

0efd)olten

@(^eren

s'lear

fct)lert

fdjotr

f(J)ter

gefdfoven

<S(f)ic{>en shcve
(f(i^cu|efl, ^(^cu^t)

fdidbe
fdjoffe
f(f)

Oefdioffen

ed)int>en fay
fdjlftfff,

unte

0cfd)unden
Ocf(f)(afcn

fd)l.ift

frfjllcf
f<ftJtt9

fcf)(iefe f<<)ltt9e

^(fllagcn

strike

f<Dlaort. fcDliiflt

282
Infinitive.

LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS.

prcs't indie, sing.
pret. indie.

@(^Iei(i)ett sneak

miiti

\m^^

e<ftleifen whet fc^Iiff fc^iiffc in other senses than whet, sharpen, properly of New conj.

&<Hleifin siu

^miH
f<IJloff
(jc^Icufeejl;

dlUefen

?tp

djlleften shut

\mm

fcDlofe
|(f)lanfl

tdjloffe

Si^Uneen

sling

edjtnei^en smite

fcftmlfe

mm
pret. 8ubj.

imper.

past pwt.

deftfiUdien
gcfc^Iiffen

fiefcftUffen

fcDldffe

gefdiloffen
gcfd)(0ffen
flcf<J)aingctt

(f(^Icu^)

fcDlftttflc

frfjmiffe

flcfdimlffen
gcfc^mcljcn

^^mclitn

melt

f(^mtls(cf)t, fc^miljt fd^mclj

f^moljc
transitive.
fc^nSbc

fci^mtl a

usually and properly of New conj.

when

&d\nau1>ett snort
(()ttlcben)

fc^nob

gefc^nofccn

djncibcn

cut

fc^nitt
f(i^rob

fdjttltte
fd^robc
ft^rSfe

florid

0ef<f)ttittett

^dttauJ)en screw
r

gcfc^roben

@<f)rctfctt be afraid

'

"g*

of

New

\^tat fi^rtcfft, f(^rictt conj. as transitive, ^pAfew.

gefc^rodcn

@cl)teilben

wnTe

jOttUh
frfiric

fdjtlcbe

eemtieUn

@(f)teien cry

fdjHec
fcDHttc
fdltodire
TdittJttte

ecDteiten

<ncte
(fc^retcrfl, f(^tt)iert]
1

ftitt
fdlttdr

Oefd)tieen
ficfdnrlttm
oef(()tt>oen

@cl))t)ftten suppurate

|<Dttie8C

flef<fttolcfiett

regularly of

New conj. as

transitive, silena
fc^TOOtt

^ai\eUen

swell

f(^wiafl, f(i>njiat

fcbaollc

fdjwia gcf^aollen

of New conj. as transitive.

fdtlvatnttt fd)tt>dmtne
fdjttiftnbe
f(()kputtt)e

@d|kt>immen swim
(l)to>inbm vanish

0efd)kt>ommen
fief(()tt)un^en

@(4tt)in0en swing

fdltvano

fd)U>anoe

0efd)tt>un0en

\S)W\nQen furnish with wings is of the

New conj.
fdltvute
fft^e
tefttr

@d)ltidtett wear

fdjIVOY
nenft, ffcHt
frt^

0ef(l)t0ven
fie^
fcl

ge^cn

oefe^cn
gelDcfen
gefanbt gefenbet

^n

6e

Mn,

Mft,

ift

k.

tvav
fanbtc fenbetc
fott

cnbcn cnd

fenbete

lebm6oi7 gingcn tnf7

infCtt
stnfc

ficbetc

fattfl

fftttge

fant
fann
fft
foU,

fftnfe

^innm think
_gj^ett*
oaen
shall

fonnc fannc
fafee
folttc

wanting

gefotten

flefMttflen

gefunfett
gcfonnen

flcfeffm
gefollt

foH^

foff

foUte
fplc

fplec

gefpiecn

rarely of the

New conj.

^pinnen
^iifUi^cn

spin
split

fM*l

Spann
fpUB

\ponne ip&nnt
fpUfie

f|>ti<^

eef0ntteit

gefpltffen

^^pV^Oim

speak

f^tld)ft,

f^rad)

\pv&aif

^e^ptoOtcn

LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS.

Infinitive.

283
imper.
past part.

pres't indie, sing.

pret. indie.

pret

suiij.

^pxitfitn sprout

(fpreuleft, fpreu^t)

^ptofi

T^tdfTe
f^Jtranee
ftftcfie

(fprcu^)

flcl^tDfTcn

e^tringen spring
<Stccf)cn prick

f>>tan0
f<D(4,
fttcffl,

6e\pvunQcn
ftlcf)

fU*t

ftdd)
jlaf

geft0<l)cn
gcftorfcn

BUden
gt^hen
eUfflcn

stick

fticft

ftafc

Pit!

usually of
stand
steal

New

conj., especially

when
ftattb
ftttttb

transitive.
ftattbe
fiefttttt^eti

fticDlft,

fUel^U

W
ftob

Itunbe
ftdrne ftadie
ftieDl

0eft0l)len

gteigen ascend

ftleg

mcfle
fttttbe
ftltl^

deftiegen
fleftotaen

^Utifen

die

mvm,

^itht

ftata

ftat^e
<SiUf>en disperse

ftd^e
ftftnfe ftitnfe)
fticfee
fttljfte

fleftoOm

@ttfCtt stink

ffanf Cftunf
fid6(ef3t, fidfet
ftiefi

geftunten
geftofeett

^t0ficn

pmh

ttei(f)en stroke

itvim

oefttidjen
gefttlttctt

Strcttcn stHve
2;i)uit do

the
>

traflit,

fitltt

fttltte

pret.- indie. tt)at is

common

tl)at in dialectic

t^ate

German,
tuttfle

<

3specially as auxiliary.

%ta^m
Xtt^cn

carry
hit

tv&qi

ttUQ
ttaf

octragen
tHff
gettoffcn

tm%
mm,

um
tteuft)

it&U
tviebe

2:veil>cn drive

ttUb
ttiitSt, itiit

Qcitiehen

3:tcten tread

itat
troff

it&U
ttoffc

mtt
(trcuf)

gettetm
gctroffen

atlcfen dHp

^tinUn
Z^tuaen

drink
deceive

n)ic^(fc)fl,

itant
Cttttttf

tirftttfe

gcttunfen

ituttfe)
Itdflc

iV0e
wii^fl

g^itogen
gett)ad)fen

SSI(i(()fen

grow

tnm
TOog

to)u*fe
njcgc
ttjicgcn;,

aSSftden

wngh

gemogen

sometimes of word.
SSafdien wash
aS^eticn weare

New

conj.

compare ^wegcn and

ttJUfdl

which are the same

gekt>af(f)en

ruMc^lOfl, ttjifc^t

wttfdie

mob

mobc
:^icoge

gcmotcn

smegen
only in
of
feeiuegen,

which

is

of

New

=n?og conj.,
luid^

swogcn
gcwtc^en

except in the sense induce.

lutd^e

SSeidien yield

New
turn
sue

conj.

when meaning so/?en

Sfteifen show
SJBcnfccn

(as trans,

or intrans.)
ttJlcfe

tolled
ttjanbte
itjcnbctc

getviefen

wcnbetc
tttuvbe
lv(ilie
lt>ift

gewanbt
gewcnbct

S&cthm

geuiovlben

SESet)>en become

tpavb
tt>atf

etc.

getDOV^en
tDutfe
tviivfe
luogc
ttitf

Fcr^cn throw

getttotrfen

SSiegen weigh
the same word with
S&itt^cn wind
toftgcn

gcwogcn

and swegen wlegen

:

rock is of

New

toant)

toantt

conj.

gclpun^en

284
Infinitive.

LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS.

stinnm
know
will

pres't Indic. sing.

pret. indie.

pret. Bubj.

t\o(tnu

stvunne

imper.

past part.

det90ttnen

only used in gewlnncn win.

2Biffen

wei^, wti^t, cl^

roiU, iDittft, Witt

wu|te
n^ottte

v>mt
rcotttc

gcnju^t

"^oaen

gewottt
flejieftcn
(aeu(i^)

3eir)en accuse
3iJjctt ^'"O"'

Sie^

jicUc

{m^%

Itn^t)

300

S^de
jttanfle

flejdgeii

3tDin0en

.force

%tam

OeslDuttden

EXERCISES.
FIRST SERIES.
EXERCISE
AKTICLES AND NOUNS OF
1st
1.

DECLENSION,

1st

CLASa

[63-65 and 68-80.]

Vocabulary.
ber iBater
bie abutter

ihefaik&r
the

ber 33rubcr
bie jtoc^ter

the brother the daughter the pupil

the bird

mother

ber ?e^rer
ber

the teacher
the apple the

ber @d)uler ber SSoget

%m
arten
SO^effer

ber

garden

bag 3in^n^er
ber

the romti

bag

the knife
the cloister,

$?oP

the

spoon
little

monastery bag ebciube ber (Sngtcinber the Englishman bag S5og(ein and bag 3abc^en utib
bag ^tofter

the building
the

bird

the girl

(Present tense of the verb {)aben have, see 239.)

1.

^er

S3ruber

be ^aterg.

2.

3.
5.
1.

(Sinen Server beg SOf^dbc^enS.

4.
6.

^lelBogtein beg J^^idbc^eng. $at ber c^iiler ein SlReffer?

9.

^ie ^od^ter ber SD^iitter. ^ie ^ebaube be ^Hofter^. 2)er ^ater ^t bie ^ipfel.
10.

8. SDer Sel^rer \(\i bie SO^effer

ber driller.
!^at

^er,Sel)rer ^ai ein Bintmer.

11.

^ag

^lofter

einen Garten.

^ie Wab6)txi aben

13.
S[)ie

bie

Wz\\tx unb bie

einen SSoget.

Soffet.

12.

^er S3ruber

^at ben ^(pfel be c^iilerg unb tia^

SJiutter
:^at

^effer 14. ^ie Qimmer unb

^oc^ter?
16.

be nglduberg.

(Smarten beg S^lofterg.

15.

$aft bu eine
It. S)ie

3c^ ^abe einen SBater unb eine

SJJutter.

ngldnber ^aben drten unb ebaube.

286

IXERCISES.

n.
1.

A father's
father.
3.

and

daughter. 2. To the Englishman's brother The mother's brother. 4 To the gardens of

the monastery. 5. Of the birds of the garden. 6. Of the buildings of the monasteries. 7. The knife and spoon of the teacher. 8. The little bird of the pupil. 9. The English-

man's gardens and buildings. 10. The teachers of the monastery have pupils. 11. I have a brother and a father. 12. Have you the apple ? 13. The pupil has the apple and the Englishman's knife. 14. The pupils have apples, and the teacher has the knife. 15. I have the girl's little birds. 16. We have the teacher's room. 17. The monastery has gardens and buildings. 18. We have brothers, mothers, and fathers. 19. Have they the spoons ? 20. The Englishmen have the spoons and they have the knives.

EXERCISE
KOUNS OF
1st

2.

declension, 2nd CLASS.

[81-86.]

Vocabulary,
ber

o^n
^anb

the son
the guest

ber f^reunb
bie

thefriend
the

ber aft
bie

maQb
^u
c^u^
2:{)eil

maid

the

hand

ber ber

thefoot
the shoe

ber

^rm
S3aum

the

arm
animal

ber

the tree

bie l^ruc^t

thefruit

U?> %\)itx
ber 5Ro(f

[Zm'\

the

ber
bie

[^eit]

the part'
the city

the coat
the ring

ber 9fJlng

@tobt ber O^rring

in (prep.
he^

the earring
(

aber

hut

taMng

iative) in

(Present tense of the verb fein

I.

see 239.)

finb Sreunbe ber Wwiitx. 2. er So^n ift ber 3. ^ie greunbe beg Se^rerg finb ^riiber. (^aft beg greunbeg. 5. ie ^f)iere ^aben 4. ie SO^agb ^at bie Siucfe ber greimbe. 6. !^er o^n git^e, aber vo'xx '^aben anbe, 5lrme imb gii^e. be greunbeg ^at einen ^()eil be ^Ipfelg in ber* anb.
1.

^ie ^afte

7.

^ie greunbe
* See 66.3.

finb in ber (Stabt.

8.

^er

9iing

ift

in

bem 8im=*

EXEKCISES.

m
11.

mer ber
ter.

SO^dgbe.

9. SDie

O^rringe finb in ben anben ber ^oc^*

ift

10.

^er Garten beg ^ater

nnb

in ber tabt.
12.

Qn

bent

(Garten finb 33dnme

griic^te.

inb

bie

(Sc^ul;e

be

^ie Ttag^h ^at bie c^ne nnb 14. ^ift bn ber o^n be greunbeg? D^Dcfe in ber anb. 15. 3c^ bin bie Wao^h be 2erer. 11. SSir finb grennbe be ^afte unb n)ir Ijaben grennbe in ber tabt.
@afte in bent
13.

dimmer?

n.

The fruits of the trees. 2. To the trees in the gardens. 3. To the teacher's friend. 4. Of the shoes of the maids. 5. The animal's feet. 6. The hands of the foot the arms and the hands. 7. A part of the fruit. 8. The guest of the teacher is the pupil's friend. 9. The son's friend is the father's guest. 10. The guests are in the garden. 11. In the garden (there) are animals and trees. 12. I am a friend of the guest. 13. The pupils' coats and shoes are in the maids' hands. 14. The maids have the daughter's room. 15. The daughter has the maid's rings and earrings. 16. Have the animals hands and feet? 17. The birds and the animals have feet, but we have hands, feet, and arms. 18. The trees are in the city's gardens. 19. Art thou the son's teacher ? 20. I am a friend of the father. 21. Thou art in the garden, but we are in the mother's room. 22. The
1.
; ;

pupil's coat is in the teacher's room.

EXERCISE
NOUNS OF
1st

3.

declension, 3ed CLASS.

[87-90.]
Vocabular'i/,

ber

^am

the

man
book

bag tinb ha^ S3ud^ ta^ ^elb

ber

the child the

ha^ SSclb bag ^aii8 ha^ S3Ub

the
the

woman
house

the picture the valley the dress the

the field

Salb

iheforest
the village

%^ai ha^ mtih

tia^

ha^ 2)orf ha^ ?anb

cin
brei

bag

S)arf)

roof

the land, country

ba^ @c^Io
gttjei

the castle

one
three

t)ier

two four

(Present tense of the verb gebcn give, see 236.2.)

288

EXERCISES.

1.

5Da 2Bet6

tft

bie Tlntttx hex ^tnber.

3.

2.

^er Wlam
ift

gtBt
bie

bem ^Hnbe*
SDorfe.
6. SDie
ift

ein ^ud^.

^ie ^D^dnner
4.

ftnb in bent getbe

unb
in

SSeiber finb in ben |)anfern.

^a au

be ^ater

bem

5. a S3ilb beg .gaufe^ ift in bem ^ud^e be ^inbe. ^inber beg SDorfeS finb imf SBalbe. 1. eg greunbeg aug in bem X^ale, aber bag d^tog beg $8aterg ift in bem SSalbe. 9.

8.

aft bu bie ^ilber ber c^Ioffer?

10.

bie ^ilber.

^at ber

Wawn
^t)a(e.

ein

gelb?

Sf^ gebe ben ^inbern 11. ^ie brei gelber

ht^ SO^anneg finb in

bem

^leib nnb bie (Sd^nt)e.

SBilber.

13.

12. 2Bir geben bem tinbe ha> ie geben ben ^dnnern ^uc^er nnb

14.

^ag

SSeib

f)at bie griid^te.

15. SDer

^ann

at brci

^inber, gtDei (So^ne unb eine 3:od^ter.

n.
1.

The

castles

and
;

villages of the country.

of the

2.

To the

roofs of the houses

clothes.
5.

man's
? 6.

fields.

3.

Of the men's

4.

In the woods and to the valleys of the country.

in the village

Are the men

The women and children

7.

are in the village, but the

fields in

men

are in the fields.

Are the
9.

the valley ?

8.

The

fields are in

the valleys.

tave three houses in the village and a castle in the forest. 10. Have ye a picture of the castle ? 11. I have a picture of the village. 12. Givest thou a book to the child ? 13. I give the children books and pictures. 14. The man gives the women a picture of the house in the valley. 15. We give the child two dresses and a book. 16. In the book are pictures of the castles of the country. 17. I have four children, three daughters and one son. 18. The friend's house is in the city, but the fields are in the village. 19. Art thou the child of the woman ? 20. I am the friend 21. The child's dress is in the woman's of the woman. room. 22. The woman gives the child the dress and the
shoes.

222.1a.

t65.

EXERCISES.

289
4.

EXERCISE
NOUNS OF THE
2nd
[91-95.]

DECLENSION.

Vocabulary.
ber ^ilrfl
<^e prince the count

bie giirftin

the princess the

@raf ber @tubent

ber
ber efeae ber ^ranjoje ber
bie

ber

^mht

boy

the student
the

ber Offisier^ ber ^reu^e

bie ^ranjoftn

the officer

the

comrade Frenchman

the
the the

Prussian

Frenchwoman
husband
watch

^err

the gentleman the

ber atte
bie @c^tt)efter
bie Ut)r

^rau
iBIume

woman,

wife

the sister the

bie

the flower

nic^t

not

(Possessive pronouns mein mine, bein thine, fein his, unfer our, euer your, it)V their or her, declined like etn : see 159.2.)

1.

^te Srau

ift

eine granjoftn

unb

i^r (Satte
3.

ift

etn ^reuge.

2. !5)ie

D^ne
ift

ber giirftinnen finb Offtgiere.

ten beine

aber er
6.

greunbe? 4. Qc^ bin nid^t mein (^efeUe. 5. 2)er ^ater be^

gibt feinem (Sot)ne eine Ur.
8.

tub bie tuben* ber grennb be (Stubenten,

S^^naben
t.
ift

ein (^raf.

^er ^raf
9.

^d) gebe meinen

(^n)eftern jtrei U^ren.

aben

bie

anben?

^c^

i)aht eine

^lume

in meiner

granen Q3(nmen in i^ren anb, aber bie

granen ^aben bie tinmen ber S^^naben. 10. S<^ ^^^^ ^i^ ^ilber ber giirften nnb ber giirftinnen be Sanbe. 11. ^er SSater be Solbaten ift Dffigier*. 12. (Sr ift im c^Ioffe be giirften. 13. ^ie gilrften nnb ^rafen finb feine grennbe nnb efellen.
14.

Tltim o^ne

finb

bie

d)iiter

be granjofen.

15.

S)ie

gran5ofen finb nid^t bie grennbe ber ^ren^en.

^
1.

n.

is a count and his mother is a princompanions are the count's sons. 3. The students are Frenchmen, and their companions are Prussians. 4. My mother is a sister of the princess. 5. The gentleman's son is an ofl&cer*. 6. He is a Prussian, but his

The boy's father

2.

cess.

My

See 66.8.

Offijier is 1st decl.,

2f1 p.li?s.

'

290
wife
is

EXERCISES.
a

Frenchwoman.
8.

books and flowers.

officer's

7. The student gives his sisters Has he your watch ? 9. He has the

10. We are Frenchmen, but the Prussians and companions. 11. The student's friend is the officer's son. 12. The gentlemen are friends of the prince. 13. Are the women in your house ? 14 They are not in my house, they are in their garden. 15. Our maids are Frenchwomen. / /-^.^

watch.

are our friends

EXERCISE
[96-108.]

5,

NOUNS OP MIXED DECLENSION, PKOPER NAMES,

ETC.

Vocabulary.
hex 9^a(^Bar bcr 25octor ber ''Rame
bic ef(f|id)te
the neighbor

ber ^Setter

the cousin
the professor

the doctor
the

ber ^rofe[for
t>a^

name

tubiurn

the study

the history

S)eutjd^tanb

Oenrmny
Miller

c^mibt
^riebrid^"

Smith
Frederick

abutter

Maxi
and}

Charles
also

o^{)ie
ja

Sophy
yes
the

nein

no
the

ber

^aufmann

merchant

bie ^aufleutc
Zove, like,

merchants

(Present tense of the verb Ueben

see 236.)

bu beine ^a^haxn? 2. Qi^ Hebe bie ^inber meineS 3. ^2)ie tubenten \6) liebe mehien D^ac^bar nic^t. lieben i()ren ^rofeffor, aber fie lieben i^re Stubien md)t. 4. ^te 5. er 9^ame beg 2)octoren finb greunbe beg errn SJiiitter. ^imben ift griebric^. 6. ^c^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ Seamen griebricl^ nic^t. 8. "i^a^ 1. ^er ^ater griebric^g ift ein greuub beg ^octorg. ^n^ ^arlg ift ehie (Sefc^i^te SDeutfc^Ianbg. 9. $evrn 10. ^ettern finb im ai^iiHerg $aug ift in ber tabt. opl^ieng? 11. hn bag S3nc^ errn (Sc^mibt. aft anfe beg 12. 3r nnb (Sophie ^at nteine ^iid)er. 13. Unfere grennbe finb 14. SDie Seamen ber ^ro= ntc^t ^anfknte, fie finb ^rofefforen.
1.

SleBft

S^ad^barS, aber

Wdm

fefforen finb (Si^mibt

nnb

SJiiiCCer.

EXEECISES.

291

2. No, but my son is a 1. merchant. 3. Mr. Miller's son has Frederick's book. 4. Frederick is in Mr. Smith's house. 5. Charles gives his brother a history of Germany. 6. Charles is in Germany with the professor's brother. 7. Does Charles love his

n. Are your cousins merchants?

studies ? 8. He loves his studies and his professors. 9. My neighbor's name is Smith. 10. Sophy's father is my cousin, and Sophy is my cousin's daughter. 11. The doctor's sons are also doctors. 12. The names of his sons are Charles and Frederick. 13. Do you like the name of Charles ? 14. I love Charles, but I do not love his name.

EXERCISE
ADJECTIVES OF
1st

6.

DECLENSION.

[114-122.]

Vocabulary,
fc^on

heauUful
variegated,

rot^ [rot]

red
little,

bunt
frlfd^

gay

flein

smaU

fresh

arm
liaBtirfi

poor
ugly

neu
gut
fleipg
grofe

new
good
industrious
big
1

xoaxm Ueb
gtiidUcfi

warm
dear

happy
pleasure
the parents the people

griiu

green
blue
the

bie

greube

blau
bie

bie (SItern bie Seute

Wii6)

milk

I
1. !5)er

Staufmann ^at fc^one ^pfel unb bunte S5Iumen.

frifc^e

2. SDie

^inber liebeu

Wiii).
4.

3.

SDer Se!)rer gibt ben c^iileru

neue, fc^one ^iic^er.

5.

3n
bie

hzn ^iicl^ern finb fc^one, bunte ^itber.

^ute ^iuber
if)reg

finb

greube

\i)xc>

ef)rer.
1.

6.

inb

bie

^iuber

oljueg

tjiit

unb

fteigig ?

Qn
9.

bent Garten finb

gro^e, griine ^iiume unb blaue unb rot^e [rote]

I)abe blaue

tinmen. 8. ^d) ^ie au[er armer Seute finb !(ein unb fjcifttic^. 10. ^ute grauen geben avmen Stinbcrn fcf)bne, marme ^(eibcr. 11. ^ie (Sttern guter, flei^igcr ^naben finb gliic!iic^. 12. 2icbe ^inb, bu bift arm, aber bu bift 13. 2)ie tubenten f)aben rot^e [rote] unb blaue diode. gliicftic^.
Q3(umen unb
h\i ^a]i rotf)e [rote].

14. S)eutfc^laub ^at gro^e, fc^bue (Stable.

292

EXEKCISES.

n.
1.

Good, industrious children are the joy of their parents.

The mother gives her children warm fresh milk. 3. In the garden are beautiful red apples and little blue flowers. 4. Poor little children have ugly dresses. 5. The professor's sons are big ugly boys. 6. The child is good and industrious. 7. My garden is large and beautiful. 8. I have blue and red flowers and big apples. 9. I give warm clothes and red apples to poor little children. 10. The trees of my garden are large and green, but my house is small and ugly. 11. In the town are beautiful large houses and green trees. 12. The teachers of industrious, good boys are happy. 13. Good teachers love their pupils and good pupils have happy teachers. 14 The merchants have gay new ribbons. 15. Dear friend, you have beautiful good daughters. 16. The cities of Germany are large and handsome. 17. My children have good books and gay pictures. 18. Have you fresh milk ? 19. I have fresh warm milk. 20. Good teachers have good pupils.
2.

EXERCISE

7.

ADJECTIVES OF 2nd DECLENSION.

[118-128.]

Vocabulary.
^od)
att
tt)ei

high
old

niebrig

low
sick

!ronf
fcf|

white
noble
charitable

tears

black
rich

ebel

reidi

barm'^erijig

unartig

naughty
pretty
silver
,

trage

lazy
golden, gold
the the

Pbjrf)
fttbcrn

gotben

ha^ 53rob
bie %a\\t

bread

ber SBein
felir

the

wine

cup

very

(S)iefer this, jcncr that,

declined like ber, see 165.)

1.

liefer

^aum

ift

fe^r

f)Ofi).

2.

er

^o^e, fc^line 33aum

3. SDiefe

ift

in

bem gro^en Garten meine

rcicljcu 9Zac^bar.

guten,

EXERCISES.
ftei^igen

293

^tnber finb

bie d^iiter be atten Sc^rer,

^d^

c3cbe

biefem alten,

franfen SOhinne guten, rotten $3ein uiib iDeigeg

luei^e

^rob.

5.

SSir lieben bag

6.

Q3rob,

aber

tt)ir

Ijaben

imr

fc^marjeg.
93Zabc^eii
ift

3ft

'i)a>

IjiiOfd^e

^inb imartiG ?
er

1.

^iefeS Ijubfdje

unartig uiib trdge, aber jene IjdfeUc^en ^iiiber finb gut

8.

imb
l}at

Peifjig.

S)er (^raf

ift

eiu ebler 3[Raun

ift

ift fet)r

reid)
9.

uub

fc^pne, mj^igiijlDffer, aber er

gut uub barmljer^ig.

(Seine

gute_gra3i^3^*b?n armeu, franfeu ^inbern gute ^rob unb

luarme
^Hetbei?. --i^-^yrc^

au

biefe alten 90^anne

ift

eiu nieb^

rige, !(eiue
fet)r

au

in einer grofsen, fc^oueu (Stabt.

gtrtc; flei^ige

11.

ift

arm, aber er ^at

ofjue.

12. !J)iefer gute (So^n

S^leib

gibt feiner

armeu
13.

SO^utter

eiu
biefe

neu5,

U)arme

uub

eine

golbene Uf)r.
14. 9^ein,
fie

aben

armeu Seute

filberue

Sliffet?
fleine

ijahcn gute Soffe(,aber nic!^t filberue.

15.

er

(Sot)u jeneg reic^en

rafeu ^at feine frifc^e

MM)

in einer filber:^

nen ^affe.

n.
1.

I love these pretty little children.

little

2.

The old father

3.

of

these

children

is

a poor sick man.

My

charitable

mother gives the poor man warm clothes and good black bread. 4. Do you love this red wine ? 5. No, but I love that good fresh milk. 6. My rich cousin has a very pretty house in the beautiful valley. 7. That high white castle is the castle of his noble friend. 8. We have a little low house, but our trees are highland beautiful and our new garden is very large. 9. This happy man has very good, handsome sons. 10. These pretty little girls are his daughters. 11. My rich neighbor has silver spoons and gold watches, but his children are naughty and lazy and he is not happy. 12. My little son has a silver cup and a silver spoon. 13. This pretty little girl gives her poor, sick brother her gay pictures and her pretty books. 14. My neighbor's trees are high and beautiful, but I have a beautiful high tree in my little garden. 15. I love the beautiful green forest and the gay flowers and the little birds, but I do not love this great ugly city.

294

EXERCISES.

EXERCISE
j;P?:i30.]
(

8.

ADJECTIVES USED AS, SUBSTANTIVES AND AS ADVERBS.

V-Vocabulary.
bie

1
the hair
the hut

has,

5(ugc

the eye the village

the

bo aar

bag 2)orf
tie d^leife
etttjaS
ijlel

^utte

bow

fd)Ie(f|t

bad
nothing
whole, quite
bright, light

something

tiid^tg

much,

many

gans
^ctt

bunfel
Ui^

dark
left

rcddt

right

hh^

pale

nur

only

(Preterit tense of l^aben have, see

239.)

1 '^er
Ott^
'

5lrme

ift

ber

^ruber be

Df^eid^en.

2.

^ie (^uten (ieben

3.

^ute, aber bie d^led^ten lieben

nur ba

(Sc^Iec^te.

5Die
4.

(Sd^l^ne ^atte eine jcl^one rot^e B^ofe in

ber fc^i3nen anb.

atteft
fd)i3ne

bu ein gan^eS au ? 5. 9^ein, aber ic^ l)atte brei gnn^ gintmer im $aufe meine ^ater^. 6. r giOt bemStleinen
aber er gibt bem ^(ten nic^t^. 1. aar unb bunfelblaue 5tngen. 8. at
2)iefe
fie

ettDii^ (S(i)one,

^nme

^at

bunfleg

ein bunf(e

ober ein ^eHeg ^leib ?

9. (Sie 1)at ein bun!eIrot()e [rote]

Meib

mit blaplauen (Sd^Ieifen.

SSogtein in ber Sinfen.
rige
iitte,

10.
11.

^a ^inb

'^atte ein

ganj !(eine

^er 5(rme
I)at

^at nur eine gan^ nicb=

aber ber

9^eic!^e

ein fc^oneg c^Iofi

unb

biele

gelber unb 2)orfer.

dlo\tn, aber fie fatten

12.

SSir fatten tiiele* bunfelrot^e [rote]

irei^e.

nur

nand the poor are brothers. 2. I love good, but they love evil. 3. Has your little brother dark eyes ? 4 No, he has bright blue eyes and quite golden hair. 5. His coat is dark green, but mine is quite black. 6. This
1.

The

rich

"j"

whole great building

is

a monastery.
8.

pretty in his right hand?

only a pale blue flower.

* See

9.

7. Had he anything nothing new; he had "We had many dark and light

He had

192.

159.5.

EXERCISES.
dresses, but this pretty girl
10.

295

had only wholly black dresses. The beauty has black hair and dark blue eyes. 11. The little one is pretty, but he is very naughty. 12. The whole village is very poor and ugly, but this little hut is quite pretty, 13. We love the good and the beautiful. EXERCISlfjC)

COMPAKATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE OF ADJECTIVES.

'

[133-142.]

\'^*)'\'^^'

\U^

Vocabulary.
(Sttgtanb

England
France
the lUy

(Suro|)a
bie @(^tt)ei3

Europe
Switzerland
the violet

gran!reid^
bic ?iUe

bag 3Seitc^cu
ftotg

!tug

clever

m
nodf (adv.)
^ 1.

alt

old

iwng
oft

proud young
often

sweet

stm

al6

than

5Deine

^(umen

ftnb fd^on, atier

meine

Dftofen ftnb nod fifjoner.

3.

2.

te fi^onften

Otofett finb in

unferem

(Smarten.
ift

%tx %xo\

i'ft

reic^er al ber ^rofeffor, aber ber

4.

^^aufmann

am

alterreic^ften.

^ie @o^ne be ^rafen ftnb fcl^oner uub ftoljer aB meine b^ne, aber meine (So^ne finb nm beften unb am Hiiijften. 5. ^Oii
ber ^raf
aucf) jiingere <Sb()ne ?
6.
ift

(Sv I^at

nnr brei of)ne

ber
ift

Slltefte ift

Df filler,
Y.

ber ^iingere
^Die 3fiofe
ift

tnbent, aber ber Qiingfte

nocl^

jn ,anfe.
ift

fc^oner al bie Sitie, aber \>^^

8.

SSeit:=

d^en

bie fd)onfte ber 331nmen.

^ie 5lrmen

finb oft gliic!licf)er

9. ^^iefie ift

at bie 3^eic^en, aber bie

fe ayjabc^en
ift

^nten

finb

am

at(ergliic!licl)ften.

i^iet

btaffer al i^re c^mefter.

ift

10.

3a,

!ran!, aber bie fleine

noct) !ran!er.

11. iefer

^nabe

ift ^i)c^ft

unartig, er

ift t)iel fcl^lec'^ter

at feine jiingeren ^riiber.

13.

12. ^leine

^naben
fe^r,

finb oft artiger al ditere.

irf)

Qd^ liebe meine gi^eunbe

^riiber

aber
14.
ift

liebe

am

meiften * meine
!(einer

unb meine
bie

(tern.

grantreic^
\iQi^

ift

al

^eutfc^lanb, aber

c^meij

!(emfte

^eutfd^tanb finb
allerreid^ften.

Sanb ($uropa'. 15. granfreid) unb gro^e unb reid^e 2dnber, aber ^ngtanb ift am

*See 363.26.

296

EXERCISES.

n. 1. This child is larger than his brother, but Charles is the largest 2. Charles is better than the older pupils, but Frederick is the most industrious of the boys. 3. These younger boys are cleverer than the older ones. 4 The reddest apples are the prettiest, but these green apples are sweeter than the red ones. 5. These flowers are very bright and pretty. 6. Yes; but the pale red roses are prettier, and
these blue violets are the prettiest flowers in my garden. 7. The rose is the most beautiful flower, the lily is the proudest; but the violet is the prettiest of all. 8. England is a smaller country than Germany, but the Englishmen are

prouder and richer than the Germans. 9. Is Switzerland larger than England? 10. No; Switzerland is still smaller than England. 11. These poor children are sick and unhappy, but the smallest one is the most unhappy. 12. She is poorer and sicker than her brother, and she is also the youngest. 13. The biggest of these girls is ugly; but the younger is prettier, and the youngest is the prettiest. 15. We love our friends more 14. She is quite beautiful. than our teachers. 16. I love the rose more than the lily, but I love the violet most.

EXERCISEVIO/
PEKSONAL PKONOUNS.
[149-156.]

Vocabulary.
mlt (prep, with dative) with
bag @tii(f
the piece

Don (prep, with dative)

tie glajc^e

of,

from

the bottle

(Preterit tense of fein 6e, 239.2.)

L
1.

Stebt

Itebett fie.

btefcgraut^re^inber? 2. ^a, 3. ie lieben S^re o^ne, ahtx

fie liebt ftc fie

unb

fie

lieben ie nid^t.

4. (^tbt

3!)nen 3^r 35ruber bie

6.

^u^ ?
9.

5. 9^ein,
1.

meine c^trefter
fie

gi6t e mir.

atte er bie geber?

bie ^ilber

r ^atk

in ber

anb.
10.
11.

8.

SSarft
(Sie
fie

aben

3^

^abe

bu im Garten ? ^^ Don Q^ren ^inbern in biefem ^nc^c? barin. 12. 3d) gebe fie Q^nen. 18. Uaxl, bu bift

wax mit i^m im

(Garten.

EXEKCISES.
ein fci^tei^ter ^nabe, aber opf)ie

297

unb griebrid), i^r feib gute 15. Sd^ unb tDir lieben un. 14. 2Bir fiiib (Sc^meftern ^inber. ^ruber ie ? 16. inb fein gtpei 5ipfel gebe euc^ biefe 3c^ ^atte 19. bu ben 18. $atteft Soffel? Un e. 17. 3d) 20. ^ibt er bir ein tiicE bon xf)n in ber recr)ten anb. feinem 93robe? 21. @r gibt mir ein tiic! babon nnb and) eine 22. a 9[)^ab(^en n)ar mit mir in ber tabt, giafdje 3Sein*. nnb i^r ^rnbcr n^ar anc^ mit nn. 23. r tnar gliidlii^, nnb
Wix
rtjaren e au(i).

24. (S n)aren

t)iele

Sente in ber tabt.

/'

n. Dost thou love me, my brother ? 2. I love thee and thou lovest me. 3. Does his sister give him the flowers ? 5. Was your sister in the garden 4. She gives them to him. too ? 6. She was with me in the garden. 7. Children, were you good and industrious ? 8. We were so. 9. I have a picture of you in my book. 10. No, it is not in it; it is in
1.

my

picture of

This picture is not a picture of me, it is a mother. 12. There were many pupils in the school. 13. Were you a pupil of the old man ? 14. I was. 15. I have a picture of the Englishman in my room. 16. I was in your room, but it was not in it. 17. Have you the apple ? 18. I have it and a piece of bread also. 19. Do you love her or me ? 20. I love her, but I do not love you. 21. Your friends love you and you love them, but I do not

hand.

11.

my

love you.

22. I

have your pen and I give

it

to you.
24.

23.

Were

these boys with you in the monastery?

us,

were with
girl

bottle of wine in your

has

my

but we do not love them. 25. hand ? 26. I have it in it. 27. That ring. 28. No, she hasn't it your brother has it.
;

They Have you the

EXERCISE
[157-171.]

11.

POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS.

Vocabulary,
hex Ol^cim
ble
Ihe uncle the

ber

S5ormunb
jttjeater

the

guardmn
dog

Xantt

aunt

baS
ber

the theatre
the

bag ^ferb
ber S3rief
*

ihe horse

^unb

the letter

ha^ ^piti

the

game

2ie.5a.

298

1.

Ofjeim,

6tnb unb

bte SDlcintier

Sreunbe

t)on

Q^nen?
3.

2.

er

tft

mein

jener
4.

ift

rnetn

^ormunb.

inb

biefe jtuei

^ferbe

bie feinigen ?

$errn d)mibt.
bag 3rige
tt)ar
ift

ift mein ^ferb, aber jeneg tft ein ^ferb beg ein ^ferb ift grofser ai> ba meinige, aber am grogten. 6. SSaren ie in ber tabt ? 1. ^c^

a
5.

in Berlin mit bent (S^rafen

unb

einent

greunbe
9.

beffelben.

eine greunbe finb nic^t bie nteinigen. ^^eater mit feiner ^ante unb beren ^itbfc^er
8.
ift

SSir

maren im
10.
!5)a

^^oi^ter.

ein fc^bneg ^^eater.

11. Unfere S^inber

unb

bie unfereg

^ad^^
bie

barg finb (filler ieneg Tlanm^.

12.

Tldm

^inber finb
14.

greunbe ber

feinigen.

13. (Sie finb in berfelben c^ute

unb ^aOen

immer biefelben ^iic^er unb biefelben tnbien. unb ber meineg D^eimg raaren mit mir im SSalbe.
gan unartig, aber ber feinige
16.
ift

Wnn

unb
$unb.
ift

15. SD^einer tvav

ein

()iibfrf)er,
ift

artiger

inb

bie ^tnei ^riefe bein ?

17.

^er

mein, aber jener

ber beinige.

18. SDag^inb bie ^riefe

meineg D^eimg.

n.
1. Were you in Berlin with your brother ? 2. I was in BerHn with my friends and those of my brother. 3. Our friends are always the same. 4. I love his and he loves mine. 5. Is this your dog or that of your uncle ? 6. My uncle's dog is much handsomer than that. 7. Had you your horses or your guardian's ? 8. We had my guardian's, his are
9. This is my horse, but that is my This boy was in the forest with our neighbor and his son. 11. He (that one) is a pretty little boy. 12. Have you my letter or my aunt's? 13. I have our letter and yours and hers. 14. I give you them. 15. That is his, but I have also a letter from my mother. 16. I have a picture of her (the same). 17. I do not like dogs. 18. Yours are bad, but your uncle's are the worst.

much

better than ours.

10.

brother's.

It,!,

Yll

J'^-O^

(oaJ-j^) exeecises.

299

EXERCISE
/

12.

mrEEROGATIVE, RELATIVE, AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

[172-195.1\
Vocabulary,
geftern

yesterday

^eute

to-day

now
ber abater
the painter the

berii^mt

ber ^aijer

ott

Emperor Ood

bag etb ha^ S^atl^auS [9tat^aug] the town-hall

1

famous the money

ta^ portrait*

the portrait

1.
ttjar.

2Ber
3.

ift

btefer

$0?ann?

2.

r
,

ift

berfetbe,t ber geftern ^ter

SSem gebeu ie ben

ift gtiicflic^er

^^rief

'^tw

ie in ber anb IjaBen ?

meiften Hebe.
5.

4.

3c^ gebe i^n bemienigen, ben

ic^

am

SSer

!ein (S^elb ^ai,

greunbe %at T. SSa fiir 6. SDer, ber mic^ nic^t liebt, ift nic^t mein greunb. 8. (r ift ein jnnger WoXtx, beffen ein Wamx ift fein aft?
berjenige, ber feine
finb.
9.

aB

^ilber fe^r beriif)mt

beriif)mter
2BeIcf)e

inb

feine ^ilber fdjbner

aB

bie

be altcn Waltx^, ber geftern ^ier xoax ?

10. 2)er

ift

anc^ ein
11.

Wa\tx, aber ber

fiingere

ift

am

beriif^mteften.

^ilber finb Don Sfjrem grennbe ?

inelc^eg
!

12.

^a
15.

portrait be
SSelc^
finb

^aifer,

im

9^atr)^au

ift,

ift

Doni^m.

13.

ein
bie

fc[)one Q3ilb

14.

SSeffen finb biefe ^ferbe ?

(5^

^ferbe be jnngen Dffi^ier^, ber je^t in nnferem anfe ift. IT. SSer gtbt nn 16. 28er foIcl}e ^ferbe f)at, ift ein ^Uic!lic!)er.
a((e,

mag \mx

\)(\im\

18. SE)er gnte

ott

gibt

un

a((e, n)a

unr
gibt

^aben.

19. (Sibt bcin

tiiele

^ormnnb

bir ettna(Sd)bne? 20.

mir immer
9^eue.

fdjone (Sad[)en, aber er gibt

mir

'^eute nid^t^

n.
2. The letter which you have in your hand is from my sister who is now in Germany. 3. In -which city is she ? 4. She is in the same 6. I love city in which I was. 5. Whom do you love?

1.

From whom

is

this letter ?

those

who

love

me and who

are

my

friends.
f 434.

7.

He who

* Pronounced,

and often written,

^^ortriit.

437

300

EXEKCISES.

has no friends is unhappy. 8. Whose horses have you ? 9. I have the horses of my uncle who is now sick. 10. He is at the house of the doctor whose best friend he is. 11. What sort of pictures have you in your book ? 12. That is a picture of the painter whose portraits are so famous, and this is a picture of our good Emperor whom we love 13. What a pretty book! 14 Whoever has so much. money gives something to the poor who have nothing. 15. This good man gives all he has to the poor and sick. 16. What does he give them? 17. He gives them warm clothes which rich people give to him. 18. He who has no friends is more unhappy than he who has no money. 19. Those who do not love me are not my friends. 20. Whose
loves us

we? 21. We are the children of God, who and who gives us all we have. 22. Some have much money and some have no money. 23. Several of my friends were in our house to-day. 24. We have many fine pictures in our town-hall, but the portrait of the Emperor
children are
is

the

finest.

EXERCISE
[196-203.]

13.

CAKDINAL AND OKDINAL NUMEEALS.

Vocabulary.
bcr

^ag

the

day

ber
bie

Wonat
@tunbe

the
the

month
hour

ba 3a^r
bie 3JJinute

the year the minute

ber @eburttag
bie 53ibUott|e!

the birthday the library

bic SBod^e

3anuar
9Rar5
9Jfai

week January
the

?^ebruar
5tt)rit

March

May
July
September

3uni
STuguft

February April June

3uli
(September
9'Jot)ember
bie 9Jiar!

August
October

November

October 2)ecember

December

warfc (coin worth 24 cts.)

1.

eute

tft

ber

fiinf

unb ^mangigfte Wcix^,

Ci^i^^f)n

^unbett

fteben

unb

ac^tjig.

2.

SDa Sn^r ^nt 12

Womtt,

ieber

Womi

EXERCISES.
^ai 30 ober 81 ^age, jeber Xac^
i)at
Ijat
ift

301
itnb jebe

24 (Stunben,

(Shmbc

60 ar^iuuten.
efterii iDiir

3.

Wdx^^

ber britte

monai

be 3a[)re^.

4,

ber 16te
5.

3:at3 b,e 9teii 9[)toiiat

be 25fteu 3al)re

meineg Sebeiig.
ber beine
ift

9[)?ein

(^etuirt^tag
6.

ift

ben 9teu gebruar,

ben 29ften
^at

^^(ut3uft.

SSie uiele ^iid)er ^aben ie

in ^i)XQX ^ib(iot()e! ?

7.

^d)

ijahc ungefdftr

2450

S^iic^er,

aber

ntein
8.

Oljeim

t)iele

3:anfenb ^iicl^er

in

feiner

^ibliot^e!.
ift

SSir finb brei ^riiber, ^Boijut eine ^ater,

alt,

ber erfte
in feinem

20

Sa^re
3a^re.

ber 2te
SSir

ift

18 3al)re

nit,

ber

3te

ift

16ten

maren ben 25ften Quli 1878 mit unferen 10 ^in^^ 10. ^ie brei alteften ber Sl^inber finb ^naben, \)a> t)ierte unb fiinfte finb ^IRcibcl^en, nnb bie fiinf anberen finb nnc^ o^ne. 11. er ^eic^e ^at 1,000,000 maxl* aber fein armer 9^acf)bar t)at fein (S^elb.
9.

bern in Berlin.

n.
Yesterday was the 16th of July, 1887. 2. Was yesterday your birthday? 3. No, my birthday is the 19th of November, and my sister's birthday is the 6th of February.
1.

is 22,

I have three sisters, the first is 25 years old, the second and the third is in her 20th year. 5. June is the 6th month of the year. 6. The year has 12 months, 52 weeks,
4.

The Emperor's birthday was the 22nd of 90 years old, and his son is 48. 9. In the city's library are 52,973 books. 10. Have you much money? I had many thousand marks, but now I have only 57 marks. he has 5,787,320 marks. 11. My guardian is very rich 12. Whose are these seven children? 13. Two are my
and 365 days. March. 8. He
7.

is

brother's children,
1776.

and the other five are mine.

14.

July 4th,

15. Oct. 17th, 1519.

EXERCISE
[231-237.]

14.

SIMPLE FORMS OF VERBS.

Vocabulary,
like Uebcn conjugate
:

like geben conjugate

fel^en

njo^ncn

dwell, live

see

malen
* 211.2.

paint

lefcn

read

3(^2
faufcn
njiinfcl^cn

EXERCISES.
hay
vyish,

fru^er

formerly
the hat

ward
(See 386.46, 434.)

ber

^ut

toeit (conj.),

becaiise

alS (conj.),

when

1.

SSer gab gotten ha^ SBuc^ ?

3.

liebte.

2. Qdi gab e i^tn, trett id) i^n SSo tDoI)nen 3re greunbe ? 4. (Sie mo^nten frii^er in
fie

ber tabt, aber

bie

tDo^nen je^t

l^ier

grau, al ber S^aufmann ^ier wax ?

fiir

iite

i^re ^^inber.

1.

2Sa

fiir

5. 2Ba fauftc ie !aufte 9ftocfe unb 8. (Sr ein S3uc^ lefen ie ?

im

SSalbe.

6.

liegt eine ^efc^ic^te

Don

2)eutfd)Ianb.

aud^.

10.

2Sa fagte

er,

al (Sie e
12.

9. ib fie mir, icl^ lefe fie i^m gaben? 11. (Sr fagte fie^ft bu, ge(iebte

nic^tg, tueit ic^ if)n nic^t fa.

2Sa

^nb?

13.

3d fe^e

jtDei fcljon

gemalte ^ilber.

14. 2Ser malte ha> '^ox^

trait

Don S^^^itt Skater? 15. !5)er junge 93laler, ber in nnferem aufe tvo^nt, malte e. 16. (Sage mir \va^ bu miinfi^eft, unb id^ gebe e bir. IT. ^ib mir nid^t, id) ^abe aEe^ tva^ id^ tt)iinfrf)e. 18. SSa fur ein ^ilb malten ie ? 19. 3d^ malte ein ^ilb \)on

bem aufe

ujorin id^

Wo^m,
n.

1. Love me because I love you. 2. Why did you give her your picture ? 3. I gave it to her because she loved me. 4. What did you say to the merchant when you saw him ? 5. We bought books and pictures. 6. What sort of books are you reading ? 7. I am reading the history which my uncle gave me. 8. Eead it and give it to me. 9. This painter lived seven years in Berlin, but now he lives in our

city. 10. He paints very beautiful pictures. 11. He painted the portrait of the Emperor which you saw in Berlin. 12. This rich man bought the j^icture which I saw. 13. We saw the Emperor the 15th of February 1879, when we were in Berlin. 14. What did he want ? 15. He wanted nothing more, he bought all he wanted. 16. I am cold because I have no hat. 17. Buy a hat while the merchant is here. 18. I do not buy a hat because I have no money. 19. Give

EXEKCISES.

303

me money.
21.

20.

I have three loved and loving daughters.

Thou mayest love, he may live, you might paint, he might see, we may read, give, he might buy, we might see, you may paint.

EXERCISE
[238-244.]

15.

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND POEMS OP THE AUXILIAEIES.

Vocabulary.
ber cnerat
ber
the general the spring

ber otbat
ber ^erbft

the soldier

^ru^Ung

autumn
winter
the weather

ber

@ommer

summer
the season

ber SBinter

blc 3a^re5eit
fatt

ha^ better
^eiB

cold
cool

hot

fu^t
tobt [tot]
JU, adv.

3ufrieben
njenn, conj.

contented
if,

dead
too

when

gu,prep. (with dative or inf

1.

S)tefe
2. 3.

^inber ttiurben fran!,

(jDa SSetter
ttiirb
ift

tnetl fie feine

tDarmen f^Ieiber

l^atten.

je^t fii^tejJMub bie ^inber

merben
4.

gefunb.

^nt

@ommer
fc()on

ha> SSetter fel^r ^ei^,

ift

aber tm Qtxh]t

tDirb e !uf)tcr,

imb tm SSinter

am

aderfalteften.

er

Srii^ting

ift feljr

gemefen, aber ber

ift

ommer
ift.

ift

bie fcl^onfte
6.

Sal^re^jeit.

5.

3Barum

ber alte

Tlann

fo berut;mt ?
1.

@r
8.

ift

berii'^mt, iueit er ein

grower (General gelDefen

ic^ nic^t

^d)

tv'dxt*

and} <SoIbnt gelDorben, iDeiuif

!ranf getrefeu wave.

er

arme Slnahc Uiarb immer frdnfer, imb er ift je^t tobt [tot]. 9. ^d) ijahc tiiele grcimbe geljabt, ader bu bift mein befter greunb, 10. !5)er alte d)laUv I)at biele greunbe iinb 33e!amite gel^abt, al er reic imb beriif)mt mar. 11. Sejjt ^ai er feine Sreunbe, tt)ei( er arm
geUHirbeii
ift.

12.

ift

gut reid)
(Set
^tiub,
ift

511 fein,

aber e
tt)irft

ift

beffer gute
feiu.

greunbe gu ^aben.
14. !J)u bift !(eiu, 15.

13.

gut unb bu

gliidlic^

meiu

aber bu mirft jeben

eiu reidjer

^ag

gri3ger.

^er

S3ater be
t)iel

^uabeu
in

^ann
ift.

getuefeu,
16.

unb

biefer J Uilrb

^elb

ijaimi, ineuii er citter

!ti3er

(5ie ioer-

hQU morgeu fec^^ 5D^ouate

*332.1.

in geiuefeu feiu.

t386.4/.

434.

tl66.1.

304

EXEBCISES.

n.
1.

Tou

were, they became, she miglit have,

we

had, they

might become, we may have been, had you had? they had become, we shall be, we should have had, you shall have been, he shall be, she had had, I have been, thou mightest have been, we may have had, to have had, to have been, to have become. 2. Be diligent, become good, have all that you want. 3. It becomes warmer in the spring. 4. We were too hot in summer* and we are too cold in winter. 5. We have had beautiful weather to-day, but to-morrow will be more beautiful. 6. If I were rich, I should be happy. 7. Be diligent ftnd good, and you will become rich and happy. 8. I have been very happy, but I am become poor and old, and I have no friends. 9. I shall have been happy if you have been my friend. 10. Why did this man become so rich ? 11. He has been a poor soldier, but he became a famous general. 12. His sons will also be soldiers when they are older. 13. He would have been happier if he had had a son. 14. It is good to be a famous general, but it is better to be a good man. 15. It is good to have money, but it is better to have good friends. 16. The children would be happy if they had warm clothes. 17. The weather becomes warmer
every day.

y^^
.Ok

EXERCISE lie. VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION.

[245-250.]

le^ren
fc^tdeti

teach

lerncn
f^ielen

learn

send
talk

reben
fagen
ieBen

U
tell

a.

b
v.

i)oxtn

play hear
praise
journey, go by travelling

say,
live

lob en
^.

^s

reifen
geigeit

arbeiten toork

show
bring

foufen

buy

bring en
(be acquainted with)

fennen
bort

know
there,

yonder

ntorgen to-morrow lange, adv. long

*e6M.

EXEBCISES.

305

(L
iSeu

a6en
fie

bte ^tnber gut gearBettet?

3.

2. !5)er

Secret to6t

fie,

gut arbeiteu.
4.

@r

^at

fie

alle gete^rt U)a fie geterut

fo

fjabeu.
5. SDie

^(i) lobe \^n,

meil er bie .^Tiuber

bieleg gele^rt

Ijat.

^iuber tnerbeu im (^arteu

6.

fpieleu, tvtnn fie

jmei tunbeu

gearbeitet ^abeu.
t.

age

mir,

tt)ag bir

3c^ rebete lauge mit

it)m,
ift.

uub
8.

er lobte

err (Sd)mibt gefagt ^at. meiueu gutcu ^Setter,

ber uacf) 5(meri!a gereift

fo

S)er reifte uacl) 5(meri!a, U)etl er

arm

tuar,
9.

aber er I}at Diet gearbeitet,

'^at

IDorben.
leben.

10.

@r r fjai feiuem better

eiu grofee^
I)at.

$au

gefauft

uub er uub

ift jet^t

reic^ ge=

iDirb iu 5(meri!a

eiu ^ilb baijou gefc^ic!t, luelc^eg

er

mir

gejeigt

11. (Sr 12.

Ijtitte

e bir

gejeigt,

iueuu bu bort

gemefeu
13.

mareft.

orteu ie ma

ber

^rofeffor fagte?

kx

^ai bie 33ilber gelobt, bie

liebt auc^ bie fc^oueu ^ilbcr,

uac^ $ari

reifte.

15.

fageu ie mir, \m> er gelobt, tuenu er fie getauut

uic^t.

14. @r ic^ im gejeigt I)abe. uub I)at t^iete babou gefauft, at er 3eigcu ie i()m auc^ meiue ^iid)er, uub baDou beuft. 16. ^r ^itt bie ^43itc^cr
I)atte.

17.

Qc^ feuue beu ^rofeffor

19. (^t ^at mir uicf)t 2Ba brad)te er bir gefteru? gebrac^t, aber er mirb mir morgeu etma c^bueg briugeu. 20. ^r fauute meiue Iteru, al fie iu ^erliu lebten, 18.

n.
1. What did you buy when you were in the city ? 2. I bought books and sent them to my uncle. 3. Have you read the books which you bought ? 4. I had read many of the books, and I shall have read them all. 5. Did the professor teach you much ? 6. He taught me all that I have learned. 7. Have you talked with him ? 8, No, but I heard all he said. 9. The professor had travelled much and he bought many books and pictures. 10. He has showed me his whole library, and he told me where he bought the books. 11. He would not have journeyed to Paris if he had not been rich. 12. Did you hear what the -^ children said when they where playing in the garden ?/^ 13. They had played in the garden, but they were working when I was in the garden. 14. Show them the pictures

306

EXERCISES.

which your brother brought you. 15. When they have worked two hours I will show them the pictures. 16. He talked with the children, and showed them pictures of the country in which she had lived. 17. Tell me with whom you have talked. 18. We were talking with Mr. Smith, but he said nothing. 19. I know him, but I do not like him. 20. It is better to work than to talk. 21. I shall bring you a new book to-morrow.

EXERCISE 17. MODAL AUXILIARIEa

[251-260.]
I.

1.

SSittft
id^

bu na^ $ari ?
nic^t.
3.

2.

^^
4.
5.

ntoc^te

na^ ^ari
ni(i)t

retfen,
tt)ir

aber aber

fann e
tperbe
6.

2Btr fonnten nic^t nac^ ^arig, tueil

nacf) 33erlin l)aben reifen miiffen.

ic^

Qc^ mag

a((em reifen,

je^t

miiffen.

2Ba

!)at

er

bem

9}Zanne

gefagt?

(Sr burfte nic^t

Y.

mit i^m reben,

tueil er eiii fc^Iecl^ter

id^ i)aht

Mann
l^aben.
geleljrt,
fie

fein foil.
8.

3d) foUte mit i^m reben, aber

nid^t getnollt.
9.

(5r foil noc^ fjkx fein,

man

mill i^n gefe^en

S^onnen bie Slinber 2)entfc^ ?

fie

10. ^d) l)abe e il)nen

aber

mogen
12.

nicl)t.

11.

(Sie miiffen arbeiten, n^enn

lernen mollen.

Tlan fann

alle \va^

man
l)at

mill.

13.

^a
^arf
aber

9Jiabd^en ^ai nic^t fpielen !i3nnen, meil e

14. SDie ^inber biirfen nic^t reben,
tc^
fie follen

arbeiten miiffen.
15.

arbeiten.

fpielen ?
tt)irft

16. dlt'm,

mein ^inb, bn
17.

follft jet^t

arbeiten,

bu

fpciter fpielen !i3nnen.

Wu\^tt

nicljt

Wa> er

nn
fie

fagen

follte.

18.

^c^

foil

ha>

^ud)

lefen

nub

id)

mag

e^nic^t.

19. SSir

mu^ten

bie fc^onen

Spfel faufen, al^ ber ^^aufmann

mir

geigte.

n.
1.

do you go toBerlin?__2. I am obliged to go to-^^^^^ but I should like to goto Paris. 3. I do not likeTo 4. These poor children cannot learn anything, travel. because they have to work. 5. They want to learn German,
Berlin,

Why

EXERCISES.

307

should like to give them some he is not to is play in the garden, because he was not willing to work. 8. He played when he should have worked, and he must now work when he might have played. 9. Do they know what he said ? 10. They do not know it, because they could not hear him. 11. We had to live in the town, but we shall now be able to live here. 12. I am to show you the book

but they cannot. 6. money. 7. This boy

We

said to be very lazy

which you are to read. 13. May I show it to the children? 14. No, you must not show it to them, because they ought not to see it. 15. I wanted to show it to him, because he knows German. 16. He would have been able to read it. 17. You ought not to have read the book. 18. I could not but read it, it was so pretty. 19. One must not read everything that one wishes. 20. The child claims to have read the book, but she could not (do it). 21. Do you know what she wanted to say to him ? 22. 1 know it, but I may not say it to you. 23. Children, you must be very industrious. 24. You do not like to learn, but you will be obliged (to do it).

EXERCISE
[261-273.]

18.

VEKBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Vocabulary,
laufen

fommen
fpred)cn

run come speak

break drink
sing

foUcn
get)en
riifen

faU
go
call

brec^en
triufen

binbcu
finben

bind

find
bite

fingen

beigcn
tiie

geuug
ber %iVitx

enough
the plate

never
the

bag Jieb

song

1.

SSa

fiir
vo'xx

Sieber ^aljcn Siei ge

in bie[em a (ten !iWc()^

mgen ?

2.

2Bir fatigeu bte

3.
gfs^

ieber, bie

gcfnnben ()aben.

arum

fingen

3^re (Scf)mefternnid)t?
fonnen nid^t fingen.
5.

4. t^-^"inb nocf) nic^t

gefommen,
xoxt e^

unb

fie

SBariQrUef

\>a^

inb, al^

308
fallen?
T.

EXERCISES.
6.

(S
<Sie

tft

gelaufen,

lueil

bcr

unb
8.
beifet

e gebtffen

'^at.

SSerben
meit

ben
i^n

unb

nid^t fc^lagen ?
9.

9^em, er bi^ haa

^'uxh,

jc^Iug.

nur

bie

Stiuber,

njeld^e if;n

gefc^Iagen ^aben.

10.

Sf^ufen (Sie

ben S^naben nnb

11.
5DZein

binben ie i^m bie anb, bie ber

^inb, iDa
f)aft

mib
Qcf)

gebiffen ^cit

bn

getr)an ?

12.

^abe ben teller gebrod^en,

f)a]t

ben mir bie Sc^mefter ^ah.

14.

13.

SBie

bu

il)n

gebroc^en?

Qc^

ftel,

nnb ber better

brad^.

15. !J)n mcireft nic^t gef alien,

inenn bn nic^t gelanfen

id)

16. SSarnm famen ie nic^t, nl i)attt\t ic rief ? 17. ^cl^ fprnd^ mit meinem better nnb fonnte nic^t fommen. 18. r fommtnie, menn man i^n rnft. 19. ganb beine (Sc^tnefter i[)re ^ante, al fie nad^ Berlin ging? 20. ie ift ni^t nad) Devlin gegangen, aber bie ^ante tDirb ^u un fommen.

n.

Have you called the dog ? 2. I called him, but he 1. did not come. 3. Why do you call him? 4. I shall 5. She fell strike him, because he has bitten the little girl. children the bite ? 9. Yes, always and he bit her. 6. Does he him enough. 8. The beaten not he is a bad dog I have boys fel^down when they were,.goig to schooL* 9. They 10. Children, do not run. fell because they always run. j 12. The maids have broken 11. Where are the plates? them. 13. Plates always break when they fall. 14. Have
;

you found your knife ? now I have broken it.

in your room, but boys cannot sing, because they cannot find their books. 17. Do they sing well? 18. The little one sings very beautifully. 19. The teacher gave her this book when she could not find hers, and she sang with the children. 20. I should like to drink some milk, but I find nothing. 21. I will call the maid. 23. The children have 22. Sophy, find some fresh milk. milk, but I have the found drunk some good red wine. 24. He drank the wine, but he ought not to have drunk it. I want to speak with him. 26. I have 25. Call that man spoken with him, but he will not come. 27. I will go with you, and I will speak with him when you have found him.
15.

found

it

16.

The

little

66.5.

EXEECISES.

309

EXEHCISE
[371-378.]

19.

PKEPOSITIONS
Vocabulary,
fe^eit

set

fifeen

legen
fd)reibcn
ef[eu

lay
write
eat

Uegen
fpringen
bie

lie

spring
the bridqe
the

^riidc

ber 33ocf) bcr ^farrer

ha^ 3)Httage[feti

brook the pastor the dinner

the

bie birdie

church

ber 9^ad^mlttag

the afternoon

1.

SSo flnb bie ^iid^er, ton benen

trtr
3.

fprad^en ?

2. (Sie ticcjeit

auf bent ^ifc^e in ntcinem dimmer.

(^e^en (Sie in bag 3ininier,

4. SBir

iinb legen <Sie bie 33riefe anf ben X\](i) neben bie ^iid)er.

lagen unter ben ^ciumen in nteinem arten nnb fprac^en Uon

nnferen greunben.
i^^nen fprac^en.

5. ie !amen in ben (Garten, aU \mx t)on ie Wao^b 13racf)te einen ^ifcf) in ben Garten nnb fe^te if)n nnter bie 33anme. 1. ie fel5te nnfer 3[Rittageffen 8. 5)ie baranf, nnb \mx fafeen urn ben 3:ifc^ nnb a^en baUon.

6.

^aBen
9. fte^t

liefen bnrc^

h^n SSalb nnb fprangen

10.
oft

iibe

h^n

33acl^.

(S tt)ar !eine ^rilcfe iiber bent 33acf)e.

eine !(eine iitte.

11.

3c^

gclje

Unmeit bc 33nc^e nad) ber iitte nnb

fringe tnein 9l>iittagefjen ben armen Senten, bie bort tno^nen.

12.

5(n tnen fdjreibft bn ?

13.

3d) fdjreibe an hen ^^fnrrer, ber

in ber

tabt

tnoljnt.

14. 2)n foKft ben i^rief in bie (Btaht bringen,

nnb

if)n

bent ^farrer geben.

15.

3So moljnt er ?
bie Slirdje

jcnfeitg ber Stabt,

ber grogen ^ird)e gegeniiber.

geftcrn trol^ be fjeifeen

Setter^ in
gen^orben.

t tnol)nt ^ir finb gegangen. 18.

16.
1*7.

wax

fe()r

\)d%
ift

ai>

tr)ir

in ber S^ird^e

maren

aber n)af)renb bc
bent
9??ittageffen

a)Zittagg
tt)erben

e0

!ul)t

19. 9?acl^
anf^erljalb

tnir

nac^

bent SSalbe

ber

^Btaht

ge^en.

20. 2Bir n>erben binnen einer

tnnbe ge^en.

n.
1.

Come
wood?

into the
3.

wood with me.

will lie

2.

the

We

under the

trees,

"Why do you go into and I will read

310

EXERCISES.

the book of whicli we were speaking. 4 The pastor left 5. Go into his house, you will find the book in his room. 6. I stood on the bridge over the brook, it on the table. and the children played around me. 7. The hut of this poor man stood outside of the city, not far from the bridge. 9. I go to church every 8. Do you often go to church ?

Sunday*, but during the summer I do not go. 10. I cannot go on account of the hot weather. 11. Do you know the Pastor of this church ? 12. He lives opposite to me, and he will come after dinner. 13. Set the apples on the table, and lay the plates and the knives beside me. 14. I will lay an apple on your plate. 15. Did you go into his room ? 16. Yes, he was sitting at his table and was writing a letter to his mother. 17. I laid the books beside him and went out of the room. 18-. I must buy a warm coat on account of the cold weather. 19. We have had very hot

weather during this week.

EXERCISE
PASSIVE, EEFLEXIVE,

20.

AND IMPEESONAL VERBS.

[274-295.]

Vocabulary.
jtd^

freuen

r^oice

fi(^ fiirc^ten

he afraid

regnen
l^ungern

rain
he hungry

bonnern
biirften

thunder
thirst

fi^ jc^cimen he
tabcitt

ashamed

tobten [totcn] kill

hlame bcr 9J?orgen themorning

bie ^oft
t)or,

tragen
ber 3lbenb
bie 5(ufg abe

carry
th^ evening

the post
before, for,

the task the servant

prep,

on account

cif

ber !3)icncr

1.

SSarum mirb ber ^naht

gefd^rieben,
fi^lec^t

getobt ?
ift.

2.

(Sr tt)trb getobt,

tt)eil

feme ^tuftjabe

fo c^ut gefc^rieben

3.

@eine ^(ufgaben trerben

te
fiird^teu \x6)
t)OX

immer gut

aber bie ber anberen ^naben tuerben

gefi^rieben.
4.

gemo^ntii^ fe^r

* 230.2.

EXEECISES.
i^rem Secret, benn fte flnb tmmer t)on t^m gctabett 5. 3c^ mocf)te hzn ^rtef lefen, ben bu gefc^riebeu Ijaft.
fc^on nad)

311
rt)orben.
6. (r tft

bcr ^oft getratjeii morben.

1.

SSir tDoKten in bie

tabt
id)

tjeljen,

aber eg reguete unb bonnerte ben ganjen 9^ac^^

giirc^teri

mittat3*.

8.

Sie fk^ Dor bem Conner ?

9.

S^Jein,

aber
;

freue mic^, uieit e uid)t

me^r

regnet.

10.

Widj

I)ungert '

Qib mir ehi tiic! 53rob.

11. Qd) fc^dme mid), meil id) fein guteg 13. $ier luirb

^rob

abe.

12.

ibt e feineu SSeiu im aufe ?

14.

nic^t getrun!en.

e^en Sie

fic

auf biefen

@tu^t man wixb

Q^nen etmag WiUf) geben. 15. 9[)^ein Keiner $nnb ift t)on einem fc^lec^ten ^naben getobtet [getotet] morben. 16. 3ft er bom unbe 11. 9^ein, aber er ^t fic^ immer t)or h^n gebiffen n)orben ? nnben gefiirc^tet. 18. (Bx \mxh t)on feinem QSater getabelt
tt)erben, ttieil er
't>tn

$unb

getobtet [getotet] i)at

19. eftern niurbe

in ber

Sl'irc^e

gefnngen.

20. SStireft

hn bort

geuiefen,

hn
ift.

I)dtteft

ein

neneg Sieb ge^ort, tnelc^eS t)on atien gelobt JDorbcn

21. 9J^ir
22.

mar

nic^t

gan mol)!,

id)

burfte mcf)t in bie

^tircl^e ge()en.

freut micl^,

ie ju fe^en. 23. 2)iefer 33rief ift Don il)m gefc^rieben worben unb tuurbe mir bon feinem ^Dicner gebra^t.

n.
1.

Has the

letter

been carried to the post ?

2.

It

has not

yet been written, but it will be carried into the city this afternoon. 3. The servant was blamed because the plates were broken. 4 We were very hungry, but nothing was given us. 5. We rejoiced when the dinner was set upon the table by the servant. 6. Seat yourself and eat. 7. This

ashamed because he has eaten so much, but we are 8. How was the child killed ? 9. He was bitten by his dog. 10. I was very much afraid when I saw the big dog with the child. 11. Are you not well ? 12. I always am afraid whenf it rains and thunders. 13. It rains this evening, J but it will not thunder. 14 We could not come because it rained, but it will not rain any more, and I will come to-morrow. 15. I want to see the pictures which have been praised by every one. 16, They were praised by
is

boy

very glad.

* 230.1a.

tt)enn.

% 230.2.

312

EXERCISES.

17. Are there no fine pictures There are many beautiful paintings in the library. 19. Where were you yesterday when you were called? 20. There was singing and dancing here yesterday. 21. We should have rejoiced if you had been able to come. 22. The children will be very much ashamed when they are blamed by their father. 23. They will be blamed because the exercises which were written by them

the friends of the painter.

?

in this city

18.

are so bad.

EXERCISE
[296-301.]

21.

COMPOUND VEEBS}.SEPAEAELE.

Vocd)ulary,
anfangcn
auffte^en

begin
get

aufl^oren
jic^

stop^ cease

up
sun)

an^ie^eit

dress

aufge^en ^inausge^en ^umadjen

abreifen
abf(f)rei6en

rise (the

untergel)en

go out shut

jurudfommcn
aufmacf)en

go under, set come hack open

take along
the night

go or journey away copy

the

mitne^men
bie 9?ad^t

bie

@onne
eifenba^n

sun

ber aJlonb

the the

moon
window

bie %\^nv bie

the door
the railroad

bo8 genfter
fobalb, conj.

ba3)flittag8cffen</ic dinner

balb

soon

as soon as

SDie Sonne tft untergegangen unb ber Wlonb ge^t auf. ^te ^rbeiter, bie ben ganjen ^ag* gearbeitet ^aben, fommen 3. 93Zac^e bie ^^iir anf, ber ^ater je^t au bem gelbe priiS.
1.

2.

mirb balb 5uriic!!ommen.

Snriidfam.
5.

4.

^<i)

max ^inau^gegangen, aB
je^t

er

5Sarum ge^en ie
ic^

nid^t ^inaugge^en,
1. 2Bir miiffen

mH

nur
8.

bie

^tnau? 6. Qc^ n)erbe ^T^iire unb genfter jnmad^en.

unfere 5Iufgabe

ntorgen

frii^ anffte^en, n)ex( tnir

ni(^t abgefc^rteben l^aben.

@r

\tanh auf, jog fi^ an

unb

fd^riel)

feine

^ufgabe

ab.

9.

SSirb bie (Sonne balb aufge^en ?

10.

Qd^

* 230.L

EXERCISES.
toetg
nt(^t,

313
unb
ift

e fdngt an gu regnen,
11.

td^

^abe bte genfter

guriidgefommen.
al
fie

gugemac^t.
12. 13.
(Sr

3ft

beiii

^ater mit ber (Sifenbal)n abgereift?

aber er
f)eute

reifte

geftern

ab,

SDie

5trbeiter naljmeu ir SJiittag^effen mit,

in bie
ni(^t

getber iuaugingen.

14.

SSarum ^aben ie ^i)x^n Wiener

mitgenommen, a( ie abreiften? 15. Qc^ miiufc^te ii)n mitjune^men, aber er tuurbe !ran! unb fonnte nidjt mitge^en. 16. (Sr
ift

nod^

nicl^t

aufgeftanben, tneil bie (Sonne nic^t aufgegangen

ift.

It.

@r

fcingt

an u arbeiten, tnenn

bie (Sonne aufgeljt,

unb ^bxt

auf, Ujenn fie unterge^t.

18. 3Sir fitrdfiteten

un

fe^r,
tt)ir

aU

e ju

bonnern anfing, aber

fiird^tet

mv
3ct)

fd^amen un
mac^te
20.

je^t,

meil

un ge^
auf,

^aben.

19.

bie ^f)iiren

unb genfter
(Sie

fobalb ber 3^egen auf^iirte.

tt)enn (Sie in bie

SSen Ujerben
Qd^

mitnel^men,

tabt ge^en ?

21.

ttjerbe eud^

mitne^men,

^inber

fte^et auf

unb

jie^et eud^ ^iibfd^ an.

22. SDarf bie ^(eine

;*

aud^ mitge^en ?
i^^r

23.

D^ein, fie barf nic^t

mit

aber

tt)ir

merben

ttrva^ (Sd)onc gcben, tucun luiv 5uriicf!ommen.

n.
1. When do the workmen come back ? 2. They come back when the sun sets. 3. The sun has already set, and they will soon come back. 4. It is growing cold; shut the doors and windows. 5. The moon will soon rise; do you see it? 6. The rain has begun, and we cannot go out. Have you copied the letters which you had begun? 7. 8. Yes, I got up early and copied them. 9. Get up and dress yourself; we must go away. 10. Why did they not take the child along when they went away? 11. They did not take it along, because it had not dressed itself. 12. The servant will go out as soon as it ceases to rain. 13. He will go into the city, and will take along the letters which we have copied. 14. He did not shut the door when he went out. 15. Get up and shut it. 16. My aunt will not go away to-day, because it has begun to rain and she is afraid of the thunder. 17. She went away onf the railroad as soon as it stopped thundering. 18. The night has come, and the

a59.a

t mit

314

EXEBCISES.

will soon rise. 19. I want to go out. 20. Go, but come back soon. 21 I began to work, but it became too hot and I had to stop. 22. Why did the child not get up ? 23. It was not allowed to get up, because it was sick. 24 They went out into the forest, and took the books with them which they had begun. 25. They will come back as soon as the sun has set. 26. We must go away to-morrow, ^^^^^-^ ^ ^p^' <^^ ^ ^ but we shall soon come back. p

moon

EXERCISE
[302-313.]

22.

COMPOUND VERBS.n^SEPAEABLE.

Vocabulary,
ttergeffen

forget

Derfpred^en

promise
receive

Derfte^en

Uerdubern
iiberje^en

understart^change

em^jfaugen
t)er[u(^en

try
lose

n)egne^mcn(sep.)tofce

away

Dertieren

translate, set over

n)ieber^oIen repeat, bring back

beja^ten
fic^

^^
-f^JJtemter

Derfaufen
gef alien
bie

sell

erinnern

please
the thing

ha^^tx\pvt^tn
fran;5bftf(^

ber !?aben

promise French the shop

the

@ad^e

englifc^

English

ta^ tbidjt the poem

1. 2.

aben

(Ste fc^on t)ergeffen, \va>

ie

niir Derfproc^eu I)a6en ?

id) iT)ieber:=

^tin, k^ erinnere mtd^ metne ^erfprecl^eng* unb

3.

l^ole e^ 3t)neu.

3Sa ^at S^iienf biefer ^aufmann Derlauft ?

9loc!e

4. (^x ijerfaufte

mir
5.

unb Sd)u^e

fiir

meine ^inber unb einen

tva> er Sfjiien t)er'

$ut
fauft

fiir

mtc^.

3ft alk> beja^tt

ift

morben,

f)ai

6.

(S

nod) nic^t

be^ap morben,
morgen

tDeil ic^

meui

^etb
1.

t)ertoren

"^abe,

abcr

ic^

n)erbe

alle^| be5al)len.
gefer)en

(befallen

3^nen
tt)eil

bie ac^en, bie

ie in fctnem Saben
gut, aber ic^

l^aben ?

8. ( gefafft

mir olIe gan^

ift.

mug

ba ^(eib

beranbern,

e ju grog

9.

at

l^arl feine franjoftfd^e

*219.3.

222.1,16.

X 227.I&.

EXERCISES.

315
unb in! (Snglifd^e unb tDieber^oIe
ic^

^ufgabe uberfe^t ? 10.

iiberfelt.

(Sr ^at fie iu ^eutfc^e

11.

^axl,

^oU mir ba
^ei& e

^ucl) tnicber
nic^t mefjr,

mtr betn ^ebic^t.

geffen.

12. 3*^

^abe e

t)er^

13. ^ii t?ergi^t

aKel ma^

man

bic^ le^rt;
jel^t

bu gefaUft mir
gu tt)erben.

gar
15.

nid^t.

14.

3c!^

ttjerbe

t)erfucl^en,

ffcifsiger

aben Sie
16.
11.

bie ^iidjer

empfangen, bie er ^ijncn Derfproc^en

fie

5at?
18.

D^ein,

aber

ic^

luerbe

empfangen, fobalb er 5urM:=

!ommt.
!ann.

3c^
fie

tjerftelje

gar

nic^t,

ma

fie

mir gefagt

'^at.

(Sr r)at

nic^t t)erftanben,

meil er nidjt ^eutfc^ fprecl^en

t)erfter)en !i3nuen,
'!)tn ic^

19."*3cl)

^aht bzn ^rief nic^t

ttieil

geftern empfing,

ic^

nic^t

5)eutfd)

lefen !ann.

20.

SSir

^aben angefangen, htn ^rief ju ilberfe^en, aber wix l)aimx noc^ mct)t angefangen, i^n ab^nfc^reiben. 21. Qc^ iuerbe bir* ha> ^uc^
tDegne^men, n)enn bu e njieber
Derlierft.

n.
In what shop did they selljjM these books? 2. I forget who sold them to me do tll^Pplease you ? 3. They please me quite well. 4 You cannot buy any, because they have all been sold already. 5. I do not want to buy any, 6. l^j^^B not underfor I could not understand them. stand German ? 7. I have quite f orgotti^Prerman, but I understand French. 8. Promise me to learnf German. 9. I will try to learn it, but I cannot speak it at all, I can only translate it. 10. I remember a German book, which I read when I was in Germany. 11. It pleased me, but I do not remember its name. 12. Why did I not receive the letter yesterday ? 13. You did not receive it because I forgot to copy it, but you will receive it to-morrow. 14. Did the child lose his book ? 15. The teacher took it away from him, because he was lazy; but the boy repeated his promise, and the teacher brought him back the book. 16. The merchant
1.
;

wanted to sell me many pretty things when I was in his shop, but I had lost my money and could buy nothing.

much money if he cannot sell these These things do not please me; I will not pay for them. 19. My cousin is much changed, and hag
17.

He

will lose
18.

things.

* 222.1,3.

1 348.2.

316

EXEBCISES.

20. Children change very quicMy, quite forgotten me. friends. 21. They tried to their forget easily and translate the poem which they had received, but they

could not understand it. 22. I received a German letter, and I understood it quite well. 23. I understand all that I read, but I can not translate it into English.
Note. It is thought best, before taking up the special uses of the moods, tenses, etc., to give the pupil some exercise in the formation of the German sentence, it being quite impossible to introduce the subjunctive, infinitive, etc., without making use of longer and more involved sentences than the pupil is as yet prepared for.

EXERCISE
[430-433.1

23.

NORMAL AND INVERTED SENTENCES.

^^Vocabulary.
%mivita
bic SSo^niing

.Mmca
the dwelling

ber ^meri!ancr
bte 9ieftauratton

the

American

the restaurant

nieub(ireii*Im|juMieren] to furnish
fru!)ftucfen
tt)euer

miet^en [mieten]
jpeifen
bittig

hire
eat

^^^k [teuer] ^^^P

^^T

breakfast

dear
the king

cheap
the

bcr ^ottig

blc

^onigin

queen

mac^en
ber

make
the stranger
the price

ber ^^Jrdfibent
bie (Srbe

the president
the earth

rembc

ber ^rei0
lange, adv.

eittmat, snjeimat
tt)ot)t,

once, twice,
loeK,

long

adv.

etc perhaps

1.

^er grembe
2.
tr)eiier.

milt ftc eine f(^one

SSo^nung in ber tabt

alier fie
ift

miet^en.

(Sine SBoljnung ^at er fd^on gefunbett,

3.

i^mf 5U
4.

3c^
ju

Ijaht
eiiient

berj Sriebrld^ftrage eine

fcT^on

menbtirte SSoftnuiuj

fe^r Ijiltigen ^reife

gemict^et.

WeiCen? 5. ^en ganjen SBinter merbe ic^ in 33ev(in bfeiben, aber im grii^Iing tuerbe icf) nad) $ari abreifen. 6. SSerben ie S^re gantilie nac^ ^ari ntit^ ucljmen ? 1. ^eine gran unb meinen cilteften (So^ n)erbe ic^
SSerben
(Sie

(angc

^ier

tDol mttne^men, bie anberen

* Pronounced,

aber miiffen in Berlin Meiben.

a6.4a.

and often written, mob-, f 223.5. % 66.46.

EXEECISES.
8. <S(^ott ift
9.

317

^ertin nic|t, aber eine relc^c unb grole tabt tft e. ^iermal bin tc^ na^ granfreic!) gerelft, ^tDetmat ^a6e ic^ ng^ laiib gefe^eu, unb id) 6in auc oft in 5lmeri!a gemefen. 10. ^ath
tnerbe id^
eine D^eife

nm

bie (Srbe madden.

t)iet,

11. 2)ie (Entgtanber

Itjeniger

unb

bie 5lmeri!aner reifen fe^r

t)iet

reifen

bie

2)entfc^en,

nnb am
l^abe
^\iifer
ic^

attertrenigften

bie

granjofen.
nber

12.
13.

aft

bu ben ^^onig
^rafibenten
14.
t)at

gefel^en,

aU
n)ir

bu in ^ari luarft?
gefei)en,

dnnen
."ftimtg.

in

^ari
15.

feinen
in

inen

^aben

in ^eutfd)(nnb, aOer

man nnr

eine Slonigin.

Qm

let^ten

3al)rc,

al

nglanb wix in

^ari maren, ^aben tuir in einem menblirten ^intmer geluo^nt. 16. Sir ^ahtn in nnferem 3inimer gefriifjftiicft, nnb jn 9[^ittag
fpeiften tnir in einer S^eftanration.

17. O, mdre* id) in $ari nn gegangen ? 19. atte ic^ SSarnm finb nnr ^Uva^ ^e(b, fo ginge id) gemi^ nad) |$ari. 20. aft bu noc^ nicl^t gefrii()ftiicft, fo !omm' mit mir.^1. Qn biefer 9^eftau= iTmctei ^reife frii^ftiicfen. ration !ann man fe^r gut unb 5u einem bWgen
18.

ie

nid)t mit

n.
1.

Has your friend hired a beautiful dwell4Bf

it is

2.

Beauti-

but good and cheap it is said^jp^fbe. 3. Has your brother come back from Paris? ^kYesterday he came with his two friends and his servant. 5. These three Americans have come from France to Germany. 6. The queen of England they have already seen, and they wish to see the Emperor of Germany too. 7. In Berlin they cannot see the Emperor now. 8. He went away last month with his whole family to Ems. 9. Have the Americans never had a king in their country ? 10 . Formerly the king of England was also their king, but now there is no king. 11. A president they have, but no king. 12. Old our Emperor is, but strong and handsome he is also. 13. Where do the Americans live? 14. In a furnished apartment in
ful
not,

Frederick street they live. 15. If they live in Frederick street they must pay a good deal. 16. Such a dwelling one cannot find for a cheap price. 17. Every thing
831.2.

foK,

257.a

318

EXEBCISES.

they pay for very dearly. 18. In tlie dearest restaurants they eat, and they buy many beautiful things in the shops. 19. Oh, were I only rich. 20. Were we only rich, we would buy every thing we want. 21. Whom do you wish to see ? 22. No one do I wish to see, only I want the book* I have lost. 23. If you do not see the stranger, he is not here. 24. Last Monday, when I was in the city, I breakfasted in 25. In Berlin I always breakfast in a a restaurant. restaurant in Frederick street. 26. If you came with me, I would show you a much better restaurant. 27. Are you living in a furnished room ? 28. A room I have, but furnished it is not.

EXERCISE

24.

\/^{Cdi

TBANSPOSED SENTENCES.SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.

^
cinlaben
brudten
txial)Un

[434-436.]

Vocabulary.

^IkvUe
itlf^
tea, relate

befud^en

visU
spoil

Derberben

anne^men
ha^ SBerf
.^

accept
the

bev 35ei-faffcr ber Sftomon

bie

the author

work

ha^^exQnuQtn the pleasure

the novel the invitation

inlabimg

ha^ @et)eimmg hex ebanfc unbefannt

einerlei, adv.

the secret

the thought

unknown
indifferent

befannt

known

I
1.

n^en

(Ste

I^abe ?

2. DZein,

irf)

ben ^f^ontan gelefen, bon bent \^ ^^nm erjaf)!! fjcibe i^n nt(f)t gelefen ; fennen te ben ^er^
3.

faffer beffetben?

SSer i^n gefi^rieben

1i)at,

ift

nitr

unbefannt;

ba^ er in biefer tabt gebrncft n)Drben ift. 4. Qd^ Ijerfpred^e S^^^^i bnfs Sic ben 9^oman ntorgen erljalten foEen. 5. ^iffen le, ob ic^ bejaljlt Ijabe, Wa> ie ntir ber! auf t f)aben ? 6. Ob @te bejatjit l)aben ober nicljt, ift mir einerlei ; id) tueig, ha^
ober
id^ tt)t\%,

ie oKeS beja^len merben.

* 183.

t.

(S freut mid^,

ba^

fie

mid^

ein=s

EXERCISES.
getaben ^at
fann.
8.
;

319
C^inlabung
ntrf)t

aber fte

tt)eif3,

baf5 id) ifjre

amtel)men

SSarum bu
9. Stiffen

bie (Sinlabuug nic^t

ntc^t,

annimmft,
mlt ber
nic^t

ift

mir un^

befannt
abreifen

8ie

ha^

ic^ f)eute

(SifeuOaljtx

merbe?

10.

^er ebanfe,
ha>

bafs

bu

mitfommen

fonuteft, UerbarO

mir

Qan^t ^ergniitjen.
12.

11.

^^at er Sljiieu
nid)t, tt)a er

gefagt, woljin er je^t

ge^t?
ift

gd^

tierfte^e

gar

mir gefagt
obcr bu
fie.

'^at.

13. (g

eine grage, ob fie bic^ befu(i)eu follte,

14. 2SiiJ3te

id)

uur, tuo

fie

tDof)nt,

fiubeu fiiuute, fotuiirbe

nife,

ic^ fie

befuc^eu.

15.

^^

ift

uub tuo id) fie feine^eim=

ha^

fie

morgen abreifen

ixiiU.

0*

1.

Did she

tell

you that he had gone away ?

2.

She told

me

that he had gone away, but she did not tell

me where

he had gone. 3. Had he not visite^you ? 4. Whether he visited me, I do not know, but I know that I inyited him. 5. Did he give you that of which he spoke ? 6. What he sent is unknown to me, but he knew that I could not accept it. 7. The merchant tells me tha^e has sold all the works of this author. 8. I am rejoiced ^at he has sold them all but will he not print this novel again? 9. Whether he will print it or not is not known. 10. I am glad that I have not paid for these books. 11. You told me where you had bought them, and to whom you had given them. 12. Whether you read them or not is indifferent to me, but you know that you must pay for them. 13. It delights me
;

Will you come to-day or totell you, but I soon. 16. It is a secret who has written this book, but it has been read by every one. 17. The thought that you are certainly coming makes me quite happy. 18. It rejoices me that I can accept your invitation. 19. All that we have made is now spoilt.
14.

that you will visit me.

15.

morrow? will come

When

I can come I cannot

320

EXEBOISES.

EXERCISE
[437.]

25.

TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.ADJECTIVE CLAUSES.

Vocabulary.
jlerBcn
betuelrtcn

die

leiben

suffer

lament,

mourn

frag en
ber Srbc
blc

ask
the heir

aufgebcn jubringen
bie ^ranf^eit bie

give

up

pass (time)
sickness

^offnung elnfam

hope.
lonely

^rembe

foreign lands
fearful

furc^tbar

barum

therefore

1.

^er grcmbe,
2.

ber g?ftern in unferer (^taht geftorben

(Bv ftarb
3.

ift,

tvax
fdfjon

ein (Snglcinber.

an einer
ciltefte

^ran![)eit,

an ber er
4.

lange

gelitten

^atte.

^er

(Sot)n

be

(Sngldnber^,

toelc^er

auc^ fein

(Srbe

ift,

lt)irb

r)ierf)er

!ommen.

SSarnm

belDetnen ie einen SJJenfc^en, ben ie gar nid^t gefannt

5.

^ben ?

3c^

beltjeine
6.

j^en, ber einfam in ber grembe (eiben nnb fterben

ic^

mnJ3.

Qn
t.

ber Qeit, ha

anf Dieifen mar, bin

ic^

id^

in

nglanb

gemefen.

Qn

Sonbon,
8.

mo

einige SSoc^en ^nbrad^te, bin id^

!ran! gertjorben.

Sine

(Stabt,
9.

morin

id^ fo

fe^r gelitten ^aht,

merbe

id ijie
t)tet

nergeffen fonnen.
gelitten.
ift

ber ^at

10.

SDer

^er Wann ift ein Ungtiicflid^er; ^itme__beffe n, bon bem id end^

11.
(Sr fprid^t

erja^tt ^abe,

mir nnbefannt.
12.
(r

bon einem
9}?anne,
ift

il^m

unbefannten SD^anne.

fragte nac^

bem

beffen
eine fo

^ater

fo !ran!

ift.

13.

^ie ^ranf^eit, on ber

er leibet,

furd^tbare,

ba^

man

alle

rnm

ift

fein <So^tr, ber

offnnng ^at anfgeben miiffen. 14. !Da= ben ^ater nocl) einmal fe^en mollte, an

$art 5uriidfge!ommen.

XL
1.

The gentleman
2.

of

whom

he was telling you was

my

Uncle.
3.

He

died in the house in which we was a noble man and we still lament him.
of

He

now live. 4. Were

5.

you not the heir

him

of

whom we

are speaking ?

Yes,

EXERCISES.

321

I am tlie heir of his name, and I also suffer from the sickness of which he died. 6. He was asking about a novel 7. It is a book of which I have wtiich he wanted to read. heard much, but it is written by a man who is quite unknown to me. 8. The poor stranger who died here

yesterday was the author of the novels of which so much has been said. 9. He died in a city where he was quite unknown. 10. In the time when he was still rich and

but when he became poor he where he died. 11. He had long land, suffered from a fearful sickness, and had given up all hope. 12. He had no children who will mourn for him. 13. He is an unhappy man, who must live and die so lonely.

happy he lived in went into a foreign

Berlin,

EXERCISE
[438-439.]

26.

TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.ADVERBIAL CLAUSES.

Vocabulary,
reltcn
ride

jagcn
begleitett

hunt

tocrjammctn
fortreiten

assemble
ride

accompany
be

away

fortfein
bie

away
end

BetBunbern
ber 3lnfang

admire
the beginning

3agb

the hunt
the

bag (Snbe
gteicf)

bic efeEf(^aflt the

j(f)nett
t\)t

ccmpany

like

quick
ere, before

mitbe
tt)ie

tired

ic....,bcfio

the

the

jo

iangc

how, as as long as

1.

5lt

bie otine

oufging, rttten

fie

aHe nac^ bem SSatbe.

firf)

2.

^ie ^a^h
3.

mxh

anfangen, f obalb bie ^efellfd)aft

t)erfammelt

l^at.

^6) tucrbc

ie

becjteiten,

bamit

id) ha>

nbe ber S^Qb

fein.
5.

fe^e.

4. (Sf)e fie 5uriic!!ommen, tDirb e

gauj biiuM

SSenn

ie miibe fiub, mcrbcu mv fot3leid) wad) ^^aufe ^djzn. 6. SDeu ganjen S^ag waxen fie im SSalbe, imb ai> fie nad) aufe !amen,
njaren
fie

fef)r

miibe.
fie

Y.

2)iefe

^ame
fie

ift

bettjunbern ie

? 8. ^d^ beirunbere

iiicl^t \d)on, waxuni nur barum, meil fie fo

322
fc^on reitet

EXEECISES.

unb

etn fo fc^bneg

$ferb

'^at.

9.

SSotlen @te etrt)a

ift,

fc^oneg fe^en, fo
fo lange
i(^

fommen ie mit

mir.

10. (So Initge er fort

mu^

id^

1)kx bleiben, aber fobalb er uruc!fommt, barf

fortge^en.

11.

ift

^ter fo fd)on,
icf)

ba^

ic^ iiic^t

fortge^en

mitt.

12. 'aSo ic^ je^t bin, ha tDerbe

ben ganjeii 3:ag bleibeu.

13. ;3c^ bin fo ntiibe,

ba^

icf)

nid)t in bie (^efe((fd)aft gefjen !ann.

fie

14. (Sriiebtfie gar nid^t, \vk tvh

fie

geliebt l^aben; er

bemunbert

nnr, meil

fie fo

fc^on
i^n.

ift.

15.
16.

Se

mel^r mir i^n fennen, befto

meniger

lieben

mir

S^sft

bu

nic^t,

fo

merbe

id)

nic^t iagen.

17. SSie ber 5llte reitet, fo moc^te auc^ id^ reiten.

n.
1. We must ride to the forest before the sun rises. 2. If you want to hunt, then accompany me. 3. Where the forest begins, there the company assembled. 4. They only assembled in orderf to see the hunt. 5. If you want to see the hunt, you must ride fast. 6. When the hunt was at an end, the hunters rode home. 7. Hardly had he come home, when he rode away again. 8. Because he is old he hunts no more. 9. The older I am, the more I hunt. 10. The lady was so beautiful that we had to* admire her. 11. Although she is the wife of my

friend, I have never seen her: 12. Where she now is, I do not know, but I will tell you how you can see her. 13. As soon as she came home, I saw her. 14. She is beautiful but the more I admire her, the less I love her. 15. The company is larger than I had thought. 16. As long i*s she is away I cannot visit you, but as soon as she comes back we will come to you. 17. Wlien he visited us we were not at home, but we shall see him before he goes away. 18. He rides so fast that we cannot accompany him. 19. As he lived, so he died.
;

muffen, 256.

f 332.55.

EXEBCISES.

323

EXERCISE
[323-328.]
s

27.

USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.

Vocabulary.
raecfen
auftx)acl)en

wake
aijoake

fc^Iafen

sleep

befinben
retten

be (as to health, etc.)

brennen
iiberteben
ijerle^en
hie

hum
survive
injure
ihe

save

jufaninienftuqen fall together the bed ba 53ett

tobt [tot]
pr6^ii6)
jeit,

^lamme

flame
difficult

f(^n)er

hard,

dead suddenly
since

untoo^l

unwdl

prep.

1.

SSie Befinben (Sie ftc^?

3. (Sr^ci^len

2.

^c^ Befinbe

ntiif) feit

geftern fe^r

nnnjol)!.

ie mir, tt)ie (Sie jic^ t)erle^t ^ben. 4. ^cf) nmr geftern fe()r mlibe nnb ging friif) ju 33ctt. 5. $(o^(ic^ tvad^t 6. S<^^ ftel;e auf, id) auf, ic^ fel^e glammen, baS) au Brenut. n)ec!e meine gran nnb nteine ^inber, nnb fie lanfen au^ bem anfe. 1. ^i> n)ir aKe branfeen finb, erinnere id mic^, ba ic^
bag
iiingfte

^Hnb bcrgeffen

Ijahc.
ftilrjt

8.

e retten, aber ba
'ijat

$au

iiber

Qd) iPiK jnruc! lanfen nnb mir 5nfammen. 9. 9J^an

aber id) bin fcl^mer l^erletjt nnb icl^ iiberlebe e ^ein 53rnber mivb tnoljl Derreift fein? 11. Qa, 12. ^]t ha> ^inb fd)on aber er !ommt fc^on morgen 5nriic!. langefran!? 13. ift feit einer SS^od^e tobt. 14. ^efanb ber
micl^

gerettet,

getni^ nidjt.

10.

Wamx \\d)

\d)on lange in 53erlin,

id) if)n nid)t,

aU

ie

il)n

fafjen?

15. 511^ ic^

in Berlin tnar, fa^

aber fpdtcr Ijabe

id) if)n gefel^en.

16. it'ommt er nic^t,

brei (Stnnben,

fo gel)e id) gteid) fort.

11.

(t fd)Iaft feit

nnb

id)

!ann

if)n nidjt

n^eden.

n.
1. Have you seen the poor man ? 2. I saw him when his house was burning. 8. What did he do ? 4. He was in the town. 5. Suddenly they tell him that his house is burning. 6. He runs back, he calls his wife and his children. 7. But they are asleep, he cannot wake them. 8. He wishes to

324

EXEECISES.
in.
9.

save them, but the house falls 10. One child was saved, but it
child dies, he will die too.

Was no

one saved?
11. If

is

much

injured.

the

12.

Yes, he will probably not

13. Have the children been long asleep? They have been sleeping for five hours. 15. They will 16. Were you in the church certainly wake up soon. yesterday ? 17. When you were in the church I was also there. 18. Had he been long unwell when he died ? 19. He had lain in bed for 5 years. 20. Now he has been dead for

survive his family.

14.

two years. 21. I am going into the city to-morrow, but I am coming back early. 22. If you go, I shall go along.

EXERCISE

28.

SUBJUNCrrVTE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.

[329-332']
Vocabulary,
anfe^ctt
tattsen

looked dance
si7ig (at the

aufe^cn
citen

look, appear hurry

mitfmgen
tie mvLfxt

same time)

anfommen
bie "Stimnic

airive
the voice

music
tired

bcr Siingting the youth

ntiibe

blc

S)ame

the lady
late
stiUf

tpst
bod^, (adv.)
fonft

gem
attein (adv.

wUlingly

nevertheless

and

conj.) alone, hut, only

otherwise

1.

SBareftbunurgefteru
tt)are ic^

f)ier

getDefen!
tiic^t

2.

tc6 aii^ SBcire ic^

iSmtm^

Qetaben tuorben, jo

hod)

gefommen.

3.

SSaren 8te

gefommen,
f)at

fo l)dtten

ie

Diel fc^one Tiu\xt geI)Drt

4.

unb ba ^'dtkn
trie.

%ie auc^ mitfingen fbuneu.

gelaben.
6.

r fpricl^t,
ficitte

alg fiinge er

5.

eine fel)r fc^one (Stimme, fonft

man

i^n gar nid^t

@r tm^

er Qungling

fte()t

an, al mare er fe^r miibc

Y. (Sr '^atte

gem

getanjt, aftein er
9.

wax ju
er,

miibe.

8.

eilt

nur,

bamtt er
ift

friif)

()in!omme.
10.

^omme

ober

fomme
ie()

er nic^t, e

mtr

einertet.

Unb

tDcire

e nocl^ fpdter,

fame boc^ ju

^^nen.

11. S<^ niod)te gern biefe 33ilber anfe^en, aKein ic^ ^aht !eine Beit. 12. (Site er, fo t)ie( er !ann, er fomntt boc^ ju fpcit an.
13. Dt),
tDciren biefe

^ilber nur bie meinigen, bann fa^e

id) fic

EXEEOISES.
ben gonjcn 5:Qg an.
14.

325
fte^t bie

^er Qungting
@ie
trirb

iungc

^ame
tft

an,

aU

benjnnbere er

fie.

15.

i^

nte tieben, fo biel er ftc

fe^en, aber fie
nid^t

ond^ ben)unbert.
l^ier.

16. SSir moc^ten

fie anii}

n.
do you not sing with us ? 2. I would gladly sing have no voice ought notto have come wise I should not have 6. Why are you hurrying so mucnr 7. I am hurrying in order thgjt I may not^rrive toa late. 8. If you arrive too late, youwittja?^ be^leto^an^T^ like to dance, butT arn^too tired/ iO.^Oh, were I only^younef acfain,
1.

Why

too, only I

^
.

,
'

ft^^^tn^n I could dance,

'^ll.

Look at

this lady; she looks

^iS if

'

she had danced too much. 12. If I were tired I wout3not dance any more. 13. How could you have danced if she had not come. 14. This youth is hurrying as if it were very late. 15. He is only hurrying in order that he may

.C5M-A.^yxi

hear the beautiful music. 16. Let him hurry as much as he will, he will still arrive too late. 17. I should like to see the beautiful ladies, but they are already gone.f 18. Had you only hurried yourself, then you would have seen them all.

EXEHCISE

20.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT.

[333.]
.

Vocabulary,
newspaper
ble Sna^xxdjt

btc Bettnitg

the

the news

ber 5Ir5t

the doctor

bev @taube

beliefJaUh
contain

bebauern
^offen
ttJi^tlg
befcfiSftlgt

pity

ent^altcn

hope important busy

anttuorten
^cutlg

answer
of to-day
healthy
true
the truth

gcfunb
tt)at)r

traurig
ber

sad
hunger
tfovt.

hunger

ble

Sa^r^ett

foUen 251.6.

326

EXERCISES.

1.

abcn
fei,

(Sie ble "^eutige

S^itmig getefen?
2.

Tlan

fagt, fte

enU

l^atte h)id^ttge

9Mc^ri^ten.
aber
ic^

3^
nirf)t.

(jabe gelefeit,
3. Qcf)

geftorbeu

glaube e

ha^ ber Slaifer fragte meinen ^ater,

oh er biefeDlac^ric^t glaube, imb-er mitmortete, er glaube niemal^

\)a^, toa> er iu

ber ^eitumj

tefe.

4.

(Sr

fragte bie

ame, ob

fie

mitge^en

tvoiic,

aber

fie

antmortete,

fie fei

fe^r miibe

nid^t auger)en.
lt)ei( fie

5. (Sie fc^reibt uit, fie fei nic^t

unb biirfe ^u un gefommen,

bebaure fe^r,
^u befc^df*

geglaubt

fjabe, baf^ iDir abgereift tDciren; fie

ha^ fieuu

nic^t gefef)en ^abe

unb

^offe,

wix trerbcn balb gu i^r

tueil fie

!ommen;
tigt fei.
icl^

fie

fomte m\> nic^t tuieber befuc^en,

bafj fein
1.

6. (Sr glaubt,

8on

!rau!

fei

unb

miinfc^t,

bag

nac bent ^(rjt

fei

fcl^icfe.

^er
8.

meint, er f)abe ju Diet gearbeitet,

barum

er !ran! geiDorben.
\i)n

^er ^ebanfe, ha^

9. 2)er ^Irjt

er nic^t tnel^r

arbeiten !onne, mac^t

fe^r traurig.
10. SSir

glaubt

ni(i)t,

bag er mieber gefunb fie un0 erja^lte, ha^

fie

tuirb.
\f)x

gaben i^r
fei,

ha>

^elb,
fie

treit

Tlann geftorben
ha^
fie bie

unb bog

fein

G^elb ^abe. 11. (S^lauben ie,

bie 2BaI)rf)eit fprid^t,

SSa^r^eit fpric^t ? 12.

Ob
bag

meig

id) nic^t, ic^

moUte aber

nidjt,

fie

an nnger

ftiirbe.

n.

Have you heard the great news? 2. They say the Emperor is coming to-morrow. 3. Do you believe that it is
1.
? 4. My mother said she had read it in the paper, but she did not believe it. 5. The belief that he is coming makes the whole city glad. 6. What news did his letter contain ? 7. He wrote he was still in Berlin and working as usual; he was sending me a book which he had read, and hoped I should read it also ; he did not know when he was coming home, but he hoped he could come soon. 8. I came back in the belief that he was very ill, but I find him quite well. 9. I asked him whether he was ill, but he was only tired because he had worked too much. 10. I asked the young man who he was and where he was going, but he only answered he did not know me and would not 11. I think I am going away to-morrow, but tell me. my friend wishes that I remain long^er. 12. His father

true

EXERCISES.
said he

327

must come home to-morrow; but he says he cannot not go away before his friend has arrived. 13. The lady said she was very sorry that he was so sick, and hoped he would soon be better again. 14. The doctor thinks he
and
will

will soon die,

15.

The story that he

but I think he is not so sick as they believe. is busy and therefore does not come

I do not believe.

EXERCISE

30.

INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT
[339-343.]
Vocabulary,
raud^eii

OR OBJECT.

sraoke

trinfcu
call

drink
allcm, cause

^ei^en
befe^ten
*Jor(ejen

command,
orcZer

taffen

jd^tDeigen

hesUent
forbid go to drive
drive
the

fpasieven gel^en
t>oi'fa{)ren

read aloud (to someone) oerbieten go to walk f^ajieren fa^ren

drive

up

fa{)ren

ber

SSogeu

the carriage

ber ^utfd^er

coachman

gefci^rtid)

kidjt

dangerous easy

gornig
toeit

c^ngry

far, distant

1.

SDo Sefen ^aBe

2.

td^ geternt,
fic^

a6er ha^ d^reiben

(Sd^tDetgeiig,

ift

mir nod^

fd^tDer.

(Srinnern ie

feineg

al mir
ift.

i^

fa^en.
ift

3. ^> ift fd)itier

^u

fc()iDeigen,

tDenn
511

man

^ornig

4.

mir

nic^t leic^t,

feine (^efd)ic^te
5,

glaubeu, aber

ic^

tuerbc

l)erfuct)en,

i[)m gu I)elfen.
gefci^rlic^,

C^inem folc^en 9)(enfc^eu ^elb ju

geben,

ift fef^r

aber (Sffen uiib ^rinfen barf

1.

man

il;m

geben.
fingeit,

6.

^^

Ijore

fingeu.

(Sie

^oxtn ben {uiigen

8.

"^Dlann

h^n 3()r ^ruber mitgeOrac^t ^at

9. (Sr
lieJ3 if)n

SSo

I)at

er ben

giingling fenuen gelernt ?

10.

(ernte ir)n in 53cr(in fennen.

jeben

Xa^

11. (Sr (;ie ben fungen

5U fict) fommcn nnb leljrte if)n fingen. 93hnn ^eute fommen unb befall if)m,*
bie ^ebicr)te Oortefen.

un
13.
^

etnjag

Dorjufingen.

12. (Sr Ici^t fic^

3c^ mottte fpajieren ge^en, aber er blieO im Garten fi^en unb

la.

* 222.n,

328
iDiinfcl^fe

EXERCISES,
ntc^t Quuget)en.
tt)iil

i4.

^r

tft

ju mnht, fpajteren ju
15. ^axi,
ttJir

geeu, aber er

gent fpa^ieren fasten.

la^ beit

^utfd^er rufeu unb ben SBagen borfa^ren,

iDoUen nad^ ber

17.

tabt

fa[)ren.

16. 3Sir ()aben ben ^(r^tnoc^ ju befud^en.

S^n

gu befuc^en,

miiffeit

ie fe^r

tt)eit

fa^^ren.

18. 2Bir ^abeti tt)eiter

nid^t u fagen, aber er l;ort

nicljt

auf,

un ju rufen.

19. ^rinfen

unb ^iauc^en

finb

im ^^eater

ijerboten.

n.
I do not like writing, but I like reading very mucli. 3. The doctor has forbidden* 2. Why do you not smoke ? me smoking. 4. To be silent is better than to talk when one is angry. 5. I ordered him to be silent, but he wished to talk. 6. To tell the truth is impossible to him. 7. I tried to help him, but he would not tell the truth, and I could not give him anything. We became acquainted with him in Paris. 8. Will you go to drive with me V 9. I 10. I will have the coachman rejoice to go with you. called. 11. When I called him he remained standing and did not come. 12. Do you not hear talking ? 13. I hear talking and singing. 14. Have you heard the children sing ? 15. I tried to hear them sing, but the teacher for1.

bade me to come into the school. 16. He teaches them to sing and to read aloud. 17. Let Sophy be called; I see her coming and I want to ask her something.f 18. I had her called, but she was reading aloud to her sister and could
not come. 19. We will have them work an hour, then they can go to drive with us. 20. Have the carriage come, the
children want to go to drive, but I shall go to walk.

EXERCISE
INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT
[344-348.]

31.

AND WITH PREPOSITIONS.

Vocabulary,
Benu^cn an^orcn
* 222.1,1a.

use
listen to

lad^en
fld^ jurflrfjlcjcn

laugh
.

withdraw

1 227.3a.

EXEBGISES.
Bcrclt furj
bic elegen^eit

329

ready
short
the opportunity
the scholar

ru^lg
fd^ttjad^

^ia
weak
the play the university

bag @d|aufpicl
bie Unitjerfitat

ber ete^rtc

amufiren

amuse

amiifant

amusing

1. (Sr fagte mtr,

er ^a6c feme (^etegen^ett ge'^aBt,

bereit,

mtt g^nen
aber er
ift

ju fprec^en.

2.

^c^ bin

i^m

alle ^u er^d^Ien,
3.

5U sornig, mid^ an^oren gu tDoUen.

abreifen gu fbnnen, mac^t
fie

^ieoffnuug, halb trieber fe^r gliidtid). 4. ie fam nac^

5. ^uftatt

Berlin,

um

i()re

(Slteru ju befudien.
if)r

nac^ Berlin

511

fommen, mare e
6.

leid)ter geiuefen, gleic^ nac^

aufe ju

ge^eii.

Qc^ iDerbe

ge^en.
fpiel
fie

elegen^eit benugeu, um ing 3:^eater ju mbc^ten nic^t ing ^^eater ge^en, o^ne ha^ @cau^ 8. 2)ie geit ift ju !ur, alg ha^ tjor^er gelefeu ju ^abeu.
biefe
7. 2Bir

bag (5d)aufpiel lefen fonnen.

3:f)eater

9. (Sr fpracl^

baUon, iin nad)

10. ^c^

bem

ju begleiten, aber er mu^te nod^ arbeiten.

!ann bag Sieb uic^t fiugen ^oren, o^ne u n^einen.

ntit feinen

11. 5lnftatt
fic^

greunben

'm>

^(jeater gu ge^eii, ^at er

juriidge^
12.
(Sr

gogeu,
bentt

um

in feiuem Qii^ttier rul)ig arbeiten gu fonnen.

(SJele^rter

nur baran, ein grower

gu merben. 13. (Sr

ift

tDiinfd^t

nad^ ber Unitjerfitat 5U ge^en, unb fein ^ater geit unb elegen^eit ba5u ju geben.
gelefen,

reic^

genug, if)m

14. ^c^ ^abe ben Bfioman

ift

um
16.

mic^

amiifiren.

aber er

gar nid^t amiifant.

aber

15. 5tnftatt 5u tad^en,

ttjeinen.

^be

ic^

i^n nid^t tefeu fonnen, o^ne 5U

ttJoEen,

Qd^ "^aU i^n tng ^eater ge^en laffen

er ^at nic^t ge(;en fonnen.

n
Are you ready to go with us to tlie theatre? 2. I have no time to go to the theatre. 3. I have seen this play too often to want to see it again. 4. I cannot see any play without haying read it before. 5. What will you do in order to amuse yourself? 6. Instead of staying here, I shall go to the university in order to see the learned professor. 7. He. thinks only of seeing learned men and reading learned books, but we think only of amusing ourselves.
1.

330
8..

EXEECISES.

going to walk with us? was always ready to go to walk with you, but to-day he was too tired to be able to go out. .10. We came in the hope of hearing him sing. 11. I cannot go away without hearing him sing. 12. I have no time to listen to him, but I hope to hear him sing later. 13. You cannot help this poor man without giving him much money. 14. I let him tell his story in order to know whether he spoke the truth. 15. I have no hope of being
9.

Why did lie withdraw instead of

He
said he

able to help him. 16. Instead of listening to my story he forbade me to speak. 17. They will not go away without having spoken. 18. We have used every opportunity of helping them, but they are bad enough to be dangerous. 19. This novel is too amusing for me to read it without laughing. 20. I had wished to teach him to read aloud, but he had too weak a voice to be able to read aloud.

EXJjJKCISE 32.

PARTICIPLES.
[349-359.]
Vocabulary/.
c^rcn
fii^rcn

honor
lead

t)oIIenbcn

complete
talk over
receive

befprec^en

mitt^cUcn
gcboren
fcrtig

communicate
horn
finished
the cathedral

empfangen
erttarten

await
hasty

ciUg
SfJom

bcr

3)om

Borne

^Oltt

Cologne

'

1.

SSer rt)kb bte anfommenben

(^cifte

empfangen?
3.

2.

SO^eine

5D^utter

empfdngt
ha>

bie

erau!ontmenben.
4.

aft

^u

ben an-

gefangenen ^rief bollenbet ?

(Sobalb \v\x i^n fertig l^aben,

4.

foKen ie

^efdjriebene lefen.
6. (Sr

benen gefannt ?
gingen and) mit,

tvav

mein geliebter greunb.

nben ie ben eftor1. @r ging,

8. 9.

ba ^hib nn ber .$anb

fiiljrenb,

in bie .^ircl^e ^inein.

SSir

nm

bie fc^on

gematten ^ilber jn fe^en.

aben

EXEECISES.
Ste
frli^er fo

331
10.

botteubet

f c^buc

^ilber gefetien ?
12.

fa^

fie.

bciDuiiberub an uub ging fdjmeigenb fort.

tjcrcjeffeub reifte er goftern

11. 5(((e ^erfprec^ungeit

bie D^eifenben

ah.

3Sann incrben

juriicffommeit ?

13.

(Sr

fan: eiligft [)ine3efaf}ven,

uni ung bie

t)orIefenb

9^ac^rid)t iiitt5utr)et(eu.

14. Uii ben

empfangenen ^rief

unb mit nn bie 9lad)rid)t [)efpred)enb, blieb er lange bei nn. 15. ie aufge^enbe (Sonne fanb i^n noc^ im ^ette liegen. 16. er im 3a^re 1248 angefangene '5)om ju ^'oln ift erft 638
Saf)re fpdter ijodenbet tDorben.
$iitte

17.

^er arme,
ein

in einer niebrigen

geOorene ^nabe,

ift

fpdter

berii^mter ^rofeffor ge=

iDorben. 18. ^ie tt)einenbe

gran ift

bie SJ^ntter beg geftern

an bem
ift.

brennenben aufe geretteten ^inbeg. loeld^eg ^ente geftorben

H
it
1. Have you found the lost book ? 2. They have brought back to me quite spoiled. 3. AVhy does she go weeping into the church ? 4. Her most beloved son is dead. 5. I knew the dead, he was a beautiful boy. 6. The child came running in order to give me the long expected letter. 7. Talking over with me the news, he forgot to give me the paper. 8. She looked admiringly at the beautifully painted pictures, but she said nothing. 9. Do you know this much admired lady ? 10. She is the daughter of my

11. We she is a beautiful woman. beloved uncle, remained a week in Kome looking at the great churches and admiring the beautiful paintings. 12. As soon as the expected newspaper arrives, I will communicate to you the news contained in it. 13. Having lost my paper I shall have to read yours. 14. I have found your lost
I., born in Corsica in 16. They were Helena in 1821. not able to save those sleeping in the burning house,

paper.

15.

The emperor Napoleon

St.

the year 1769, died at

17. The traveller because they could not wake them. 18. Arrived in arrived too late to see the dying man. Cologne I went at once to their house, but I found the house shut and the whole family away. 19. She went away weepuig without having seen her beloved ones.

33

EXERCISES.

EXERCISE
[361-381.]

33.

ADVERBS AND PEEPOSITIONa

Vocabulary/,
ber iBerg
ber
bic

the

mountain

ba emitter
bie bie

the

thunder-storm

^fab Sotfe

the path the cloud

anf
r^ie^ung

the bench
the education the star

ta^ @efcl)aft
fteigen
einjiel^cn
t)erfd)ttjinben

business
cZim6

ber

ter

blicfen

look

move in
disappear

auS^ie^en
bitten

move out
beg

unterttJegg (adv.)

on

the

way

1.

9d^ bin untermegg, meine gi^^uube gu 6efu(^en,

gegeniiber
jenfeit^

bte ber

^trd^e

tno^nen.

2.

grii^er tDo^nten
fie

fie

auf

bent

Sanbe

beg gluffe,

aber

ftnb

megen ber (^gie^ung

je^t

i^rer ^inber in bie tabt gegogen

unb
SSir

mo^en
gingen
auf

unn^eit ber

c^ule.

3.

^ro^ be
feljte

^eifeen

Setter^ bin
4.

id} :^eute

fammt meinen
in ben SBalb

^inbern fpajieren gegangen.

l^inein,
\6)

tief

mid^ unter bie

^dume
5.

eine

^anf,

unb

bie
td

^inber fpielten urn mic^ l^erum.

fa^ nad^ oben,

^lo^Iic^ tnurbe e bunfel,

bie Sonne mar Winter ben fd)tDaren SSoIfen unb binnen furger ^t\i fing e an gu regnen. 6. SSir (iefen eiligft au bem SSalbe l)inau. SBalb aber tt)ar *l. ber turm i)orbei, unb bie onne !am mieber ^inter ben SSoIfen l^ertior. 8. Qc^ modte auf ben 33erg ^inauf fteigen, urn bie unter^^

berfc^ttjunben,

ge^enbe

Sonne gu

feen,

aber er

ttJlinfc^te,

long be gluffeg

fpagieren gu ge^en.

9. ^^6) bat i^n,

gu mir ^eriiber gu fommen,

aber er mollte e

nic^t.

10. SSir ftanben auf

bem

fleinen,

Icingg

be S^uffe fii^renben ^fabe unb fa^en nac^ oben ^inauf, unb

alte

Sterne beg immelg

nict)t

blicften

auf ung Ijernieber.

11. ^^c^

faun

an irem aufe Dorbeige^en,

o^ne ^inein gu ge^en.

id

12. Sie ^at ntic^ oft eingelaben, ^erein gu fommen, ober mu^te beg (Sefd^ciftg megen in bie Stabt inein.

n.
1.

Why

does your friend

now

live outside of the

town?

2.

He

has a sick child, and for

its

sake he has

moved out

EXERCISES.

333

of the town. 3. They have planted trees along the path by the river, and have set benches under the trees. 4. The horseman who rode past us was riding on a very beautiful horse, and two dogs were running round about him. 5. I looked long after him as he rode away into the woods. 6. The sun has come out from behind the black clouds, and in spite of the storm the evening will be fine. 7. We will

climb up upon the mountain and look down upon the 8. When the sun disappears behind the mountains city. the stars will look down upon us from above. 9c As I went by his house he was looking out of the window. 10. He called me over to him and invited me to come into the house. 11. He said he could not (go) out of the house, and wished to speak to me concerning business. 12. I went in to him and remained with him during two whole hours.

EXERCISE
[382-392.]

34.

CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEKJECTIONS.

Vocabulary,
ber ^affec
the coffee
the

ber Zljtt

(he tea

ha^ bag

^tcifcf)

meat

ha^ entuje bag SBaffer

\ia^

the vegetable the water the

bic ^artoffel

the potato
the fire

^mtv

mi

wood

!oc^en

cook
light

bacfen

bake

anpnben
f)oten
fic^

DerBrennen
gubereiten
^)ftucfen

hum
prepare

fetch catch cold

crfciUen

pluck

1.

S^

mod^te
urn

\>(i^

grii^ftiic! juberetten,

affein
ift

man ^t
u

\>a^

geuer

nocf) nic^t angejiinbet.

2.

^ie Wac(b
obcr iim

^inauggegnnc^en,
pf(iic!en.

enttueber
3. 3ii^ei^

0(5
ici^

511

jiid^en

(S^emiife
irf)

tc

Seuer an, unterbeffen tucrbe

SSaffer ^oteu

uitb

trinfe

ben ^affee mac^en. 4. ^u trinfft immer JIaffee, ic^ bagegen nnr ^^ce. 5. ^(jo mac^en tt)ir ni(f)t nur ^^affee, fonbern
6.

and^ ^5ee.

(Sobalb ba SSaffer

!ocI)t,

t^un ie bie ^artoffeln

334
^\m\n.
1.

EXEKCISES.

^a^

Staffer fod^t
ic^

^Wax

fc^on,

aCtein idj

^abe

feitie

^artoffeln, beS^att) merbe

in ben

Garten ge^en
9.

miiffen.

8.

SSo

@ie

bie ^artoffeln finben

merben,
'

tt)ei ic^ nic^t,

ahtv inbem ie
SSci^renb
id^

fie fuc^en,

merbe

ic^

ba Sleifc^ gubereiten.

im
ha^

(Garten
e

mar,

ift
ift,

bag
je^t

gleifcl^

berbrannt.
ic^

10.

Wtf),

tierbrannt

tnerbe
ift,

nicl^t
ic^ boci)

5U

effen

^aUn.

11. Obgteic^ e0 Derbrannt

bat) on

merbe

berfuc^en, ein tiic!

iDeg mit il^m.

5U effen.

12.

^fui be
14.

fc^Icc^ten 5(eifd)e,

13. SSeber

bn

noct)

ict)

n)erben e effen fbnnen, aber biefe airmen

merben e gerne
tt)ie

effen.

eitbem

fie fic^

erlciltet

l^at,

ift

fie

immer Iran! gemefen, aber

tjor

beffen nngeai^tet

arbeitet fie nad^

h^n gan^en XaQ.

15.

^a

fie

arm unb

fran!

ift,

n)ot(en
fagt, fie

n)ir i()r (^elb geben, fie tviti e

tt)olIe

aber nic^t ^aben, fonbern

lieber fterben,

aU

ha'^ fie

meine nlfe anne^men

ttJoKte.

n.
1.
2. Although the weather Alas for these poor people so cold, they have no warm clothes. 3. Not only have
!

is

clothes, but they have also no bread and should like to give them something, only I do no fire. 4. I would accept it. 5. They would to they whether i;now not be sure accept no money; nevertheless you can help them. 6. Either you can give them potatoes, or you can look for

they no

warm

a fire. 7. I will get some potatoes; meantime you light the fire. 8. Neither you nor I can cook 9. It is true, I can not potatoes without burning them. cook potatoes; on the other hand I can bake meat ven well. 10. While the meat is cooking, give the children these vegetables, in order that they may have something to eat at once. 11. Since I have caught cold I have not been able to eat anything. 12. Try nevertheless to drink this coffee;
13. Alas for

wood and make

besides I have some white bread, which you can eat. 14. Until I can work me, that I cannot work
!

again the children will have nothing to eat. 15. Although we have little money, we will nevertheless help you 16. Accordingly I will take the as long as you are sick.
children with me, as I promised you.

SECOND

SERIES.
I.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES
USE OF THE AKTICLES.
(66.)
1.

SDa

^artenfpiel

ift

ein
fein.

^rieg.
((Sd^.)

mmtj,
3.

2.

SDte

eid)i^te
fiub

jott

feme SoOrebuerin
fiir

gefd^affen

bie

a^cnfc^eii.

(5c^.)

4.

^te ^DZenfc^en 5(m ^aum be

5.

c^tDeigen^ ^dngt feine gruc^t, ber gviebe. (^r.)

gion, biefe ^oc^ter
a^enfc^eit.
SSiirje.

2)ie 9teU=

be 63inimeB,
S)ie

ift

bie getreue ^efd^rtin be

Wf.)
T.

6.

Surest be ^obe iftbeg SeDen fc^arfe

(9lucf.)

^ie

93iutter lag auf

ben S^nieen Dor bent '^dtt

unb I)atte ben ^rm um if)r ftofjiicube^ ^^inb gefcl^Iagen. (ei).) 8. ^^rdnen ftanben bem atteii Tlanm in ben 5Iugen. (aiiff.) 9. 5((-3 nun ber SD^ai fic^ ju (Snbe ncigte, unb ber SBalb iin erften (^riin 10. ^ie (5Iegien ()offe id) auf htn ftanb, !am ein 53rief. (^e^.) onnabenb ju fc^icfen, unb benfe ben ^J}^ontag barauf fetOft 5U fommen. (@.) 11. SSenn id^ nur im SSinter einige 3eit 6ei 3I)nen 12. Qn bem ^tamin be un um^lOefannten fein !ann! {(^,) (Sa(on, in ber ^^^einftra^e ^0. 21, brannte ein IjeKeg geuer.
(^et).)

nid)t.

14.

13. Tldn ^ater fc()ien mit ben ^einigcn in ber (SdjtDci^ im beften dnutierftdnbni^ [(Sinl)erftdnbni] 5U leben. G^auff.) ie Uerlangen if)ren Oberft, ben Wa^c, ^uriic!. (@d^.) 15.
(efjnte

Sidi

ba ^i(b bc Drcfteg. ha^

fie

eben in ber
!5)ie

anb

l)ielt,

ftidfd)tueigenb

an bie 3Sanb.

M^ZarUtt.)

16.

!(eine acf)tidl)rigc

den ^aar

ftanb bla
tierbringt

unb ftumm
bie

baOei.

(^etj.)

It. 2)a gtiidlic^e alte

gtittermoc^en

abtnec^fefnb
18.

im btii^enben
in

Stalien unb im luftigen ^ari.

(?euau.)

(Sr luanbelte,

feinen fc^mer5licen (^ebanfen uertieft, iiOer bie 9i()cinbrUc!e

htm

alten tragburg 5U. (^ei).) 19. !$)ie tabt (ag bereit im d^tafe, unb and) im anfe be ^ommanbanten tvav fd)on aik^ 5ur 'knijt

gegangen.

(SSerner.)

20.

anj

cbcnfo ftanb SQ^ic^elangelo 5mifcen

d35

336

EXEBCISES.
21. a0 tvax in ber ^^at mug ^nnbert t)on biefen neu 3tnfang Wdx^ gie^t ber ^aifer norb=
(.)

^ergangen'^eit unb gufunft.

(^otteS ginger. (@(^.)

22. ^(^

brutfen laffen. ((^.)

vo'dxt^,

23.

tDQ^renb Siemens nad)

^om

^nrMfe^rt.
id)

(^. @r.)

24.

gur

^orgefd^ic^te biefe ^uffa^eg ^ah^

(tar^Iee.)'

golgenbe gu bemerfen.
(Sinterfelb.)

25. (^ freut mic^,

fagte

ha^ ie je^t toCftcinbig gered^t^

26. SDe

fertigt bafte^en,

er gu (Srflerem.

a)iorgen ben!' an beinen ott, be 5(benb ben!' nn beinen ^ob.

(S^r.)

27. Siebe

ma^t ben
ntic^,

^liigften
id)

gum

S^^arren.
alt

(@)3r.)

28.

a^ein ^ater beftimmte

aU

20 Qa^re

Wax,

5um olbaten.

(^auff.)

29. (Sr tnar 48

30.

unb Qa^re

gut getrac^fen
alt,

at er

e:arbinat murbe. (. r.)

aJ^eifterl" fo

^ie

ift

IXrfad^e,

hci^ id)

ben

tange be^ielt.

(@(^.)

31. (Sr iDar jc^on langft SSitt-

tner [SSitmer]

gemorben.

(C^auff.)

32. (Sie finb 6oIbat mie

bie efa^r.

id,

unb ju unferem ^erufe ge^ort nun einmal

in fetnem Qelte auf

(Seruer.)

(67.) 1. Tlit feftem c^ritt ging er tno^l cine ^albe

tunbe

unb

nieber.

((Sber.)

2.

^c^ ^atte nie* gebad^t,

hai in bem

ernften, flillen SJiann ein

fold^er

Duett

\)on

umor

fpruble.f (e^.)
1

THEME L

USE OF THE AUTICLES.

Life is an eternal war, and only death brings us peace. I do not like history, for it tells only of war and of death. 3. Man was not created for war, but for peace and for happiness. 4. The old woman held the child in her arms, while I was reading the letter. 5. Her son
1.
2.

wrote the letter Wednesday and he will come himself Sun7. In summer my 6. He went away in February. day. friends are in Switzerland, but in winter they live in 8. Have you seen the picture of little Rhine street. Henry? 9. Old Charles sent it to me, when I was in Southern Germany. 10. I love the good and wise books, and I am now reading Goethe. 11. When I was in Italy I spent several weeksj in old Rome and in beautiful Florence.
^Wilhelm
Meister, a novel

by Goethe.

See 332.3.

f 333.36.

:|:230.

EXERCISES.

337

12. Italy is tlie most beautiful country on earth. 13. The children go early to bed, and when we came back, they al-

14 We have at least a hundred of his we read the following. 15. He was 70 years old when the death of his wife made him a widower. 16. "VVe visit him twice a week. 17. We always find him at home of a morning. 18. He is the brother of my old masready lay asleep.
letters, in

the

first

and he was formerly a soldier. 19. I have never known so good a man. 20. He has been very ill, but such
ter,

man

does not fear* death.

21.

We passed half the

win-

ter in Berlin.

HiLUstbative seistences h.
adjectives.
(115.)
1.
5Iti

bemfelljen 5l6enb fanb nod^

(^e^.)

em

^Ibfd^teb ftatt,
alte

ahcx luir ein

brieflic^er.

2.

^ie ganje

2BeIt

fe^t

bie miitterlic^e Siebe iiOer bie Udterlicl^e.

(3. ^. 9^.)

(116.)

1.

te SSett
fjofft

Dcr TltnU^

9J^eufcf), ^^iilfreid)

iDirb alt unb \v\xh tuieber fimg, bod^ immer ^erbefferung. ((^.) 2. bel fel ber uub gut. (.) 3. Unermej^Hc^ unb mieublld^,
au^gelireitet,
frei

Hegft bu t)or
{%,
(3x,)

tntr

alte, fjeilige^,

emige
traumen.
ftc^

SD^eer.
(@(^.)

4.

3c^ wiii mic^

iijar

xtnb

gliicflid^

5.

SDer 5tlte
6.

fremb in biefer tabt, er

(Bo Utid) ^attt

fiiljlte

emfam.

(au[f.)

5)ocr) r;att' tc^

1.

cinen ^ruber, \>tn ^ruber fc^Iugt

fie

Q^r

tobt

[tot].

(eiM.)
8.

ber ^iiitftler felten ge*

fe^en..
. . . .

((Sbers.)

Qn emem
fc^on

^^al, bei nrmen irtei!, erfc^teu

ttjunberbar.
{@(^.)

em

3}iabcl)en,
if)r

imb

9.

fe^t bie

^rone golben
(121.)
1.

nupraune aar. (U().) 0 tDar i{)nen immer gtuetfello0,

in

ha'^

er
ift

eine

geiftige aRarf)t erften

9^ange ....

fel.

(?aube.)

2.

ilfe

jebeS*

mat

\)a^

^inb
1.

eifrigen ^eftreben.

(53en3et=teruau.)

(123.)
90?enfcl)

in

folc()cr

bimfeKjaftcr

^t o(^t)erratr}

[^rat]

begaugeu. (^o^.)

unb uubaterlanbifd^er 2. er grembe

erfunbigte fi^

m6) beu ^efi^eru

\?er{c^iebener gro^ett ebftube.

*ji(^ fftn^ten

t)cc

338
(124.)
1.

EXERCISES.

0, fonnteft bu
ic!^

in

meinem ^nnern

lefen, trie ttjentg

!

SSater uitb

o^ii folc^ einc^ 9flu^me \mxti) gemefeu

urn mtc^ fc^trebeu. (^%uer.) bein etDtffen ?
(d|.)
(cf).)
ti:)Dtlteft

((^.)

2.

SSielgoIbene 33itbcr fa^

3.

3BeIc^

anberer c^ulb* tierflagt

bicf)

4.

(Sie Der-

lebten ntanc^eu faueren ^ag.

5.

SDu

atten biefen

(^lan^ berlaffeti
(125.)
1.

(@d^.)

(Sr tuar

beim ^onig

5tDeit)otte

tunben.
:

(S(^.)

2.

SDa moc^t'

ic^

^infinfen auf bie ^iiiee

ift

unb rufen
!

bu unenblii^er
3.

lieber ^ater, n)ie

biefe

beine SBelt fo fi^bu

(^ocfi.)

G^i'mftig ift

Sage

fiir

un europdifc^en ^tduber.
ntic^

(Berber.)

4.

S)u im
5.

im^

met, ^ilf mir armeu, fc^ir)ar5en SO^anu! (Staubius.)

^a, unb
((Sbers.)

bu mirft aud^
(l26.)
2.
1.

armen ^riippel

nidjt

gang Dergeffen.

@r
2Bir

bringt fein treu oltengli]^ er5

^uriicf.
{B(i).)

(c^.)

(S

ift

ber ^rieg ein ro^, getDaltfam ganbmer!.

1.

(127.)

joHen

!eine

eigene
2.

^buige
$8ie(e

me()r

^aben,

feinen

eingeborenen errn.
ftiU
1.

(<Sd^.)

raei^e

c^mdnc

jd^trimmen
(128.)

auf be (Surota SBogen. {TlnUn.)

(^eeubigt nac^ langem,

berberblidjen (Streit,
2.

Wax
unb

bie faiferlofe, bie fd)rec!(id)e B^it-

(^c^^-)

lieber $l)rgo

Saranba
giirften

^atte

man
^

bie

^Befi^ungen
3.

be
ift

(^riftlic^

ornienifd^en

eo
1.

erreic^t.

(Sflaumer.)

^a

ein feltfam

number'

bare B^ic^^i^
(129.)
^aft

^^^^^ ^iele, bie ha> nic^t gefeljen.

(d^.)

Siebe bie ^uten mit treuem muii)e [SRute], bann

(ammer.)
2.

bu

ha> (^ute.

3eber

^^iinftler ift ein ^riefter

(33urott).)

bag ^ei^t,
SSeife
^.)

ein ^erfiinbiger
t)on
ficl^,

be
ber

(^ottlic^en.

3.

^er
(3.

befommt alk
5.

J^or

olleS tion anberen.

tt)ie

^.
ift.

4. Df^eic^er, frage nict)t

ben 5trmen,

er

arm gen)orben

(aJJiitter.)

^er ^rieb

ber (Selbfter^altung erlnac^t, ha

^oftbareres ju er^alten \)aht

aB

mid).

(?eff.)

6.

ic^ etmag Sd) bring' bir auc

mag iibf^e mit

fter,

t)om (S^ni.
ftatt

(@c^.)

1.

6ie

treten unter bie gen=^

unb empfangen,
1.

5IImofen, Budermer!, ^iiffe

(.)

unb

m^
fanft

man

i'^nen fonft 5trtige

geben mag.

(130.)

9lun

trugen
2.

un ^bie
ift leii^t

SSeHen

ftid

unb

^erunter.

(tomer.)

ben ^ag,

fd)tt)er bie

Siebe,

am

fdjtDerften bie ^(etd^giiltigfeit ju ertragen.

(Some.)

(140.)

1.

SDer liter ^i3d)fte0 biirfen voix bert^eibigen [Der^

*See219.

2.

EXERCISES.
teibigen] gegen
(^sietualt.

339
ift

(ad).)

2.

^ItteS (Sdjone
(3.

fanft,
3.

ba^cr

fhib bie fc^bnften golfer bie ruTjigften.

^.

91.)

SDer

gag

mifd)en ^erfalleiicii greiuibeii

um^erfofjiilic^fte.
((^.)

ift

gemiifjiilid)
ift

bcr gvimmigfle unb

4.

^apfer

ber Somenfietjer, tapfererift

ift,

ber SBeltOc^tuimjer, bodj

(Berber.)
5.

am

tapferfteu
ift,

toer fid) felbft ()e5mang.

(Sin ebter

elb

ber fiir SSaterlaub, ein eblerer,

ebelfte,

ber

fiir

be

^anbe 3So^I, ber

6.

ber

fiir

bie SD^eufdj^eit

fiimpft.

(Berber.)

3u

ben ^ropen finb bie etucidjfe Don

frifc^erem ^riin, mit (jriif^cren

unb gidnjenberen
(^um.)
1.

^Icittcrn gejiert,

aU om
ift

in h^n nLirblid)crcn (Srbftric^en.

er
ha^

!(are
tiefe

^ac

fc^eint

am

fc^onftcn

in fcinem ru^igen

Sauf,
8.

M^^v
!

er[)aOenften in fcincr ^etuegung.

(@(^.)
(.)

^c^ fterbe
9.

ha^

balb gefagt unb

Otllbcr

noc^ get^an.

'Diefe

jungen

SBdume, unb e iDaren gerabe bie

aIIerfct)onften, be^ielten

immer
5ltter^

aKe i^re
Unred^t

3rt)eige.
rcic^et

(?lnberfon.)

10.

Sebe bcr
fid) felOft.

a}lenfd)^eit* ermiefene
(Berber.)

auf fiird)terU(^fte

11.

liebft fc^offen bie

golbencn (SDnnen(id)ter burd)

bod)

ha> bid^te

^^an*

nengriin.
(144.)

(Cei.)

1.

3c^ bin

erfc^redlic^ neugierig

mie
al

fie

nur

aufe^en mag. (tomer.)

(145.)
1.

Xcx kronen
2.

miirbig fein,
finb

ift

me[)r

kronen
Ieid}ter

trogen. (^rouegf.)
bie

^ie Settler
3.

ben gunben feinb, unb

ift

gunbe ben

^ettlcrn. {Bpx.)

bem Tltn\^tn
(3.

unb

getaufigcr 5U fd)meic^eln al 5U loben.

^.

9^.)

4.

en

SSein aber tran! cr gleid) au ben gdffern, of)ne ba^ er ein Ia

nott)ig [notig] r)atte.
(3.

r.)

(146.)

i.

g(orcn

(Sr fii^Ite fid)

nun

bem, toa er
(147.)
1.

rcid) an feinen 2Ser!en. (^. r.) 2. (^nabe, an (^iitern, unb fremb in arm an fo Uon Sugenb auf aB fein (5igent()um [igentumj
ift

betradjten fonntc.
(Sr

(.)

fannte bie D^amen

((Sbcrg.)

ber auf
2.

bem SSege

nad)

Valencia licgenben (Stdbte.

mitgebrad)tcn (Solbaten,

5(u^er ben Don panien

I)atte

^arl
'^^iefe

bie

Oor 9[RaiIanb fiegreid)en

ha,

^ruppen
^uni

bei

fic^.

(^. (3x.)

3.

(Stabt lag auf ber

lic^ften in
liegt.

30^eer

I)ert)orragenben

pi^e

5lfri!a^,

am norb^ wo je^t
^

(rube.)

*See 222.

Vk

340

BXEBGISES.

THEME
1.

n.

ADJECTIVES.

Who does not love old. friends more than new ones? The young man had to* leave the city and go into a strange one. 3. Never had his home appeared to him so 4. Now he was alone among strangers, and he beautiful. 5. But he found new friends, felt himself sad and lonely. good and helpful (ones). 6. He had often dreamed himself rich and powerful now he had become rich, but he was also old and unhappy. 7. He gave us a glass of good beer and a piece of black bread. 8. With the help of eager endeavor he became a very learned man. 9. What a spiri10. Has he truly committed tual power this man has been.
2.
;

11. Several strange men have asked after the owner of this building. 12. Such beautiful maidens appear seldom in our valley. 13. Many a noble man have

such a treason ?

these soldiers struck dead.

14. O, ye poor shepherds, what a happy year have I passed in your valley. 15. We poor

16. The king is good he will unhappy man. 18. Only the 17. Forget not the poor and unhappy. 19. The true artist must eternal, the unending, is godlike. only love the eternally beautiful. 20. Have you brought

men

never see our king.

surely help thee, poor

21. You foolish children always anything pretty? 22. The fool does not unto have something new. derstand anything, whatever wise thing one* may say to him. 23. The most costly thing which I have to preserve is not my own life. 25. 24. The two enemies look at each f other grimly. I bear more easily the hatred of my enemy than his indif26. The noblest man fights, not only for his ference. 27. The brave man vanfatherland, but for humanity. quishes his enemies, but only the bravest can vanquish 28. In the more northern countries the plants himself. are smaller p-nd less beautiful than in the tropics. 29. The

me

want

EXERCISES.

341

most
lime.
is

terrible
20.

movements of the ocean are the most subThe ocean is not always most beautiful when it

quietest. 31. These little trees which have kept all their twigs are charming. 32. I cannot praise a man quite unknown to me. 33. The brother, by three years younger, is

than the older one. 34 The troops victorious at Tunis now had to go to the city lying on the most northern point of Africa.
taller

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES, HL
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
(152.)
1.

SDer $err

^t

meiti

nod

nie bergeffen,
2.

t^ergig,

ntein ^erj,

and) feiner nic^t.

(ettert.)
idf)

9Hc^t metnet^atben,

fonbern mehtcr 8one megen, feufjte

ei'r, erf)a(te

in ber finftcrcn Dlac^t

un

(M.)
ber 9^ing

(154.)
(jaftig
frof),

1.

^a

ift

eOen (Sieger,
2.

fagte id)

unb

flecfte if)n

in ber 3erftrenung
(et).)

i^n tDieber 5n Ijaben.

ift

an ben ginger, orbentlic^ ie 9Zelfe foil man nic^t

3.

t)cr)c^md()en, fie

be (partners SSonne. (.)

mid) gar nic^t bang.

^er ^rief htn

4.

hu

gefc()rieben,

er mac^t

(ei.)

5lC(e
5.
6.

ging burd) ein gute $Beib, melc^e^ nid}t fern iDofjnte. {.)

2)enn mein Siebc^en,

fie

fc^reibt

\va>

id) xijv

bic^tete.

{(B,)

^er
T.

SSifle

ift

gut, aber 3Sinb

nnb

SSetter fdmpfen bagcgen.

faf),

(@ci^.)

9JZand)er
^ielt.

ift

ein 33ofetr)ic^t gemorben, toeil er

8.

baf^

man

i^n

bafiir

((lampe.)

ier ein (Sjemptar be 5l(manad.

(@(^.)
9.

umboIbt

fenbet mir beren brei au 53ertin.

t3ie((eid)t

(Sriauben

die mir eine grage,

^a^ Seitere
mern.
(eibet.)

mai^t bie ^eantrt)ortung berfelben

10.
!

iiberftiiffig.

(^iet.)

(Sd^on fangt e an ju
bie
(Srbe,

bdm=
bie fo

11.

(^

regnet

ott fegnet
eine 5Irt
14.

burftigift.

((SnUu.)

12.
13.

(S trarcn
(

einmal fUnfunbjmanjig 3inn^

folbaten.

(^ubeiiou.)

mar aber

bon ^ermirrnng

iiber bie 'Dieuerfctiaft

gefommen.

(?enjolb.)

a mar
batjon
5)er

e
15.
;

fait
'i)ie

unb
eg

finfter,

e fc^ricen bie 9taben

Dom

^ac.

(abutter.)

Seute, melcf)e

im ^orfe mDf)uten, a^nten gar nic^tg maren gan^ gemo^nti^e Seute. (?eanber.) 16.
aber bie
S^iebe
ift

benn
ift

Qa^

parteiif(^,

eg noc^ me^v.

(^e(f.)

XT. 9?^it meinen

342

EXERCISES.
t)iel

5lrBeiten bartn Inn ic^

beffer gufrieben, a( ic^ e mit

benen

im borigcn

3a!)re

bin.

(@d^.)

18.

^anit

tt)dren

tt)ir

!Int)en,

iinb Uerbieutcii e

511 fcin.

(3c^.)

19. 3ft' jeuer 2^antn.tu, ben

(.)

Supitcr 5u 9kt unb ^afel 509 ? (Sr ift e. ha? fragte er. 3c^ tun e, antmortete bie
(155.)
(c^.)
2.
1.

20.

SSer

ift

Sitonigin.

(JBeauber.)

m<^t^

2Sai:)re Idfst * fic^

Don ber 3n!nnft

gautenil Ijeran.
fid)

tDiffen.
(^iel.)

(r felbft riicfte fic^

ben

treiten

3.

DZacI)

ber 3uU^9^e^oIution crn)d[)Ite er

4.

^ari ^nm SSo^n^

SS>aiin inir

orte.

(!^aube.)

Unb nnn

niiiffen toir

nn trenneu.
5.

un mieberfeljen
onber beffcr
gleicl)fte(len

trer nieig

e^ ?

(^iel)

9}(an

miirbe ein^

feuneit,

menn
(@.)

fic^

ntcf}t

intnier einer bent

fic()

anberen
^erliere

moc^te.

6.

Ste

f)ielten

lauQt

feft

aneinanber
1.

gebriich
bic^

felbft

nnb fc()dmten fic^ ifjrer ^^fjrdnen nnr nid)t, bann Oleibft bn

8.

nicl)t.

(ei).)

bet

jebem

53crlufte reid^

genug. (ebaucr.)
igften

^er
nic^t.

(^eijige

gonnt

fic^

fclber bie unfc^nlb-

^ergniignngen
1.

(trugge.)

(156.)

kBiegt bie

mod'
bie

mir an

ber

ruft
3.

(@d^.)

2.

SSer berbnrb mir uneber biefe S^apitel ?

irarf bie igarre meg,
4.

(toc^.)

2)er

grembe
(^e^.)

i^m

Icingft

Qu^gegangen Wax.
(.)

9Zun

greift

mir gn nnb

feib nic^t faul.

THEME nX
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
do not forget to give it to me. and he put it on his finger. 3. I was very much rejoiced to receive your letter if it was not long, it was very well written. 4. The young girl 5. Give it to wrote it, and she writes me many letters. 6. You may read it, me. I want to read what is f in it. Is not this man a 7. but you must not speak of it. 8. Allow me a I have always held him for one. I camp ? question about it. 9. Not this man, but a brother of his is the scamp. 10. I know his history, do not speak to me of it. 11. It began to rain and it became so cold and dark that 12. There were many people in th^ we were afraid.
1.

If

you have the

it

ring,

2.

I gave

to the child

*See343. 1.5d

fte^t.

EXERCISES.

343

house, but they only screamed and did ^nothing, for they were very stupid people. 13. They were afraid, and I was * too, but I said nothing of it. 14. He is not contented

with his work, but we are. 15. When I asked: is it y(^u? he answered it is not I, it is we. 16. If you are un-. happy, you deserve to be so. 17. He chose himself a 18. But now they friend who was worthy of his love. have parted, and they are ashamed of their friendship. 19. They hate each other and wish never to see each other again. 20. He is a bad man he is only a friend to himself. 21. When one loses ones self one has lost every thing. 22. Don't be lazy and don't spoil my work for me.
:

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTEIJ-CES

IV.

POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS.

(169.)
2.
1.

ie

grauenfc^irffal
ic^ ttjerbe

ift

l^or

alien
(.)

mein.

(.)

^f)ue beiue ^flic^t,

meine t^un.

3.
ic^

dJldn ^t^
nic^t

f)eimniB [-ni^] !ann

t)C[>

eucl^

gar nic^t^ nii^en, tr>enn

gubor

cure ^abe.

(^e[[.)

^etjenb, bie
(160.)
1.

fiir

3c^ freue mic^ meine Seben^ f in biefer folc^e Seelen cjefc^affen ift, wk bie mehte. (.)
4.
t^erntefjr.

eitbem ber Honig feinen (So^n bcrloren,

(.)

traut ev SSentgcnt bcr (Seiuen

nic^t mimfrfjcn,
ic^

2.

SSarum foKtcn
{.)

luir

ncOcn ben Unfrigen gn ru^en ?

ift

3.

^a

bin

tDieber

a
(@cf).)

meine iitte

3c fte^e iDieber auf bem

SJ^einigen!
(161.)
1.

"^zx (Srnft,

wd6)tv i^m anf ber tirn lag nnb au

haS' ^Infefjcn

ben 5(ngen
2.

fc[)aute,

gaO
er

iljin

eine ^OZanncS.

(^ber.)

3:obt

[tot] Iat3

ha in feinem ^alafte, i^m jn .^auptcu

(^. (Bv.)
4.
3.
D^oc)^ jittert i()r

ftanb ha> unnoUcnbete (^emiilbe.

ber

d)rec! biirc^ {ebe Dkrtie.

(^eff.)

Sturj t)orI)er
(C).

wax

cinein in

glorenj ber S^opf

(166.)
1.

al)i3efrf)(agen

tDorben.

^v.)

(eie

finb)

meine

Slinber

nnb

bie
2.

meiner lieben
!I)er
Xjat
I

(Sd^inagerin, antmortete ber

^eiftlic^e.

(^^rei.)

ben

4ilb, be
*t^ot
eg.

ift

bie ^ron', ber tt)irb X 222.11.

ha>

Meinob bringen
;

(U^

t 219.3.

Antique phrt^se

at his head.

344
3.

XEISES.
SBefc^eiben'^eit

^ie

]oUtt

bte
4.

Qitberen fe^Ien. (53vummer.)

bie Stonigin. (@(^.)
6.

^ugenb berer Xtx ift', \)a> ift

biefen

fetn,

benen btc
5)er rettete

er

^iele ijermec^feln gar bie

.oI)ne

9}iittel

imb ben

Q\v^d, erfreuen
(f5

jid^

an jenen.
(^. r.)

im 5luge u
[tettte] er

befallen.

6.

9^ur einjelnen iinftlingen t^eilte

^(nfic^t mtt.
Y.

^teg ober

3ene gur

SSaren ba

bie

Sippen,* bie er

fo oft gefii^t,*

bie

bie

golbigen $aare, bie er fo oft urn feine

8.

anb

gemitfelt ?

(Srenjel)

S)ie betDeine

5ur S^u^e gegangen, bie bett)eine, bie fiirc^ten ben

(Berber.)

md)t me^r, bie fd)on f ommenben ^ob.

fannten i^n
atte.

9.

5)ie in

feiner trafje

tro^nten,

(^e^.)

10. ^a, \)a^ roaren bie 5lugen, bie treuen flaren 5tugen,
(piel.)

bie er t)orf;er gefe^en.

11.

^a

tDoUen

a((e $eroeii fein,

unb nnb

feiner

ift

einen Q3iffen
frcffen."

$err Don fic. ((S.) 12. ^auer: nabige erren, nnb ^rnn!." olbat: i, ha^ mng immer fanfen
(@d^.)
1.

(168-71.)

^emiemgen, ber
ift tnie

t>a>

(Sc^reiben

ber S^tegier*
(^. r.)

ung <Bk

iiberbringt, ftofet er feinen ^olc!^ in bie ^ruft.

(bie ^teligion)
ha> $DZeer, }e nie()r

2.

man

baffelbe beob*
3.

Oi^tet,

befto imenblid^er

fc^eint e.

(33rummer.)

5(m meiften

fc^abet
(@|)r.)

ber
4.

bofe 1Rat

[^at] bemfelOen, ber

i^n gegeben ^at.

D^lotanb ritt l^interm

(U^.)

^ater

^er, tnit beffen

peer unb
ber

d^ilbe.

5.

^ie Sugenb

iiberiDinbet

ben (Sturm
{<Bpx4

Seibenfd^aften,

^a^

fitter unterliegt bemfelben.

THEME
He

IV.

POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNa

does not do his duty and I will not do mine. 2. is ours, it cannot be of use to you, and it will never become yours. 3. I rejoice in the beauty f of this country, which seems to be created for me and mine. 4. Each one loves his own (people), his own (possession) best. 5. We travel no more, we live quietly among our own people. 6. He had the appearance of deep earnestness, but when I looked into his eyes I saw that he was
1.

The

secret

439.30.

t^iaa.

EXEKCISES.

345

hands tremble, fear penetrates every 8. What do you fear ; he cannot cut off your head ? 9. The fright has spoiled my pleasure, too. 10. These are my children, the

laugMng.

7.

My

nerve, I cannot look liim in the face.

my brother. 11. This (man) has all one they are all lacking, even modesty, 12. He is always promising to tell us this or that thing, but he really has nothing to say to us. 13. These weep, because they fear death, those because they are not already gone to rest. 14. No, those are not my true friends, those I do not know. 15. These (fellows) want to be the friends of every one,* but not one of them knows what friendship is. 16. That is the one who gave the bad ad17. He is the same who brought vice to the government, us the writing. 18. His head will be cut ofL 19, Youth rejoices in life,"!" age contemplates it.
others are those of the virtues, to this

HiIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES V.
INTEKKOGATIVE AND KELATIVE PEONOUNa
(173.)
ift

1.

28eg

ift

ber

rbenraum

^e
fte

gteigiGen.
2.

SSe

bie errfc^aft ?

e
3.

^erftanbigen.

(Berber.)

SSa

Derfiirjt

mir

bie

Qzxt ? ^()atig!eit.
((^.)

2Ba^ macl)t
ift

unertraglic^ lang ?

TOlfeigsang.
nid^t befe()ten

3^i5er

eiti

unbraud)linrer
(.)

SQknn?
:

S)er

imb

nic^t tjefjorc^en fann.

4.

SSoburd^ tDirb
burc^
niii)t

SBiirb' unb (iic! er fallen lange 3eit ? S<^ me^r aU burc!^ ^efc^eiben()eit. (?ogau.)

nmm

(174.)
fc^en ?

1.

3SeIrf^e^3

^(luje

\md)t ilber bie d^irffate ber

tl^eilt [teilt]

Wtn^

SSetc^e gerccfjte
(ngel.)

anb

bie liter be Selieng

au ?

2.

3Setc^' ein efii^l

mu^t

bu, o grower Tlann,

6ei ber

^ere^rung
1.

biefer SJ^enge ^aben.

inccfen
2.

(.)
fiir
fiij^e

(175.)

3Sag
{\X%)

nu bem djtummer mtc^

fiir

flange boc^ ?
nid^t

SSa^

ein gottlicljer Sllenfc^ miigte ber

merben, ber
1.
!

fic^ entJcft(offc,J

immer

treu

511

fein

(3acobi.)

(176.)
3fie(f)te^

^ittft bu,
2.

(.)

mein o^n, frei bleiben, fo lerne voa^ SSer feine ^lage ^at, ber mad^t fid^ ttJeld&c
case.
:|:

* eltte Seben.

t geiiitive

332.3.

34G
(.^o^eBuc.)

EXERCISES.
3.

tt)trb

(^elb tjon tnir

borgett,

tuenn er

fetbft

^at (Seff.) 4. SSag fi^t S^r ^ier auf bent 5. 2Ba tDeint naffen teiti, 9J^utter Sami^ ? fragte ic^. (^e^.) i^r,SJlabc^eti? 223a flagt tr, SSeikr? (uer.) 6. e:iott, tt)a iftba.^%b fc^on! (ei).) t. SSa bie{e 9}Mbc^en loemerHd^
tretc^eg ju tierlei^en
tt)irb,

bad^te
1.

fie.

(grei.)

(178.)
(SJeftalt

S^aQalie

t)atte tierfc^iebene

S3(umen bon feltfamer

gebroc^en, bie SSil^elmen boKig unbefannc tDarett, unb

(.)
2. SDie

ttad^

beren Sf^amen er fragte.

^elbengro^e, mit ber

lie

fie

ftarben,
3.
9^i(f)t
!

na^m
an
((^.)

fiir

ben (S^IanOen

ein, fiir

meli^en
ha>

ftarben.

(@c^.)

bie (filter
4.

ange bein ^er^, bie

2ch^n

t)ergdnglic^

gieren

Tlan !annte ben geinb t)ott!ommen, bem man

bege^rt,

je^t gegeniiber ftanb. (Bdj.)

(179.)
(Sici^tnjer.)

1.

SSer aKgubiet

^at

o(te

oft

tierloren.

^ie 9}^enfcf)en finb nic^t immer, \va^ fie fc^einen, 3. SSa0 ic^ t)ermod)te, '^ab^ t(^ gem get^an. (.) 4. (Seff.) SBem fie erfd^eint, loirb au fic^ felbft entriicft. SSem fie ge^i3rte, tDarb 5n ^ofi) begliirft. {(>.) 5. Sa t)or oKen ^ingen bir er^ciljlen
2.
xva>
{?eff.)

in

^abt)lon
tiebe, n^er

fiir

einen fd^onen toff

t^nt.
i^d).)

icl^

bir gefouft.

6.

Sc^

mir @nteg

1.

SSer

fie

(bie

DZac^ric^t) ^orte,

f(^reibt ^Safari,

bem begann
bleic^ tDie ber

ber 53oben nnter

htn gii^en gu manfen, ber tmrbe

^ob.

(^. @r.)

8.

SSen ba
($!ogau.)

liic!
9.

ftiirjen benft,

ber mirb oft

erft t)on

i^m er^oben.
ber fennt

2Ser nie fein

^rob mit
!

3^f}rdnen a^
10. 9^un, licben
(l^eifeiri^.)

euc^ nic^t,

if)r

^immlifc^en Wd6^t^

(@.)

greunbe,
11.

luer ratten [raten] !ann, ber rat^e

[rate],

2Ba
nic^t

bem ^erjen
2^h^n feinen
t)iel

gefallt,

ha>

fnc^en bie 5(ngcn.

(@^r.)

12.

SSeffen

frent,

meffen IXmgang jeber fc^eut,

13.

ber

I)at

fro^e 3eit.

{^\>v.)

2Ser mir bringt bie Sfron^ er

. .

foil fie

tragen. (@c^.)

14.

3^

ber ^iittefte^t einel)nftul)(.

(^ei.)

ber bar:=

onf

fi^t,

ber

ift gtiicflic^.

15. !J)er

ift

ber err ber (^be,

ift

iDert^re ^tefe migt.

^aifer.
(^d^.)

(9?ot)ati8.)

16. SSer itn bc^a^It, ba^

ber

(?eanber.)

^a ftng er an ^u (anfen, ma er lanfen fonnte. 18. SSa i^rer aucl^ maxkn mag, nnb tro t^r fie trieber
11.

fe'^en roerbet, i^r

merbet

fie

in grieben n)ieberfe^en.

(^e^.)

19.

SSa

tc^

au(^ in biefem ^a'^re bertoren '^abc, meine (Selbftad^t^

nid^t Derloren.
[%xel)

ung ^abe t^
* 332.5a.

20. SlSev

bu an^

feift,*

idft

EXERCISES.
njiinfc^c

847
^efte,

^etturtg bir.

(@(^.)

21.

nja

bu miffen
ift

faimft, barfft

bu bem ^uben boc^

nic^t fagen.

(.)
(3.

22. ^Itteg

5u ertrageu,* \m> nur eiuen ^(ugenblicf bauert.

2)n SSenige, iua cr fprac^,
nugefto6en. (^c^.)
freubig macljt.
(U(}.)

^.

9ft.)

23.

murbe mlt einem

nic^t irbtfc^e

tDibrigen 3:on
tt)a

24. (S^ 25. (S

ift ift

mu\\l

mic^ \o

nur

ein, tDa

un retten fann.

(180.)
ic^

1.

ier

liegt

ntir

aufgeflart gu fein triiinf^te.f

quillt, tt)orau

etmaS auf bem ^erjen, iroriiOer (<S.) 2. SSer n)ei^ ii?orau ba

(9leim.)

^riinnlein
ftel;e i30u

W'xx trinfeu roerbeu.

3.

Sf^

bem

<a\an!enbette auf, auf ba micl^ ber (Sc^mer^ iiber

ben ^erluft meiue

bamit mirb er

Wanm^

marf.

(?e[f.^

4.

Somit

eiuer fiinbigt,
ift'g, \\)o^

gcftraft. (a|3u.)

5. ijod^mutl)

[^oc^mut]

burci bie (Sucjel fieleu,

(Cf).)

morau ber |)oHettgeift ben SJlenfc^en

ic^'

fagt.

(181.)
liebt ?

1.

SScirum bin
2.

adetu,

ber uucjeliebt, auf eUJtg

eib mir gegriiBt, befreuubete c^aaren, bie (@c^.) 3. S)u c^o, ^olbe mir 5ur 8ee 33et3leiter maren (Stimme biefe Zi)aU, bie oft mir "iJtutuiort gab auf meine Sieber, Qo^anna ge^t {<Bd).) 3. Uub ie felbft, ber ie hen Seiertag
(tlo^.)
! !

3^rem c()reibtifc^ gu Q^rem grof5en SScrfe ? (ei).)

an
(182.)
CSiu
9ieiter,

^eiligen pf(egeu,

luie

ftetjt

e mit

fo
2.

nur ein ^ferb

eilig
3.
ift

Ijat,

foK nid)t $afer

ne^men

fiir jniei.

(@pr.)

ha> (^efe^, fo

bem

Stiinftler

c^on^eit gebietet. (@d^.)

SSer ba tabelt, ber

fict)

fiit)It fic^

bem^
fc^t.

jenigen iiberlegen, gegen ben er

((Sberg.)

auf hen
(Sd)tt)elle,

9^icl)terftuf)l

4.

Sebe

mol)t,
(ei.)

bu

^eilige

too

ba n^anbelt

Siebc^en traut.

THEME

V.

INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

2. "What are 1. Who are the happy ? the industrious. the greatest virtues? Industry and modesty. 3. For what did you hold him ; who told you that he was a use-

less

man?

4.

Of what did he command you to speak?

t 832.80.

*84ain.l&.

348
5.

EXERCISES.

"What sweet tones wake

Whose eye watches over

feeling of freedom I had,
8.

the fates of

me from my slumber! 6. men ? 7. What a

of the crowd

when I came out

What kind of feelings did you have when they waked you ? 9. What kind of a man will this boy become, if he learns nothing right ? 10. What can he learn when he
has no books? 11. Why does he weep and complain? It he has no books I will give him some. 12. How stupid he is becoming he will never learn anything right. 13. The gentleman, after whose name you ask, is quite unknown to me. 14. All those whom I loved and with whom I have lived, h^e died. 15. The people among
;

whom I now live, are the children of those whom I knew formerly. 16. He who has lost his friends is unhappy and
lonely.
18.
is

17.

I love those

What I have bought for you I will give you. who love me. 19. I will tell you what it
it

and to

whom
am

belongs.
tell

20. Tell

beautiful things
seen, that I

you saw

in Babylon.

unable to

you.

22.

the bad news, he must advise me. 23. that does not please me. 24. He whom fortune has never

me what sort of 21. What I have He who brings me What he advises,

he will never be cast down. 25. He who has has lost everything, 26. Whatever me, I shall be contented. 27. Whomay pay emperor the ever may have come,* I wish to see him. 28. We have 29. He told us lost all that which made us hapi3y. nothing we did not know already. 30. There is only one thing which is not to be borne. 31. It is not my selfrespect which I have lost this year. 32. You will soon see the brook of which you have heard, and from which you can drink. 33. The arm-chair in which I was sitting stood beside the sick-bed in which the poor woman lay. 34. It was pride through which she sinned. 35. I, who have 36. lost my husband, have been sufficiently punished.
lifted up, lost his self-respect,

"WHiy

am

Happy man, who

832.5(1.

I punished, who am already so unhappy ? hast never yet lost a friend. 38.

37.

Was

EXEECISES.
it

349

who gave me the answer to my questions. 39. And you yourself, who have always lived in this valley, why do you now leave it ? 40. You I blame who seat yourself
you,

upon a judgment

seat.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VL
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS.
(185.)
1.

Man

I)atte if)n

getra^It, ot}ne

re^t ju

toiffen tr)o

man

tijat

{^. (3v.)

2.

2Sa

man, unb tva^ man meife, S)em 9^a(^ften mu man ^elfen. (Sd).) 4. einem nid)t lang gem ge()t man gemoljnte
;

man ni^t m\% t)a' eben brand)t fann man nic^t braucl^en. (.) 3.
(Sin lieOer

SSeg mirb

(Straj^en.

{Md.)
jeber
lebt

(186.)

1.

9^iemanb lebt
(Crtle^jp.)

fo,

iDte

er

modjte,

nur, mie er !ann.

grennb.

(@^r.)

3.

grennb ift 9Hemanbe ^erfc^toffener SJiunb unb offene ^ugen ^aben

2. 5((Ier SSett
(<Spr.)

noc^ Dliemanbem gefc^abet.

(188.)
1.

Sa, bann fommt

2.

^t\va^ ^effere, nod^ meit

fic^

(^one*

re!

(5luberfeu.)

9?i^t SSa^reg la^t

t)on
ift

ber Su^unft
Td6)t^. (epr.)
(Stelanb.)

miffen.* (ed).)
(189.)
1.
1.

3.

3Ser
lebte

S^Jic^tg
id)

au

fic^

mad)t,

0
^r
;

etlid^e

glnrf(icf)e
fic^

3af)re.
af(e

(190.)

(ber

(Solbat)

mu^
a
ift

nel)men,

man
ift

giebt if)m nid)t

unb jeglic^emf gegtDungen ju neljmen,

{<B6).)

er

jeglid^em ein reue(.

teil] fiir

2.

ber grofste ^ort^eil [^or=

bie

bie ^[Renfc^^eit,

ha^ jeber
id^

fiir

anberen alle

tl;ue.j

(@(^efer,)

(191.)

1.

^ann mu
2.

mein Seben
bringt,

laffen,

^amerab.

(U^.)

SSer

t)iete

iDirb

tc^ unb mand^er monc^em cttva^

bringen. (.)
1. 3n bunten SBilbern Ujenig ^ar^eit, t)iel Strt^itm (192.) [Qrrtum] unb ein Siinfc^en SSa^r^eit, fo mirb ber befte ^ran!

gebraut.

(.)

2.

^iete miinfc^t
3.

fic^

ber 9J?enfd), unb bo(^ be*

\\)m

barf er nur menig. (.)

bafiir t^un.
fc^ein.

Qd)

!i3nnte

rcd)t

biel

SSofe^

{B^.)

4.

SJ^e^rere neue Xox\^x

famen jum fQox^

1.)

*84ai.5d.

1 222.L3 and 857.

;3d3.3a

360
(193.)
(Sc^tDt)feer
1.

EXEECISES.
5tu aii ben fvcmbeu
fid)

(Sttimmen .
2.

finbcit

bic

3J?anner

()erau.
3.

(@d^.}

Qc^ cjrub'^ mit alien

all

\)tn

SSiirjIem nu.

(.)'

ie fuunten mir mit

4.

S^rem
(Corner.)

guten SSideii

nic()t Ijelfeit.

(^ei).)

5l(Ie

beugte
ficl^

jtrf)

Dor bent

^ilbe be (^elrenjicjten, unb and)

5. (^riifsen

S5eit iparf

nieber.
6.

ie

a((e, ipa

ie nnujiedt.
.^^onig.

(@c^.)
7.

inb ba ade
9^ac^t
ift

enre Stinber? fragte ber

getreten,
8.

{^vel)

^ie

ein^
(@.)

nnb

ein jeber tt)nnfd}t

jel^t

ficl^

5n eigener

D^lnfje

IM.

2Bir ntiiffen

alte filnf 3^^^^^

ir)oI(en.

umlernen,
(.)
ift,

tt^enn

W)\x nic^t

gan au ber ^J^obe fommen

(194-195.)
bidig.
(cf).)

1.

3Sa bent einen

recl)t

ift

bent

anberen
n)ir ein

2,
3.

^i bag ffen
JJrin!

fertig Wixh,

n)onen

trinfen.

(.)

an bent befrdn^ten
SSinter
5.
ift

^ecl^er.

@o

nod^

eing

(tteift.)

4.

er
(c^.)

ein biifterer (^aft,

unb enget
unb- !ann

einent bag er5.

3c^

arOeite

gar

nici^tg,

!eine fed^g S^i^^^ ()intereinanber fc^reiben.

(^ei.)

6.

SSenn

ic^

mix

felbft !ein

^eufet tndr'
((f|.)

(.)

1.

^ir

finb in !eine f(^Iec^ten

|)anbe gefatten.

THEME VL
INDEFINITE PEONOUNS AND NUMERALS.
2. 1. One lives as one can, not as one would like to. People do not always say what they think. 3. What we need, we never have. 4. They have chosen no one yet, but they must soon choose some one. 5. The good man will always help one, even when he is himself unhappy. 6. This man helps no one, he has injured every one.* 7. One does not need to say anything true, if one only 8. Each one takes what can say something interesting. he can for himself. 9. We have lost many a comrade and this day will again bring death to many a one. 10. They say much evil of the soldier, but the soldier needs little and little. 11. I haVe known several is contented with soldiers they were all good men. 12. Of all the pic;

* einen Sebeiu

EXERCISES.
tures I like only one.

351

13. Every one admires the pictures, understand them. 14. I buy every year a few15. All these old clothes have gone quite out of pictures. 16. I love this little village with all its old houses. style. 17. We have drank two glasses of beer already, but we will 19. The drink another. 18. I always drink another beer. one drinks too much, the other will not drink at all. 20. I have not written him a single line I am no friend of his.

but not

all

rLIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIL

FORMS OF DECLENSION.
(211.)
Derfc^ont.
1.

NUMBERS.

SSeber t)on SU^afern noc^ SSinbdlatterit

2.
sr)ie

Ukh

(.)
3.

9[)^iitter

erfd^tenen,

ben <SaugHng
bie

\^ im

^trme. (.)
!rac^t.

ret Zao, imb brei ^ad)t ^at

Sni fiibinbifc^en ^Irc^ipet ^at

^^ac^t ge^
14 ^funb.

mM.)
5.

4.

bie ^liit^e [^liite]

ber ^afflefia
(^um.)

faft brei

gug ^urc^meffeu unb

10,000
(. r.)
6.

tt)iegt iitier

3m

^Ipril ftub bie

mann

X^alatefta^g auf bie

$a(fte ^ufammengejc^moljen.
fiir

Qn

ber Wittt

UcM

bie

SBagen mir ber 0taum Uon

SDiefe

jmlilf bi t)ier5et)n c^ritten.

(.)

7.

^ame
Pert]

^at einen
berloreit.

Dfjrring Don
(^et).)

^^der

SSertf)

8.

imgefci^r 3,400 ^ie grofeeren Simgen

fleinen t)on 11 bi^

^atkn beim

9ie!tor

Don 10 bi
(toc^.)

11,

unb

tt)ir

12 Ufjr ^riijatftnnbe.

ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIIL

THE NOMINATIVE.
(212.)
fterben
!

1.

^D^aria (Stuart
2.

mirb

aB

eiue .^onigin

unb

^etbttr

ie jinb \)a> oc^fte, Uia 9[Rirf)eIangelo aU 3. (Seine 5(bfi(^t trar, ha^ S3i(b^auer gefc^affen ^at (^. r.) ^Ittejanbro, fein otju obcr 5^effe, ^erjog Uou glorenj iDiirbe.*
(@(^.)

(213.)
((^.)

Scf) '^ei^e
ift

ber reic^fte 5J?nnn in ber getauften SSelt.

2.

^arto

gejonnen, ber Ungliicffeligfte in biefer SSelt

* 8d3.3e.

852
gu 6Iet6en.
^<Sc^.)

EXERCISES.
{d^.)
3.

S^

WdijU,

tt)a

ha>

^cffere m\d)

biinft.

4.

ie
fei,

^att'* e nie t)on

i^m
ift

erfatjren,
5.

ha%

fie

eine Cf)riftm

geOoren

itnb feine Qiibin ?

6.

($?eff.)

9lic^t ein

iUnh bin

ic^

erfc^ienen. (@.)

^a Seben
cfiulb

!ein ^raurn, e
S^lenfc^en.

mirb mir 5um

7.

S^raume
5(c!erbau

burd^
ift

bte

be

(^eu(^terkben.)
(@c^.)

S)ein ^ater
ift

^um c^elm an mir

SD^enfc^,

getnorben.

8.

Qm

ber SDZenfd^ 511m 9D^enfc{)en geiDorben.

liicffeliger

(3JJaftno.)

(214.)

1.

ber ru^ig an ber eite be

t)on 33errat^er [^errciter].

Sreunbeg fd^Inmmert, o^ne 5l^nung (^en3el=@ternau.) 2. SSidfommen,

fliaet efa^rte ber 9^ad^t
!

filberner Sli^onb,

fc^bner,

[mop.)

THEME
1.

Vn.

NUMBEKS AND THE NOMINATIVE.

These blossoms 3. Malatesta left Florence with 10,000 men; in April he had only 5,000 men. 4 The street is only 30 paces broad and 3 miles long. 5. We remained in the wagon from 2 to 3 o'clock. 6. Elizabeth, queen of England and cousin off Mary Stuart, was her bitterest enemy. 7. Carlos, the son of the king of Spain, was a most unhappy prince. 8. The duke appears to be a great hero. 9. Michael Angelo was born a poor boy, but he became the most famous sculptor of Italy. 10. This man is called a Christian, but he will always remain a Jew. 11. He has become the betrayer of his friend. 12. Happy man, who has chosen the highest. 13. Beautiful, unhappy queen, thou didst die like a heroine
2.

The small-pox did not spare me.

are several feet long and weigh

many pounds.

and a

Christian.

ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES IX.

THE GENITIVE.
(216.)
SBoIfeg
1.

S^e
(.)

giirften
2.

^a|

liegt

am

ftc^erften

tn be0

anben.

SBet (^ott

unb 9J?enf^en

finb tjer^a^t

* 88a7.

t ee.4c

EXEBCISES.
be O(:^mutt)0 [^oc^mut^] 3etcf)cn. {md.) ift nid)t be aRenfdjen od [2o].
3.

353

^oUfommene^
4.

mM

(SSielanb.)

^ie

(Sc^rift ift
5.

bie jungere

@cl)tx)efter

ber pradjc. {S3en3et=@teruau.)

gel)ler
6.

in grower Zijdi [^eil] unferer

(9ftetn^arb.)

Id^t

ftc^
ift

tierbeffern

utib trteber gut madden.

l^oc^fteS ni(^t,

a Seben
ift

ber liter
(c^.)
1.

ber IXebet gri3^te aber

(.)

bie 6culb.

S)er SSorte finb genug getredjfelt.

8.

Seonarbo

er^iett

ben

^itet eineg 30ZaIer Reiner 5lKer-d3riftIi(^fteti a)kieftat. (.r.)

9.

5lnbrea bel arto* fe^Ite tuenig, urn

(^.

eiti

(^enie erften 9^ange 5U

l^eigen.

r.)

10.
(^r.)

9Zad)

^rieg unb ^ranb

!ommt

(S^otteg

(Segeti ing

Sanb.

11.

c^iiter ^u beffern.

((Sbers.)
ift

an bir, ba 3Ser! talenti^oHer 12. ie (Srfenntni^ [(!^r!enntni]

ift

be Srrt^unxg
(^rummac^er.)
(^rei.)

[Srrtum]

ber erfte c^ritt gur

SSa^rljeit.
rief fie.

13. SDa finb i^rer Uiete, gro^e

((Sber.)

nnb Heine,
15.

14. (S traren irer fieben.

Sieber ontt,
16.
SDie
(@c^.)

trie

barf unfer einer feinen

5(ngen

trauen?

(?eff.)

fd^onften 3::raume t)on greiljeit iDerben

im ^er!er getraumt.

li.

OTe

in ber SBelt Id^t

{(>.)

fid)

ertragen,

guten ^agen.
9[)^a}or.
(!Be[f.)

18.

D,

ha> ift ein

19. 9^un "^olt

mir eine

nur ni djt eine 'iRtiijt bon greunb bon unferm errn ^anne SBein. (^reiltgrotf).)
5e^n $funb olb. (@pr.)

20. ^effer ein Sotl) [Sot] grei^eit,

21. Qc^
fet^te nti(^

aU

ju ben ^auern unten in ber dienfftube nnb

22. ^a> tiic! ^ap^i^
(.)
ift

tran! ntein
eite breit
l^abe,

Ia ^ier. {^e^.) unb ^dlt 20 tten.

eine

23.

ic^ n).enig

lauben

muJ3 ic^ barauf fel)en, mid^ mit ein bigc^en guter 23:>er!e in 24. Qd| gebe jebem ben ^immel ^inein^ufc^minbeln.f (^etj.)
brei^ig OTer Sanbeg. {^d).) 25. Qd^ brac^tebie 3^*^}^^ -^^^^^ unb ^iereg ^erbor. (.) 26. 5lm gtDangigften )!tober fiel Tla\U x\d)t in bie dnbe ber (Spanier. ((Sberg.)
(217.)
1.

(t ftanb
2.

ba

trie ein

S3erbreder,

feine

SSorteg

mdc^tig.
ad)tet, fo

iei).)

SSenn Qtjr mid^ uere S5ertronen miirbig mi3get 3T}r mir mit (Surer efc^idjte t)ergeltcn. (^auff.)
ber Seffeln
frei.

3.

!I)ie

(Sbelfte bleibt nidjt

(cume.)

4.

Q^r
if;r

feib

unwiirbig be :^o^en enuffe ber (SItcrnfreube, bie (Sltem ftatt greube nur Qammer geboten. (3l(^oe.)
^ittenbe

ift

euren

fetneg

S8eiftanbe

Ijemig.

(Sbere.)

6.

5. Seber ^te ganje

dative case,

f 846.2.

354
SSeig^eit
[tt)ert].

EXEECISES.

bon jungen ^^^fen

T.

ift

feinen

("ipfeffel)

a
biete

fte^t

boit

fc^onen

^ag (Srfa^rung mcrt^ ^(umen bie ganje

(219.)

1.

2Bte

SO^enf^en !(agt

man

ber

^oS^elt an,
(3acob.)
2.

inbe

man

fie

nur ber nmm^eit anflagen

Sebeng
[Bd).)

follte.

SSeil i^r mtd^ meineg

f)abt geftc^ert, fo
3.

mH x6)
bie

end) bie

SSafjr^eit griinblic^ fagen.

(S(f)iilbigen

Q^r gmangt
(@(^.)

S^iitter,

ben !ann

be 5D^orbe to^jufpred^en.
(SclDur

9^idt

i^

feine

entbinben.

(5Sielanb.)

5.

$D^an

not^igte

[nbtigte] if)n, feine

Untert^anen aller

ifjrer ^^fUc^ten

^u enttaffen.

((c^.) 6. Seben 8ie recl^t \vo% freuen ie fic^ be 2eben unb S5re 3Ser!e. (@(^.) 7. (2cine anbmer! fott ficl^ !einer fd^amen. (@pr.) 8. d'g Tjabcn bie (^rofsen biefer SSelt firf) ber rbe be== mad^tigt. (.) 9. 2)er ^erjog !ann fid be (^ebrange^ !anm

enttebigen.
11.

(@d^.)

10.

(Sr freute fid^ feiner rafd^en

^at.

(@ber8.)

S<^ fd[}ame mid^ ber Unerfa^ren^eit nnb meiner Qugenb 12. ^arob erbarmt'S ben $irten be atten, ^o'^en nid^t. {.)
$errn.
13. (^ott erbarme fic^ beg Sanbe (U^.) ie bebiirfen in ber ^at ber '3iui)^. (^iubauj 15.
!

{8d^.)

14.

(Sin tugenb-

l^after 9[l^ann

benft nie be ^obe, er ben!t be Sebeng. d^M.)

feiner SSo^It^aten genie^en,

16.

^ie SBelt fonnte

(.)

nnb be

(S^eber^

tiergeffen ?

11. 2)ie ^ienfte ber (^rofsen finb gefci^rlid^

nnb
fie

lo^en
foften.
ift

ber Tln^t, be 3rt)ange, ber (Srniebrigung nid)t, bie

^

Wf.) 18. ^d^ meig, ba (Sie tm (Srnft fpred^en, unb bod^ 19. Sag e mir faft, aU* tDoIIten ie meiner fpotten. (@ptel.)
((^.)

mid^ ber neuen grei^eit geniegen.

20.

@eben! ber Slrmen

nid^t

gu ieber

grift.
bet>

(Slaubiug.)
frif d^en

21.
Suft.

(Sr

ad^tete

ber

tt)armen

onne nnb

(Hnberjon.)

22.

d'g

fd^ont

ber
23.

^rieg and^ nid^t

ha>

jarte ^inblein in ber SStege. (c^,)

SDe 50?orgeng ben! an beinen @ott. (@^r.)

(220.)
1.

^dC)

r)abe biefer

Stage hen

omer

jnr

anb

ge-

nommen. ((^.) 2. Seiber itieig ic^ nod^ nid^t, ob id^ $0?ontagg !ommen !ann. ((^.) 3. ^er ^rin^ atte eine ^age mit feinem
(Sefolge bie (^allerie
befnd^t.
(.^auff.)

4.

gtat)io ftiirte l^inein

in fc^anber^after eftatt, bermorreneg aupte, jerfel^ten ^lei*

be.
(.)

6.

(Sr tpili eilenben

gngeg

boriiber fUe^en. (@c^.3

6.

* 433.6.

EXEECISES.
S3ei bent

355

^farr^ofepffegteber err {ebemat anju^atten, fo oft er 1. Seic^ten ^au\> ift ber 9^ul)m nid)t beg SSegeg fu^r. (grei.)
(C^erbev.)

gu '^aben.

8.

ie^e

tDte

fc^mebenben c^tDungg im
9.

Zan^t
ift

bie ^atire jic^ bre^en.

{Bd).)

^eine ^Irbeiten
10.

finb meljr
C'lifaOet^

eineg ^ilbl)auer, al eine ^olbfc^miebg. (@.)

meine (Stammer, meineg ^efd)led^t unb 9^ange. (@c^.) S(^ ijaht il)n au^gefd^Iagen, unb nun ift meine 33(etben
nic^t Idnger.
(et).)

11.
t)ier

mnt\)^ [mui^],
ab^ufc^reiben.
(5SoB.)

12.

Wtt^zv ^at gefd^rieben unb

ift

rec^t guteg

13.

Sm

erften 5lugenblic!

mx er SSilteng
SBif^ofg.

(ei).)

14.

ie tranfen be
fie

foftlic^en

15. ebrauc^t ber 3eit,

flie^t fo

f^nell t)on ^innen.

C@d^.)

IT.

16. in fleifeiger ^ann ftirbt niemalg unger. {(taubiu6.) Seib guten mni^ Put^], fprad^ ber rei, 3^r tt)erbet

18. SSir t^un, 'wa> unfer mc^t biefeg Sager fterben. (@ru6e.) 19. 5)iefe au ift nteine errn, 5tmte. gort ntit i^nt (@c^.)
!

be ^aifer.
!^eufef.

((c^.)

(pr.)

(^Iiicf(i(^en,

bent

S^nge unb bofe D^ren finb be buarbS merb' ic^ nie. (.) 22. D be e tjergonnt ift, eine Suft mit eud ju at^men
20. ^ofe 21.
!

[atmen]

(d).)

23. ^f"t be ^ofemid^t^

(Berber.)

THEME VnX
THE GENITIVE.
2. Joy and prince's life lies in the hand of God. are the companions of mankind through life. 3. sorrow Each one of our faults is hateful. 4. Pride is the greatest of faults. 5. The name of the greatest painter of Italy was

1.

The

Leonardo. 6. He was a painter of the first rank. the country of painters and of sculptors. is
greatest part of his
of these paintings

7.

Italy

work
is

is* in Paris.

9.

The The description

8.

very interesting to me.

10.

There

are only a few of them in of my children are also

my my

country.
friends.

11.
12.

The friends The young

man's dreams were dreams of freedom and of happiness. 13. He drank several glasses of beer and ate two pounds of meat as he sat in the bar-room. 14 Get me a bit of
befinbet

ft^

356
bread.

EXERCISES.

15. Each one had twenty acres of good land. 16. The first of February he went to Berlin. 17. He was unworthy of freedom. 18. We are weary of this man's stories. 19. The best man never remains free from faults. 20. Every young fool is sure of his own wisdom. 21. He 22. I rejoice is my enemy, for he robbed me of hope. in his friendship and love. 23. Why did you release him from his work. 24. They accused him of murder, but the prince has secured him his life. 25. The duke gained possession of his confidence and then forced him to tell him all. 26. He is not ashamed of his deeds. 27. The duke took pity on his youth and inexperience. 28. He needed his kindnesses, for he was poor and ill. 29. You can never quietly enjoy your good fortune, unless you remember the poor and wretched. 30. He heeded not the words of his parents, and mocked at their love. 31. Our happi-

ness in this world does not reward (us) the trouble which it costs. 32. The young man rejoices in life and thinks

not of death, but death does not spare even the youngest. 33. In summer we can travel, but in winter we must stay at home. 34 We went one day to see the old man, but we did not find him. 35. With fresh courage he went on his way. 36. Our friends are not all of the same age with us. 37. Your words are more an enemy's than a friend's. 38. This lady is of high rank and noble race. 39. They were of good courage when we went away. 41. 40. I do not believe that they will die of hunger. 42. Alas for the Alas for the friends whom I have lost happy days which are now past.*
!

rLLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES X.
THE DATIVE.
(222.)
1.

^en

etgnen

^(aukn
foEtft

rauben

attetn au(^

rauben

foUft bu btr ntd^t laffen bu feinem fetnen ^taubeii.

toorbel.

EXEECISES.

357

md.)
bcr
raubte.

2.

^onigitt opljie e;5ar(otte ^aljlte 3t ^a^x^,

il)rem fonigli^en
3.

aU

fie

Xoh 1705
(^ofer.)

^em
^er
anb.

ema^(, i^rem eingtgen (Bo^n grlebli(f)en getra^rt man gem ben

reic^t feft,
5.

grieben. (@(^.)
rur)ig ber

4.

red^te ^elbenfinn
(53euset=@ternau.)

!u^n unb

^efa^r

bie

er

gute ^ontg

telnet

bent SSetfen gern

fein

D^r.
1.

(^linger.)

6.

Qc^ tnoUte t^r

(^e^

ben ^ogcl njieberbringen.

(ei).)

SSenn bn
t)ergeben.
fie

ha> tijnft, fo n^trb

(?eanber.)

ott beinem SJlanne feine iinben fang nnb Siebe in fc^onem herein,
^ugenbfc^ein.
(@(t).)

8.

er^Iten bem Seben htn

fic^

9.

^iBer
fic^

miberfe^t

bem ^efe^I be
(.)

^ogteg ?
bigften]

(@c^.)

10.
gefjt

SSer

bem

^otljtnenbigften [DZottnen^

inibmet,
bir jeben

am

fid)erften

jnm
menn

S'l^U.

11.

^n

fannft
12.

geinb
Ipft

t)erfo()nen
t)iel

nnb

terbinben.

(Sifci^enung.)

^lanbe nur, bn

getf^an,

bir (S^ebnlb

tno^neft an. (.)

13. Qd^ fjabe mir' oft t)orgenommen,

14.

il)r

bn ge= ^erj
nii^t

^n reinigen.
treten,

(@d)tege(.)

Saft bir eine .^(einig!eit nic^t ndt)er

ift.

aU

fie

tnert^ [mert]

Wf.)
(.)

15.

bn ber SSelt
(platen.)

fannft entfagen, erobere

foil

fie

bir mit

(^etualt.

16. (Sr

mir

nid^t lebenbig gel)en.

11. 2)iefe gaftfreien

50Mnner

'fatten

alg er

bem jnngen SO^anne erianbt, immer toollte. (auff.) 18.

(^auff.)

i^re ^itber fo oft ^u befnc^en,

Scf)

entlie^ ben

grennb nnb

banfte i[;m.

19. 5ltte ^^onige

(:^uropa T^ulbigten

bem
inirb
fiir

fpanifc^en Seamen. {@(^.)

ha>

20. Qc^ folge gern

bem

eblen ^eifpiet,
tt)i(l,

ber jiingere giebt. (@(^.)

21. 2Ber 5l((en gefallen

(@(i^e(Itng.)

ben 33effcrn immer miftfallcn.

bie D^atnr gleidjt ber

22. Unfer
fiir

(^^efiil)!

(Smpfinbnng be .^ranfen
I)ilft

bie (^efnnb^eit.
((Sngel.)

im.)

23. !J)a die!

benen, bie

fid) felbft I)elfen.

24. ^d) (jordje Uergebeiig iljrer

gnfstritt.
(33o^.)

25. ^f^

fef}e

timme nnb i()rem fommenben bem ^obe rn!)ig, ober ijielme'^r

(Sietatib.)

mit ftitlem

^erlangen entgcgen.
I)oI)en 5(bel

26. $DZid)eIangeIo

gamitie ge^iirte bem

S^Jur

ber tabt nid)t an. (^. @r.) 21.

bnrd) bie bnnfle ^forte

(^oltt).)

geljt

man

ber eimat() [eimatj

5n.

28. 28er

bem en!er

entlcinft, entlauft

barnm bem

3:enfel nod^ nid^t.

{<Bpx.)

29. SSertran

bem gnten

eift and^ in

ber fd^Ied^ten tnnbe. {md.)

and)

30. (Sine innere S^^ot^menbigfeit

[^Zotmenbigfeit] treibt nn, in attem nad) SSa^rl^eit 5n ftreben,

menu

fie

unferen S^eignngen nnb ^iinfc^en entgegenfte^t.

358
(Sielanb.)

EXERCISES.
31. SBeld^ grci^li^em (Sntf^tuffe gibft

bu

^aum ?

{.)

32. Qd^

m)e Q^nen

ubvigeng nic^t

S^iebe

ju

fte^eit,

fonbern ie

mir.

(Sinterfelb.)

33.

ie

28a^rl)eit

()at

ijon

je^er

nur ben
ift

c^urfen \v^^ get^an.

O^laten.)

34

i)e

Seben ungentifi^te
35. SSer
ein
(Berber.)

greube Waxh feinem Qrbifc^en u

3:^ei(.

((^.)

^ruber mir ? SDer

36.

in ber 92ot[) [9^otJ

mir gn ilfe fommt.

rofeen teinen ge^t jeberman au bemSBege.

38.

(ippet.)

SI.

IXnfer fc^neKeg (^Uic! I)at

(@t^.)
tt)irb

un bem a6 ber SQ^enfc^en

b(ogeftettt.

9^o(^ geftern fiinbigt'

f old^e grei^eit

man
!

ben ^ob euc^ an, unb ^eute

39.

enc plo^Ud)

{@ci^.)

^em

^ater

grau^^

fet', er reitet

gefc^minb. (.)

40. (^nten erge^t e

am

(nbe bod^

gut.

(@(^.)

41. (S 5iemt
(.)

bem

eblen Tlann, ber grauen SSort

p ad^ten.
Wxx
(Corner.)
(@d).)

42. SSie ge^t e bir benn ? SSie ge^t e benn

beinem $errn ^ater unb beiner gran SO^utter? (?canber.) 43. ift'g, al t)orte t(^ bie Sinben tior bem genfter raufc^en.
44. SSie tvaxh mir, 45.

aU
tt)ie

ic^

in

^er

eine fprad^,
getobt,
(et).)

n)e iDirb

Qnnere ber ^irc^e trat mir! (^ei.) 46. 3(^

leben,

T^abe

mir im tiden unb meinem ^inbe.

SSunbe.
(9^ot)oU.)

nur meinen (Srinnerungen gu

gtan^en, mie

47. (Sin r)eilenb S^raut mad^ft jeber

48.

em SSerbrec^er
(@.)

bem

^eften,

ber 9J^onb unb bie onne.

49. (^aftfreunblid^ tout

(^olbertin.)

bem
50.

SSanberer im frieblid^en ^orfe bie ^benbgtocfe.

51. 3:^ranen ftanben

9^un aber !amen bem ^apfte gang anbere ^inge 5U O^ren.

(^. i'.)

bem

atten

Tlanm

in

'i)tn

5tugen,

oB

er mit ^eftigen, bro^nenben c^ritten bie (^allerie t)erlieg.

52.

(^auff.)

5Im 24ften gebruar ujurbe bem ^aifer

(^. r.)

bie

^rone auf'
tt)ie

aupt

gefe^t.

53.

(Seine

gii^e

trugen i^n

ein

n)atee ^ferb, bem ber S^leiter ben Qng^ti iiber ben at ge^dngt ^at i^etj.) 54. ^ie 9teife nac^ 9^om hot je^t bie elegen^eit, bem neuen errn au bem SSege 5U ge^en. (^. @r.) 55. Seic^t 56. ie miffen nid^t, mie t)otl mir (@defer.) fet bir ha> er5 ba er5 ift. (^et).) 5t. (Sr ftort mid^, n)ei( id^ i^m bie 5Ingft 58. ^d^ jiiubete if)m fein Sid^t an, unb fteltte e anfetje. (tod^.)
!

auf ben ^ifd^.

tt)ie

(^etj.)

59.

ei mir gegrugt, bu

ett)ige SD^eer

(Sprad^e ber eimat^ [cimat] raufd^t mir bein SSaffer.

60. (S fod
(@d^.)

(et.)

im

S^ieic^e !eine

frembe ^ac^t mir SSurjet

faffen.

EXEBCISES.
(223.)
2.
1.

359
eete fremb.
((^.)

SSerfteKung
ift

ift

ber

offenett

SSa[)r^cit

ber eele notr)lt)enbig

[notmenbig].

(^e[f.)

3.

!5)em iua()ren SSeltaieijen

(aJZeubel^siol)!!.)

mu^

ber

Zoh niemal

fc^recfUc^ fetn.

bent

4. ^ie of(i(^!eit tuar bent blen, bent ^iirger tpie ^auer gemein. (.) 5. ^f}euer [teuer] ift mir ber greunb,

boc^ au6)
itidjt

ben geinb fann

;

id^

nii^en.
ift

(@(^.)

6.

(Sein er5

ift

bent ^ol!e geneigt

fo ^oih ?
(.)
1.

trarunt

al(e SSett bent

(^rafen (Sgntad)t
ift

mont
mir
bie
ift

SSa i^n eu(^ inibrig

8.

tnac^t,

i^
bod)

mertl) [mert].

(@d).)

2)ent ntiiben
9.

SSanber^mann
10. 5lber
ift itic^t

S^ac^t

n)it(!ommen.

(9?ucf.)

er
(!i?e[f.)

tpeltregierenben SKadjt

!ein eingtger SD^ann unerfe^Iid^.

ba^

tc^

mit

ber 3ett i^nt imentbe^rlid^ gen)orben bin,

11.

menig.

(^e^.)

Penned) njurben bent

(?5rei.)

Sf^eifenben bie 9}?eilen be SSegeg ju

lang.

12. (S tDarb
(.)

mir fc^mer, mid^ Don bem SSeibe

nid)t

Io=s

umac]^en.

13.

Unfer errgott !ann'g

alien

red^t
nieb:=

mac^en. (@pr.)

14. SSie fid^ ber Sut^ enblic^

umfa^ in ber
tt)ie

rigen SDJanfarbe, marb'g it)m fd^mill unb fnrd^tbar,

in einer

3:obten!ammer [^otenfammer.]
(225.)
(@d^.)
\j!flot]

(^e^.)

15. (Sinen
(^eij.)

^on an

ber

^e^te 5U bringen, mar mir nnmoglic^.

1.

5(c^,

mir ^nm glud^e mirb mein Sle^en

meinen
9[Ritbitrgern
er
biefe

er'^ort!

2.

Sr)iefer

Untftanb, meldfjer bie SO^einigen in gro^e 9^ot^

berfe^te,

[^orteil].

geriet^ jebod^
3.

mix

gur Suft fi^uf

gum ^ort^eit (S^egenb gum

^arabiefe. (@(^.)
((S^atis.)

5.

4. offnung ift Sabfal bem mnnbeften erjen. 3c^ bin ein Wiener bem ebot be altergro^ten
6.

Wanm^.

(@d^tegel.)

^er

loniglidje

(Sinnefjmer blieb
(grei.)
!

bem

SDoctor ber liebfte

utibefannten,
t)ertaffene,

unb

bertrautefte

Umgang.

1.

ei( htn

^ot)eren 3Sefen, bie mir a^nen

(.)

8. 3Sef) bir,

armes

(Sd^iff!

2Se^

alten ^affagieren.

(run.)

9.

an!

biefen

freunblid^

griinen
(@d^.)

^ciumen,

bie

meineg ^er!er

Tlamxn mir

berfteden

THEME
1.

IX.

THE DATIVE.
Death lias robbed the king of all his children. 2. forgave him and gave him his hand. 3. This youth has devoted himself to the service of God. 4. He op-

He

'

360

EXEKCISES.

posed himself to the commands of the king, and now the king has undertaken to punish him. 5. He who reconciles his enemy to himself has done much. 6. I shall conquer the world for myself, or I shall give it up entirely. 7. He who opposes my commands shall not go from me alive. 8. He thanked me because I allowed him to see the pictures. 9. In vain does one help those who do not help themselves. 10. Nothing pleases him, and none can help him. 11. I wish to be like this noble man, and I will follow his example. 12. One cannot run away from death. 13. Trust not to others, but help yourself. 14. America belonged formerly to the Spanish kings. 15. He came to your help, and now you trust him no longer. 16. Health has never been my portion. 17. It does not beseem a noble man to explain himself to such a scamp. 18. I feel as if I were* in a church. 20. How glad I 19. How is she ? was when I heard of her happiness 21. Tears stood in his eyes as he fell upon my neck. 22. The emperor's head was cut off. 23. We hung a beautiful necklace around the young girl's neck. 24. Quite other things have come to my ears. 25. My heart is too full, I cannot speak. 26. She lighted the old man's lamp and set it on
!

the table for him. 27. This man is quite strange to me. 28. To the true philosopher no one is indispensable, although his friends are dear to him. 29. Politeness is necessary for the nobleman as for the peasant. 30. The way was too long for the weary wanderer, and it was hard for him to reach the village. 31. It was impossible for him to get away from the boy. 32. I was not inclined to him, but with time he has become dear to me. 33. It was

hard for him to see about in the low mansard. 34. For thy honor I have done it. 35. The need of his fellowcitizens became an advantage for him. 36. Alas for me,
poor, weary wanderer
!

37.

Thanks

to

my

friends,

who

even in danger remained true to me.

* See 332.

EXEKCISES.

861
XI.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES
THE ACCUSATIVE.
(227.) 1.
oft()ur.
3.

@r

t^at eintge frdftige c^Idge

2.

an
4.

bte

feftgefugtc
(@c^.)
5tef)et

(et).)

ie luoKten mic^ auc^

9[fiartertob.

attetn fpred^en.

St

ftirbt

ben tangen

(Sietanb.)

Unb

fo

^inaug, t^r ^iingtinge, imb fcimpfet einen guten ^antpf nut gnten
SSaffen.
(@(f).) (et).)

5.

^fjrcinen

filler

eljnfnc^t mirft bu tneinen,

(^ererf)ten.

6.

(Er f^ldft
nocf)

ben (^laf be

(@pr.)
8.

t.

3a,

bu fonneft
(^ott,
(^leift.)

ben rant au ber (Seele mir.

(9lu(!.)

(Sr^ebet

ifjr

ar^eere!

^rauft fein Sob!

S^r

giii^e,
^u,

rauf^et e
fat)

9.

ie

ntcfte
(^et).)

i^m
10.

fii^I

einen

ru^
frci^t

unb

mieber
n)ad.

bon i^m meg.

(9^u(!.)

(Sin
nttd^

a^n

ben 9[Rorgen

11.

^^

mdfjnte
bic^ felbft,

berlaffen t)on

atler SSelt (6d^.)

f(^t(tft

12.

^u

fd^iltft

menu bu

bein ^inb

ungejogen.

(9lucf.)

13. (Sr rief mit tecl^jenber 3i^9e*

14.
(Sie

^ater, mic^ biirftet!

fie

(^\op.)

fontmt Don i^rem ^faffen, er fprac^

15.

aHer
fetten

(Siinben

frei.

(.)

en

SSotf

getiiftete

nac^

bem

16. Wif^ trunbert, ha'^ ic^ babei nid}t nod trdger ^iffen. (.) unb eitler gemorben bin. (^eij.) 1*7. biinft i^n, aU lag er tm gieber. (.) 18. 2)iefer ^ag biinfte i^m ber glorrei^fte 19. (Sag an, mein ^flitter niertf) [niertj, tt)er feineS Seben. (.) 20. leic^mo^I beto^te ^at bic^ folc^e treic^e gelefjrt? (Uf).) ^eter biefen 99^ann, ttjeil er i^n eine ^unft lefjrte, metcf}e x^m 21. ie fonnen benfen, n>tc t)iet ^ergniigen ma(f)te. ((Sngclien.) i(^ iiberrafc^t tdax, aU er mir eine altlid^e SDame t)orfteEte, unb
fie feine

ema^Hn
fflnijc
(aJJaftug.)

nannte.

(^aiiff.)

22.

Wan

nennt htn torc,

tnegen feiner

^ogeln.

unb ^efonnent)eit, ben $t)i(ofopen unter hen 23. Tlan ^ie i^n nur ben tapferen 2Ba{tt)ar,
DfJ^ein.
(^feffel.)

bort liegt fein

^ut am

24.

SSd^renb

biefer

grd^Iid^en SSocl^e ^orte er nid^t auf,

[^errdterj ^u fc^elten.
((Sbers.)

fid) fetbft

einen ^errdtf)er

25. (Sin (Sfel fdjimpft ben anberen

einen Sangor)ren.
ber
ftc^

(@^r.)

26. ^einen 9^eimer mirb

^iette. (.)

man

finben,

nid^t

ben beften

21.

9[^ad^e nid^t frf)nell

jemanben beinen Sreunb. (S:raubiu.) 28. (Sr iuar ^um (^arbinat gemad^t tt)orbentm Qa^re 20. (^. r.) 29. ^ud) hen Item ift
bie Qtxt rafd^ jur

6aae gemorben.

(grct.)

30 (Sd^ergenb erfldrte

S62
er x^n
fiir

EXERCISES.
fetnen ^efangenen,
fiir

unb bertangte al Sofegetb ha

(3x.)

S8erfpre(^en, ein 33ilb

il)n

gu malen. (^.

31. ^\)x \)aU

32.

mi(^

ftet

al eine geinbtn

nur

betrac^tet. (@c^.)

SSa^Ie

nid^t bie glie^enbe

jum greunb,

nid^t bie

^letbenbe 5um geinb.

5be

(229.)

1.

^a

ic^

hen 3ftoman log

2.

bitt,

fo

ii^ tDieber

gu
ift

taufenb attbern ^ingen Suft. (.)

feinen

(Sin laufenber

geittb

6c^u^ $ult)er luert^ [inert], (^ip^el.) 3. SDie SDurc^^ marfd^e ber granjofen mar man jmar getnoljnt. ((S.) 4. ^er $IRann fonnte in einer SSiertelftunbe ^uxM fein ^ant njar e gufrieben. (@^iet.) 5. 5nfo traten fie neOeneinanber in bo (Stiibd)en nnb
;

blieben beibe ben (^rn^ fd)ulbig."

i^ct}.)

6.

ttt)a iRaufd^ l^alt

(^rei.)

trarm, unb ba ^ier ftnb iDir einmal getno^nt

(230.)
1.

Qn

biefer

ganjen
(."pei?.)

Qtit
2.

berlie^
blieb ben

bie

^od^ter
ftill

fie

nid^t einen einjigen 3;:ag.

feierlidf).
(^^rei.)

ie

^benb

nnb

3.

^jat fie

mir

nidt nteineg S5ater Siebe fd^on

gefoftet? {^d}.)
gefoftet \)aitt,
foftete

4.

biele

trome ^lut

ben SBarbaren

emige ^onigreid^e in (Suropa gn griinben, fo biel e je^t iren d^riftlid^en 9^adf)!ommen, einige tabte in
jn erobem. (@^.)
offnete,
5.

(Sl)rien

Qd^

fa^,

ba er ein paar
i^ttf.)

Mai
6.

bie

Sippen S^nen.

unb bann bod^

er, id^
1.

tt)ieber fd^tDieg.

Siebe
ntit

^arlotte, fagte
{^tt}.)

tange ^eute feinen

(Srf)ritt,

atg

ie fc^erjen mutljig [mutig] :3l)re (jin, bi \>a^ ein lenb fommt, bann gittern Sie ben fReft ber ^age. (Smmerman.) 8. ^a^re lang, S^^i^^i^^^^i^^^ ^^^Q> ^^<^9 ^^^ SJ^umie
bauern.
(@c^.)
9.

nur Qa^re

SSeifet

bu

no(^,

tnie

tt)ir

einmal eine (Stunbe

(^eij.)

lang iiber ben

^a>

a^

ftritten,

ber mir fo fe^r gefiel?

gefragt, inomit
fie fid^

10.

ungliidflicfie

SSeib

marb
frii^.

bie t)ier

iiber genci^rt I)abe.

(umb.)

11. 'Sie reifen bie S^ac^t

(^e^.)

^age burd, unb

ftieg
id)

fommen

fd^on SJiorgen
(gbert.)

12.

^en ^ergpfab

fteil l^inauf.

13.

ging

mit unfid^eren,

langfamen

(Sd^ritten

ben SSeg ^inab.

(^ei).)

14. 9}Junter fci^rt ber

gro^e
$aufe

ba^ 2ehtn ^inunter. {Zkd.)

\>a>

15.

err

(5kaf, e

!ommt

ein

obere 3:%l ^inab.

^riege.
t)on

(U^.)
(^etj.)

16. ^>
IT.

wax

tt)enige S'l'^i^e ^^^^

^^^

franjofifd^en
ft)urbe bie

(Sine

l^atbe

tunbe
18. S5on

barauf

^pr
id^

au^en

geoffnet.

(SBinterfelb.)
ttjeiter.

os
(^leid^

lar

ging

ben

anberen SD^orgen

(-^e^.)

19.

EXERCISES.
barauf trat hex ^ontg
in ber

S63

ein, tm ut auf bent aupte, ben tod anb, offenbar nic^t in gutet Sanne. (^rei.) 20. tide offmmg im eficl^t, fa^ er ha attein. (>Sc^.) 21. in 5D^ann fte^t oben, Iran! unb blag, bie aare milb, bag 5Inge nag. (Sbert.)

22. Qc^ eile fort

bor mir ben

^ag nnb

I)inter

mir

bie S^ai^t,

ben immet

iiber

mir nnb nnter mir

bie SSetten.

(.)

23.

^anm
24.
(SSo.)

bie 5ingen au^gerieben, ^inber, tangtneilt i^r eucl^ fc^on. [&.)

2)iefe gefagt, entblogte ber reblic^e

^ater

bie c^eitel.
ift

25. SDiefeg nun. auf ben Sao!oon angemenbet, fo

!Iar.
(2eff.)

bie Urfac^e

THEME X.
THE ACCUSATIVE.
I wish to speak to thee; come with me. 2. Why do bitter tears ? Did he not die the death of the righteous ? 3. I dreamed myself happy and gay; but when I awoke, I found myself deserted and alone. 4. Why does he scold the boy as rude ? He is a very good boy. 5. He was hungry, but he had nothing to eat. 6. Methought I was lying* sick. 7. Who taught you this art ? 8. This old philosopher has taught me much, which gives me pleasure. 9. They call her the most beautiful of women, but she seems to me idle and vain. 10. Why did he choose me for his friend if he did not trust me ? 11. Now he reviles me as a betrayer, but I am nevertheless 12. I still regard him as my friend, but true to him. he has declared me his enemy. 13. War made me his prisoner, but he always regarded me as a friend. 14. Now that we are rid of the war, we shall have time for other things. 15. They are accustomed to beer-drinkingf and smoking, but we are tired of it. J 16. If he has read my novel, I am contented. 17. He remained here only a quarter of an hour. 18. It cost the Christians streams of blood to conquer a few small cities in Syria. 19. The visit
1.

yon weep such

cost

me

a whole day, but I shall visit her a couple of times

833.3.

t840.

l^aBencefatt

364

EXEBCISES.

more. 20. Slie was silent a moment, then she said: I will not go a step, if you do not go along. 21. Thirty years did the war last. 22. I climbed up the mountain and remained an hour up there.* 23. They asked me where I had remained over the hour. 24. A few moments after I saw the man coming down the valley. 25. The next evening I went away and on the seventh day I arrived at Goslar. 27. On the moun26. Hat in hand, he awaited the king. tain stands the old, deserted house, the doors and windows shut, the rooms empty, everything cold and sad.

XLLUSTRATiVJ!!

SENTENCES XIL

MODAL
(253.)
2.
(S^ott

AUXILIAEIES.
ntc^t.
(SBterattb.)

1.

^ic 2:ugenb barf beg 9iu^me

gebe mlr nur jeben

3. !J)arf

^ag

fo

t)iel

ic^

barf

^um

Seben.

(dlaubiug.)
(.)

eine folc^e

93^enf(^enftimme

f)ier

ertbnen?

4.

tDxe fie
((Sbergj

fic^ aucl^

ie ge^orten ju ber fetnereu %xt (t)on pielleuten), Dor giirftetx unb (^rafeu pren laffen burften.

ntc^t

5. Qd) moc^te gern reifen, aber ic^ barf in biefem 3af)re an 9^eifen ben!en. (.) 6. 2)er (3ianb' ift etntg, irbifc^ ift
fie

bie
1.

gorm;

blirfen

mx

derbeffern, [a,

mv

foKen'.

(9Jaupac^.)
fcitlt

^n

einer fot(f)en ^afc^e barf fcf)on ein Soc^ fein, e

8.

nic^t

]^erau. (^ebel.)

^er
9.

(Sd^luiegerbater biirfte
ift

i^m

nic^t iuieber

bor 5(ugen.

{.)

^eine SD^etnung

gefd^rlic^,

fobalb ein

jeber bie feinige frei fagen barf. (3ocobi.)

fo

10.

(S biirfte

Wo^l

fommen,
fein

tt)ie

\^ gebad^t ^abe.
((SJ.)

(..)

11.

biirfte nid^t fcl^mer

fein,
tt)ie

ha^ nac^5un)eifen.

12.

(r

erjafjtte

]i^ ef^id^ten,

grennb SSerner i^n

1.

itberrafc^en !onnte,

ha^

Waxmm
(.)

bielCeic^t erfc^einen biirfte.

(.)

(264.)
2.

$8eradtnng
icf)

1)ah^

ic^

nie

ertragen

fonnen.

Siebe granci^fa,
[^e\\.)

^abe

bi(^ nocl^

nii^t njillfommen l^eigen

fonnen.

3.

(Sin treuer "^atf)

[^at],
4.

ein
!5)er

triiftenb

SSort,
alt,

fann mand^e ^f)rdne trorfnen.

(^ranj.)

Wlann Wax

unb fa^ ju
bort obcn.

e^rnjiirbtg au, al

ha^

man

btefen 5lubrud^

beS

EXEECISES.
efu"^t
^cittc

365
(^auff.)
(?eff.)

ISd^ertid^ ftnben fonnen.

ic^

5,

S5et

metuer

armen eele,
(266.)
1.

!ann' bergeffeu

I)aberi.

^'cin
2.

geben.

(33.)

^e

bem <Sd)mert fief) 4. (Sin e^r^ e immer iDtffen, ba^ id) nic^tS meljr Ijabe. Wf.) ticker StRann mag fterfen in it)etdem Slteib er mU, man mu^ i^n lieben. (?eff.) 5. SSo^I mag e eud) beangftigen, ic^ glaub'g, t)Dr
eurem
9^idter ^u

mag Seben bem ^obten tDteber^ grau e ^inbern mod)te, ftie^ er mit 3. Si)ie Seute mogen burc^ unb buret). (Sietaub.)
(Sacrament
bie

erfd)einen.

(@c^.)

tjerjagen

unb
8.

bie feften cutoff er

('Sc^.)

mag, o^ne ^lut.

fein. {.)
(?e[f.)

7.

(Sr
ic^

6. ^ie ^ogte troKen mir bre^en boc^, n^enn e fein moc^te au einem guten aufe
;

3^^^^ ^eijj

t)iel,

bod) mod^t'
tva>

id)

alle tniffen.
(.)

9.

3n

biefer ^^uuft mbc^t'

ic^

ic^

profitiren.

10.

5(uf bie

^erge mod^t'
11.

flicgen, mocl^te

fe()'n

ein griineg ^^at.

(^atler^Ieben.)

j[)em ^abe id) bitter tlnred)t get^an in

meinem

mir bergei^en! (^ouff.) 12. Qd^ tuiinfd^e in gar Dielen 3fiiidfi(^ten, ha^ S^r SSatlenftein balb fertig merben moge. (.) 13. 5((le gro^en ebaube t)erfallen mit ber Qeit, fie
^ergen, ^ott
e

mag

mbgen mit ^unft ober o'^ne ^unft gebaut fein. {2c\l) 14. !5;)arum mag, ma mid unb !ann, gefd^e^en. (.) 15. ^eine ^^orr)eit,
tt)ie

unfc^ulbig

fie

auc^ fein mag, faun einen gteibrief gegen ben

(Sielanb.)
id^

pott berlangen.
(256.)
Sf^itt
1
.

eut' milffen (Sie mir geftatten, ha'^ auc^

(^rei.)

ben

mitmad)e.

2.

SSiber SSiHen mugte

3.

id^ ftet)en bleiben,

unb
folib

i^r nad)ftarren.

(.Corner.)

unb

maffit) fein.
^4^rin
5.

red^tgtaubiger
fteigen.
ttJar

{Bd}.)

(S

^n feinem aufe mu^te alle in fpanifd^er ,^onig mugte ein fein, ober er mu^te bon biefem ^^rone mu^te nid^t tiieteg barin fte^en, benn fie
(@.) 4.
(^rei.)

im 5lugenblide

p (Snbe.

6.

let^te

^atte

Tlon^

bragon auf ,^efe^t be er5og t)on ^Itba erbauen miiffen. (@c^.) t. ^i je^t mu^t' icf), ber rbprinj (Spanien^, in (Spanien ein grember fein. (@ci^.) 8. ^d) mufs Iad)en, menu id) an hen ^on
ber Unfe^Ibarfeit benfe, mit
(267.)
2.
1.

bem
^at

er fprad).

(Sietanb.)

^er

partner

beftod^en

n:)erben

fotlen.
3.
SS)ie

(@d^.)

SSer

ha>

9le^te !ann, ber

foil e mollen. (.)

lt)ie

^or=

traitmaler fotten nid^t blo barftellen,

faffen,

fie

einen SD^enfc^en
4.

fonbern Vok jeber

i^

faffen miirbe.

(.)

^a^

einfad^

366

EXERCISES.
5.

(Sd^one foil ber* tenner fcl^a^en. (.)

tlnb !am^ bte

^bUt

fclber in bie c^ranfen, ntir foil ber SD^utt)

[$D^utJ ntc^t tDeic^en

unb

nicl^t tt)an!ett.

(@(^.)

6.

Qc^ gtng
1.

iljn

gu befui^en,
id^

ireil ic^

l^offte,

er folle ntir^elfen. (@.)

nicl^t

SDanfenb pret^
id^

metneg

otte (^nabe, ber

liegen foUte,

getuoUt,

ha^

tt)te iljr jeljt

gu meinen.
atte

(@c^.)

eueren SiiB^it fo 8. (S^ fte^t in ben

f ollen.

ternen gefd^rieben, ha^ Wix

(^e^.)

^eibe nid^t fi|en bleiben

9.

(Sin

glorreid^er

bereitet merben. ((Sberg.)

(Smpfang foEte bent jnngen ieger 10. S)a Wax e, tt)o icf) bie gro^e (Snt=

bedung nia^te,
f ottte.

bie fiirmein gane

1
.

Sebenber^angni^Dott trerben
mit egen nennen,
12.

(^e^.)

(Soil einft bie S^ad^melt bid^

S^^itluelt

mngt bu ben glnd^ ber

gu tDerben.
tard^,
tct)

tragen fonnen. OJoupad^.)

SDie (f)axlottt ^aih, ^or' i^, fott n)ir!lic^ in (S^efa^r fein, blinb
(@c^.)

13. (g
bert)eifen,

ftammt au bem Dlac^Ia^ be $tu^

fann e

unb e f oK

ein efcC)en! be ^aifer^

Trajan fein. ((Sberg.) 14. ^er ^apfere flreitet fiir ha^ dtt6:)t, fiir ha^ ^eje^, fiir (^ott, unb f ottte e fein auf Sebenunb (Sterben.
(Sofobg.)

(258.)
ift.

1.

Wan mu
SSitt

nid^t reid^er fd^einen tt)oIten,

al

man

(eeff.)

2.

man

einen ^egriff bon ber ^^unft motto'

fo

unb

feiner d^iiter l^aben,

{^. r.) 3.

mu| man
4.

ha^ (l^ampofanto bon

fie bitten,

^ifa betreten.

^(i) felbft

moUte
tt)o

mir einigc
fid^

9[^inuten ju fd^enfen.

(^rei.)

$8iele

be^aupten,

baf? fie

nad^ 9[^ontmartre 5uriidEge5ogen ^abe,

man

fie

nod^

im

Sa'^re

It 60 gefe^en ^aben
fiir SDienfte,

tuill.

(3fc^o!.)

bie ber SSirtl)

6.

5. ^Iber \va> finb benn ha^ unferem errn 3)?aJDr tviU ertniefen

l^aben ?

($?ef|.)

(Sr blieb n)ieber einige 5lugenblidfe fte^^en,

(^rei.)

tok

einer ber einfd^Iafcn mill,

1.

riffeft

mid^ bon ber

(.)
2.

^er^meiflung lo, bie mir bie 8inne fd^on jerftoren mollte.

(259.)
1.

meit ge^t niemanb,

fro!)
;

ber nid^t mug. (@c^.)

nid^t

golge il)m millig unb

(C)erbcr.)

millft

bu

folgen,

bu mugt.

3.
gel^ft

Qeber mill

gem

4.

^u

nun

fort;
ic^

o einrid,

mitt

nidt)t

in Sodt),

mitt
6.

mid^ berftedfen.
fannft

(gret.)

5ft.) nur biirfte. {% x^ mit! (@.) 5. Qd^ fort unb bi uf) fort !ann, fottft bu S5ormart muf5t bu, benn riicfmart

leben, fattg er

fount'

bu

je^t nid^t me^r.

(d^.)

1.

Wtxn $ferb
8.

fc^eute,

mie

td^

5um @d^(ogtor l^erein itiottte.

(.)

SBo

fott td^ l^in

? Qd^ faun

EXERCISES.
\>odj mcE)t betteltt

367
SHwd) bcr atte (^lauBeng*

ge^en.

(?eanber.)

9.

fafe, bag ebeti* feliger fei, aU ^Mjmtn, tPoEte mtr nte in htn 10. (Sie fann nidjt burcf) unb mag nic^t guriic!. {@c^.) ^opf. (et).) 12. 2Sa 11. 2Ba foil ntir ha^? SSo^u fott bag alTeg ? ((S.)

fonnte
(|)e^.)

fie

aud^ bafiir, baf?

id)

nidjt auc^ ber 9J?utter ai)nlicr) fa^.

13.

^a

:^atte er

gar nid}t gefonnt, aud^ njenn er gemoKt

f

l^atte.

(?aube.)

14.

^d) !ann bie (Srsie^er nid^t loben, bie

oId)C

(S^egenftanbe nid)t Dor i()reu 5lugeu tiertjeimlic^ten.

Um

S3cr5ei5^

ung
(.)

tt)ie

fatten

fie \)a^

15. 92id)t beinen

foKen ? unb trie l)dtten fie e gefonnt ? 5Irm btog trill id), and) bein ^uge. (@t^.y
einen $Iat^ in

16. SSolten
n)oIIen ie,
l^abe

ie
tt)ie

tt)ieber

meinem

(S:Dntoir,
(^ret.)

ober

e ben 5Infc^ein ^at, noc^ mel)r?

11, ^s^

bie 9}?enfc^en nie tierftanben

bie eine 5Irt (SI)re

barein fe^en, gu fagen

nid^t
!

imb noc^ tDeniger beneibet, : magft bu mi^ ttid)t,

mag

id^ bid^

au^

(e^.)

THEME XL
MODAL
1.

AUXTLIAHIES.

May

like to see the players,

one is "Who dares try to improve the laws ? 5. It may be as you 6. I have never been say, but it will be hard to prove it. 7. "Who could think such an outbreak able to advise him. of feeling laughable ? 8. I may possibly have seen him already. 9. He may be rich, but he is not an honorable man. 10. I should like to appear soon before my judge, but, if it may be, not alone. 11. I should like to do him no wrong, but I do not want to see him. 12. I do not demandf to see the queen, however beautiful she may be. 13. The French have driven out their emperor, may God forgive them for it 14. To-day I must read your Wallenstein, J whether it be finished or not finished. 15. I was obliged to allow
!

these players aj^pear before you ? 2, I should but I must not think of it. 3. No allowed to tell his opinion freely to the king. 4.

840.

barnac^; 346.2.

A play by Schiller.

368

EXEKCISES.
to read

him

my new

book.
alone.

16.

We

too, or to stay at

home

17.

had to take the ride I could not help weep-

ing when I saw the poor Spanish prince. 18. He cannot have been an orthodox prince, for he was obliged to descend from the throne. 19. This painter had to paint his 20. Everything in his portrait on command of the king. house ought to have been massive and solid, for he was very rich. 21. He ought to love the right, but he does 22. This portrait painter shall paint me a portrait fiot. of my wife. 23. Every rich man ought to cherish art and to help artists. 24. I was to have visited you, but I could not. 25. How am I to make a great discovery? 26. If I am to paint his portrait, he must visit me every
day.
28. 27. The young The gardener is

victor

is,

I hear, in great danger.

29. If

said to have been bribed.

I am to believe his story, he must prove it. 30. I must have the Plutarch, even if it should be very dear. 31. I do not wish to appear richer than I am. 32. We wanted to help her, but we did not want to give her money. 33. She claims to have eaten nothing to-day. 34. The landlord claims to have given her something, but we cannot believe what he says. 35. We must help her, even if she should deceive us. 36. I was on the point of giving her something when you came. 37. We gave her something, for we had to. 38. You may go with him, but I may not (go) too. 40. I cannot (go) 39. What am I (to do) here ? back and I am not allowed (to go) forward. 41. I should like (to go) into the house, but we must (go) away. 42. If you like tho horse, I will give it to you. 43. I should like to praise your teacher, but I cannot. 44. I dare not (go) away, although I want to. 45. I do not like him and he does not like me. 46. Do you know English ? 47. I do not know it and I do not like it.

EXEECISES.

S6&

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES
THE PASSIVE
(279.)
1.

XHX
imb

VOICE.

Sf^ingg

urn in

i^er

tuurbe gemeitit, gefungen

nic^tg t)on attebem.

gebetet, aljer 5lntinou \a^

2.

unb ^orte

((Sber.)

(Sine SSelt fi^mtngt

fi(^

in etrigen ^reifen urn bie anberen.

ge^offt.

5(uf jeber
(^od^.)

mirb gefcimpft iinb gerungen unb geliebt unb

SSo

3.

mx

erfd^ienen
4.

nocl^

aufget^n.
(^. r,)

{B^.)
5.

unb pocfjten an, luarb nic^t gegriifet ^i gum le^ten ^lut^tropfen n)irb
beina^e
tobt
[tot]

gefcimpft.

Qn

Seipgig tear (^d

gefc^Iagen tnorben.

(rube.)

(^iIeben etnem 1. ^(m 10. 9hit)em()er 1483 n^arb (280.) ormen ^ergmanne an Sntf)er ein o^ntein geboren, ba am (@rube.) folgenben 3:age getauft unb 9Jiartinu genannt luurbe.
2.

Hub

tt)ie

bie fittlic^en, fo luaren

bem ^oI!e
id)

and) bie geiftigen

3.

gortjc^ritte

auf

bie) em

SScge Derfagt.

(ermnu,)

Unb

fo

raarb mir ha> SSerfprec^en

abgenommen, ha^

nac^

9l)tain fot*

gen
fiir

fottte.

(.)
ift

4.

.^cilt

er bie 9[)Zebai((e

fiir ci^nlid^,

bie Arbeit

gut, fo

tjielleicl^t

ber

Pal^
^ier

fiir

SSittig

gefunben unb ber

($?en)alb.)

^unftfc^ule
(281.)

unb bem jungen Tlanm

gebient.

1.

Wan
2.

^cilt

micf)

gefangen, toiber attc SSolfer*

re^te. (@(^.)

gur
id^

tobt [tot] X)oh

man

mid) auf.

(@.)

3.

(.)

flingelte, bie 3^f)iir offnete fic^, bie ^ertr)anbtfd)aft erfc^ien. (^rei.)

4,
5.

(So iDeit

mar

geftern
frol)

gefommen, al
ha>

man

mic^ abrief.

ier giinbete

fid)

fd^one Sid^t ber SBiffenfd^aft, be

fid) leic^t

freien j[)en!en an. (.)

toffeln.

6.

5lu tiefeln mac^en

^an^^

(282.)

1.

3d^ iDerbe eben gum SRittag^effen gerufen.

t)on
3.

{@d^.)

2.

gerrara marb, mit 9fiom unb mit glorenj,

t)iel

meinem ^ater
fii'^r' id^

gepriefen.

(.)

^nrc^

eine l^intere ^forte

end),

bie
4.

nur

burci)

einen

Wann

tiert^eibigt

[tierteibigt]
ift

njirb.

(@^.)

Seonarbo'g

(SJemcitbe

im aale be ^a(afte
erinnerte
fic^

nie boHenbet

iDorben. {^. r.)

5. Dttilie

jebeg SSorte^, n)a ge*

ic^

fproc^en marb. (.)

6.

Wx^t

e^er benf
ift,

biefe

^att ju
ben odf|*

brauc^en, bi eine '^f)ai get^an

bie untt)ibcrfter)Iid)
7.

berrat^ [^oc^uerrat]

bejeugt.

{^^.)

SDie

^ud)bructer!unft

370
ttjar

EXERCISES.

fd^on iiber ^unbert ^a^re erfunben; beffenungead^tet erfi^ieti ^uc^ nod^ al em eiltgeg. (@.) 8. SDer ^rief tft ja er* l&rod^en S)a !ann mo^I fein. (S?e[f,)
ein
1

THEME
1.

Xn
VOICE.

THE PASSIVE
2.

When I was in Europe there was fighting in France. Wherever we appeared there was singing and dancing. 3. On the 12th of August the Pope was found dead in his bed. 4. Luther is called the greatest son of Germany. 6. The right of preaching* was denied him by the Pope, and he was called an enemy of God. 6. If he goes to Leipzig he will be killed. 7. He was told that there was fighting in Leipzig, but he would go. 8. A place was found for Wittig in the art school, and he was helped f 9. The place was given him because his work was considered good. 10. The door opened and I was called away. 11. This medal was given my father by the artist, and it has been much praised. 12. The painting was begun by Leonardo, but it was never finished by him. 13. Science and free thought were denied to the people. 14. He was led through a back door into the hall of the palace. 15. The letter had been found in his hands, but it had not been broken open. 16. The painting had been finished before Leonardo went to Rome. 17. When the child was
.

baptized, the relations appeared.

ILLUSTRATIVE SEKTENOES XIV.

REFLEXIVES.
1. ine ber anberen alfo berl^etrat^eten [*ra* aHe i^re Sugenbfreunbinnen. {^et}.] 2. (S ftredft fid^ eine kite bt m^ ^inttuerp. (@d^.) 3. 2)od^ toie Derge^t ft^

(286-87.)

m^

teten] ftd^

* 845.

babur(i^ ge^olfeiu

EXERCISES.

371

^rant unb (Se^nen; id) \mu}k mic^, an btc^ u fd^reiden. ((Sottj^eb.) 4. @ ^nben bie ^rogen biefer SSelt fid) ber (Srbe be^
mac^tigt.
(@rf).)

(288.)
(.)

1.

X^onnt'*
ttjitt

ic^

boc^ in beinem

^^au gefunb
traumen.

tnic^

hattnl
3.

2.

Qf^

mid)

frci

unb

gliidlic^

{<B6).)

^a
4.

mitt id^ mid^ mieber gefunb

ober

t)ottig

rafenb gaffen. (.)

5.

DZiemanb fc^Inmmert
6.

ftc^

fromm.

(@^r.)
fid)

^e onntag^
fc^on.
7.

in

ber 9[Rorgenftunbe mie rtianbert'^

am D^^ein fo
immer
($?e[f.)

{aRiilter.)

S3on eurer ga^rt fe^rt'^

fi(^ nic^t,

fid) nic^t

it)ieber. (@cf|.)

giemt

ba

ic^

bcin (^ulbner bin.

niic^

(289.)
2.

1.

^(^ erinnere

mit grenben meiner ^ngenb. (j

ttjnnberte fid) aucl^ iiber

hm

Sauf ber
eriebt.

SSelt,

benn er ^atte
3.

bie

ganje franjbfifc^e

9f^et)oIution

{^xtl)

Qd^

f)aht

mic^ iibcr gernon)'^ 5tufef)en mirffid) erfc^roden, fo t)eraltet er^

fd)ien er mir.
{Bd}.)
5.

4.

^ein (Sf)renmann mirb

red^te c^iiler lernt

fid)

ber c^mac^

bequemen.
^6)
tvxii

(@d).)

er

au bem ^e!ann=

ten ha^ Unbefannte entmideln,

6.

unb na^ert

fid)

bem

^Zeifter.

(@.)

mid^nic^t ber 9k(^enfc^aft entjie^en; bie

ic^ t)erlDerfe.

9fiid)ter finb

e nur, bie
(290.)

{Bd).)

1.

innger Slater n)iinfc^t fid) ai^aufe.

9[)tenfd)en

(@pr.) 2.

^c^
3.

^aht mir biefen

fe^t,

^um

^iele gemac^t, ^ah^ mir

r)ab' id)
if)n

t)orge=s

i^n nid^t auf5ugeben, alfo

fid^

gerni^.

(@(^.)

28ag

ber ^ett getraut, ha^ fonntet

Q^r

nic^t

magen ?

{B^,)

ILLUSTRATIVE SEnSTTENCES XV.

IMPEESONALS.
(292.)
leer
!

1.

lt)ie ift

e tali gcn)orben,
!

unb

fo traurtg, ob^

unb

regnet (^ott fegnet bie rbe, bie fo burftig ift. ((Snslin.) 3. ^er SSinb ge'^t fait unb mic^ froftelt burd^ ben ^elj. (^rei.) 4. Wit ben 3fif)^^e^i Q^^^H ^^ ^^^' ^^^
{^aUtx^khtn.)
2.

^anbe

dottig u Ibfen.
(@(f|.)

(um.)
einrid^,
fie

5.

$D^ir

o^nt ein ungliidffeliger

t)or

51ugenblicf.

6.

mir grant

bir!
8.

(.)

1.

^o^nen f
* 831.2.

fie

un, eg reuet

morgen.

(Sielanb.)

^id)

hixnlt,

t332.1d. 324.4.

372
icl^

EXEECISES.
tuet^
a\i>

metd^en gefjieru uufeve ^ugenb feimt.

(35oB.)

($!eff.)

9.

^ief baiiert mid^ euer.

eineti fotd^en

10.

(Sie finb ungerec^t, ttienn

ie

^erbacl)t au^fpredjen,
11.

unb mir 5iemt

e
eigeutiid)

nic^t,

in ^u

ertragen.

(^^ret.)

^ud)

braucl)te

immer ^wti
12.

SKeufcl^en, eiiien, ber'g jd^e,

unb

eiiien, ber'g befc^rieOe.* (.)

3e^t

treibt e mic^ unmiberfte^Iic^ in ^i)xc 9Jde,

unb

id)

mu^

S^nen
(@d^.)

fagen,

tDte

biefen Sl^bnigen

13. W\v i)at 'oon ey in mir au^fie^t. (^rei.) unb (^(ac^ten unb Sl^riege^t^aten nur getrdumt.

14. 5ll er mieber in bag e(Ie trat, gidnjte e feud)t in

(^ret.)
(^iicf.)

feinen 5tugen.

15.
16.

em

9}liiffiggdnger
fo

fel)!!

eg ftetg an

8eit sunt ^f)un.

SSenn e Hopft,
9}?art()e,

!ann eg ein @Idu=

!

biger jein. (@berg.)

It.

orc^,

braufjen po(^t eg
{.)

(eibl.;

18. (Sinen fiirc^terlic^en JftMeg giOt eg.

gibt eg ber braDen SDtdnner genug.

19. 5(u(^

im Sager
21.

(^d^.)

20.

5([ier

einen f(^o^

neren (engft) faun eg nidjt geben,

SOfJir

rief ber

^rinj.

(@ber.)

tt)ar
ift,

eg rnft niit meiner eligfeit. (@c^.)

getliftet

22.

2Bem ju
23. 9^un

tDoI}!

ben

immer nac^ ncuen ^ingen.

mir
tvax,
(^e^.)

(3. ^r.)

tv\x]i

bu begreifen,

n)ie

aU
ic^

ic^

nac^ Saf)ren ber ^renift

nung

if)n guerft mieberfa!^.

24.

Wix

5U SOZut^e
fremb.

[3[I^ute],

begann ber doctor, alg mdre

r)ier nicl^t

(grei.)
!

25.
(^et.)

Wix
26. 21.

ift,

atg oO

id) bie

SSie tvaxh mir,

dnbe auf g aupt bir legen foUt' alg ic^ in'g ^nnere ber ^iri^e trat
28.

(c^.)

5Iug (S^oburg mirb gefc^rieben, ha^ bie granjofen in tnenig

einriiden merben. (@(^.)
iiberalt ancT^

^agen barin
in ^enebig

cnn gcmalt

tt)urbe
(^. r.)

tt)ie

im

fitnf5el)nten 3ar)rr)unbert.

29. SSir bebattiren

tt)irb

[==tieren] iiber

ben ^egriff beg D^ec^teg nnh ha

juraeilen orbentlic^ berniinftig gefprDd)en. (@d).) 30. Wtvi\]t*

((^(^.)

eg fo rafc^ gel^orc^t fein?

(294-95.)
nic^tg fagen.

1.

(^g

Idfet

fid)

im injelnen
ein
S^^iefe

iiber

bie

c^rift

(@d^.)

2.

^g mu^te
tvax ber
4.

anberer 3Seg

gefunben

merben. (^. r.)

lid^

3.

otiatf) ein ganj gefd^r-

SO^ann.
5.

(Staiibiug.)

r)at if)n

nie in bie

grembe gejogen.

foU mic^ trunbern, mag biefeg ^u(^ eigentlid^ ent^alten mirb. [^06).) 6. g furd^te f bie (Spotter t)a> Wltn^
(33of)tau,)

(5g

fd^engef c^te^t

332.5(2.

t331.c

EXEECISES.

373

THEME Xm.
REFLEXIVES AND IMPEESONALS,
1.

She did not dare to take that way.

2.

The en-

emy have gained possession of the whole city. 3. This man has worked himself dead tired. 4. The poor old woman dreams herself young and beautiful again. 5. Do you remember the morning hour when we wandered
together by the Rhine
?

6.

We

were wondering about

your journey.
his friendly

He drew near to me, and I rejoiced in words. 8. He was really frightened at the
7.

news, for ho remembers the French Eevolution, and he fears to experience another. 9. I do not trust myself to write to him. 10. I wish for myself no better judge than he is. 11. When we went out it was raining, and later it snowed. 12. It became cold and he was chilly. 13. I am horrorstruck at his treason, but I am deeply sorry for him. 14. You will regret having spoken out such a suspicion. 15. It is not suitable for me to describe it to you. 16. You have certainly not seen that; you have dreamed it. 17. I pity the poor king, but I pity more his unhappy
l^eople.

There is need of several good men in the camp, always a lack of soldiers. 19. There was knocking, and Martha went to the door. 20. How she felt when she saw him again 21. She felt as if he were not a stranger to her. 22. There are many who debate over the idea of right, but there are few who understand it. 23. There was no one who spoke sensibly about it. 24. In the church there was singing and praying, and I felt as if I must sing
18.
is

for there

too.

26. It delights

27.

was told him that he must obey quickly, me to hear what he says about the writing. I wonder what is written from France.
25.

It

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVL PERSON AND NUMBER.

(321.)
Stebe.
1.

SSir oben unb

2.

tfir

unten fotteu ein0 fein tn bcr

(5rre0

^a^

tarn e0 mix nun ^elfen, ^a^ bu unb

374

EXEKCISES.

mein SSater emft greunbe ttjaren ? (?eff.) 3. ^rin ^arto unb i(^ begegnen biefett TOttag itn tm SBorgemad^ ber ^onigtn. (d^.) 4. 2)er ha unb i(^, tDtr ftnb au (Sger. (@(^.) 5. D bu, ber bie ^tmmet fd^uf (Mop.) 6. ^u, ber auf ben SSoIfen t^ront in
!

ber ^1a6)t

(5lrnbt.)

t.

SStr anberen, ble \vh t)on ber ^efettfd^aft

SSciret i^r auii)

Qb^ngen,

mliffen

bei un, bie i^r

un nac^ ir bilben. (.) 8. mic^ feme liebt: o fo bauten mir

fomo^I at ber ^erjog jeigten
2.
3.

^ier )iitten ber

greunbfci^aft un. (Mop.)

(322.)

1.

(Sr

fi(^

milbe nnb
$eftig=
4.

5ugangli(^. (^. @r.)

t>or
!eit
9Zoc]^

(in

arfner mit feiner ^oc^ter gingen

Siebe bto^, au(^

mir

^er.

(.)

D^ic^t

3orn unb
5.

trdgt eine bunfle

^inbe bor ben 5Iugen.

gefpart.

(O^tenfd^Iager.)

tanb, nod^

filter tt)irb

(SBielanb.)

efa^r

unb $rei unb aud^ ber fRu^m fei mein. (.) 6. (Sd^on^eit, 9^eid^tl)um [Dteid^tum], f)r' unb dJladjt finft mit ber B^it in t. ^aneben tvo^nt bie fromme ^ilgerfd^aar. obe D^ac^t. (33o.) 8. ^arauf fam be 3Sege eine d^riftenfc^aar, bie auc^ (.) 9. guriicfgebtieben mar. (U^.) (Sin ^rupp SKdnner ftanb am
renftein.
fe^t.

{$vtl)
11.

10.

(Sine

5ln5a5I (Solbaten fatten

fid

ge=

(.)

3c

griff

fogleicb nad^
fic^

bent ^eutel, in melc^em

eine
l^alb
(geff.)

gute

9[^enge

((S^olbftiicfe)

befanben.

(.)

12.

in

unbert
13.

foId)er

^emerfungen madden einen

ein

^^^ilologen.
14.

^a fommen
Sflid^ter.

$aar au
15.

ber ^iidje. (@(^.)

^a

finb meine

(^c^.)

maren nur ^unbert

17

3:^aler,

fagte ber ^tlte.

{^xtl}

16.

^a, ha^ tnaren bie 5(ugen,

bie treuen,

flaren ^ugen, bie er t)or()er gefe^en. (@piel.)

SO^ajeftat

(Sure foniglid^e

finb

au^er

(Suer (Sjceffen^ ^aben

18. fic^, unb fc^einen tief bemegt. (@(f|.) 3^re ^ienerfd^aft iiberrafc^t. (.) 19. ^er
bie le^ten 9^adte tt)enig gefc^tafen,

gerr ^ebodma^tigte l^aben

fagte

^art

(^ret.)

THEME
He and
2.
I,

XIV.

PEESON AND NUMBER.

1.

I will help you, for

we were
all,

friends of your
3,

father.

who am

poorest of

cannot help you.

EXERCISES.

375

Charitable man, thou who helpest every one, help me also. You and the prince are to * meet me to-morrow in the ante-chamber of the queen. 5. The Duke and Prince Charles went into the hall first; my father and I followed them. 6. The king and queen met us and showed them7. Beauty, riches, and friendselves kind and gracious.
4.

ship have deserted me, but my self-respect I have not lost. 8. A troop of pilgrims met us on the way. 9. A crowd of

men had remained

themselves.
10.

behind, and a pair of them had seated couple of gold pieces were found in 11. There were a number of the bag after he had gone. gold pieces in the bag when I gave it to him. 12. Those were the thalers which the old woman gave me.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVIL TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.

(324.)
1.
.

fag baran.
fid^

^a Staffer raufc^t^ \>a> SSoffer f^moU, etn gifd^er Unb tt)ie er fi^t, imb mie er laufc^t, t^eilt [teilt]
.
.

bie

S^ut^ [glut] empor

SSeiO IjerDor.

au> bent betregten SSaffer raufd^t

2.

em

feuc^teg

(.)

5(B

ii^

^ai)n mir mac^e

burcl^g

etrii^I, ha tritt ein bxaim'

mic^ in 5(uge fc^arf unb fpridjt.

^o^emeriDeib mtc^ an, fagt (@d^.) 3. te trauernbe er^

{%xtl)

mania
4.

fragt feit Sa^ren,

liebe ^^thha felt
(^te(.)

Qc^

wami fo(( bie red^te Qt'it fommen. ^mx Qa^ren, feitbem fie juerft
icl^

in

fennen lernte.
ren

5.

ie fennen mic^ bort

(^^ret.)

feit

Uielen Sal)ift fie

aU

einen reblic^en ^iirger.

6.

9}Zorgen

meine
id^
fie

gran unb iibermorgen ge^e \^ mit i^r fort. {$?e[f.) 1. 5lbcr ge^e ^erum, fie aufjufuc^^en, unb fomme mieber, fobatb ic^
finbe.
(.)
8.

(Sct)tog

erfteigeu U^ir
SflMr

in biefer
bie

9lac()t,

ber

d^liiffet bin id)

bic^

mad)tig.

ermorben
9.

filter,

reifjen

au beincr Slammer.

{@(^.)

33erlag bic^ barauf, fagte

er, ic^

fomme
1.

eud) nac^.

(^etj.)

(325.)

Unb

alg

i^ traurig

burrf) bie (Sale ging,

ha fa^

id^

^erjog anfen in einem ^xttx

*iotten.

tx)einenb fte^n.f {(^.)

2. (Seit

t 343.1.5,

376
o(^t

EXEECISES.

^agen unb langer fel^tte e ntir fotDo'^t an Suft unb Sonne an ^efunb^eit jn meinen ^efcf)aften. (@d^.) 3. S)er gmeitc (Sto(f be ^orber^anfeg mar feit Dielen Sci^t:en nnbeltjo^t. 4. SSa er f^un tDottte an biefem ^age, ftanb jeit SD^ona^ f^ret.)
al

ten

tt)ie

eine nnabanbertic^e S^of^ttjenbigfeit [9^ottt)enbig!eit] t)or

5.

feiner eete. (^eij.)

^er

giii^ft

nac^^er berfc^affte mir in bret

6.

^agen,
felbft

it)a tc^

gn SSien in brei^ig nid^t eriangte. (@c^.)

tva> id^

(Sr

bertraute mir,

gmar

langft anf

anberem 2Beg fd^on

in (Srfa^rnng brac^te. ('Sd^.)

(326.)
2.

1.

(r

^ie

Hcicfje

fommt ntir nic^t juriic!, tnie er gegangen. {^dj.) gran au ber grembe ift in bcr Slac^t geflorben.
id)

(^rei.)

3. SSag ic^ tjermoc^te, ^ah' ^aben ^ingemorfne SSorte tnid^

gent

getf)an.

(Bdj.)

4.
feft

bele^rt,

ba^
5.

feine

eete

ber SSnnfdfj crgriffen ^at, bid) gn befi^en. (.)

Derftrid^en, e^e

inige $D^onate
6.

an 9}labrib eine Stntmort !am. (@c^.)

^ift bu
(6d^.)
(^au[f.)

nid^t
1. 8.

me'^r HJJinifter?
fie

S^

bin' gen)efen, n)ie bn

13

fie^ft.

Qd^ ^abe

gefannt, in Valencia,

or ^manjig ^a^i^en.

Tlit fiinf (^efeHen

(@Ber8.)
1.

mar

er an^ge^ogen,

mit gmeien fe^rte er

jnriic!.

(327.)

SSa ber 5Ib|d)eu ber gan^en nieberldnbifd^en S^a^

^citte,

tion nid^t bermoi^t

Slbely gelungen.

inar bent geringfd^ci^igen 33etragen beg

2.

(c^.)

.3ii^

Sc|miebe ging
(U^.)

ein junger $elb,

er '^atte ein gtite (Sd)tt)ert befteKt.

(328.)

1.

Qc^ bringe bie le^ten SSorte meiner grennbin, bie

lefen trerben. (@.)
nid^t
2.

ie

ni(i)t oljne ^f^ii^rnng

r mirb
($?eff.)

anf mid^
3.

flnd^en,

menn

id

mirb
SJJan

tt)of;(

(^elb

i^m ha> ^ucl) im Coffer fein,

balb bringe.
bie

(
4.

bacl)ten
5lrt

Sentc.

(!i?eanber.)

mirb nngefd^r anf eben bie

5.

berfa^ren

fein.

(Stn!el^

ntann.)

^^x

(Sc^reiben fod 5ng(eid ntein ^ebitit) fein, mit

id

bem mer
nnb
ben.

id

mid^ einfteHe, fobalb

e er^alten.* (.)

6.

28er imT.

finftere SJ^iene mad^t, ^at balb bie

ift

(^nnft berloren. (.)

liefer gebrnar
idf)

alfo ^^ingegangen,

o^ne ie gn mir ^n bringen,

!)abe,

((S(^.)

8.

ermartenb nnb ^offenb, balb ben SSinter iiberftan^ Unb menn eg (bag llnterne:^men) glitcft, fo ift eB
9.

ijergeben.

{B^,)

SSenn

id&

geftorben

bin,

finbet

er

htn

*439.a

EXEKCISES.
(Sd^tiiffet

377
10.
ftc^

in ntelner SKeftentafc^e.

(^ret.)

graulein, er (ber
nic^t balb
bift

SBrief)

ift

unfe^Ibar jerriffen,
(?e[f.)

tt)enn btc^

ie

anber

erflaren.

11.

^enn bu

aufric^teft,

bu mit ein

paar d^ritten

bort. (^. r.)

THEME
1.

XV.

TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.

friend and I were walking slowly through the Suddenly a strange man stands before him, he looks at him, says something to him, and they both leave me. 3. I try to follow them, but they are soon lost in the crowd. 4. I have been seeking them for two hours, but I do not find them. 5. As soon as I find them, I will bring the man to you. 6. Do you know the man? 7. I have known him for years. 8. She has been my wife for two weeks. 9. Had you known her long when she became your wife ? 10. I had known her twenty years, and I had loved her since the first day. 11. As soon as she asks me I shall 12. If I see that man now I shall murtell her the truth. der him. 13. He had not been long in the prison, when 14. The his friends murdered the keeper and freed him. duke wrote me, what he wanted in * Vienna. 15. I pro*cured for him everything which he had been wanting. 16. Have all your friends gone away? 17. One went yester18. Several months have day, the other will go to-morrow. passed since his letter came. 19, He went to Vienna, but he did not do all that he promised. 20. I knew the minister in Madrid. 21. As soon as he came into the church I knew him. 22. He had been minister, but he was so no more. 23. "We had brought him the letter as soon as we had received it. 24. He had cursed us because we had not brought it sooner. 25. The young hero cannot receive his sword until he has ordered it. 26. You will weep when
city.
2.

My

*5U.

378

EXERCISES.
tlie last

you hear

words of
28.

are very interesting.

probably come, thought L I am lost. 30. When he is

27. I presume they In February my friend will 29. If I do not find him soon, dead, I have not a single friend.

my friend.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVHL

SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.
(331.)
1.

SSe^ eu^,

i()r

ftotjen fallen
!

mz

tone fiiBer Iang

burc^ eure

Manim

mieber
!

(U^.)

2.

^a

bu bag bollbringft
auf ber (Sifenba^u
4.
;

(rf).)

3.

Q3ilben

mv

plauberii iDir trie in

@ott nic^t, ha^ un ein, mx W'dxtn einem ^oupe. ($?ett3alb.)

tDotte
5.

3Ser ebnib

i)at,

ber irarte.

((Sberg.)

WoQt
biefeg

nie ber
ftitte

^ag
Zljai

erfc^einen,

wo
!

be ran^en
6.

^riet3e

prben
(Sr

bnrd)toIien
(.)
1. ^Ic^

{<Bd^.)
!

jS)iirft' id)

njoljl

bie^mnt mi(^ entfernen ?

*
niic^ n)o^I

lieber, guter
8.

WHamx, mljni
fei,

anf feineu

SSagen.

(aJJu^kr.)

Qd^

^unbe
trie
(.)

ber britte. ((^.)

fie
tt)er

9.

mir luoEen,
10.

trirb

eurem mbgcn bie SSelt fennen lernen, immer eine ^ag= unb 5^a(^tfeite ^aben.
gemd^rt mir
bie 33itte, in

SSir

Unb
noc!^

ber SDic^tfunft
and),
incr er

timme
jei.

nic^t tjernimmt,

ift

ein ^arbar,
[=ni]
fei

er fei
fo

(.)

11.

^ie ginfternig
{<B)?x.)

bicftt,

bem

Sic^te triberfte^t fie nic^t.

(S^efcingni^ [^ni] noc^
fic^

12.

(@r fagte) ha^ niemanb treber

fiirc^ten

San-.

be^Dermeifung jn
politifc^en

I}abeu foKte, er ^citte

(@c!^.)

benn eine
bie
(^^r.)

^erbred)en0 fc^ulbig gemacl^t.

nicl^t

13.

Tlan foE

alten c^nr)e
SDie
(.)

fortroerfen,

man

^ahz benn neue.

;

14.

(Sonne
15.

fin!t, hdh teud)ten mir bie terne o, mcirft bu ^a, grommer '^tah o '^citt' ic^ nimmer mit bem c^trerte
!

bid) tiertaufcl^t.

(@(^.)

(332.)
:^atten.

1.

(^emiffe 9}^enfc^en fatten

^ugenben, menn

fie

@elb

(3.

^.

2.

QatV

id) bicf)

frii^er fo gerec^t erfannt, e

l^elfen Ibnnten,

mare ^iete ungefd^e^'n gebtieben. (@d^.) 3. SSenn mir aEen bann maren mir ^n beneiben.f (i^eff.) 4. SSenn

ina

^ter mcire, fagte er ganj taut ju

fic, fie

mad|te ein ^ebid^t,

* 158.3.

t843.ni,l&.

EXERC5ISES.

379
bod^ ^tn 5tugaitg finbett,
6.

ober au(^

gtuet.

(^e^.)

5.

^onnt
!

id)

a^,

tr)ie

\n^lV

i(^

mt^

begtiicft

(c^.)

SSie ftiinb'g urn euc^,

mein eer jurM. (d^.) 1. u.!ottnteft ^ott banfen, unb bi(^ t)or ber SSelt gro^ mad)en, tDenn bu in beinem Seben
og' id^

eine fo ebte

^^t

get^an
8.

^atteft, tr)ie bie

ift,

itm tuelc^er tDtllen

ic^

gefangen
fc^anen,

ft^e.

(.)

Wix^V

kf)

je^n 9teic^e mit bent "iRMtn

(@(^.)

i^

rette mid^ ntd)t

mit be grennbe Sebcn.

IXnter

9.

(Sinb auc^ bie alten ^iic^er nic^t gnr anb,

fie finb in nnferen

gerjen eingefd^rieben.

(cf|.)

10.

ben a^^enfc^en tvxxh

man

nic^t
9i.)

beffer,

iDenn

man

nic^t f(^on gut nnter fie

fommt.

SSenn biefer ftarle %xm enc^ nic^t ^ereingefit^rt, (3. ^. i{)r fa^et nie ben IRaud) Hon einem franfifdjen famine fteigen. 12. D fonnt ic bod) ben treit in ber S^atur t>erfonen, ((^.) unb 5ur ^ertrciglidjfeit bie 9[)^enfd)en auc^ getDo^nen [Md.) 13.
11.
!

ptten
i(^

ttiir'y

mit frifc^er Xi)ai bollenbet!

gefdjiniegen
bie
!

{@(^.)

14.

atte

boc^
al

immer
nienn

(.)

15.

@r

trar fo ftolj hax^

trcire.

auf,

(Smpftubung fein gemcfen

al>

(@.)

16. lY.

S^ommt, fe^t

euc^, tijut,

loenn i^r gu aufe mcirt!

(.)

Ueberm *
tijar^

|)errfcf)er i^ergi^t er

nur ben

Si^iener
(@c^.)

ganj unb gar,

18.

aB

mit feiner SSiirb' er fd)on geboren.

^er d}tu^
f)atte.

(be ^riefe)
(.)

mar

ganj,

ai>

menu

er in felbft gefd)rieben
erfiillen,
ftiirbe.

19.

d^

gilt bie Seben^pfltc^t

^u

a( ob

man

emig
20.

lebe,

unb mieberum, aU ob nidte nur leife, al> ob biefer SSunfd)

man

ftiinblid)

(^luerboc^.)
{(S6ev.)

ie

i^r gefatle.
al>

21. Q3ete,
(@^r.)

al

:iilfe

fein 5lrbeiten.

^Irbeite,

^iilfe

fein ^eten.

22. i)a> tjerfc^tog mir hen

9J2unb,

unb

l)dtt' icf)

ben

^ob

be

$8erbrec^er

barum (eiben miiffen. gur ^rone mar nidjt erbtid^, unb

SSaterS
bie
bie

(^offmami.)

23. '2)a fRecl^t

bod^

f)atte

ein langere

2then

feine

5Infpriid^e

feine

einjigen

oljneg
(.)

me^r

befeftigt,

unb

offmmg

^ur Sl\one gefic^ert.

24. 33ei

langerem Seben bei grogen

f aiferg,

mare er (ber

ii!reu55ug) ge:=

mi6

nid^t in biefem SO^af^e bereitelt

morben.
(^e^.)
(Seff.)

(9?aiinter.)

25. Unter

fed^ 5tugen mad)t

man

bie biimmften treic^e,

hxad)tt.

bie
ift

man

unter

bieren gar nid)t u

tanbe

26.

^a

ein Sreunb,

ber

fid^

fiir

i^n tobtfd^Iageti tie^e.

2t. 3lber fageu @ie

65,

380
felBft,

EXERCISES.
err; m> ^atte e
^dtte
nic^t

ge^otfen?

(c^.)

28.

(g

ift

!etn

9lRenfc fo

arm, ha^ er nic^t fterben !5nnte.

ftc^

(triiger.)

29. 2Setc|er
(?eff.)

XXnban!6are
30.
ruf.

entfc^ulbigen

getpu^t!

eftern

^Ibent) entftanb auf

einmal ein leb^after grieben=

mii
ftc^

S^^i^iefern

er gegriinbet

jet,

balb ^etgen.

(.)

31. Or)ne 32.

(El,

Siebe t3mge bie t^iecifc^e SSett ju runbe. (3afob.)

0 mbd^f
iiberrafcl^t
^citteu.

^aia, tt)arum mare benit ha> fo unglaubltc^ ? (?eff.) 33. ic leben, ba^ \(i) iydtit, raeitn icl^ fc^eibe, gelebet mtr
gu Seibe.
(9lucf.)

5ur Suft imb anberen nic^t

34.

^ie greube
ertrartct

un

oft

auf einer pur,

35. ^c^ tuiiufc^te,

tt)o

trir fie uic^t

(SStelattb.)

ha^

bei

S^ueu

iu

bie (^efc^afte beffer

ge^en mbgeu,

al>

bei mir. (@c^.)

36.

Weimar SSarum
unb
31.

fottten

tvxx nic^t

miinfc^eu, ncbeu ben Unferigen gu ru^en,

fiir

menu
(@(^.)

aud^ nur

ein 3ar)rr)unbert

iudre.

((S.)

^er
39.

SD^^eufd^ ift frei gefd)affeu, ift frci,

unb \mx' er iu

S^^etten

geboren.
(.)

38. 3Ser
fe'^r

bu aud^

feift, ic^ tt)iinfcl}e

9!ettung btr.

SSie

aud^ euer 3uu're miberftrebe, geljorc^t ber

((^.)

Q6t unb
ic^

bent (^efe| ber tunbe.

ic^

40. 9lur eine meig

3SaI)l
aucl^

fic^er,
(^^rei.)

merbe

ungtii(ili(^,

tnie

biefe

auSfcittt.

41. IXnter alien Umftanben

in frembe (^ettjalt fame.
bie

mugte

er ber^inbern,

ba^

bie

tabt
43.
alte

(^. v.)

42. SBon ben giiBen 5ie^t er

[<BA),)

c^u^e

bel)eub,

Damit er ha^ ^dc^Ieiu burc^fd^reite.

S^er^ei^en mir, bamit

9JZeufc^ in

man un
(Ettva^

Uerjei^e.

(eiime.)

44.

er

un

foil fterben,

bamit eine neue 3:ugenb in un em^

fiird^ten

porfeime.

(C^erber.)

45.

unb ^offen unb forgen

bie cl^mere

muB
(@d^.)

ber 9}?enfc^

fiir

ben fommenben forgen, ha^ er

ha>

be ^afein ertrage, unb

46.

ermiibenbe (^leid^maj^ ber ^age.

bent glaubt

Ser

einmal

liigt,

man

nid^t,

unb menu

er and) bie 3SaIir^eit

fpricl)t.

(@pr.)

41.

SSie

grof3 bid) auc^ bie

^onigin gu mac^en berfpric^t Iran' i^rer c^mei^etrebe nid^t. 48. garret i^r, bi bag ber recl)te 9f^ing htn 9JJunb (@(^.)
eroffne ?
(?eff.)

49.

d^ictt einen fid^eren 33oten

fiil)re.

i^m entgegen,

ber auf ge^eimen 2Beg i^n ^u mir

nen, ber
fic^

(@*.) 50.

^u finbeft !ei^
(.)

feineg S^ac^barn

p fd)amen braud^e.
mar
nidt fo

51. (Sift

unmoglii^, \>a% ein unb berfelbe Tltn\^ biefer SSelt unb gugkid^

^ott

biene.

(Slaubiug.)

52. Qd^

eingenommen, hai

EXERCISES.
icl^

381

nid^t

(lemcrft T)dtte,
((^.)

\vk nur uicutgc t^n (Sinn bcv garten

3Sorte fii^tten.

53.

^em

t()dttgen SlRenfc^cn

fommt

e bar=

anf an, \)a^ er ba

nid^t fiimmern.
(@.)

Sf^ed^te

t()ue;

ob bag

9fted)te gefc^e^e, foil

i^n

THEME
1.

XVI.

SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.

him

has anything to say, let him speak. 2. Let hears the voice of poetry. 3. May war never appear to this peaceful valley. 4. May he never 5. Come when you can; be it finish what he has begun. morning or evening, you will be welcome. 6. Let him think what he will, I shall still love him. 7. Let us sit down and chat until he comes back. 8. May the world never become worse than it is already. 9. He has not been guilty of any crime, unless it be of a political one. 11. O, that I 10. I will bless him, unless he opposes me. 12. Would that I had were not guilty of this crime 13. Had we not exchanged never beheld this man peace for war. 14. We should not have been afraid, had
rejoice

He who

who

we not been

guilty. 15. Had you known the world better, you would never have trusted this man. 16. He would not be imprisoned here had he not done that noble deed. 17. Had I been able to help him, I should have felt my-

happy. 18. How could I have saved myself, if his strong arm had not led me out ? 19. If I can find the
self

outlet,

I will thank God.

this noble deed.

20.

He

will

make
all

poem

if

he hears of
!

21. 0, that

had remained
!

23. He undone 22. If we could but help everyone knows that poem as if it were written in his heart. 24. She nodded, as if she understood everything. 25. They 26. He is as acted quite as if they were at home here. proud as if he were forgetting that he was not born with this rank. 27. He certainly would have worked well, only he was ilL 28. O, that he had lived longer, then my

382

EXERCISES.

hopes would not have been frustrated. 29. A longer life of the great emperor might have secured the crown to his son. 30. No; it certainly would not have helped him. 31. I should not like to suffer the death of a criminal. 32. He may have written the letter himself; but that would be incredible. 33. I should like to know why business does not go better. 34. They will certainly come, were it only for a few hours. 35. We shall surprise them, especially if they have not expected us. 36. However ungrateful he may be, he will know how to * excuse himself. 37. Whoever he may be, and whatever he may do, she will excuse him and love him. 38. Man was created that he might work and pray. 39. Man must fear and sorrow, so that he may not love life too much. 40. He wishes to be rich that he may help everyone. 41. He will find not one who does not obey the law. 42. He had to wait until the city should come into his power. 43. It does not matter to me whether they forgive me; I only hope that I may not need to be ashamed.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XIX.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIRECT STATEMENT.
(333.)
1.

(Sr
2.

fiil^Ite,

ba^ er ein anberer

[^errater]

SJJenfd^
id^ fei

511

tDerben be*

gtime. (.)
geiglincj

S5)u follteft nid^t beiifen,

iiber dlai^t
{e^.)

em
3.

iinb

ein

^errcit^er

gemorbeu.
l^ier

^^orncr f^reibt
(Scf).)

mir,

ha^ er 14 ^age

4.

SJteinft bu, id) fei ein

^inb ?
(@d^.)

m
6.

uubringen
5.

^offe.

S^

^efte^e bar^
ifjren

auf,

boB

ficl^

ber Sorb entferne.

jnriicf;

(Sie

berlangen

Oberft, ben dJla^,

fie,

er

fei

^ier auf bent (Sc^Io^, de^anpten

nic^^t Ioge(ift,

bu

^alteft

tt)erbe 7.

man

i^n mit B^^^l^' ^nb menn bn xijn i^n mit bcm d^tnerte n befreien

n)iffen.

{^^.)

(r erblicfte bie nftc M(\(\h, bie iftm

mit gang t)erftortem (^e^

ftd^t pfliifterte, fie

fud^e iljn feit einer ^albeu tunbe, er miiffe

* 343.111,2.

EXEEdSES.
^eimfommen.
fonne,
(^c^.)
8.

383
flc^,

^ie ignorie* eutfc^utbigte

fobalb

ber $apft
iDerbeii
9.

laffe $0iicf)elangelo

ntcl^t fort;

man

f enter

'^aO^aft

miirbe

ha>

SSer! abgeliefert merbcn. (^. r.)

2)en

SBorfcl^Iag,

Uo> feine <So^ne nac^

al unpaffenb

bem

9}ZorgenIanbe abjufenben,
er ^abe,
obgleid)

tnieg ber

.(l^aifer

guriic!, bettn

im
ftc,
511

ftebenunbfec^jigften
tt){e

Qa^re be
10.

5IIter,

noc^ Siraft gemig,

e^ fcin ^eruf er^eifc^e,

(9^aumer.)

an

bie

pil^e

ber S^riften^eit
tt)ar

ftellen.

^on
(Sr

entfcf)eibenber

SSlcr)ttg!eit

e,

tuelc^en (Sutfcl)IuJ3 ^aifer griebricl^ in biefem 5(ugeubltc! ergreifen

ttjerbe.

[dtanxmv.)

11.

baif)te

nicl^t

ouber,
(@.)

al
(^>

ba^ ber
ge^t bie
13.

c^aiifpieler ba 3:()eater auffuc^en merbe.

9iebe,
baft e

12.

if)m

Suft bereite, fterben gu

fe^en.

(Sberg.)

^ennoc^ erfcl^rerfte bie ^^ac^ric^t, ba^ ber ^rieg erflcirt fei. (grei.) 14. ie ^ermut^ung [^ermutung], ba ein SSalb^iiter ^ier feine SBo^nung ^abe, gab ic^ auf. (^et).) 15. 2Benigflen finbe ic^ e
ntc^t
fpric^t
iDiffe

billig,

ha^
ah,

Ottilie
bci'^

aufgeopfert

tuerbe.

{.)

16.

SSer

i^m
(d^.)

er bie SO^enfcl^en fenne, fie gu gebranc^en

17. ^Ifo befa^f er

un gn t^un nnb bir gn met*

ber
fie

ben, e fei bein ofjn

fii^Ite, baJ3

^on

(S^aefar,

fenbe.
fei.

{<Bd).)

18.

Tlan

o^ne bie

gi^ei()eit

aiU^

tjertoren

(. r.)

19.

fagte

bem ganbernben 5tmtmann

(E'nbe ntacf)en.
(.)

^eimlic^, er

moc^te boc^ ber

taufenb*

a(^e ein
ntal 9kc^t,
ic^,

20. ^d)

tt)oI(te, fie tjatten

bn aber

lebteft noc!^.

(?aube.)

21. SSie fe^^r tnnnfcfjte

(.)

ha%

(Sie in biefen 3;:agen bei

:

un

trciren.

22.

alabin

antttjortete
(If)riften

^er

^aifer

mlige bebenfen, ba^ e iDeniger

gcibe

at aracenen,

nnb

unfid)ere

^eere

bie

nnb baJ3 nic^t gro^e Sanbftrecfen Mac^t ber kitten trennten nnb fc^neKe
SDennocl^ tnode er, gegen (Srnenernng

$iilfleiftnng t)err)inberten.

be griebeng, 3:t)rn, 3:ripDti nnb ^Intioc^ien, luelc^e tcibte bie

Sfjriften nod) befdJ3en, nid)t angreifen. (9Jaumer).

23. 90^ir melbet

er an Sinj, er tdge !ran!. [B6).)

S^r

ntc^t berfeljrt wnret.

f)at

24.

(r fragte fo angfttic^,

ob

25. Sd^ fixrc^te, Dberft Antler,

(@(^.)

man
(.)

mit enc^ ein fc^dnbtic^ piet getrieben.

26.

tnollte nic^t

fommen nnb
ic^

n)ir

mn^ten

bod^, er Xoax anf

^atte.
I

bem

SSege.

27.

^a

i^ren 9^amen nie ge^ort

(Self.)

28.

Governing body of Florence in the 16th century.

384
ha% er
bilbe
!

EXEEOISES.
feiii

(^emiit^ [(^emiit] lute feme ^imft an beinen Se'^ren

29. <Sie tDii^te nic^t,

(.)

wa

fie

geboren

fei

? (5ie
fei,

^citte

e nie Don ir)m erfa^ren, ha^

fetne Qiibin?
troffen.

fie

eine dfjriftin geboren

unb

^ie.

{?eff.)

30. SSa fagft bn

l^ier

U?

fragte er be^

5(( td^

gn SSei^na^ten
(^e^.)

wax,

"^atte id^

ni^t me^r

an

bid^

geba^t ?

HiLUSTRATIVB SENTEN-CES XX.

CONDITIONAL TENSES.
(334-36.)
id^
1.

SSenn

id)

nur an mic^

f eft ft

benfen

biirfte, tt)iirbe
{(B.)

mic^ ^artnacfig lueigern,

beine (^ab^ an^une^men.

2.

SSiirben fo oft neue ^eifpiele

jur SSarnimg bienen, ioeun bie

((Sngel.)

SSarnung

atterer ^eifpiele

gefrud)tet ^(itte?
fic^

3.

^ie

gliicfUc^ tDiirbe

manc^er teben, n)enn er

urn anberer Seute

(^id^tenberg.)
;

acl^en fo toenig befiimmerte, a( urn feine eigenen.

4.

^u

tierbienteft,

^remierminifter im Sanbe 5U fein

e miirbe

bann too^t gan^ anberg im gangen ^urfiirftent^um [^tum] fte^en (3|d^o!fe.) 5. Tlan glaubte bie ^o^men ^um c^meigen 5U brin* gen, menn ug'en * Ser)re buret) ben greunb fefter Derbammt 6. (^efe^t, Seanber tniirbe burc^ fie glii(i(ic^ n)iirbe. (rube.)
njerbe ic^ fein gi'euub bfeiben fonnen ?

M.)

1.

Xk

boppelten
tierbectt

SSinbungen ber @c^tangen n^iirben

leaden.
(?e[f.)

ben ganjen 2^xh

8.

^iefe ingen, 331umenmalen nub ^omobie*

fpielen miirbe mi(f) nic^t einen 5tugenblirf gliicflic^

(^e^.)

9.

(Sr freute

fi(^

madden fonnen, baxan in ber offnung, ta^ ber %xnf)^

10.
!I)ie

ling batb atte nod^ reic^lic^er beteben miirbe. (.)

Un*

tu^e nnb Ungemil^ett,

untern>eg alien

n)ie

td^'^

^ier

finben

tt)urbe,

^at mir

nnger

Dertrieben.

(e^.)

THEME XVn.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT, AND CONDITIONAL
TENSES.

L He asked me whether I had become a coward. 2. I answered I was not afraid of him, and would soon show
i05.

EXERCISES.

385

him that I was no child more. 3. Max wrote he did not demand that I should deliver the work now, but he hoped
was finished. 4. When I found he had been looking for me also, 5. They say the emperor will send his sons alone to France; for he is * in his 76th year, and haa not strength enough to put himself at the head of the army. 6. The prince told me that war had been declared, and that everything would be lost without the emperor. 7. The emperor answered: he wished for peace and would 8. But he could not like to make an end to the war. forget that the French themselves had begun the war. 9. He would not lead back the army unless the enemy should give up all the German cities which they had possessed before. 10. I do not think it just that the French should pay so much. 11. I thought they still lived there. 12. Did you believe I was afraid ? I believed he was lying sick at Berlin, and did not know that he was on his way to England. 13. O, that he would soon appear I had ordered you to do 14. What do you say ? that? I never did so. 15. If you heard my warnings you would be happy. 16. We would not take your gifts if we were richer. 17. I should like to be rich, then I 18. If you had only concerned would help everyone. yourself with your own affairs, you would be rich already. 19. Such a hope would not make me happy. 20. A wise king would not have condemned the teaching of Huss. 21. They did not know how they would find it here. 22. He wrote me in the hope that they would soon arrive.
to receive
it

as soon as

it
;

him he excused himself and could not find me.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXL THE

(341.)

INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT
1.

AND OBJECT OP VERBS.

(@(^.) 2.

(Sin (Sffen tutrb

gegeben auf bent c^to^.

S)a 2e6en ber

grau

ift

eiu eiuigeg

^e^en unb ^ommen, ober

286

EXEBCISES.
fiir

ebett uttb ^ragen, ober ^eretten unb (Sd^affen

3.

^nbere.
((S.)

((S.)

grei

tDttt

id^ fein

im anbeln imb tm
5.
*

5)i(^ten.

(Sntbeorett, 9JJiffen, ^erlieren,

DHc^t^^aben getcu^nt ber

Hn tmmet
4.

feine (^elteOten.

(^abater.)

D,
.)

fegne, err,
6.

9^eben unb mein en!en.

t)on 33Iei0en, t)on

(.

mein SSer!, meiti Qe^t rebe tntr Reiner mel^r

^erOergen
ift

(@(^.)

(342.)
ift

1.

terben
{Bd}.)

tiid^tg,

bod^ leben

unb

uid^t fe'^eu,
l^ei^t

ba
fein.

ein

IXnglM.
3.

2.

SO^enfc^enliebe iiben,

gut
(@d^.)

{(Sberg.)

UnreC^t letben fc^meid^elt grofeen eelen.

4.

unb e t^at i^m melj, bie ebten ^^lere [^tere] tobten u fe^en. ((Sbers.) 5. ^ie braunen, flugen 5lugen gu malen mar nic|t Seic^teg. ((Sberg.) 6. ^^ begriff e freilid^, ober mid bariiber gu troften, moKte mil tro^bem nic^t gelingen.
(r Itebte

bie ^ferbe

(^ei).)

1.

(S

ift

fo

elenb

betteia

gu miiffen.

(.)

8.

(S

fd^merjte niic^ leb^aft, biefe fc^onen Sac^cn t)er!aufen gu fe^en.

(.)
9.

( t^erftanb fid) t)ou felbft,

ba^

trol^

aEem einem

fold^en

SP^anne u t^un gegeben trerben mugte. (^. r.)

(343.)
(.)
2.
1.

5Iner!ennen t^un mir bie 9^ic^tig!eit ber Sorberung.

mar's, al
3.
tf^at'

99?ir

fein

^luge l^inab in ^erj mir

fe^en.

mMcv.)
4.

^er

(^(Mlic^e,
fe^It,

ber

^e^aglic^e,

^at

gut

reben. (@.)
ttjeife

SSem ba

ber ^at gut

5.

im

3Sin!e( filjen

unb

bie ^df)feln ucfen. (e^.)

^enn
lite!,

od^, bie 9}?enfc^en lieben

(platen.)
7.

lernen,

ift

ha^ ein^ige ma^re

6.

unb Uebung im
:^atten i()m biefe

Ungliict lernt fd^meigen. (^ebel.)

rfa^rung ie i8atat>ier
bir,

^nfeln erobern ^etfen.

if)n ^aft

(<Sci^.)

8.
9.

Qd^ banfe

^ott, ba bu mic^

fe^en laffen. (.)

(Sbers.)

DftmalS

lie^ er

t^

in ben ^igianfaat berufen.

10. 5lIIe, tt)a ber^aifet

iiber feine

iege fc^reiben ta^t, ift ertogen. (^rei.) 11. Qd^ l^ore ben SSagen borfa^ren. Sebc mo^t. {^ttj.) 12. ^a ()ie6 ber o!tor mi(^ bleiben. (@ber8.) 13. (Sd^nett mirft bu bie 9^ot^^
menbigfeit [9^otmenbig!eitl berfd^minben,
fic^

unb
fiil)le

"^zdjt in Itnred^t

t)crmanbe(n

fe^en.

((^.)

14.

^^

iunge, f)eilige
(.)

SebcnSgliidf ueugtii^eitb

mir burd^

D^eri)

unb 5(bern rinnen.

((^.)

15. SBon ^uQ^ttb auf l)ab' id) gelernt ge^ord^en.

bitte id^ iSie

16. (So

mir 4 tik! bon ber griinen ^apete au granffurt

It. S)er

fommen ju

laffen. (<^c^.)

^raf

!at

mid^ fi^en fe^en.

(.)

EXEKCISES*
18.

387
be

Wan

^attc ha^ ^offerd^en in ber

(.)

Wxik
fie,

8tmmer
bu

fte^en

gelaffen.

19.

ag

^etgt nic^t (^ott t)ertrauen, ba :^ei6t

!

(^ott berfuc^en.
fjoren ?
(Sie
(ipe^.)

(@(^.)

20. tiff

jagte

^aft

nid^t flopfen

21. S^^ ^<^^e nie fiirc^terlid^er fluc^en ^iiren, oI

22. SSir fatten feit

Iad)en.

($?e[f.)

me^reren 3Sod)en
eitte

t)ou

einem
\]t

^aume
brein.
ift

fprec^en geI)ort, beffen aft

naf)renbe

WM)
lieber

(um.)

23.
(

Sa
)

fingen, (befell, (a^ raufc^en,

unb ftimmeit
baDon,

munter
Ijoren

24.

prec^en
[totlic^],

8ie
tnemt

nic^t
ic^

greunb, e

mir

ti3btUc!^

bariiber fpred^en

mu^.

(!^inbau.)

25. ^u(^ in Tld^tv. f}bvt

(@(^.)

man

(Snc^

erren
lagt'^

ni^t befonberg preifen.

fi(^

26.

S^om fi^eren ^ort

21.
fic^

gemiit^lic^ [gemiitlii^] ratljen [raten]. (@c^.)

fic^

2a^

f(ie^,

iuag

nic^t

^Iten

Icijst.

(Hrubt.)
(?eff.)

28.

Safet

an einem

SDemifd) benn nid)t macl)en ?

29. SSer blieb nid^t fte^en,

^romenabe tpanbelten? $Ia^ mitten an ber langen 31. er ^erjocj SQZilon fc^Iafen ^afet fil^en geblieben. (^ei^.) lag. (U^.) 32. 9^eben fic^ I)atte fie einen ()o^en ^orb fte^en. (.) 33. Qd^ ^b' im tiefften runbe ber (2ee(e ru^'n ein Sieb. (9?u(f.) 34. Segt mid^ ^^n, \vo fein Siebenber fommt iDeinen. (Berber.) 35. (Inblic^ ber^tpeifelte er an bem elingen feiner 5(rbeit, marf ben nnoottenbeten ^rief in bie ^ifte, nnb legte fid^ 36. 'ommt, laj^t nn ge^'n fpagieren in htn fd^Iafen. ((Sber.)
biefe

menn

33eiben lancjfam burd) bie

tt^ar

(^aiiff.)

30.

ie ^raut

auf ifjrem

t)ie(griinen SSalb.

(O^ife.)

3t. 9lie Dergi^t ber griiljUng tDieber^

5l(te

gufommen. {Zkd.) 38. ^er im gu^rmer! einjunetjmen.

ftcinbig

lub 5(bam ein, ben ad^ten ^la^

39.

(Sberg.)

Qljr 5(uge gebot t)er^

gn reben.

(.)

40. Sleraunu befoljl feiner ^od^ter, i'^m

(eber.) 41. ^ie le^ten SSorte i^m gn ben!en gegeben. (^berg.) 42. SDem freien SD^anne l^at ott empor jn fd)anen eriaubt. {^M.) 43. (S lebt ein (S^ott, 5u ftrafen nnb jn rcicl^en. ((2c^.) 44. Xcn grennb ju erfennen, muf^t bu erft einen c^effel (Salj mit i()m gegeffen

einen ^ed^er SSein ju reic^en.

9^utf)' fatten

l^aben. (@pr.)

45.

en ^rei
bid^

be 2Sett(auf ju getninnen, barfft

{@Ieim.)

bu

nic^t

fte()n

nnb
biinn

befinnen.

46.

^ier ^retter

braud^t'
betten.

nur,

nnb

fc^mat, ein miibe 9[Renfd^ent)er5 ju

ift

(Srager.)

47.

thtn auSgegangen, mit ein n)enig

388
S3attb

E^RSISES.
gu ^anbeln.
(3. r.)

48.

gu retten, unb ^atte berbient,

ntg ober
nicl^tS

Unb ma i^m

bocl^,

ber

Qube

rt)arni(^t

broI)te.

(@ber.)

49. 2Be^

fte^t

^u gemmnen. (^. r.)

(.)

50.

^er getter
glur ^inein,
(ei).}

bleibt bettter (5^nabe ju Derjet^en.

51. j?aum fd^eint eg gu

gtauben.

(.)

52. 3c| blicfte in ben unfauberlid^en

e njar !eine 9}^enfd^enfeete brinnen 5U fe(}en ober u Ijoren.

53. 5Da0 53efte, n)a
[4eilen]. (.)
l^atte

man bon tm
(ei)J

(ernt,

ift

nicl^t

mitjut^eilen

54.

ie 3^^^ tnurbe i^m

l^aben.
(. r.)

nic^t (ang,

benn aud^ er

Diet

gu ben!en.

55. Safari fd^etnt mit ber S^atnr 56.

nte

t^un ge'^abt ^u

3Ser e je^t ntd^t

nterft,

ha^

bie
(@c^.)

SCenien etn poeti]d)e ^robuct ftnb,

5T.

bem

ift

nic^t
Icings

gn ^elfen.

Sangfani !onnnenbe liicf pflegt

58. ^ariiber fc^Iief
id^ ein,

cm

ften 5U bleiOen.

(Berber.)
id^

emad^te, glaubte

eOen nur getrdnmt

Sl\ii)er tt)ol

p I)aben.

(@.)

unb al td^ 59. ier

60. (Seine

gilt'g, ntein (Sot)n,

bem

ju bienen.

(Sd^.)

Sartlic^feit gegen feine

^inber

I)inberte ifjn nid^t,

fie

in guter

guc^t gu fatten.
62.

((SruBe.)

61. SO^an
fiir

mu^te

fi(^ l^iiten,

feine biel^
(3?au!e.)

beutigen 5Cubriic!e nic^t

eine ^eiDdfjrung ju ne^men.

@r fnnb
fid^

Sotten bef(^dftigt,
nid^t

bem ^Uten

ju^ureben.

{(>.)

63.

befann
fogleic^

bon feinen im gelbe fte^enben ^eeren ai^t^eljntaufenb Tlann ab^ubanfen. (d^.)

(nnge,

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXIL

THE INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT,
(344.)
1.

ETC.

^er

S^^^tfjum [3rrtum]

ift

biet tetc^ter
Si)a

p er!ennen,

al

bie

2Bar)rr)eit

5U finben.

(.)

2.

^artieen au bem (S^eKini* anfangen

(S(^.)

tt)erben, ift

ie mit eintgen mir lieb 5U ^oren.

Wax ba^ SSaffer, gefunb u trinfen. (.) 4. ie ift f(^on jugleic^ unb fc!^rec!(ic^ an5ufe()en. ((Sd^.) 5. S<^ bin nid^t jung genug, bor o^en mid^ 5U neigen, unb ^ro^ mit 6. ^d) wax geftern fo un%xo\} 5U bcinbigen, alt genug. (.) Y. ^er borfidC)tig, ein pnar .^apitet im ^erobot gu (efen. (et).)
3.

auerlid^

5l(te,

ber
life

anii) fonft

fc^mer 5U lenfcn wax, ^attt

fid^ feft gemei^^

* The

of Benvenuto Cellim : see

66 Ac,

EXERCISES.
gert.
(^etj.)

389
etn h)entg ju fi^neH, al
9.

8.

(Sure S5erfof}nung
^citte
feiit

mar
(.)

ba

fie

bauer^aft

foKett.

^te ^naben marett

(Sr.)

5U jung, iim felbft eine

(345.)
letd^t
1.

^oKe

5U fpieten. (^.

S3orgefterti ^atit id^ eine

ier 5U feljen.
i)attt

{B^.)

2.

^Ibe offnung, ie biet@ein plo^Iid^er SSunfc^, glorenj

(^. r.)

gu
3.

t)erlaffen,

bieKeid^t aber noc^ anbere (^riinbe.

5(uf ber golterban! I;atte er ha> ^et^t

guriirfgeiDonnen, fic

felbft

5U ad^ten.
al>

(@ber8.)

4.

Qd^ bin in ber Sage, mir in ber

grembe

^ienenber

erft

Qittranen nnb gnte efinnnng er^

iDerben 5U miiffen.
lid^ften SO^ii^e

(grei.)

6.

^ie

iible

(Smpfinbung, tro| ber

ha>

reb:*

^uriicfgnbteiben,

berbarb i^m

^afein.

(@berg.)

6.

(C)ippet.)

ie grb^te ^erebtfamfeit befteljt in ber 1. ^ie $f(irf)t 5U beffern gibt nn

8.
1.

Slnnft 5U fd^meigen.
ha^' ^fJec^t

ju tabeln.
(gvei.)

(@(^efcr.)

ann ^be

id)

bie ^flid^t, i^n 5U rcic^en. bie

(346.)

ie SSeiber lieben
I)aft

6tar!e,

ofjne

fie

nad^p*

a^men, bie
2.

9[)^anner bie ga^tljeit, oTjne fie ju ermiebcrn.

(3.

'St.)

Ttan^^txUi
ftatt

bn berfciumet
I)aft

ftatt

^n ^anbeln, ^aft
3.

ge;=

troumet,

5U ben!en,

gefd^miegen. (.)

D^atnr gab mt

S5erftanb, urn red^t 5U benfen;

ha^'

nm
5.

red^t jn ^anbeln,
fid^

gab

fie

un

er5. (531umauer.)

4.

ie begniigten
(@c^.)

bamit, bie nmliegen^

nid[}t

ben Mofter
t^^n

p pliinbern.

ie tarn gar

baju, gegen

ben rant unb 3^1^^ augjntaffen.

midf) nid^t

^d^ fonnte baran getDo^nen, mir bie fromme Stugnftine fo ju

(5(uerBac^.)

6.

benfen.

(3f(^of!e.)

(347.)
2.

1.

Sd^ meine0 ^ruber ^inber nid^t erfennen

!

($?e[f.)

meinem S3ufen tragen (@d).) 3. Sieber, tanfenbmat lieber, ^ettelbrob effen nnb in ber Stnnft (^rogeg erreid^en, at tm (S^Iiicle praffen unb fc^melgen. ((Sber.) 4. 53arm^eriger ott biefe tunbe nur iiberteben unb bann nur au bem ^ater= 5. ie fprai^ bic^ preifen, emig. (.^et).) 6. SDer fteine $aul tft l^iniiberge* lanb nid^t reifen! [Md.) ^ufmad^en, liebe 9[^utter, oufmad^en laufen unb ^at gerufen ^Oer bie SJluttcr ift nid^t aufgemad^t. (toc^.) 1. ^nfitten in bem (^IM, ^a\>a trieber umarmen (348.) unb mein c^mefterd^en, norf) biet reijenber, al0 td^ fie mir bor* gefteUt, in (gmpfang 5U ne^men, ha^i^i^ i^ l^unbertmal baran.

S^

eine 9[^anne 33ilb in

390
(e^.)

EXEECISES.
2.

ter hai

ic^ i^n, ft(^

meberjufe^ett, 5i i$

tm Stanbc
furgen alt

getDefen fein iDiirbe, au ber c^Iud^t, tDO ein ^iemlic^ reid^Iid^er

Ouell gum
lid^

H}^eere f(o^,

unb

tto

roir bercitg eiuen

l^olen. ((Spiel.)
tDotteti.
(2cf[.)

gemad^t fatten, abermaB 2Baffer gu

tuerben
fie i^ti I)abett

3.

5ld^, ^rei=

umbringen

THEME XVm.
THE
INFINITrVE.
1. I am accustomed to this eternal coming and going, and standing still is hard for me. 2. The selling of all these beautiful things pained me much. 3. I have no time for painting or reading, I must accustom myself to working. 4 To suffer wrong is a misfortune, but to do wrong is a greater one. 5. To do without is easier than to beg. 6. To remain quiet and to hide myself was quite impossible. 7.

It

pained the child to see such a noble animal

killed,

and I did not succeed in comforting him for it. 8. He can well be contented, for he has already all that he wants. 9. We taught him to obey his parents and to love all men. 10. He bade me come to him and helped me
write

my letter.

11.

You

will soon see the

12. I

wagon

drive

up

saw him go away, and I 13. I heard the emperor tell felt all my hopes disappear. of his victories, and he thanked God that he had let him conquer* this country. 14. He had seen his only son killed in this war. 15. We had her buy several pieces of the green carpet. 16. I hear laughing and singing, who is it ? 18. She 17. Now they are coming, I hear a knocking. caused work to be done for the poor in her house, and I heard her charity praised everywhere. 19. Yes, we have also heard her praised. 20. She does not suffer herself to be hindered by her illness. 21. Nothing bad can be said of her. 22. Nothing can be made of this man. 23. Why did

and the doctor go away.

* 439.2.

EXEECISES.

391

you remain

24. I had a good friend ? and I wanted to talk with him. .25. "When we went to walk together he often remained standing, in order to look after the people. 26. He invited me to go to drive and allowed me to take my sister with me. 27. He

sitting at the table

sitting beside me,

to speak, but to speak sensibly. 28. He did not forget to offer his guest a cup of wine. 29. Wo have come to visit you, will you allow us to come again ? 30. Spring comes to make us happy again. 31. Your story is not to be believed. You have not heard the whole; the best still remains to be told. 32. There is not one soul 33. You have only to to be saved out of this house. command, we will do anything. 34 He is accustomed to going to sleep over his book, and I take heed not to wake him. 35. Nothing now hinders us from going away. 36. What hindered you from seeing the emperor? 37. I was busied in helping the old man, and did not believe I could 38. Everything you say is pleasant to me. 39. leave him. Truth is hard to find, but it is still harder to recognize it, when one has found it. 40. I am too young to read Herodotus. 41. He was too old to find new friends, but he was still too young to die, therefore he lives lonely and alone. 42. I have no wish to blame him, but I have also no wish of seeing him again. 43. The hope of improving

commanded me

him gives me the courage to blame him. 44. I had not time enough to earn his confidence for myself. 45. He had not the courage to avenge his father, so he lost the right of respecting himself. 46. He has the misfortune to have survived all his friends. 47. They praise the virtues of this great man without imitating them. 48. Instead of telling me the truth he was silent, and I went away without recognizing him. 49. I did not think of blaming him. 50. They had to content themselves with drinking some water. 51. I eat his bread and live in his house ? Never ! 52. Better be quite poor than not to live in one's fatherland. 53. Oh, to avenge my emperor then I can die
I

392
liappy.
54. I

EXERCISES.

have no wish to survive my emperor, who 65. I hope never to leave the country where I was born, and where all my friends have

was

killed in the last war.

lived

and

died.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES
PAKTICIPLES.
(350.)
1.

XTOTT.

^tht l^anbelnbe Station blent

2.

ftd^

unb anberen

^olfern.

((Sotjinger.)

S)u

bift fein c^iiler

me^r, fonbern ein

ber roeibenben

iDerbenber

SO^eifter.

(<5berg.)

3.

^ann

folg'

i<i)

SSarum follte td einen tanjenben Z^ct befurfien? 5. ^eftern mu^te id^ mic^ munbern, tt)ie (Sie fid^ nad^ (^auff.) einer fd^led^tfd^Iafenben ^aii)t, unb unter SSolfen t)on 'Zabah 6. a xauiS), no(^ fo gan gut unb bei umor ^ielten. (0(^.) ^ud^ miirbe ntir bei htn t)orabenben 5trbeiten gute 2)ienfte
$eerbe.
(.)

4.

tf}un.

(@d.)
1.

(351.)

SDer ^id^ter fd^meigt

(.)
2.

Don taufenb

burd^gettjetnten

^ag^ unb 9^ad)ten. ^anben. (^^rei.) 3.

ein gern gefe^ener

^a

93^dbd^en ftanb mit gerungenen

!5)er geiftreid^e, ^eitere

Qtaliener trar liberaH

bolle,

(^aft.

(^berg.)

4.

au^gefuttte

Seben, foraie bie

alle

Ieict)te

(Srmiibung nad^ gett)aner 5(rbeit, bte

5.

mar gemig
tiielleid^t

fc^on.

((Sbcr3.)

^ie ^ftic^ten ber aufrau

!ann

eine

gemtet^ete

[gemietete]
6.

anb

erfiiUen,

bie

^flic^ten ber 30fJutter nie.

(Sujom.)
(?eff.)

SDer ^onig faun nic^t affe

Derbiente 9}Zdnner fennen.

(352.)
1.

5(uc^ bitte ic^

mir burd^ Gulping ba^ SSerseid^mg

ber t)on mir ein^ufenbenben ^iidfier 5uruc!fc^ic!en u laffen.

2.

(@4)

k^ mic^ luegen eine angufaufenben Sanbgut fur bid^ erfunbigte, inarb fogteid^ ein 50Zann berufen, ber mir berer ge^n 3. ^ie D^ac^a^^mung ift angeboren, ha^ ^a^'^ antrug. (3fc^o!!e.)
SllU

gual^meube trirb nid^t

(353.)
1.

leid^t erfannt.

(.)

ic^

felbft

getreu

mar

er ein (Sd^affenber, ein

(^enjatb.)

^or*
SDiefe

mart^ftrebenber bi gu feinen U^ttn ^agen.

SSorte mirften
3.
it)ie

2.

frciftige 'iSr^enei

auf

hQxi

enefenben.

(Sbers.)

^er

gal^renbe ftieg manc^mal bie neben i^m i^enbe an, bag

EXERCISES.
fie

393
4.

aud^ r)m5orc^e auf ha^, \m>

man

fage. (?(ucrBacf).)

^^ Un
tnenti ic^

vedt tierlangenb nac^

ber ^Tu^fii^rung S^i^er Ijielfac^en ^been,

ettt)a

unb

erinarte rec^t balb

S^i'^ii^f^ f^^^
1.
"^^'^^

babon.

(@d).)

5.
!

Unb

in bie

lacl^enb erfc^ien fie

mir

(>awff-)

(354.)

5(uf Sl^iinftigeS rec^ne nic^t,

!(ag^
nid}t,
ift

an ^erIorene fprod)ene, bro^ene. [Md.) 2. ^erorbuet

tic^tet n)erben.
(@c^.)

unb unb

^aijV

ben!^ ni(^t

md)t auf ^er* an ger(^efe^,

im

encjlif^en

ba

jeber 5Inge!Iagte burc^ @efcI)tt)orene t>on (Seine^gtei(f)en foil ge*

4.

befam tdgltc^ ettrag gefd)cn!t. (^.) unb fiiljlte ntirf) nid)t ganj ijon i^m 5. (Sr befam il)ren 5(nfur)rer gcfangen. (@(^.) getrennt. (^rei.) 1. ^ie SSette fc^manft unb fUe^t unb fc^i^eat, unb (356.)
3.

(Sie

3f IDu^te te

bei il)m,

beugt
t(^.

ftc!^

fcl^dumenb nieber. (@.)

nicfte

2.

(^uten 5lbenb,
(^ei}.)

TOe

fagte

ie

nur

tierbroffen mit bent ^opfe.

8. SJ^einen bleic^

SBater? ftammelte U(rld), unb fd)aute

bem 5lnberen

unb

fragenb in 51ntli^.
(357.)
1.

((Sberg.)

^on

ermiibet an. (.)

2.

einem fo langen SSege fomntt ntan immer 9^eben i^m reitenb, erijielt er au feinent
^unfte. (^. r.)
3.

SRunbe 5Iu!unft
4.

ilOer atte

-Da lag bie gran.

gebettet.
(Sbers.)

in einem armltd)en arge bon tofjen ^(an!en

ie

^atte

grauen

in ber .^irc^e t)or folc^en

5.

^itbern !nieenb

beten gefe^n.

((^orre^.)

gril^ aber

Wax
an

in bie ^ircl^e gegangen

(et).)

unb ftanb neOen

feinent gi^eunbe

an

bie '^f)nx gebriidt.

bie

6.

^a

inarf fic^ ber

1.

chiller tueinenb

^ruft be Wti]kx^.

((gbers.)

^a

erfdjien ploWid), alien unerujartet, ber berfc^oKene

8.

93?eifter.

(e^.)

^(It

getuorben bet ununterbroc^ener ^efc^cif^

fid)

tigung mit ber ^Tunft, tDar e iljm unmoglid),

^^atigleit ganj gu entl)alten.
(^. @r.)

ber 0en)ot)nten
er ein paar

9.

(So

Wax

tragen

ncit

gegangen, al

er,

urn eine
10.

de

biegenb, eine Wdn-^

nergeftalt t)or fic^ erOIirfte.

belt auf ber (Srbe, tuie bie

(e^.)

ma^re

SSei^^eit,

^ie nja^re greube wan^ bon tuentgen gefel^en,

@on)ie

bon ber

3fiuf)e begteitet.

(@to(berg.)

11.

bieglamme

be

Sid^t, and) umgetnenbet, ^inaufftra^It, fo, tjom d^idfat gebengt,

ftrebet ber C^ute
n^eife

empor.

(Berber.)

12. SO^lod^teft
13.

enbigen be 2eben

Sf^eife. ((^.)

bu begtiidt unb ^^eitne^menb [teilnel^*

ju er^

tnenb] an f einem guge, off ten

fie

bie errfcl^aft tnieber

394
langen. (^, r.)

EXEECISES

14. S8on ha ftd^ bxrect nnd^ Often tnenbenb, unb im Zi)aU beg 5lnio marfc^irenb, tDiirbe er Slorenj am rafd^efteu errei^t l^aben. (^. r.) 15. ^od^ enbfic^, nngetrieben burd^
angelocft

meineii D^eim,

burd) greunbe, bte

fi(^

Dor mir in bie

SScIt ^inaugbegeOen,

waxh ber

(Sntfc^Iu^ sefagt.

(@.)

(359.)

1.

^ine ^tugel tarn geflogen; galt'g bir ober gait e

mir? (U.) 2. (Sgmont fam anf ben 9}?ar!t geritten. (.) 3. ^a fommt einmat gefprungen fein jiingfter (Sbelfnab. (U^.) 4. a
nenne
.

id^ gefc^Iafen.

(Corner.)

5.

(SoKft aud^ nic^t lange fiagen

nur

frifd^,

nur

frifc^

gefnngen,

(e:^ami[fo.)

6.

S^ic^t

(ang gefeiert,

frifd^

unb aKe mxh n^ieber gut. ie 9}?auerfteine ^er!

!

bei

^en

^ait, ben 9J?brtet jugefnijren

{2>d).)
!

1.

^f^ofen anf

ben SSeg geftreut, unb be

(358.)
1.

arm
fie

Dergeffen
t)on

(oIti).)

(St

unterric^tete

ben

au^erorbentlid^en
(3fd)o'ffe.)

(^icffalen il^rer langft al tobt [tot] 6en)einten ^ante.

2. (r

begab
3.

fic^

anf

ha>

i^m t)om

^urfiirften gef(^en!te Sanbgut.

(rube.)

5l((e

geinbe ber

t)om ^aifer ^ur

9fteice

riinbung unb
^f^eformen

^ultur

feineg

unermegHc^en

begonnenen
iibrig la^t,

erttjarteten nad^
(^fc^offc.)

feinem ^obe eine altgemeine ^egenretiolution.

4.

2Bo ber trom eine ^anbban!

9f^adt)en,

ha liegen
oft

mit offenen
(^um.)

unbemegtid^ mie gel^ftude ^ingeftrecft,

bie

hthtdt mit ^ogeln,

ungefd)tad^ten S^orper

ber ^ofobile.

THEME
1.

XrX.

PARTICIPLES.

We ought not to wake

these sleeping children.

2.

If

we do not wake

the sleeping ones, they will not be ready for the intended journey. 3. I said many a consoling word to the weeping maiden, but she did not cease to lament her lost friend. 4. Nothing can bring us back the lost ones. 5. I have not yet received the letters sent in by you, but I hope they will bring us the wished-for news.

Instead of giving me the promised present, the traveller gave me nothing. 7. Tired by the long journey, he remained q^uiet the whole day. 8. Who is the one sitting
6.

EXERCISES.

395

? 9. I saw her coming into the church weeping and wringing her hands. 10. Kneeling before the picture, and praying, she tries to forget her unhappiness. 11. The few words spoken by the judge taught the accused that he had nothing more to hope. 12. He knew himself to be parted forever from his friends and his home. 13. Accompanied only by a few friends, he left Florence, and turning toward the North, he soon reached the army. 14 Marching directly to Florence the army apj^eared suddenly, unexpected by everyone, before the city. 15. A man came running into the city, and brought the news that the enemy so long feared by all would soon reach the 16. Then one saw the women and children come city. 17. weeping and complaining into the market-place. Arrived in England, I asked after the sonof my long lost 18. I hoped to find but always warmly loved friend. him on the estate bought by his father and given by him to this son. 19. But the son, enticed by bad friends, had sold the estate inherited from his father and had betaken himself to the city. 20. Turning around the corner, and going a couple of streets further, I soon reached the house hired by him. 21. Kiding beside me, he' begged me to take part in his expedition. 22. On this way we met many riding and driving. 23. It is impossible for a man grown old in uninterrupted employment to abstain 24. The children entirely from his accustomed activity. came springing to me, and brought me the letter sent by you.

next you

VOCABULARIES.
ABBBEVIATIONS.
accus. accusative.
adj.

m. masculine noun.
n.

adjective.

neuter noun.

adv. adverb.
art.

N.

New

or

weak conjugation.

article.

num. numeral.
0.

conj. conjunction. dot. dative.

Old or strong conjugation.

plural.

vers, personal.
vl.

dem. demonstrative.
determ. determinative.
/.

poss. possessive.
ppl. past participle.

feminine noun.

gen. genitive.

prep, preposition.
prow, pronoun.

impers. impersonal.
indec'L indeclinable.
insep'le inseparable.
inteij.

pronH. pronominal.
reflex,
rel.

reflexive.

interjection.

relative.

irdr.

intransitive verb.

sep'le
tr,

separable.

irreg. irregular.

transitive verb.

EXPLANATIONS.
Verbs of the

Old or strong conjugation, and of the

noted (by an added
list
,

New

or

weak

if

irregular, are so

or irreg. ^ respectively).

Their

forms are to be sought in the

fein as

of irregular verbs.
after

Verbs taking
1^

an auxiliary have an

added

them; to

this

an

is

added if

the verb takes either jein or l^aben.

Nouns have
Adverbs in

the sign of their gender appended, and. the endings of

their genitive singular (except of feminines)

-ly

and nominative

plural.

derived from adjectives and having the same form

with them (79) are not separately entered. References are made to the grammar by paragraph and division, as in
the

grammar

itself.

398

GEEMAN-ENGLISH

I.

GERMAN-ENGLISH YOCABULARY.

aB, odu.

and sep'le prefix,

a^tlltnfctt^ tr.

off, away. dismiss with thanks,

%dtv,
%t^t\,

rn.

-x^,

3lct!er.

cultivated

field, acre.

sBttU,

m. agriculture.

discharge.
5l6cnb,
rn.

m.

-Ig. nobility.

-b, -be.

evening, eve.

%bcr,

/. -rn. vein.
tr.

sglorfe, /.
after,

curfew.

al^nen,

have presentiment
{or

of,

however. aBermalS, odi^' again, once more. aB^iingen, 0. intr. depend, be dependent.
conj. but,
abliefertt, tr. deliver, consign.

forebode, suspect.
li^nli^,
adj.

adv.)

like,

re-

sembling.

^^nung,
aU,
indef.

/.

-gen. presentiment,

foreboding.
pron. and pron'l adj.: collectivdy, all, entire,

aftnel^men, 0.

remove,
ttBrcifCtt,

tr. take off or away, gain or obtain from

whole

dis-

iributivdy, every, each, any, alL

irdr.
|.

journey away,
away. abhorrence,

alleS, all,

everything, everyone:

depart, go away.
ttbrufen, 0.
tr.

see

193.

call

alletn, adj. (or adv.) alone, single,

Ebft^eu, m. loathing.
leave.

-eiieg.

only. conj. only, but.

allel}em, adv. all that.
attcrt^riflti^, adj.
(title

^M^tctl, m. -b6, -be. departure,

aM(t)(^0Cn/ 0.
off.
tr.

most Christian
to
all,

assumedbythe French Icings).

strike off,

cut

attgemein, adj.
general.
flttjUtliel,

common

ttftft^reiben, 0. tr.

write

off,

copy;

adv. all too

much.
almanach.

write
off or

and

refuse.

5llmttnttt^, n. -d}^, -d^e.

tr.

abfentien, {reg.
$l6ftd)t, /. -ten.

or irreg.)

send

away, despatch.
view, aim, inten-

-n^, -n. alms, charity. ClS, conj. as ; as being, in character of ; after comparative, than ; after

5ttmofcn,

n.

tion, plan.
ttbflirc^ett, 0. tr. refuse,

negative, other than, except, but;

abtuei^fetn, irdr.
alternate.

\)

deny. or I change,

with past tense, when, as

inverted
clause,

as

if.

before
uft,

as

if.

%^fel,
%fi^i,

/. -tn.

shoulder.
f^t^n, eighteen.

olfo, adv.

and

conj.

thus, accord-

num.

eight,

ingly, therefore.
alt, adj. (or

'-m, eighty.

adv.) old, aged, ancient.

a^ten, tr. have regard for, respect; esteem, consider, value.

af^tja^ng, odj. eight-year-old.

sCnglifr^, adj.
fitter,
n.

Old English.
age,

-erS; -r.

old-age,

epoch.

VOCABULABY.
'd\i\i^,(idj. (or adv.) elderly, oldish.

399
consequence
to

5lmcri!tt, n.

America.

matter of no him.
onfuntigcn,
aniocfen,
tr.

5lmcrif ttttcr, m. -rg, -r. American.

ttmcrifanif^, adj. American.
n. -te, lemter. 5lmt, charge, place, smanit, wi. steward,
office,

tr.

announce, notify.
tr.

allure, entice,

annel^men, 0.
accept,

tempt. take on, take,

(at the door).

bailiff,

an|)0^en,
Slnfl^ein,

intr.

knock
-u^.

amusing. amiiftcrcn, tr. amuse. an, adv. and seple prefix,

ttmiifant
cidj-

m. semblance.
tr.

appearance,
at,

on,

anfel^en, 0.

look on or

re-

along, up. prep.: of position {with dat. or accus.), at, by, against,

gard.

along
the

of time, on, upon, at ; in other relations, in respect to, in

;

5lnfc^en, n. -ng, aspect, look. %nftdbt, /. -ten. view, sight, opinion.

way

of, in, at, to,

by,

of.

anbet,

pron'l
;

adj.

other,

else

5lnf|iru^, m, -d^eg, -iid^e. address, claim.

anfiatt, prep,

different

next, second: see

194,

{with gen.) instead,

193. 3c, 203.1a.

anbctd, adv. otherwise,
rently.
else, diffe-

in place.
anfio^eit, 0.
tr.

push

against, strike

against,

intr.

stumble, offend.
face, visage.

Oncrfcnncn, {irreg.) ir. recognize, acknowledge. ?lnfong, m. -gg, -cinge. beginning. anfangcn, 0. tr. set about, begin, xmdertake. intr. begin, originate.
5Cnfu^rcr, m. -x^, -r. leader. ttltgcfiorcn, adj. (or adv.) inborn,
hereditary.
tLn^tf^OVCXlf'irdr.

5lnttt^, n. -^eg, -^e,

antragen, 0. tr. lay before some one, propose, offer. dttttCtbcn, 0. ir. drive on, impel. comnniXtUn, 0. tr. tread on
;

approach, accost. 5(nttlI0rt, /. -ten. answer, reply. antttJOrtcn, tr. answer, reply.
;

mence

belong, appertain.

anDertrauen,

tr.

confide, trust.

ongcltlb^ncn,
ttllgrcifcn,

tr.

0.

accustom, inure. lay hold on, tr.

anxiety, fear.

anlDenbeit, {reg. or irreg. ) tr. turn or apply to something, apply,

seize, assail.

employ.
^(nja^I, /.
{or adv.)

^Ingjl, /. 2(engfte.
(ingfilii, adj.

anxious,
stop,

anjtel^en, 0.
refi.

number. tr. draw on,

self,

attract.

distressed.
an^ttltCtt, 0. tr.

dress one's
tr.

hold on
stop.

to,

ttltjuntcn,
5l|jfel,

kindle, light up.

detain,

intr.
tr.

anIlOten,

listen to, hear to the

end.

anlaufen, anflagen,

tr.

purchase, buy.

tr.

complain

against,

m. -% 5tepfe(. apple. %pxi\, m. -U. AprU. re?(r6ctt, / -ten. work, labor sult of labor, performance. arbeitcn, tr. or intr. work, labor,
;

accuse, charge.

toil,
{voith

anfommen, arrive, come; and accus. ) depend on, i^m uicl)t barauf an,

auf

^rficitcr,

m. -rg,

-r.

workman.

eg !omntt
it

3lrc^i|icl, n. -18.

archipelago.

is

%xvn, m. -meg, -me. arm.

400
arm,
adj. (or adv.)

GEEMAN-ENGUSH
poor, needy, in5Cugufl, m. -t. August.

digent, unfortunate.
ormCttift^, adj.

OUgBrcitcn,

tr.

spread out.
-iicfe.

Armenian.

5lu0brud), m. -d}^, -iid)e. outbreak.

artnlt^, adj. {or adv.) poor, needy;

mean,

paltry.

^U0bru(f, m. -d^, sion; phrase.

augfoHctt,
0.
intr.

expres-

%Xtf /. -ten. kind, sort, manner. crtig, adj. (or adv. ) well behaved, good, obedient, polite, pretty.
SlrgCttCi, /.

|.

faU out,

turn out,
cution.

result.
/.

Wulfit^rung,
ou^fuflcn,

carrying out, exe-

medicine, physic.

m. -te8,-tc. doctor, physician. airmen [atmcn], intr. breathe.

Slrjt,
ttUt^,

tr. fill out or up. 5tu^gan9, m. -ng8, -gange. issue,

adv. or conj. adv.

also, too, even.

event, outlet.
ttuSge^cn, 0. intr. forth or away.
f.

after iDer, tt)a, :c.

ttuf,

ever, soever.

go

out,

go

and

sep'le prefix,

up, up-

dat.

wards; upon, open. prep, (with and accus. ) upon, on, onto, unto, to ; after, on, toward,
against,

ouSgtttben, 0.

tr.

dig out.

tluSfunft, /. -iinftc. information, CUSlttffcn, 0. tr. let out, let go;

auf Uttb nicbcr. Tip and

task,

omit.

down.
SlttfftaBe,/. -ben.

auSxtibtn, 0.

tr.

rub
tr.

out,

rub open.

problem.
rise.
lift

augfj^ta^cn, 0.
ject.

strike out, re-

aufgcbCtt, 0.

tr.

give up, resign.

aufgc^cn, 0. auf$eben, 0.
raise.

intr.
tr.

go up, heave up,

f.

up,

au0fC^Ctt, 0. intr. look, appear. au^ett, adv. out of doors, outside.

ttU^cr, prep, {with dat.
)

outside of,

auf^iiten, irUr. stop, cease, finish. auffldren, tr. clear up, explain,

beside, except, au^et ftt^, beside one's self. conj. except, unless.
ttU^cr
tltt,

brighten.

except that.
{with gen.)

OUfmtt^cn,
rise.

tr.

open,

reflex,

get up,

(iu^er, adj. outer, external.

auftcr^olfi, prep,

out-

aufo|)fern,

tr.
tr.

offer up, sacrifice.

side,

beyond.
tr.

aufrt^ten,
?lufftt^,

set up, erect.

-cii^e.

ttUfecrorilcntUc^, adj. extraordinary.

m. -^eg,

something
stand up,

OUgftire^cn, 0.

speak out, pro-

set up, composition, essay.

nounce.
aulflO^en, 0. tr. thrust out, expel, utter abruptly. ttttSt^cilen [steilcn], tr. deal out,
distribute.

OUfflC^en, 0. intr. I rise ; get up.

auffudien,

tr.

seek out, look up,

open.
f.

search for.
ttUftl&Ult, 0. tr.

aud^tel^en, 0.

tr.

draw
\.

out, extract,

ttUfttlttJ^cn,

intr,

wake

up,

undress,

intr.

move

out, re-

awake.
5lu9C, n. -ge, -gen. eye.
f off en, fix

in0 ^ugc the eyes upon, uiltct

95ttff), rri.

-(^c8, -ad^t.

brook.

%U^tn, tete-a-tete. ^Ugenblitf, m. -!eg, -fe. moment,

diet

JBttjftlcin, n.

-ng, -n. brooklet.

baifen, 0. or
6a)ien,
tr.

tr.

bake.

instant

or intr. bathe.

VOCABULAEY.
ttl^n,/. -nen.
bttltl,

401
0.
tr. tr.

path, road, way.

kginnen,
(egleiten,
escort.
bcgliirfen,

begin.

adv. soon, quickly.

93anb, n. -be^, -be. bond, fetter. $antl, n. -beg, -anber. ribbon.

Biinbtgen,
tr.

accompany, escort. Seglcitcr, m. -rS, -r. companion,

tr.

control, subdue.

give happiness to,

bless.
Beglitlft,

bang, adj. {or adv.) anxious, fearful, eg ift or tt)irb einem bang,

make happy,

blessed, happy.
begititgen, reflex, content one's self,

one

is

or

becomes
bench.

fearful or

afraid.
95ttnf,/. -anfe.

be
in.

satisfied.
tr.

Bcgrcifcn, 0.
sion, idea.

Sartor,

-ren, -ren. barbarian,

(or oc^u.) merciful,

Segriff, m. -ffg, -ffe.

comprehend. comprehen-

savage.
Barmftcrjtg,
ac|/.

Bc^aglil^, adj. {or adv.) pleasing,

charitable.

comfortable.
Befallen, 0.
retain.
Bel^au|)ten,
clare.
Bel^ent), adj. {or
tr. tr.

a^arm^crjigfeit,/. charity. Satabter, w. Batarian.

hold on

to,

keep,

Baucn,

/r.

build.

maintain, assert^ deadv.) handy, nim-

95aucr, m. -rg or -rn, -r or -xn. peasant, rustic.

Saum,

m. -me, -aume.
tr.

tree.

ble, quick.
Bet, sq)'le preflx

(eiingfltgen,

make

anxious,

and

adv. near, by,

at the

alarm.

beside, prep, {with dat.)hy, near;

at, in,

Seanttoortung,/. -gen. answering,

reply.

with,

among;

house

of.

Setter, m. -r, -r. beaker, goblet. kbauern, tr. pity, grieve for.
kterfCtt,
^r.

Beibe, adj. both, the two. Betna^e, adv. near, about, almost.
Seif^Jtei, n.
-Ig, -le.

cover.
tr.

illustration,

bebcnfen, (irreg.)
consider.

think upon,
{with gen.)

example.
Bei^en, 0.
tr.

bite.

ficburfen, {irreg.) inir.

or

tr.

stand in need

of,

need, re-

quire.
93cfcl^l,m.-l,-Ie.
Ibefel|len,

Seiftanb, m. -b. assistance, help. Befannt, adj. {or adv.) known, noted, acquainted; as noun, ac-

command, order.

quaintance.

O.

tr.

commend; comfind one's

self,

Befommen,
ceive.

0.

tr.

get, obtain, re-

mand,
be

order.
reflex,

befinben, 0.

(in respect to health, etc).

tr.

6cfreien,

make
tr.

free, free.

Befrdnjen, tr. adorn with a garland, crown. Befummern, tr. afflict, trouble, concern.
BeleBett, tr. enliven, revive.

befreunben,
(egeBen,
self,

befriend,

befreutts

bet, friendly, allied.

0.
reflex,

betake

one's

BcleBren,

tr.
tr.

teach, inform, correct.

repair; occur.
intr. (with dat.)
tr.
f.

Belo^nen,

begcgncn,
Begel^ren,

meet.

Bemiidltigen,

reward, recompense. reflex, {with gen.) take

of,

bcgel^en, 0.
tr,

go about; commit.

possession

get into

one's

desire, covet.

power,

seize.

m
Betnetfett^
tr,

CERMAN-ENGHSH
remark, observe.
BefleBen, 0.
inir.
tr. stand up, endure* stand firm, insist. tr.

emcrfung,/. -gen. remark, observation.

Bcitfiiicn, tr.

BefteUen,

arrange, order.
tr.

envy.

Befiimmen,
sign.

fix,

determine, de-

BettU^en,

tr.

turn to use, use.

tr.

BcoBdt^teit^

observe, watcli.

BcfircBcn, re/lex.
fort.

Bequemen, tr. make convenient. reflex, accomodate one's self, submit.

exert one's self, endeavor, as noun, endeavor, ef-

Sercbtfamfeit [SctCbW, /. eloquence. Bcteit, cidj. ready, prepared.

BctCttcn,
tr.

Befu^cn, upon.

tr.

go and

see, visits call

Betett, intr.

pray, offer prayer.

tr.

Bettad^ten,
sider,

dwell

upon,
to.

conreflex,

make

ready, prepare.

look

at,
tr.

regard.

Bctcit^, cidv. already.

jSBerg,
rn.

Betragen, 0.

amount

-geg, -ge.

m. miner. mountain-path. S5ctttf, m. -fg, -fe. calling, vocasUlttltn,

mountain. m. ?|)fttll,

behave,
duct.
B etrcff cn, 0.
n.

as noun, bearing, contr.

befall, surprise. Bc

troffen, surprised,
ajctt,

tion, office, profession.

-tte,

-tte

taken aback. or -iter or

Bcrufcn, 0.

tr.

call

upon, summon.
Bctiil^men,

-tten. bed.

Beritimt, past ppl. of

95ctteIBrob, n.

bread obtained by

famous, renowned. Bcft^ttfttgcn, tr. busy, employ, occupy.

JBcft^ttftigung, /.
-geit.

begging.
Bettein, intr. ask alms, beg.

Betten,

tr.

make

the bed, bed.

employ-

Settler, m. -r8, -r. beggar.

ment, business.
JBeft^cil^cnftcit / discretion,

Beugen,

tr.

mod-

Setttel,

bend, bow, incline. w. -U, -t. small bag,

bag, purse.

esty.

money
tr.

Bef^retBen, 0.
Beftnnen, 0.
Beft^ett/ 0.
tr.

describe.

Beuottmtti^ttgen,

reflex,

bethink one's

power

self, reflect.

tr. bestow full upon. SeHottmtt^ttgt, (past ppl. as noun) plenipoten-

possess.

tiary, agent.

Scft^cr,
erty.

in.

-rg, -r. possessor.

Betnegen,

0.

and
-

JV.

ti\

induce;

iScft^ung,/. -gen. possession, propBcfonJier^,

especially.

move,

stir, agitate.

Setuegung,
adv.

gen.

movement,

in

particular,

agitation.

Betoeinen,
BetDCifcn,

tr.

weep
tr.

over, bewail.

Scfonncnl^cit, /. -ten. discretion. Bef|ire$en, 0. tr. speak about, talk

of, discuss.

0.

point out, show,

prove.

BetDUnBern,
:

tr.

admire.
to, testify.

Bcffcr, adj. {or adv.

comp. of gut),

Beja^len,

tr.

pay.
0.

better.

Bejeugen, tr. bear witness

Bcffcrn, tr. correct.

make
tr*

better, improve,

BejtDingcn, quish.

tr.

subdue,
library.

van-

Befie^en^ 0,

corrupt, bribe.

l8iBliatCf, /. -fen.

OEEMAN-ENGtISH
Biegeit/ 0. ir.

403
blood; race,

bow, bend.
beer.
bid, offer.

93lut, n.

teS.

38tcr, n. -reg, -re*

bteten, 0.
ISBilil,

tr.

^lut^tro^jfcn, m. drop of blood. bit], f. -t^cn. blossom,

mmt

n. -beS, -cr. picture, image.

bloom.
95oten,

ff^mtt, m. sculptor. shape, form, Bilt)en, tr.

train.
fiittig,

build,

m. -ens, -oben. ground, floor garret.

;

bottom;

95ol^CniCr,
adj,

w.

-r6, -r.

Bohemian,

(or adv.) reasonable,

;

gypsy.
Botgeit,
tr.

sttlCtB, n.

gypsy- woman.

fair,

just

cheap.

93dW^/ ^-

~f "/ ~^tt

Bohemian.

IStnbe, /. -en. on, bandage.

something bound
bind,
tie,

borrow, lend.

Bo0 or Bbfc,
confine,
evil,

Btnben, 0.
constrain.

tr.

adj. (or adv.) bad, wicked, angry, malicious.

SBof etc i^t, w. villain, scamp, rascal.

93u0!^eit, /.

(tnnen, adv. within, prep, (with dot. or gen.) within, inside of. 6i0, adv. and prep, as far as, until,
till,

badness, wickedness,

anger.

to.

conj.

(for bi ba^)
till,

the time that,

as far as.
3SBt0(^en,

ju,
-%

until.

na^,
bit,

till

messenger. rn. -n6, -en. SrantJ, m. -be, -dnbe. fire, conflagration, brand.

Soten,

until.
little

Brttttt^en,

tr.

use,

employ

be in

n.

-n^, -n.

want
BrttUen,

of,
tr.

need.

Httle.

brew.

S3if^0f,

m,

-ofe.

bishop;

Btaun,

adj. (or adv.)

i^tr.

brown.

bishop (a kind of drink). JBtffcn, m. -n, -n. bit, morsel.

fditit, /. -ten.

BtdUfen,

move on tumultubride;
(in Oer-

ously, roar.
iiBtaut, /. -ante,

request, prayer.

Bitten, 0.
Bitter,

tr.

ask, request, beg.

many
Bteit,

betrothed).
(or adv.) broad, wide.

cidj.

{or ado.) bitter.

cidj.

BIa, adj. (or adv. ) pale.

fdhii, n. -tte, -atter. of book, page.

Bltttt, adj.

leaf

leaf

Bremen, 0. ir. break. Btennen, (irreg. ) tr. or

intr.

bum.

Srett, w. - tte^, -tter. board, plank.

Bricflit^, adj.

(or adv.) blue.

f.

BleiBctt, 0. intr.

continue, stay,

Srief, m. -fc, -fe. letter. (or adv.) by letter,

written.

remain.
Bleit^, adj.

(or adv.) pale, pallid,

Bringen, (irreg.)
bread.
93nirfc, /. -en.

tr.

bring, fetch.

faded.
BUtfen,
tr.

93roi, n. -beg, -be. bread, loaf of

glance, look.

Blinil, adj. (or

adv.) blind.
<^<^v-)

bridge.
-iiber.

Blot, ^dJ'

i'^'"'

bare, stripped,
Bfo^fietteit, tr.

^ruter, w. -x%,
Sriinnlein, spring.
n.

brother.
-n.
little

destitute, mere.

-n8,
breast.

expose, lay open.

Blitl^en,
irdr.

bloom,

blossom,

93rui!, /. -iifte.

flower.

Slumc, /. -men.
^Ittmcttmttlcn# ing.

flower, blossom.
w.

flower

paint-

^uBe, m. -en, -en. boy, youth. S5ut^, n. -t^eg; -iic^er. book. tt(i^brurfetfun|t, /. art of bookprinting.

: :

404
SBuntl,

VOCABULABY.
m. -be, -unbe. bond,
tie;

tiaran, adv. at or

on

it

or that of

league, compact.
fiUnt,cidj. (or adv.)

them:

see 154.3,

166.4, 180,

many

colored,

and

an.

gay, variegated, bright.

iSBurgcr,
wi.

-rg, -r,

townsman,
breast.

burgher, commoner.
lEBufen^

m. -n, -n.

bosom,

thereupon, upon or them or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and anf. baraul, ad^). out of it or them or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
tliirauf, adv.

on

it

or

^arbtnal, m. -I^/ -le. cardinal.

anf.
baretlt,

^Wi^f ^'
christian.

-ten, -ten.

(/.

stin.)

adv.

thereinto

{^^accus.
it,

with in), into or to

etc.
in.

see

G^l^rificnftcit /

Christendom.

154.3, 166.4, 180, and

btttin

^rijtCttfc^ttttr, /.

band

of christi-

ans.
(^rifHit^, adj. (,or adv.) christian.

(brin, or barinncn), adv. therein (= dat. with in), in it, etc.

see

G^igarre, /. -reiu

cigar.

tldtob, ad'\

154.3, 166.4, 180, and in. on account of it, etc.

6^ontotr,

n.

-re,

-re.

counting
or
car-

see

154.3,
tr.

166.4,

180, and
exhibit,

house,
@iOU|)e,
riage.

office.

oh.

n.

railway

car

tmtficUctt,

set forth,

represent.

batum, adv.

therefore,

about

it,

ha

{or

llttr),

o,dv.

there,

then, at

etc.

see

154.3, 166.4, 180, and

that place, under those circumstances,

ever,
after rdative, -ever, -so-

urn.
lJtt0,

see bcr.

in composiiion with preps,

see 154.3, 166.4,

tiaBci, ado.

180
by
it

)afein, n. -n. istence.

being present; exstand there.

thereby;

or

them

ba^e^cn, 0.
baucrftaft,

intr.

f.

or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and bei. fcin, be present, take

adj.

{or adv.) lasting,

part.
2>at^, n. -(^e, -cid^er.

roof.

bafitr, adv. therefor, for it or that

enduring. bauern, intr. last, endure. babon, adv. thereof; of or from it, etc. see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
:

or them: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,

t)on.

and

fiir.

bagegen, adv. against it or them or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,

ha^U,adv. thereto, to or for it, etc. see 154.3, 166.3, 180, and gu.
bcfiatticrcit, intr. debate.

and gcgen.
htifitX,

December, m. -rg. December.

1- tJCtlt, 2.

adv. thence, therefore.

/.

poss. adj. thy, thine.

^amc,

-men. lady.

bcin (or ticincr), gen. sing. o/bu.

bamtt, conj. in order that.

betnig, poss. pro. thine.

ilammern, intr. become dusk. JDttnf, m. -M, gratitude, thanks.

iJttnfcn, tr.

Uenfcn (irreg.) tr. or intr. think; think of, call to mind.

ttCItlt,

thank.

bann, adv. then, at that time.

fet

adv. then, in that case.

tafi,

tS

unless,

conj.

than

Hv,

see ta.

(for aU), beginning a clause, for.

VOCABULARY.
ticnno^f conj. even in that case, notwithstanding.
one; the
time.
latter,

405
sinaf, adv. this

ber

(bie, ba),

demonstr. pron. and

that or
etc.;

^ing,

n. -ge6, -ge.

thing, matter.

adj.

this

or this one,

bitCCt, adj. {or adv.) direct.

that
pers.

one,

as
she,

emphatic
it,

tot^, adv.

and

conj.

though, yet,
all,

pron,
that;

he,

they.

nevertheless, however; after

def. article, the.

rel.

pron. who,

at least, surely; sometimes simply

which,

rarely ^

he who,

but; or only for emphasis.

that which,

etc,

Dcricnigc (bieienige, ba^ienige), determ, adj. and pron. that or that

one, those.
bcrfctftc (biefetbe, bo^fclbe). determ.
adj.
it,

doctor, rn. -r^, -reu, doctor. ^Olk, ^' -^^^, -c^e. dagger. 2)0m, m. -meg, - me. cathedral. bonncrtt, intr. thunder.
tlO|)|)C(n> tr.

and pron. the same; he,

-jd^c.

she,

^Onncrjttt0, m. Thursday. double.

etc.

tojljielt, adj. {or

^CrtOif^, m. -f(^e6,
bclftttlft

dervish

adv.) double. ^orf, n. -fe, -ovfer. village, hamlet.

(IVIohammedan monk).
{or bC^^ttlb), adv. or conj.

tott, adv.

there,

in that

place,

therefore.
tieff enungeat^tet,

yonder.
adv. or conj. never-

ttau^en,
doors.

adv.

outside,

out

of

theless.
ilCJIO,

adv. so
the.

much
;

comparative)
. . .

JC

the (before a Jjcflo, the

.

txt^tn,
iirci,

tr.

turn, twist.
sjc^lt, thirteen.

num. three,

beutf^, adj. German, as noun: m. a German; n. the German language.

^Ctttft^Ittttll, n.

'-m, thirty. brinncn, see iitttinncn.

iiritt,

num.

adj. third.

Germany.
dense.

txof^tn, tr. threaten,

or

intr.

{with

dai.)

bit^t, adj. {or adv.) thick,

menace. tltb^ncn, intr. roar, ramble, groan.

brurfcn,
briiden,
tr.

ttl^tcn,

tr.

produce as the result of

print.

thinking,

compose

{especially

as

tr.

press, clasp, jam.

poetry), invent.

bu, pers. pron. thou.

poet.

^i(^tcr, m. -r, -r.

tuxnm,adj. {or adv.) stupid, dull.

^i^tfun ft,/,
tit, seettx,

art of poetry, poetry.

^umm^cit,/.
tunf el, adj.
biinfcl^ttft,

-ten. stupidity.

{or adv. ) dark,

adj.

gloomy.

titntn, intr. {with da,(.) serve, be of service to, assist.

{or

adv.) arro-

gant.
titnfcn, intr. {with dat.) seem, ap-

Wiener, m. -r, -r. servant. ^icncrfl^aft, /. servants {collectively).

pear; seem or appear

to.

^tenjl, m. -tc, -te.

service,

em-

Biinn, adj. {or adv.) thin, slender. tlUt(^^ adv. and seple or insep'le
prefix,

ployment. ^ien^ttg, m. Tuesday.

ilic0 (biefer, biefe,

{with accus.) through;

through, throughout, prep. through-

biefeS),

dem

adj.

out, during;

by means

of,

by.

pron. this or that, this one or that

tlur^ttU0, adv.

throughout

406
2>ttr(^mttrf^,

GEKMAN-ENGLISH
m.
-fc^eg,

-arfd)e.

cilcn, irdr.

or

ij,

or

reflex,

hurry,

marclaing through.

hasten.

^Urc^mcff cr, m. -r,

iiurt^ft^rcitcn, 0.
tr.

-r.

diameter.

ciUg, adj. {or adv.) hasty, quick,

step through,

hurrying.
1. tin,

walk through.
t^ttx6)tohtn,
tr.

adv. and seple prefix, in, into,

rage through.

tiur^tuetnen,

tr.

weep through.
be permitted or
dare,

corresponding as prefix to in as prep.; in composition with adverbs, into, or in with accus.

2. tin,

IlUtfcn, (irreg.)

tr.

allowed,

feel authorized,

num. one; a person, they,

need: see 253,

turfien or burficn,
thirst,
intr.

one.

or impers.

3.

cin, indef. article, an, a.

indecl.

be

thirsty.

etnanber/

pron.

one

an-

burfttg, adj. {or adv.) thirsty.

other, each other.

buffer, ctdj. {or adv.) scure, dusky.

gloomy, ob-

einbttten,
dat.)

tr.

{with reflex. pr(m. in

form in one's mind, imagone

sort,

ine, fancy.

tbtn,

adj.

{or adv.)

even,

level,

etncrlei, adj. of

the same,

plain, adv. evenly; usimlly, just,

indifferent.

exactly,
like

precisely,

sfo,

adv. in
tract,

manner, likewise. ^htnt, /. -en. even or level

plain.

Cinfa^, adj. simple. etngebortn, adj. inborn, native.

tini^, adj. {or

adv.) one, united,

in pi.

accordant,
echo.
Cinlabcn, 0.

some, a few.

@(^0,

n. -c^og.

tr.

invite.

^dt,f' -!en. edge, corner. ttiti, adj. {or adv.) of noble birth;
noble, exalted,
Clle,

^inltttung, /. -gen. invitation. einmal, adv. once, one time; once

for
all.

adv.

sfnahc, tn. page. sooner, earlier, conj.

ere.

Ctnnc^mcn,

0.

tr.

take

in, receive,

sooner than, before,

Cllcr,

accept; take possession of, captivate, prepossess,

adv. sooner, earlier, rather.

/. -ren.

etngenemmeit,

^tC,
elftren,

honor, glory, good

prejudiced.

repute.

C^innc^mcr, m. -x^, -r. collector.

etttritlfen, intr.
f.

honor, respect, esteem. ^^rcnmtttttt, ra. man of honor. erlt(^, adj. {or adv.) honorable,
tr.

move

in, enter.

tin\av\,adj. (^orodu.) lonely, alone. Cinfc^lttfen, 0. irdr. f. fall asleep.

einfj^rcificn,

honest.
Clrtoitrilig, adj.

0.

tr.

write

in or

{or adv.)

worthy

down,

inscribe.
tr.

of honor, respectable.
ti, interj.

etnfcnbeit,

send

in, remit.

why! oh

^inftt^t, /.

-ten.

insight, intelli-

eifrig, adj. {or adv.) eager, ardent.

gence.
cinfi,

Cigcn, adj. {or adv.)

own, belongodd.

adv. one time, once (in the

ing to one's
property.

self; real;

past);

some day
tr.

(in the future).

in.
reflex,

igent^um [4nm],

n.

-m, -umer.
adv.

Cittflcttcn,

put

prein,

sent one's
ctntretcn,
enter.

self,

appear.
f.

eigenttil^, adj, proper, true.

0.

intr.

step

properly speaking, really.

VOCABTJLAEY,
C^tnUcrjlantmi^ [m], n. -ffe,-ffe.

407

understanding, agreement.
einjeln^
(^dj.

entBtntien, 0. tr. unbind, set freey release, absolve.

single, individual.
tr.

entMiJ^en,
on.

tr.

denude, uncover.
-gen.
discovery,

CtnjtCl^cn,
inir.

0.

draw in or

ntberfung, /.
disclosure.

move

in.

cinjig, adj. (or adv.) only,

sole,

single,

entfcrncn,
reflex,

tr.

put far and

off,

remove.
prefix.

unique.
-nen. railroad, rail-

go

off,

withdraw.
sep'le
j^rep.

^IHnH^n, /.
way.

entgegen,
against,
dative

adv.

toward,
preceding)
sfiel^en/

{with

tiki, adj. vain.

against,

to

(C9tC, /. -ten.

elegy (plaintive
adv.)
miserable,

meet,

stand

against,

poem).
tltnti,

oppose.
{or
ent^ttlten, 0.
in,
tr.

adj,

wretched.
clf, num. eleven. item, pi parents.

contain,

reflex,

hold away; hold keep from,

abstain.
sfrcuilC,

/.

entlttjlen, 0. tr. let go,

permit to

parental joy.
m|lftttt0,

m. -gg. reception, in
receive.
tr.

leave, dismiss, absolve.

entlttttfcn,

0. intr.

run away,

nt^mtn,

escape.
receive, accept.

Cmjlfttngcn, 0.
sation.
CXttpOXf adv.

entlebigen,
tniiodtXif
elicit.

tr.

set free, deliver.

nUlpintlUng,/. -gen. feeling, sen-

tr.

entice or allure away;

and seple prefix, aloft, upward, on higli. sfcimcn, spring

tip.

cntrUden,
port.

tr.

carry away,

trans-

sf^ttucn, look up.

sflrckn,
reflex.

entfttgen, intr. {with dat.)

renounce,
tr.

strive

upward, st^cilcn, divide itself upward.

conclusion,

give up.
entft^eibcn, 0.
{or

N.)

decide,
deci-

(Snte, n. -be, -ben.

end, issue,
,

determine.
sive.

am

end, finally,

in or at the ju at an end.
,

cnlfd)eiJlCntJ,

ntttt^cn, {withdat.)

put an end

cntf^liecn, 0. tr. disclose, reflex. make up one's mind, decide.

to, stop.

ntf^lu^, m.
con-

-ffeg, -iiffe.

resolu-

Ctttligcn, tr. stop, finish.

tion, resolve.

cnt^n^, fiidj. (or adv.) final, cluding, last.

CngC, adj. [or adv.) narrow. (gngd, m. -U, -I angel.

exCntf(^uIti9Cn, tr. exculpate, cuse, reflex, excuse one's self.

C^ntfC^en, n. horror, dread.
entjicjen, 0. Mr. forth, originate.
f.

arise,

spring

en gen,

tr.

narrow, contract.
(/.

(^n^imttv, m. -rg, -r. inhabitant of England.

stin)

entto Ctcr, conj. either {followed by

uber

or).

englif^, adj. {or adv.) English. Cttts, inseple prefix, forth, from,
out,

enttntlfeln, tr.

unwrap, unfold; detr.

velop, solve, explain.

entjtel^en, 0.

away:
tr.

see

307.3.

withdraw, remove

entfiefiren,

{orintr, xoith gen.)

do

without.

or take away. tXf P^rs. pron, he.

408
tXs, insep'le prefix, see

GEKMAN-ENGUSH
307.4.
reflex.

erBarnten,
pity.

tr.

move

to pity,

erfcnntni \^n\S\, /. -ffc perception, knowledge. %xitX, m. -rg, -r. balcony.

CtflatCtt/ tr.

etBauett,
1.

tr. build up, erect. ^Xhe, m. -en, -en. heir, in-

make

clear,

explain

declare,

announce.

[inquire.
inquiries,

heritor.
2.

erfuntligen, reflex,
n. -be^.

make

@rBe,

inheritance.

etiattgcn,, tr.

reach

after,

obtain,

etBU^^
ceive.

cidj'
tr.

{or adv.) hereditary.

reach, attain.

txhiidtn,

catch sight

of,

per-

eriauben,

tr.

allow, permit.

CXhhtU,

tr.

live to see, experience,

(EtBlJnnj, wi. hereditary prince. crBrcd)Cn, 0. tr. break open. earth, ground; /. -ben. C^ri^e,

Ctliigcn, 0.

have happen to one. tr. produce by lying, invent,

eriogen, fabricated, false.

tr.

world.
region.

tbcntttUm, m. earth,
sflrit^, wi.

Crmortcn,
Ctmiibcn,

murder.

surface of earth,
erfal^ren, 0.

zone,

tr.

come upon, make

experience.

weary, tire. ^rmittiung, / weariness, fatigue. renewal, rncucrung, /. -gen.

tr.

experience

of, learn.

renovation.

C^rfttftrung, /. -gen.

BringCtt, learn in rience, learn.

by expe-

rnictJtigung, /. -gen. lowering, humiliation, abasement.

C^tttH,
ity,

m.
cidj'

-teg.

earnestness, grav-

etflnben, 0.

tr.

find out, invent.

seriousness.
{or adv.) earnest,
seri-

CtftCUCn, tr. give pleasure to, gladden, reflex, {with gen.) enjoy, rejoice
at.

Crnfi,

ous, grave.

tXObtxn,

tr.

overcome, conquer.
open, reveal, disclose. quicken, revive, rereach, arrive
at.

etfutteit/ tr. fill; fulfil,

perform.
on, fare,
seize

CroffllClt, tr.

tX^e^tn, 0.

Mr. I go
tr.

tX(\\lidtn, tr.

happen.
crgreifcn, 0.

fresh.

lay hold

of,

ettett^en,

tr.

upon.
txf^dhcn,
lofty,
cidj.

{or adv.) elevated,

etf^etnen, 0. intr. f. shine forth, come in sight, appear.

Ctft^rcrfcn,

subUme.
0.
tr.

0. (or

N.y Mr.

f.

{or

erl^alteit,

obtain,

receive;

reflex.)

be frightened or

startled.

keep, preserve.
erl^eBen, 0.
tr.

crfj^rcrflil^,
lift,

adj. {or adv.) fright-

heave up,
require,

ele-

ful, dreadful.
crfl, adj. first,

vate; extol.
Ctl^cif^cn,
Cr^iircn,
tr.

adv. firstly, at first.

demand.
reflex,

crftcigcn, 0.

tr.

ascend, climb.
forth.

tr.

hear, hear of; grant.

txioncn,

Mr. sound
tr.

crittttcrn, tr.

remind,
/.

{with

Ctttttgcn, 0.

gen.)

remember,

recall.

rinncrung,
brance,

-gen.

remem-

ertoa^en, aroused.
ettna^len,
tXtOaxttn,
crtocifcn,

endure, bear. Mr. f. awake,

be

memory.
{irreg.) tr. perceive, rec-

tr. tr.

elect, select, choose.

erialten, reflex, catch cold.

wait
tr.

for, expect.

erfennen,
ognize.

0.

show,

prove,

render.

VOCABTJLAKY.
CrttJCtBctt, 0. tr.

409
adv.) decayed
;

procure by

effort,

fttUi, adj. {or

lazy,

earn, gain.
erhlicbcrn,
tr,

indolent.

[{French).
n.
-(g,

give back; return,

i^auteuil,

answer.
erjal^Ien,
tr.

c6ruar m.
relate, recount, tell.
fcl^Icn,
intr.

-rg.

armchair -(g. February.

^Clicr, /. feather, pen.

{with dot.) fail,

C^rja^Iung,/. -gen. tale, story. etjiel^en, 0. tr. educate, train.

be
{im-

wanting

(to),

be deficient; be in
.
.

^rjic^cr, m.
teacher.

-rS,

-r.

educator,

fault, err. c0 fc^lt ttJl . pers.) there is a lack of .

C^rjicftung, /. education, training.

^cftlcr, wi. -rg, -r.

error.
feicrlit^, adj.

fault, defect;

t,pers. pron.
C^fcl,

it: see

154.3,4.

m. -U, -I
tr.

cffcn, 0.

eat.

ass, donkey. as noun, meal, re-

{or adv.) ceremoni-

ous, festive, solemn.

f cicrn,

past.
etltC^,

intr.

make

holiday,

tr.

cele-

pron. adj.
indef.

{chiefly

in

pi.)

brate, solemnize.

some, sundry.
etttiad,

^Cicrtag, m. holiday.
{indeclinable)
f eitt, adj. {or

pron.

something, somewhat, used adverbially, in some measure, a

little,

^Cigling, m. -gg, -ge. coward. adv. ) fine, delicate.

fetnti, adj. hostile, inimical.

rather: see 188.

Sfctnll,

1.

CUer, poss. adj. your, yours.

CUCr, gen. pi. of iu. of you, your. n. -Qg. Europe.

m. -beg, enemy, foe.

-be.

(/.

stilt)

2.

^tlti, n. -beg, -ber. field, plain.

@ur0^a,
etotg,

%tU, m.
sfiurf, n.

CUrO|ittif^, adj.
adj.

European.
adv.) everlasting,

rock, clitt. -fen, -fen. piece of rock, cliff.

{or

^eitflcr, n. -rg, -r.

window.

eternal.

fern, adj. {or adv.) distant, far off,

yem^tttr, n. -re, -re* specimen, copy.

^CCllCttJ, /. -gen. excellency.
fal^ren, 0. intr.

remote.
fcrtig,
adj.

{or

adv.)

prepared,

ready, finished.
^Cffel, /. -In.
fetter, chain.

or
tr.

I},

fare,

go,

fcfl,

adj.

{or

adv.)

fast,

firm,

drive,

be drawn in a wagon; go
sail.

strong.

in a boat,
^tt^rt, /.
drive.

drive, row.

SeH,

n. -teg, -te.

festival

fpttjicren fn^rcn, take

-

ten.

a drive. journey, voyage,

fcflgcfugt, past p'ple of fcflfiigcn, fast joined.

feu^t, adj. {or adv.) moist,

intr.

damp.

foacn, 0.
f alf(^,

I fall
if.

gcucr,

n. -rg, -r.

fire.

foils, conj.

in case,

iJicber, n. -rg, -r.

fever.

adj. {or adv.) false.

finten, 0.
ject.

tr.

find, discover; (ioi<^o6-

^amilit,/. -ien. family.

^tt, n. -ffe, -affer. vat, cask. fttffcn, tr. hold, contain; lay hold
of,

pred ) deem, consider, think.

finger.
adj.

i^ittgcr, rn. -rg, -r.

flnflcr,

{or

adv.)

dark,

ob-

grasp,

seize;

comprehend,

scure.
tnftctnife
[sni5],

conceive.
fttfl,

/.

-ffc

dark-

adv. almost, nearly.

410
8fif(!^cr,

GERMAN-ENGLISH
m. -rg, -r. fisherman. /. -men. flame.
(or intr. with dot.) im-

^xan, /.
lady.

-auen.

woman,
woman's

wife,

Jlammc,

gfttf(^C,/.-f(^en. bottle.
flel^en, tr.

^rttUCnft^trffttl, n.

fate.

ftci/ 8idj, {with gen.) {or

adv.) free;

plore, entreat,

as noun, suppli-fd)c.

exempt.
vilege.

sBticf,

m. charter, pri-

cation, entreaty.
3f(etft^,

n.

-f(^e6,

flesh,

meat.
ffet^tg, adj. {or adv.
)

fteili^, adv. to

^Xti^tit, / -ten. freedom, liberty. be sure, certainly.

industriotis.
fj,

fftcgcn, 0. intr.

f
\,

or

fly;

rush.

^reitttg, m. Friday. frcml), adj. (or adv.) strange, for-

ffte^en, 0. intr.
f[teen, 0. intr.

flee,

escape.
flow, run.

orl),

not one's own, unfamiliar, unusual, as noun, stranger, foreign,

Slitter taOt^Cn,pZ.

honeymoon.

eigner.

Sforcnj, n. Florence. SIu^, m. -d)zQ, -iidje. curse.

Kuc^en, swear.
intr,

grcmtC, /. foreign country, gion away from one's home.

ftcffcn, 0.
tr.

re-

{with

dat.)

curse,

eat {said of animals,

not men), devour.

hall.

^lur, /. -ren. field; floor; lu, m. -ff eg, -iiffe. river.

glutfi

grcttte,/. -ben. joy, pleasure, deHght.

frcutig, adj. {or adv.) glad, joyous.

[glut],
tide.

/.

-tf)en.

flood,

wave,

folgcn, intr. f. {with dat.) follow; imitate. fotgctltJ, following.

'goiter, / -t'U.

fteuen,

tr.

give pleasure
rejoice.

to.

reflex,

be glad,
Steunb,
kind.

instrument of tor-gen.

rn.

-beg, -be.

friend.

ture.

sBanf, /. rack.
/.

fteunblil!^, adj.

{or adt;.) friendly,

^orbcrung,
claim.

demand,

SreunJlf(^ttft, /.

-ten. friendship.

^orm^ /. -men. form. fott, cidv. and sep'le prefix,

forward, onward;
off.

forth,

m. -beng, -ben. peace. ricticn|!ruf, m. report of a peace.

griciJC,
frietlUd), adj. {or adv.)

away, gone,
ride away.

peaceable,

sfcin,

he away.
f,

peaceful.
^rtctltif^, in. -cf)g. Frederick.
frilt^,

fortrcitcn, 0. intr.
^ortfd^riti,

forward step, progress, improvement. forttOCrfcn, 0. tr. throw away.

~tte, -tte.

m.

adj.

{or

adv.) fresh; gay,

lively.

^ta^t/f. -gen. question.

fragen, intr. or question.
tr,

frol^,

^riji,/. -ten. period, time. adj. {or adv.) glad, joyous,

{K

or 0.) ask,

happy. ftomm,adj. {oradv.) pious.

froflcht, impers. {with accus.) freeze

franfifj^, adj. Frankish.

^tttttfrci^, n. -d^g.

France.

or shiver,

be

chilly.
fruit.

^ranjofc, m. -en, -en.

French-

Sfrut^t,/- -iid^te.
profit.
frtt^(c),

man.
^ratljoftn,
/.

frud)ten, intr. bear fruit;

be of
in

-innen.

French-

woman.
ftttlljoftfc^, adj.

adj.

{or

adv.)

early;

French.

early morning; speedy.

VOCABULAEY.
frul^Ct,

411

0^3'

(or

adv.)

earlier,

cBtiuilC, n. -c,-C. building, edifice.

sooner.
^rii^Uttg, m. -gg, -gc. spring. frill^flUifen, intr. breakfast.
ful^icit^
tr.

^thtn, 0.

tr.

give, bestow,
is

imp. t$

gifit, etc.

there

or are.

feel,

touch;

be con^

vinced
fullrett,

of.

ibtX, m. -rg, -r. giver. cBct, n. -tg, -te. prayer.

gcbtetcttf

tn carry, bring; lead, con-fe.

0.

tr.

order,

command,

duct, drive.

bid. vehicle,
gebotctt, past pple (of geBaren).

^U^rtoerl, n. -U,

wagon. fiinf, num.

fifty.

born.
five, sjc^lt, fifteen, sjig,

tM, n.

-tg, -te.

commandment,
intr.

bidding.
little

i^unfll^en, n. -n^, -n.

spark.

int, prep, with accus. for; in behalf of; instead of; before dbjec, pred.
as.

gcbtttUC^cn, tr. {rarely gen.) use, employ.

with

@e6urt0tag, m. birthday.
cbttttfc, tn. -!eng, -fen. thought,

Sfurc^t, /. fear.

idea.

fur^tbar, adj. (or

terrible.
.f itr^tCtt, tr.

adv.) fearful,

gcbcnfcn,

{irreg.) intr.

ace. , less often with gen.)

{genVy with think of,

be afraid of,

fear, reflex.

remember.
ciJicdt, n. -teg, -te.

be

afraid,

become

frightened.

poem.
crowd,

flirt^tcrlic^, adj.

{or adv.) fearful,

terrible.
^iirfl,

cbriingc, throng.

n.

-geg, -ge.

m. -ten, -ten. prince.

-nnen. princess.
foot,
strttt,

gfurflitt, /.

eUttlb, /. patience. Cftt^t, /. -rcn. danger,

peril.
gcfii^rlit^, adj.

risk,

guft, m. -ufeeg, -iiBe. m. footstep.

{or adv.)

danger-

ous.

tt6e, /. -ben. gift, present. gaffen, intr. gape, stare, look with

cftiftrte,

m.

-ten,

-ten.

com-

panion.
cfii^rtin, /. -innen.

astonishment.

companion.
dat.)
suit,
of.

oncttc,
gttltj, adj.

/. -ten.

gallery.

1.

gefatten,

0.

{with

entire, whole, complete.

2.

please,

meet the approbation

past
pple

adv. wholly, quite.

gefttUcn, past pple o/foBcit.

got, adj.
plete,

(inded.)

finished,

com-

gcfttngcn,

done.

adv.

completely,

caught,

captured,
[sniS],

of fangcn, imprisoned.

quite, absolutely; very, exceed-

as noun, prisoner, captive.

wUh negative, not at all. orten, m. -m, -drten. garden.

ingly.

cfiingni^
prison.

n.

-ffeg,

-[fe.

tirtnet, m. -r, -r.

gardener.

Cfolgc,

n.

-geg,

-gc. following,

@ofl, m. -teg,
pitable,

-afte. guest, visitor.

escort, retinue.

sftet, adj. liberal to friends,

hos-

Cfufti, n. -teg, -te. feeling, sensation, sentiment. gegen, prep, (with ace.) against,

sfreunblilft, hospitable.

attt, m. -ten, -ten. husband.

ge, insep'k prefiXf see 307.5.

opposed

to; over against,

oppo-

412
site to.

GEEMAN-ENGUSH
stCtlOluttOtt, /. coTinter-

dat.)

concern,
tr.

have

to

do
or

revolution.

with.
gelit^en,

egcnftanb, m. -H, -anbe. object,

topic, subject.

or

intr. (with dat.

accus.) usuattyin 3d pers, desire,

gegcniikt, adv. opposite, prq). (wUhdat.) opposite, over against,

gel^etm,
secret.
adj.

hanker.
Cmttl^I, m. -te, -le. spouse, consort,

(or

adv.)
n.

private,

husband.

cma^Hn,
[mB],
tr.
|.

@c^cimni
secret,
gel^en,

-[fe,

-ffe.

mystery.
go,

/. sinncn. spouse, wife. (^emdttJe, n. -beg, -be. painting. gemetn, adj. {or adv.) (wUh dat.)

0.

impers. {with dat.)

move, walk. go or fare

common, belonging
to; public.

in

common

with,

be

(in health etc.).

intr.

Cmiife,

n. -\t%, -fe.

vegetables.
soul,

gel^Or^en, to, obey.

{with dat.) listen

cmutft

b\ii] , n. -tt|e, -t^er.

spirit, disposition.

{^el^Otcn, ii^r. {with dat.)

belong

to,

gCttlut^lit^

[siitti^], adj. {or

;

adv.)

appertain
cifl,

to.

good
spirit,

natured

comfortable,

m.

-te8, -ter.

mind.

cozy.

geifitg,

adj.

{or adv.) relating to

genetgt, see nctgcn.

Citcrtti,

the

mind

or

spirit,

spiritual,

m.
0.

-leg,
intr.

-ak.
\.

general.

mental.
getflU^, adj. {or adv.) spiritual; as noun, clergyman, clerical,
minister.
fieiflreit^,

gencfcn, cover.

get well, regenius.

@cnie,

n. -leg, -leg.

adj.

[or adv.) spirited,

gcnicftcn, 0. tr. {less often inir., with gen.) enjoy; use as food or

witty, clever.
getjig, adj.

drink, eat.
avaricious,

{or adv.)

covetous.
geliiuftg,

genug^ adv. enough, sufficiently; us&l as indecl. noun, enough,

plenty.

adj,

{or

adv.)

current,
coin,

fluent, voluble, easy.

cnuft, m.
pleasure.

-ffeg, -iiffe.

enjoyment,

@c(tl, n. -beS, -ber.

money,

cash.

elcgcnl^cit, /. -ten. opportunity, occasion.

gele^rt,
adj.

geraDe, adj. straight, direct, even; erect; plain, adr. directly, just,
precisely.
[sratcn], 0. intr.
fall;

learned,

as

noun,

gcrttt^cn

f.

get,

learned man, scholar.

geltngett, 0.

come,

turn out, happen.

Mr.

\.

{withdal.; used

in 3d pers. only) prove successful,

gere^t, adj. (or adv.) righteous, upright, just, right.

gcrc^tfcrttgt,
tCC^tfcrtigcn.
cated.
geringflfta^ig,
adj.

turn out as desired. t gCs one succeeds or prospers, as noun, success,

lingt einem, etc.,

past

pple

from
vindi-

justified,

prosperity.

depreciating,

gcloben,

tr.

promise, vow.

contemptuous.
cmittttitt, /.
ijkd).

gelten, 0. intr. {used in

impersonally)

3d pers. or have value; {with

Germany

(person^

VOCABULARY.
gCttt, ctdv.

413
-ten.

with pleasnre, gladly,

ehlttit, /.

power,

force,

willingly, mot^te

e0

if^nn,

like to

would like. do it. c

like
it.

might.
gCtDaltfam, adj. {or adv.) forcible,
violent.

l^aben,
ing.

be fond of or

cfttng, m. -g, -cinge. song, sing@Cf(!^ttft, n. --t, -te.

fair.

gCtninncn, 0.
JU

tr.

fte^en, be to be gained.

win, gain, obtain.

business, af(impers.)

gCtt)i, adj. {or

adv.) sure, certain,

undoubting; certain, some.

0.
inir.
f.

9Cf(ftc^cn,

happen, come to pass, befall, take place, be done. Cft^cnf, n. ~U, -fe. gift, present.
@cf(^i^te,
history.
/.

etniffcn, n. -n. conscience.

consciousness;
-r.

emitter, n. -rg, storm.

gelDO^nen,
tr.

thunderwith gen.)
getOOl^nt,

-ten.

story,

tale,

{or intr.
to.

be
species,

@ef(^tc^t, n. -m, -ter. race, family.

geft^hlinb,
adj.

accustomed wont, used to.

tr.

getnb^nen,
swift,

accustom, habituate.

{or

adv.)

rapid, quick.

gehlb^nlifi, adj. {or adv.) ordinary, customary, usual.

etoitl^t, n.
IttltJ,

efctt or sUtfTn. -en, -en. comrade,

companion;
ciety; party.

ai)j)rentice.

-U. w. -ge^.
intr.

turmoil, tumult.
lustre, splendor.

@cfcUftf)ttft, /. -ten.

company,

so-

glanjen,
IttI,

shine, glitter, glisten.

n. -je, -a[er. glass,

tumbler.
belief

(Scfc^, n. -^eg, -^e. law; rule.

laube, m. -ben^, -ben.

faith.

Cfif^t, n. -t^, -te or -ter.

(pZ. -ter) face,

sight;

visage;

{pi -te)

glauben,

tr.

believe; think.
n. article of faith.

vision.

@laukn^fa^,
be minded,
^cfonncn,

gcftnncn, 0. intr. f. intend, purpose.

IttUbiger, m. -x^, -r.

gleic^, adj. like,

creditor,

resembling; alike,
adv.
similarly,

minded, disposed.
cfinnunfi, /. -gen. state of mind, disposition, intention.
Cftttit, /.

equal

direct,

equally; directly, at once.

gteit^en, 0. inir. {with dat.)

he

like,

-ten.

appearance, aspermit.
adv.)

equal, resemble.
(ei^gultijj!cit, / indifference.

pect; form, shape, figure.

gcftttttcn, tr. allow,
fiCflcrn,

@(et^ma,
tion.

n. uniformity,

proporself

adi\ yesterday.
adj.

0Cfunb,

(or

healthy,

glei^fietten, reflex,

put one's

sound, well.
cfuniJfteit, /. health.
fiCtreu, adj. {or adv.) true, faithful.

on an

equality, equal, rival.

gleic^tDO^t, adv. nevertheless.

Io(fc, /. -fen.

beU.

etlJOt^g,

n.

-fe,

-fe.

anything

growing; plant.
gelua^ren, tr. warrant, guarantee, assure; grant.
@ettltt^rmi0, /. warranting, granting.

glorreit^, adj. glorious. lnd, n. -feS. luck, fortune;

good

fortune, happiness.
glutfen,
intr.
\

or

^.

{impers.

with dat.) turn out well, succeed.

414
glitrfU^,
(?/.

GEKMAN-ENGLISS
{or

adv.)

happy,
blessed,
favor,

fortunate.
fllurffclig,

riin, n. -ncg. green color, green, ness, verdure.

rn. -beg, -iinbe. ground, bottom; grounds, reason, cause. gC^Cn, go to destruction. Jtt gtunticn, tr. lay the foundation of, found, establish.

adj.

highly
grace,

runtJ,

bUssful.

ntttC,

/.

-en.
{or

mercy.
gniibig,
adj.

adv.) gracious,

propitious.
@oftl, n. -beg.
gold.

griinblitt), adj. {or

adv.) deep, thor-

ough.
riintlttng, /. foundation. rufe,m. -feeg,-iiBe. greeting, sal-

golbcn, adj. golden. goH)i9, adj. golden.

Oltlfi^mieb, m. goldsmith. Olbflttrf, n. gold-piece.

utation.
grit^en,
uliieit,
tr.

greet, salute;

bow to.

0Onnen,

tr.

grant willingly, not

m. -ng, -n. florin (coin of

favor, grace, goodwill

various values).

@Ott, rn. -tteg, -otter, god; God. 0OttU^, adj. {or adv.) god-like, divine.

m%f.

gitnfiig, adj. {or adv.) favorable.

@d^e, w.
god. graven, 0.

-en, -en.
tr. dig.

idol,

false

unfiling, m. -gg, -ge. favorite. gut, adj. {or adv.) good, proper;
kind.
adv. well.

ni,

n. -teg, -liter, property, pos-

tttf , m. -fen, -fen. count, earl. riifln, /. sinncn. countess.

session, goods; estate.

-re, hair {used coUec-

ram, m.
dislike.

-meg.

grief,

sorrow,

^aar, w.-reg,
tively

or singly).
tr.

griifeli^, adj.

{or adv.) horrible,

l^ubcn, {irreg.)

have, possess; as

ghastly.

avx'y, have,

gem

grauen, intr. {impers. with dai.) cause horror, fill with dread, make to shudder.
graufen,
grcifen,
seize.

niitftig [niitlg]

like.

need, want.

l^ab^aft, adj.

having possession,
ttierben, get

with gen.

and

pos-

i^r. {impers.

wUh

dat.)

session

of.

excite horror in, horrify.

0.
tr.

^afcr,
grasp,

rn.

-rg. oats.

gripe,

^a^n,
cock.
I^ttlft,

rn.

-ncg,

-nen

or -dt)ne.

@rci0, m. -fe8, -fe. old man. rcn^C, /. -sen. boundary, limit.

rcnjjicin,
wi.

adj. half. adv. half,

by halves.
on

sjtoet, etc.
l^ttlfecr

half past one, etc.

boundary

stone.

reuci, m.

-Ig, -t. horror, outrage.

a,dj.

account

or sben, prep, {with gen.) of, for the sake of.

grimmig,
gtofe, adj.

{or adv.) wrathful,

furious, fierce.
{or adv.) great,

alfte, /. -en. half. tte, /. -Hen. hall.

ttl0, rn. -feg, -olfe.
sbanti,
ri.

large,

neck

throat.

big, huge, tall; eminent, grand.

necklace.

ruft, /. -iiftc. cave, hollow; sepulchre, tomb.

gtttJl/ adj. (or

^ttlt, rn. -teg, -te.

hold; halt, stop.

I^alten,

0.

tr.

hold, keep, retain;

adv.) green.

contain; esteem, think.

VOCABtJLAET.
ttlttl, J- -cinbe.

its
-cf)6.

hand.

^Cinri^, m.
l^cife,

Henry.

l^anbeln, intr. act, behave; trade,

adj. {or adv.) hot.

tr.

carry on commerce,

deal in something, ^aniltoerf^ n. handicraft, trade.

,

mit CttDdl

I^eiten, 0.

bid,

command;

call,

name, mean,

intr.

be called or named^
adv.) clear, bright,
hero.

signify.

I^angen^ 0. intr. hang, depend. j^dngettf i'"'- cause to hang, sus-

fitiitV, odj. {or

cheerful.
%t\ts, rn. -ben, -ben.

pend.
^(ltl,
infh.

-fen.

Hans, Jack.

iclbcngrofec, /. heroic greatness.

sfinn, wi-

partner, w. -r, r. harper. ^ttrm, m. -meg. harm, hurt, injury; sorrow, grief.
l^atten, intr. wait,
tation.

heroism.
intr.

^Clbin, /. sinncn. heroine.

l^elfen,

0.

{with dat.)

help,

Hnger in expechard;
stiff.

aid, assist.
l^ett,

5 art,

ci'dj.

(or adv.)

adj. {or adv.) {of sound) clear, distinct; {of light or color) light,
clear, bright.

sltacftg, adj. stiff-necked.

^tt^, m. -[[e.

hatred, enmity.

^Cttgfi,

wi.

-te,

-te.

stallion,

Pn^, (??.

(or adv.) ugly, hateful.

steed,

l^a^ig, adj. (or adv.) hasty, hurried.

^enfer, m. -rg, -r. hangman, executioner.

j^Cr,

^ttUfe, m. -fee, -fen.

heap, pile;

mass, company of people.

^ttU|lt,
n.

-te,

-aupter.

head;

this

ddv. and sepHe prefix, hither, way, toward the speaker or

hence).

chief, leader.

the point had in view or con-aitfer.

^auB,

n.

-feg,

house, ju

ceived {opposite of
ttttl
.
.

llin,

>^aufe, at the house, at home. not^ ^(iU\t, to home, home.

^ttU0frttU, /. housewife.
l^eben, 0.
tr. heave, lift, move. ^eer^ n. -re, -re. host, army.

||Ct,

round about.

l^eraB^ adv.

hither,
I^etan,

and seple prefix, down down. adv. and sep'le prefix, on

0. intr.
\.

hither, near.

^CCrtJC, /. -ben.
l^efttg^ adj. {or

herd, flock.

^Cranfommcn,

come on

adv.) vehement, vio-

or near, approach.

lent,

^Cftigtcit, /.
osity.

impetuous. vehemence, impetu-

^erau^, adv. and seple prefix, out

hither, out.

ftcraugfttflen, O. intr.

f.

fall out.

^eil, n. -te6. health, prosperity; as

^CtttU^flntlcn, 0.
flex,

tr.

find out.

re-

exclamation, hail!
^eitcn,
tr.

find one's

way

out, stand

heal, cure.

forth.
l^erBet, adv.

f^tiii^fOdj. {or adv.) holy, sacred.

and seple

prefix,

near
fall.

I^etligen,

tr.

hallow,

make

or keep

by

hither, this way.

rn.

sacred or holy.

Ctbfi,

-teg, -te.

autumn,
(toward

^Cimot^

[sttt],

-t^en. /.
0.
intr.

home.
f.

I&erein,

adv. and seple prefix,

in

I&cimfommen, home.
cret

come

hither,

inward
tr.

the

speaker).
^ercinfuftrcn,

i^etmlic^, adj. (or adv.) private; se-

lead in.
intr.
f.

^crcinfommcn, 0.

come in.

416
Herntetiet,
ctdv.

GEEMAN-ENGLISH
and seple prefix. downward, from
hither); sometimes simply along;

down
above.

hither,

^ttoB, m. -g, -oen. hero. ^crr, rn. (-rren or) -xxn, -rrcn {or -rrn). master, lord; gentleman; {in address) sir; {before a name) Mr. Ijcr ^Crr, the Lord, ^ctts gott, in. the Lord God.
^Crrf^ttft, /. -ten.

be gone or away or lost. fiinah, adv. and sep'le prefix, down thither, down. l^tnauf, adv. and sep'le prefix, up thither, upward.
fcitt,

gone,

lost,

too

l^tn,

whither.

^inaufftral^len, out.
I|tnau0, adv.

intr.

shine

up

or

lordship, do-

and

sep'le prefix,

out

minion; master and mistress, employers; person or persons

of rank.
^crrfc^cr, m. -r8, -r. ruler, lord. adv. and sepUe prefix, over
hither, to this side.
I^erutn, ado.

hence or

thither, forth.

^inttU06cgcben, 0. reflex, betake one's self away, go forth.

lirtttUlgC^cn, 0. intr. forth.
]^ittttU3tel|en, 0. tr.
f,
[.

go out or
intr.

l^etitbct,

pull out.

and sq)le prefix, round

march
tr.

out.

about, around.

l^inDern,
sep'le prefix.

hinder, prevent.

lerunter,

adv.

and

I^inein,

adv.

and
0.

sep'le prefix,

in

down
or

hither.

thither, in.

I^erdor, odv.

and seple prefix, forth forward hither, forward,

{irreg.)
tr.

lincingc^cn,
thither.

intr.

f.

go in
cheat or

forth, out.

|itteinf(^toinbcln, reflex,

lemorftrtngen, forth or out.

ject.

bring

swindle one's
cheating.
l^ingellen,

self in, get in

by

l^crdortogctt, intr. jut forth, pro-

0. intr. f. go there or away; pass on, elapse.

tr.

^etj, n. -genS, -gen. heart; courage, spirit.

l&crjUt^, adj. {or adv.) hearty, cordial.

I^tttl^or^en,

listen.

|infommen,0. Mr.f. come forth or away, get (to somewhere or

l^tnlegen,

^crjog, m. -g, -oge. duke.

I^euttg,

adj.

{or adv.)

of

today;

modern.
l^icr,

adv. here, in this place.

lier^er, adv. hither, to here.

same as ^itlfe. ^immcl, m. -18, -(. heaven, sky,

^ilfc,

something). tr. lay away or down. JinnCtt, adv. hence. I^tnftttfen, 0. intr. f. sink down. itnftreifen, tr. stretch, extend. l^tntet/ adj. hinder, back. adv. and sep'le prefix, behind, back, in the
rear.

heavens.
l^tmmltf^, adj. {or adv.) heavenly,
celestial.
5ill,

^VXXi\stX,adv.

thither,

and sepHe prefix, over over (from this side),

0.
intr.
f.

across.
prefix,

adv.

and sepHe

hence,

I^iniibcrlttufcn,

run

way, away from the speaker or point had in view or conceived (ppposUe to f^tt,
that

across.
fiinnnitX^adv.aridsep'le prefix.down

hence,

down

thilier,

down.

VOCABtJLAEY.
^tntoerfen, 0.
tr. throw away or down. ^tngchJOrfcn, casually thrown out, chance.

411
{rardy
intr,

I^itten, tr.

with gen.)

have heed, watch, r^ex. guard

one's
filter,
self,
wi-

beware.
-r8,
-r.

^ixi, m. -ten, -ten. shepherd. fot^, ctdj. (as declined, ^o^er, etc.)

guardian,

keeper.
giittc, /. -ten. cottage,

high,
pride.

tall, lofty,

great.
^-

hut; tent,

^od)mut$ [smut],

arrogance,

tabernacle.

^Ot^toertttt^ [stttt]/m.

high trealook

tc^,

pron.

I.

son.
1^

^tCC, /. -cen. idea, notion, contr.

off en,

hope,

expect,

ception.
t^r, 1.

for.

nom. plu. of
of
fit,

Iju, ye,

they.

^Offnung, /. -gen. hope, expectation.

i)fli(^fcit,/. courtesy, politeness.

2. dai. sing,
it.

fern, to

her or

3.

poss. adj. {for Sdpers. sing,

fern.)

her or its.

4.

poss. adj. {for

^Oft^iit,/. door of the courtyard. 1^0^, see ^0^.

I^dl^nen,
ioliJ,
tr,

Sdpers. plu.) their; ^^X, (in address) your.

tl^tig,

scorn, scoff
{or

at.

o^j'

adv.)
;

favorable,
pleasing,

poss. pron, her, ^^rtg, your.

its; theirs,

propitious, gracious
lovely.
I&olen, tr. fetch, bring.

im

= in iicm.

immct, odv. ever, always, continually; yet, still.

^oUc,

/. -en. hell.
fn.

in, prep,

{with dat. or accus.) in,

^ottengei^,

infernal spirit.

into, to, at, within.

ol5, n. -geg, -ge or -otjer. wood, timber.

I^Ot^en, irdr. hearken, listen; give ear to, hsten to.
tr.

inbem,
while.

conj.

in or during that, adv.

intlC^ or
conj.

sffcn,

meanwhile

while.

pren,

OtbC,/. -ben. horde, troop. intr. or tr. hear, give ear to; hearken.
{or adv.) pretty.
I^ulbigen, intr. {withdat.)

innct, odj' inner, interior; as neuter nouny inner self, heart.

inncr^alfi, prep, (with gen.) inside
of.

J&iiBfd), adj.

pay hom-

^nfcl, /. -tn.

isle,

island.

age

to.

^itlf e, / helpy- aid, assistance.

intntefern, conj. as far as. ittlif (^, ctdj- {or idv.) earthly,

mor-

^iilfclciflung,

/.

rendering

of

tal.

help.
I&ulftcit^, adj. {or adv.) helpful.

ttgenti, odv. ever, soever.

^rrtftum [stum], m. -m,-iimer.

error, mistake.

^umor,
^untl,

rn. -r^.

humor.
dog.

rn.

-be^, -be.

^taticn, n. -ng. Italy.

^tttUf net, m. -rg, -r. Italian.
part, of assent, yea, yes.
/. -ben. chase,

^Untert, num. hundred, hunger, w. -r^. hunger, appetite.

I^ungern,
ger,
intr. (or tr.

impers.)

hun-

jtt,

be hungry.
hat.

^agb,

hunt; hunt-

gut,

rn, -te, -iite.

ing party.

418
jftgen, intr.
tr.
f

GERMAN-ENGLISH
or
1^.

huiit,

chase.

^ungc, m. -eng, -en. young one,

youth, stripling. ^iittgUng^m.-gg^-ge. young man,
3'^outh.

hunt.
century.
season.

^tt^r, n. -reg, -re. year, if^mtitxi,

n.

Sttl^rcSjeit/. -ten.

3jimmer, m.

-r8, -r. sorrow, grie^ misery, lamentation.

^ttffce,

m.

-ee6.

coflfee.

^aifcr, m. -r, -r.

a(^".

SanUttt, m. -r. January. \t, adv. always, ever, jc ... |C or

JC
.

emperorless,

emperor, slog, without an

bcfto,

{before
.
.

comparaor the
. .

^ttlf,
fttit

emperor. m. -!e,

-fe.

lime, chalk.

tives)

so

much the

adj. (or adv.) cold, frigid.

the.
iel> (jeber,

jebe, jebeS),

pron. each,

every, either, see 190.

fn. -bs or -ben, -ben. comrade, companion. ^ttmtll, m. -ne8, -ne. chimney,

^amerab,

ietertnann, m. every one.

jjebeiSinal,

man, every

fireplace.

hammer, /.
s^tXt, ni.

-rn.

chamber, room.
fight,

adv.

each time, every

chamberlain.

time.
ittio6i,adv,

^ttm^f, m. -pfeg, -ampfe.

however, notwithstand-

contest, struggle, battle.

ing, yet.

fttmUfcn,
^ttlinc,

intr. fight,

struggle.

pron. every, each, see 190. je^cr (je ever and ^cr hither), Hon jel^er^ from always to here or now, always.
fCfiKd),

/.

-nen.

can,

tankard,

pot.

Stttt, rn. -Ig.

^a^itel, n. -1, -t. chapter. Charles.

.^etnanb, pron.

some or any

one,

^ttrtcnfllicl, n.

game

of cards, card

somebody.
jcn (jener, jene, jene8), pron. yon, yonder, that, the former, see

playing.
^ttrtoffcl, /. -In.

potato.

^aitx,
^ttuf,

wi.

-rS, -r.

tom-cat
purchase, bar-

163.
jenfcitS, prep,

m.

-fe^, -ciufe.

(with gen.)

on the

gain.

other side
fc^t,
a(^u.

of,

at the

beyond. present time,

faufcn,

tr.

buy, purchase.

now.
^iO^anntt, /. Jane, Joan.

^ttufmann. ^ttUfmttnn,m. -nne (rarefy -anner, generally ^anffeute). merchant,

^ttuflcute, see

^uie, m. -en, -en. Jew. ^itDin, /. -inn en. Jewess. Nugent), /. youth, time of youth;

tradesman.

tanm, adv. hardly, scarcely, but

just.

young people, youth,

/.

sfreuitttn,
sfrfjcin,

^e^lc/.-Ien. throat.
ttimtn,intr. germinate, shoot forth,

friend of youth,

m.

light of youth.

develop.
fctn, pron.

3ul!, m. -m. July, srcuolution,/. l-evolution of July (1830).

no, not one, not any,

cellar.

no

one. see 195,2.

rn.

Suni, m. -ni. June. jun0 CM??. ;or a(iu.) young, youthful : new, recent.

better,
fcitncn,

-r, -r.
tr.

(irreg.)

know, be

ac-

quainted with.

TOCABULAET.
tenner,
tn. -X^, -r.

419
sf^itelett,

knower, conjail,

^ombbic,/. -{en. comedy,

n.

noisseur.

comedy-acting.
-gg, -ge. king.
adj. {or

^Crfer, wi. -r^, -r. prison, geon.

dun-

^bmg,m.
fbniglil^,

^bmgin,/. -innen. queen.

fetter,

^ttU,
bond.

/.

-ten.

chain,
child.

adv.)

kingly,

royal.

^tnil, n. -beS, -ber. ^ittbletn, n. -nS, -lu

^bntgret^,

little child.

fbnnett, {irreg.)

^ir^C, /. -d)en. church. ^i^t,f' -ten. chest.

tlagcn,
intr. or tr. mourn, bewail, lament, complain.

kingdom, realm. tr. can, be able, have power; he permitted; know, understand, see 251, 254.
71.

^O^lf, rn. -fe, -bpfe. head.

^oxh,

in.

-be, -brbe.
rn.

basket.

^(ang, m. -ge, -ange.

ringing, clang.
fJttt, adj.

sound,
bright,

^br^ICr,

-r,

-r.

body

sub-

stance; corpse.
clear,

{or adv.)

fofibar, adj. {or adv.) costly.

fojien,
tr.

fair; evident.

cost.

^lar|ett, /. clearness, brightness.

^\t\tSp n. -be^, -ber.

fbftUc^, adj.

or adv.

costly,

pre-

garment,

arti-

cious; delightful, delicious.

ftd^Clt, intr. crack, crash.

cle of clothing, dress, raiment.

fleitt, (idj.

{or adv.) little, small; in-

^tttft /

-Cifte.

strength, vigor;

significant, petty.

power, force,
trifle.

^Ictnigfcit, /. -ten.

frdftig, adj. {or adv.) strong, vigor-

^leinoti^ n.

-bicn {or -be), ornamental or precious thing;

-be,

ous, powerful, mighty.

fttt^cn, intr. crow.

jewel.
fling ein, intr. tinkle, ring the bell.
flo|)fen, intr. beat,

ixmt,
knock.
cloister,

adj.

{or adv.)

ill,

sick, dis-

eased, as noun, sick person, invalid.

n. sick-bed.

^(ofter,

n.

-r@,

-lifter,

^tttnfcnktt,
^ranf^cit, /.

monastery, convent.

-ten.

illness,

sick-

Hug, adj. {or adv.) prudent, shrewd, sagacious, clever. ^nak, m. -ben, -ben. boy. ftnCJ^t, m. -te, -te. servant, vassal.

ness, disease.

^xant,

n. -teg, -autcr.

herb.

^retlittti, n. -ties, -t)e. credentials.

^Xti, m. -feg,

-je.

circle.

^rCUJ,

n. -geS, -ge. cross, crucifix.

^nic, n. -e8, -c.

knee.
cook, boil.
coffer, trunk.

sjUg, rn. crasade.

fniecn, intr. kneel.

BxtU^CX,rn. -r8, -r. kreuzer (small

coin).
freu^tgeit,
tr.

fo^en,

tr.

or

intr.

Coffer, rn. -X9, -r.

crucify, pple as noun,

^0ffctd)en, n.
fibin {or

-m,
-

-n. little trunk.

the crucified one.

(Siitn), n.

-n.

Cologne.

Wcg,
t(jttt,

^ommonbttnt, i^mander. (ommen, 0. intr.

proach,
about.
arrive

ten, -ten.

comap-

m. -geS, -ge. war, ^tiegcg^ /. deed of war,

-le.

l^rofobil, n. {or m.) -leg,

f.

croco-

come,

dile.

occur,

come

^rone,

/.

-nen. crown.

^ru|J|JCl, rn. -Ig,

-I

cripple.

420
^utf)C, /. -d^en.

GERMAN-ENGLISH
kitchen.
place, sfirerfe, / stretch of land, region. gttniJcStJcrtuetfung, /.

f. -In. ball, bullet. ful^r, adj. {or adv.) cool.

^Htl

banishment.
1. Itttig,

fu|n, adj. (or adv.) bold, daring,

intrepid.

adj.

{or adv.)

long,

ex-

tended, protracted; high,

2. lanjj

tall.

tUttintCtlt, tf. grieve, trouble,

^ultUt/ /. culture, civilization. concern,

care.
reflex,

{or longc),

adv.

long,

concern one's

self,

long while; by far, see 230.1a. Sangenol^ren, m. a long-eared one.

langetuetien bore, tire,
{or

langtucilen),

tr,

jfitnfttg,

adj. (or adv.) to

come, fu-

reflex,

be bored.
dat,

ture.

^Unft, /. -iinfte. art, skill; art (as distinguished from science).

^

Idng0, prep, {with along, see 373a.

or

gen.)

longfam,
Ittngji,

adj. (or adv.) slow.

sf^ulc, /. art-school.
fiunftlcr,

m. -rg,

-r. artist.

very long (already), long since, a great while ago.

adv.
alone, leave;
let,

^Ur,/. -ren. choice, election; right of electing, sfiirft, m. Elector (i. . one of the princes formerly entrusted with the election of the German emperor), sfiirftcits

Ittffcn, 0. tr. let

permit, allow, suffer; {often with another verb in infin. ) cause, make,
effect,

perative, let.

bring about, have; in ime0 liifet fl^, it can

be, it is possible,
see

t^Um [stum], n. electorate (territory of an Elector).

fnX], adj. {or adv.) short, brief.

be;

it

may

343.5d
SttUf,
inn.

-\t^, -cinfe. course, career.

]).

fuffen,

tr.

kiss.

^iiftc, /. -ten,

coast, shore.

laufen, 0. intr. \or rapidly.

per.
Ittttt,

run,

move

^Utf^Cr, m. -x^, -v. coachman,

driver.

Saunc,/. -ncn. humor, mood, temadj. {or adv.) loud, aloud.

ini.

iSaBfal, n. -leS, -le.

refreshment,

SttUt,

-teg, -te.

sound, tone.
life,

comfort.
lad^en, intr. {rardywith gren.) laugh,

leBen, intr. live, exist; dwell.

laugh

at.

fickn, n. -ng, -n. imation.

gcBctt^gliilf, n.

hving; an-

la^erlit^, adj. {or adv.) laughable,

happiness of Ufa.

ridiculous.
Satien,

m. -n^, -n or -ciben. shop, staU; shutter.

-en.
situation, position.
n.

gekng|ifli(t)t / duty of life. lebentlig, adj. {or adv.) living, alive.

leb^aft, adj. (or adv.) Uvely, vivacious.

fittge, /

Ha^tX,
fig.

-V^, -V. couch, sickbed;

;

\t^^tn,intr.

be parched with thirst,

adv.) empty, vacant;

sickness

camp, encamp-

pant.
Iccr, adj. (or

ment.
fittnti, n.

-be, -be or -an^ev. land,

vain.
Icgcn,
tr.

ground; territory, region, country; country (as distinguished

lay,

put down,
intr.

place.

refl X.

lay one's self down.

tr.

from

city),

auf

tcttl gatltlC,

in

le^ncn,
rest.

or

lean, incline,

the country, agut,

n.

country-

VOCABUIARY.
Sel^nfiu'^T, m.

421
intr.

fUt^Xt, /. -ren. doctrine,

easy chair, arm-cliair. teaching; theory; apprenticeship.

teacher.

Hcgen, 0.
fiilte, /.

^ or

f.

lie.

-ieu. lily.
/.

fiiniJC,

-ben.

linden,

lime-

lel^ren, tr, teach, instruct.

ficl^tcr, w^- -r8, -r.

tree.

fiei6, rn. -be, -ber.

body; waist.

Ici^t, adj. {or adv.) light, easy. itlh, adj. {ojily predicatively) disa-

lint adj. left. linU, adv. to the left. CiH^C, /. -pen. lip.

8ob,

n. -be.

praise.

stcJittcrin, /.

greeable, painful.

tSi^uimix,

praiser, panegyrist.

am

sorry, I regret.
-beg.

fieib, w.

harm, hurt, pain;

\ohtn, tr. praise, mise.

commend;

pro-

sorrow.
leiben, 0.

Cot^, n. -d)e, -ocl)er. hole;

tr.

dun-

endure, bear; intr. suffer, as noun, suffering, misfortune.

suffer,

geon.
Siiffcl,

m.
tr.

-% -t

spoon.
lot; destiny.

(O^ncn,

reward, recompense.
released,
luerbeu,

8cii>enftl)ttft, /. -ten.
leitietf interjectional

passion.

SOO0, n.

-feS, -fe.

adv. alas, un-

Io0, CK^. (or adu.) loose,

fortunately.
Ict^cn, 0.
tr.

set free;

with

fcin or

lend.

governing accus. loose from, rid

of.

Icifc, cidj- (or

adv.) not loud, soft,

as sepHe prefix

to verbs, loose,

low, gentle.
lenfen,
tr.

free.

(or intr.)

turn or bend
direct,

SbfegcliJ, n.

ransom.
tr.

in a desired direction,

lb fen, tr. set loose, loosen.

manage, influence.
lernen,
Ic^t,
tr.

lo^geben, 0.
release.

set loose or free,

loose, loosen;

(or intr.) learn.

lefcn, 0.

tr.

read.
(or

loSma^en,
latest,

tr.

make
tr.

odj.

adv.) last,
shine,

disengage.
lolrct^Cn, 0.

final.

tear loose,

tear

leu^ten,
Scute,
fiil^t,

intr.

give light,

away.
l0if|)rc^cn, 0.
tr.

beam. pi people,

declare free, relead;

folks.
light,

lease; acquit, absolve.

iiot^

n. -m, -ter or -tc. brightness; candle.

[got], n. -tf)e, -tf)e.

half an ounce.
SottJC,

licb, odj. (or adv.) dear,

attractive,

pleashnt.
love.

hold dear,
one).
fiieftt^cn,

beloved;
^abett,
fcin,

m. -en, -en.
-iifte.

lion.

gbttJCm
breath.
delight;

ficgcr, wi- lion-conquerer.

IJuft,
Z'.

be

air; breeze,

agi*eeable or pleasant (to

some
love,

(itgen, 0. intr. lie,

speak

falsely.

Suflp /.
n.

-iifte.

pleasure,

-n, -n.

little

inclination,

fancy.

|aben,

darling, sweetheart.
fiic6e, /. love.

have
Ittfltg,

desire, like.
adj. {or

adv.) merry,

gay;

lithtn,
lieber,

tr.

love.

amusing.

(idv.

rather, sooner,

more

willingly.
fiict>#

ma^en,
song, lay.

tr.

make, produce; cause;

n. -be, -bsr.

do, perform.

422
9Jlttt^t,

GEKMAN-ENGUSH
/. -a6)it,

miglit,

power,

force.

SWaucr, /. -rn. wall, stone for building.

sftcln,

m,

mii^tig, adj. {or adv.) mighty, powerful, (loith gen.) capable of.
SRiitl^en, n. -n,

9RaU0, /.

-fiufe.

mouse.
medal.
ocean, sea.

2Rcbttittc, /. -en.

SKttgb, /.
aUtti,

maiden. -agbe. maid, maiden.

-ll,

girl,

9Kcet, n. -reg, -re.

m.

-aieS.

May.
Milan.
(city).

mcl^r, adj. {or adv.) more, generally indeclinable, but pi. nte^re or me^s
rere,

Pttilanil, n. -b8.
9Kttinj, n. -jeg.

Mayence
-ten.

after negative,
Sfleile,

Pajept,
Majesty.
WlayoXf
sign,
rn.

/.

majesty,

more than one, several. any longer. /. -len. mile, (a German

equals

mile
-xi, -re.

nearly

English

major.
-filer,

miles).

SWttI, n. -leg, -te

or

token,

mtin, poss.
mttnctt,
tr.

adj.

my, mine.
think, suppose;

mask; point of time, time,

tr.

or

intr.

turn.

mean,
paint.
-r8,
-r.
in.

signify.

malen,
Wt^XtX,

painter,

artist.

man,

indef.

pron.

one,

people,

mcinig, poss. pron. my, mine. SJlcinuilfl, /. -gen. opinion. mcijl, (idj. most, adv. mostly, for the most part. oni -Cll, most,

they, see

185.

above
leader.
meltiett,

all others.

mattt^, indef, pron. , in sing, many a, many a one; in pi. many, see

3!lcificr, *. -rg, -r.

master, chief,

191.
mant^txlti,adj. inded. {or adv.) of various sorts, diverse, in many

tr.

mention, notify, an-

nounce.
SUcngC, /. -en. multitude, crowd.
9Rcnf(^,

ways.

m.

-fcfjen,

-fd^en.

man,

mttn^mal,
often. Wtaniif

adv.

many
-firmer,

times,

person,
9Rcnf(^cn:
race,

human
n.

being.
n.

sgef^lcdjt,

human
heart.

m. -nne6, husband.
f-

man;
of

sl^crj,

human

Aithe, /. philanthropy, sfeele, /.

figure

Wdnntx^tWU
man.
SWttltfttrilC,/.

human
voice.

soul, sfiimme, /.

human

-ben.

mansard (curb-

a^cnfl^ftcit, /.

roof).

mcrfcn,

tr.

humanity. mark, stamp; note,

measure.
knife.
tr.

Maxt,f- -!en. mark (a coin, worth about 25 cts). market, aWtttft, m. -teg, -orfte.
market-place.
marft^icrcn,

perceive, observe.

mcffcn, 0.

tr.

SWcffct, n. -r, -r.

meuMiren

[sieren],

furnish.

march. Tlaxitxtoti, m. death by torture. Sflarj, m. -geg. March.

intr.

SUtene, /. - en. mien, expression of face, air, look. ma^ett, put

on a
anU^,

look,
tr.

^aUxn,pl
3Ktt^,
n.

measles.
-^eg,
-^e.

mict^en [4tn],

hire,

rent

measure;

/. milk.

standard, scale, proportion.

mdfftt), adj. {or adv.) massive.

mill* (or mitbc) adj. {or adv.) mild,

meek, gentle; benevolent

VOCAB0LABY.
9Rtlbc, /. gentleness,
5!Jinion, /. -neu.
9Winiftcr,

423
^itg,

mercy.
minister.

SWorgcn, m.
ing;
fian'O, n.

million.

east,

-n. mom, mornmorrow. orient;

m.

-i-g, -r.

the East, the Orient.

minute. mi^faUen, 0. Mr. {vMh dat.) disailinutc, /. "ten.

morning-hour. Woxtti, m. -U, -I mortar.

sjiunbC, /.
tnittie, adj. (or

please.

adv.) tired, weary.

toil,

mit, adv. and seple prefix, along, along with; at the same time;
likewise, also.

Mn^t,

/. -^en.

labor, pains.

prep, (with dat.)

SKumie, /. -en. mummy. S^unb, m. -beg, -be or-iinbe or

-iinber.

with, along with, by.

mouth.
a<!i;.)

mitBrtngen^ {irreg.) tr. bring along (with one), come bringing.

SKitfiurger, w^. fellow citizen.

muntcr,

adj. (or

lively, brisk,

cheery, gay.
SJluftf, /. -!en.

music
tr.

mitgcftcn, 0. intr.
too.

f.

go along, go

mitma^en,
doing.

tr.

join in

making or

mitne^mcn,
one.

0.

tr.

take along with

or intr. must, be under necessity of, be compelled or obliged, be unable to help, have to, cannot but. see 251, 256. tnitfftg, adj. (or adv.) unemployed,
miiffcn, (irreg.)
idle,

mitftngcn, 0. intr. join in singing, sing too or with others.

SKittag,

sgang, m. idleness, sloth.

sgjingcr,

m.

idler.
-ttjea.

m.

-g,
n.

-ge.

midday,

SRut^

mnt], m.

mood,

dis-

noon.
Sfltttag0effen,

position; courage, spirit, mettle.

midday-meal,

mut^ig [mutig],
ited,

adj. (or adv.) spir-

dinner.

mutt,

/. middle, midst.

courageous, daring. Wntttv, /. -iitter. mother.

miittcrU^, adj. (or adv.) motherly, maternal.
adv. and sep'le prefix, atter, behind; in accord-

S!ttttet n-

-% ~t

middle; means,
prep.)

instrument.
mitten, adv. (followed by midway, in the midst.
mtttl^etlen [stcilcn],
cate, impart.
tr.

Ittt^,

communiWednes-

afterward,
ance,

conformably,

nad)
nad)

unb

aHitttUOi^,

m.

-6)^, -d)e.

nod), little

by little;

ttJie \)ov,

day.
SWitttJClt, /.

afterwards as before,
one's

still.

own

age or time,

prep, (with dat.) after, behind;

to, after the manner about; at, by; with names often, of places, to, toward, for.

contemporaries.
SRotie, /. -ben.

according

mogen,

(irreg.)

mode, fashion. intr. or tr. may,

of; for,

might, be permitted or allowed; like, choose, care, desire, see

upward,

etc.
tr.

251, 255.
9Konat, m. -t, -tc. month. Monti, m. -be, -be. moon.
aWontttg, m. -g, -ge.
>,

ntt^ttl^men, intr. (with dat.) or imitate, copy.

![Ra^ttftmnng, /. -gen.

imitation,

Monday.

mimicry. 9laii\hav, m. -v8 or -xn, -rn. neighbor.

m. -beS, -be. murder.

424:

GERMAN-ENGLISH
9lerb, m. -ueg, -t)e, or Jlctbe, /.
-tien.

9la^!ommc, m.
sor,

-en, -eit. succesdescendant. 9la^loi m. -ffe6, -affe. thing left behind, residuum; heritage. afterJWttt^mittttg, m. -g, -ge. noon.
JWtt^rit^t,

nerve.
{or adv.) neat,

nctt,

adj.

pretty,

nice.

neu, adj. {or adv.) new, fresh, unused; recent, modern.

neugtertg, adj. {or adv.) curious.
ncuglii^Cnil, adj. {or adv.)

/.

-ten.

intelligence,

news.
mil^fllllTCIt, inir.

newly

(with

dat) stare
sfcitc, /.

glowing.
neutt,

after.

num. nine,
ninety.

sjcl^tt,

nineteen.

^tt^t, /. -ad^tc.
nac^tuetfen, 0.

night,

night side, dark side. tr. point out, show, prove.

after

'-m
ness.

1li(^t, indef.

pron. naught, nothing-

Q^v.not.

even,

no^

cinmtti,
yet.

not

nut
only
wise,

not

9lat^toclt, /.

world or age,
near,

posterity.
tlfX^f

.... fonbcrn .... but also.

m^,

not

adj. {with dat.) nigh,

tti^tS^ indef. pron. indecl.

naught,

close.
9l(il^er

nothing, adverbially, in
/.

no

nearness,

proximity,

not at

all.

naletlt/

neighborhood. bring nearer, reflex. if. draw nigh, approach; resemble.

tr.

nidCtt, intr.

nod.

nic, adv. never, at

no

time.

niilrcn,

nourish, support, nii^s

scn),

nicber, adj. nether, lower; low, base. adv. andsep'lepreflx. down,

tcnb, nourishing, nutritive.

9lrtmc
{or

downward.
-n.

m.

-m,

nicbcrtcugcn,

reflex,

bend down.
Neth-

name.
9larr, rn. -rren, -rren. fool.
Ittt^, odj.

niciicrlttniift^, adj. {or adv.)

erlandish, Dutch.
niciJCrfe^en, ^. set down. r^ex. sit

{or adv.) wet.

9latton, /. -nen.
9lainv, /. -ren.

nation.

down.
nicilcrtlJCrfeit,

nature.

0.

tr.

throw down,
adv.)

nthtn, odv. beside, prep, {with dot. or accus.) beside, by the side of, by, with; along with, besides.
9lcffe,

prostrate.
nictirig,

adj.

{or

low;

humble.

m. -en, -en. nephew.

tr.

niemaB, adv. never.

take
9Iicmttnil, indef. pron.

ne|tnen, 0.

take,

seize;

nobody, no

away; receive, accept. ttetgen, tr. bend, bow. reflex, bow.

9CttCi9t,incUned; favorable, well
affectioned.

one, not
1.

any

one. see 186.

no^, adv.

still,

cttt, one more, ni^t, not yet. another. etttmal, once more.

yet, further.

JRcigUng,

/.

-gen, no, nay.

inclination;

2.

affection, attachment.
tiein, indecl.
filtitt, /

ttO^, conj. {after negative, espHy metier) nor.

IRortl,

m. -beg,

-be. north. stoiirtS,

-!en.

pink, carnation.
tr.

tlCnncn,

{irreg.)

name,

caU;

adv. northwards. 9lortien, ^. -ng. north, northern

region.

speak oi

V0CABULAE7.
ttor))It$, odj, (or adv.) northerly,

425
ear. sting,

northern.
9l0t^ ['^Oi], /. -ot!)C. need, necessity; want; trouble, misery.
nbt^ifi [nbtig], {with

Ofit, n. -rcg, -rctt. earring.

ort)entlt(^, adj.

m.

(or adv.) orderly,

regular, proper.

dat)
tr.

adj.

{or

Drt,

rn. {or

n.) -te8, -te or Orter.

adv

needful, necessary.
constrain,

place, spot, region.

nbtligCtt [nbtigcn], force, compel.

JlOt^ttJCnilig

Often, m. -ng. east; eastern land. Ottilie,/. -ien. OttiHa.

[mU],

(^j- necessary,

indispensable.
*WotJCmber, ber.

$aar,
-r.

n.

-res, -re.
{or

pair,

couple;

m. -x%,

Novem-

ein

^aot
m.

two

paat), a couple, or three, a few. see 322.2a.

-t,
-cifte.

nun, ddv. now, at present. nur, odv. only, simply; but just,
scarcely.

^ttlaft,

palace.
slipper.

^ttntoffcl,

m.

-Ig,

-L

^tt^ier, n. -r8, -re. paper.

9lu,/.

-iiffe.

nut. sbtttUn, adj. nut-

^aifl, m.

-m,

-dpfte.

pope.

brown.

nu^cn

(yr nii^cn, intr. {wUhdat.)he of use to, profit.

SParatieS, n. -fee, -je. paradise. ^ortei,/. -eien. party, faction.

|iartetif((),

adj.

{or adv.) factious,

nu^Ut^, ddj. {or adv.) useful.

Of\,

partial, partizan.
^ttttie, /. -ieu.

party,

company;

adv. over, above, conj. whether,

part, portion.
p)ttf!o0ter,

if;

aU ,

as

if.

oBcn, adv. above, aloft,

on

high.

^elj,
coat.

rn.

m. -r, -re. passenger. fur, furred -geg, -ge.

-beg, -be.

nac^ , upwards. Obct, adj. upper, higher. Obctfl, trh. -te or -ten, -te or -ten.
colonel.
oBglett^, conj. although, though.

^fab, way.

path, track,
priest,

^f ttff e,

rn.

-en, -en.

parson

{used generally contemptuously).

CctoBer, w. -r8, -r. October. or olj, adj. {or adv.) vacant, deserted, desolate, waste. VttitX, conj. or, otherwise, else.
bllC off en, adj. {or adv.)

starrer,
ister.

rn.

-rg, -r.

parson, min-

^ftttr^of, m. parsonage. ^fertl, n. -beg, -be. horse.

i^lfiegen,

open; public;

0. or N.

tr.

{or intr. with

frank, sincere.
Offenbar, adj. {or adv.) plain, evident.

gen.) wait

Dfflctcr {or sjicr), m. -r, -re.

cer.
oft, adv. often, frequently.

offi-

mWJ-

upon, nurse, cherish; enjoy, be given to. intr, be wont, be used to. -ten. duty
pick, pluck.

llfliilfen, tr.

svudU, adv. oftentimes, repeatedly.

rn.

^forte,/. -ten. door, gate, portal;

port (of ships).

p\m,inierj.
fie!

Cl^etm,

-m, -me. uncle.

0|ne, prep, {with accus.) without; but for, except, save. J)tt,

^funb,
gist.

n. -beg, -be.

pound,
philolo-

^^ilolog, m. -gen, -gen.

but

that, save thart

426
^$ifofo||]&,

GERMAN-ENGLISH
m. -^^en, -p^en.
phiquetten, 0. intr. ^ or burst out, gush.
f.

flow forth,

losopher.

^ilgcr,
/.

rn.

-r8, -r. pilgrim, sft^attt,

band

of pilgrims.

9taBe, m. -en, -en. raven.

^Ittgc, /. -gen. plague, torment,

Ma^C,
ttt^en,

f.

revenge.

calamity.

9la(^en, m.
tr.

-m,

-n.

throat, jaws.

^(anf e, / -fen. plank, board. ^la^, m. -^eg, -d^e, place, seat;

situation.
|ilau))ern, intr. chat.
illo^lif^, adj. {or adv.
)

avenge.

taft^,

IRong, w. -ge, -onge. rank, class. adj. {or adv.) impetuous,

swift, speedy.

sudden.

tttfcn, intr. rave, rage, tttf cnti, furi-

Illunbern,

tr.

flO^en,

intr.

plunder, pillage. knock.

ous, raving,
diatfi
sel,

mad.

iioetif^, adj. (or adv.) poetical.

[Mai], m. -tf)eg, -dt{)c. counadvice; counsellor. s^nu, n.

intr.

iloUtif^, adj. {or adv.) political.

town-hall.
tttt^en [ratcn], 0.

^ort, m. -teg,

-te.

port, harbor.
portrait.

{mth

dat.)

portrait
sinaler,

^'

-te, -te.

give advice or counsel, advise;

guess.
raubett,
dat.),
tr.

m. portrait-painter.

^ofl,/. -ten. post, post-office. ^rat^t, / -ten. splendor, pomp.

SPriifiilcnt,

take

by violence

(from,

m. -ten, -ten. president.

-je8,
;

^taffen, intr. carouse, riot.

^Xti, m.
prize,

-je.

price, cost;

reward

praise, glory.

rob of. 9lau(er, m. -x^, -r. robber. 9{ttU(ft, m. -c^eS. smoke. tauten, intr. smoke. tttUl^, adj. {or adv.) rough, harsh,
coarse.

Iltetfen, 0. tr. praise,

commend.

^tcmiermittiflcr, m. prime-minister.

IRaum, m.
yield.

-meg, -duntc.

space, place.

room,

geBett, give waj'^,

^reu^e, m. -en, -en. Prussian.

^ricflcr,
rn.

-x^, -v.

priest.

9JttUf^,

m.
;

-fc^eg,

-dnjd^e.

noise,
in-

^rinj, m. -jen, -jen. prince. ^rinjcfftn,/. -innen. princess.

Ilribat,

rush

sudden enthusiasm,
intr.

toxication.

adj.

{or

adv.)

i)rivate.

rauf^en,

sflttltbC,/.

private lesson.

sound

like

^ or f. move with a rushing water, rustle;

^rotlUCt, n. -tg, -te.

product.
profes-

roar, rush.
(Ret^enft^ttft/. reckoning, account.
Xt^\itXi,tr.

^rofcffor,
sor.

m. -v^, -ren.

reckon, calculate, count,

^iroftttcrcn, intr. profit, gain.

estimate, deem.
tct^t, adj. {or adv.) straight, direct;

^romcttttbe, /. -en. walk.

promenade,

right, just;

correct,

true, real;

Quitter, n. -r, -r. powder, gun-

{with dat.) suitable, convenient;

powder. ^unft, m. -tg,

right
-te. point.

(not

left).

adverbially,

really, actuallj"^; very, quite.

9lc^t
Ouctt, m. -HeS, -He,
(yr

OntUt,

f.

^aBen, be in the right.

fi.

-teg, -te.

right, justice,

-en. spring, well, source.

te^tgliiufiig, adj. orthodox.

VOCABULAET.
the right. speech, talk, discourse. fte^en, stand talk, (voifh dat.) answer, be accountable to. tebeit/ irdr. or tr. speak, talk, conttd^tS, odv, to
9lctie, /.

427
tr.

teuett,
gret.

or

intr.

rue, repent, re-

-ben.

c0 rcuct mid), I repent.

9leboIutton, / -nen.
9l^cin,

revolution.

m. -ne. (river) Khine. fbxildt, / Rhine-bridge. Xi^itn, tr. set jight; direct; judge,
censure.
(Rit^tcr,

verse.

rebli^^ adj, (or adv.) honest,

fair.

^Reform, /. -en. reform. 9iC9Cn, m. -nS. rain. ^Icgicrung, /. -gen. government. regnen, intr. impers. rain.
rci^, adj. {or adv.) wealthy, rich; copious.
9iti^, n. -C^e8, -d)e. empire, realm,

m. -r, -r. judge. m. judgment-seat.

ness.

sflul^I,

Oii^tigfeit, /. rightness*

correct-

(Ricfc,

m.

-fen, -fen.

giant.

0ltng,m. -ge, -ge. ring. tittgett, 0. tr. wring, twist, struggle, strive, contend.

intr,

kingdom.
XtiH^tn, intr. reach, extend,
tr.

hold

ttng0, adv. around, about. adv. round about, ^tX,

um*
all

out, present, offer.

rei^Itt^^
cidj.

around.

(or adv.)

abundant,

copious, plentiful.

rinncn, 0. course.
IRitt,

intr.

Ij

or

f.

run, flow,

9lcit^tum [stum], m. -m%,- iimer. riches, wealth.

Ut\f)t,f. -en.

m.

-tteg, -tte.
rn.

ride.

flitter,

-r,

-r.

chevalier,

row,

series, line.

knight.
IRocf,

Utimex,
rctnigcn,

rn.

-rS, -r.

rhymer.

m. -deg,
adj.

-ocfc.

coat,

petti-

Xtin, adj. {or adv.) clean, pure.

tr.

coat.
XOi),

cleanse, purify.

(or

adv.)

rude,
scroll

raw,
role,

9lcifc, /. -fen.

journey, voyage.
I),

rough.
(RoMe, /. -len. roll,
part.
;

tcifcn, intr.

or

journey, travel,

take a journey.
tei^en, 0.
tr.

tear,
I)

snatch away.
\.

rcitcn, 0. intr.

or

ride,

go on

horseback.
better, rn. -r8, -r. rider, horseman.
retjen,

9tam, n. -ni. Eome. tHoman, m. -ne, nc, novel, romance.

-

9Jofe, /. -fen.

rose.

charm, attract, rcijcnb, charming. Uttiox {or stiox), m. -r, -oren.

tr.

incite, excite;

9lO^, n. -ffeg, -ffe. horse, steed. XOi^ [tot], adj. {or ad>\) red.
JRiirfcn, rn.

-nS, -n.

back, rear.

rector (principal of
^Religion, /. -nen.

school).

tiitfen, tr. jerk, pull;

move, push.

religion.

MdW, / -ten.
consideration.
riirftnartd,

regard, respect,

9itfi,m,. -te8, -te. residue,

remnant,

remainder.
^leftttUrtttion, /. -nen.

adv. backwards, back.

cry.
tr.

restaurant.
deliver.

tufcn,

0. intr. call out,

Xttitn,
reflex,

tr,

save,

rescue,
;

call, call to.

save one's self run away.

rescue, deliver-

iRu^e, /. rest, repose, tranquillity.

rul^en, intr. rest, repose.

IRettung, /. -gen. ance.

HU^ig, adj. {or adv.) quiet, tranquil.

423
SJill^rUttg,

GERMAN-ENGLISH
/.

moving,

touchiDg;

f^amen,
ful,

reflex,

be ashamed.

emotion.

f^anblit^, adj. {or adv.) disgrace-

lRu|m, m. -meg. fame, glory.

shameful, infamous.
keen,

t^ar, see S^aar.

Saal, m. -te, -ak, hall, saloon. @(l^C,/. -en thing, matter, affair, concern, business, pi. things,
goods.

ft^arf, adj. {or adv.) sharp,

cutting; severe.

Sc^a^,

rn.
ir.

-^e, -ci^e.

treasure.

ft^d^en,
n.

treasure, value.

Sacrament,
ment. aft, m.

m,

-te.

sacra-

fr^aubcr^ttft, adj. {or adv.) awful,

horrible.
-te, -cifte.

sap, juice.

fc^autn,

intr.

look,

gaze, see.

tr,

^H^, /
fagen,
tr.

-en. talk, saying; legend,

say,
relate; speak,

look

at,

behold, see.
intr.

tradition.
tell,

f^dumen,

foam, froth.
spectacle,

S^anf|licl, n. -l^, -k.

sight; play, drama.

utter, declare.

ale, see Saal. Salon, ni. -itg, -n. salon, saloon,

parlor.

St^anf|liclcr, rn. -r^, -r.

actor.

player,

S^effcl, m. -tg,
-3c.
salt.

-I.
f.

bushel.
part, separate;

Salj, n. -jeS,

f(!^etben, 0. intr.

fammt, prep.
SaniJ, m. -beg.

{wUh

dat.)

along

go away;
ft^eincn,
0.

die.
intr.

with, together with.

shine; seem or

sand.

sBanf, /.

appear.

sandbank.
fanft, adj.

S^citcl, /. -In.
head).

crown

(of

the

{or adv.) soft, gentle,

mild, smooth.

S^elm, m. -me, -me.

Saracen,

rogue,
reprove,
re-.

Saracene,

in.

-en, -en.

knave.
fc^eltcn,

Mussulman. Satg, m. -geg, -cirge. coffin. a^, m. -5eg, -a^e. proposition,

sentence.
fancr, adj. (or adv.) sour, tart, acid; disagi-eable, peevish.
faUCrU(!^, adj. (or adv.) tart,

0.

tr.
;

or

intr.

chide, scold

revile as, call

proachfuUy.
ft^Cnfcn,
tr.

pour out for drinking;

of, give,

make
room.
ft^CtJCn,

a present
/.

grant.
bar,

St^CnfjiuBc,
intr.

tap-room,
joke,
jest,

acid,

sourish.
faufcn, 0. intr. drink (said of the lower animals), guzzle.

make
shun;

fun.
ft^euen,
tr.

be shy

of; avoid,

Sttnglmg, m. -gg, -ge.

baby.

nursling,
troop,

S(^aar [S^ar],
band, crowd.
f(!^aben,

/.

-ren.

a horse). f^ttfen, tr. cause to happen; uslp send, despatch, forward.

(of

shy

S^frffal, n. -Ig, -te. fate, destiny,

intr. {with dat.)

harm,

in-

lot.

jure, hurt.

ft^te^en, 0. intr. or

tr.

shoot.

f^affcn, 0.

tr.

shape, form, create,

S^iff, n. -ffeg,

-ffe.

ship.

make.

0. or

N. procure, obtain,

provide.

S^itb, w. -beg, -be or-ber. shield; coat of arms; sign, signboard.

VOCABULARY.
fe^im|lten,
tr.

429
beauty.

insult,

abuse,

call

<S(ftbnfteit, /.

names.
St()Ittd)t /. -ten.

battle.

S^lttf, m. -feg.
ft^lttfcn, 0.

sleep.
sleep.

(S^ranfc, /. -en. railing, barrier. pi. lists (at tournaments), in tlic tt fommcn, enter the lists.

Mr.

Street,
stroke,
terror.

m.

-c!c,

-de.

fright,

t^lttg,

m. -geS,

-age.

blow; shock.
f^lagen, 0. tr. or Mr. strike, bit, beat knock defeat. (Sc^Itttige, /. -gett. serpent, snake.
; ;

ft^rcdU^, adj. (or adv.) terrible,

frightful.

f^rcikn,
fdircten,

0. tr. write.

Sdireibttf^, m. writing-table.
0.
intr,

f^le^t,

cidj-

(or adv.) bad, base,

cry,

cry out,

mean.
S^Tctfc,
/. -fen.
tr.

scream.
knot, bow.
shut.
-offer,

{(^lie^cn, 0.

Shrift, /. -ten. writing; something written, scripture.

t^loi
gate.

n.

-ffe,

lock;

<S^ritt, rn. -tteS, -tte. step, stride,

citadel, castle,

si^ov, n. castle-

pace.

^^U^, m.
(S^ulb,
crime.

-'^eS, -^e.

shoe.

^(Ut^t, /. -ten. ravine, gorge. glummer, w. -x^, -r. slumber. ftdlummern, intr. slumber, sleep.

/.

-ben.

debt;

fault,

ft^ulbig^ adj. (or adv.)

@d)Iu^, m. -ffe, -iiffe. closing; close, end, conclusion.

djlilffcl,

owing, indebted for (with accus.); culpable,

criminal, guilty of or lacking in
(with

w.

-tg, -t.

key.
;

gen)

(S^ntttt^, /.

abuse, outrage
(or

dis-

grace, shame.

(S^uliincr, m. -r, -r. debtor. (S^ulc, /. -len. school.

<S filler, in. -x^, -r. pupil, scholar. rascal, S^urfc, rn. -en, -en.

f^tnal, adj. slender.

adv.)

narrow,

f^mei^eln,
flatter.

intr. {with dat.) caress;

knave,

villain.

^M,
intr.

m.

-ffeS,

-iiffe.

shot;

S^mctt^elretie, / flattery. S^mcrj, m. -jeg or -seu, -jen. pain, ache ; sorrow, distress.

charge (of a gun).

ft^tnat^, adj. (or adu.)

weak, feeble.
-nen, -cine
stagger,

@d)Uitt9crin,/. -nnen. sister-in-law.

S^lUttii,

f^mcrjen,
afflict

smart,

pain.

tr.

crimpers, (with dat.) pain, grieve,

or -nen.

m. -\m or swan.
]^

f^merjHl^, adj. (or adv.) painful. S^micll, m. -beg, -be. smith. Sj^mictC, /. =cn. smithy, forge.
fdinett,

ft^tuanfcn, intr. totter ; waver.

ft^ttJttrj,

or

f.

adj.

(or adv.) black.

fc^tDcBettf intr.
air), soar,

sweep (through the

float.

adj.

(or

adv.)

quick,

hover,

speedy, swift, rapid.

\ii)On,

ft^tDCigCn, 0. intr.

adv. already, even.

adj.

Won,

(or

adv.)

beautiful,

still, not talk, as noun, silence.

keep silence, be hold one's peace.

handsome,

fine,

noble.

St^tDCtj, /. Switzerland.
intr. f^tuelgcn, revel, carouse.

f^Onen, tr. (or intr. with gen.) treat with consideration, spare.

gormandize,

430
Statuette, /. -Icn

GERMAN-ENGLISH
threshold.
f.

3. fcin, gen.

of er or

e6.

fi^tneUen, 0. intr.

swell, heave.

{etne0glei(t)en, inded. adj. or pron.

f^tOCt/
sore,

odj.

{or

adv.)

grievous,

of his kind, such as he.

f etnig,

burdensome, heavy; hard,

sword.
sdjctt,

poss. pron. his,

its.

difficult.

fcit,

prep, {with dat.) since,

from

(a

<Sd)toCtt, n. -teS, -ter.

(S^ttJcficr, /.

given
conj.

-rn.

sister,

now), during. since, since the time that.

till

time
ddv.

n. little sister.

shtm,

since
side

then,

since.
that.

(Sc^tUiegcrDtttcr,

m. father-in-law.
\,

C071J.

since,

from the time

;

f(^tt)immen, 0. intr. Ijor

float.

swim,

<^eiit, /. -ten.

party

page.

fclbct, adj. inded. self, myself, etc.

intr.
rejiex.

f^lningcn, 0. tr. or wave, brandish,

one's
self.
tr.

swing; swing

see
fclbfl,

155.5.
adj.

inded.

self,

etc.

see

155.5. adv. even.

or
intr.

f^ttlbttn, 0.

swear, take

<BtW

sat^tung, /.

self-respect.

oath
fc^tnitl,

to,

vow.
{or

::er^altung, /. self-preservation.

ctdj.

adv.) sultry, hot

fclig, adj. {or adv.) blessed,

happy,

and

close.

blissful.

t^tuung, m. -geS, -iinge. swing, rotation, swinging motion. Sc^tDur, m. -re, -iire. oath, vow. fc^tO^^, adj. of Swytz (a Swiss Canton).
fC^, num.
sixty.
six. sjcl^n, sixteen, sjig,

Seligtett, /. happiness, bliss, sal-

vation.

fcltfam, adj. {or adv.) strange, wonderful.

fcnticn, {irreg. or reg.)
tr.

unusual,
send.

September, m.
fc^en,
tr.

-rg, -r.

September.
lay

set,

place

down,

Sec, m.

-ee. -een.

lake. /. -een.

lay. reflex, sit

down.

sea, ocean.

fcufjcn, intr. sigh, groan.

ft^, re/lex.
itself,

Scele, /. -ten. soul.

pron. himself, herself,

;

SegCl,

n.

-U, -I
bless.

sail.

themselves

one another.

Scgcn,
fcgncn,

rn.
tr.

-n6, -n. blessing.

see

155.3,4.
adv.) safe, sure, sesure,

fitter, adj. {or

fe^en, 0. tr. or intr see, look. glance, perceive ; look, appear.

fcl&ttCn,
reflex,

cure.

long,

yearn,

feel

ft^etn, tr. guarantee.

fie,

make

secure,

eager desire, yearning.

<SeftnfUt^t, /.

as noun, longing,

pers. pron. {Sd sing.) she, her,

it;

(3d pi) they,

them; Sie,
fith

eager desire, yearn-

you. see 153.4.

ftcbcit,

ing.
\t\\X, (tdv.

num. seven,

sjcftn {or

very greatly, very much,

be, exist. eS

much.
1. fcin, 0. intr.
f.

3C^n), seventeen, seventy.

sjig

{or fieh

m),
ift,

, be ciucm gut fond of one. an citicm depend on one ; be one's turn.

there

is,

etc.

Sicg, m. -geg, -ge.

quest.

victory, con-

Sieger, rn. -r8, -r. queror.

victor,

cod^

2. f cin,

poss, adj, his,

its.

ftegreid), adj. victorious.

; .;

VOCABtJLAEY.
IlIBctIt, (tdj. (or

431

adv.) silver.

ftngen, 0. tr. or intr. sing. finfcn, 0. intr. \, sink, fall.

So^l^te, /. -ien. Sophia. "SotgC, /. -gen. care, anxiety, sor-

row.
fotgen, intr. care, take care, make provision; feel anxiety or sorrow.

^inn, m.-nueS, -niic or nuen. sense, mind organ of perception intent, meaning, import dispo;

S^ianicn, n. -n^.

Spain.

sition, character.

ftttn^/

(?/

{or adv.)

related
;

to

6|)anter, m. -x^, -r. Spaniard. Spanish. f|ianif(^, adj. {(yr adv.

)

manners
moral.

or

morals

social,

fjlOten,
fjlttt,

iT.

spare, save, lay up.

{or adv.)
late,

adj.

tardy,

fi^en, 0. intr.

sit.

slow.
fijajictcn, intr.
\)

8natie, m. -en, -en. slave.

fo, adv. so, in this

or I

walk

(for

manner

or de. .

gree, as.

fo

aU
fo

(or mie)

exercise or pleasure), go abroad.

gCl^Cn, take a walk.

as

... as ....
rel.

cilt,

such

a.

take a drive.
ride.

fol^ten, rcitcn, take a

spear.

used as
fo
:

pron. see 182.1.

conj. as

fbaiti,

adv. so soon.
sglet^, adv.
soft, conj. as
as.

Sneer, m.

-re, -re.

soon
ately,

as.

immedioften as.
adv.
.,

at once,
as.

slange, conj. as

f^eifen, intr. eat, take food. S^iel, n. -leg, -te. play,

game,

long
stoic,

sport

playing,
trick.
tr.
;

acting

gam;

adv.
fo
.

stO0^(,

as as

bling
f|lielen,

well,

well

tOO^l ... as ., both

.

aU.
.

or

intr.
;

play
act.

play

and.

(music)

gamble

<So^n, m. -ne, -o^ne. son. So^nletn, n. -n, -n. Httle son. fol4 pron'l adj. such, cill folt^Ct,

S|JteUente, pi. actors, musicians. SJli^e, /. -sen. point, peak, head.

such
foliti,

a.

mockery, SJjott, ni. -tte, -tte. derision, scorn, ridicule.

f|)Otten,
intr.

(Sotbat, w. -ten, -ten.

(Ji'dj.

soldier.

(with

gen.)

mock,
lan-

(or adv.) solid, respect-

scoff at, ridicule.

able.

S^JtOt^e, /.

-rf)en.

speech,

foUen, (irreg.) tr. shall, should owe, ought be to, be intended

;

guage.
f^tedien, 0. intr. or tr. speak, talk, say, utter ; speak to, address.
frei

251, 257. ommcr, rfi. -rS, -r. summer. fonlJCrn, conj. but (stronger than ttbcr, and usually after negative). Sonnaknti, m. -bS, -be. Saturto
;

be said

to. see

pronounce
intr.
f

free, absolve.
t).

f^ttngen, 0.
leap,

or

spring,

jump.
or
tr.

f|)tut)eln, intr.

day.

S|)Ut, /. -ven.
/. -nen.

track, trace
staff.

bubble, gush. way.

;

Sonne,

sun.

Stttb, m. -beg, -dbe.

Stttbt, /. -cibte.
city,

fonnen, irdr. expose to the sun, air, sun.

town.

(Stamm,m. -ammeg,-dmme. stem,

stalk
;

Sonnenlt^t, n. sunlight, sunbeam. onntttfi, wi. -g, -ge. Sunday.

fonit, adv. else, otherwise, besides;

stock, race, tribe,

intr.

ftammein, fiammen,

or
f.

tr.

stammer.
pro-

intr.

originate,

at other time, heretofore.

ceed, descend.

432
8tant),
in.

GERMAN-ENGLISH
-be, -cinbc.

standing

Stor^, m.
flbten,
tr.

-6)t%, -tx6)t,

stork.

rank in life, ju C brtngen, bring about, accomplish, im C fcitl, be prepared, be able.

state, position,

stir up, disturb, trouble.

tr.

fiO^en, 0. intr. or
strike.

push, thrust,

firafen,

tr.

punish, chastise.
street.

ftaxt, o,dj. {or adv.) strong,

stont,

Sttttfee, /. -en.

vigorous
Static,
flatt,

mighty.
force, strength.

ftreHen, irdr.

strive, struggle, en-

/ -en.

deavor; aspire.
fireifen, tr. stretch,

prep, (with gen.) instead of

extend.
stroke,

for.

Strei^,
Streit,

fiattftnbcn, 0. intr. take place. ^tdttl, 0. or N. intr. stick, remain

-^t^, -d^e. lash; trick, prank.

in.
ra.

-te, -te, contest,

com-

fast
fiel^en,

lie

hidden,
t)

tr.
].

set

hide.

bat, conflict.
jlreitcn, 0. irdr.

0. intr.
;

or

stand, be
;

contend, struggle,

upright
still,

be situated, be
it ?

stand
are

fight; argue, debate.

fireuen,
tr.

stop, tuic ficftt'0?

how

strew, scatter.

you ? how goes

fietgen, 0. intr.
f.

Strom,
rise,

rn.

-meg, -ome.

stream,

step up;

river.

ascend, climb, get up or in; sometimes descend, climb down.

flcil, adj.

Stiib^en, n. -w^, -n.

Sttirf, n. -dt^,

little

room.
part,

-dt.
;

piece,

{or adv.

steep.

fragment, bit

piece, play.

Stein, m.
range,

-:ie, -ne.

stone, rock.
;

Student,

in.

-ten, -ten.

student.
;

ftellen, tr. place, put, set, fix

reflex,

ar-

Stubium,
studies.
Stul^I,
w.

n.

-mS, -ien. study

chair.

pi

give one's self the

if,

appearance, act as
flerbcn, 0. intr. die.

appear.
star.

-Ie, -ii^te.

fiumnt,

o,dj.

{or adv.)

dumb, mute,
;

Stern, TO.-ne8,-tie (or-nen).

flctS,

silent.

ddv. steadily, ever, always.

Stunbe,

Sticfel,
flitt,

m.

-I,

-L boot.
still,

ctdj-

{or (idv.)

silent,

lesson (of /. -ben. hour an hour's duration) distance of an hour's walk.

;

quiet, calm, tranquil. imStitten,

secretly,

fiiinilU^, adj. {or adv.) hourly.

sfdltueigenb, silent.
voice.
tr.

Stnrm, m. -meg,
flUrjen,
intr.
f.

-iirme.
fall
tr.

Stimme,
flimmcn,

/. -en.
intr.
;

storm. headlong,

or

give voice,

tumble, rush.
ruin.
fUC^en,
tr-

overthrow,

sound

harmonize, agree, trcin

ftimmen, join in, join in singing. Stirn, /. -nen. forehead, brow.

Stoif, n. -(feg, -ocfe.
stick, staff,
;

seek, search for, try to

at.
sintliftft,

find or obtain, aim

Siib,

in.

-beg. south,

adj.

cane

trunk, stock

story (of

South-Indian.
Siinte, /. -ben.
sin.

a house).
StofF, m. -\\t%, material.
flb^nen,
irdr. -ffe.

stuff,

matter,

fitnbigen,
sin.

intr.

sin,

commit a

groan.

fn, adj. {or adv.) sweet, delightful.

flo(j,a(i/. (or adu.)

proud, haughty,

arrogant.

Stjricn, n. -ng.

Syria.

VOCABULAEY.
tobacco. Xdbat, rti. -!, -!e. stdU^, n. tobacco-smoke. tatein, tr. blame, censure, re-

433
.

Xf^kx [Xkx] ,
creature.

n. -res, -re

animal,

tfttcrif(ft [tiers],

adj. {or adv.) ani-

proach.
^ttfcl, /. -In.

mal.
table.

XiiOX, n. -re, -re. door, gate.

^tt0, m. -ge8, -ge.

day.

Xiox,
ton.

rn.

-ren, -ren. fool, simple-

tiiglt^, adj. {or adv.) daily.

talentDott, adj. {or adv.) talented.

^annc,
Qtun,

/. -nen. fir-tree.
n.

Xanntni
firs.

Xf^OX^tit, f. -kn. folly. ^ftrfinc, /. -en. tear.

green of the
aunt.

^ttnte, /. -ten,
^ttnj, m. -geg,
tanjett, intr. or

2ftron, m. throne.
tftronctt/
iri/r.

-neg,

-ne

or -wen.

-ansc dance.
ir.

sit

on a throne, be
;

dance.
carpet.

enthroned.
tftun, 0.
tr.

Sa^et

w- -te, -te.

do,

^ojlCtC,/. -ten. tapestry, hangings.

ta|)f er, adj. {or

put.

intr. act,

perform make behave carry on,

;

adv.) brave, valiant,

conduct,
see

irnpers.

matter;

be.

bold.
2^ilft^e, /.
Stttffc, /.

242.3.

-en. pocket, pouch.

-en. cup.

ticf, adj. {or

;

Xf^nx, f. -ren. door. adv.) deep, profound,

tdUfett, tr. dip,

immerse
getttttft,

baptize,

low.
Xtcfc, /. -fen. deep place.
Xtfct),

christen.
christian.
taufent),

baptized,

depth, profundity,
table.
;

num. a thousand.
-r.
-t.

sUlttl,

m.

-fcf)e8, -fd)e.

adv. a thousand times.

Xitel, rn.

-U, A.

title

claim.

m. -x^, 2eufcl, m. -Ig,

better,-

plate.
devil.

Xijittn^m. -nS. Titian (the painter).

sfotti,

m. hall for the paintings

-orf)ter.

2ft al, n. -Ie, -ciler. ^ftaler,

valley.
dollar, thaler

of Titian.

m.

-r8, -r.
cts.)

Xo^kx, f.
XoH, m.

daughter.
death.

(about 73

-be, -be.

%W, /
tftiitig,

-ten. deed, action.

adj. {or adv.) active,

busy.

tobt [tot], a(^*. {or adv.) dead, as nown, dead or deceased person.

XWl^ttii,
ciency.

/. -ten.

activity, effi-

toUtn

[toten],

tr.

kill,

slay,

put

to death.

Xf^m [%m], m.
Xitakv,
%Mtt,
party.
Sfteil [XtW],

-aue0, -ane. dew.

theatre.
-ee.

Xobtenfammer [XoU],
ber of death.
tbiltUlft
[tiitliJ^],

n.

chamadv.)

n. -r, -r.

m.

-eeS,

tea;
n.

tea-

adj.

{or

deadly, mortal.

m. or

-Ie,

-te.

part,

portion,

share,
3tt

partly,
fall to

cincm

jam

tobtfjijlttgen [tots],

tr.

strike dead.

Xon,

rn.

-neS, -one.

tone, sound.

tucrticn,

one's share.
0. intr.

triige,

tonen, intr resound, sound forth. adj. {or adv.) inert, indolent, lazy.

tfteilncftmcn [ttiU], part, participate,

take

be interested.

tragen, 0.
;

tr.

or
;

intr.

carry, bear,
;

tfteucr [icttcr], adj. {or adv.) dear,

beloved; expensive.

bring wear support, endure produce, yield.

434
StanI, m. -n!e8, -an!c.
beverage.

(GERMAN-ENGLISH
drink,

Ue^el, n. -t6, -t
itbcn,
tr.

evil, ill, misfortune.

practice, exercise.

ttauen, in^r. {with dat) trust, have confidence in, confide, reflex.
trust one's self, venture.

uhtXf adv. and seple {or insep'le) in excess. preflx. over, above
;

tie !^tit grieve,

during the time, see

txautxn, lament.
trdumett,

intr.

mourn,

230.1a.
prep, {with dat.) over, above, higher than in the process of; while, by reason of. {with a^cus.) over or above across beyond
; ;
;

Xvaum, m. -mt%, -dumc. dream.

intr.

or

tr.

dream, fancy.

traumlo^,

adj.

dreamless.

trauttg, odj. {or adv.) mournful,

sad, melancholy. iraut, adj. {or adv.) beloved, dear.

after,

over,

by way of more than.

respecting

itbcraU, adv. everywhere.

ixtxhtn, 0. tr. drive, impel ; carry on, perform, ein S|liel -, play

itkrMngen,
deliver.

{irreg.) tr.

(sep7e)

bring over, bring over,

adv.)
;

trick.
tr.

carry over.
separate, divide, part.
itberflufftg, adj.

trcnncn,

{or

super-

reflex, part.

fluous, unnecessary
u6cr]^0U|Jt,

plentiful.

trcten, 0. intr.

Strcnnung, /. -gen. separation. tread, step, prof.

ceed,
enter,

adv.

in

general,

altogether.
itbetlaffett, 0. tr. {sep'le

eincm no^c

or insep'le)

come near
trusty.

to, affect.

leave over, turn over, relinquish,

faithful,

treu, adj. {or adv.) true,

resign,

make
tr.

over, cede.

ubetlebctt,

outUve, survive.
tr.

%X\t^, m. -beg, -be.

pulse, instinct.
trinfcn, 0.
tr.

drift;

im-

1. iificrlegcn,

{seple) lay over,

or

intr.

drink.
dry,

turn over, (inseple) turn over in mind, consider.

2. iibcrlcgen, see itkrliegeit.

trorfen, adj. {or adv.) dry.

troifnen,

tr.

or

intr.

Ijor

\.

itberliegen, 0. intr. {seple) lie oyer,

dry up.
frolic, /. -cn.
^rojlfeit,

be deferred,
tropic.
to,

{insep'le)

be superior

m.

trofien,

tr.

drop. -itg, -n. comfort, console.

defiance, disdain

surpass, itftetlegen, with dat superior to.

Xxoi^, m. -geg.

iikrmorgcn, adv. day after morrow.

iiklTttft^cn,
tr.

to-

stubbornness.
tro^, prep, {with dat. or gen.) in defiance of, in spite of, notwith-

surprise, startle.
(seple)

itberfe^en,
across,

tr.

set over or

{inseple) translate.

standing, sbcm, adv. in spite of that, notwithstanding.

itkrfte^en, intr. {sepHe) stand over or out. {inseple) last over, last

Xrunf, m. -M. drink, draught. Xxu^p, m. -ppe, -ppe. troop.

through,
through.

outlast,

endure, live

^U^,

n. -c^eg, -iic^er. cloth, linen;

itbertninben, 0.

tr.

overcome, con-

kerchief.

quer, subdue.
iibtig, adj. {or adv.) left over, left.

Sttgcnb, /. -ben. virtue.

tttgent^aft, adj. {or adv.) virtuous.

ilciiicn/

be

left.

VOCABULAEY.
u6rt0en0, adv. for the rest, moreover.
insignificant, stttttg,
adj.

435
rude,
sBefttnnt,<w^i. unknown.

naughty.
/. -gen.

UeBung,
tice.

exercise, prac-

ssBetoegJit^, adj.

immovable. sBc

Ufer, n.

-x^f

-r.

shore,

coast,

mol^nt, adj. uninhabited. sBtaUt^s Bat, useless.

bank.
U|r, /.
-retl.

Unt,

conj.

and.
adj. thankless,
scnlls

hour

clock, watch.

unsllttnfbttr,
Ii(^,

after numerals, o'clock.

adj.

endless,

scntbc^rlii^,

Um,

adv.
;

about

and seple prefix, around, around about or over.

{with

indispensable,
inexperience.

setfttftrenftcit, /.

sCrmcfeUri, adj.
sCrfc^Ut^,
scrtriiglit^,

around, about; near to; respecting, conprep,

accus.)

immeasurable.
indispensable,
expected,
ble.

adj.

adj.

cerning,
for.
arrCt

{after verbs of asking)

unendurable. stttOIXXUt,

adj.

un-

{with comparativef denoting

sfe^lbttt, adj. infalli-

of difference) by.

before ju

sfc^IBttrtctt, /. infallibility.

and an infinitive, in order, so as. urn .... ^cr, {with accus. between) round about, uui .... toittcn^ {yyith gen.) on account
of.

sgcac^tct,

prep,
of,

{with

dat.

or

gen.)in spite
ing,
conj.

notwithstandsgcftt^r,

although,

ado. about, nearly, not far from.

sgClicBt, adj.

unloved, sgcmif^t,
adj.

UmaXTMtt^tr. throw the embrace.

arm

about,
to

adj.

unmixed, sgcrc d)t,

unfair.

unadj.

just,

sgcf(^e()en,

Umbrtngen,
lose one's

{irreg.)
life,

tr.

cause
kill.

destroy,

not happened, undone. sgCs f^Ia^t, adj. uncouth, unwieldy.

sgCtUi^^Cit, / uncertainty,
sge?

Umgang, m.
pany.
urn 9 eb en,
0.

-gg.

going around
;

roundabout way
tr.

society,

comsur-

JOgcn,

adj.

illbred,

rude,
adj.

unin-

mannered.
{insepUe)

sgtaublilJ),

credible.

round, environ, enclose. around, round about. Umterneit, intr. leam over again, learn in a different way.
Itni^Ct, adv.

Unglucf,

rn.

ill-luck,

misfortune,

unhappiness.
Ultsglutflid),

adj.

unfortunate, un-

happy,

sgtiirffelig, adj.

unlucky,

Umltegen, 0.

intr.

f.

lie

around or

unfortunate, miserable.
Unibcrritttt, /. -ten. university.

about, umncgenti, surrounding, neighboring.

Umfcl^cn, 0.
flex,
intr. look about, relook about one's self.
tn-

spa^s unsmbgtid), adj. impossible, stcd)t, n. fcnb, adj. unsuitable.

wrong, error
*ru^e,
clean,
/. sfauftcrlid^,

injustice, injury.

Umftant),
stance.

-beg, -cinbe.

circum-

disquiet,
adj.

anxiety.

not neat or
in-

or reg.) tr. Umtoenbett, {irreg. turn about, reverse, invert, intr.

turn, turn back.
Itns, neg. prefix,
1.

dirty,

/ft^ultltg, adj.

nocent.
unfcr, poss. pron. our, ours. unfer, gen. pi. of i^.

same as English un-.

adj.

2.

sQ6dnberli(^,

unalterable.

unferig (unfrig), poss. pron. our,

ours.

sanfeJ^nltf^, adj, inconsiderable,

436
Unsfit^er,
cw^i-

OEHMAJJ-ENGUSH
uncertain, unsafe.

bera^ten,
bcraltcn,
ttltct,

tr.

despise, disdain.

Itnten, odv.

below, beneath.

95crtt(fttun9, /
intr.

contempt, scorn.
f.

UXdtX, adv. and sep'le prefix, below,

grow

old.

UCU?

beneath, under
prep,
(with

among, amid.
or
accus.)
;

grown
tr.

old, aged.

dot.

HcriinilCrn,

change,
tr.

alter.

under,

beneath,
;

than, inferior to

below less among, amid,

this time,

iJCtbcrgcn, 0.

hide, conceal.
better,

Ucrbcffern,

tr.

make

im-

between; during. Untcrtcffen, adv. during meantime.

untergc^cn, 0. descend, set
ItntcrliCftCn,
intr.
;

prove.
JBerficlfcrung, /. -gen.

improve-

ment, reform.

f.

go down,
{sep'le)

tietbteten, 0.

tr.

{with dot.) forbid,

fall,

perish.
lie

interdict.

0.

intr.

tierbtnben, 0.

under. {insepHe) succumb, yield, be worsted. Untemc^mcn, 0. tr. undertake, at-

tr. bind up, tie up bind together; lay under an obli;

gation.
!|JcrBrC^en,
gress, 0.
tr.

break

trans-

tempt.
tttttcrri^tcn,
tr.

as

noun, transgression,
criminal,

instruct, teach.

crime, guilt.
JBcrirct^cr , tn. -rs, -r. transgressor.

ttntcrt^an, m. -nen or -n, -nen. subject, dependent.

UnttXtOt^^, adv.

on the way, underadj.

tierbrcnncn, {irreg.)
scald.

tr.

or
;

intr.

j.

way.

bum up, destroy by fire

unintersUtttcrliinilif^, adj.

scorch,

UnsUntcrBrO^en,
rupted.
patriotic.

stierfO^nH^, adj. placable, irreconcihable. $tlOilens

titi, adj.

unim-

tJCrbringcn, {irreg.)

tr.

pass away,

spend.
fStX^iat^t,

m. -tg. suspicion.

unfinished, incomplete.

s^DOtfit^ttg, adj. destitute of fore-

tiertiammen, tr. condemn, damn, sentence, ppl. used as noun,

imprudent, sfticit, adv. not far distant, prep, {mth gen.) not far from, near, stoitierfle^'
sight,

condemned
tiertieifcn, tr.

one.

cover up, conceal.

intr.
f.

ticrbcrficn,

0.

spoil,

be
de-

li^, adj. irresistible. stUO^I, adj. unwell, not well. stUUtbtg, adj.

ruined, perish. N.
troy, ruin,

tr.

spoil, des-

as noun,

ruin,

unworthy, derogatory to {with

gen.)

struction.
tjerberBItt^, adj. {or adv.) destruct-

Urfat^e, /.

-ci^en.

cause, motive.

ible

destructive, pernicious.
tr.

Dettltenen,
JBtttcr,

earn, gain

deserve.

m. -r,
adj.

-ater. father, slonb,

{or adv.) fatherly,

berbtent, deserving.
tJCrbric^cn, 0.
tr.

n. native country, fatherland.

tJcitcrUj^,

fret,

vex.

bet*
dis-

paternal.
I55ct(^cn, n. -n, -11.
violet.

broffcn, averse; gusted.

liSere^rung, /.
tion.

wearied,

reverence, venera-ne.

SBenciig, n. -g.
Her*
insep'le

Venice.
see

prefix,

307.6,

ISBcrein,

m.

-ii8,

union, com-

405.IU.ld

bination.

VOCABULABY.
tICtCitcTn, tr.

437
tr.

make

vain, frustrate,

ticrlutjcn,

render

futile.
I)

Ucrlangen,
or
f.

make short, shorten. Mr. long, desire, tr.

demand,
desire,

tJerftt^rCtt, 0. intr.

proceed,
in,

desire,

require,

as

conduct one's
cline,

self.
f.

noun,
fall

longing,

wish,

ticrfatten, 0. mtr.

detJCt*

demand.
ticrlttff en,
tr.

degenerate,

decay.

leave, quit; forsake,

faUcn, dilapidated, ruinous. author, JBcrfttffcr, rn. -x^, -r.

desert,

reflex, {with

one's self to,

auf) confide trust in, rely or

composer.
iSBcrgttngcn^cit, /.

depend upon.
the past, time
trantJCrlcbcn,
tr.

live,

spend, pass.

past.

tierpnglil^, adj. {or adv.) sitory, perishable.

tietgeben, 0.
tr.

Ucrlei^cn, 0. tr. confer, grant.

tlCtlc^cn,
;

lend out,

let;

tr.

injure,

harm, hurt,
of.

give away; forgive,

wound hurt
uetlictcn,
lost,

the feelings
lose,

pardon.
htX^thtnB, adv. in vain, vainly. pass away, ncrge^Ctt, 0. Mr. j.
elapse, as noun,
ticrgttngcn,
error, offense.

0.

tr.

ucrlorcn,
loss,

ruined.

liBcrlufl,

m.

-t8, -te.

detri-

ment.

gone by,

elapsed,

past.

Ucrmogen, {irreg.) ir. have power as noun, to, be able to, can.
ability
;

Uetgcltcn, 0. tr. pay back, return, requite, recompense.

tetgeffen, 0. forget.
ticrgniigcn,
tr.

property.
-gen.

JBcrmut^ung

(or

Mr.

with gen.)

[=utung], /. supposition, conjecture.

tr.
;

HCtttCi^mcn, 0.
tr.

become

sensible

satisfy,

gratify,

of,

perceive

hear, understand.

as noun, satisfaction, enjoyment, delight. nergbnncn, tr. grant cheerfully, not grudge, allow.
please,
tierl^angniftdott [sniguoH], adj. (or

Dcrniinftig, adj. {or adv.) reasonable, sensible.

tJCrortincn,
tr.

order,

decree;
-r,

ordain.
HOcrriit^er

[4tt],

m,

-r.

adv.)

momentous,
<^^i-

fateful.

traitor, betrayer.
tJCrreifcil, intr.
].

Derl^aH
ful,

(^^

^^0 lifted, hatekeep

secret, con-

go on a journey,

abhorrent.
tr.

travel

off,
tr.

set out.

bCtlftctmUl^cn,
ceal.
tlcrl^cirttt^Ctt

bcrfttgcn,

refuse, deny.
tr.

ticrfammeln,
[statett], tr.
reflex,

{andreflex.)

assem-

give in

ble, collect, gather.

marriage,

marry,

get

ftcrfiiumen,

tr.

forget,

omit, neobtain,

married.
llCtltntlCrit, tr.

glect, miss.

hinder, prevent.

tJCtfc^affcit,

tr.

procure,

tietiagen,

tr.

chase away, expel.

furnish.

lierittufen, tr. sell.

Detf^attcn, 0. or K.

Mr.

f,

die

tietflagen,

accuse ;^complain of. ^etllagt (as noun), the accused.

tr.

away.

ticrft^oHcn, vanished.

tierf^tetien, adj. {or adv.) different,

JBerfitntiiger,

m. -rg,

-r.

herald,

various,

diverse,

pi.

various,

proclaimer, haxbinger.

sundry.

438

GEKMAN-ENGUSH
tJerttttUen,
tr.

Derf^Kc^en, 0. tr. shut up, close, shut, lock Tip. tjctf^loffen, locked up closed.
;

entrust,

confide.

intr. {with dat.)

trust to, confide.

tJCrf^nttt^Ctt, tr. disdain, despise.

liar,

Hertraut, trusted, trusty, famiintimate. ^txtxautn, n.

tr.

tjcrf^otten, see tJcrft^aHcn. DCrfrfloncn, tr. spare, exempt.

tJCrfc^tainiien, 0. intr,
\.

trust, confidence.

tiertreibcn, 0.
pel, exile. titVtoan1itln,tr.

drive away, ex-

vanish,

disappear.
tCrfcl^tClt, tr.

change, transform,
-ten.

wound, hurt.
misplace
;

convert.
JBcrtUttttiltft^ttft, /.

Derfc^cn,
transfer,

tr.

displace,

relation-

put

(into

a state or

ship, kin. collectively, relations,

condition).
t^tx[oi^Xitn,tr. reconcile, propitiate;

kindred.
tJCrhlCt^fcItt,
tr.

exchange;

conre-

expiate, atone for.

found.
reconcilia-

JBcrfo^nung, /.
Iierfliret^cn,

-gen.

tion, expiation.

UcrtDCrfen, 0. tr. ject, repudiate.

throw away,

0.

tr.

promise,

as

noun, promise.

^crtuirrung, /. -gen. tion, confusion.

ticrtnorren,

complicaentangled,

95cr|^reiung, / -gen. promise. understandHOerDanH, m. -beg.

ing, intelligence, intellect.
llCrfidntJig,

old

pple.

confused.
!55cr3ci^ni

[mB],

n.

-ffeg, -ffe.

adj.

{or adv.)

under-

note,

list.

standing, reasonable, judicious.

tietfleifen, tr. hide,
tietfielien, 0. tr.

bcrjcifteit, 0. tr. forgive,

conceal.
reflex,

iKcrjCi^ung, /.
ness,
ticrjtticifcln, intr.

pardon. pardon, forgivedespair. despair,

understand,

(impers.)

understand

itself,

be a
ttUf)

matter of course, {with understand, know well.

Ucrflettcn,
tr.

^Uerjtoeiflung,

/.

dec-

peration.
^Better,

displace,
Derftellt

reflex, dis-

m.

-r8,

-rn.

male

semble.

feigned
trouble,

cousin.
\S\t\,

sham.
tterjlorctt,
tr.

adj.

{or adv.)

much, many.
sfad^,
sj^riitl,

disturb,

siJCUtig, adj.

ambiguous,
slci^t,

derange.
ticrjitcij^en,
iriir. f.

adj.

manifold, various,

0.

tr.

spread over.
try,

adj.

very green,

adv or

glide away, elapse.

tr.

conj. perhaps,

maybe,

smttf, adj.

UCrfUt^cn,

attempt,

en-

deavor.
ticrtttttft^cn, tr.

exchange, barter;
tr.

times, smc^r, adv. much more, rather, sooner. sjcl^lt, fourteen. tJier, num. four,

many

mistake, confound.
ticrt^eibigcn

Nciiitgcn], fend, vindicate.

tr.

de-

JBicrtel, n. -t,

-t

quarter.
little bird.

SBogel, m.

-U,

-oget. bird.

tJCrticfcn,

deepen,

reflex,

be

UBiiglein, n. -n8, -n.

lost or absorbed. bCtticft, deeply

^O^ip m.
prefect,

-m,
etc.

-ogte.

governor,

engaged,

lost,

absorbed.

^crtrttgli^f eit, /. tolerance.

Jgolf, n. -!eg, -i3I!er. people, nation.

VOCABULAET.
sing,

439

used

collectively,

folks,

people.
f&OlUxVtfilt, n. right of nations, in-

adv. and sep'le prefix, beforehand, before, previously. former, preceding, dorig, adj.
t\OVfitX,

ternational law.
*

last. full,

tioff,

adj.

(or adv.)

filled

iJOrlcfcn,

0.

tr.

read before or for

;

complete, whole,
or insep'le prefix,

entire,
full.

seple

any one, read aloud lecture. [dian. ^ormtttag, m. forenoon.

liSormunD, m. -beg, -iiiiber. guarDorne^nten, 0. tr. set before one's self ; intend, propose ; undertake.

HoQenben,
end,
bet,
fect.

tr. bring to a close, complete, finish. tJOttctt? completed, finished, per-

t\otii^,adj. {or adv.) full,

complete,

9)orf(^Cttt,

m.

-Its*

coming

entire.

appearance,

gum
-gg,
prefix

to light,

foiumcn,
offer,

tioUtommtn,adj. {or adv.) perfect,

complete.
tiOtifimtiQ,adj. {or adv.) complete,
entire, total.

come

to light, appear.

ajorf^tttj,

m.
tr.

-age.
set

proposal.
iJOrfc^cn,
;

over,
self)

Hon, prep,

from, of, among, by, with ; concerning, about, by ; on, upon. fe(6ft,
{with dat.)

ai)point;

put before (one's

tr.

as

an

object, propose, intend.

tlOtftngCtt, 0.

or

intr.

sing before

of
Iior,

itself.

or for one
ttOtjietten,

{dat.),

sing aloud.

adv. and seple prefix, before ; formerly, prep, {with dat. or accus.) before (in place or in
time), in front of, ere
;

in sight
;

tr. put before; intropresent ; personate, represent plead, {with refiex. dat. put before one's mind, imagine,

duce,

of

for,

against,

on account of from, more than, above, of

e.

fancy.
95ort^cil [stcil],
tage, profit.

m. -U,

-le.

advanprefix.

time, ago:

g. Jjot

cincm ^tt^rc,
along
over,
\.

a year ago.
tlOtbei, adv.

tlOru6cr,
sep'le prefix,

adv.

and

sep'le

and

across before or in front, along by, past

past.
;

by, past; past

and gone,

over, finished, done.

\.

done with,

t^tfittl, 0. intr.

go

sffiel^cn, 0. intr.

fly past,

rush
in

past, pass by.

JKortlCrftttUS, n.

front part of the

DOtttiatt0,

adv.

forward,
i'dr.

on,

house.
UOrfoftrcn, 0. intr.

advance,

ffttcbett,

strive

go or drive \. before or in front, drive up.

n. -c^g, -ad^er.

onward or forward.
tottt^, adj. {or

IKorgcma^, chamber.

ante-

adv.) awake.

ttia^en,

intr.

wake, be
intr.

awake;

SDorgcf^it^tc, /. previous or antecedent history.

watch.
til

tt^ fen,

0.

wax, grow,
brave,

Uorgcficrn, adv. day.

day before yesterhave before

increase.
ttiader, adj. {or adv. ) gallant,

Hor^a^en,

{irreg.) tr.

clever.

one or in view, intend,

SBaffe,/, -fen.

weapon.

440
ttmgett,
tr.

GERMAN-ENGUSH
m.
hazard, risk, dare. -ng, -n or -agett.
;

SSttffcr, n. -x9, -r.

water.

SBttgen,
SBal^l/ /

tOC^fcln,

tr.

or

intr.

change, exarouse.

wagon, carriage
-len.

car.

change.
selection,
toetfen, tr.

choice,

wake up, wake,

election.
tDfi^klt,
tr. tr.

tociJer, conj.

neither (withfoUmmn^

choose, select, elect.

believe erroneously,
;

no^,
1.

nor).

tua^nen,

be mistaken in believing fancy,

imagine.
tOd^X, adj. (or adv.) true, real. to'df^Vtn'ii, prep, {with gen.) during.
conj.
2.

9Scg, m. -ge, -ge. way, path, road, route ; mode, manner,

means.
tlAt^,adv.

off;

gone,

and sep'le prefix, away, interjec. be gone,

0.
tr.

while, whilst.
truth.

SBttftr^cit,/. -ten.
SBa(t),

m. -beS, -dtber. forest, wood.

forester.

away, away, away.

of,

snc^mcit,
stoerfcit,

take

0.

tr.

throw

sl^utct, tn.

toegen, prep, (with gen.)

on account

SSttni),/. -anbe.
tUttnJlCln, irdr.
\

wall.

because

of, for.

or or

1^.

go, walk,

1. tOCl^, adj.

(or adv.) sad, painful.

proceed.
tnanbern, intr. rove ; travel.
traveller.
f
If,

2. aSc^, n. -f)e8,

wander,
wanderer, wanderer,

-^ -I)e or -f)en. woe, pain, distress, grief. t|un, (withdat.) give pain to, distress.

SSanberer, m. -r, -r.

SBcifi, n. -be^, -ber.

woman,
;

wife.

toei^en, 0.

intr.

f.

give way, lose

(with dot.)

SBonbcrgmann,

m.

ground, flinch, yield

toeitien, intr.

traveller (on foot). toanitn,intr.]orl). stagger, totter,

yield to, turn out for.

pasture, feed.

waver, flinch.
toantt,

Xon%txn,tr. refuse, deny, object to.

odv.

(interrog.)

when?

at

SBct^nat^t, /. gen'lly in pi.

sfctt,

what time ?
conj.

Christmas.
;

when
/.

at

to arm, adj. (or

adv.)

what time. warm.

warning,
stay,

tocil, conj.

because, since,

as.

SBetn,

rn.

-ne, -ne. wine.

SBttritttng,

-gen.
wait,

toettten, intr.

weep, cry.

caution.

toetneritt^, adj. (or adv.)

incUned
sage,

tOavUn,

irdr.

(with -ouf)

await wait for, await wait

;

to weeping, whining.
tOCife,

adj.

(or adv.)

wise,

on, serve.
to arum,

prudent,

as noun^

wise

man,

adv. (or conj.) for or

on

sage. SSetSl^eit /.
tOCife, adj.

account of what or which, why,

wherefore.
toaB, pron. interrog. or relat. what,

wisdom, knowledge.
white.

(or adv.)

tOCit,

adj.

(or adv.) wide,

broad,

that

which
;

whatever
cttOttg,

why,

large, far, far off, distant.

tOCitcr,

for what, /or

somewhat how. sort of, what kind

immer,

something,
fiir,

adv.

farther,

further;

of.

aut^,

what

besides.
toe(c^,

nut,

whatever.

see

175-6, 179.

interrog. or relat. adj. or pron. which, what, that, indef. pron. some, any.

, ,

VOCABULAKY.
fl&tUc, f. -ten.

441
against,

JBcIt, /. -ten.

wave, billow. world, earth, uni^bc^tuinger, rn.

slauf,
stcgiCs

prefix,

gain

-,

with -;

prep, {with accus.) against, contrary.

toitierfe^en, reflex,

verse, society,

conqueror of the world, m. course of the world.

rcnU,
stDCife,
cidj'
ctdj.

{with dot.) {in-

sepHe) set one's self against, op-

world-governing.
philosophic,

pose, resist,
self again.
tQttierfle^en,

tr.

{seple) seat one's

as

tneniieit,

noun, philosopher. turn, {reg. or irreg.) tr. turn about, direct, apply.
ci^dj.

0.

intr.

{with dot.)

withstand,

resist,

oppose.

toenig,

{or adv.)

little,

not

mibctflteben, intr. {with dot.) strive or struggle against, oppose, resist,

much;
a
little,

few, not

many,

ein

in

be reluctant.

bit.

tOCnig|iten0, adv.

at least, at

any

tuibmen^ tr. dedicate, devote, reflex, devote one's self.

tUtlirtg,

rate.
toeitn, conj.

adj.

{or

adv.)

when

usually,

if,

repugnant,
cross.
luie,

offensive,

contrary; odious

case.

$Q(ett^,

although.

tOtV, pron. interrog. or rdat.

who, whoever. ttUt^, nur, whoever, see 173, 179. toetticn, 0. intr. f. become, come

he

who,

adv. {interrog.)

way? how!

in

how? in what what degree or measure?

how,
efc.
;

conj. {relat.)

of manlike
;

grow, as auxiliary, see 240.2,4, 275-77. ^n, {with dot.) turn to, become, etttem fall to one's share, be given to
to
be,

ner and degree, as, like

as,

such

as, as if;

Ottli^,

nur,
and

of time, as, when.

however, howsep'le

soever.
tuiciict,

one. impers. with pred. adj. begin

adv.

or inseple

to be or feel.
toerfen, 0.
tr.

prefix,

again, anew, once more.

throw.
-fe.

SBcrf,

ri.

-fe8,

work, deed,
{or adv.)

totCbcrbrtngcn, {irreg.) tr. back or again, restore.

ttitebergeben,
0.
tr.

bring
back,

production.
teicrt^ [tticrt],

give

adj.

with

restore.
tOietter^Olen,
tr.

(of) or dnt. (to) worthy, worth; dear, beloved, deserving. SBert^ [ttJcrt], m. -i\)t^, -t^e. worth, value, price.

gen.

{sep'le)

bring or

fetch back, {insep'le) say again,

repeat.
tutetierfe^ren, intr.
f.

turn back,

SScfcn,n. -n8,-n. being, existence;

creature, living thing.
SBcflcntttfd^C, /. vest-pocket.

return.

toiclJCrfommcn, 0. intr, back again, return.

tuietierfe^en,

f.

come
meet
I

3Better, n. -r, -r.

weather

tnidltig, adj. {or adv.)

storm. weighty, im;

0.

tr.

see or

again, as noun, meeting again.

portant.
SBic^tigfcit, /.

out
-ten.

till

we meet again

importance,

au

revoir.

consequence.
toiffeltt, tr.

tUtetierum, adv. over again, again,

toitier^

wrap up, roll, envelop. odv. and sep'le insep'le

SSicge, /. -gen.
\

cradle.

toiegcn, 0.

tr,

weigh

lift

442
SBtcn, n. -ttS. Vienna.
SBtefe, /. -en.
toiltl,

GERMAN-ENGLISH
statement less definite, indeed, perhaps, probably, I presume.
etc.

meadow,

pasture.
fierce,

adj.

(or adv.) wild,

savage, unruly.

(Sic

mir
,

ifl

I feel well.

Uhtn

farewell,

sbefanitt, adj.

SBiKc or SBittcn, m. -n, -n. will, intent, design, purpose, um .... tOttten, (with gen.) for the sake of, on account of.
toittfommen, adj.
(or adv.)

well

known,

st^ttt,/.

good deed,

kindness, benefit.
2.

S8o^(, n. -te. weal, welfare, advantage.

wel-

come. aBiitli, m. -beg, -be. wind, sfilats tctlt, pi' cMcken-pox. SStnilung, /. -gen. winding, coil. SBinfel, m. -Ig, -I. comer, angle, nook, SBinter, m. -r, -r. winter. tnir, nom. pi. of i^. we. toirfcn, tr. work, produce, do, perform, operate.
iQtrfH^, adj. (or adv.) actual, real.
SBirtft

tOOl^nen, intr. dwell, live, reside. SBo^nort, m. dwelling place.

SBoinuitg, /. -gen. dweUing, lodging, residence, house.

SBoIf, m. -feg, -olfe. wolf. SBolfc, /. -en. cloud.

tDOtten, (irreg.)

tr.

will,

be

willing;

intend, desire, wish ; be on the point, be about ; claim, assert.

see,

251, 258, 259.

/.

aSonne,
toots,

-en.

joy,

pleasure,

bUss, rapture.

mixt], m.
tr.

-i\)t%, -t^e.

host,

same as

tOO.

landlord.
miff en, (irreg.)
of;
loith

know, be aware

UBort, n. -teg, -te or -orter. word, term ; expression, speech.

tounti,

injin.

know how.

as

adj.

(or

adv.)

wounded,

noun, knowledge, learning.

SBiffenft^ttft, /. -ten.

sore, hurt.
;

knowledge
-r8,

SSl^untie, /

-ben.
n.

wound, hurt.
-r.

science.
SBttttiicr

aSunbcr,
-r.

-rg,

wonder,

mittotv], m. widower.
adv. (interrog.)

miracle.
iOUnt)Crbttr, adj. (or adv.)
ful,

wonder-

mo

where? in what place? conj. (relat.) where ; in which, at which, on which, etc. of time, at which (time), when. (for too compounded with prep's,
instead

miraculous.

tuuntierit, reflex,

wonder, be astonwish,

ished or amazed.
SSuttfi^,

m.
tr.

-fc^eS, -itnfd^e.

desire.

of

lottg,

tucr,

etc.

see

tniinf^cn,
SBiirilC,
/.

wish, desire, long.

173.2, 180.) s^cn (^v. (interrog.) or conj. (rdat.) whence, from whence, adv. or sl^ilt, conj. whither, what way. sju, adv. or conj. whereto, to what purpose.

-en.

worth; dignity,
adv.) worthy,

high rank or
ttluriJig,

office.

adj.

(or

deserving.
SBiirjc, /. -en.
SS^irjcI, /. -In.

spice.

root.

SBo^e,

/. -d^en.

SBoge, /.
1. toOl||(,

week. -gen. wave, billow.

;

Xtnit,

/.

-ten.

xenium (name

adv. well, in good

ojiien

or degree

used

to

manner make a

given to satyrical epigrams by

Goethe und

Schiller),

; ;

VOCABULABY.

443
end, limit
;

S(i%

f'

-Ifctt*

number
out; pay

figure.

ja^Icn,

tr. tell

off.

3icl, n. -\%, -le. aim, object.

goal,

ja^ten, tr.

tell over,

count, number.

jicmcn,
Jtemltt^,

intr.

(with dat,)

beseem,
suitable,

3ft^n, m. -neg, -at)ue. tooth. (or adu.) tender, soft, Jtttt, d/.
delicate
;

become,

suit,

be

fitting for.

cidj.

{or

adv.)

slender,

frail.

^ttrtl^cit, /

tenderness, softness.
{<yr

jcirtli^, cidj-

adv.) tender, fond.

SaviiWtiU
ness.

tenderness, fond-

proper; moderate, tolerable. jictcn, tr. adorn, ornament. dimmer, n. -r, -r. room, apartement. 3inn, n. -nneg. tin. sfolbttt, w.
tin-soldier.
Jtttetn, intr. tremble,

jaubetn, intr. delay, linger, hesitate.

ge^tt,

num. ten.
n.
;

quake.

Sti^tn,

-n,

-It.
;

token, sign,

^orn,

ni.

-ne^.

anger, wrath.

mark

signal

miracle, wonder.

^ti^tn,tr. show, point out; display, show one's self, reflex,

jornig, adj. {or adv.) angry. sep'le prefix, jU, adv. and
together,

to; or

closed

with

adj.

appear.
3ei(e, /. -ten.
line,

adv. too, overmuch, in excess.

row.

prep, {with dat.)

to,

unto

in

^tii, /. -ten.

time, season.
tidings,

gcitung, /. -gen. newspaper.

Stli, n. -teS, -tc.

news

tent.

besides ; at, in, by; on, in ; with in order to, for preceding, dat., toward, as sign ofinfin., to, in order to.
addition
to,
;

gets insep'le prefix, see

307.7.

jukrcitcn,
ready.

tr.

prepare,

make

gCtfitC^cn, 0. intr f. or tr. break asunder or in pieces, shatter.

jerfatten, 0. intr.
\.

jubringen,

{irreg.)

tr.

with accus.

fall to pieces,
;

and
with

dat.

bring

to, offer,

present;

crumble,
out.'

become ruined
p'ple,

fall

accus.

only,

pass (time),
dis-

jcrf alien,
;

decayed,

spend.
3utf)t,

ruinous
jerfc^cn,

not on good terms, at

tear,
tr.

/.

-ten.

training,

variance.
tr.

cipline.

mangle.
tear in pieces,
intr.
f.

jUcfen, intr.

\)

or

\.

move with
throb,

jetrctftcn,

0.

quick

motion,

quiver,

rend asunder,
asunder.
jerfloren,
ish.
tr.

be torn

flash, tr. shrink, shrug.

Surfer, m. -rg, -r.

destroy, ruin, demoln.

sweetmeats,

sugar, stuett confectionary,

candy.
JUCrfl, adv. at first.

gerflrcuttng, /. -en. scattering; diversion, amusement; absence

of mind.
Jtel^en, 0. tr.

jufa^ren, 0. or ride to,

3Ufluflern,

intr.

f.

{wUhdat.) dniye
in,

come

approach.

draw, pull attract extract, obtain, bring bring up.

;
;

tr.

whisper.

reflex,

draw or
;

move

slowly,
intr.
f.

jufriebcn, adj. {or adv.) at peace, content, pleased.

march

stretch, extend,

proceed,

move; march, go on

Sug, m. -geg, -iige. drawing, pull; impulse draught, breath ex;

an

expedition.

pedition,

4M
JupngTi^,
adj,
ible, affable.

GERMIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
(or adv.) accessjuriirftocifcn, 0.
ject.
tr.

send back,

re-

gugeften, 0. intr.
to,
;

{with dat) go [. approach go on, proceed, happen, come to pass.

JUriirfjic^en,

0.

tr.

draw back,

withdraw, reflex, retreat, withdraw.

move

back,

3U0CI^ ''^- "^^r ~f' rein, bridle. gUglctt^, ddv. at the same time.
JUgreifen, 0. Mr. {with dot.) take hold of, seize lay hold, fall to.
;

^Ufunft,
fasten.

/.

time to come, future.

tr.

juma^cn,
gunge,

make

to,

shut,

JUfammen, adv. and sep'le prefix. together, in company, jointly. jufammenf^mcljcn, 0. intr. f. melt together, run together, dwindle away. jttfammcnjiurjcit, intr. f. tumble
together, collapse, fall in.

/. -gen.

tongue; language,

speech.
JUtetien, intr. {with dat.) address;

JUtrauen, confide
fidence.

tr.

{with dat.) entrust to,

in.

as noun, trust, con-

exhort, urge
pacify.
3tttU(f , adv.

try to console or

jUDOr, adv. before, formerly. JUtQCKeit, adv. at times, occasionally.

and
;

ward, back
rear.

sep'le prefix, backbehindhand, in the

gtUttng, m. -geS, -dnge. sion, coercion, force.

Jttlttnjig,

compul-

JuriilfblciBcn,

0.

intr.

f.

remain

num. twenty.
conj. to

behind.
jururfgetdittttcn,

Jtuat, adv. or

be sure, inaim, end,

0.

tr.

win back
turn back,
\.

deed.
gtoerf,

again.
JUritdfe^rCtt,
intr.
f.

m.

-cfe,

-(fe.

design, purpose.
jhiei,

return.
glttitrffommcn, 0. back, return.
JUriirff^irfcn, tr.
JUritrffein,
irdr.

num. two. smaU, twice.

adj.

come

}ttietfetto0,

{or adv.)

doubt-

less.

0.

intr.

send back. be behind \.

JtOCifcIn, intr. doubt.

gtUCig,

rn.

-ge, -ge. twig,

tr.

branch

hand

or back.

Jtllingen, 0.

force,

compel

ttrttrfllCrtttngett, tr.

demand

back.

3tt)0(f,

num. twelve.

n.

ENGLISH-GERMAN YOCABULART.
be

a, an, indef. art. ein, einc.

afraid
nor).

fid)

filrd^ten

(of,

able, adj.

fal)ig.

able

to be

!onueu

(irreg.): see

after, prep, nad} (dat).

one ....

254.
about, prep, urn (accus.), iilicr (accus. or dat). adv. ^erum, uinl^er;
ungefal)v.

another, nad)cinanbci:. adv. and conj. nad)bem. afternoon, 9?ad)nnttag, m. -gs,

-ge.

round aboat,

urn ....

l)erum.

afterwards, adv. no(^^er, baronf,

barnad).
0.

above, adv. obcn. prep. lUcr.

abstain, (from,

Mr.
(?af.).

fid)

cutI)aUcu

again, adv. tuieber, nod^ einniat.

come
tr.

mieberfommen

0.

accept,

<r.

ainic^nteii 0.
tr.

Mr.

\.

accompany,
account: on
(gen.), \)0V.

licfllciteu.

age, ?ntcr, n. -r8, -r.

alas, m<er;. iuel)!
0.6)
\

accordingly, adv.

nlfo.

of,

prep.

tDcgcn

alive, ad>. Icbcnbig.

all, adj. all (see

193),
:

gan;;.

accuse-,

tr.

auftngcn

(of, gen.).

allow,
0.

tr.

accustom, tr. gcuio()ncn (to, an). accustomed, adj. getuoljiit {governimj accufi. with
fciii).

be

ed,

erlanben.

Mr.

(daf.)taffcn

biirfcn

see

253.

alone, adj. or adv. allein. all

gan,^ allein.

acquainted: be
(irreg.) tr.

become
m. -v^,

with, fcuucu with, ten-

along, prep, enttang (grew.). already, adr. jd)on, bereit.

also, adv. and), nod).

ncn tcrncn.
acre,

act

as

9l(!er,

9tccfcr.

altliough, conj. obglcic^, obfc^on.

if,

t^nn nt 0.

activity, 3:i)Qtigfcit, /.

admire, tr. bcnjnnbcvn, advantage, ^^ovtl)eiI

always, adv. innner, ftet^. America, 'iltnicvifa, n. -a. American, "Jlincvitaner, m. -v,-v
5lmerifanerin, /. -innen.

-%

-Ic.

American,
[^at],

adj. anieritanifd).

advice,
-atl)e.

Stot^

m.

among, prep,
amuse,
tr.

nnter

{dat.

or accus.).
fid)

aniiifiven.

be - d,

advise,
(dat.).

tr.

ratten [rotcn] 0.

Mr.

amiifircn.

aflkir, <Ba^e, f. -d)tn -t, -tc.

@e|d^aft, n.

amusement, 3Seignugen,n. -n,-n, amusing, adj. aniiifant.

an, see su

, . :

446
and, conj. unb. angry, adj. gornig, animal, 3:1) ier [Xkx],
-re.

ENGLiSH-GimMAN
anthor, 5>crfaffer, m. -r, -t* antnnin, iperbft, m. -teS, -tc. avenge, tr. rcic^en. await, tr. ermarten, marten auf.

n.

-re,

another, adj. ein anber, nod^ ein see 198.30.

awake,

tr.

mecfen.

intr.

trwadjcn,

aufmaci^en.

answer,
(dat).

tr.

and

intr.

ontworten

away,
fein.

adj.

meg,

fort,

be

fort

answer, 5tnttt)ort, /. -ten. antechamber, 3Sorgemac^, n.

-dc^er.

-d^e,

back,

adj.

l^inter.

adv.

gururf;

riicfmarts.

any, ady. irgenb ein. not, !ein: see 195.2. one, 3ebei% 3ebermann. thing, dtwa^, ma^, oUeg. not thing, 9^i(f)tg. appear, intr. erfc^einen 0., Qug=

bad,

fortune,
tr.

adj.

{adv.

-ly)

fd^Ied^t, boje.

Ungliicf, n.
-l^,

bag, ^^eutel, n. bake, tr. bacfen

baptize,

-I
bratenO.

0.,

taufen.

jel)en 0.,

fcl)einen 0.

apearance,
apple,

5tnfel^en, n.

-n, -n.

m. -Is, ^lepfel. April, ?rpril, m. -I8. arm, 3(rm, m. -meg, -nte. -chair, ?e^nftu^I, m.
5lpfet,

bar-room, c^enfftube, /. -ben. be, intr. fein 0. \., merbcn 0. \., bleiben, 0. f. be (as to health),
fid}

befinben 0.

there are,

etc.

eg gib t, etc.

bear,

tr.

iragen 0., ertragen 0.

army, eer,
^eriint.

n. -reg, -re.

beautiful, adj. {adv. -ly) fc^on.

aroond, prep,
arrive,
art,
intr.

um

(accws.),

um
f.

. .

anfommen
/.
-iinfte.

0.

,(?un[t,

-school,

beauty, i1)bn^eit,/. -ten. because, conj. meit. become, intr. merben 0. f. bed, ^ett, n. -tteg, -tte or -tten.
to -, ^u ette, ing S3ett. beer, ^ier, n. -reg, -re. before, prep, ijor {accus.or dat.).
conj. beoor, e^e.

^unftfd^ule,/.
artist, ^iinftler,

as,

ad

\ ot^,

m. -rg, -r. tt)ie fo. as if, atg ob.

;

as soon as, fobatb.

adv. t>orber.

ashamed : be

im

, ftd)

ask, fr. frag en. funbigen na6).

asleep, adv.
|ci)(afen.

fd)Qmen.
fid)

after,

er=

beg, tr. bitten 0., betteln. go begging, bettetn ge'^en.

c^fafe.

be

begin, intr. anfangen 0. t^eginning, 5lnfang, m. -gg, -ange. behind, prep. Winter {accus. or
dat.).

assemble,
ntetn.

tr.

tierfammefn,
tterfammetn.

jam=

intr. ftd)

at, prep, an, ^u, bei,

in aufe.

gttjolf

Uf)r.

all,

gar

nid)t.

twelve o'clock, nm an end, Gnbe. ganj unb gar. not least, menigfteng.
^,u

um.

home,

behold, tr. erbticfen. belief, laube, m. -eng, -en.

believe,
tr.

gtanben.
ge^oren,

belong,

intr.

ange^orcn

all,

(to, dat.).

Angnst,

Stnguft,

m.

-tS.

bench, 33an!, /. -an!e. beseem, impers. jiemen {dat),

giemen.

fid)

aunt, 2:antc,

/. -ten.

VOCABULAKY.
beside, prq). ncoen (accus. or dat). adv. and}.
best, adj. (or adv.) be ft

U7

betake one's
-r.

self, ftd^ begeben 0. betrayer, ^erriitljer [4er], m. -rg,

brother, 35rnber, m. -r, -ilber. building, ebdube, n. -beg, -be. bnm, /r. brennen (irreg.). Mr. Der* brennen (irreg.).
business, @cfd)dft, n. -t, -te,

better, adj. (or adv.) beffer, better, tr. Derbcffern.

bid,
tr. I)eit3eu

or busy, adj. bcfc^aftigt. be busied, fid) bejdiaftigen. but, conj. ober, fonbern, atlein, boc^.
, nid)tg nothing buy, tr. fanfen.

0., befet)ten 0. (dat).

atg.

bi?,

o,dj.

grof3, birf, t)od^.

bind, tr. binben 0. bird, 5>oge(, m. -tg, -oget.

5>ogIeiu, n. -tt, -n.

by, prep,
little

bei,

neben. a/^er passive,

bnrc^, tjor.

longer

three feet,
etc.

nm
;

brei

gu^

Idnger,

birthday, eburt^tag, m.
bit, tiicf, n, -(fg, -cfe
-xi9, -n.

33igc^cn, n.

call, <r. rnfcn 0.,

tiei^en 0.

away, abrufen.

nennen

(irreg.),

be

bite,

<r.

bei^en 0.

called, l)eicn.

bitter, ad/, (odu. -ly) bitter, grim=

camp,

Imager, n. -rg, -r.

mig. blaek,

adj, fc^iuarg,
tr.

blame,
bless,

tabetn

can, (irreg.) fijnnen : see 254. carpet, Sapete, /. -ten. carriage, Sag en, m. -ng, -agcn or
-n.

tr.

fegnen.

blood, ^lut, n. -teS.

blossom,

53(utt)e [i8(ute], /. -tfjen.

blue, adj. hlau.

book, ^nd),n.

-d)e8, -iid^er.

bom,

geboren.
atle beibe.

carry, tr. tragen 0. cast down, <r. ftiirjen. castle, Bd)io^, n. -ffeg, -offer. cathedral, S)om, m. -meg, -me. cold, \\6) catch, tr. fan gen 0.

both, adj. beibe,

erfditen.

bottle, Iafcf)e, /. -fdjen.

cause,
cease,

mir*. laffen
intr.

see

343.1.

56, d.

boy, ^uabe, m. -en, -en. braye, adj. (adv. -ly) tapfer. bread, 33vob, w. -beg.

anfpren.
dnbern, tierdnbern.
intr.

certainly, ad>\ getui^.

change,
t)tV'
fid)

tr.

break,

tr.

bred) en

0.
0.

intr.

bred)en, 3erbred)en

uerdnbern.

open,

charitable, adj. borm^er^^ig.

charity, 53armt)er5igfeit,/.
/

erbrec^en 0.

Sobl^

breakfast,
breakfast,
bribe,
tr.

griif)ftu(f, n.

-dg, -de.

tt)dtigfeit, /.

intr. frut)ftuden.

Charles, ^arl, m.

-Ig.
-ly) rcigcnb,

beftec^en 0.

charming,
ollerliebft.

a^j. (adv.

bridge, 53rude, /. -den. bright, adj. l)eU. bring, tr. bringen (irreg.).

back,
-M)e;

chat,

intr.

^tonbern.

cheap,

adj. bitlig.
tr. fc^dljen.

tDicberbringen 0., njieber^olen.

cherish,

broad, adj. breit. brook, 53ad), m.

-d^eg,

child, ^inb, n. -beg, ~ber. impers. chilly : be , froftein,

vMh

riinntein, n. -n8, -n.

,;

448
choose, tr. Christian,
voa\)len.
Sfirift,

ENGLISH-aERMAN
consider,
tr.

betraci^ten.

as, IjaU

m. -ten, -ten;

ten

fiir

0.
tr.
tr.

(5l)ri[tin, /.

-innen.
/. -cf)eiu

console,

troften.

church, ^ird)c,
claim,

contain,
see

ent{)atten 0.
tr.

city, @tabt, /. -abte.

make

contemplate,
ttjotten:

betrac^ten.

to,

content, adj. gufrieben.

258.
clever, adj. flug.

content one's self, cook, tr. tod) en.

0.,

fid^

begnitgen.

climb,
fteigen.

tr.

fteigen

^inauf*

cool, adj. {adv. -ly)

fii^I.

cloister, ttofter, n. -r8, -oflcr.

copy, tr. abfci^reiben 0. corner, @de, /. -den.

cost,
tr.

clothes, clothing, tieibcr,

pL

foften.

cloud, 2Bo(fe,/. -fen,

costly, adj. foftUc^, foftbar.

coachman,
coat,
9Jo(f,

tntjc^er, m. -r8, -r. m. -deg, -ocfe. coffee, taffee, m. -eeg. cold, acZ/. {adv. -\j) iaU. catch
fic^

count

(earl), @raf, m. -fen, -fen. countess, rafin, /. -innen. country, ?anb, n. -be, -cinber.

erfdlten.

natiye , 25aterlanb, n. couple, ^aar, n. -reg, -re.

Cologne

(the city), ^otn, n. -n8.

courage,
cousin,

9JJutt) [3}?nt],

m. -t^e;
^ou--

colored, adj. bunt.

come,

intr.

fommen

0.

j.

back,

Xa^ferfeit, /.
35etter,

m. -r, -rn

juriidfommen, guriicffeliren. forth, ^ert>or!ommen. to one's

help, einem ju C^utfe fommen. out, l)inaufommen.

fine,/, -nen.

coward, geigting, m. -g,

create, fc^offen 0.

-ge.

comfort,

tr.

troften.

command,
command,

tr.

^eigen, befeljien {dat.)

0., gebieten {dat.) 0.

S3efe^(,

crime, SSerbrec^en, n. -ng, -n. criminal, SSerbrec^er, m. -r^, -r. crowd, ebrange, n. -eg, -e; 3}?enge, /. -gen; d^aar, /.
-ren.

m. -U,

-le.

commit, tr. bege^cn 0. communicate, tr. mitt^eiten

ten] (to, daf.).

crown, ^rone,
[4ei* -rg, -r.

/.

-nen.
;

cup, Xaffe, /. -ffen

curse,
auf).
tr.

^ed^er, m.

companion, efa^rte, m. company, efeUfd^aft, /.

complain, complete, complete,
intr. flag en.
tr.

-en.
-ten.

flrn^en intr. {with dat. m-

cut,
-ly)

tr.

fc^neiben 0.

off,

ah'

tJoUenben.
{adv.
tooEig,

j(|lagen 0.,

abfc^neiben 0.

adj.

tiollenbet.

comrade, tomerab, m. -ben, -ben

efett,

m. -en, -en.
self, ft(^

concern one's

befiimmern.

dance, intr. tonjen. danger, @efat)r, /. -ren. dangerous, adj. gefci^rlid^. dare, intr. \x6) ttjagen ; biirfen

see

concerning, prep, ntegen {gen.). condemn, tr. Derbammen.

confidence, SSertrouen, n. -n.

253.
dark, adj. bnnfel. daughter, 2;od^ter, /. -od)ter. day, 2;ag, m. -geg, -ge.

conquer,

tr.

erobcrn.

VOCABULAEY.
dead, adj. tobt [tot]. dear, adj, \\t^, wert^
[teuer].

449
near,
intr.
fi6)

draw
[n)ert],

ndljtvn (to,

t^euer

dat.).

death, iob, m. -beg, -be. debate, infr. bebattieren,

ten 0.

dream, Xxanm, m. -meg, -dnme, dream, intr. {or tr.) trannten.

^x6)

\ixtU

dress, ^leib, n. -beg, -ber.

dress,
tr.

tr.

!(eiben.

intr.

fid)

an^

deceiye,

betriigen 0.
S)eceTnber,
erfldren.

jjie^en 0.

December,
declare,
<r.

m. -r8.

drink,
drive,
ren.

tr.
tr.

trinfen 0.
{or mir.) fal)ren 0.,
fii'^^

deed, %\)ai, f. -ten. delight : it delights me, e8 freut deep,

ac?;.

(for

pleasure),

fa^ren.

by

fpa^ieren

tief.

deliyer,

tr. tr.

abUefern.
tierlangen.

up, t)orfal)ren. duke, ^er^og, m. -geg,

-oge.

fa^ren (an).

out,

or past,
tr.

Dorbet

tierjagen.

-ge

or

demand,
deny, tr. descend,
describe,
-gen.

tjerfagen.
tr.

during, prep, tcd^renb

duty, ''WW, /. -ten. dwell, intr. n)o()nen.

{gen,),

{or intr.) !^erab= or ]^in=

unter^fteigen 0.
tr.

befc^reiben 0.

dwelling, 2So()nnng,
/.

/. -geiu

description,
desert,
bient.
tr.

33e|c^reibung,

oerloffen 0.
tjerbienen.

each, pron. adj. jeber, ein see 190. one, jeber

:

other,
see

ieber.

deserre,

tr.

-ing, ber^

einanber

fid),

nng,

etc. :

155.4.
self, ftd)
|.

devote one's
difficult, adj.

tDibmen.

die, intr. fterben 0.

ear,

f(f)tt)er.

eager, adj. {adv. -ly) eifrig. O^x, n. -reg, -ren. -ring, Ol^rring, m.
early, adj.
frii^.

diligent, adj. (adv. -ly) ftei^ig.

dinner, 3}fittagge[fen,
direct,
adj.

n. -n^, -n.
,-ly)

(adv.

birect,

geraben 3Beg. disappear, intr. erfc!^tt)inben 0. discovery, (Srfinbnng, /. -gen;

(Sntbecfung, /. -gen.

earn, tr. geratnnen 0. earnestness, (Srnft, m. earth, rbe, /. -ben.

easy, adj. {adv. -ly)
eat,
tr.

-fteg.

Ieic!^t.

e[fen 0., fpeifen irdr.

/.
enttt)eber.

education, (Srjiet^ung,
lueit.

distant, adj. entfernt, fern, divine, adj. gottlic^.

either,

conj.
. .

meber,

either
ma6)cn.

or

.,

entmeber

do,

tr.

(or intr.)

without, entbe^ven. how 1 njie gef)t c% 3l)nen? doctor, %vit, m. -te, Heqte; 2)octor, m. -r, -ren. dog, ^nnb, m. -beS, -be. door, X()ur,/. -ren.

t{)nn 0.,

ober

you

emperor, ^aifer, m. -rg, -r. employment, 53ef(^dftignng,

-gen.

/.

empty,
end,
(Snbe.

adj. h\it, (eer.

(Snbe, n. -eg, -n.

at

an

^n

down,

adv.

^ernnter,
:

^inunter,

endeavor,
[idjen.

intr.

f\6)

beftreben, t3er=

^erab, ^inab

see

362.3, 379.1.

, ,

450
endeavor,

ENGLISH-GERMAN
53eftreben, n. -nS.

far,

ac?j.

(or adv.) n)eit.

enemy, geinb, m. -be, -be* England, ngtanb, n. -b8. EngUsh, adj. englifd^. Englishman, (Suglcinber, m.
-r.

unmeit.

not

not from, prep, un*

tt)eit (gren.).

fate, @d^icffa(, n. -Ig, -le.

-r8,

father,

enjoy,

<r.

\\6)

freuen

(gen.),

ge*

land, 35aterlanb, n. fault, ^el)ler, m. -rg, -r.

fear, ^urc^t, /. fear,
tr.

5Sater,

m.

-rg,

-ater.

itie^en
(gen.).

0.

(gen.),

fro^

werben

fiirc^ten,

fid^

fiird^ten

enough, adv. germg.

entice, in loden, antocfen. entire, adj. gan^. {adv. -ly) ganj

(t)or).

fearful, ad;, furd^tbar.

February, gebruar, m.
feel, intr.
0., fein
fid)

-rg.

unb gar, uoUig.

especially, adv. befonberS.
estate, @ut, n. -teg, -iiter; :2anb=
gut, n.

fii'^Ien,

fi(^

beftnben

(w)i</i c?af.) ;

see

292.4.

feeling, efiibt, w. -leg, -le.

fellow-citizen, 9)iitburger, m. -rg,

eternal, ad/, (adu. -ly) eyen, adu. felbft, aucf).

ett)ig.

-r.
felbft

if,

fetch,

tr. l^oten.

njenn, ouc^ iDenn, obg(eid).

few,

adj.

wenig,

menige.
tjiele.

evening, 2tbenb, m. -b, -be. every, jebeu (190). every one, eiu jeber, alle, aU^^ (193.3), 3eber mann (187). everything, olles adv. everywhere, (193).
liberalt.

einige (pi), nid)t

field, ^etb, n. -beg, -ber.

fight, intr. fampfen.

find,
fine,

tr.

finben 0.
fein
;

acZ/.

fd)bn.

finger, finger, m. -rg, -r.

finish,
33o8l)eit,
tr.

evil, a^i. bo8.

toottenben.

evil,

bag

53bfe,

/.

finished, adj. fertig, tjoltenbet.

fire, ^euer, n. -rg, -r.
first, adj. erft. adv. erft, suerjlt,

-ten.

example,

53eif^iet, n. -Ig, -le.

for

sum
tr.

^eifpiel.
tr.

flame, glamme,

/.

-men.

exchange,
excuse,

uertaufc^en.

entfci^ulbigeu.

Florence, ^^lorenj, n. flower, 33Iume, /. -men.

follow,
tr.

expect, tr. ertuarten. expedition, ^uq, m. -geS, -iige. experience, t. eriebeu. explain, tr. erffaren. - one's self
to anyone,
0.

folgen (dat).
adj. folgenb.

foUowing,
fool, %\)ov,

m. -reg, -ren.

foolish, adj.
foot,

bumm.
-ffeg, -iiffe.

einem

dlttt

fte^eu

gu, m.

for, conj. benn.

prep,

fiir

{accus.\
(da/.
cr-

eye, 5luge, n. -g, -u.

lace,
n. -tg, -ter.

IM (dat.),
accws.).

feit (dat.),

uor

(5)efTrf)t,

IkU,

intr.

fallen 0.

forbid,
force,

tr.

Derbieten 0.
^.

together,

tr.

jttjingen

aufontmenftiirgen.

foreign, adj. fremb.

land,

Ut

family, ^amilie, /. -ien. famous., adi. berii^iUu

^rembe.
forest, 2BaIb, m. -beg, -iitbcr.

TOCABULARY.
foreyer, adv. auf ctuig. forget, tr. tiergeffen 0. forgive, tr. dergeben 0.
girl, aJJabd^en, n, -n, -n.

451

give,

tr.

fc^enfen, geben 0.
bie

one's

hand,
tr.

^anb

reic^en.

up,
,

former,

adj. {adv. -ly) frut)er.

n. -cfe, -cfe.

entfagen 0. {dat.), auf geben 0.

adj.
gliicflic^.

fortune, lucf,

glad,

be

fic^

forward, adv. oortucirts. four, num. t)ier. France, gvanfreic^, n. -d^g. Frederick, gviebrid^, m. -d)^,
free,
free,
<r.

fveuen.

glance, intr. blicfen. glass, lag, n. -feg, -ofer.

go,
frei.

intr.

befreien.
adj.

too, mitgel^en.
-ly)

thought, eban!enfrei^eit, /. freedom, ^rei^eit, /. man, French, adj. franjbfifd^.

{adv.

ge^en,

along or away, out^ aug= abreifen.

get) en

0.

fort:=

ge^en, ^inaugge^en.

God, @ott, m.
gold,

-tteg, -otter.

godlike, adj. gotttid^.

woman, ^rangbfin, /. -innen.

fresh, adj. frifd^. friend, grennb, m. -beg, -be.
friendly, adj. {or adv.) freunbli^.

granpfe,

m.

-fen,

-fen.

@otb,
n.

n.

-beg.

piece,

otbftM,

golden, adj. gotben. good, adj. gut. a deal, fortune, liid, n. -cfeg.

t)iet.

friendship, greunbf(i)aft, /. -ten. fright, @c^re(f, m. -de8, -de.

government, ^iegierung,
gracious, adj. gudbig.
great, adj. gro^,
t)oc^.

/. -gen.

fHghtened

be

, erfc!^re(f en,

fic^

erfc^recfen (iiber).

from, prep,

tjon,

au^ {dat);

dnt.

green, adj. griin. grim, adj. {adv. -ly) grimmig.

case: see 222.1,3.

fruit, f^rnc^t, /. -ucf)te.

grow,

intr. njad)fen 0.

tuerben 0.

frustrate,

tr.

tjereitetn.

guardian, ^ormunb, m. -beg, -be. guest, @aft, m. -teg, -afte.

guilty, adj. frfjulbig.

full, adj. X)oU (of, gen.).

furnish,

tr.

nteublieren.
n)elter.

further, adj. {or adv.)

hair, aar, n. -reg, -re.

half,

game,

@piet, n. -teg, -Ic.

garden, orten, m. -n6, -cirten. gardener, artner, m. -rg, -r.

gay, adj. fro^r (i^ coZor) bunt. general, @cnera(, m. -I, -ale. genius, enie, n. -leg, -leg. gentleman, err, m. -rrn, -rren.

adj. {or adv ) t)atb. an hour, eine ^atbe @tunbe. hall, @aat, m. -teg, -dte. hand, anb, /. -dnbe. on the

other,

adv. bag eg en.

handsome, adj. fc^on. hang, tr. or intr. ^dngen.

happiness,
tiicf, n.

-deg.

German,
Germany,
get,
#r.

adj.

beutfd^.

noun,

ber

2)eutfd)e, e<c.
5)pntfrf)(anb, n. -b8.

happy, adj. gtiidtic^. hard, adj. ^art, fd)tt)er. hardly, ado. fanm.
hasty, adj. {adv. -ly) ^aftig,
hat, |)ut, m. -teg,
-iitc.

^oten, erf(i)Qffen.

fid^

(oSmac^en (oon).
0.
/. -beiu

up, auf*

away,

eitig.

ftet)en

gift,

aht,

hate, tr. t)offen. hateful, adj. {or adv.) ge^dffig.

452

ENGLISfl-GEEMAN
how,
and) adv.
;

hatred, ^a% m. -ffeg hare, tr. ^aben (irreg.). haye to, miiffen : see 256. hare (a thing
done), laffen: see 343.1,56,d. helpers, pron. er ; berjenige, ber.

itiie.

erer,

adv. n)le

bod).

who,

113

er.

humanity, 3)lenf(^t)eit, /. hundred, num. t)unbert. hunger, hunger, m. -rg. hun^y : be - , '^nngern
with accus.).

{impers.

head, Mopl m. @pi^e, /. -^en.

-feg,

-o^Jfe;

health, @ejunbt)eit, /. healthy, adj. gefunb.

hear, heed,

tr. l^oren. tr.

aditen

(j/en.).

take,

fic^

l^iiten.

heir, (Srbe, m. -ben, -ben. help, tr. ^etfen 0. (dat), gu ^iilfe

hunt, tr. jag en. hunt, 3agb, /. -ben. hunter, Sciger, m. -r, -r. hurry, intr. eilen. hurry, (Sile, /. husband, Wann, m. -nc8, -dnner; @atte, m. -en, -en.
hut, utte, /. -ten.
I, pers.

fommen
help,
helpfal,

(c^ai.)-

C^iitfe, /
ac?/.

pron.

ici).

t)ulfreic^.

idea, 33egriff, m.
poss. pro/i.
if, conj. tt)cnn.
ill, ac?/.

-p,

-ffe.

Henry,
\\)x,

^einric^, m. -c^g.
[te.

idle, adj. trcige, faul.

her, pers. pron.

ber i^rige.

as

a(8 ob.

franf.

hero, elb, m. -ben, -ben. heroine, ^elbin, /. -innen.

hide,
tr.

illness, ^ronffieit, /. -ten.

imitate,

tr.

nad)a^nten

(dat.).

tjerbergen 0.
l}od) (t)o^er etc.).

important,

adj. widjtiQ.

hi^h, adj.

him,
hii-e,

it)n.
tr.

impossible, adj. unnioglid).

self, felbft.

hinder,
tr.

^inbern.

imprisoned, adj. gefangen. improve, tr. oerbeffern, beffern.

in, prep,

ntiet^en [mieten].

in {dat.

or accus.): see

his, poss. pron. fein, ber feinige.

376.
inclined, adj. geneigt.

history, efc^id^te, /. -ten.

hold,

tr.

fatten 0.
[=mat], /. -en.

incredible, adj. unglaubUci^.

home, ^eimat

at

indifference, @Ieid)gu(tig!eit, /.
indifferent, adj. g(eid)gu(tig, einer^
lei {indeclinable).

lu aufe.

honor, (S^re, /. -ren. honor, tr. e^ren. adj. honorable, e^rtid^,

^aft.

el^ren-

indispensable, adj. nnentbe^rtit^. industrious, adj. flei^ig.

industry, S^citigfeit, /.

hope, intr. ^ off en. hope, ^offnung, /. -gen. horrorstrnck : be (im, grauen

inexperience, Unevfa^reul)eit,
inherit,
tr.

/.

erben.

injure,

tr.

fd^abcn (dat),

uerle^en.
ftatt

pers. with dot.).

instead
intend,

of,

prep,

ouftatt,

horse, ^ferb, n. -be8, -be.

hot, adj.
t)ei^.

(gen. or injin. with jn).

intr.

t)orboben;

fld^

(dat.)

hour, @tunbe, /. -ben. house, ^au, w. -jeg, -aufer.

t)ornef)men, beabfidjtigen.

interesting", adj. intereffant.

VOCABULAEY.
into, prep, in (accus.): see

4:53

376.

last, intr. bauern.

invitation, intabung, /. -gen. invite, tr. eintobeu 0.

it,

late, adj. or adv. fpdt.

pers. pron. e

'ba^,

baSjenige.

Itoly, Stalien, n. -lens.

laugh, intr. Iarf)en. laughable, adv. Icici^ertid^. law, @efe^, n. -^eg, -^e.
lay,
tr.

leg en.

January, 3attuar, m. -rg. jew, 3ube, m. -ben, -ben.

journey, W\\t, journey, inir.
abreifen.

lazy, adj. fant, trdge.

lead,

tr. fiiljren.

-fen.

gie{)en

0.

reifen.

back, out, l^inaug=

juriidE^

away,

fii^ren.

learn,
least:
leave,

tr.

(ernen.
gele'^rt.

joy, i^renbe, /. -ben.

learned, adj.
at
tr.

judge, 9Jid)tei% m. -r^, -r. judgment-seat, 9?id)terftu^l, m. July, 3uU, m. -Us. June, 3nni, m. -nig
just,
oc?;.

, cidu.

njenigfteng, ant

tt)enigften.

tterlaffen

laffen 0.

left, adj. Unf.

biEig.

less, adj. or adv. minber, weniger.

letter, S3rief, m. -feg, -fe.

keep, tr. be^alten 0., er^atten 0. from, \\^ ent^alten. keeper, ^iiter, m. -rg, -r.

library, 8ibUott)e!, /. -!en.

lie, intr. life,

Uegen

0.

?eben, n. -ng, -n.

tr.

kill,

tr.

tobten [toten].

lift,

^eben

0.

up,

er

kind, adj. freunblirf). kind, %xi, f. -ten.

tt)ag fiir
:

what

of,

l^eben 0.

light, 2id}t, n. -teg, -ter. light,

tr.

see

175.

an^iinben, anfteden.

kindness, 2Bot)Ut)at, /. -ten. king, ^onig, m. -gg, -ge. knee, ,^nie, n. -eg, -e. kneel, Mr. fnieen.
knife,
SO^effer, n. -rg, -r.
i^j^r.

like, adj. gleid^.

like
like,

be
tr.
:

like, gleici^en 0. (dat.),

{or see
intr.)

lieben,

mogen

(irreg.
it,

255), gern ^aben. I

^ord)en, 3ut)bren, an=

eg gefoUt mir.

knock,

ffopfen, ipoc^en.
It)

listen, intr.

know,

tr.

iff en

(irreg.),

fennen

t)oren.
little, adj. !tein, ircnig.

(irreg.),

evfennen.

known,

adj. befannt.

live, intr. Icben

luo^nen.

lonely, adj. einfam.

lack: there
(il)m) an.

is

a of,

eg

fe^U

long, adj. lang. adv. tange, tdngft. as, fo= ago, Idngft. as

lady, !5)ame, /. -men.

lange.

lament, tr, bemeinen. lamp, ?ampe, /. -pen.

land, ?anb,
n.
-beg,

look,

tr.

(or intr.) fet)cn 0., btirfen,

onfefjen.

down,

l^innntev

-anber.

blicfen, ^innnterfet)en.
-tfjeg,

landlord,
-tf)e.

mxt^
gro.

[SEStrt],

m.

lose,

tr.
/r.

Derlieren 0.
tieben.

love,
cw?/.

large,

love, IHcbe, /.

last, cwi/. le^t.

lowj

adj. niebrig.

454
lyin^, pp'le of ticg en 0.

ENGLISH-GERMAN
morning,
most, adv.
aJJorgcn,

m. -n8, -n.

maid,

SJJagb, /. -agbe

am

meiften.

make, tr. mad)en. man, aJlenjc^, m.

ajJann,

mother,
-\6)tn,

aJJutter, /. -litter.
53 erg,

-fd^en;

mountain,'

m. -geg, -ge.
intr.

m. -nne,

-tinner.

mourn,
flagen.
tjiele.

tr.

(w

beweinen,

mansard, 9}?anfarbe, /. -ben. many, adj. or noun, t)iet,

a, mand^.

move,

intr.

jie^en.

out,

^te^en 0.

in,

ein=

angjie^en.

March, Maxi, m. -^eS. march, intr. marfd^ieren.

moTcment,

33en)egung, /. -gen.

Mr., err, m. -rrn, -rren.

m.

mark

(a coin), Ttavt, f. -fen.

market:

place,

'Sflaxtt,

-fte, -cirfte.

much, adj. {or adv.) oiel. murder, 9JJorb, m. -beg, -be. murder, tr. ermorben.
music,
a^nfif, /.

massiye, '^idj. maffidc*. master, ilReifter, m. -r, -r. matter: it does not matter to me, e fommt mir nid^t barauf
on.

my,

poss. pron. mein,

{irreg.).

name, tr. nennen name, 9Zame, m.

naughty,

-ng, -n.

May, Wai, m. -aie8. meantime, adv. and

adj. unartig.

conj. inbcffen.

meat, ^leifc^, n. -fd^eS, -jd^e. medsd, 9)^ebaitle, /. -en. meet, tr. {or intr.) begegnen (dat),
treffen 0.,
fid)

necessary, adj. not^ig [notig]. neck, ^n(g, m. -feg, -alfe. necklace, ^algbanb, n. -beg,
-cinber.

begegnen.

merchant, ^anfmann, m. -anneg,

-anner or (more generally) ^auf=
leute.

need, need,
is

tr.

bebiirfen, brand^en.

of, eg braud^t.
....

ajott)

mot],

f. -ot^e.

there

neighbor, 9^ad)bar, m. -rg or -rn,

impers.

methinks,

mic^

bun!t,

-rn.

from

biinfen.

neither, conj. tucbcr.

njeber
etc.

.... nor,
pron.
feiner,

ndle, 9Reile, /. -ten. milk, mild), /. mine, poss. pron. mein, bcr
nige.

nod^.

niel=

nerve, 9?ert)e, /. -tien. never, adv. nie, niemolg.

nevertheless, adv. bennot^, boc^.

SQfinifter, m. -r8, -r. minnte, 9JJinute, /. -ten. misfortune, UngliicE, n. -de8.

minister,

new,

adj. nen.

mock,

tr.

{or intr.) fpotten {gen.).

/.
;

news, a?ad)rid^t, /. -ten. newspaper, S^itnng, /. -gen.

next, adj. m6)\i {sup. onber : see 203.1a.
of na^),

modesty, ^efc^eiben^eit,

moment,

9Jlinnte, /. -ten

3(ugen^

blidf, m. -dfeS, -de. monastery, ^tofter,

night, aJad^t,
n. -rg, -ofter.

/. -odfite.

money, @etb, n. -be8, -ber. month, ajJonat, m. -tg, -te. moon, 3Jlonb, m. -beg, -be or more^ adj. (or adv.) nte^r.

no, adv. nein. adj. Reiner, a^iemonb.

nid^t me^r. noble, adj. ebet.

!ein.

one, longer,

-ben.

noun, ber @b!e,

5(beUge,

VOCABULABY.
nobleman^ (Sbetmanu, m. nod, intr. nicfen. north, 9^orb or S'Jorbeu, m. -ng. northern, adj. norblic^. not, adv. nid)t. one, !ein eiu=

455

^iger, etc.

other, adj. aitber. otherwise, adv. fouft. ought, intr. joUeii see 257. our, poss. adj. uiifer, ber un[rigc. out (of), prep, aug ((?ai.). outbreak, 5lugbru(^, m. -d^g,
:

nothing,
nic^tg.

hut, ni(^tg

noun,

^id^t, n.
alg.
-tie.

adv.

-iic^e.

outlet, 5Iuggaug, m. -g, -angc.

novel, 9Joman, m. -n^,

NoYemher,

9?otjember, m. -r8.

outside, prep. auer^atb (gen.). over, prep, iiber {dat. or accus.),

adv. '^Iniiber.

now, adv. je^t. nomher, 5luso^(,

/.

own, adj. eigen. owner, S3efi^er, m.

-r8, -r.

ohey, ir. ge^orc^en (dat), obliged: be to, ntuffen: see

256.
ocean,
2J?eer, n. -re8, -re.

pace, @d)ritt, m. -tteg, -tte. pain, tr. fc^merseu {dat.). pain, ^d)mer3, m. -3e3 or -;5ett6,
-sen.

o'clock, Ut)r, /.; see 211.3.

October, October, m. -rg.

of, prep. \}on{dat.).

paint,

tr.

or intr.
9Jfa(er,

painter,
pair,

maten. m. -rg, -r.

offer,

<r.

anbieten 0., reic^en.

painting, emcitbe, n. -beg, -be,

''^aax, n. -reg, -re,

officer, Offijier,

m. -r, -re.

often, adv.

oft.

pale, adj. bta.

old, adj. ait on, prep, auf {dat. or accus.).

palace,

^^^ataft,

m.

-tg, -cifle.

parents, p^
part, 2:^ei(
-le.

(Sltern.
[2^ei(],

once, ac?u. einnmt^. at one, num. eiu. adj. ein,

etc.

gleidf).

m. or

n. -leg,
[teil=]

eine, ein,

take
tr.

t^eilnet)men

pron.

einer,

eine, eing, etc.

0.

indef.

pron.
fein.

man:

see

185.

part,
nen.

trennen.

intr.

fid^

tren^

not,

only, adj. einjig.

not but also, uicf)t nur .... fonbern and). open, tr. offnen, aufmac^eu.
. .
. .

adu. olleiu, nur.

pass (time),
bring en
0.

tr.

^ubringen,

tier*

{irreg.).

intr. Derftreid^en

past, adv. tiorbei.

opinion, 9iReinung, /. -gen. opportunity, etegen^eit, /. -ten. oppose, tr. fid^ njiberfetien.
opposite, prep, gegeniiber or, conj. ober.
(dat.).

pastor, starrer, m. -rg, -r. path, ^|?fab, m. -beg, -be. pay, tr. begalilen. peace, ^riebe or -ben, w. -eng,
-en.

order,
(dat).

tr.

beflellen;

befe^Ien

0.

peaceful, adj.
or -rn.

friebtid^.

order: in bomit:
346.1.

to or that,
see

peasant, 33aner, m. -rg or -rn, -r

conj.

ha%
see

332.56,

urn:

pen, ^cber,
people,
pi.

/.

rn.
;

l^cntc

SSotf, n.

-fe

orthodox^

adj. re^tgtaubin.

-ol!er

456
penetrate,
(sep'le).
ir.

ENGLTSH-GERMAN
burd^bringen
tno'^L

0.

power, ma^i,
/. -ten.

f. -ad^te

etrati;

perhaps, adv.
philosopher,

toieUeii^t

powerful,
praise,
tr.

adj. mac^tig.

^t)iIofopt),

m. -p^tn,

toben, preijen 0.

pictnre, 53ilb, n. -be8, -ber. piece, @tu(f, n. -cfeg, -cfe

pilgrim,
pity,
iy.

^^Ulger,

m. -rS,

-r.
;

bebauern, be!(agen

ern {impers.). take

on,

bau*

pray, intr. beten. preach, inir. prebigen. prepare, tr. jnbereiten. preserye, tr. erbalten 0. president, ^rdfibent, m.
-ten.

-ten,

fid^ er*

barmen
plant,

(gen.).

presume : I presume,
merben
:

ttjo^l

with

place, ^(al^, m. -^e^, -ci^e.

tr. ipftansen.
;

see

328.
-fe.

pretty, adj. pbfc^.

@enjac^,

plant, ^ftanje, /. -^tn

n. -fe8, -fe.

price, ^rei, m. -je,

pride,
-t^eg.

^od^mut^

[=mut],

m.

plate, XtUtx, m, -rs, -r. play, mtr. fpielen.

play, @^iei,
players,
please,

/i.

-Ie8, -Ic.

pZ. @^ielleutc.

prince, ?^urft, m. -ten, -ten ^ring, m. -jen, -gen. princess, ^iirftin, /. -inncn.
;

pleasant, adj. angene^nt.

ir.

gef alien 0. {dnt).

SSer^

tr. bruden. prison, efangni^ [=nig],n.

print,

-ffe3,

pleasure, ^reube, /. -ben;

gniigen, n. -n^, -n,

-ffe.

prisoner,
noun).
-te.

efangen
adv.

{p'ple

as

pluck,

tr. pfliicfen.

poem,

ebi(^t, n.

~m,

prohahly,
ttol)l:

n)al)rf(^einUd^,

poet, 2)i(^ter, m. -r6, -r.

see
tr.

328.
t>erfd)affen.

poetry, 2)ic^t!unft, /. point, @pl^e, /. -3en, he of, ttJoHen eben: the

procure,

on
see

professor, ^rofeffor, m. -rs, -ren.

258.
politeness, ^bflid^!eit, /.
political, adj. politifd^.

poor, adj. arm. pope, -^apft, m. -te, -apfle. of, einem in portion ; he the %\)z\[ {Zn\] iDPrben.

promise, tr. tjerfprec^en 0. promise, S5erfprec^en, n. -n8, -n. pronounce, tr. auSfpred^en 0, proud, adj. ftolg. proye, tr. beweifen 0., nad^njcifen
0.

Prussia, ^ren^en,
Fi*ussian, adj.

n.

-n.

preufeifd^.

noun, bet

pojirait,

^|>ortrait, n.
tr.

-m,
im
/.

-te.

^reu^e.

possess,
:^aben.

befi^en,

iBefi^

punish,

tr. ftrafen.

possession,
tigen igen.),

93efi^ung,

take or gain
post,

-gen.

pupil, driller, m. -r, -r. put, tr. or intr. je^en, ftellen, tegcn,
ftedfen.

of,

fid)

bemtid^tr.

himself,

ftcfi

ftetlen.

erringen 0.

^^oft, /. -ten.

potato, tartoffet, /. -In.

pound, ^fnnb,

n. -beS, -be.

quarter, 33iertel, n. -I, -I. queen, ^bnigin, /. -innen. question, tr. fragen.

VOCABULAEY.
question, %xaQt, f. -en. qnick^ adj. (adv. -ly) fci)uel(I,
qniet, adj. {adv. -ly) ru^ig. qnite, adv, gang, Dollig.
ride,
rofcl).

457
intr.

rettcn

0.

away,

fortreiten.

ride, $Ritt, m. -tteS, -tte.

right, adj.
right,

rec^t.

9?e(f)t,

n.

-m,

-te.

race, efc^lec^t, n. -te, -ter. railroad, @ijenbot)n, /. -nen. rain, intr. impers. regnen. rain, 3tegen, m. -ng.

righteous, oc?/. g credit ring, 9ting, m. -ge8, -ge.

rise, intr. auffte^en 0.
f.,

(of the

rank, 9iang, m. -ge, -cinge. reach, <r. erreii^en. alond, read, ir. or intr. lejen 0.

sun) aufge'^en 0. f. robj ir. raubeu, beraubett. Bome, 9tom, n. -m.

roof, '^ad), n. -c^eg, -ad^er,

tjortefen (to, dat).

room,
rude, run,

3itttmer, n. -ra, -r.

adj. rau^, ungegogeu.
intr.

ready,

ad/, bereit.

really, adv. tvivtii^,

laufen 0.

f.

away,

receive,

tr.

emtifangen 0.
tr. tr.

entlaufen (from, dat.).

recognize,
reconcile,

erfeixnen {irreg.).

Derfo^neiu

sad, adj. traurig.

red,

adj. rot^ [rot],

tr.

sake : for the

{gen.).

of, prep, tucgen

regard,
regret,
rejoice,

betrac^ten.

intr.

reuen {impers. with

freuen
(in,

same,
save,
say,

adj.

\dh, gteid).

the

accus.).
intr. ftc^

berfelbe, etc.

gen. /

tr. rettett.

over, iihtXf auf).

ir.

fag en.
S3ofert)i(^t,

relations, pi. 5Serix)anbtfcf)aft, /. release, ir. entlaffen , eutbinben 0. (from, gen.).

scamp,

scholar,
@elet)rte

chiller,
(r),

m. -tg, -te. m. -r8, -r;

remain,
hind,
{gen.
{gen.).

intr.

bleiben 0.

f,

be-

m. -en, -en.

surucfbteibeit.
tr.

school, <2>dink, f. -len. science, 2Biffenjd)aft, /. -ten.

remember,
or

fi(^

erinnern

scream,
scold,
tr.

intr. fd^reien 0.

an),

gebenfen {irreg.)

fd^elten, 0.

sculptor, 53ilb^auer, m. -r8, -r."

repeat, tr. inieber'^oteu {insep'k). respect, tr. ac^tcn.

rest, 9?ut)e/7.

season, 3al)reseit, /. -ten. seat one's self, fid) fe^sen.

secret, e^eimnife [=uig], n. -ffeS,
-ffe.

restaurant,
revile,
tr.

SfJeftauration, /. -nen.

fc^intpfen.

secure,
see,
tr.

tr.

fic^ern.

revolution, 9?et)olution, /. -nen.

fe^en 0.

reward, tr. to^nen. Rhine, $Rt)ein, m. - ne8.

ribbon, 53onb,
rich, adj.
-iimer,
reid).

uinfe^en.

again,

about one,

ftd^

tviebevfe^en.

seek,

tr.

fuc^en.

n. -be, -cinbe'r.

seem, intr. fd^einen seldom, adv. felten.

self,

0.

riches, 9leid^t^um [=tum], m. -m^,

rid, adj. Io0
(of, accus.).

pron. 155.5.

fclbft,

felber:

see

self-respect, elbftad^tung, /.

458

ENGLISH-GERMAN
so, adv.

sell, tr. Derfaufcn (to, dat).

and

conj. fo, at[o

e8

see

send,

tr.

irreg.)

in, einfeuben,

fd^icfen,

fenben (reg.

or

154. 4e.
soldier, @oIbat, m. -ten, -ten.
solid,
at?/.

sensible, adj. {adv. -ly) oevniinftig.

foUb.
ad/, eintg, cttid^
trelc^e:
;

September, (September, m.

-r.

some, prcn.
it)a,

et:=

servant, 2)iener, m. -x^, -v. senrice, S)ienft, m. -fteg, -ftc. set, <r. je^en ; (of the sun) uttter^
ge'^en 0.
(sep'Ze).
f.

thing, etma8,
soon, adv. haih.

tttag;

see 176.2.

njag.

body,

over, iiberfe^en

Semanb. son, o^n, m. -ne8, -o^ne. song, ?ieb, n. -beS, -ber.

several,

adj,

pi
fte.

me^rere:

see

192.2;

Derfc^iebene,

sorrow,

(ef)mer,5,

m.
(?.

-jeS, -gen;

she, pers. pron.

(gorge, /. -en.

sheplierd, ^irt, m. -ten, -ten.

shoe, @cf)u^, m. -I^eg, -l^e. shop, $?oben, m. -ng, -aben.

short,
ac?/.

sorrow, intr. sorry : be

fid)

for,

leiben

bebanern
filr.

tr.

erbormen

{gen.).

furg,

sort

what -

of, nja

show,
shut,
sick,

tr.

jetgen,

soul, (geele, /. -len.

<r.

fc^Ue^en 0., jumod^en.

franf.

c?/.

bed,

^ran!en=

bett, n.

south, (Siibcn, m. -n3. southern, ac(;. fiiblid^. Spain, panien, n. -icn3.

sickness, ^ranf^eit, /. -ten. silent : be , intr. fd^meigen 0.

silver, @i(ber, n. -r8.

silver, adj. filbern

Spanish, ad/, fpanifd). Spaniard, (gpanier, m. -r, -r. spare, ir. fd)onen, t)erfd)onen. speak, tr. or intr. fpred^en 0.,
reben.

sin, intr. jiinbigen.

out, augfpredjen
(of

0.

since, prep,

feit

(dat.).

adv.

feit=

spend,

tr.

time) tjerbringen

htm. conj. ba, inbem. sing, tr. or intr. fingen 0. too or at the same time, join in

{irreg.), tterleben.

spiritual, adj. geiftig.

ing, mitfmgen.
einglger, etc.

spite
spoil,

in
tr.

of, prep,

tro^ {gen.).

tierberben 0.

single, adj. ein^ig.

sister, c^mefter, /.
sit,
intr.
ftljen

not a

!ein

0.

0.

down,
go to

fid)

spoon, ?offet, m. -t8, -t. spring, ^rut)Ung, m. -gg, -gc. spring, mfr. fpringen 0. \) or f. stand, intr. [te'^en 0. I) or |.
stay, m<r. bleiben 0.
f.

fe^en.

sleep, m^r. fd^Iafen

einfc^Iafen.

-r.

step, (Sd)ritt, m. -tte, -tte. fd)meigenb. still, etc?/, ftitt,

noc^, ftetg
;

adv.

slow, adj. {adv. -ly) Tang jam. slumber, @(^(ummer, m. -r,

small, adj.
flein.

bod^.

stop, intr. author en, fte'^en bleiben. story, efd)idf)te, /. -ten.

small-pox,

tie 331ottern, pi.

smoke, tr. or intr. rand^en. smoke, 0?aud^, m. -df)e6. snoWj ii^r. and impers. jdE|neien.

strange, adj. fremb. stranger, ber ^rembe, etc. stream, (Strom, m. -meS, -omc. street, @tra^e, /. -^en.

VOCABULARY.
strength, ^raft,
stretch,
ftrecfeit.
tr.

459

/. -afte.

thaler, ^'^nter, m. -r8, -r.

fid)

ftrecfen.

Mr.

strike,

ir.

fci^tagen 0.

off,

(xl--

than, conj. (x\^, benn thank, tr-. banfen {dat.). thanks, 2)an!, m. -leg.
that, c?em. pro>2. jener, berjenige, etc. ; reZ. pron. tDeld), ber, efc.
cory.
\i(x%

fd)(agen.

strong, adj. ftarf. student, tubent, m. -ten, -tcit. study, tubium, n. -mg, -ien. stupid, adj. biimm.
style, aJJobe, /. -ben.

bamit. in order
ber (bie, ba).

bamit
the,
de/. ar^.

con/.

or adv.
{with dat)

je, befto.

sublime, succeed,
such,

adj. er'^aben.
intr.

gelingen 0. {impers.
adj.

theatre, it)eater, n. -r, -r. their, poss. pron. i'^r, ber il)vig.

a,

pron.

or

adv.

fotd).

then,

adv.

bann,
fo.

borauf.

conj.

fold) ein, ein fotcl), jo ein.

benn, bann,

sudden,

{adj. -ly) plbt^lic^.

tr.)

there, adv. ba, bort.

are,

etc.,

suffer, intr. {or

teiben 0.

eg gibt, etc., e6 finb,

etc.

sufficiently, adv. genng.

suitable:

be

piemen {Impers.
-r^, -r.

with dal.).

therefore, adv. or conj. barnm. they, pers. pron. [ic. indef. man. thine, poss. pron. bein, ber beinig.

summer, (Sommev, m.
sun, onne,
/.

thing, 2)ing,
f. -en.

n.

-geg, -ge

'Bo.&^t,

-nen.

Sunday, onntog, m. -g. sure, adv. getuijs. to be

surrive,
tr.

think,
,

Mr.

benfen
gren.).

(irreg.)

ge*

jnjar,

benfcn. (of,

iiberlebeu.

thirst, infr.
accus.).

biirften

{impers. with

suspicion, 5>erbac^t, m. -t.

sweet, adj. \n^. Switzerland, @d)tt)ei5,

this,
/.

(^ew?.

pron. bie0.

sword,

>2)C^mert, n. -te8, -ter.

table, Zi\6). take, tr. ne^men 0.

thou, pers. pron. bu. thought, eban!e, m. -fen, -!cn. three, num. brei. throne, 3:^ron, m. -neg, -ne or
n)cg=

ne^men.
ne'^men.

along or
reben,

away,

-nen.

too, ntit=
0.

through, pnp. bnrc^ (accws.). thunder, Conner, m. -r,

-r.

talk,

Mr.

over,
2:t)ee,
<r.

fpred^en

befprecl^en 0.

tall, adj. gro^, \)o^.

-storm, emitter, n. -r, -r. time, 3cit, / -ten. three times, breintat, etc. sometimes, mand)=
ntal.

task, ^nfg abe, /. -ben.

tea,

m. -eeg,
le'^ren.

-ec.

tire,

tr.

ermiiben.
miibe, ermiibet.

teach,

tired, adj.

be
in,

an
ju.

teacher,
SOfJeifter,

^tljttv,

m,
-r

-x^,

-r;

of it,

eg miibe fein, eg fatt ^ahtn.

3u,

m. -r8,

to, prep.

nad^ {dat.),

teaching, ?e^rc, /. -rem

tear, X{)rdne, /. -nen.
tell, <r. erj^ci^Ien, fag en.

{accus.), big (da<.) ;

ici^/i in/in.

today, adv. ^cute.

l^eutig {adj.).

of

today's,

terrible^ adj. furd)tbar.

together, adv. jnfammcn.

460
tomorrow,
adv. morgcn.

ENGLISH-GERMAN
uninterrupted,
brod^en.
adj.

uuutitcr^

tone, 2;on, m. -neg, -one. mnch, ju too, adv. ju ; an6).

or fe^r, all^ufe^r. toward, prep, iiad) (dat),

t)iet

university, UniDerfttcit, /. -ten. unknown, adj. unbefannt.

unless, conj. o^ne
eg fei
bQJ3,

gegen
hall,

njenn ni^t,

(accws.), gen.

benn

see

331. le.

town, ^tabt,
9latl)l)aug

/. -dbte.
n.

until, conj. bis, bi ta^. prep, big

(dat.).

maU],

translate,
travel,

tr.

intr.

uberfe^en (inseple). rcifeit j or f).

[=trot],

unwell,

adj. or adv.

unmo^t.

unworthy,

adj. nnwiirbig.

treason, 33en*at^

m. -f^e^.

up, adv. or prep. au\, an (dat or

accus.), '^inauf.

high--, ^oc^tjerrat^, m. tree, 93aum, m. -nteS, -aunte. tremble, intr. jittern. troop, Zxnpp, m. -ppt^, -ppe.
tropic, Xrope, /. -pen.

upon, prep, anf

usual, adj.

(dat.

or accus.).

(adv. -ly) getb^nli(^.

genjo^ntic^.

as
use,
tr.

it)ie

benu^en.

be of, nnt3eu

trouble, 9Jiu^e, /. true, adj. iDaljr; trcu. adv. 3tt)ar.

trust,
tr.

(to, dat.).

it is

useless, adj. unbranc^bor.

truly, adv. toa^rtic^, tra'^r^aftig.

trauen, tjertrauen (dat.).

vain, adj.

eitct.

vainly, in vain, adv. tjergcbeng.

valley, Zljai, n. -leg,
-citer.

truth, SSa^r^eit, /.
try,
intr. t)erfut^en.

vanquish,
biegen 0.,
fic^

tr.

begtuingen 0.
-fc.

turn (to), menben

;

intr.

tuerben (gu) 0.

twice, adv. jmeimal. twig, B^eig^ wi- -gc8, -gc.

vegetable, eniiife, n. -feg, very, adv. fe^r. victor, ieger, m. -rg, -r.
victorious, adj. ftegreid).

two, nwm.
ngly,
(^i.

jttjei,

victory, @ieg, m. -geg, -ge.

Tienna, SSien,
PBtic^.

n. -ng.

unable: be see 254.

village, 2)orf, n. -feg, -orfer.

nid^t

fbuneu:

violet, ^eilc^en, n. -ng, -n.

virtue, Slugenb, /. -ben.

;

nncle, Onfel, m. -Ig, -I m. -m^, -me.

D^elm,

visit,

tr.

befuc^en.

visit, Sefu(^,

m.

-d^eg, -6)t,

under,
accus.).

prep,

unter

(cZa^.

and

voice,

timme,

/.

-men.
-ng,
(for,

understand, tr. berftel^en 0. undertake, intr. or tr. ftd^

Dornet)men 0.

wagon, Bag en, m.

(dat.)

-n or
gen.

-agen.

wait,
auf).

intr.

ioarten

or

undone, adj. ungefd^e^ett. unending, adj. enbloS, unenbUc^. unexpected, adj. unern)artet.
ungrateful, adj. unbanfbar.

wake, walk,

tr.

medfen. intr. aufwad)en.

get)en
,

intr.

0.

ivanbern.

take a

fpagieren gef)en.

nnhappiness,

Ungliic!, n. -d^.

unhappy,

adj. mtgliicfUc!^.

wander, intr. manbern f. wanderer, Sanberer^w. -xi^-x^

VOCABULABY.
want,
fr. {<yr infr,) n)flnfd)en,

461
^enj^er, n. ~^r, -r.

iroHen

window,

{irreg.).

war,

^'rieg,

m. -ge, -gc.
voaxm,

wine, SBein, -ne8, -ne. winter, SBinter, m. -rS,

-r.

warm,

adj.

wisdom,
wise,

SBeiS^elt, /.

warning, Sarnutig, /. -gen. watch, intr. wac^en. watch, U()u, /. -ren. water, SSaffer, n. -r6. way, 3Beg, m. -geg, -ge. on the
untertt)eg.

adj. njeife, gete^rt.

tr.
).

wish,

or

intr.

tDiiiifd^en, ttJoUen

(trreg

wished

for, ertt}imfd)t.

wish, 2Bunf(^, m. -fc^eS, -iinfc^e, with, prep, ntit (dat.). withdi*aw, tr. juriid^iel^en 0.
intr. fid^ guriid^ie^en.

we, p^s. pron. ttJtr. weak, adj. jrf)tt)acf). weary, adj. miibc.
weather, Setter, n. -vg. Wednesday, 9)litttt)od^, m.
-c^g.

without,

prq).

o^ne {accus.
n.

or

infin. with ju).

woman,
gran,

Seib.
/. -en.
intr.

-be,

-ber;

week, SSocf)e, /. -en. weep, intr. tueinen. weigh, intr. (or tr.) tt)legen welcome, adj. tDlUfommen.
well, adv. gut, tt)o^L

wonder,
0.

iuunbevn.

at,

fic^

ttjunbern iiber.

wood,

^oli, n. 3e, -je

Satb, m.

-bes, -dlber.

what,

prori.

was

wetcf).

kind

of, toa^

fiir.

- ever, was aud).

word, Sort, n. -te8, -orter. work, m^r. orbeiten. work, ?lrbeit, /. -ten ; Serf,
-

n.

Mer;.

n)ie! tuaS!

!eg, -!e.

when,
where,
tt)o

adv. a\^, tuenn

adv.
roo.

wann.
wo,

erer,

auc^.

whether, con/, ob. which, pron. tuetd),

, n?ag. that while, adv. inbem, white, adj. wti%

world, Sert, /. -ten. worse, worst, comp. and, superl. of bad, fc^ (ed)t. wretched, adj. nngliidfeUg.
wring",
tr. tr.

tuer, ttJaS efc.

ring en 0,

write,
ttja^renb.

or

intr.

in, register, elnfc^reiben,

n.

fc^reiben

0.

writing, @d)reiben,
n)e((f)er,
,

-n8.

who,
ber,

pron.
e*c.

tt)er,

efc,
\vtx,

wrong,

Unrec^t, n. -teS, -te,

he

she

ber or

bie^jenige.

ever,

nier

year, 3al)r,
yes, ac?v.
ja.

n. -re8, -re.

aud^.

whole, whose,
ttjer).

adj. gan^.

yesterday,
{gen.

ac?v. geftern.

pron.
adv.

njcffen

of
see

yet, adv. noc^.

not
'tixi,

nod) nid)t.
<B\t
:

yon, pers. pron.

tDarutn;

\\\x,

see

why,

Wa^:

176.3.

153. young,

adj. jnng,

widower,
-r, -r.

SBitttner [Sitttjer],

m.
/.

wife, %xa\x, -nnen.

f.

-n;

attin,

yonr, poss. pron. bein, i^r, 3^t e^c* see 157. youth, rvng'-nb, /. youth, young man, Siingliug, m.

willingly, adv. gertu

463

INDEX.
^^^The
references are to Sections, not to pages.

pronunciation of, 8; a for aa in orthography, 8.1. a, pronunciation of, 15; d for e in new orthography, 15.1. miant, 400.2. Absolute construction, with accusative, 230.3; -with infinitive,
a,

adjective

clause,

437,

444.2,

new

110.1c.
adjective phrase,
2a,

compound, 437.

147.2, 358. adverb, office of, 361; usual adjunct of adjective, 144; of verb, 317; of noun, 110.2, 369.3; of
preposition, 369.1; complement of preposition, 379; used as adj., 369.3 ; place of adv., 319.2/, 370; classification of adverbs., 362; derivation of adverbs, from nouns, 364; from adj 36 3 ; from adj by derivative endings, 363.3 by combination,
.

347.
accent, 55.

accessary clause, see dependent. accusative case, general office of, 59.4, 226; with transitive
verbs, 227.1; with intransitive, double accus., with 227.2; verbs, 227.3; accus. with prepositions, jectives,

228, 375-6; with ad229; accus. of measure

365; from pronominal

roots,

230.1,2; accus, abaccompanying or of circumstance, 230.3. active voice of verb, 233.3. address, use of pronouns in, 153. adjective, usual adjunct of noun,
time,
solute,

and

367.2; original adverbs, 367; ordinal adv., 207.3; comparison,

368;

adjective as adv.,

130,

363.1,2; participle as adv., 356;

comparison of adjectives by adv., 141. adverbial clause, 438, 444.3,

144.2.
adverbial predicate, adjective asj 116.16, 316.26.
5(e, see a.

110; when declined, 114-7; rules of adj. declension, 11828; indeclinable adj. 126.4; origin of double declension of adj., 132; adj. as noun, 129; as adverb, 130, 363.1,2; adj. with etwaS, \va^, iud)t, 129.5; comparison of adj., 133-42; absolute use pf comparative adj., 142.2; modifying adjuncts of adj., 143-6; their place, 147: agreement of adj., 62, 209; genitive dependent on adj 2 1 7 dative do., 223; accusative do., 229: primitive adj., 413; adj. derived from verbs, 414; deri. ,

5leu, see an,

ai,
all,

pronunciation

of,

19.1.
superlatives,

193.
prefixed
to

aller,

142.3.
alphabet, German, 1-3; its origin, 1; written character, 2.1, pp. 275-77; use of capitals, 4. aU, in sense of *asif,' 332. 26, c, 4336; do. in substantive clause, 436. 3^; omission of al^ after fp

and adverb or
Sd,e.

adjective,

438.

415; by prefix, 416; compound adj., 423^

suffix,

ved by

outer,

194.

464

INDEX.
cognate accusative, 227.2a.
collective

npodosis, 332.1. appositive adjective, 110.16, 116. 2,4; do. noun, 59.4:, 111.2; in

noun, agreement of verb

nominative, 213.2.

with, 322.2. comparative degree,

134

fE.;

de-

arrangement of the sentence, rules

for 429-39; summary of rules, 440-44; additional remarks,
articles,

clension

of,

140.1.

rhetorical arrangements, 445-6. declension, 63-4; combination with prepositions, Q5; rules for use, 66; place, 67.
see

comparison, of adjectives, 13342; degrees and endings, 1345; modification of vowel, 136; irregular and defective comparison,
participles,

139; declension, 140: of 355; of adverbs,

of

Aryan languages,
pean.

Indo-Euro-

368.
composition or combination words, 418-25.

assertive sentence, 427. attributive adjective, 110.1a, 115. au, pronunciation of, 20. aUf pronunciation of, 21.2. auxHiaries, of tense, 239-41; of mood, see modal auxiliaries; causative auxiliary, 242.2; omission of auxiliary of tense, 439.3a; verbs taking either tjobtn or fetn as auxiliary, 241.3. atj, pronunciation and use of, 19.3.

compound

adjective phrase,

437.

2a, 147.2,

358.

compound foi-ms of verb, 238-42. compound nouns, gender of, 61.4;

inflection
of,

of,

68.1; formation

421-2.
verbs,

compound
233.4,

with prefixes,
otiier

296-311; with

pronunciation of, 23; English correspondent of, 459.L bases, 3936. be=, derivation and use of, 307.2,
b,

elements, 312-3. compound words, 418; their frequency in German, 419; orthography, 4196,c; pronunciation of finals and initials in, 53; accent, 55.2-4; rules of formation of compound verbs, 420;

405.III.la.
bcibc,

1996.

nouns, 421-2; adjectives, 4; particles, 425, 365.

423-

conditional clauses, inversion in,

433, 443.5.
pronunciation and use of, 24. capitals, use of, 4; in pronouns of address, 153.3-5. cardinal numerals, 197-201; their
C,

conditional tenses, formation

o^

240.2c; their use, 334-6. conditional use of subjunctive,

332.
conjugation,
defined, 231; rules respecting, 232-313; conjugations, distinction and origin of,

derivatives,

202-8.

cases of declension, their uses, 59, 212-30: arid see accusative, dative, genitive, nominative. causative auxiliary, 242 2; causative derivative verbs, 404.1.1. Celtic languages, relationship of,

246 New conjugation, 247-60;

;

Old conjugation, 261-73 mixed conjugation, 272.

;

conjunctions,
fication,

450.
pronunciation of, 43; English correspondents of, 460. df pronunciation and use of, 30,
C^,

nectives,

382; their classi383; general con384; adverbial con;

subordinating junctions, 385 conjunctions, 386.

consonants,

pronunciation

o^

classes,

under first declension, how determined, 69; first class, 7580; second, 81-6; third, 8790.

23-54.
copula, 316.1a, 426.26; omission of, in dependent clause, 439.3,

correspondences between English

INDEX.
and German words and letters, 452-61. countries and places, declension of names of, 103.
pronunciation of, 25; English correspondent of, 458.1. ha, added to relative pronoun, 182.2. ba or bar, in combination with
b,

465
monstrative aajective or pronoun, 163, 164.1,2, 166 ; as
relative,

177-8.

bcrer,

164.2.

derivation of words,
S)ero,

393-417.

162.

determinative pronouns, 167-71; use of, instead of personal or possessive pronouns, 171.
bteS,

163, 165-6.

prepositions, as substitute for pronoun of third person, 154.

2,3; for demonstrative,

166.4;

digraphs, vowel, 18-22; consonant, 43-51. dimidiative numerals, 207.1.

for relative, 180. dative case, general use of, 59.3, 221; dat. with verbs, 222; of possession, with luerben, etc., impersonal with 222. II. Id; phrases of condition, 222. II. 1/, 292.4; of interest or concern, 222.III.; possessive dat., 222. Ilia, 6; dative with adjectives, 223; with prepositions, 224,

diphthongs,

pronunciation

of,

18-22. doubled vowels,

7.1, 53; modified not doubled, vowels 14.2; doubled consonants, 7.2, 52.2, 53.

biirfen,
e,

251, 253.

374, 376; with nouns, 225.1;

in exclamations, 225.2: use or omission of e in dat. of nouns, 71.15, 83; old dat. sing. fem. in u, 95. day of the month, expression of,

pronunciation of, 9; c for ec in new orthography, 9 .1; e fofr a in new orthography, 15.1. ei, pronunciation of, 19.2.
ein, as

indefinite article,

63; as
as

pronoun, numeral, 198. eintg, 189.

indef.

195.1;

216. 5d.
declension, defined,
decl.,

emp=,

derivation

and

use

of,

57; rules of
of of

307.3.

58-208;

decl. of articles,

emphasis or impressiveness,

in-

63-4; of nouns, 68-108; adjectives, 118-28, 140;

pronouns,

version for, 431gf, 443.2. endings of inflection and of derivation, see suffixes.

151-95

198-208; uses decl., 209-30.

of numerals, of the forms of

;

defective declension of nouns, 100; defective theme in declension, 98. definitive article, see articles

English language, relation of German to, 447-52 correspondences between English and German
;

words and
eiit=,

letters,

derivation

452-61. and use of, 307.3;

of,

use in generaUzing sense, 66.1,2; in senoe of possessive, 66.3, 161. demonstratives, 163-71; use of, in sense of personal or possessive pronouns, 166.26, 171. denominative verbs, 405. dependent clauses, 426.2d, 435, 444; their arrangement, 434-9, 444; their introduction in a period, 439.5; omission of auxiliary or copula in, 439.3. ber, as definite article, 63; as de;

405. III. 16.

er=,

derivation
special uses

and use

307.4;

405.IIL1C.
e6,

and constructions
of,

of,

154.4; omission

as im-

personal subject, 293.

etiid),

189.
of

tUva^, 188; form with, 129.5.

etn^etrf),

adjective

189.

eu,

pronunciation of, 21.1; for au in new orthography, 21.3.

@W. 162.

INDEX.
220.2-4; substitution of dative with t)0U for, 216.4; adverbial gen., 220.1; predicate gen., 220.2; gen. with interjections,

exclamation, construction of, 391, 432.1c, 439.4a. expletive personal pronoun in dative, 156, 222. Ulb. pronunciation and use of, eh, 19.3.

f,

pronunciation of, 26; English correspondents of, 459.3,

predicate, predicate.
see objective

220.5: form of gen. determines declension of a noun, 69.1, 70; use of e or g in, 83; of en or n, 93; old gen. sing, of feminines, in it, 95; omission
of sign of genitive, 101.5; gen. of second adjective declension used instead of first, 121.3. Germanic or Teutonic group of

factitive

feminine, see gender: classification of fem. nouns in declension, 69.2, 70; fem. noun invariable in singular, 71.1a; exceptions,

languages,
sions,

95.
first

449-50; its diviprogression of 451; mutes in, 453-60.

or strong declension of nouns,

its first class,

German

69, 73, 74-90;

language, relation of to English, 447-61; history of,

75-80; second, 81-6;

132.

third,

462-9.
Gothic language, relationship of, 451.4. gradation of vowels, see variation.

87-90: of adjectives, 1 18-28,

foreign nouns, declension of, 86, 92.1a,2c, 97.2, 101; gender, 61.5. foreign words, pronunciation of,

Greek language, relationship

of,

54; of t), ie, e, t, d) in, 13, 18, 24, 37, 43.3; of g in words from French, 27; accent, 55.5.
fractional numerals, 207.2. fiir in nja fiir, 175, 177, 179. future perfect tense, how formed, 240.26; its use, 328. future tense, how formed, 240.2a; its use, 328; present in sense of future, 324.4.

450. Grimm's law mutes, 453.

^,

of

progression of

pronunciation of, 27, 43; Engcorrespondents of, 460. ge=, derivation and use of, 307.5; use as prefix of participle, 243. 3 its origin as such, 243.3c. gegeffen, 271.3.
g,

lish

pronunciation of, 28; used to denote a long vowel, 7.1; EngUsh correspondents of, 460. l)aben, conjugation of, 239.1,4a; use as auxiliary, 240-1 origin of use, 240.4.' Hebrew etc., not related with Germanic languages, 450.76. preposiI^ier, compounded with tions, in sense of demonstrative, 166,4, High-German subdivision of Germanic group of languages, 451.
;

2; its history, 463-9. hour of the day, expression

of,

gender, 60; general rules for, in nouns, 61; in adjectives etc., 62; of compound nouns, 421.1; gender of personal pronoun,

211.3, hypothetical period, construction of, 332.1,2.

154.1.
genitive 59.2,
case,

general office
gen.

of,

with nouns, 216.6; with adjectives, 217; with prepositions, 218, 873; with verbs, 219,

215;

pronunciation of, 10; ic for tin new orthography, 18.1. ie, pronunciation of, 18.
i,

216;

its place,

3{)ro,

162.

imperative mood, 235.4, 237.5, 270; filled up from subjunctive

INDEX.
present, 243.1; use,
stitutes for,

467

337; sub-

338.

imperative sentence, see optative. imperfect tense, see preterit. impersonal verb, 233.26, 291-5; relation to passive, 294; omission of impers, subject, 293 with genitive object, 219.4; with dative of subject, 222.11. le; accusative of subject, 227.2c. impressiveness or emphasis, inversion for, 431j7, 443.2. indeclinable words, 56.3, 360; indeclinable adj., 126.4.
;

conjugation of verb with, 3026; denominative verbs foi-med with, 405.III.1. interjections, 56.4, 387-9; interjectional use of other parts of speech, 390; inter) ectional or exclamatory construction, 391; construction of cases with inter).,

392.

internal change as means of inflection and derivation, 400. interrogative pronouns, 172-6; their use as relatives, 176.1; as
indefinites, 176.2.

indefinite article, see articles. indefinite pronouns and numerals,

interrogative sentence,
of,

427; order

184-95.
indefinite subjects of verbs, 1 54.4, 166.3; agreement of verb after,

432.1, 443.3, 439.46. intransitive verb, 233.1, 227.

la, 6; construction of accusative

154.4d, 322.3. Indian (East) languages, relationship of, 450. indicative mode,
its tenses,

235.2; uses of
indica-

with, 227.2, 288.1; impersonal passive from, 279.2; reflexive from, 288.2. inverted order of sentence, 431-3, 441, 443; inversion after adverbial clause, 438.3/; after appositive adjective phrase,

323-8; use of

instead of subjunctive, 330c, 332.5c, 333.5. indirect statement, subjunctive of,

tive

333. Indo-European
guages,

in exclamatory clause, 432.1c. irregular declension of nouns, 96-

431(Z;

family
see

of

lan-

100;
tives,

irr.

comparison of adjec-

449-50.
Indo-Euro235.5,
verbal

Indo-Germanic,
pean.
infinitive,

noun,

339; ending, 237.1a; ^vl assign of, 243.2, 341; perfect inf., 240. 1(Z; use of inf. for participle in perfect and pluperfect, 240. Ic, 251.4a; inf. as noun, 340; inf. as subject of a verb, 342; as object, 343; subject-accusative of inf., 343.1.5a; active inf. in sense of passive, 343.1. 5c, (?, ni.l&; more special cases, 343. 1.6; inf. of purpose or design,

verbs, irregular verbs, list of, pp. 278-84; equivalent to Old or strong verbs, 236 2 Rem.l, 246.3. Italic languages, relationship of,

139, irr. conjugation of 249-60.

450.
iterative numerals,

206.

\,

pronunciation

of,

29,

\(x,

360a.
190.

|eb, jeber,

jebermann, 187.
jebmeb, icbmeber, 190.
leflUd),

343.III.1;
adjective,

dependent on 344; on noun, 345;

inf.

190.

jemanb, 186.
ien, jener,

on preposition, 346; in absolute construction, 347; inf. clauses, 348; with preposition, 346.2;
348.2, 319.2a-6; transposed verb with, 439.2, 444. 3&. inseparable prefixes, 297.2, 307;
place of

163, 165-6.

two

inf.

f,

infin. , place of

pronunciation correspondents !ein, 195.2.

of,
of,

30; English 460.

fbmten,

251, 254.

468
r, pronunciation of, 31. Latin language, relationship

INDEX.
neuter, see gender. or weak conjugation, characteristics and origin of, 236.1,

of,

New

450.
see alphabet. subdivision of Germanic languages, 451.1, 452.1. Luther's influence on German language, 467-8.
letters,

German,

Low-German

246.2,3; mles of, 247-60; irregular verbs of, 249-60. New High-German period and dialects, 463.3, 467-9; transition

from Middle

to,

466.

New
m, pronunciation man, 185. man&i, 191.
of,

31.

orthography, 5. XIQ, pronunciation of, 45; English correspondent of, 460.

5. 2b. nid}t, position in sentence, 319.2/. nic^t^, 188; form of adjective

Nibelungenhed,

46

masculine, see gender. measure, use of singular instead of plural in expressing, 211.2; noun of measured substance not in genitive, 216.5a; accusative of measure, 230.1. tnetir, 192.2. Meistersanger, works of, 465.2c.

with, 129.5. niemanb, 186. nominative case,

uses

of,

59.1,

Middle High-German period, dialects, Uterature, 463.2, 465;

transition to

New, 466.
of,

212-4. normal or regular order of sentence, 319, 430, 441-2. noun, declension of, 68-73; first declension, 74-90; second declension, 91-5; irregular declenforeign nouns, proper names, 102-8; modifjdng adjuncts of the noun,
sion,

Minnesanger, works mi^, as prefix, 313.

465.2a.

96-100;

mixed conjugation, 272; declension of nouns, 97; of adjectives, 124. modal auxiliaries, 242.1, 251-9.
modes, 235.2-4. modified vowels, origin, 14, 400.1; pronunciation of, 15-7, 21.2; in declension of nouns, 69, 75, 78, 79.n., 81, 84, 85, 87, 88, 93.3 in comparison of adjectives, 136 ; in inflection of verb, 250.2, 251, 268.2,3, 269.n.l, 270.2a.
;

101;

109-12; equivalents
adjective used
infinitive,

of,

113;

as

noun, 129;

of adjective,
tive

340; noun as adjunct 145, 147.3; genidependent on a noun, 216;

dative do. 225 ; syntax of nouns, primitive see the several cases:

nouns,

407

derivative,

408

12; compound, 421-2. numbers, in declension, 58; rules

for use,
tion,

210-11; in conjuga-

ntogen,

251, 255.
after

235.3; rules for use, 322; of verb or adjective with ie,

Moeso-Gothic, see Gothic.

month, invariable

numeral

'you,' 153.4. numerals, 196-208;

designating day, 216.4d multiplicative numerals, 204.

miiffen,

251, 256.

cardinals; ordinals, 203; multipHcatives, 204; variatives, 205; iteratives, 206 ; dimidiatives,

197-202;

mutes, progression of, in Germanic languages, 453-6; correspondences of, in English and Ger-

207.1; fractional, 207.2; indefinite,

189-95.
;

man, 457-60.
Tt,

0,
b,

pronunciation of, 32. n=declension of nouns, 73; of ad-

pronunciation of, 1 1 o for 00 in new orthography, 11.1. pronunciation of, 16.

objective predicate,
16,

noun

as,

316.

132. nein, 360a.

jectives,

227.26,

36, c; adj. as,

116.1c,

.316.2c.

INDEy
Oe, see
B.

469

Old or strong conjugation, characteristics of,

246.1.3, 261-73; changes of radical vowel in, 262; classification of verbs of, 2637; rules of inflection of, 26871; conjugation of, 273.
period, dialects,

personal forms of the verb, 814a. personal pronouns, declension of, 151-2; use in address, 153; other rules respecting, 154; reflexive use,
of,

155

expletive dativo

156: possessive dative of, 161, 222.IIIi>; declension of

Old High-German
literature,

463.1, 464. omission, of auxiliary or copula in dependent clauses, 439.3; of certain endings of adjective declension,

adjective after, 125.2; place of, 319.36; do. in inverted and transposed clauses, 431^, 439.
1, 443.56, 444.3a. persons of verb, 235.3,4; endings of, 237.2,3,5; rules respecting

126;

of

subject of

impersonal verb, 293. optative or imperative sentence, 427; its arrangement, 432.2, 443.4. optative use of subjunctive, 331. ordinal numerals, 203; their derivatives,

use,

321.

persons, declension of

names 4

104-8.
pronunciation o^ 46.1; origin, 459.4. pi), pronunciation of, 46.2.
pf,

207;

ordinal adverbs,

pluperfect

tense,

207.3.
p,

327; omission
439.3.
of, of,

240. 16, c; use, of auxiliary o^

pronunciation correspondents
6,

33; English
459.2.

plural, its

participles, verbal adjectives,

235. 349; forms, 237.6,7, 243.3; use as adjectives, 131, 148; as adverbs, 356; comparison of, 355; participial clauses, 3578: present part., form, 237.6; use and office, 350, 353, 3558: past part., form, 237.7, 246, 271; use of ge as sign of, 243.3; value and office, 351,

ending determines class under first declension of nouns, 69; irregular formation of, in nouns, 97.2, 99, 100, 101. 3-5; singular used for, in expres-

sions of measure, 211.2. positive degree of adjectives, 134, dative, 222.nia,&, possessive

225.1.
possessive pronouns or pronominal adjectives, 157-8; declension, 159; used as nouns, 160; definite article or poss. dative used for, 161; old style expressions and abbreviations for, 162; used instead of genitive of
potential

854-8; certain special uses, 359; adjectives in form of past 351.3: future passive part., part,, 278, 352. parts of speech, enumeration and
classification of, 56. passive voice, 233.3,

pronoun, 158.2, 216.3. subjunctiye^ use of

274;

its

forms,
ticiple.

275-7

future pass, par-

332.3. predicate of a sentence, 426.2,

278, 352; pass, from what verbs, 279; cases used with, 280; infrequency of
distinction of pass. ; participle with fein, 282; pass, use of active ini&nitive, 343.I.5c,d,III.16. perfect tense, 240.1a, c; use, 326;
its use,

formed

428.2.
predicate adjective, 116.1, 316.2; its form in superlative, 140.26. predicate noun, 213, 316.1; verb in plural to agree with, 822.3. prefixes, origin of, 395. prefixes of verbs: separable, 297. 298; inseparable, 297.2, 1, 302, 307; separable or inseparable, 297.3, 808-9. prepositions, 371; classification.

281

from past

omission of auxihary of, 439.3, Persian languages, relationship o^

45Q.

470

INDEX.

372; prep, followed by genitive, 218, 373; by dative, 224, 374; by accusative, 228.1, 375; by dative or accusative, 224.2, 228.2, 376; by infinitive, 346. 1 by infinitive clause, 346.2; by substantive clause, 377, 436. 3c?; by adverbs,
;

283; conjugation of, 284-5 from what verbs formed, 286-7; from intransitives,288; cases used with, 289; with reflexive object in dative, 290; with genitive object, 219.3. regular order of sentence, see norreflexive verb. 233.2a,
;

378

taking adverb as comple-

mal

order.

ment,

379

combination

of

regular verbs, 246.3.

relative

prep, with definite article, 65. prepositional phrase, 380; as adjunct of noun, 112; of adjective, 146; of verb, 318.

present tense, 235.1, 268; use, 324; in sense of our preterit, 324.2; of perfect, 324.3; of future, 324.4. preterit tense, 235.1, 269; its origin, 246.3; use 325; in sense of our pluperfect, 325.2; of perfect, 325.3. primitive words, 402; verbs, 403; nouns, 407; adjectives, 413;
adverbs, 367. principal parts of verb, 237. 1. progression of mutes in Germanic languages, 453-60. pronouns, substantive and adjec-

pronouns, 177-83; comrel., 179.1-3; indefinite, 179.4; compound relative used for our simple, 179.5; agreement of verb with rel., 181, 321.2. root of verb, 237. la roots of language, 3936, 398. rotetion of mutes, 453.

pound

j,

pronunciation of, 36; English correspondents of, 458.3; use of long or short (f or g) in writing or printing, 3.1. Sanskrit language, relationship of,

450.
Scandinavian languages, relationship of, 451.3. f A, pronunciation of, 48 @e., 162. second or weak declension of nouns, 70, 73, 91-5; of adjectives, 119-28, 132. of, 239.2,46; fein, conjugation use as auxiliary, 240-1; origin of use, 240.46.
fetber,
felbft,

149; classification, 150; personal pron., 151-6; reflexive, 155; possessive, 15762; demonstrative, 163-71; determinative, 167-71; interrogative, 172-6; relative, 17783; indefinite, 184-95. pronunciation, 6-55.
tive use of,

added to

reflexives,

proper

names,

declension

of,

155.5, 169.3.

102 8. protasis, 332.1.

q,

pronunciation

of,

34, 39.
sen-

and constitu426, 428; kinds, 427; arrangement, 429-46. separable prefixes, 297-8; consentence, definition
ents,

qu, pronunciation of, 47. question, see interrogative tence.

r,

jugation of

299-301;
1,

verbs with such, place of prefix, 299. 319.2c,d; denominative verbs

formed with, 405. in. 2.

pronunciation
155.4.
of,

35.

reciprocal use of reflexive pronoun,

redundant declension, 99. reflexive use of personal pronouns, 155; reflexive pronoun, 155.3;
reciprocal reflexive, 155.4.

fid), 155.3. simple predicate adjective, 116. la, 316.2a. Slavic or Slavonic languages, re-

fo,

lationship of, 450. as relative pronoTin,

182.1;

with atg omitted

after,

438. 3d, e.

INDEX.
\o\d),

471

170.

foUen,
[[/

251, 257.
of,

transposed

2>x 162.

% pronunciation and use 49; English correspondents

458.3. romanized as
ss,

of,

transitive verb, 233.1, 227.1a,6. order of dependent clauses, 434, 441, 444; limited to clauses grammatically dependent, 439.6; of interrogative and exclamatory clauses, 439.4.

^,

2.2; for

in

^,

pronunciation
pronunciation pronunciation
ii.

of,

51.
12. 17.

new

orthography, 49.1.
u,
first
of,

stems, 3936. strong declension, see strong declension. strong conjugation, see strong conjugation. subject of a sentence,

or

ii,

of,

Ue, see

old

or

pronunciation Umlaut, 400.1.

ui,
t),

of,

22.

426.2, 428.1. subjunctive mood, 235.2; nature

use, 329-30; optative subj., 331; conditional and potential, 332 of indirect state-

pronunciation

of,

38.

and

variation of radical vowel in Old conjugation, 400.2, 262-7. variative numerals, 205. ber=, derivation and use of, 307.6,

ment,

333

other less frequent

405. m. Id
office of,

uses, 332.5. subordinate clause, see dependent.

verb, essential characteristic

substantive, see noun.

substantive dependent 113.3, 436, 444.

suffixes,

clause,
of,

and 232, 314; classificasimple forms of, tion, 233; 235-7; principal parts, 237.1;

compound
auxiliaries,

forms,
of tense,

238-41

origin
;

and

relation
of,

394-5

formation

418c.

superlative degree,

of

adjective,

134-42; declension of, 140-1,2; predicate form, 140. 2&; adverbial form, 140.2c, 363.2; sup. absolute and relative, 142. 1 do. in adverbs, 363.2c; sup. intensified by aUer, 142.3.
;

239; of mood, 242.1, 251-9; other, 242.2,3; Old and New conjugations, 245-73; passive voice, 274-82; reflexive verbs, 28390; impersonal, 291-5; compound,

296-313, 420:-

ad-

juncts of

t,

pronunciation of, 37; English correspondent of, 458.2; t for hi in new orthography, 25.1; t
fortt), 37.3.

tenses, simple,

235.1; compound,
of,

verb, 315-8; their order, 319; object, 315; predicate noun or adjective, 316; adverb, 317; prepositional phrase, 318; genitive case with verbs, 219-20; dative, 222, 225.1; accusative, 227, 230: primitive verbs, 403; derivative,

240-1;

use

indicative,

404-6.
\)id,

324

8.

192.

Teutonic languages, see Germanic. of, t^, pronunciation 37, 50; English correspondent of, 458. 2; ^ of tt) omitted in new orthography, 37.3. themes, 3936.
t^un, as auxiliary, 242.3. time, accusative of, 230.2; genitive of, 220.1.
titles,

vocative, nominative in sense of,

214.
voices, active and passive, boll, as prefix, 313.

233.3.

vowels, pronunciation of, 7-22; quantity, 7; modified vowels,

14-7.
rt),

declension

of,

108; plural

tt)a,

pronunciation of, 39. 129.5, 172-3, 176, 179;

fiir^

verb used with, 322.4,

tpq?

175, 177, 179,

472
weak declension, see second weak declension. weak conjugation, see New weak conjugation.
toeld),

INDEX.
or or
troductory-explanations,

393-7;

172, 174, 176-9. 192. Wer, 172-3, 176, 179.

toenig,

principles, 398-402; means of derivation, 399-400; rules of derivation, 403-17. written character, German, 2.1,

pp. 275-77.

Werben, conjugation of, 239.3,4c; as auxiliary of future and contenses, ditional 240.2,4; of passive voice, 275-7.
ttJiffen,

JT,

pronunciation

of,

40.

h,

pronunciation and use oL 13,

19.3, 41.

260.

wo

or wov,

combined with prepo42; English 458.3. 2er=, derivation and use of, 307. f. 405.ni.le.
2,

sitions,

in interrogative sense, 173.2; in relative sense, 180.

pronunciation correspondents

of,

of,

251, 258. word-combination or composition,

njoHen,

418-25.
word-formation or deri/ation, in-

JU, as sign of infinitive, gnjeen, jtro, 199.

341.

GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS
PUBLISHED BY

HENRY HOLT &

Blackwell's

CO.,

New
J.
S.

York.

These hooks are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated.

Grammars and Exercise Books.

German
Prefixes

and

Suffixes.

By

Blackwell,

16mo. 137 pp. Huss's Conversation in German. By H. C. O. Huss, Professor of Modern Languages in Princeton College. 12mo. 230 pp. For young pupils. By Bmil Joynes-Otto First Book in German. Otto. Revised by Edward S. Joynes, Professor in the South Carolina College. 12mo. 116 pp. Boards. Joynes-Otto Introductory German Lessons, The. New edition, with By Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 252 pp. full vocabularies. By Jean Gustave Keetels. Keetels's Oral Method with German. 12mo. 371 pp. By Charles P. Otis. 16mo. 832 pp. Otis's Elementary German.
Professor in the University of Missouri.

In German type; II. In when specially ordered. By Dr. Emil Otto. New Otto's German Conversation Grammar. edition, revised, and in part re-written, by Wm. Cook. 12mo.
hook:
I.

^^ There are two editions of this Roman type, which edition will only
Half roan.
Otto's

he sent

591 pp.

Elementary German Grammar. With a vocabulary by George MoRiTZ Wahl. 12mo. 315 pp. By Dr. Emil Otto. Otto's Translating English into German. Edited by Prof. Rhodes Massie and Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 167 pp. Spanhoofd's Deutsche Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, teacher in 16mo. 187 pp. St. Paul's School, N. H. Wenckebach und Schrakamp's Deutsche Grammatik fiir Amerikaner. * By Carla Wenckebach, Professor in Wellesley College, and Josepha Schrakamp. 12mo. 291 pp. Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By Wm. D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 12nio. 472 pp. Half roan. Whitney's Brief German Grammar, based on the author's "Compendious German Grammar." By Wm. D. Whitney. 16mo. 143 pp. Whitney-Klemm German by Practice. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited by William D. Whitney. 12jno. 305 pp.

Game

Natural Method and Conversation Books. of German Conversation. By Mme. F. Jeff Tensler.

Heness's Der neue Leitfaden. Beim Unterricht in der deutschen Sprache. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 403 pp. Heness's Der Sprechlehrer unter seinen Schlllern. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 187 pp. Kaiser's Erstes Lehrbuch. By H. C. Kaiser, Ph.D. 12mo. 128 pp.
Pylodet's

German Conversations

By

L. Pylodbt.

ISmo.

^8 pp.

HENRY HOLT &=

Sprechen Sie Deutsch
Stern's Studien

CO.'S

GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS,
By A. N. Van Daell

Schrakamp und Van Daell's Das Dentsche Buch. and JosEPHA Schrakamp. 12mo. 144 pp.

18mo. 147 pp. Boards. 1 und Plaudereien. First Series. By Sigmon M. Stekn, Director of Stern's School of Languages. 12mo. 262 pp. Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. Second Series. By Sigmon M. Stern and Menco Stern. 12mo. 380 pp.

Anschauungs-Unterricht. By Carla and 12mo. 451 pp. Williams's German Conversation and Composition. By Alonzo Williams, A.M., Professor in Brown University. 12mo. 147 pp.
"Wenckebach's Deutscher

Helene Wenckebach.

Reading Books.
Fouque's TJndine. With introduction, notes, and vocabulary, by H.C. G. VON Jagemann, Professor in the Indiana University. 190 pp. Key's Fabeln fiir Kinder. Illustrated by Otto Speckter. With vocabulary. {In roman type.) 12mo. 52 pp. Boards.
Joynes-Otto Introductory German Reader. By Dr. Emil Otto. With notes and vocabulary by Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 282 pp. Klemm's lese- und Sprachbuecher. In sieben Kreisen. By Dr. L. R.

Klemm.
Klemm's Abriss der Geschichte der deutschen Literatur. Kreis VIII. 12mo. 385 pp. Meissner's Aus meiner Welt. Geschichten fur Grosse und Kleine. With vocabulary by Carla Wenckebach. 12mo. 127 pp. Selected and edited, with introduction, Otis's Grimm's Maerchen. 151 pp. notes, and vocabulary, by Charles P. Ottis. By Prof. E. P. Evans. 12mo. 239 pp. Otto's German Reader. Half roan.
Schrakamp's Erzaehlungen aus der deutschen Geschichte. Schrakamp. 12mo. 286 pp.
Simonson's German Ballad Book. Prepared 12mo. the Hartford (Ct.) High School.

By Josepha

by

Prof. L. Simonson, of

304 pp.

By G. Storme. 16mo. 356 pp. Storme's Easy German Reading. Wenckebach's deutsches Lesebuch. By Carla and Helene Wenckebach. 12rao. 316 pp. Wenckebach's Die schoensten deutschen Lieder. By Carla and Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 363 pp.

By William D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 12mo. 523 pp. Half roan. Whitney-Klemm Elementary German Reader. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 12mo. 237 pp.
Whitney's German Reader.

Dictionary.
Whitney's Compendious German Dictionary. (German-English and English-German.) By William D. Whitney. 8vo. 900 pp.
complete catalogue and price-list of Henry Holt iional publications will be sent on application.

Oo,'s educa-

HENRY HOLT &>

CO:S

GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS.

Whitney's German Texts.

Selected

and annotated under the general editorship Whitney. 16mo. Cloth.

of Professor

Wiixiam D.

Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. With an introduction^nd notes by Franklin Carter, President of Williams College. 113 pp. Faust. I. Theil. With an introduction and notes by William Cook, late Professor in Harvard University. 220 pp. Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. With an introduction and notes by W. D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 138 pp. Nathan der "Weise. With an introduction and notes by H. C. G, Brandt, Professor in Hamilton College. 158 pp. Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With an introduction and notes by A. SachtleBEN, Professor in the College of Charleston, S. C. 199 pp. Maria Stuart. With an introduction and notes by Edward S. Joynes, Professor in South Carohna College. 222 pp.

Seidensticker's
No.
53 pp.
I.

German
With >otes.

Scientific
12mo.
Paper.

Monographs.

Uber Goethe's Naturwissenschaftliche Arbeiten. Von H. Helmholtz.

Uber Bakterien,
55 pp.

No

II,

die Kleinsten lebenden

Wesen. Von Dr. Ferdinand

CoHN.

Student's Collection
Goethe's

of
12mo.

Classic
Paper.

German

Plays.

With notes by Calvin Thomas. 104 pp. Edited by Professor William Steften. 113 pp. Koerner's Zriny. With an introduction and notes by Edward R. Ruggles, Professor in Dartmouth College. 126 pp. Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With notes, 82 pp. With notes and a vocabulary by A. Schiller's Der Nefie als Onkel.

Hermann und Dorothea.

Egmont.

Clement.

99 pp.

Jungfrau Von Orleans. Edited by Rev. German in Harvard University. 203 pp.

A. B. Nichols, Instructor in

Wallenstein's Lager. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 60 pp. Die Piccolomini. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 139 pp. "Wallenstein's Tod. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 210 pp. Wallenstein, complete in one volume. Cloth.

College Series of
12mo.

German

Plays.
With

Paper.
;

Einer muss heiraten, by Wilhelmi

notes.
63 pp.
;

and Eigensinn, by Benedix.

Three German Comedies. I. Er ist nicht eifersuechtig, by Elz; IL Der Weiberfeind, by Benedix III. Ln Wartesalon erster Classe,
by Mueller.
With notes.
24 pp.

Der Bibliothekar. By Gustav von Moser. With

notes.

162 pp.

Die Journalisten. By Gustav Freytag. With notes. 178 pp. Zopf und Schwert. By Gutzkowt. With notes. 173 pp. Englisch. By Goerner. With notes by A. H. Edoren. 61 pp. Badekuren. By Putlitz. With notes. 69 pp. Das Hera vergessen. By Putlitz. With notes. 79 pp,
3

HENRY HOLT &>

CO:S

GERMAN

TEXT-BOOKS.

Stern's Selected

German Comedies.
12mo.

Selected and Edited by Professor S. M. Stern.

Paper,

Ein Knopf. By Julius Rosen. 41 pp. Der Schimmel. By G. von Moser. 55 pp. Sie hat ihr herz entdeckt. By; W. Mueller von Koenigswintbb. Simson und Belila. ByEMiLCLAAR. 55 pp. Er sucht einen Vetter. By Jungman. 49 pp. Er muss tanzen. By C. A.Paul. 51 pp. Gaenschen von Buchenau. By W. Friedrich. 59 pp.

79 pp.

German
Kinder-Comoedien. By

Plays for Children.

German

various authors. Edited and annotated in by Professor Th. Heness. Five plays in one volume 12mo. 141 pp.

UnterFialtungs Bibliotliek.
Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With

(12mo.

Paper.)

notes and vocabulary by Professor L. SiMONSON of the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 104 pp. Die Eisjungfrau u. andere Geschichten. With notes by E. C. F. Kbauss. 150 pp.

Auerbach's Auf "Wache; Koquette's Der gefrorene Kuss. The two

one volume.

in

With

notes.

126 pp.

Carove's Das Maerchen ohne Ende. With notes. 45 pp. Ebers' eine Frage. With introduction and notes. 117 pp. Eichendorff s Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. 132 pp. Pouqu6's Undine. With a glossary of the principal words and phrases. 137 pp. See also Jagetiiann's edition under Reading Books. Sintram und seine Gefaehrten. 114 pp. Grimm's Die Venus vor Milo ; Kafael und Michel- Angelo. ' 139 pp. Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmaerclien. With notes. 228 pp. See also Otis's edition under Reading Books. Hauflfs Das kalte if erz. 61 pp. Heine's Die Harzreise. With introduction and notes. 97 pp. Heyse's Anfaung und Ende. 54 pp. Die Einsamen. 44 pp. Hillern's Hoeher als die Kirche. With notes and vocabulary. 46 pp. Muegge's Biukan Voss. 55 pp. Signa die Seterin. 71 pp. Mueller's Deutsche Liebe. With English notes. 121 pp. Nathusius' Tagebuch eines armen Praeuleins. 163 pp. Ploennies' Princessin Use. With notes by J. M. Merrick. 45 pp. Putlitz's "Was sich der wald erzaehlt. 62 pp. Vergissmeinnicht. With English notes. 44 pp. Biehl's Der Much der Schoenheit. With introduction and notes by
Francis L. Kendall.
Schiller's
77 pp.

Das Lied von der Glocke. With introduction and notes by Charles P. Otis, Ph.D. 70 pp. Storm's Immensee. With notes. 34 pp. Tieck's Die Elfen ; Das Kothkaeppchen. With notes by Professor L.
SiMONSON.
41 pp.

Vilmar and Richter's German Epic Tales. Told in prose. Die Nibelungen, von A. F. C. Vilmar. "Walther und Hildegund, von AuBERT RTCHTER. 100 pp 4

FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS
PUBLISHED BY

HENRY HOLT &

CO.,

New

York.

These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated^

Grammars and Exercise Books.

Borel's Grammaire Frangaise. A I'usage des Anglais. Par Eugene Borel. Revised by E. B. Coe, \imo. 450 pp. Half roan. Delille's Condensed French. Instruction. By C. J. Delillk. 18mo. 143 pp. Eugdne's Student's Comparative French Grrammar. To which are Kevised by L. H. Buckingham, Ph.D. a<Wed Fi-ench- English Exercises.
12mo.
284 pp.

Eugene's Elementary French Lessons.

Revised and edited by L. H. Buckingham, Ph.D. 12mo, 126 pp. English into French. By Professors Gasc, L. Translator. Gasc's The Brun, and others. 12mo. 220 pp. Gibert's French Manual. A French Pronouncing Grammar for Young
Students.

By M. Gibert,

12mo.

112 pp.

Julien's Petites Legons de Conversation et de Grammaire. By F. Julien. Square 12ino. 222 pp. Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdinand Bocher, Professor of Modern Languages in Harvard University. 12mo. 489 pp. Half
roan.

Pylodet's Beginning French.

Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and

Translatitig. By L. Pylodet. 16mo. 180 pp. Boards. Sadler's Translating English into French. By P. Sadler. Revised and annotated by Prof. C. F. Gillette. 12mo. 285 pp. The Joynes-Otto Introductory French. Lessons. By Edward S. Joynes, Professor in University of South Carolina. 12nio. 275 pp. The Joynes-Otto First Book in French. By Edward S. Joynes. 12mo.
116 pp.

Boards.

WTiitney's French
University.

Grammar. By William
442 pp.

D.

Whitney, Professor

in

Yale

12mo.

Half roan.

Whitney's Practical French. Taken from

the author's larger Grammar, and supplemented by conversations and idiomatic phrases. By Professor W, D. Whitney. Whitney's Brief French Grammar. Systematically arranged, with exer^ cises. By William D. Whitney. 16mo. 177 pp.

Natural Method and Conversation Books.

AUiot's Contes et Nouvelles. Suivis de Conversations,d'Exercices de Grammaire. Par Madame L. Alliot. 12mo. Aubert's Colloquial French Drill. By E. Aubkrt, Professor in the Normal College, New York City. Part I. l6rao. 66 pp. Part H. 118 pp. Le Jeu des Auteurs. 96 Cards in a Box. Moutonnler's Les Premiers Pas dans I'Etud e du Frangais par la m6thode natiirelle. Par C. Moutonnier. 12mo. 197 pp. Illustrated. Pour Apprendre a Parler FranQais. 12mo. 191 pp. Parlez-vous Frangais ? A pocket manual of French and English Conversation, with hints for pronunciation and a list of the irregular verbs. l8mo.
111pp.
Boards.
I

HENR Y HOL T 6Riodu.

1-^mo.

CO. \S

FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS.
in

Biodu's Lucie. Familiar Conversations

1J8 pp.

French and English.

By Mme. A.

Witccmb &
ISmo.

Stern & M6ras' fetude Progressive de la Langue Francaise. By Sigmon M. Stern and Bapi^iste Meras. K'lno. 288 pp. Bellenger's French Conversation. Dialogues on Familiar bubjects, to which is annexed tlie Summary of French Grammar, by Deullk.
259 pp.

Reading Books.
^sop's Fables in French. With vocabulary. 16mo. 237 pp. Alliot's Les Auteurs Contemporains. Extraits choisis d'oeuvres diverses, avee Notices Biographiqiies et Motes. By Mme. L. Alliot. 12mo. 371pp.
Aubert's Litt^rature Frangaise. Premiere Annee. By
338 pp.

E. Aubkrt.

16mo

Progressive French Beader. With notes and vocabulary by F. BocHER, Professor in Harvard Univer>ity. 12mo. 291 pp. Half roan. Fisher's Easy French Beading. Historical tales and anecdotes, arranged
s

Bocher

with foot-notes, contaiuing

irans^latioiis of

Fleury's L'Histoire de France.

Fleury.
16mo.
372 pp.

Racontee a

the principal words. 16mo. 253 pp. la Jeunesse. Par M. Lam^

De Janon's Becueil de

I'usage de la Jeunesse Am^ricaine. Far pp. Joynes-Otto Introductory French Beader, The. Edited, with notes and vocabulary, by Edwaro S. Joynes, 12mo. \m pp.
18t)

Po6sies. Mlle. Camille de Janon. 16mio.

Julien's Practical and Conversational Beader in French and English. By F. JuLiEN. Square 12mo. 18..' pp. Lacombe's Petite Histoire du Peuple Frangais. By Paul Lacombe. With Grammatical and Explanatory Notes by Jules Bufi. 12mo. 212 pp. La Fontaine's Fables Choisies. Edited, with notes, by Leon Delbos. 12mo.
119 pp.

Boards.

Pylodet's Beginner French Beader.

ranged by L. Pylodet16nio.
::'35

With a complete vocabulary. ArBoards.

pp.

Pylodet's Second French Beader. With a complete French-English vocabulary. Compiled by L. Pylodet. Illustrated. 12mo. 277 pp. Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Classique. Tir6es des Matinees Lifct6raires d' Edouard Mennechet. 12mo. 393 pp. Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Contemporaine. Recueil en prose
et en vers.

12mo.

310 pp.

Pylodet's Gouttes de Bos6e.

l8mo.
Ilkistre.

Petit Tr6sor poetique des

Jeunes Personnes.

188 pp.

Pylodet's

La Mdre I'Oie.
8vo.

Poesies, 6nigmes, chansons et'rondes enfantines.

80 pp.

Whitney's Short French Reader. With

Whitney.
16mo.

notes and vocabulary.

By W. D.

Dictionaries.
Bellow's French and English Dictionary for the Pocket. 32mo. 600 pp. The same. Larger print. 12nio. 600 pp. Half roan. Gases K"ew Dictionary of the French and English Languages. By Ferdinand E. A. Gasc. 8vo. French-English part, 600 pp. English-French part, 586 pp. One volume. Gasc's Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary. By F. A. E. Gasc. 18mo. French-English part, 201 pp. English-French part, 387 pp. One volume.

A descriptive catalogue, with prices, of Henry Holtd: Co.^s educational publU cations will be sent on application.

HENR V HOL T &=

The
first six

CO:s

FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS.

Students' Collection of Classic French Plays.

with
full

uotes by Prof. E. S. Joynes. The last three with notes by Leon Delbos, M.A. 12mo, Paper.

Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Par Moliere. Horace. Par Corneillk. 78 pp.

Les Plaideurs. Par Racine.
The foregoing
80 pp.
in 3 vols., three plays in each, in the

Le Cid. Par CoRNEiLLE. 110 pp. Athalie. Far Racine. 117 pp. liB Misanthrope. Par Moliere. L'Avare. Par Moliere. 132 pp. Esther. Par Racine. 66 pp. Cinna. Par Corneili.e. 87 pp.

130 pp.

140 pp.

above order.

12mo.

Cloth.

Ronnantic French Drama. (12mo. Flexible covers.) Buy Bias. By Victor Hugo. With notes by Rena A. Michaels. 117 pp.

College Series of Modern French Plays.

With Euglish notes by
Prof.

Ferdinand Bocher.

12mo.

Paper.

Jean Baudry. Par Augusts Vacquerie. 7:2 pp. Les Petits Oiseaux. Par Labiche et Delacour. Mademoiselle de la SeigliSre. Par J. Sandeau. Le Bom-an d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par Les Doigts de F6e. Par E. Scribe. HI pp.
Above
in 2 vols.

La Joie Fait Peur. Par Mme. de Girardin. 46 pp. La Bataille de Dames. Par Scribe et Legouve. 81 pp. La Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 72 pp. La Poudre aux Yeux. Par Labiche et Martin, 59 pp.
70 pp. 99 pp. O. Feuillbt.

100 pp.

Cloth.

Vol

I.

containing the

first five,

Vol.

II.

the last four.

Modern French Comedies.

Le Village. Par O. Feuillet. 34 pp. La Cagnotte. Par MM. Eugene Labiche
et A.

(12mo.

Paper.)
83 pp.

Les Pemmes qui Pleurent. Par MM. Siraudin et Lambert Thiboust. 28 pp. Les Petites Mis6res de la Vie Humaine. Par M. Clairville. 35 pp. Le Niaise de Saint Flour. Par Bayard et Lemoine. 38 pp.

Delacour.

Un

Caprice. Par Alfred de Musset. Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Leclerq. 68 pp. With vocabulary. Valerie. Par Scribe. 39 pp. With vocabulary. Le Collier de Perles. Par Mazeres. 56 pp. With vocabulary.

Selected French Comedies.

Original text, with a close English veision on opposite pages. En Wagon. ComMie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 44 pp. C'6tait Gertrude. Comedie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12rao. 54 pp.

French Plays for Children. (12mo. Paper.) La Petite Maman, par Mme. de M. Le Bracelet, par Mme, de Gaule. 38 pp. La Vieille CousinCj par E. Souvestre; Les Bicochets. 52 pp. Le Testament de Madame Patural, par E. Souvestre; La Demoiselle de St. Cyr, par Drohoyowska. 54 pp. La Lotene de Francfort, par E. Souvestre. La Jeune Savante,
;

par

Mme. Curo.

47 pp.

French Plays for

Girls.

(l2mo.

Paper.)

Trois Comedies pour Jeunes Filles: I. Les Cuisinieres; II. Le Petit Tom; III. La Malade Imaginaire. Par Lemercieb de Nkuville. 134 pp.
3

HENRY HOLT &>

CO:S

FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS,
Paper or Cloth.

Bibliotheque d'Instruction et de Recreation.

12mo volumes.
DE Maistrb.
Cloth.
144 pp.

Achard's Clos-Pommier, et Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Par Xavibr

Achard*s Clos-Pommier. Paper. 106 pp. B6dolli6re's M6re Michel. With vocabulary.

Cloth.

138 pp.

The same. Paper. Biographies des Musiciens C616bres. Cloth. 871 pp. The same. Paper. Carraud et Segur's Contes (Les Petites Filles Modules, par Mme. de Skgur, et Les Gouters de la Grand'mere, par Mme. Z. Carraud). With a list of
difficult phrases.

Cloth.
95 pp.

193 pp.
list

Carraud's Les Gouters de la Grand*m6re. With a

phrases.
300 pp.

of

difficult

Paper.

Choix de Contes Contemporains. With notes. By B.

The same. Paper.

F.

O'Connor. Cloth.

Erckmann-Chatrian's Conscrit de 1813.

BocHER.
Cloth.

With

notes.

By

Prof. F.

236 pp.

The same. Paper. Le Blocus. With notes. By Prof. F. Bocher. Cloth. 258 pp. The same. Paper. Madame Th6r6se. With notes. By Prof. F. B6cher. Cloth The same. Paper. Pallet's Princes de I'Art. Cloth. 834 pp. The same. Paper.
Feuillet's Koman d*un Jeune Pauvre. Cloth The same. Paper. P6val's ' Chouans et Bleus.' With notes. Cloth. 188 pp. The same. Paper.

216 pp.

Homme

204 pp.

Poa's Contes Biographiques. With vocabulary. Cloth. 189 pp. The same. Paper, Petit Bobinson de Paris. With vocabulary. Cloth. 166 pp. The same. Paper. Mac6*s Bouch6e de Pain. (L'Homme.) With vocabulary. Cloth. The same. Paper. De Maistre's Voyage Autour de ma Chambre. Paper. 117 pp. Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Paper. 38 pp.

260 pp.

Merim6e's Columba.

Cloth.

179 pp.

The same. Paper. Porchat's Trois Mois sous la Neige. Cloth. 160 pp. The same. Paper. Pressens6's Rosa. With vocabulary. By L. Pylodbt. Cloth. 286. The same. Paper. Saint-Germain's Pour une Epingle. With vocabulary. Cloth. 174 pp. The same. Paper. Sand's Petite Fadette. Cloth. 205 pp. The same. Paper. S6gur et Carraud's Contes. (Petites Filles Modules; Les GoMers de la
Grand'mere.)
Cloth.
193 pp.

S6gur's Les Petites Filles Modules. Paper. 98 pp. Souvestre's Philosophe sous les Toits. Cloth. 137 pp. The same. Paper.

Jjl <Z^JLf

--^

=A-.t..J<3

'

^f

itJlv.t>-v-^^t.Xe>

i-<>Xv/v>C'Q^-^-^o

^r^\